JP7108112B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines are well known.

In Patent Document 1, the lens member is moved from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate to a position outside at least one edge of the substrate and beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate. The lens member is formed of a reflecting member that extends and is capable of reflecting light, and is positioned outside at least one end of the substrate and beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate. A game machine is disclosed in which a base member is provided at a position capable of reflecting light emitted from an end portion.

JP 2019-107322 A

According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to suppress unevenness in the illumination through the lens member and enhance interest.

However, the game machine has a limited space for arranging light emitting means and the like. Even under such circumstances, it is desired to provide a game machine capable of performing a light emitting effect for further increasing interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine equipped with a predetermined decoration device (for example, a first performance accessory 59E) capable of executing an effect that is visible to the player,
The predetermined decoration device is
A substrate (e.g., LED substrate 5922E) on which light emitting means (e.g., front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E, back side LED 5929E) is arranged;
The light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, the front side first LED 5927E, the front side second LED 5928E, the back side LED 5929E) can be entered, and the entered light is advanced in a predetermined direction (for example, forward), so that the player can see it. A lens part (for example, the first lens 5925E, the second lens a flat plate portion 59211E of 5921E, a standing portion 59212E of the second lens 5921E, and a third lens 5926E);
The light emitting means has a first light emitting means (e.g., front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E) and a second light emitting means (e.g., back side LED 5929E) different from the first light emitting means,
The substrate (e.g., LED substrate 5922E) has a first light emitting means (e.g., front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E) arranged on a first surface (e.g., front side surface), and a second surface (e.g., The second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) is arranged on the back side surface),
The lens part is
The light emitted from the first light emitting means (for example, the front side first LED 5927E, the front side second LED 5928E) is caused to advance in the predetermined direction (for example, forward), and the player can visually recognize the first effect section (for example, the first a first lens unit (for example, a first lens 5925E and a third lens 5926E) capable of causing the light emitting unit 59251E and the second light emitting unit 59252E to emit light;
Said second light emitting means (for example, back side LED 5929E) arranged on the second surface (for example, rear side surface) which is a different surface from the first light emitting means (for example, front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E) The light emitted from advances in a direction (e.g., forward) that is substantially the same as the predetermined direction (e.g., forward), and is visible to the player (e.g., the front side of the standing portion 59212E) a second lens portion (for example, a standing portion 59212E) capable of emitting light from the end surface 59216E of the
A third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E) that causes the light emitted from the second light emitting means (e.g., back side LED 5929E) to travel in a specific direction (e.g., sideways) different from the predetermined direction (e.g., forward) ), and
The second lens portion (for example, standing portion 59212E)
The light traveling in the specific direction (e.g., sideways) by the third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E) can travel in the predetermined direction (e.g., forward),
The second lens portion (e.g., standing portion 59212E) and the third lens portion (e.g., flat portion 59211E) are connected so as to be substantially perpendicular to each other, and the second lens portion (e.g., standing portion 59212E) and the third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E) are connected to each other (e.g., the corner portion of the second lens 5921E), the light traveling in the specific direction (e.g., sideways) is directed to the Having an inclined portion (e.g., inclined portion 59213E) that can be advanced in a predetermined direction (e.g., forward),
It is characterized by
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances interest even though the space in which the light emitting means can be arranged is limited.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of increasing interest.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is viewed from the front and right obliquely upward. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, (B) An example of a table showing a way of thinking regarding determination of a decorative symbol stop mode in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter update processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of ceiling counter update processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving setting processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the normal game state of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of losing) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process of changing a big hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern in the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the time-saving per-system look-ahead performance form changes. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern in the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win-type look-ahead effect form to a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal that is output to the outside according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (Part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a read-ahead performance pattern in the fourth pachinko game machine, showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-read-ahead performance form to a big win-type read-ahead performance form, and then a big win-type ready-to-win is performed. It is an image showing that the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation in the fourth pachinko game machine has developed into a big win system ready-to-win. It is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern in a fourth pachinko game machine, showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common winning look-ahead effect form to a time-saving winning-type look-ahead effect form, and then a time-saving winning type effect is performed. . It is the image which shows that the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern corresponding to the said fluctuation|variation in the 4th pachinko game machine developed into the time-saving hit system production|presentation. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern in the fourth pachinko game machine, showing a mode in which an image of a hatching egg is displayed substantially in the center of the display area. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the transition of the production mode. (b) is a table summarizing transition conditions of the production mode. It is a flow chart showing the lottery process of the first production stage announcement content in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first notice effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first notice effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 2nd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 2nd notice production in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 2nd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine, and the variation pattern of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 3rd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 3rd notice production in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 3rd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine, and the variation pattern of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 4th notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth notice effect in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 4th notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine, and the variation pattern of a decorative design. It is a figure which shows the effect content of the notice after an icon stop in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stop and the variation pattern of a decorative design in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after an icon stop and the variation pattern of a decorative design in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 1st notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 1st notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 1st notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 2nd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 2nd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 2nd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 3rd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 3rd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 3rd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 3rd notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 4th notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 4th notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the 4th notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the notice after an icon stop in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the notice after an icon stop in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the icon in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative design in the 1st production stage of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative design in the 2nd production|presentation stage of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative design in the 3rd production|presentation stage of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 6th notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth notice effect in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 6th notice production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine, and the variation pattern of a decorative design. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh advance notice effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh advance notice effect. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of a stage change announcement effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a stage change announcement effect. (c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs. It is a diagram for explaining the stage change section holding ball in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram for explaining the stage change section holding ball in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram for explaining the stage change section holding ball in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing the processing at the time of winning the first start opening in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing stage change section determination processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the presence or absence of stage change occurrence determination processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing stage count processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing stage change generation lottery processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern selection table in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the second effect stage. (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the third production stage. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth notice effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth notice effect. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo lamp announcement effect. (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of a logo lamp forewarning effect. (c) is a diagram showing a time chart of the logo lamp forewarning effect. It is a flowchart which shows the content lottery process of the 1st production stage logo lamp notice in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the logo lamp notice content lottery for pseudo 3 in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the logo lamp notice content lottery for pseudo 2 in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the logo lamp notice content lottery for pseudo 1 in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the content lottery process of the 2nd production stage logo lamp notice in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd production|presentation stage logo lamp notice content lottery process in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the logo lamp notice content lottery for pseudo 2 in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the logo lamp notice content lottery for pseudo 1 in the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in probability variable mode of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a drum fluctuation effect determination process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a process at the start of the drum fluctuation effect in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, it is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the currently performed normal symbol variation and the reserved ball. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the drum fluctuation|variation production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the drum fluctuation|variation production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the drum fluctuation|variation production|presentation in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing an example of normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestive effect in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing an example of normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestive effect in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a process at the time of a big hit in the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the process at the end of the second bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing at the end of the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing a prize ball number counter addition process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a result display process during the bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing processing during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (I) during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (II) during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing processing (III) during the first bonus mode in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing remaining ST number adjustment processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing remaining ST number update processing for display in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing normal figure foreseeing effect processing in probability variation mode in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a special figure foreseeing production process during probability variation mode in the fifth pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. (b) is a diagram showing a pattern of an icon stop suggestion advance notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing the holding change effect lottery process in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the production|presentation block in the 6th specific super reach of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a sixth specific super reach content lottery process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. (a) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo effect preliminary announcement production|presentation for 1st production|presentation stages in a 5th pachinko game machine. (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the second production stage logo effect announcement production in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the logo effect preliminary announcement production|presentation for 2nd production|presentation stages in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the logo effect preliminary announcement production|presentation for 2nd production|presentation stages in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the concrete aspect of the logo effect preliminary announcement production|presentation for 2nd production|presentation stages in a 5th pachinko game machine. In the fifth pachinko game machine, a time chart showing the production control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time saving game state, (A) A time chart showing an example of the production control performed in the first normal pattern, (B) is a time chart showing an example of effect control performed in the second normal pattern. In the fifth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the display effect of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area of the display device. In the fifth pachinko game machine, a time chart showing production control in an irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving game state, (A) Time showing an example of production control performed in the first irregular pattern chart, (B) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the second irregular pattern, and (C) a time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the third irregular pattern. It is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of an external perspective view when the game ball distribution device provided in the sixth pachinko game machine is viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view when the game ball distribution device provided in the sixth pachinko game machine is viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of an external perspective view when the game ball distribution device provided in the sixth pachinko game machine is viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of an external perspective view of the base member, the rotation distribution mechanism, the crew, and the guide member of the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko game machine when viewed from the rear. It is an example of an exploded perspective view when the guide member and the pressing member of the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko game machine are seen from the front diagonally upper left. It is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are distributed to the second path in the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a diagram showing the flow of game balls distributed to the second path, the third path and the fourth path in the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are distributed to the first path in the game ball distribution device of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter update processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counter determination process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving setting process in a 6th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving normal figure determination processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving normal diagram management processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving normal figure counter update processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving normal figure counter determination processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing an example of the game mode transition in the sixth pachinko game machine. In the sixth pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of various probabilities for each game mode except for the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the A time saving end condition determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the flag processing at the time of opening the accessory in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, a time chart showing an example of the transition of the game state when a big win or a prize release hit is drawn to the special symbol display unit, (A) a prize release in the A2 time-saving gaming state; A time chart showing the transition of the game state when a hit is derived, (B) A time chart showing the transition of the game state when a free prize is derived in the A1 time-saving game state. It is a table showing an example of the relationship between the production mode and the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the production mode in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition of the production mode in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the A time saving end condition determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the transition of the game state controlled according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, (A) time chart showing an example when the time reduction limit function is activated, (B) the number of limits is reset, and (C) is a time chart showing an example of a case where the chance of resetting the limit is missed. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols referred to in the variation pattern selection state 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols referred to in variation pattern selection state 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols referred to in variation pattern selection state 3 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of variation pattern selection state transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the normal game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the A time-saving game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the B time-saving game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the C1 time-saving game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the C2 time saving game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the C3 time saving game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the C4 time saving game state of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table A referred to in the normal game state or the A time-saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table B-1 referred to in the B time saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table B-2 referred to in the B time saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table B-3 referred to in the B time saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table C-1 referred to in the C2 time saving game state or the C3 time saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table C-2 referred to in the C2 time saving game state or the C3 time saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table C-3 referred to in the C1 time-saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table C-4 referred to in the C1 time-saving game state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table D-1 referred to in the high certainty gaming state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, it is an example of the variation pattern table D-2 referred to in the high certainty gaming state. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, it is a table showing an example of selection conditions of the variation pattern table. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal symbol determination table of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal per symbol type determination table of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process in 1st Example of the 8th pachinko game machine. In the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is a flow chart showing an example of time saving setting processing. It is an example of a time chart showing the flow of a game in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the normal game state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the A time-saving game state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the B time-saving game state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the C3 time saving game state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the C4 time-saving game state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the C5 time-saving game state of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the normal design determination table of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal per symbol type determination table of the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. In the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine, it is a flowchart which shows an example of a time saving counter update process. In 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine, it is a flowchart which shows an example of an overlap time reduction counter update process. In the 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine, it is a flowchart which shows an example of a time saving counter determination process. In the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing. In the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, it is a flow chart showing an example of time saving setting processing. In 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine, it is a flowchart which shows an example of an overlap time reduction counter setting process. In 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine, it is a flowchart which shows an example of overlap time reduction counter shift processing. In 2nd Example of the 8th pachinko game machine, it is a flowchart which shows an example of overlap time reduction setting processing. In the second embodiment of the eighth pachinko gaming machine, it is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game. It is an example of the table|surface which put together the process when the value of the ceiling counter reaches|attains the ceiling value when it wins per C short time in each game state. It is an example of a front view of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing the rear part of the ninth pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a perspective view showing a lower base member, a payout unit, a game ball passageway and a wiring guide member. It is an example of a perspective view showing the lower base member, the game ball passage and the wiring guide member of the ninth pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, it is an example of an exploded perspective view showing a lower base member, a game ball passageway and a wiring guide member. In the ninth pachinko game machine, it is an example of an exploded front view showing a lower base member, a game ball passageway and a wiring guide member. It is an example of a perspective view showing a lower base member of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a back view showing the lower base member of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing a payout unit of a ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a plan view showing a storage tank of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an AA cross-sectional view in FIG. 342 showing the payout unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing a game ball passageway and a wiring guide member of a ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a plan view showing a lower passageway of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing a wiring guide member of the ninth pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a perspective view showing a guide portion and a cover portion. (b) It is an example of the right side view which shows a guide part. It is an example of a back view showing the board unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the sub-board case and back cover of the 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a plan sectional view showing a sub-board case and a back cover of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the upper unit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the upper unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a lower perspective view showing the upper unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a rear perspective view showing the upper unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a back view showing the upper unit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a perspective view showing the decoration unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the rear part of the decoration unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a rear perspective view showing the frame member, the first substrate and the reflecting portion of the ninth pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a front view showing a frame member. (b) An example of a front view showing a first substrate. (c) It is an example of the front view which shows a reflection part. (d) It is an example of the front view which shows a spreading|diffusion part. It is an example of a perspective view showing a diffusion part and a reflection part of a ninth pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the front part of the decoration unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. In the ninth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a front view showing a first decorative portion. (b) An example of a front view showing a second decorative portion. It is an example of the front view which shows typically the modification of the spreading|diffusion part of the 10th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing a part of the glass door of the game machine according to the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows a part of glass door of the 10th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the back view which shows a part of glass door of the 10th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a back view showing the upper part of the unit part of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a rear view showing the decoration of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the back enlarged view which shows the upper right part of the glass door of the 10th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the back enlarged view which shows the upper right part of the glass door of the state which moved the lock member of the 10th pachinko game machine to the unlocking position. It is an example of the exploded rear perspective view showing the upper right part of the glass door of the tenth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front perspective view which shows the upper right part of the glass door of the 10th pachinko game machine. In the tenth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a perspective view showing a lock member. (b) It is an example of the right side view which shows a locking member. In the tenth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a back view showing the positions of the lock member and the movement restricting member when the lock member is in the lock position. (b) Similarly, it is an example of a schematic plan view. In the tenth pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a back view showing the positions of the locking member and the movement restricting member when the locking member moves from the locked position toward the unlocked position. (b) Similarly, it is an example of a schematic plan view. It is an example of a front view showing a gaming machine according to the eleventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the plate unit of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the plate unit of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a side sectional view showing the plate unit of the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the plate unit of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the attachment member, 1st decoration part, etc. of the 11th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the attachment member, 1st decoration part, etc. of the 11th pachinko game machine. In the eleventh pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a front view showing a first decorative portion, a decorative member and a ground wire. (b) An example of a rear view showing a first decorative portion, a decorative member, and a ground wire. It is an example of an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the first connection portion and the second connection portion of the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of an exploded front view showing the second decorative portion of the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the outer lens of the 2nd decoration part of the 11th pachinko game machine. In the eleventh pachinko game machine, (a) is an example of a perspective view showing a decorative member. (b) It is a left view which shows a decoration member. It is an example of a schematic cross-sectional view showing how static electricity flows in the eleventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view of the whole 12th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the whole 12th pachinko game machine from right front slanted upper part. It is an example of a front view showing a portion of the glass door of the twelfth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at a part of glass door of the 12th pachinko game machine from right front slanting upper part. It is an example of the front view of the frame of the 12th pachinko game machine. FIG. 395 is an example of an enlarged view of the Y section shown in FIG. 394; It is an example of the front view of the upper unit and the side lens unit of the 12th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper unit and side lens unit of the 12th pachinko game machine from the right back diagonally above. In the 12th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper unit and side lens unit of the mutually separated state from the right rear diagonally downward direction. In the 12th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper unit and side lens unit of the mutually separated state from the right back diagonally above. In the twelfth pachinko game machine, an example of a perspective view of the upper unit and the side lens unit as seen from the front diagonally downward on the right side, (A) the upper unit and the side lens unit being separated, (B) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the connection of the upper unit and the side lens unit; In the twelfth pachinko game machine, an example of a perspective view of the side lens unit seen obliquely from the front left side, (A) a view in which the outer decorative sheet and the inner decorative sheet are accommodated, (B) the outer decorative sheet and the inner decorative sheet FIG. 4 is a drawing showing a portion of the inner decorative sheet pulled upward. FIG. 401 is an example of a perspective view of the BB line cross-section shown in FIG. 401, seen obliquely from the upper left front side. In the twelfth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit in a state in which the open/close door is closed, viewed from the left front obliquely downward direction. In the twelfth pachinko game machine, an example of a perspective view of the upper unit with the open/close door half-opened from the front and obliquely downward on the left side, in which the upper outer decorative sheet and the upper inner decorative sheet are accommodated. is. In the twelfth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit as seen obliquely from the front left side and downward, in which part of the upper outer decorative sheet and the upper inner decorative sheet are drawn downward. In the twelfth pachinko game machine, an example of a perspective view of the upper unit with the opening/closing door half-opened from the right rear obliquely downward direction, in which the upper outer decorative sheet and the upper inner decorative sheet are accommodated. is. In the 12th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the frame and the glass unit of the state which attached the glass unit with respect to the frame from the right rear slanting upper part. In the 12th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the frame and glass unit of the mutually isolate|separated state from the right rear diagonally upward direction. In the 12th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the frame and glass unit of the mutually isolate|separated state from right front diagonally upward. In the 12th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the glass unit from the right rear slanting upper part. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit provided in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, showing when the performance accessory unit is in the standby position. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit provided in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing when the production accessory unit is in the production position. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, an example of a perspective view of the production accessory unit seen from the right front diagonally above, (A) when the production accessory unit is in the standby position, (B) the production accessory unit is in the production position FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case in which An example of a front view showing a performance accessory unit in a thirteenth pachinko game machine, showing (A) when the presentation accessory unit is in the standby position, and (B) when the presentation accessory unit is in the presentation position. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, an example of a right side view showing the production accessory unit, (A) when the production accessory unit is in the standby position, (B) when the production accessory unit is in the production position, It is a figure which shows. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the 1st production accessory, the 2nd production accessory, and the 1st production accessory operation mechanism 62 from the right back diagonally above. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the 1st production accessory and the 1st production accessory operation mechanism from the right back diagonally above. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a plan view of the first performance accessory, the first performance accessory operating mechanism, and the second performance accessory. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a plan view of the first performance accessory and the first performance accessory operating mechanism. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a right side view of the first performance accessory, the second performance accessory, and the first performance accessory operating mechanism in the production position, as seen from the right. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a right side view showing the positional relationship between the plate-like member and the front lens portion in the standby position. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a right side view showing the positional relationship between the plate-like member and the front lens portion at the performance position. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the front lens part from diagonally upper right-hand side. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the front lens part from diagonally upper right-hand side. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a partially exploded perspective view of the front lens part in a state where the LED board is attached to the second lens, as seen from diagonally above the right front. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is a diagram showing an example of the front lens part in a state where the LED board is attached to the second lens, (A) a front view, (B) a sectional view on the AA line shown in the front view, is. In the 13th pachinko game machine, it is an example of the perspective view which looked at the front lens part of the state which attached the LED board to the 2nd lens from the diagonally upward left rear direction. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a back view of the front lens part in a state where the LED board is attached to the second lens. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a perspective view of the second performance accessory and the accessory lifting unit seen from the right front obliquely above, and is a diagram showing the second performance accessory as an exploded perspective view. In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a perspective view of the rear lens in which the LED substrate is superimposed on the back side, viewed from the front and slightly right direction. FIG. 431 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 430; In the thirteenth pachinko game machine, it is an example of a rear view of the rear lens.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front side, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear side, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left side. The right side when viewed from the front of the machine is the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is the top side, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is the bottom side, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is the clockwise direction. , and vice versa, define the counterclockwise direction as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination The result of processing (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the second special symbol). pattern) will be described as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the start condition of the second special symbol is established preferentially over the start condition of the first special symbol when the display is suspended, and the first There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is established in the winning order including the starting opening and the second starting opening.

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied. In addition, in the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements are met, such as that the display is withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, etc., which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it becomes possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see later-described FIG. 4) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects are arranged around the opening 41 of the glass door 4 , and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46 . Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, the LED group 46 will be described. The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . As described above, the tray unit 5 is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process for special symbols. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out to the lower tray 52 through the payout port 55. - 特許庁

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52 . In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The shooting handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61 . The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 passes through a shooting rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. The area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) is embossed. In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 . The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to the upper tray 51, for example, when the payout condition is satisfied. A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (shown in the diagram below) for supplying power. 6) is mounted on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/fire control board 93 and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all accommodated in the board case. ing.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. A center accessory 115, a first starting port 120, a general prize winning port 122, a passage gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting port 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145 , an LED unit 160 , an out port 178 , and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10 . Incidentally, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 in the game area 105 is called the left area 106 , and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called the right area 107 . The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down the right side region 107 is referred to as "left hitting". A method of shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 . The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119 at the first start. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, per first special symbol Various random numbers such as judgment random numbers, first special symbol symbol random numbers, first special symbol reach determination random numbers, and first special symbol effect selection random numbers) are extracted and extracted Up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of various data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "fluctuation starting condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the first special symbol, the first Various random numbers such as the symbol random number of the special symbol, the reach determination random number of the first special symbol, and the random number for effect selection of the first special symbol, etc.) are referred to as start information of the first special symbol. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right area 107, and includes a passing gate 126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data related to normal symbols (for example, random numbers for judging normal symbols) are extracted. (for example, up to 4) are stored. The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, random numbers for judging normal symbols, etc.) ) is referred to as normal symbol start information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates a big prize slot 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passage) of a game ball into the big prize slot 131, and a special electric role product 133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right area 107 .

The big winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning hole 131, a big winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize may be arranged, or a game may be played on the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

Also, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) a prize when controlled in a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the prize-winning entrance. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and in which a game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. is.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is difficult or impossible for a left-handed game ball to win due to, for example, a game nail. is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, it is not essential to configure the second starting port 140 in this manner, and it may be provided in the right region 107, for example. Also, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, per second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for judgment, random numbers for design random numbers for the second special design, random numbers for reach judgment for the second special design, and random numbers for selection of the effect selection for the second special design) are extracted and extracted. Up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of various data are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left area 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a prize winning hole, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chew and is made of, for example, a blade member, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the general electric movable member 147. . The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the ordinary electric movable member 147 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 140, and in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second start port 140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. In addition, the general electric movable member 147 includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(out port)
The out port 178 is launched toward the game area 105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 122, so that the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged out of the machine. can be

(back unit)
A back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided behind the transparent game panel 100 . This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 . The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165, a second special symbol reservation display part 166, a probability variation notification display part 167, and a time reduction notification display part 168 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of normal symbols") is established, the variable display of normal symbols is started, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. be. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 Winning (passing) of game balls to is facilitated.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable displays of normal symbols that are being held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of pending normal symbols") when the starting information of the normal symbols, that is, the variable display is being held. It is provided with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected and various data (for example, random numbers for judging normal symbols) are extracted. After being done, it means the state until the starting condition of the normal symbol is established. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, when the number of reserved symbols is normally two, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also has a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 Or the variable display of the 1st special design which repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 Or the variable display of the 2nd special design which repeats lighting and extinguishing partly alternately or mutually is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol pending display unit displays the number of variable display of special symbols that are suspended (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, that is, the variable display is suspended. It comprises a first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 .

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. Prepare. "Variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the start information of the first special symbol is extracted, the first It refers to the state until the starting condition of the special symbol is established.

The first special symbol pending display unit 165 displays the number of pending variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol pending display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the reserved number of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Further, when the number of reserved first special symbols is 3, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of second special symbols pending when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. Prepare. "Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, the second It refers to the state until the starting condition of the special symbol is established.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of pending variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

(Probability notification display unit)
The variable probability notification display unit 167 can be lit during execution of the variable probability control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on during execution of the probability variation control, but for example, by not lighting so as not to be able to grasp that the probability variation control is being performed from the appearance, the probability variation control is being executed may be concealed.

However, when the power is cut off during execution of the variable probability control, the data indicating that the variable probability control is being executed does not disappear due to the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power is turned off during execution of variable probability control and then turned on, the variable probability notification display unit 167 lights up in such a manner that the variable probability control is being performed.

In addition, even if whether or not the probability variation control is being executed is kept secret before the power is turned off, the probability variation notification display unit 167 is lit when the power is turned on. By doing so, it is configured to be able to grasp that the variable probability control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the time reduction notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time reduction notification display unit 168a and a second time reduction notification display unit 168b. Not limited.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state and a C time saving game state. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time-saving gaming state by a combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time-saving information display unit 168a and the second time-saving information display unit 168b.

The display unit 168 for time saving information may light up the first display unit 168a for time saving information and/or the second display unit 168b for time saving information according to the time saving control being executed, but for example, the time saving control Whether it is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed can not be grasped by the appearance (for example, all lights off, all lights, modes unrelated to time saving control being executed) By turning on or off, The fact that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed may be kept secret so as not to be grasped from the appearance. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not time-saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. Interest can be heightened by making secret the kind of time saving control of inside.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of time-saving control, not only the data indicating that the time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed by the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. does not disappear either. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the execution of the time saving control and then the power is turned on, the time saving notification display unit 168 lights up or goes out.

Before the power is turned off, even if the fact that time saving control is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In this case, the display unit 168 for time saving notification is lit and / and extinguished in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be grasped from the appearance.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for progressing the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , Second special symbol holding display portion 166, probability variation notification display portion 167, time reduction notification display portion 168, general electric solenoid 148, and special electric solenoid 135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 200 are the first starter switch 121, the second starter switch 141, the passage gate switch 127, the count switch 132, the general winning switch 123, and the like. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205 .

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming the setting value in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared in response to the operation of . In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also only those corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role item control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

[1-2-3. Dispensing/launching control circuit]
The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of controlling ball rental, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

[1-2-4. power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is shot by a user's operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. In addition, the normal symbol game, for example, executes the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and operates the normal electric accessory 146 to operate the winning opening (the second game in this embodiment) This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140). In this specification, "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, for example, normal symbol game and operation unit such as production button 54 ( For example, see FIG. 1) is included in "games".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, when the game is controlled to the big win game state, one special symbol game is performed until the end of the big win game state. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko game machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is performed. After the result of the processing is derived, if the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, one special symbol game is performed until the small winning game state ends.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, the operation of the special electric accessory 133 executes a round game in which the jackpot 131 is open for a predetermined time (for example, maximum 30000 msec), and the possibility of winning the jackpot 131 is relatively high. be done.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols in the normal symbol game is drawn to the normal symbol display unit 161, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 causes the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 140 in this embodiment) to open. It becomes an open state, and the winning possibility to the 2nd starting port 140, for example is relatively increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol start winning process which is performed when there is a winning (passing) through the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, and a special symbol game. Includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to special symbols from various counters for special symbols (for example, special symbol hit determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.) Pattern random number, random number for reach determination, and various random numbers such as random number for selection of effect) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is satisfied. When the special symbol starting condition is established, the special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the special symbol hit determination counter is referred to as a "big hit". . After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, in the present embodiment high probability short-time gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7, sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32, etc. is performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to a high probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of game balls to the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when the game ball to the starting ports 120 and 140 wins (for example, random numbers for judging special symbols, random numbers for judging special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and effect selection Various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted at the time of winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 after the special symbol starts winning and before the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Pre-reading judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 to be described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (whether or not a "big hit" is won) and the variation pattern prior to the special symbol hitting judging process based on the starting information, and this pre-reading judgment is performed. A look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result may be provided. The above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the starting information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In this normal symbol starting passage process, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not the normal symbol hit is determined as "normal symbol hit". A determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the results of the win determination process for the normal symbols and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols and a predetermined effect. Perform production control processing. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

When the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been drawn to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). determine whether When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the winning of the game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)), the control in which at least one of the electric sapo control that increases the frequency of opening the start port 140 (see FIG. 4) is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

The electric sapo control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal pattern", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) of the normal electric accessory 146. It is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and the winning probability of "per normal symbol" , the variable display time of normal symbols, or/and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (number of times of opening, opening time, wait time, etc.). Improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball into a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). That is, when the electric sapo control is executed, compared with the case where the electric sapo control is not executed, the winning probability of "per normal symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, or / and normal electric accessories Winning facilitation (increasing the number of openings, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) is performed by 146.

Then, each time the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number etc.) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol per judgment random number, the first special symbol symbol random number, the first special symbol reach determination random number, the second special symbol per judgment random number, the second Special symbol symbol random number, second special symbol reach determination random number, and normal symbol hit determination random number etc.) are extracted within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201 A soft random number method may be used to generate a random number value in , or a hard random number method may be used to extract a random value from a counter in a random number generator whose random number is updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol win determination processing, the non-jackpot game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. In addition, the explanation about the small winning game state shall be omitted.

The non-jackpot game state is divided into a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol win determination process is relatively low, and a high probability game state in which the probability of winning the big win in the special symbol win determination process is relatively high. can be broadly classified.

The high certainty gaming state includes a high certainty short working hours gaming state (high certainty high base) in which time saving control is executed. It should be noted that, although not included in the high certainty gaming state in the first pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. state may be included.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving game state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state, and a C time saving game state.

The A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a special symbol game of a specified number of times is executed or transitioned to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is changed. finish. When the A time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the state shifts to the normal game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, for example, the jackpot gaming state ends, and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high certainty gaming state (that is, the gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) has started, and the later-described RAM has been cleared. When the number of variable display times of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times) starting from such as, it is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted, and whether the special symbol game is executed for the specified number of times , When it shifts to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of the time-saving winning is derived. When the prescribed number of special symbol games determined by winning the time-saving win are executed or the game is shifted to a big win game state, the C time-saving game state is terminated. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, for example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed repeatedly, the conditions for shifting to the time-saving gaming state are established in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for shifting to multiple time-saving gaming states are established at the same time To do, the time saving game state is referred to as “overlapping”. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally activates the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Running in parallel is called "overlapping". However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving gaming states, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner, the player perceives that the game is controlled to one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the game state transition will be described.

Normal game state, reduced working hours game state (A reduced working hours game state, B reduced working hours game state, C reduced working hours game state), and high certainty game state (for example, high certainty reduced working hours game state) Even if it is controlled, special symbols If the result of the hit determination process is a big hit, the state shifts to a big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it can be shifted to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-certainty game state (for example, a high-certainty time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the high certainty game state, it does not shift from the high certainty game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, it does not shift to the high-accuracy gaming state unless it passes through the big-hit gaming state.

When it is controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the B time reduction game state or C time reduction game state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time reduction game state unless the jackpot game state is passed. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if it is controlled to either the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, when the special symbol game of the specified number of times is executed, it will shift to the normal game state. It is also possible to shift from the game state to the normal game state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times that can be executed in the A time saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transition to the B time saving game state, so from the A time saving game state to B It does not shift to the time saving game state. In addition, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the B time saving game state to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state can overlap. . However, since the A time-saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state as described above, there is no transition from the C time-saving game state to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the B time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is established, and the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state are established. can be duplicated. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state can overlap.

When it is controlled to the C time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is established, and the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state are established. can be duplicated.

In addition, the detail about duplication of a time-saving game state is mentioned later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can progress the game in any one of these game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state, the right-handed hit is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7 . Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (e.g., shooting mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, using the above-described setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both), a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6, for example, can be set. Any one of these can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (for example, normal game state and low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/309. 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state). Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

It should be noted that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all set values, unlike the jackpot probability. For example, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is 1/160, and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, the time saving probability is 1/240. there is The time saving hit probability may be different between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but may be the same.

However, even if the time saving hit probability is a common probability with all set values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the time saving number of times to be set) may be varied according to the set value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times are set as the number of time saving can be

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the small win is not included in the lottery target, but the small win may be included in the lottery target. When small hits are included in the lottery targets, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all set values. In addition, when the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination processing of one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (for example, the second special pattern) is performed. You can make it soothing. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the aspect of not performing the determination itself of whether or not the small hit was won, whether or not the small hit probability was set to 0 may be determined.

The above-mentioned short-time hit probability and the small hit probability when including the small hit in the lottery target are common probabilities for all set values as described above, but not limited to this, as different probabilities depending on the set value good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, based on the special symbol hit determination random number extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 120 and 140. This is a table referred to when a "hit", "big hit" or "losing" is determined by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery target is "time saving hit", "big hit" and "losing", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 120 or / and When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The special symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination random number is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value in the first special symbol hit determination process. In the first special symbol hit determination table, the range (width) of the special symbol hit determination random number value determined for the "time saving hit" and the time saving hit corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between the range (width) of the special symbol hit judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as a "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the loss judgment value data corresponding thereto is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the variable probability flag is off, and when the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the variable probability flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201, in the same way as in the first special symbol win determination process, based on the extracted special symbol win determination random number value, selects "time-saving hit", "big hit", or Decided to be "losing". In the second special symbol hit determination table, the range (width) of the special symbol hit determination random number value determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between the range (width) of the special symbol hit judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as a "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the loss judgment value data corresponding thereto is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for special symbol hit determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit". , and the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for special symbol hit determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 ”, and the determination value data is determined as “time reduction hit determination value data”. In addition, when the probability variation flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing". , the determination value data is determined to be “loss determination value data”.

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit". , and the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON during the second special symbol hit determination process and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing". , the determination value data is determined to be “loss determination value data”.

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the special symbol hit determination random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the first special symbol hit determination process) is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data) excluding big hit judgment value data and loss judgment value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag is turned from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or decreases) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different, it is possible to provide variation to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared with the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, when "time saving hit" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and when the "time saving win" is won just before the time saving game state ends, the time saving game state is activated. It will be extended substantially, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, even if the variable probability flag is ON or OFF, it is possible to win the "time saving hit". However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal game state, time reduction game state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time reduction game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time reduction hit", but the probability variation flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining a stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting ports 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the design designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, the determination value data is determined based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table ( 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the win/loss of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) forming the first special symbol display portion 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, the first special symbol area 0 corresponds to 163a, the first special symbol area 1 corresponds to 163b, the first special symbol area 2 corresponds to 163c, and the first special symbol area 3 corresponds to 163d. , the first special symbol area 4 corresponds to 163e, the first special symbol area 5 corresponds to 163f, the first special symbol area 6 corresponds to 163g, and the first special symbol area 7 corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each area 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display portion 164 one-to-one. For example, the second special symbol area 0 corresponds to 164a, the second special symbol area 1 corresponds to 164b, the second special symbol area 2 corresponds to 164c, and the second special symbol area 3 corresponds to 164d. , the second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (time saving win display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol The LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163, and the first special symbol area. The LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163 and the first special symbol area. 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the first special symbol display part 163 is stopped and displayed. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol LED 164b corresponding to area 1 and LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164, and the second special symbol area. 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the display mode of the LEDs (big hit display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201, of the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 and the first special symbol The LED 163e corresponding to the area 4 and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display part 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol area. 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol area. LED 163e corresponding to 4, LED 163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, the first special symbol display It decides to stop displaying the part 163 . When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol area. 4 and the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol area. 5 is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", the display mode of the LEDs (losing display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the first special symbol area 7 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163, LED is turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164, and lights the other LEDs. is turned off, and the second special symbol display portion 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol stop mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED to constitute, and controls the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 .

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display portion 163 and the display mode of the LED led to the second special symbol display portion 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable to transmit the control signals separately for the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 .

FIG. 12(B) is an example of a table showing a way of thinking regarding the determination of the mode of stopping decorative symbols in the first pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 12B, the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative patterns derived when the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 is stopped is determined according to the design designation command. be.

Since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled so that the display effect for the special symbol being displayed is performed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 are composed of 9 patterns, for example, 1 to 9, for the left pattern, and 10 patterns, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern, for the middle pattern. , and the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving design is a design that is stopped and displayed when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, such as when the result of the special design lottery is a time-saving winning, for example. By stop-displaying the medium pattern as the time-saving pattern, the player can grasp that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, the symbols constituting the medium symbols may include a small win symbol. (symbols stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can know that a small win has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 displays the decorative symbol, for example, , the left pattern and the right pattern are stopped at the even number patterns, and the middle pattern is stopped at the time reduction pattern.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol with odd number symbols. and stop the medium pattern with the time saving pattern. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of set time reductions is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 sets the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol to odd number symbols. Stop at the matching pattern (zorome).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 sets the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol to even number symbols. Stop at the matching pattern (zorome). It should be noted that the symbol designation command "zA4" is, as can be seen from FIG. There is a case where the probability variation flag is not set to ON (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the selected symbol command is either "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the aligned symbols of the even-numbered symbols (zorome), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a probability variable flag is set to ON).

Also, as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the design designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the design designation command is "zA3" or "zA8 ”, the expected value that the probability variation flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot gaming state is small. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "Loss"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols at random or reach loss. The split is, for example, a stop mode in which the first stopped symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second stopped symbol (for example, the right symbol) are different, or the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are all mutually different. Different stopping modes correspond. Reach loss is the first stopped symbol (eg left symbol) and the second stopped symbol (eg right symbol) are common, but the last stopped symbol (eg middle symbol) is another symbol (eg left symbol and right symbol).

In FIG. 12(B), the decorative pattern stop mode according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the design designation command is "zA1", the left design "2", the middle design "time saving", the right design "4") Although illustrated, the stop mode shown in the column of the decorative pattern stop mode in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state in accordance with the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, so the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", since it is not controlled to the big win game state, the mode of the big win game state is not determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the time saving number of times to be set is the same and However, it is not limited to this, and the number of set time reduction times may be varied according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In the case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, the high certainty game state is continued without controlling to the C time saving game state. can be

In addition, the main CPU 201 draws a lottery for "shorter working hours" when the variable probability flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly displayed on the special symbol display unit. 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the random number value for the special design hit judgment, that is, the "time saving hit" is included in the lottery result (special design hit judgment processing result) A hit determination process may be performed that does not have a hit. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the special symbol winning determination random number value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number assigned to the time saving per judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is instead of the time saving per judgment value data, the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value It is assigned to both the data and the big hit judgment value data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine that can be controlled to a high probability non-time-saving game state such that the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit" You may make it transfer to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and to set both the variable probability number and the time saving number to 10000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, then controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, can control to the high-accuracy short-time game state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and to set both the variable probability number and the time saving number to 10000 times. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 201 can control to the high-accuracy time-saving game state. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 200 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the big win gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 300 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is also the A time saving game state.

In addition, it is preferable that the time saving performance in the high probability time saving game state is the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 changes the mode of the big win game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 13.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Decision value data is determined based on the random number value for hit judgment (hit-lose judgment is performed), and hit-lose (“time-saving hit”, “big hit” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. Based on the data, the selected symbol command is determined, and the type of display mode (type of time saving hit or big hit) derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164 is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit".

In addition, instead of the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state being higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. may be set higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" and "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7") or 200 times ( When the selected pattern command is "z2", "z8"). Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state).

In addition, "10000" of the probability variable number of times and the time saving number shown in FIG. .

[1-4-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. The column of "remarks" in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand. Time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, big hit system reach A, B, C is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is possible for both time-saving hits and big hits. In addition, FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140. - 特許庁Determining fluctuation patterns. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 of FIG. 28 described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win or lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value, or / And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect when a look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether the time saving flag is on regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, as the time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared. These time-saving game states will be described below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". is. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, it does not necessarily shift to the A time-saving gaming state, but when the conditions that prevent the transition to the A time-saving gaming state are established (for example, when the backup is cleared etc.) does not shift to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the end condition of the A time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see column "Number of times of shortening of hours" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the starting point is when the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-certainty gaming state (for example, the normal game state and the low-certainty time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) is started. , the ceiling counter is updated (1 is added), and the time saving game state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving gaming state may be when the variable display of special symbols when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "final ceiling fluctuation") is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is finished. Alternatively, it may be the time when the variable display of the special symbol following the final ceiling change is started. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the ceiling final variation is started and when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. In addition, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process in the final ceiling change is "losing", the display mode of losing is derived to the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the transition to the B time saving game state is performed. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). , a special effect by a character, or a effect of both of these) may be controlled to be displayed on the display device 7. FIG. It should be noted that even if the condition to transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established, it does not necessarily shift to the B time-saving gaming state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established (for example, a special When the result of the pattern hit determination process is a big hit, etc.), the game state is not shifted to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and when the probability variation flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, unless the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is "big hit", the game is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In a pachinko game machine including a small win in the result of special symbol win determination processing, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is "small win" when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the display mode of the small win. is led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, the B time-saving game state may be started, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the end of the small winning game state. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 only display the display mode of the small win. , the above-described display effect for showing the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may differ according to the setting value. In addition, when the result of the special pattern win determination processing when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big win", the game is controlled to the big win game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on, when the ceiling counter is controlled to the jackpot game state, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the backup clear switch 176 When another switch (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, in a game machine that can change the normal per symbol probability, when the high probability of the normal per symbol probability ends, etc. is reset when the condition is met. Then, when the update of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special pattern is executed. For example, if the variable probability flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko game machine instead of being set each time.

If the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot game state is ended, the main CPU 201 will display the variable display of the first special symbol at the start or end. Update (+1) the ceiling counter. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but if it is a specification that performs a ST machine or a variable drop lottery, for example, the probability variable flag The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the is turned off. In addition, in the case of specifications that perform a variable drop lottery, the variable flag will be changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special design, so if you update the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special design, the special design If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with specifications in which a variable probability drop lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect that suggests that the variable probability drop lottery has been won, and a high probability game It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing of starting the count by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state based on the display effect etc. displayed on the display device 7, and it is interesting. It is possible to provide a game with When it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, a countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state or a fake countdown effect is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further enhance interest.

In addition, when the clearing process (backup clearing process) of the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is performed, the main CPU 201 starts variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the clearing process of the work area in the RAM 203. Update (+1) the ceiling counter at time or end.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 causes the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated. update (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and a predetermined prescribed number of times (hereinafter It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied, out of the case where the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state, "When the variable display of the special symbols for the B time-saving specified number of times is executed", is the B time-saving specified number of times of the special design variable display (hereinafter "B time-saving final variation ”) may be started, or may be when the B time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the B time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this B time-saving final variation is completed.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for transitioning to the C time saving gaming state is to win the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8" time saving hit), and the time saving per display mode is a special symbol. It is derived (determined display) on the display units 163 and 164 . It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established, instead of always shifting to the C time-saving gaming state, if the conditions that prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established (for example, B time-saving gaming state and (details will be described later), and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), C time-saving game Do not transition to state. It should be noted that, when the condition to prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is established despite the fact that the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is established, the main CPU 201 does not cause the shift to the C time-saving gaming state. to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

In addition, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see "Number of times of shortening" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied. The C time-saving specified number of times, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time-saving final variation"). It may be when it is done, or it may be when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time-saving gaming state may be between when the C time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this C time-saving final variation is completed.

In addition, the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In addition, the time saving performance of two time saving game states out of the A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state is the same, and the time saving performance of these two time saving game states and the other one time saving game state You may make it differ from time saving performance. Furthermore, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

In addition, in addition to the above, for the end condition of the A time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state, and the end condition of the C time saving game state, for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times Alternatively, the fact that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, the fact that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 146, and the like may be included. Further, in a pachinko game machine including a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the end condition may include that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, a time-saving falling lottery may be performed, and winning of the time-saving falling lottery may be included in the above termination conditions.

[1-4-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination table extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table that is referred to when determining "per normal symbol" or "losing" by lottery based on a random number value (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43 described later).

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a normal symbol hit determination random number from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol hit" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. In the normal symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined for "normal symbol hit" and the normal symbol hit determination value data corresponding to this for each type of time saving , and the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol per determination determination random number value determined as "loss" and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol winning determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79 as a "normal winning symbol". , the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol per determination value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol per determination random number value is any one of 80 to 99 as "losing", and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". to decide.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 98 as "normal symbol hit", and sets the determination value data to "normal symbol hit". judgment value data”. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol winning determination random number value is 99, the main CPU 201 determines “losing” and determines the determination value data as “losing determination value data”.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and sets the determination value data to "normal symbol hit". judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol per determination random number value is any one of 80 to 99 as "losing", and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". to decide.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79 as "normal symbol hit", and sets the determination value data to "normal symbol hit". judgment value data”. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted random number value for normal symbol per determination is any one of 80 to 99 as "losing", and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". to decide.

Thus, in the present embodiment, among the non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 16 selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is also the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the above-described determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when selecting a "selected symbol command at the time of a normal winning symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the symbol. "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The normal symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 99. , "fz0" is selected as a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, and select "fz2" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz5" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), determines the determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value, and then determines the determination value data. , The normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) is referred to, and the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value and the normal symbol symbol random number value, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to a normal per symbol select symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 executed in the normal symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43 to be described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2500 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2500 msec.

Further, when the selected symbol command at the time of the normal winning symbol is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 3000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, no wait time, no second release.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, wait time 600 msec, second open time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, second release time 2500 msec.

Thus, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) open pattern is non- Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the most advantageous degree becomes a disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the normal electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is a non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the C time saving game state, the degree of advantage is the most advantageous mode.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol win" is the normal symbol hit determination in the C time saving game state Although the degree of advantage is the same as that of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "normal pattern hit", the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (that is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). It is referred to when The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4), normal Determine the variation pattern of the design. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 300000 msec, regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99. The variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In addition, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In this way, the variable display time of normal symbols per one variable display is A The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state is the shortest. Therefore, the A time saving game state is the shortest time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released among the non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time saving game state, but it is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Time saving number of times set at time saving hit]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol win determination process is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time saving times set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode for the time-saving win to the special symbol display unit, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving game state, and continues to control to the high-accuracy game state. By the way, for example, like a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, there is known a game machine that turns off a variable probability flag from ON when variable display of special symbols is executed over a specified number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol performed in the final game as a high probability game state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability variation flag. When the processing for deriving the mode is performed later, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode for the time-saving win.

[1-5-2. Overlap of time-saving game state]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state overlap. When the time saving game state overlaps in this way, the time saving game state may be overlapped and executed, and the time saving game state may not be overlapped (that is, the "time saving hit" is ignored, and the time saving hit is invalidated). can be In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the condition for ending the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game state overlaps, a mode in which the time-saving game state is overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game state is not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. Aspect of executing the time-saving game state repeatedly]
As a mode of overlapping and executing the time saving game state when the time saving game state overlaps, the time saving win is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C. Sometimes, there is a mode in which the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and a mode in which the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When "time saving win" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 displays the time saving hit in the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state, and adopts as the number of times of time-savings the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed before the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the remaining number of time-savings in the A time-saving gaming state is greater than the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 is the A time-saving game. While maintaining the time-saving performance in the game state, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state is exhausted unless a ``big hit'' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 200 times, the "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of the time, although the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, the time saving number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win the "time saving hit" in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, the number of time saving times and time saving performance It is the same as the case where the A time-saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving winning" is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the number of times of time-saving set based on the 'time-saving win' is completed unless a 'big win' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 20 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of times, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of times of the time saving game state A, after that, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, special symbols over 30 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

[1-5-2-1-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling change (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but the following description includes the case where the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win. .

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. , Unless a "jackpot" is derived, control to the time-saving game state is performed until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the B time saving prescribed number of times is 200 times, the C time saving game state While maintaining the time saving performance of , the number of times of time saving from here is 300 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the B time-saving specified number of times is greater than the time-saving remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. At the same time, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is completed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed in the B time saving game state is 300 times. In the case, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 300 times unless a “jackpot” is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state, after that, while maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state, special symbols over 280 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

When the variable display of the special symbols ends in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 . That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the losing display mode is derived. . When the small-hit display mode is derived, the game is controlled to the small-hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag turned on even during the small-hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final fluctuation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final fluctuation, the conditions for transition to the B time saving game state and the transition conditions to the C time saving game state are A case where it is established will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and when the result of the special symbol win determination process is Different control can be executed in the case where the control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after being led to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 .

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. It is already controlled to the B time saving game state at the time of being done. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless a “jackpot” is derived, the larger one of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the time saving number of times in the C time saving game state is consumed. Control to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At the time when it is done, it is not yet controlled to the B time saving game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, and the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, derivation of the display mode of the big win, derivation of the display mode of the small win or a specific small win, etc.) are established. Unless otherwise, control is made to the time saving game state until the larger number of times of time saving of the prescribed number of times of B time saving and the number of times of time saving of C time saving game state is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time saving game state in which the time saving performance is maintained or executed are established, the time saving game state may be ended.

In addition, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied in the ceiling final fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 performs B time reduction performed only when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time saving transition display effect performed when only the condition for transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied may be performed. Alternatively, for example, when the time saving performance of the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance of the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. It is good also as giving priority to one display production|presentation among B time-saving transition display effects, and C time-saving transition display effects, such as performing.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the ceiling final change is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state, B time saving game To control to a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states repeatedly]
In the above, the aspect which overlaps and performs C time saving game state on one time saving game state, and the aspect which overlaps and performs B time saving game state on C time saving game state were demonstrated.

In this way, if it is a specification that can be executed by overlapping a plurality of time-saving game states, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was previously executed is maintained. In a pachinko machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be superimposed may be different, but the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be superimposed may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification that allows the C time-saving game state to be superimposed on one time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state the same. Further, when the specification is such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state the same.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in addition to the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first is, for example, the time-saving gaming state that is executed first. One time saving performance same as the time saving gaming state and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance may be provided. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in addition to the time-saving game state that is being executed first, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If it is not executed repeatedly, other time-saving performances may be activated.

For example, if it is a pachinko game machine with specifications that can be executed by overlapping the B time-saving game state with the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not in any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Aspect in which the time-saving game state is not repeatedly executed]
As a mode that does not execute the time saving game state repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time saving game state, and a "time saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time saving game state. A mode (hereinafter referred to as "the latter mode") in which the time-saving game state is not performed repeatedly even if the time-saving game state overlaps is conceivable. As the latter mode, even if winning is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, this is ignored and the time saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable, ie, a non-execution mode and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, this is ignored and the B time saving game state is not repeated. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode that does not overlap the C time-saving game state with one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display units 163 and 164 as described above. , derives the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving gaming state based on the “time-saving hit” unless the last special symbol is variablely displayed in one time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving final variation”). The game is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to one time saving game state (excluding the time saving final variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when "time saving win" is won in the time saving final variation in one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the one time saving game state is displayed before the display mode of the time saving win is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different control can be executed in the case of ending and in the case of ending one time saving game state when the display mode for time saving per is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. - 特許庁

First, when one time-saving gaming state ends before the time-saving winning display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the time-saving winning display mode, and then enters the C time-saving gaming state. Start controlling.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the time-saving per display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving per display mode and the end of one time-saving gaming state When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode for time saving is performed prior to the end process of one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode for the time saving game prior to the ending process of the time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode of the time saving per is performed after the end process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance of the one time saving game state, but sets the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the one time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the one time-saving gaming state is unprocessed at the time when the display mode for the time-saving winning is derived, If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling change (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination processing in the final ceiling change is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "losing", the main CPU 201 completes the time saving remaining number of times in the C time saving game state. Control to the C time saving game state until it is done.

However, when the remaining time saving count in the C time saving game state is 0 in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed prior to the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and controls to the B time saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed after the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state without controlling to the B time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the C time-saving gaming state is not processed at the time when the B time-saving gaming state is to be started, and the C time-saving gaming state is terminated. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving game state after the start processing of the B time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time saving game state.

In the final ceiling change, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C short game state and starts control of the big win game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. FIG. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power failure signal is at High level (S11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when S11 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the ON/OFF states of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are stored in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, that it is normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (if determined as YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off and either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is turned off. If one of them is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO determination in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170 . As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not a normal power outage, or if the result of checking the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S<b>22 , the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203, the current activation state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a clearing process (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) of a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, an initial setting process is performed according to the current activation state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). Note that the details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 . After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. Details of the power-off process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 .

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the process of updating the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, random number counters for judging special symbols) is performed. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Also, this processing is performed using an area (outside area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, the processing of S37 ~ S44) relating to the game control described later, for example, 6msec interrupt prohibition section (S26 ~ S35 processing section) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, the setting process of the display data output to each display part (for example, 1st special design display part 163, 2nd special design display part 164 etc.) of the LED unit 160 is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the power failure recovery (when S52 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clear (NO determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag indicates setting change or setting confirmation (YES determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

At S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S72), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S72 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S73), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S74 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S74), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S74 determines YES), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S75. to

Returning to S73, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S73 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process of Move to S75.

At S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 140 .

[1-6-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0" (when S72 determines YES), in the special symbol management process, when S73 determines YES, the second special symbol is to be processed, and when S74 determines YES, The first special symbol is the object to be processed. Further, when the control state number is not "0" (when S72 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is performed on the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S81 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S83 based on the control state number read out in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S83 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S84 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

At S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S86.

At S86, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

At S87, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot ending process. This process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S91 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol hit determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a time saving hit, and sets the big win flag to ON when the special symbol win determination processing result is a big win. do. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but if the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, the special symbol win When the result of the judgment processing is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94. The time saving flag is turned off when shifting to the C time saving game state, and the big win flag is turned off when the big win game state is started. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process for determining whether or not the hit is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that this process is not a big hit, a process for determining whether or not it is a time-saving hit is performed, If it is determined in this process that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

At S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of winning types, a plurality of losing types may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value Or/and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

At S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 27 S84) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S99.

At S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and executes the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited interval. It is preferable to use

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S111), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S111 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S113.

At S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

At S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S121 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S122, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S122), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. Signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S127), game state designation parameter setting processing (S128), and transmission reservation processing (S129) of a big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S127) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 27 S86) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, if it is determined in S122 that there is no big win, that is, the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO in S122), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

At S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

At S133, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management process]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S131 during the special symbol game ending processing (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process, and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 at S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 . After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are superimposed and executed when a plurality of time saving game states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. In addition, when shifting to the high certainty gaming state, the probability variation flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state.

When the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state or/and C time saving game state is satisfied, a time saving counter for the time saving game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, the time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time saving game state is terminated when the time saving counter reaches 0, but this is not the only method. Instead, an addition system may be adopted in which the time saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, and the time saving game state is ended when the time saving counter reaches the set time saving number of times. In addition, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special design ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special design, and when the time-saving counter becomes 0 ( The time saving game state may be terminated when the time saving counter is set (in the case of the subtraction method) or the number of time saving counters is set (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and that the time saving counter is greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S161), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process, and the process is Return to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S<b>163 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S164.

In addition, the C time saving counter is a counter which is set when the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied during the time saving game state. Although not shown in the flow chart, the C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

Time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are superimposed and executed. In the present embodiment, the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the previously executed time saving game state, "time saving mode=3" is set. Further, when the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the time-saving game state that is being executed first, the "time-saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S163), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C short working hours counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S<b>165 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S166.

In addition, the B time saving counter is a counter that is set when the transition condition to the B time saving game state is established during the time saving game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time saving game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, the B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S165 that both of the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process. , the process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In addition, although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S164, or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are overlapped and executed, not only two time-saving game states are overlapped, but three or more time-saving game states may be overlapped and executed. In this case, since the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time saving game states overlap is the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S152 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the variable probability flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The ceiling counter value is stored in the main RAM 203 .

In addition, the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko game machine as a transition condition to the B time saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. You may make it process.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if the determination in S171 is NO), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and shifts the process to the counter update process ( 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is OFF (determined as YES in S171), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). The details of this time saving shift determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 . After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S<b>182 , the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. The details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 . After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S<b>183 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than one.

When it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, when the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

In addition, when it is determined that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 in S183 (S183 is YES determination), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time reduction counter or the time reduction counter is 1 or more despite the determination being YES in S183 , an abnormality warning may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormal time process, when S183 is determined as YES, not only turn off the time saving flag (see S184), but also reset the B time saving counter and C time saving counter. You may make it match|compatibility with a counter, a B time saving counter, and a C time saving counter.

At S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) of the time saving transition command. In addition, the time-saving transition command transmitted in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time reduction shift determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time reduction transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S181 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S191).

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and the process is changed to a counter determination process ( 36). That is, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the variable probability flag is off (when S191 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling reach flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

The ceiling reach flag is a flag that is set to ON when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and is a flag that indicates whether or not the B time-saving game state has been controlled in the past.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of transitions to the B time-saving game state from the end of the big win game state to the end of the next big win game state is once, for example, unless the RAM is cleared. That is, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and is controlled to the B time-saving game state but is not controlled to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, for example, RAM clear etc. As long as it is not done, it is not controlled to the B time saving game state again until the next big hit game state is completed.

Therefore, in S192, it is not only determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, but also whether or not the ceiling reaching flag is off, so that it is once controlled to the B time-saving gaming state. However, when this B time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, it is not controlled to the B time-saving game state again.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the ceiling reaching flag to OFF and clears the ceiling counter when the conditional device is activated.

However, the processing to set the ceiling reaching flag to OFF and/or the processing to clear the ceiling counter are executed when the condition device is activated, and when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting (for example, changing the setting in FIG. 47 described later) The first normal game pre-processing (see S344) called as a subroutine during the execution of the process, and when clearing the RAM without changing the settings (for example, the first normal game pre-processing called as a subroutine during the execution of the initial setting process at startup in FIG. 24) 1 normal game pre-processing (see S56)) may also be executed.

In S192, when it is determined that both the ceiling reaching flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (NO in S192), the main CPU 201 terminates the time reduction shift determination process. , the process is returned to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). It should be noted that if the ceiling reaching flag is ON, a NO determination is made in S192. Also, even if the ceiling reaching flag is off, if the ceiling counter does not indicate the ceiling value, a NO determination is made in S192.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling reach flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling reaching flag to ON. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time reduction transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S182 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S202).

In S202, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S202), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition processing, and the processing is changed to the counter determination processing (Fig. 36). By doing so, when the probability variation flag is ON, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the variable probability flag is off (YES in S202), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not ON (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is ON (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, setting the time reduction mode to 2, time reduction performance and the like are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S206, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is not ON (when S206 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and the process is changed to the counter determination process. (See FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S206 that the time saving hit flag is ON (S206 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the C time saving counter, setting the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance and the like are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to a hit type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13). Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting processing]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 . FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is ON (when S211 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

If S211 is YES determination, the probability variation flag is off, for example, when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving gaming state is being executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value case), or when the C time-saving game state is executed in a state where the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first (when winning the “time-saving hit”) is equivalent. do.

In addition, although not shown, when the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time-saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and determines in S205. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, and the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". Along with this, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is not ON (NO determination in S211), that is, when the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-savings (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and compares the current time-saving counter. It is determined whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of times of time saving.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of times of time-saving (if the determination in S212 is NO), that is, if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time-savings, the main CPU 201 will The setting process is ended, and the process is returned to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time saving (when S212 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where it is, the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter (that is, the number of remaining time-savings) and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first , the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state. That is, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier is changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, or the time-saving game corresponding to the larger one of the current time-saving counter and the new time-saving number of times It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

The time-saving performance, as described above, is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), , the variable display time of normal symbols, and/or the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessories 146, and the like.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter, it is possible to manage that the two time-saving game states are being overlapped internally. Then, in the time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter and the new number of times of time-savings is reset as a new time-savings counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears superficially (that the player can grasp) is the two time-saving gaming states that are internally overlapped. Among them, it is only the time saving performance for any one time saving game state. Therefore, without managing that the two time-saving game states are run in piles internally (that is, without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), when multiple time-saving game states are run repeatedly , You may make it reset as a new time-saving counter the number of times of time-savings which is larger among the value of the present time-saving counter and the number of times of new time-savings.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is, if S211 is NO determination, that is, if it is executed by shifting from the non-time-saving gaming state to the B time-saving gaming state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state It is a process that is performed when it is executed by shifting to (when it is elected to "time saving"). In this process, the time saving frequency and time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

Thus, in the above-described time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine that includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation The result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs the process of shifting to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small win game state. do it.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change ends. However, it is not limited to this, and based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, the transition processing to the B time saving game state may be performed. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, B time saving game It is preferable to perform state transition processing. This is because, when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made, during the variable display of one of the special patterns as the final ceiling change, the other special pattern is variable. This is because, when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbols cannot receive the benefit of the B time-saving game state, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, variable display of special symbols is not performed with a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine capable of variable display of special symbols with such a long variation, transition processing to the B time-saving game state is performed based on the start of variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling variation. As a result, delay in starting the B time-saving game state can be avoided even when variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. (See S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but it is not limited to this. For example, the C time reduction control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state is prioritized over the B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state. You can also use

Further, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35), the ceiling counter is not updated. can't For example, in a ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability drop lottery, even if the variable probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is not performed, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state may be made. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time-saving gaming state only when "ceiling counter=ceiling value", but shifts to the B time-saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value. processing will be performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (if the set value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

In addition, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state, is up to a prescribed multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by a specified number (for example, the denominator of the jackpot probability of 3. up to 8 times). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), both the prescribed number of B time reduction and the prescribed number of C time reduction are approximately 1212 (319 × 3.8) is preferably set as the upper limit. In addition, it is not essential to set the upper limit of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the upper limit of the C time saving prescribed number of times to the same value.

By the way, as in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above , Time saving per probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number (eg, 3.0) regardless of the set value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ according to the set value, and there is a risk that the set value will be seen through by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the ceiling value is determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modified example related to time saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-described time-saving management processing (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management processing of the present embodiment") described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update processing (see FIG. 35) is (see FIG. 31). Further, the processing related to the transition to the B time saving game state is given priority over the processing related to the transition to the C time saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, it is shifted to the B time-saving game state, When the time saving hit flag is ON, it is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state It is not restricted to the above about whether it makes a shift flag separate or it is made common, but can perform time saving management processing by various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of stopping the fluctuation, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not elected when reaching the ceiling, it is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0; should not be subtracted.

[1-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S86 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S251 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

At S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. A count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S253 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

At S254, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the processing (S254) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 27 S88) is performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

At S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

At S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of prize balls when winning the large winning opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 . It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

At S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the process of generating the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

At S260, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

At S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

At S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S271 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

At S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S272), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number (when S272 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has passed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has not elapsed (NO in S273), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed (YES in S273), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S<b>274 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

At S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

At S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S281), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot ending process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S281 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

At S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g., variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (e.g., variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning entrance winning counter, etc.) set value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

At S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 31, for convenience of explanation, the time saving management process (S131) is shown to be performed, but strictly speaking, this time saving management process (S131) is the special symbol game end process of S130. Although it is executed in the symbol game end processing (see FIG. 30), the processing is skipped without being executed in the special symbol game end processing (see FIG. 42) of S283. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 43 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. For convenience, each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 terminates the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S291 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

At S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S293 based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

At S293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process, and the normal symbol hit determination process. 146 opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting processing is performed. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S295.

At S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S296.

At S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the normal symbol per end process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), the normal symbol hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, 0 to 79 is normal. It is used as per symbol determination value data (in the case of non-time-saving game state). Since the normal symbol per probability is determined by the number of normal symbol per judgment value data with respect to the total random number of the normal per symbol judgment random numbers, the normal per symbol probability is, for example, 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability per normal symbol is different between when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed, but it may be the same or substantially the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600000 msec in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not performed, whereas in a game state in which time-saving control is performed, relatively for example, 1000 msec. Only runs for a short time. Thus, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 44, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S<b>302 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S<b>303 , the main CPU 201 determines whether power failure is detected.

If it is determined in S303 that the power failure has not been detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that power failure has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 45, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

At S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, power failure recovery is performed. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed. If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (when S315 determines NO), the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. Details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game is not permitted (when S315 determines NO), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (when S315 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, random number counter for judging special symbols, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

At S322, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed at S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (when S331 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S332). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the setting confirmation (when S333 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S333), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337. .

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, the currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

At S336, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S<b>342 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed at S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S351 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing (S352). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also carried out as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the recovery from power failure, setting change and setting confirmation is performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, the area in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "backup area") is cleared (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 . That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power cutoff, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is entered. After executing the RAM setting process (S371) at power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S372), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is ON (when S372 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the variable probability notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes starting opening winning detection processing (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S382). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set when a prize is won in the special winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passing detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, based on the detection of passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 by the passage gate switch 127, various random numbers for normal symbols (random numbers for judging normal symbols, etc.) are extracted. In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (normal symbol hit determination random numbers, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126. A normal symbol start is performed until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. It has a storage area (1) to a normal symbol start storage area (4). Then, in the ball passing detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting entrance winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, random number for first special symbol hit determination, random number for first special symbol, random number for reach determination for first special symbol, and random number for determination of first special symbol. Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing for setting payout information according to the first start opening winning is performed. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is less than four, for example. The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). In addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to first special symbol start storage area (4), the main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, if it is the upper limit of 4 (NO determination in S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (YES in S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

At S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

At S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch determination processing. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of special symbols, performing a hit determination process, etc., using the random number value extracted in S392 prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether or not the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random number value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. Considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect before and after the process of S395, for example, it is preferable to perform the process before and after. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

At S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information to increase the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1, the variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, the variation pattern command of the special symbol), etc. In this process, The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

At S<b>398 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 has detected a game ball.

If it is determined that the game ball has not been detected by the second starting opening switch 141 (NO determination in S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process, and changes the process to switch input detection processing (Fig. 51).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 141 (when S398 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, random numbers for second special symbol hit determination, random number for second special symbol, random number for reach determination for second special symbol, and random number for determination of second special symbol. Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing for setting payout information according to the second start opening winning is performed. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning to the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). . In addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to second special symbol start storage area (4), the main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, when the upper limit is 4 (when S400 determines NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and changes the process to the switch input detection process. (See FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (YES in S400), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

At S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, the variation pattern information of the second special symbol, etc., and the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 terminates the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

Note that the initialization process (S501) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) The manner of sound production and the like are determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, generates various requests (for example, a drawing request) for operating various effect devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, and character requests). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of effect mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs effect mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. FIG.

Sub CPU301, as one of the various processes performed in the production mode determination process, for example, the production pattern of the sub-variation production corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "the relevant fluctuation") (hereinafter "sub-variation A sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern"), a prefetch effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern of the prefetch effect (hereinafter referred to as a "prefetch effect pattern"), etc. are performed. In addition, in the effect mode determination process, the effect mode is determined, for example, a countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, or a B time-saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. Processing, etc., is also performed for determination processing of various effects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation production pattern is a production pattern that is performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols (for example, a variation pattern of decorative symbols or a character production patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation production, depending on the sub-variation production pattern to be executed, with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol It is possible to indicate that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-fluctuation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 to be described later. is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C is a reach indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a big hit) It is a performance. The jackpot type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect indicating the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the ready-to-win effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 preferentially executes one of the effects. good.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process. is provided for the hit determination processing of the special symbols (until the variable display of the special symbols is started), the sub-CPU 301 performs in the display area of the display device 7.

In the look-ahead effect, according to the look-ahead effect pattern to be executed, when in the pending state, with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the previously held start information), the look-ahead judgment It is possible to indicate that the degree of expectation for the outcome of the processing is maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using a pending image displayed on the display device 7, for example. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead determination process, that is, a result type of the special symbol hit determination process (whether it is a time-saving hit or a big hit). A look-ahead expected value production pattern capable of suggesting an expected value for the result of the win determination process being a win (big win or short-time win) is included. That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. is. Also, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. See) is performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-fluctuation effect pattern decision processing]
First, the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in the game state (normal game state) in which the time saving flag is off. This sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the gaming state (high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probable short-time gaming state) in which the time-saving flag is on, but the description is omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation production pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, displays as a variation production pattern corresponding to the variation. A sub-variation effect pattern (illustrated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-fluctuation production pattern includes time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, jackpot system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E. there is

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving winning as described above, and are ready-to-reach performances in which the possibility of time-saving winning can be grasped from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15). reference). This time-saving hit type reach A is not a prefetch target sub-variation production pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a pre-read sub-variation production pattern. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C are the same or substantially the same in appearance appearance. However, the time saving system reach B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching, while the time saving per system reach C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching ("prefetching flag" column in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and See FIG. 55 below).

The big hit system reach A, B, and C are the reach effects indicating the possibility of the big win as described above, and are the reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of the big win from the appearance. The jackpot system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "time saving hit". 15). This big hit type ready-to-win A is not a prefetch target sub-fluctuation effect pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a prefetch-type sub-fluctuation effect pattern. The big-hit reach B and the big-hit reach C have the same or substantially the same performance mode in appearance. However, the big-hit ready-to-win B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead, while the big-hit ready-to-win C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead (refer to the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a short time hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode that it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility. The common reach A is a win (big hit, short time hit) fixed reach production which is not displayed when the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is a loss, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "short time hit". (See FIG. 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same presentation mode in appearance. Further, the common reach D is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the big hit system reach C. In addition, common reach A and common reach B are not prefetch target sub-variation effect patterns, while common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are pre-read target sub-variation effect patterns ("Prefetch in FIG. 15 flags column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub fluctuation effect pattern.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, in the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6), the first special symbol start storage area (0) provided in the main RAM 203, the first special symbol start storage area (1), the first special symbol start storage area (2) , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4) as areas corresponding to the first sub reservation area (0), the first sub reservation area (1), the first There is provided one sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3) and a first sub-reservation area (4). In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), various items related to the extracted random value Hold information is stored. In addition, information corresponding to the variation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. As areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second sub-reserving area (0), the second sub-reserving area (1), the second sub-reserving area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3) and a second sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) It may be performed, or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 . In the display area of the display device 7, the 0th area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0), the first reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (1), the first A second reservation area corresponding to the sub reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (4) are provided. there is

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in look-ahead per type production pattern determination processing]
First, the table referred to in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, in the form of the pending image in which the prefetch effect is executed in the determined prefetch hit type effect pattern, there is a time saving prefetch effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. A big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and a common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility for both a time saving hit and a big hit are included.

The read-ahead winning type production pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win-type read-ahead production form to a time-saving winning-type read-ahead production form, or changes from a common winning-type look-ahead production form to a big win-type look-ahead production form. Thus, it is an effect pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table. In FIG. 55, only the fluctuation patterns to be read ahead among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54 are shown. Also, FIG. 56 is an example of a per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. , based on the variation pattern and the pending number. The pending number here includes start information to be prefetched. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is withheld, the number of reservations after the reservation corresponds to the number of reservations shown in FIG.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the variation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56 to determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "prefetching winning type effect pattern determination table number" is indicated as "SASPT number", and the "prefetching winning type effect pattern" is indicated as "SAS effect pattern". The sub effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received.

For example, when the read-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "55", the read-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined as "07H". Further, for example, when the look-ahead winning type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "77", the look-ahead winning type effect pattern is determined as "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (corresponding to reservation) in FIG. 56 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a time-saving hit system look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a time-saving hit. When the pending image is displayed in the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of the time-saving hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a big hit type look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit. When the pending image is displayed in the big-hit look-ahead presentation mode, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a big-hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a common winning type look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is possible for both the time saving winning and the big winning. When the reserved image is displayed in the common winning type look-ahead presentation mode, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a big win.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form is displayed in the third reservation area, and the common hit system is displayed in the second reservation area after shifting from the third reservation area. A look-ahead effect form is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the common winning system prefetching performance form changes to the time saving prefetching performance form, and the time saving prefetching performance form of "A" is displayed in the first reservation area. be done.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect pattern of "C" is displayed in the third reservation area. Then, when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area, the common hit system look-ahead performance form changes to the big hit system look-ahead performance form, the second reservation area, and the first reservation after shifting from the second reservation area In the area, the big-hit type anticipation effect form of "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes the following patterns a) to e). In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type look-ahead production form to the time saving type look-ahead production form, and the pattern of changing from the time saving type look-ahead production form to the big and short winning type look-ahead production form are the look-ahead type production patterns. Although not included in the pattern, these patterns may be included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern.
B) At the time of suspension, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed, and after that, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed without changing the production form. "09H").
b) A pre-reading big hit effect pattern (for example, a pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H") in which the big hit type prefetch effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big win type prefetch effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
c) A common winning type look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and then a look-ahead common winning performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead winning type look-ahead performance pattern "24H") that changes to a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form.
d) A read-ahead common win effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead win type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in a common win-type look-ahead effect form at the time of suspension and then changes to a big win-type look-ahead effect form.
E) A look-ahead common win effect pattern C (for example, a look-ahead common win effect pattern C in which the common win-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the common win-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, a look-ahead win type look-ahead effect pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number ). Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub effect selection random number value 1, A look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) is determined.

Note that FIG. 56 does not show the look-ahead winning type performance pattern in which the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form of "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and then changes to the big hit-type look-ahead performance form of "B". However, in this way, the sub CPU 301 may determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes from the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect form of "A" to the big win-type look-ahead effect form of "B". By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Also, in FIG. 56, as described above, the big hit look-ahead effect form "B" indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit (that is, there is a possibility of losing). In addition to the production form, a big hit confirmation look-ahead production form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the look-ahead winning type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following look-ahead type effect patterns f) to h).
f) A look-ahead big-win determination performance pattern A in which the big-win determination look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big-hit determination look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other prefetch production forms (for example, "A" short-time hit prefetch production form, "B" big hit prefetch production form, "C" common hit prefetch production form, etc.) are displayed. After that, a look-ahead big win confirmation performance pattern B that changes to a big win determination look-ahead performance form.
h) At the time of suspension, other prefetch effect forms (for example, "A" time-saving hit prefetch effect form, "C" common hit prefetch effect form, etc.) are displayed, and then "B" big hit system. A look-ahead big win fixed performance pattern C in which a look-ahead performance form is displayed and then changed to a big win fixed look-ahead performance form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving hit system look-ahead production form of "A", the big hit system look-ahead production form of "B", and the common hit system look-ahead production form of "C", at the time of suspension, "C" Although the display frequency of the common hit type look-ahead effect form is the highest, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of "A" may be the highest, and at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the big hit-type look-ahead effect form of "B" may be the highest. You can make it higher. Furthermore, the display frequency of the common win-type look-ahead effect form of "C" may be the lowest at the time of suspension.

Also, in FIG. 56, a random number 1 for sub-effect selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "prefetched per-type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not restrictive, and specific SASPT numbers are assigned. No sub effect selection random number value is assigned only to (that is, the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in look-ahead expected value production pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of winning) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is "shorter working hours" or "big hit". Also, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs in the effect form according to the expected value for the hit (time-saving hit, big hit).

When a pending image is displayed as a look-ahead effect form for saving time, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is usually represented by a triangle, is changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest when the retained image is a rectangle and highest when it is a star.

Also, when a pending image is displayed as a big-hit look-ahead effect form, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, is changed in color such as "blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest if the pending image is blue and highest if the pending image is a rainbow.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the case where the pending image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit, the pending image is set to, for example, the expected value for the big hit It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time-saving hit, or may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The reserved image in which the anticipation effect is performed can change from the effect form with the relatively low expected value to the effect form with the relatively high expected value, but the expected value is relatively high from the effect form with the relatively high expected value It is preferable not to change to a low production mode. Also, when changing the presentation form of the hold image, it is not necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow". , for example, "pentagon→circle" or "yellow→rainbow". Also, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the lowest expected value, such as a square or blue, but may be, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (response to reservation) in FIG. 57 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively, as in FIG.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ~ "5" indicates the height of the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, jackpot). For example, the above "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". "Hexagon" and "green" above correspond to "3", "circle" and "red" above correspond to "4", and "star" and "rainbow" above correspond to "5". Equivalent to

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. to "5" are referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" is shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in FIG. 57, for example, It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number 2 for sub effect selection. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2 for sub effect selection. The sub effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received. In FIGS. 57 and 58, only the case where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" is illustrated, and the illustration when the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for the sake of convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". . When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area. to "3", and when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the expected value level changes from "3" to "5".

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, when the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reservation area, and the second reservation area to the first reservation The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

In this way, the sub CPU 301, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58) ), and based on the number of reservations and the sub-effect selection random number value 2, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value production pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate is.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value production pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) with a relatively low expected value level is increased. However, it is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as even distribution.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, the sub effect selection random number value 2 having a predetermined width is assigned to all the "prefetch expected value effect patterns", but this is not restrictive, and a specific "prefetch expected value effect pattern" is assigned. ” (that is, the distribution rate of the specific “forecasting expected value effect pattern” may be set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing a prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As shown in FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not it has received a winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 301 terminates the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch target suspension is not at the current time, that is, whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed for the current suspension. When there are a plurality of suspensions, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of suspended images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one suspended image.

If the prefetch effect is being executed for the current hold (NO determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not being executed for the current hold (YES determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation pattern information received by the winning command is for prefetching (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not for prefetching (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetching effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received by the winning command is to be prefetched (YES in S3003), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling price and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number (for example, 4 or 8) that can be held. This processing is for avoiding the transition to the B time-saving game state before execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the suspension of the read-ahead performance despite the execution of the read-ahead performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number that can be reserved, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern information received by the winning command is When it is a prefetch target (when S3003 is YES determination), it may be determined whether or not it is larger than the pending number including the prefetch target. The ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as commands, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201 .

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "time saving win" or a "big win". In this process, the result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined based on the variation pattern information received in the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by transmitting special symbol winning/losing information from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301, it is possible to determine a "time-saving win" or a "big win".

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value production pattern (at the time of winning) determination processing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) of FIG. 57 is referenced to determine the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of winning). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing when losing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (when lost) of FIG. 58 is referenced to determine a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (when lost). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effect by performing look-ahead effect, example of expansion of look-ahead effect]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, the expected value of the hit (big hit, time-saving hit) is not only interesting, such as whether it changes to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form or a time-saving look-ahead effect form due to the change in the form of the pending image. It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to enhance the interest by performing a new production that has never existed before. In addition, the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Also, the form of the pending image performed as a prefetch effect (for example, the form of the pending image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserving area (4) to the first sub-reserving area (1)) is the first start port 120 It may be determined at the time of winning a prize, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbols of the variation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

By the way, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) in which the prefetching effect is executed in the prefetching time short hit effect pattern, and the variation in which the prefetching effect is executed in the prefetching big hit effect pattern Comparing the probabilities determined by the patterns (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the probability of the former is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is higher in the read-ahead short hit effect pattern than the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko game machine in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a big win, the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance can be increased while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of winning, and the interest is enhanced. can be increased.

In addition, the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big hit performance pattern may be higher than the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead short hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big win is higher than the expected value for the time-saving win, so it is possible to increase the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the game state (in this embodiment, normal game state, low probability time-saving game state) in which the probability variation flag is off, it is possible to win "time-saving hit" in the special symbol hit determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability short-time game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state is "time saving hit", when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the A time saving game state, and for the A time saving game state In any case where the C time saving game state is not repeatedly executed, the possibility of increasing the time saving number of times is low. Therefore, by minimizing the player's knowledge of the possibility of winning the "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving win" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-probability short-time game state, and the look-ahead effect is performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability short-time game state and high-probability low-time short game state. may Also, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may also be performed for the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, time-saving hit system reach, big hit system reach, or common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect with the prefetch time saving effect pattern, the time saving hit system reach is executed as the sub variable effect pattern. And do not execute jackpot reach. In addition, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big-hit performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the big-hit type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-type ready-to-win.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time saving effect pattern or the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, it is possible to execute the time saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern. However, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern when the pre-read effect is executed in the pre-read big hit effect pattern.

In addition, the prefetch big hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56) and the prefetch short time hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56) ”) or the prefetching common winning effect pattern (for example, the prefetching effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “27H” shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub CPU 301 performs the sub-fluctuation effect pattern As a common reach (for example, the sub-fluctuation pattern "0AH", "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) may be executed.

Moreover, after executing the time-saving winning system reach and clearly showing the loss in the time-saving winning system reach, a performance pattern may be provided in which the big winning system is executed. In this case, since the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end whether or not the jackpot-type ready-to-win with a high profit rate will be executed, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach E and the common reach C After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type ready-to-win C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, the game does not shift to the jackpot type reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the performance common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the short-time winning system reach C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, it does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "big hit look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit, has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 Do not execute look-ahead effects. Even in a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect when a big hit look-ahead effect has already been performed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which variable display of special symbols is started after this first hold ), and when the prefetching jackpot production pattern (for example, the prefetching hit type production pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is executed in the first reservation, the prefetching production is performed in the second reservation Even if executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may not make sense. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and is controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state is terminated, the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state, for example, the "time-saving win" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving win", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, when the big win look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to carry out the look-ahead performance for the suspension to be executed after the suspension in which the big win look-ahead performance is executed.

Even if the first suspension is the suspension of the big win (the suspension from which the big win is derived), if the prefetching performance is not executed for the first suspension, the prefetching performance is executed in the second suspension. may or may not be executed.

In addition, even when a fake big hit look-ahead effect (for example, a look-ahead winning type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if the time-saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first suspension, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second suspension. may This is because, even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, in the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, a small win is included in the first reservation. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is being executed, the big win look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is executed in the first reservation, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be performed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when the start information is suspended by winning the first start opening 120 during the execution of the jackpot-type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this suspension.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as “specific suspension” in the paragraph), and whether the look-ahead effect is executed or not performed for this specific suspension, the sub CPU 301 will be executed after the jackpot game state ends. , If it is not in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state, a low-probability short-time game state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. When there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the big win game state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as "specific suspension" in the paragraph), even if this specific suspension is suspension of "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 will play a C time reduction game based on "time reduction hit" after the jackpot gaming state ends. It may not be controlled by the state. For example, when the time-saving gaming state overlaps, it is a specification that does not execute multiple time-saving gaming states, and if it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead effect]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute a look-ahead effect using a pending image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

[1-10-1. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes the look-ahead hit type effect pattern and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead big hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing the possibility of a big win. It is a figure which shows a process. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H" or "78H" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. FIG. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas indicating whether reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Also, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301 designates the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub reservation area in which the reservation information is stored as indicated by triangles. A reserved image (hereinafter simply referred to as a “held image”) is displayed. Further, when the reservation information is not stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301 displays only the frame of the reservation area without displaying the reservation image.

In FIG. 60(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving areas (1) to (3) and no pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that the reservation information is newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved images shown in the first to fourth reserved areas 411 to 414 differently according to the expected value for the big hit. In this embodiment, except for the rainbow, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white. The color of the pending image displayed is blue (expected level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , a change from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reservation area 413 .

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. , is an image showing a change from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the pending image indicating the expected value for the big hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. .

In addition, in FIG. 60, the change in the expected value from which the big win is derived is shown by changing the big hit look-ahead effect form, but instead of or in addition to this, the big win determination look-ahead from the big hit look-ahead effect form is shown. The sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect that changes to the effect mode. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when prefetching production is performed in the prefetching time saving production pattern]
Next, a specific example in which a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time saving performance pattern as the look-ahead hit type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61 .

Figure 61 (a) ~ Figure 61 (f) is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit system It is a figure which shows the process which changes. Incidentally, the look-ahead time saving type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) corresponds to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH" or "6AH" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the fourth pending area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). Sub CPU301, as described above, displays the form (for example, shape) of the pending image shown in the first to fourth pending areas 411 to 414 differently depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big win is represented by the color of the pending image, and the expected value for the time saving win is represented by the shape of the pending image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first to third reserved areas 411 to 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape shown in the fourth reserved area 414 The shape of the retained image that is displayed is a rectangle (expectation value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413. FIG.

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412. FIG.

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 61(f) is an image obtained by shifting one hold from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

It should be noted that the shape of the hold image that indicates the expected value for the time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star", for example, change to "pentagon → circle" You may let

In addition, the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for the time saving (expected value level) does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending shifts, for example, even if it is changed during the variable display of the special pattern of the fluctuation good.

In addition, in FIG. 61, by changing the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived is shown. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301 . In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed with prefetching common hit effect pattern]
Next, a specific example in which the prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching common winning effect pattern as the above prefetching winning effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62 .

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which a pending|holding image changes from a system look-ahead production form to a big-hit system look-ahead production form. Changes in the common winning system look-ahead production form include changes in the expected value level of the win (shorter time win, big win) and changes in which it is clear whether the type of win is a big win or a short time win. is included. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to "43H" in FIG.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are used as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit. is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). . In this embodiment, if the look-ahead effect is not executed or if the expected value for winning is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow The expected value for short hits increases in the order of “stars”.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the third reserved area The form of the pending image shown at 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , When shifted to the first reservation area 411, from the green hexagon (common hit-type look-ahead production form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit-type look-ahead production form of expected value level "5") It is an image showing that it changed to

That is, the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(b) and FIG. 62(c) is a form showing an expected value for the big hit or a form showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(d), the form of the pending image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

Thus, in this embodiment, according to the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the look-ahead performance is divided into a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit and a look-ahead big hit performance pattern indicating the expected value for the big hit. , and a look-ahead common hit effect pattern indicating an expected value for a hit (big hit or time saving hit). Then, when the read-ahead performance is executed in the read-ahead common win performance pattern, the player is given the interest of whether the pending image changes to the big win system look-ahead performance form or the time-saving winning system look-ahead performance form. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the form of the pending image showing the expected value for time saving does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star” Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead production form)", or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → It may be changed to "triangular star (time-saving hit system look-ahead production form)". Also, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for a win does not necessarily have to start from the blue square with the lowest expected value, but may start from, for example, a red circle.

Also, the form of the hold image indicating the expected value for the win does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 62, by changing the common winning system look-ahead performance mode, the expected value for deriving any winning (big win or short-time winning) is changed, or the expected win is changed from an unknown state to a big win. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect shown below. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
A look-ahead effect that changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modified example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common hit system look-ahead production form that indicates that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit is not necessarily the color that indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the shape that indicates the expected value for the time saving hit. and is not limited to the form represented by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit-based look-ahead effect form may be provided. When a dedicated common hit system look-ahead performance form is provided, it becomes possible to have expectations for both big wins and short-time wins, and since the expected values of each are unknown, it will be possible to adapt to future changes in the performance mode. The game can be played with anticipation, and interest can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) show an example of a prefetch effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show a pending image from a dedicated common win system prefetch effect form to a big win system prefetch effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Also, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of the prefetch effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and from the exclusive common winning system prefetch effect form to the time saving system prefetch effect form FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a process in which a held image changes to . 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H" or "63H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 64(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

In Figure 63 (a) and Figure 64 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the second reservation area 413 No reserved image is displayed in the 4 reserved area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIG. 63(b) and FIG. 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a glittering form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and in FIG. It is an image showing that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , when shifted to the first reservation area 411, the image shows a change from the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form to a red triangle (big hit expected value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and in FIG. When the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it is an image showing that it has changed from the dedicated common winning system look-ahead production form to a white circle (expected value level "4" for time saving).

In this way, even when the look-ahead performance form is represented by the dedicated common win-type look-ahead performance form, the special common win-type look-ahead performance form is changed to the big win-type look-ahead performance form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form. It is possible to make the player have interest in which way it will change, and to increase interest.

[1-11. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8 ”, “prize information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" out of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, a payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the big winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 winning balls are paid out, and the starting opening (first starting opening 120 or second For example, three prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4), and four balls enter the general winning port 122 (see FIG. 4). prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for, for example, 120 msec at the timing when the tenth prize ball payout detection switch is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Information 1” signal is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting it for 120 msec is just an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of the errors in the first pachinko game machine. FIG. 67 is a table showing release triggers in , output times of "security" signals (illustrated as "security signals" in FIG. 67), and remarks;

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a large winning opening for small winning, FIG. 67 also shows a large winning opening abnormal winning error for small winning for the sake of convenience. In addition, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, errors not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Errors that are not shown in FIG. 67 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or longer, a large winning opening (for big wins) If there is a game ball that has not been ejected from the inside of the winning hole or the big winning hole for small wins, or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, there will be an error when the big winning hole enters and is ejected, and the vibration sensor has been on for a predetermined time. Vibration sensor error, etc., when on for a long period of time. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big winning game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big winning game control is finished. , it will be judged as an error even if there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening for the big win, but the game ball passes through the specific area. preferably configured.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection information executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where an abnormal winning error occurs in the big winning opening for big winning.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning prize is detected before the first big winning big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, etc., the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for a big win, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a big winning opening abnormal winning error" from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the voice control circuit 305.
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of signals output to the outside according to the game state in the first pachinko game machine. In FIG. 68, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, different signals are output depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) output. In addition, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, signals of “external information 3” and “external information 6” are output during a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a big hit, other than during a small hit) be done.

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state other than). Similarly, the signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), The signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the high probability short time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high probability short time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and the small hit game The signal output during the control process (during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small-win game control process different from the signal output when the small-win game control process is not being performed, the small-win game machine that is the source of the external information can win a small win. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed among the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

In addition, in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine described above, it is possible to control the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state by the control of the main CPU (function of the A time-saving game state, B The function of the time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state are installed), but it is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state) is installed, and the other function ( For example, it may be a pachinko game machine that does not include the function of the B time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state). Also, among the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function, two functions (for example, the A time-saving game state function, and the B time-saving game state function or C time-saving It may be a pachinko game machine that has only the function of the game state) and does not have other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the C time-saving game state).

In addition, for example, like a pachinko machine called ST machine, in a pachinko machine in which the probability variation flag is set to ON with a probability of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, the function of the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the function of the C time-saving game state may be configured so as not to be installed.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko machine differs from the first pachinko machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

Also, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration explained with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings is the same as the first pachinko game machine in terms of functions, etc., the first pachinko game Description will be made using reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the machine.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010 .

Various members arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko machine (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) are arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko machine (see FIG. 4). There are some things in common, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110 are provided. A center accessory 1115, a first starting port 1120, a general prize winning port 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting port 1140A, 1140B, and a normal electric role. It has an object unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010. - 特許庁Incidentally, the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007 . Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 1120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 1120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball enters the general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the start information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal design is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The reserved starting information of the normal symbol is usually subjected to the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 1127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

Also, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later), the accessory continuous operation device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a big win big winning hole 1131 and a big winning big winning hole count switch 1132 (see later-described FIG. 70) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning big winning hole 1131. , and the special electric accessory 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107 .

The big winning opening 1131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the big winning big winning opening 1131, a big winning big winning opening that can win a left-handed game ball, or a center accessory 1115 A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later), ten winning balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the shutter 1134 for special electric, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 1131 for a big win, and to enter (pass through) a game ball to the big winning opening 1131 for a big hit. ) is configured to allow state transitions to and from impossible or difficult closing states. It should be noted that the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. It is in play state.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second start opening, a second start opening 1140A and a second start opening 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105, and these second start openings 1140A and 1140B are both right-handed. A game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the second start ports 1140A and 1140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is detected by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The received starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 1131, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without winning the big winning hole 1131 for a big hit is moved to an upper flow path 1107a or a lower flow path 1107b by a branch peg 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example. distributed.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a win the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a may be configured to be able to win. In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but have not won the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 1178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is disposed on the lower flow path 1107b side, and includes a winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 1146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 1140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the normal electric shutter 1147 is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 1140B or is easily opened, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 1140B. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. Instead of the general electric shutter 1147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric tulip made of, for example, a blade member may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(small win unit)
The small winning unit 1150 includes a small winning large winning opening 1151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 for detecting the winning (passage) of the game ball to the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). , a small-hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward, and a small-hit solenoid 1154 that can operate the small-hit shutter 1153 are integrated.

The small-hit shutter 1153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction to enable or facilitate the entry (passage) of the game ball to the small-hit large winning opening 1151, and the game to the small-hitting large winning opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to win a prize.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 1152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 1145 in the downward flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning big winning port 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 1151 for winning, it is difficult (or impossible) to win the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning because the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side is won.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning and the big winning opening 1151 for small winning are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(out port)
The out port 1178 is any of various prize-winning ports (eg, the first starting port 1120, the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, the big winning port 1131 for big wins, the general winning port 1122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 1105. This is for ejecting game balls that did not win any prizes outside the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, between the normal electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. A game ball flowing down the region 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit is provided with a performance accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 for controlling the effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset It has a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with storage areas for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 1206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165, a 2 Special symbol reservation display unit 1166, probability variation notification display unit 1167, time reduction notification display unit 1168, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135, and small winning solenoid 1154 etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuitry 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starter switch 1121, second starter switches 1141A and 1141B, a pass gate switch 1127, a big win count switch 1132 for big wins, a general winswitch 1123 and a big win for small wins. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 operated to change or confirm setting values in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored by the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game center to expose the back surface, the manager of the game center operates the setting key 1174 and/or the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 .

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a character control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 . Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role product control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls and causing game balls to be shot. A launching device 1006 capable of controlling ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function is omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time reduction control is executed, the high probability time-saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time reduction control are executed, and the time reduction control although the variable probability control is executed A high-probability short-time gaming state that is not executed, and a low-probability short-time gaming state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared. It is possible to proceed with However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state progresses. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a regular game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 71 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 to be described later), that is, the game ball wins in the first start port 1120 or the second start ports 1140A, 1140B. It is a table referred to when "time-saving win", "minor win", "big win" or "losing" is decided by lottery based on the special symbol win judging random number extracted at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are "time-saving win", "minor win", "big hit", and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

The special symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination random number is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value in the first special symbol hit determination process. In the first special symbol hit determination table, the range (width) of the special symbol hit determination random number value determined for the "time saving hit" and the time saving hit corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between the range (width) of the special symbol hit judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as a "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the loss judgment value data corresponding thereto is defined.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving win", "minor win", "big win" or "losing" based on the extracted special symbol win determination random number value. . In the second special symbol hit determination table, the range (width) of the special symbol hit determination random number value determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging the special symbol hit determined for the "small hit" and the corresponding small hit judgment value data, special symbol determined for the "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) of the hit judgment random number value and the corresponding big hit judgment value data, and the range (width) of the special symbol hit judgment random number value determined as "losing" and the corresponding loss judgment Relationships with value data are defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the first special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 It is determined as "time saving hit", and the judgment value data is determined as "time saving hit judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for special symbol hit determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

In addition, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit". , and the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Further, when the extracted random number value for special symbol hit determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 ”, and the determination value data is determined as “time reduction hit determination value data”. Also, when the probability variation flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number is any one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing". , the determination value data is determined to be “loss determination value data”.

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit". , and the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON during the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit". , determines the judgment value data to be "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the second special symbol hit determination process, and the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing". , the determination value data is determined to be “loss determination value data”.

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the special symbol hit determination random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the second special symbol hit determination process) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding big hit determination value data and loss determination value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing so, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or reduces) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the big hit probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared to the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving game state when winning the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state, when the "time-saving win" is won just before the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state is substantially It will be extended, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving win" regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. . However, when the variable probability flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU 1201 controls the time saving game state, but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "designated symbol command" to be determined (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described later). The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 determines the selected symbol. "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 issues a selection symbol command "z10" is selected as the symbol designation command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, the small-hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated, and the winning (passing) of the game ball to the small-hit big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is possible or easily opened. Execution of the control to become the state, the prize balls can be paid out.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), determination value data is determined based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table ( 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the win/loss of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command may be determined together.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of the time saving win, the big win display mode, the small win display mode or the losing display mode based on the result of the special symbol win determination process.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the winning game state and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (that is, when determining the mode of the game state after that) When executing the hit type determination process of S1036 of FIG. 78). The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big winning game state or the mode of the small winning game state. Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, since the winning game state is not controlled when the result of the special symbol hitting determination process is "time saving hit", the aspect of the winning game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the hit determination process of this special symbol is performed, the number of times of time saving to be set is the same. . However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving win" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly changed to a special symbol. The information may be led out to display units 1163 and 1164 . Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving hit decision value data is not assigned to the special symbol hit decision random number value, that is, the hit decision processing that does not include "time saving hit" in the lottery result is performed. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) to 1 as the mode of the small winning gaming state. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "small win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described small win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then the determined small win big win. By setting the number of openings of the mouth 1151, it becomes possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot gaming state, Of the flags, it is decided to set only the variable probability flag to ON, and it is determined to set the variable probability number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and after the jackpot game state ends, can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state. becomes.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5" and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds and 10 rounds, respectively, as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. to decide. In addition, as a form of the game state after that, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times are both set to 10000 times. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag. Also, the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be set to 200 times, for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", and determined to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable in a time-saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state. In addition, the mode of time saving control in the high probability time saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving .

Also, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201 determines the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure 73.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Judgment value data is determined based on the random number for judging special symbol hits (hit-lose judgment is performed), and win-lose (“time-saving hit”, “minor hit”, “big hit” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. The selection symbol command is determined based on the determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, the type of time-saving hit, the type of big hit) derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164 is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, despite winning the "jackpot", it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of not winning the "jackpot" (the case of winning the "shorter working hours") becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time-saving gaming state higher than the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state You may make it higher than an expected value. Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B. Determine the variation pattern of the design. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S1037 of FIG. 78 described later.

In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to a special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. If so, set the readahead flag. The sub CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, in a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, or a low-probability short-time game state, for example, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the high start special symbol variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the special symbol variation pattern is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hit-or-lose), the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number. determined by However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start of FIG. 75, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start of FIG. The expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time is greater than when it is determined. In particular, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is, for example, approximately 600000 msec (for example, long variation AC) and variable over a very long period of time. display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for each set value, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection is changed so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different. good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74) is referred to determine the special symbol variation pattern, for example, high probability short game state, high probability non In the time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of variable display times of special symbols per unit time are provided, for example, according to the type of time-saving gaming state, special symbols Different tables may be referred to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 have the possibility of a time-saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 86), etc. ), hereinafter, the special symbol control processing will be described again, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is kept for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the right-handed hitting is the regular game state (for example, a high-accuracy short-time game state , high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect. In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-probability short-time game state, instead of the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, which is the main special design, other effects An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of times of time saving until the time saving game state ends) may be displayed.

At S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the timing to start the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1003. For example, NO determination is made in S1002 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

At S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

At S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1006. For example, NO determination is made in S1005 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1006, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

At S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is reached (when S1008 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1009.

At S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1009, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

At S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

At S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the time to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process, and shifts the process to the main control main process (Fig. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is reached (YES in S1011), no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, special symbol management processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1003, S1006, S1009 and S1012 during the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process and executed, the second special symbol is processed, and the special symbol management process is S1006 or S1006 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol is to be processed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023. It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1023 based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

At S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

At S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

At S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The processing of this S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S1028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called at S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 when the special symbol management process is called at S1006, and calls at S1009. If so, the process returns to S1010, and if called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S1023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1031), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S1031 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

At S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is determined as YES (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is ON (S1032 is NO determination ), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

When it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on in S1032 (NO determination in S1032), as described above, the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 displays the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S1032 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1033.

At S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination process is performed using a special symbol hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether there is In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a time saving hit, and turns on the small winning flag when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off when shifting to the C time-saving game state, the small winning flag is turned off when the small winning game state is started, and the big winning flag is turned off when the big winning game state is started.

In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and if it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

At S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time-saving hit, small hit, big hit, or loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. A stop symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of the winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a winning (a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the reach determination random number or/and the effect selection random number. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value or the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state) where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, a special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75 ) to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

At S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the special symbol variation time. be. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

At S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 77 S1024) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

At S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1041.

At S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S1041) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)) by interrupt prohibition. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S1051 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

At S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

At S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S1052.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on in S1053 (if the determination is NO in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the special symbol management process (Figure 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S1053 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

At S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1055.

At S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1056.

At S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

At S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small win.

In S1057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO in S1057), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1057 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when S1057 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1058.

At S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

At S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big win.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (when S1059 determines NO), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1059 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when S1059 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

At S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and changes the processing to special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (YES in S1061), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1064.

At S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the win flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this processing, when the result of the hit determination processing for the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1065.

At S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

At S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

At S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1068.

At S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

At S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when S1071 determines NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S1071 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (when S1073 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In this embodiment, the following S1075 to S1081 are common processing for the convenience of explanation in the case of a big hit (when S1072 is YES) and when it is a small hit (when S1073 is YES). will be described with reference to However, while the conditional device operates in the case of a big hit, the conditional device does not operate in the case of a small win, so strictly speaking, different processes are executed depending on whether it is a big win or a small win (for example, , the number of rounds is set in the case of a big hit, while the number of openings is set in the case of a small hit, etc.).

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning) (S1077), the external terminal board 1184 Big hit signal set processing (S1078), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game state designation parameter setting processing (S1080), and transmission reservation processing for the big hit start display command (S1081 ), etc. In addition, by performing the process (S1079) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 77 S1026) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1074 during the special symbol game determination processing (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1026 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S1101), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S1101 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the small winning big winning opening 1151) reaches the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the big-hit jackpot 1131 opened in the big-hit gaming state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit large winning opening 1151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S1103 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

At S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S1104) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 77 S1028) is performed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1105.

At S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S1106). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the preparation processing for opening the big winning opening, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1103), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1108.

At S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. A big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning big winning opening 1151), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the winning of the big winning opening The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when the big winning game control process is executed, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 1151 for small winnings when the small winning game control process is executed. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 1131 and the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, processing for generating opening/closing control data for the big winning openings (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

At S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1111) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1112.

At S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

At S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if the determination in S1121 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S1121 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning the big winning openings (the big winning opening 1131 for the big winning, the big winning opening for the small winning 1151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 1132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70) etc.) is the value of the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

In S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S1122), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is YES determination) , the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has passed.

When it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) has not elapsed (NO determination in S1123), the main CPU 1201 determines that the winning opening has not occurred. The mouth opening control process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) has passed (if YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 The process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs closing processing of the big winning openings (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1125.

At S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1125) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

At S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S1131), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S1131 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

At S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) is set or reset, and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, pattern fixed number counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened) counter, big winning opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) is set or reset. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high-probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1133.

At S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 83 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end processing of FIG. 83, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management processing (S1091) is performed, but strictly speaking, this time saving management processing (S1091) is a small hit. If there is (if YES determination in S1073 of FIG. 81), it is executed, but if it is a big hit (if YES determination is made in S1072 of FIG. 81), the process is skipped without being executed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), since hitting to the right is a regular game mode, the game to the second start port 1140A, 1140B A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting opening, the first The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a small hit rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 1131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency that the second start opening 1140B will be in the open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state Therefore, if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small winning large winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 1151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win the second start port 1140A. When the game ball wins in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximate) Not only the display mode is derived, but also super-speed fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 75). The winning frequency of the game ball to the winning opening 1151 is increased compared with other game states (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high certainty short working hours gaming state, the low certainty short working hours gaming state), the second start port 1140B is opened by executing the electric sapo control, and is struck to the right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b end up winning the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 1107a enters the second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but at the second start port 1140A, it is hit to the right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the path 1107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. Thus, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) to be paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the normal symbol hit is displayed in a stop display mode. When pulled out, the normal electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small winning big winning opening 1151 is opened by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal game state, since the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), provisionally, the game ball wins the second start port 1140A, 1140B. Even if it does, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 1151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is used as the first starting opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and establishes the starting condition of the second special symbol with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variator to However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 2105. center accessory 2115, first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140, general prize winning port 2122, passage gate unit 2125, special electric accessory unit 2130, and ordinary electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 2110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 2118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 2120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting hole 2120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right region 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 2125 may be located in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that makes it possible.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right region 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 2147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) for operating the shutter 2147 for normal electric power. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the normal electric shutter 2147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 2140 or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 2140. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right region 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. Attacker count switch 2153, V winning port 2155 through which game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 are V A V winning opening switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball has entered (passed through) a winning opening 2155, and a game ball that has entered the interior of the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning opening 2151 but has not entered the V winning opening 2155. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2158a for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a V winning. A locking member 2159 capable of holding only one of the game balls entered inside the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that the later-described "accessory hit" is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( (see FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and performs the functions of the main CPU 2201. is added to the value of the V attacker win counter. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 2152 to open or close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) for opening the opening/closing winning port 2151 has not elapsed. Mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects that a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V-attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 continues opening control of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, not limited to this, for example, when controlled to the big win game state through the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a large winning opening A round game may be executed to move 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), the V winning opening and the big hit game The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball enters the V prize opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. enters, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

V-shutter 2158 operates a V-shutter solenoid 2158a (see FIG. 88, which will be described later) to operate a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through V-winning opening 2155, and a game ball opening to V-winning opening 2155. A constant movement is always performed between the open mode in which the ball can (or easily) pass through. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2159 is provided above the V winning opening 2155 and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 . A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2159 is ejected from the loss port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2159 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the activation of the V attacker 2152, the locking member 2159 releases the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2159 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is open at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it passes through the losing opening 2157 . In addition, without providing the locking member 2159 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the machines to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I/O port 2205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 2165, a 2 Special symbol holding display unit 2166, time saving notification display unit 2168, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, and V shutter solenoid 2158a are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuitry 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of, for example, a pachinko game machine with a setting function. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starter switch 2121, a second starter switch 2141, a pass gate switch 2127, a big prize winner count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winner count switch 2156, and a general switch. A winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 2174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 2203 can be transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the person in charge of the game hall to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 .

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a character control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 . Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which the time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which the time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display a hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007 .

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 89 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball wins (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol hit determination random number value. , The result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes through) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol hit determination process based on the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol hit determination random number value. The result of the determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "jackpot" or "accessory release hit".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120 include "time saving hit", "big hit ” Or the range (width) of the random number value for judging the special symbol determined to be “losing”, and the corresponding judgment value data (“time saving judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data ”). In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, the special The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging the design and the corresponding judgment value data (“Time saving judgment value data”, “Big hit judgment value data”, “Accessory release judgment value data”) is stipulated. It is

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

Further, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the special symbol hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the first special symbol hit determination random number value and the second special symbol hit determination random number value are generated in the range of 0 to 65535 (width).

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at high settings than at low settings. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting port 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, for example. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 outputs the selected symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory release hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted for the third pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described for the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display portion 2163 or the second special symbol display portion 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the winning prize or the display mode of losing is derived based on the result of the special symbol win determination processing. be.

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. In the hit type determination table, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the aspect of the subsequent game state (more specifically, It is referred to when determining time saving flag and time saving end condition). The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state. "L" shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 and determines not to set the time saving flag to ON. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time saving flag is set on, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory released", if the big win game state is not controlled through the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big win game state. Not only does it not, the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing the control based on the winning of the opening of the role, the game state immediately before the opening of the role is restored.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the aspect of the jackpot game state and the aspect of the subsequent game state as described above Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this, different conditions may be used. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B Only one of the time saving game state and the C time saving game state may be different. Also, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. , A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state may be changed only in one of the time saving game state. That is, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to at least one of the A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state, and C time reduction game state. You may make it differ in a game state.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the "remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first start port 2120, and determines the first special symbol when the game ball wins the second start port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the first start port 2120 when the game ball wins. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the value of the time saving flag, the game ball entering the first start port 2120 (passing ) is determined based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for effect selection extracted at the time of ). It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, since hitting to the right is the normal game mode, it is considered that the game ball rarely enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second start port 2140. It is determined based on the extracted random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

The random number for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number for effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 2120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 2301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

For the sake of convenience, it does not appear in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. If the probability variation flag is on, do not set the look-ahead flag.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time saving hit). Further, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 103), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2002), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S2002 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2003), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2004), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2005. to

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S2003 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process of Move to S2005.

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when S2003 is YES determination, and the first special symbol when S2004 is YES determination. A special design is a processing object. In addition, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

At S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The processing of this S2015 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The processing of this S2018 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 . If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The processing of this S2019 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this big winning hole opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 . If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. The processing of this S2020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S2021 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing object, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is the object of processing, it is determined which of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time saving hit, a big hit, a role release hit or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a winning (time-saving winning, big winning, accessor product opening winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, a prize-opening hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the prize-opening hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and accessory-opening wins. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and/or prize release wins, a plurality of losing types may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random value or / And the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited interval. It is preferable to use

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S2051 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In addition, in the big hit game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058), and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the big hit start display command. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of this special symbol game determination process. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a win, ie, that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol is a winning prize, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the winning prize (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2061. to

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting a winning winning prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing for setting the game state designation parameter (S2065). ), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the per-accessory-per-release start display command. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a one-type and two-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy game state, the time-saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is similar to that shown in Fig. 32 in the first pachinko game machine. There are some differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on. In the pachinko game machine of No. 3, it is not controlled to a high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON when the variable probability flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. different in In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the state of the probability variation flag (on or ON) (see S191, S202, S211), respectively, the processing after S192, S203, S212 is performed. Since it is not controlled to the game state, it differs in that the processes after S192, S203, and S212 are performed without checking the state of the variable probability flag. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

At S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S2081 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the processing (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation processing ends. will be performed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S2091 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning prizes (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 2151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has passed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not passed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

At S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V prize detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the interior of the V winning device 2150. The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, V hit signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V per game control of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, the V-per-game control executed by determining that there was a V winning prize detection (S2095 was determined YES) will be started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of operations of the V attacker 2152) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), and the V hit start display command transmission reservation process (S2103). In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that V winning has not been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S2111 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S2113 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". Thus, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big win opening preparation process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S2116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the winning of the opening of the role, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the role is derived (YES determination in S2060 of FIG. 97), and V winning is detected (Fig. 100 S2095 is determined YES) If it is the V winning game control started by, the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the processing (S2121) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of the preparation processing for opening the large winning opening, the control processing for opening the large winning opening (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is executed. will be performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when S2131 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) that counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 88) is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO in S2132), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2134. Transfer.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S<b>2134 , the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 . After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO determination in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94). , the processing is returned to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g., variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (e.g., variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning entrance winning counter, etc.) set value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. However, in the special symbol game end process of FIG. 98, for convenience of explanation, it is shown that the time saving management process (S2071) is performed. If it is a hit (if determined as YES in S2060 of FIG. 97), it is executed, but if it is a big hit (if determined as YES in S2052 of FIG. 97), the process is skipped without being executed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described below. This fourth pachinko gaming machine is a gaming machine equipped with a small winning rush, and like the second pachinko gaming machine, the pachinko gaming machine is capable of variably displaying first special symbols and second special symbols in parallel. is. However, the fourth pachinko game machine is a so-called ST machine that shifts to a normal game state even if it is not controlled to a jackpot game state when it is controlled to a high-precision game state over a specified number of times (for example, 120 times). be.

Hereinafter, in describing the fourth pachinko game machine, the description of common points with the second pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of this fourth pachinko game machine are the same as those of the second pachinko game machine.

Also, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the second pachinko game machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the second pachinko game machine. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the second pachinko machine, the second pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[4-1. Configuration of game board unit]
FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko game machine. In FIGS. 108 and 109, not only the description but also the reference numerals of the components common to the second pachinko game machine described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 108, the first starting port 4120 has a first starting port 4120A and a first starting port 4120B, unlike the second pachinko game machine.

The fourth pachinko game machine includes a first starting port switch 4121A (see FIG. 109) that detects passage of game balls to the first starting port 4120A, and a first starting port switch 4121A that detects passage of game balls to the first starting port 4120B. 1 starting switch 4121B (see FIG. 109).

When the game balls pass through the first starting port 4120A, for example, three game balls are paid out. When the game ball passes through the first starting port 4120B, for example, one game ball is paid out.

The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing.

The first starting port 4120B is arranged, for example, below the first starting port 4120A, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing.

Incidentally, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the normal electric accessory 4146 is arranged, for example, below the first starting port 4120A. The normal electric accessory 4146 operates a movable member 4147 called a so-called electric chew, so that the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first start port 4120B is possible or easy, and the first start port 4120B A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize, and a state transition to the closed state are possible. The normal electric accessory 4146 in the fourth pachinko game machine is arranged below the first start port 4120A, and the winning port for which the ease of winning is changed by state transition is the first start port 4120B. Although it differs from the second pachinko game machine in some respects, the rest of the configuration and functions are the same as those of the second pachinko game machine, so the description is omitted here. In FIG. 108, the open state of the movable member 4147 is indicated by a dashed line, and the closed state of the movable member 4147 is indicated by a solid line.

The passage gate 4126 of the passage gate unit 4125 is not arranged in the right area 4107, but is arranged in the left area 4106 so that the left-handed game ball can pass through.

Although the passage gate 4126 may function as a trigger for activating the character product continuous actuating device in the same manner as the second pachinko game machine, the character product continuous actuating device A gate may be placed in the right region 4107 to trigger the activation of .

The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the normal electric accessory 4146, and it is possible to win a game ball regardless of whether it is hit left or right. The special electric accessory unit 4130 has a big winning prize opening 4131 and an opening/closing member 4134 that can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. , the right-handed game ball can win a prize in the big winning opening 4131 for big winning.

In the right region 4107, for example, two upper and lower flow paths 4107a and 4107b are formed as flow paths for a game ball struck to the right. In the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball is distributed to the upper flow path 4107a with a probability of about 1/3, and is configured to be distributed to the lower flow path 4107b with a probability of about 2/3. It is

The second starting port 4140 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 4107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 4107a can win. Passage of the game ball to the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 109). In addition, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls that flow down the upper flow path 4107a will win the second starting port 4140.

As in the second pachinko game machine, the small winning unit 4150 has a large winning opening 4151 for small winning in the right region 4107 . This small-hit big winning opening 4151 is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 4107b can win a prize. The easiness of winning a prize is configured to be changeable. Incidentally, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls into the big winning hole for small hit 4151 is, for example, 10, but is not limited to this.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 4131 for big winning and the big winning opening 4151 for small winning are separately provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

Also, as shown in FIG. 109, the fourth pachinko game machine has a main control circuit 4200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, as in the second pachinko game machine. A circuit 4300 and the like are provided.

[4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the first start ports 4120A and 4120B are displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started (that is, the first special It is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 at maximum) until the symbol hit determination process is performed. Similarly, the various random numbers acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 4140 are provided to the hit determination process of the second special symbol until the variable display of the second special symbol is started (that is, the second special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4).

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the special symbol hit determination acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 4120A, 4120B or the second start port 4140. It is a table referred to when determining a "time-saving win", a "minor win", a "big win" or a "loss" by lottery based on random numbers. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are "small hit", "big hit", and "losing". However, the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol may include "small hit", and the lottery mode in the hit determination process of the second special symbol may include "time saving hit". .

The special symbol hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as in the second pachinko gaming machine. In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination random number is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 4201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value in the first special symbol hit determination process. In the first special symbol hit determination table, the range (width) of the special symbol hit determination random number value determined for the "time saving hit" and the time saving hit corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between the range (width) of the special symbol hit judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as a "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the loss judgment value data corresponding thereto is defined.

Also, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines a “small win”, a “big win” or a “lose” based on the extracted special symbol win determination random number value. In the second special symbol hit determination table, the range (width) of the special symbol hit determination random number value determined as "small hit" and the corresponding small hit for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) Relationship with judgment value data, relationship between the range (width) of the special symbol hit judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and special symbol hit determined as a "losing" The relationship between the range (width) of the judgment random number value and the loss judgment value data corresponding thereto is defined.

In this embodiment, in both the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the probability that the big hit determination value data is extracted when the probability variation flag is off (jackpot probability) is 201 It is 1/200.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU4201, even if the probability variation flag is on, can be determined to be "time saving hit", but instead of this, if the value of the probability variation flag is on, "time saving hit" may be excluded from the lottery targets so as not to be determined as "working time saving".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but for example, in the high-probability-low base state "time-saving hit" is elected. If it is a specification to move to the base state, by not providing "time saving hit" in the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, substantially "time saving hit" in the high probability low base state You can choose not to win.

[4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 (see FIG. 109) provided in the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 4120A, 4120B or the second start port 4140 and the aforementioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the determining "selection pattern command" and "designation command". The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 determines the symbol random number value of the first special symbol. , for example, one of "z0", "z1" and "z2" is selected as the selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs, for example, "z3" or "z4 ”, and select “zA2” or “zA3” as the design designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs a selected symbol command such as "z5 ”, and select “zA4” as the design designation command.

Also, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs a selected symbol command, for example, " "z6" is selected, and "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs, for example, "z7" or "z8" as the selected symbol command according to the symbol random number value of the second special symbol. ”, and select “zA6” or “zA7” as the design designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 4201 outputs a selected symbol command, for example, "z9 ”, and select “zA8” as the design designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the fourth pachinko game machine, as in the second pachinko game machine, the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 displays the first special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol stops. Part 4163 or second special symbol display portion 4164 (see FIG. 109) special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12 (A )) is stored.

[4-4. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In the fourth pachinko game machine, the game state is a low-probability low base state (normal game state), a low-probability high-base state (low-probability short-time game state), a high-probability high-base state (high-probability short-time game state), and It is controlled to one of the high-probability low base state (high-probability non-time-saving game state). Among these game states, in the low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, and high-probability-high base state, left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and the winning of the game ball to the first start ports 4120A and 4120B The game progresses based on this. In the high-probability-low base state, hitting to the right is the normal game mode, and the game progresses based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4140. - 特許庁

The winning type determination table is a winning game state mode and/or according to a selected symbol command determined corresponding to a special symbol random number value and a game state when the special symbol winning determination process is performed. and is referred to when determining the mode of the subsequent game state. The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 112 shows the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) or the mode of the smaller winning game state (more specifically, the number of times of opening). Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

(In case of short working hours)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving game state is determined as follows.

In the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", for example, the main CPU 4201 turns on only the time saving flag out of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Decide to set it to In addition, set the number of times of time saving to 1 time (if the selected pattern command is "z0"), 6 times (if the selected pattern command is "z1"), or 12 times (if the selected pattern command is "z2") decide to When the display mode per time saving is derived to the 1st special design display part 4163, it becomes possible to shift to the C time saving game state.

In addition, in the high-probability high base state or the high-probability low base state, even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. Therefore, in the high-probability-low base state or the high-probability-low base state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 does not shift to the C time saving gaming state, high Continue the low base state. In addition, in the high-probability-high base state or the high-probability-low base state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may not include "time saving hit".

(When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the A time-saving game state are determined as follows.

In the low-probability-low base state or high-probability-low base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 , as a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the variable probability flag out of the variable probability flag and the short time flag is set to ON, and the number of variable probability is set to 120. Decide to set the times. In this case, after the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, it controls to the big win game state, and after finishing this big win game state, it is possible to control to the high probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low-probability-high base state or high-probability-high base state, if the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z3" (high-probability big hit), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and determines to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is determined to set the probability variable number of times to 120 times and the time saving number of times to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display section 4163, the main CPU 4201 controls to the big win game state, and after finishing this big win game state, it becomes controllable to the high probability/high base state.

Also, in the low-probability-low base state, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 determines the winning game state. As a mode, the number of rounds is determined to be 4 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are not set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 4201 can be controlled to the low probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, or high-probability-low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z4" (low probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time-reduction flag to ON among the variable probability flag and the time-reduction flag as the mode of the subsequent game state. to decide. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 4163, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 4201 can be controlled to the low probability high base state. Become.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit)
In the low-probability-low base state or high-probability-low base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 , as a mode of the winning game state, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that only the variable probability flag out of the variable probability flag and the short time flag is set to ON, and the number of variable probability is set to 120. Decide to set the times. In this case, after the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it is possible to control to the high probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low probability high base state or high probability high base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z7" (high probability big hit), the main The CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and determines to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON as the mode of the subsequent game state. In this case, it is determined to set the probability variable number of times to 120 times and the time saving number of times to 50 times. After the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display section 4164, the main CPU 4201 controls to the big win game state, and after finishing this big win game state, it becomes controllable to the high probability/high base state.

Also, in the low-probability-low base state, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low-probability big hit), the main CPU 4201 will be in the winning gaming state. As a mode, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, and as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are not set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, then controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 4201 can control to the low-probability/low base state. Become.

Also, in the low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, or high-probability-low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", and the selected symbol command is "z8" (low probability In the case of a jackpot), the main CPU 4201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the winning game state, and sets only the time-reduction flag to ON among the variable probability flag and the time-reduction flag as the mode of the subsequent game state. to decide. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, then controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 4201 can be controlled to the low probability high base state. Become.

(In the case of a small hit)
If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "small hit" (selected symbol command is "z6"), low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state, and high probability low In any of the base states, the main CPU 4201 determines the number of openings of the small-hit big winning opening 4151 (see FIG. 108) to be one as the mode of the small-hit gaming state. In this case, the main CPU 4201 derives the above-described small winning display mode to the second special symbol display unit 4164, and then controls it to the small winning game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

(In case of loss)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z5" and "z9"), the main CPU 4201 determines the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent game state. None of the aspects of That is, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 4201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", there is no need to show it in the hit type determination table of FIG. 112 originally. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure 112 .

[4-5. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start or the special symbol variation pattern table for high start. Since the special symbol variation pattern table for low start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 74, the description thereof is omitted. Similarly, the special symbol variation pattern table for high start is the same as the table shown in FIG. 75, so the description is omitted.

In addition, in the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start. Determine the variation pattern of the special design. On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state in which right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the main CPU 4201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

That is, in the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state, the operating frequency of the normal electric accessory 4146 is increased, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the first start port 4120B is increased. However, even in the low-probability-high base state or high-probability-high base state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start. Therefore, even if the game ball wins the second start port 4140 by hitting right in the low probability base state or the high probability base state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74 ), the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely long time of approximately 600000 msec. In this regard, in the low probability high base state and high probability high base state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 140B is increased, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75) shown This is different from the second pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short period of time such as 1000 msec.

[4-6. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 113 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, based on the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 108). It is a table referred to when determining "per normal symbol" or "losing" by lottery.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 4201 extracts the normal symbol hit determination random number from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201 determines "normal symbol hit" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. In the normal design hit determination table, for each state (on / off) of the time saving flag, the range (width) of the normal design hit determination random number value determined as "normal design hit" and the corresponding normal design hit The relationship between the determination value data and the range (width) of the normal symbol per determination determination random number value determined as "loss" and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto are defined.

For example, in the low-base state (low-probability-low base state, high-probability-low base state) in which the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 4201 determines that the extracted normal symbol per determination random number is any one of 0 to 94. is determined as "normal design hit", and the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". Further, when the extracted normal symbol winning judgment random number value is any one of 95 to 98, the main CPU 4201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Also, for example, in the high-base state (low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state) in which the time-saving flag is on, the main CPU 4201 determines that the extracted normal symbol per determination random number is any one of 0 to 98. If there is, it is determined as "normal pattern hit", and the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". In addition, when the extracted normal symbol winning determination random number value is 99, the main CPU 4201 determines that it is "losing" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

[4-7. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 114 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the normal symbol stop symbol based on the normal symbol symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 108) and the aforementioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit". "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The normal symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). In addition, in this embodiment, there is one type per normal symbol, but a plurality of types may be provided.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 114, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in the low base state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201, regardless of whether the normal symbol random number value is 0 to 99, "fz0" is selected as a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the high base state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 4201, regardless of whether the normal symbol random number value is 0 to 99, "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

[4-8. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 115 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 4202 of the main control circuit 4200 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108), according to the normal per symbol selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Referenced when making decisions.

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz0", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108), to the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 4146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", the main CPU 4201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 4146 (see FIG. 108), to the first opening time of 2000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In this embodiment, there are two opening patterns for the normal electric accessory 4146, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, more opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be provided, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the time-saving game state, for example. In addition, a plurality of types of selected symbol commands may be further provided at the time of normal symbol winning, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined according to the type of the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning, for example. Furthermore, according to the type of the time-saving gaming state and the type of the normal symbol-per-time selection symbol command, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 4146 may be determined.

[4-9. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 116 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 4201 changes the normal symbol based on the state (on/off) of the time saving flag and the random number for normal symbol effect selection acquired when the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126 (see FIG. 108). determine the pattern. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the low base state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500000 msec, regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99.

Also, in the high base state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are two patterns of the variable display time of normal symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, more patterns of variable display time of normal symbols may be provided, and the pattern of variable display time of normal symbols may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state, for example. In addition, a plurality of types of selected symbol commands may be provided at the time of normal winning, and the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbols may be determined according to the type of the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbols, for example. Furthermore, the pattern of the variable display time of the normal symbols may be determined according to the type of the time-saving gaming state and the type of the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbols.
[4-10. Game flow]
FIG. 117 is an example of a game state transition diagram in the fourth pachinko game machine.

First, the initial state at the time of shipment or after the RAM is cleared is the low-probability base state. The flow of the game will be described assuming that the game is started in this low-probability-low base state.

[4-10-1. Game in low probability low base state]
As described above, the low-probability-low base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the low-probability-low base state, the game is played so that the game ball launched toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first start ports 4120A and 4120B. Since the electric sapo control is not executed in the low probability base state, most of the games are based on the winning of the first start port 4120A. When a game ball wins in the first start openings 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs hit determination processing for the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then ends the low probability low base state. and move to the low definite high base state. The winning probability of "time saving hit" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. 1, 6, or 12 times as appropriate.

Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", as shown in FIG. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Move to high probability low base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "big win" and the type of big win is a low-probability big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and ends the big win game state. After that, control to the low probability and low base again.

Thus, in the low-probability-low base state, based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, it is configured not to shift to the high-probability-high base state.

[4-10-2. Game in the low certainty base state]
As described above, the low probability-high base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the low probability height base state, the game is played so that the game balls shot toward the game area 4105 mainly win the first start ports 4120A and 4120B. Especially in the low certainty high base state, since electric support control is executed, most of the games are based on the winning of the first start port 4120B. When a game ball wins in the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, and then continues the low-probability-high base state. do. The type of time-saving gaming state in this low probability high base state is C time-saving gaming state. In addition, the winning probability of "time saving hit" is approximately 1/6 as shown in FIG. It should be noted that, if elected in the "time saving hit" in the low probability high base state, the time saving gaming state will overlap unless the time saving final variation. In this case, the concept of the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability-high base state (that is, the number of times of time saving) is as described above in the column of "duplication of time saving gaming state". For example, if the time-saving gaming state is superimposed and executed, the main CPU 4201 has the higher number of the time-saving remaining times in the low probability high base state and the time-saving number of times set based on the "time-saving hit". Continue the low-definite-high base state until the number of time reductions on the other side is digested. On the other hand, if the time-saving gaming state is not superimposed, the main CPU 4201 continues the low-probability-high base state until the remaining number of time-savings in the low-probability-high base state is exhausted.

Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", as shown in FIG. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z4").

When the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Move to high accuracy high base state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "big win" and the type of big win is a low-probability big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and ends the big win game state. After that, control to the low probability height base again. It should be noted that the type of time-saving gaming state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the set number of times of time saving is consumed without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 terminates the low-probability-high base state and shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

Acquired based on the winning probability of "time saving hit" in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the number of time saving times set when winning "time saving hit", and the winning of the game ball to the first start port 4120A, 4120B Considering the number of random numbers that can be reserved, among the low probability base state, low probability base state, high probability base state and high probability base state, the retention rate of the low probability base state is the highest. get higher

[4-10-3. Game in high accuracy high base state]
As described above, the high-probability-high base state is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal. Therefore, in the high-probability-high base state, the game is played so that the game ball shot toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the first start ports 4120A and 4120B. In particular, since electric sapo control is executed in a high-probability-high-base state, most of the games are based on winnings to the first starting port 4120B. When a game ball wins in the first start openings 4120A and 4120B, the main CPU 4201 performs hit determination processing for the first special symbol.

In the high probability high base state, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, The high probability high base state up to now is continued without activating the new C time-saving game state. Therefore, the time saving game state does not overlap. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 forces the "time saving hit" to lose, and the display mode of losing is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. may be made.

When the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 111, 87% is a high probability big hit (selected symbol command is "z3"), The selected pattern command is "z4").

When the result of the first special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Control to the high-precision high-base state again. In addition, the type of the time saving game state in this high probability high base state is the A time saving game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is "big win" and the type of big win is a low-probability big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 4 rounds, and ends the big win game state. After that, move to the low probability high base state. It should be noted that the type of time-saving gaming state in this low probability high base state is A time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the set number of times of time saving is consumed without winning the jackpot, the main CPU 4201 terminates the high-probability/high-base state and shifts to the high-probability/low-base state. In this embodiment, when the high-probability jackpot is won in the low-probability-high base state, and when the high-probability-high base state is elected in the high-probability-high base state, control is performed to the high-probability-high base state. In this case, the set number of times of time saving is 50 times. On the other hand, the set probability variation number is 120 times. Therefore, the number of probability variations remaining after the number of times of time saving is digested (for example, 70 times in this embodiment) will be controlled to the high-probability-low base state.

[4-10-4. Game in high accuracy and low base state]
As described above, the high-probability-low base state is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal. Therefore, in the high-probability-low base state, the game is played so that the game ball shot toward the game area 4105 mainly wins the second start port 4140 . When the game ball wins in the second starting port 4140, the main CPU 4201 performs a hit determination process for the second special symbol.

In the hit determination process of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 110, there is no chance of winning the "time saving hit". In addition, assuming that the first special symbol hit determination process is performed by the game ball winning the first start port 4120A, 4120B, and the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". Also, the main CPU 4201 derives the display mode of "time-saving hit" to the first special symbol display unit 4163, but continues the high-probability-low base state without activating the C time-saving gaming state. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time saving hit", the main CPU 4201 forces the "time saving hit" to lose, and the display mode of losing is derived to the first special symbol display unit 4163. may be made.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", as shown in FIG. It is a big hit (selected symbol command is "z8").

If the result of the second special symbol win determination process is "big win" and the type of big win is a high-accuracy big win, the main CPU 4201 controls the big win game state over 10 rounds, and after the big win game state ends, Control to high probability low base state again. That is, the high probability low base state is looped.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is a low-probability jackpot, the main CPU 4201 controls the jackpot game state over 10 rounds, and ends the jackpot game state. After that, shift to a low-probability base.

By the way, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", as shown in FIG. The probability of winning a "small hit" is, for example, approximately 1/1.1, as shown in FIG. Although not shown, the opening time of the small winning big winning opening 4151 in this case is, for example, 1800 msec.

In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, as described above, the main CPU 4201 determines the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start. Therefore, considering the probability of being distributed to the upper flow path 4107a (see FIG. 108) and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the big winning hole 4151 (see FIG. 108) for small hits, etc. Hitting to the right in the low-probability base state results in a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1. That is, in the high-probability-low base state, the so-called possession balls of the player can increase as the game progresses. In addition, as described above, if it is a specification that shifts to a high-probability high-base state when winning "time-saving hit" in a high-probability-low base state, the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time-saving hit By not providing ", it is possible to avoid winning substantially "time saving hit" in the high-probability-low base state.

On the other hand, in the low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, and high-probability-high base state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, a prize number of balls, etc.) is less than 1. That is, in these game states (low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state), the so-called holding ball of the player decreases according to the progress of the game. In these game states, even if the game is played in an irregular game mode (for example, hitting to the right) and the game ball wins the second start port 4140, the special symbol variation pattern table for low start is referred to. Since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by the number, there is no profit for the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the so-called ST machine that shifts to the normal game state when controlled to the high certainty game state over the specified number of times (for example, 120 times) was explained as an example, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol It may be possible to further increase the number of additional balls to be put out during the small winning rush by controlling the game to a high-probability gaming state until the result of the winning judgment processing becomes a big win.

[4-11. Control by sub-control circuit]
A sub CPU 4301 of the sub control circuit 4300 controls an effect image displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 via the display control circuit 4304 . In this fourth pachinko game machine, the sub CPU 4301 displays the same or substantially the same effect image in the display area of the display device 4007 in the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state. control so that By doing so, it is displayed in the display area of the display device 4007 which of the low probability low base state, the low probability high base state, and the high probability high base state is controlled by the control by the main CPU 4201 It is possible to make it difficult to grasp from the appearance from the effect image.

In particular, in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit when the variable probability flag is on (for example, 1/200) and the probability of a big hit when the probability variable flag is off (for example, 201 minutes) are almost the same probability. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel the difference in the odds of winning the jackpot.

According to such a fourth pachinko game machine, the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state are set as relatively disadvantageous game states for the player, and the high-probability-low base state is set. A game state that is relatively advantageous for the player can be created. In particular, in the high-probability-low base state, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player increases the so-called possession balls by a small hit rush.

Further, in the case of the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the most disadvantageous game state among the plurality of game states has the highest retention rate. On the other hand, in the fourth pachinko game machine, among the low probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state, and high probability low base state, the probability variable flag is off and the electric support control Although the low-probability low base state in which the game is not executed is the most disadvantageous to the player, the stay rate is the highest in the low-probability high base state.

In addition, in the low-probability-low base state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit and the type of the jackpot is a high-probability big hit, the low-probability-low base state, the low-probability-high base state, and the high-probability-high base state , and the high-probability-low base state, which is the most advantageous. Moreover, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the probability that the type of the big hit will be a high probability big hit is a high probability of about 87%. However, it is possible to increase interest.

Furthermore, in the low-probability-low base state, the "time-saving hit" is won in about 1/6, and the number of time-savings set in that case is in the range of 1 to 12 times, so the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability The main focus is on the gameplay of going back and forth between the high base state. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability jackpot, the player can proceed with the game in anticipation of transition to a low-probability-low base state in which the high-probability-low base state is ensured, thereby increasing interest. Become.

In the above-described fourth pachinko game machine, the sub CPU 4301 preferably carries out a look-ahead effect. An effect example of the look-ahead effect performed in the fourth pachinko game machine will be described later in association with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned fourth pachinko gaming machine was explained as an example of a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel in the same manner as the second pachinko gaming machine. is not limited to For example, like the first pachinko machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may not be variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them may be variably displayed. As with the third pachinko game machine, it may be applied to a pachinko game machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine.

[4-12. Example of look-ahead effect and variation pattern effect]
Next, in the fourth pachinko game machine, an example of the look-ahead effect performed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007 will be described in association with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation. The look-ahead effect performed in the display area 1007a and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation are controlled by the sub CPU 4301 via the display control circuit 1304 (see FIG. 70).

FIG. 118 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, showing that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a diagram showing a process in which the pending image changes to 1, and then a big hit system ready-to-win is performed as a sub-fluctuation effect pattern. 118(a) to 118(f), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) corresponds to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. The expected value effect pattern corresponds to "48H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. In addition, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55), and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). As can be seen, the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of a big hit are "15H" and "35H", and the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of a loss are "51H" and "71H".

In FIG. 118 (a), in the first reservation area 4411 and the second reservation area 4412, a normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and in the third reservation area 4413 and the fourth reservation area 4414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In this fourth pachinko game machine, the pending image is represented by an egg-like egg image in order to associate it with the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation. Then, the color of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the big win, and the pattern density of the egg image is changed according to the expected value of the time saving win.

In FIG. 118(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the third reserved area 4413 from the state shown in FIG. 118(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 4413 is a common hit look-ahead effect form and has an expected value level of "2".

FIG. 118(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118(b). , the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while the common system look-ahead effect form is maintained when being shifted to the second reservation area 4412 .

FIG. 118(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 118(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 4412 in FIG. , when shifting to the first reservation area 4411, it is an image showing that the common prefetch effect form of the expected value level "3" has changed to the big hit prefetch effect form of the expected value level "4".

FIG. 118(e) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that it has been shifted to the 0th area 4410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 118(f) is an image showing that the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 118(f), when the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 hatches, the variation production pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a jackpot ready-to-win game. On the other hand, if the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 does not hatch, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a ready-to-win, and a losing image is displayed.

FIGS. 119(a) to (e) show that the egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 of FIG. 118(f) has hatched, and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation has developed into a jackpot-type ready-to-win game. is an image showing.

FIG. 119(a) is an image showing that the decorative design corresponding to the main special design (here, the first special design) is variably displayed. FIG. 119(b) is an image showing that the decorative symbol has stopped at the ready-to-win symbol. FIG. 119(c) is a reach effect displayed with an image showing that the bird hatched from the egg in the 0th region 4410 of FIG. 118(f) grows up and flaps its wings in the sky. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 118(c) is a ready-to-win effect with a relatively high expected value for a big win among a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 118(c) is performed, the interest of the player is heightened. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(d), when a big win image indicating that the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big win is displayed, the game is controlled to a big win game state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118(e), when the loss image indicating that the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss is displayed, the current special symbol game ends.

FIG. 120 is an example of a look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, showing that there is a possibility for both big hits and time-saving hits. It is a diagram showing a process in which the pending image is changed to a form, and then a time saving per performance is performed as a sub-fluctuation performance pattern. 120(a) to 120(f), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) corresponds to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. The expected value effect pattern corresponds to "42H" in FIG. 57 or FIG. In addition, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55), and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). As can be seen, the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of the time saving hit are "07H" and "27H", and the look-ahead hit type effect patterns in the case of the loss are "43H" and "63H".

In FIG. 120 (a), in the first reservation area 4411 and the second reservation area 4412, a normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and in the third reservation area 4413 and the fourth reservation area 4414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 120(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 4413 from the state shown in FIG. 120(a). The pending image newly displayed in the third pending area 4413 is a common hit look-ahead effect form and has an expected value level of "2".

FIG. 120(c) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. , the expected value level is changed to the form of "3" while the common system look-ahead effect form is maintained when being shifted to the second reservation area 4412 .

FIG. 120(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 120(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 4412 in FIG. , when shifted to the first reservation area 4411, it is an image showing that it has changed from the common prefetch effect form of the expected value level "3" to the time saving prefetch effect form of the expected value level "4". Note that the egg image shown in FIG. 120(d) is an alligator egg image.

FIG. 120(e) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that it has been shifted to the 0th area 4410 as it is without being changed.

FIG. 120(f) is an image showing that the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 has hatched. As shown in FIG. 120(f), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 hatches, the variation production pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time-saving winning production. On the other hand, if the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 does not hatch, the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation does not develop into a time-saving winning system performance, and a losing image is displayed.

In addition, in the explanation referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (FIG. 74), when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it was explained that a time saving hit system reach is performed. In this fourth pachinko game machine, in place of the time-reduction winning type reach, a time-reduction winning performance with high expected value of the time-reduction winning is performed although the reach is not displayed so as to be easily distinguished from the big win.

121(a) to (e), when the crocodile egg image displayed in the 0th area 4410 of FIG. 120(f) is hatched, the variation production pattern corresponding to the variation develops into a time-saving winning production. It is an image showing that

FIG. 121(a) is an image showing that the decorative pattern corresponding to the main special pattern (here, the first special pattern) is variably displayed, and an image of three crocodiles walking is shown. FIG. 121(b) is an image showing that the left decorative symbol has stopped at "5". In this embodiment, normally (other than the time-saving performance) the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, right, and middle, but when the time-saving performance develops, the decorative patterns stop in the order of left, middle, and right. It shall be. FIG. 121(c) is a diagram showing that the decorative pattern inside has stopped at "0". After that, as shown in FIG. 121(d), when the right decorative symbol stops at "G", it is clearly shown that the 50-game C time-saving game state is entered. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121(e), when the right decorative symbol stops at "X", it is determined that the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, and the current special symbol game ends. do.

118(f) and 120(f), the images of hatching eggs are both displayed in the 0th region 4410, but instead of this, for example, as shown in FIG. If the image hatching is displayed in the approximate center of the display area 4007a of the display device 4007, the variation production pattern corresponding to the variation may develop into a big win system reach or a time saving system production. It is possible to clearly inform the player and increase interest.

[5. Fifth pachinko machine]
The fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel in the same manner as the second pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the time saving management process (see FIG. 31) of S131 described in the second pachinko game machine is also performed. Descriptions of the same configurations and functions as those of the second pachinko game machine will be omitted. However, in explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals as those of the second pachinko game machine are used.

Further, the fifth pachinko game machine is controlled to a high-probability game state until the variation display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) after the jackpot game state ends, and the result of the special lottery is "big hit". It is a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine that is controlled to a low probability game state after the special symbols are varied and displayed a predetermined number of times (50 times) without becoming. Further, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the probability variation flag is set to ON until the jackpot game state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times) after the so-called first hit, and the jackpot game state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times). It is a pachinko game machine with a so-called limiter, in which the variable probability flag is set to OFF when it is done.

The fifth pachinko game machine has the same game board unit 1010 (see FIG. 69) as the second pachinko game machine. As a result, if it is in an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big hit by driving the special electric accessory 1133 (the shutter 1134 for the special electric) to open, the right region 1107 flows down. Almost all of the game balls enter the big winning opening 1131 for big winning. In the closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 1131 for big winning, the game ball flowing down the right area 1107 does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for big winning and is further downstream. It flows down toward the normal electric accessory 1146 on the side and eventually the second start port 1140B.

If it is in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 1131 for a big hit, and in an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 1140B, Almost all of the game balls flowing down the right region 1107 win the second starting port 1140B. When both the big winning opening 1131 for big winning and the second starting opening 1140B are in a closed state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 1107 is a big winning for small winning if the big winning opening for small winning 1151 is open. Win 1151 mouths. If all of the big winning opening 1131 for big winning, the second starting opening 1140B and the big winning opening 1151 for small winning are closed, the majority (at least half or more) of the game balls flowing down the right area 1107 are second It is configured to enter the starting port 1140A.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, the main CPU 1201 reserves up to four normal symbol starting information (normal symbol hit determination random number or normal symbol variation pattern determination random number). In addition, the main CPU 1201 reserves up to four first special symbol starting information (random number for judging a big hit or random number of symbols) when a game ball wins in the first starting port 1120. Even when a game ball wins in the starting port 1140A or the second starting port 1140B, up to four pieces of starting information (random number for judging a big hit or random number of symbols) of the second special symbol are reserved.

[5-1. Basic specifications of the pachinko machine related to the fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 128. FIG. 123 to 128 are stored in the main ROM 1202. FIG.

[5-1-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 123 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in a pachinko game machine according to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 123, when the first special lottery is held, it is determined as a "big win" or "losing". Also, when the second special lottery is conducted, it is determined as a "big win", a "minor win", or a "loss". In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202, the value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off) ” or “1 (= ON)”), the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as “big hit” or “losing”, and the judgment value data corresponding to it (“big hit judgment value data”, “ Loss judgment value data") is defined. In addition, as the data used in the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 1140A or the second starting port 1140B, the probability variable flag value ("0 (= OFF)" or "1 (= ON )”), the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as “big hit”, “small hit” or “losing”, and the judgment value data corresponding to it (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit judgment value data” and “loss judgment value data”).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the total random number of the jackpot determination random numbers is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The big-hit probability is determined by the number of big-hit determination value data with respect to the total random numbers for big-hit determination, and the small-hit probability is determined by the number of small-hit determination value data with respect to the total random numbers for big-hit determination. It should be noted that the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probabilities and the small hit probabilities are shown as selection rates in FIG.

Although not shown in FIG. 123, the big win probability and the small win probability may differ for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[5-1-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 124 is an example of a special symbol determination table for pachinko gaming machines according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 124, the special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned determination value data. It is a table referred to in order to determine the "hit time selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol. For example, when a game ball wins at the second starting port 1140A, the determination value data is "big hit determination value data" and the symbol random number value is "77", the selection symbol command at the time of winning is "z2", The "symbol designating command" is determined to be "zA4".

[5-1-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 125 is an example of a pachinko game machine jackpot type determination table relating to the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 125, the jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type (the number of rounds, the probability variation flag) based on the above-described winning selection symbol command. For example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10" and the probability variation flag is set to ON.

Even if the selection pattern command at the time of winning is any of "z0" to "z2", if the big win game state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the probability is changed after the big win game state is completed. A flag is set to ON. However, after the first big win game state is over, the second special lottery is held because the game is played with the right hand, and in this second special lottery, 10 rounds are performed with a probability of 10% when the big win is won. , with a 90% chance of being decided in two rounds.

Further, even if the winning selection symbol command is any one of "z0" to "z2", the electric sapo control is not executed (the number of times of the electric sapo is 0). That is, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth pachinko game machine is a game machine in which electric support control is not executed, but it is not limited to this. In addition, the electric sapo control is a control that enables (or facilitates) winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140B, for example, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 1146 (the normal electric shutter 1147 is driven At least one of the number of times the normal electric accessory 1146 is opened, the normal symbol fluctuation time, and the normal symbol per probability. It is a control to change one or more so that winning to the second starting port 1140B is possible (or easy). Therefore, when the electric support control is executed, the frequency of enabling (or facilitating) winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140B is increased.

[5-1-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 126 is an example of a pachinko game machine special symbol variation pattern table relating to the fifth pachinko game machine. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 1120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start port 1140A, 1140B. to decide.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the state of the probability variation flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the first start port 1120 It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins the prize. In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is a loss, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the state of the probability variation flag, the random number for reach determination extracted when the game ball wins the first start port 1120 and the effect It is determined based on random numbers for selection.

Also, when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the state of the variable probability flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game balls are in the second start ports 1140A and 1140B. It is determined based on the effect selection random number extracted when the prize is won. In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed for a long period of time, such as approximately 600000msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, reach during probability variation. One of the effects D to F is determined.

Even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the state of the variable probability flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball wins in the second start ports 1140A and 1140B. It is determined based on the effect selection random number extracted when the In particular, if the probability variation flag is OFF, the variation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long period of time such as approximately 600000 msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the variation time It is determined to be a super speed variation in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed only for a very short time such as 1000 msec.

When the result of the second special lottery is a loss, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the state of the variable probability flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and when the game ball wins the second start port 1140A, 1140B It is determined based on the extracted reach determination random number (only when the probability variation flag is ON) and the effect selection random number. Especially if the probability variation flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the second special symbol is displayed for a long period of time such as approximately 600000msec, and if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation is in progress. The ready-to-win effect may be determined, but most of the times, the super-speed variation in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec is determined.

Since the special symbol variation time corresponds to the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 1201 simultaneously determines the special symbol variation time and the special symbol variation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of decorative symbols) displayed on the display device 1007 (eg, liquid crystal display device) by the sub-control circuit 1300 (sub CPU 1301).

126 is for the sake of convenience, and the sub-CPU 1301 displays an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern) on the display device 1007 via the display control circuit 1304. variation mode) and the content of the sound (for example, the variation sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 1032 via the sound control circuit 1305 by the sub CPU 1301 .

Although not shown in FIG. 126, the variation pattern (variation time) of the determined special symbol may be varied by changing the random number range for effect selection for each set value.

The variation time of the special symbol shown in FIG. 126 is an example, and any variation time can be appropriately set as the variation time of the special symbol according to the result of the special lottery. For example, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON, and the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a loss and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to have the same fluctuation time (for example, 4500 ms). Further, it may be configured such that the variation time of the special symbol is the longest (for example, 299500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is OFF. In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON, the variation time of the special symbol may be set to a short time (for example, 2000 ms). In addition, the second special lottery result is a 2R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON, the special symbol variation time (for example, 4500 ms), and the second special lottery result is a 10R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON. The fluctuation time (for example, 29500 ms) of the special symbol in a certain case is longer than the fluctuation time (for example, 2000 ms) of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON. You may In addition, the variation time of the special symbol may be set to the shortest time (for example, 500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit and the probability variation flag is ON.

[5-1-5. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 127 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 127, when the normal lottery is performed, it is determined as "normal winning" or "losing". In the normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202, the data used in the normal lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 1126 is determined as "normal symbol win" or "losing". The relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol per determination random number and the corresponding determination value data ("normal per symbol determination value data", "loss determination value data") is defined.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the total random number of the random numbers for normal per symbol determination is 1,024. That is, the random number for determining the normal per symbol is generated in the range (width) of 0-1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The normal per symbol probability is determined by the number of normal per symbol determination value data for the range of normal per symbol determination random numbers. In addition, the range (width) of the random numbers for normal per symbol determination may be changed as appropriate. The probability per normal symbol is shown as a selection rate in FIG. That is, in this fifth pachinko game machine, the result of the ordinary lottery is "losing" approximately once in 43 times. The selection rate shown in FIG. 127 is of course not limited to this, but it is preferable that the result of the ordinary lottery is "lost" at a rate of about 30 to 50 times.

[5-1-6. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 128 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 1126, for example, using the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 128, when the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol hit, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (01H) with a variation time of 500 msec.

In addition, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "losing", the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol differs in fluctuation time based on the random number for determining the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126. One of a plurality of variation patterns (02H to 05H) is determined. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is "losing" and the random number for determining the normal symbol variation pattern is a specific random number (98, 99), the normal symbol variation display is performed for an extremely long time, for example, 600000 msec. determined by the pattern.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 128, the random number range for normal symbol variation pattern determination is changed for each set value, and the probability that the above specific pattern is determined is higher in the high setting than in the low setting. Variation patterns of normal symbols determined for each set value may be different.

[5-2. Game flow]
A description will be given of the subsequent flow of the game when the game is started in the normal game state in which the variable probability flag is OFF. In addition, in the normal game state, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 126), the second special symbol variation pattern differs from the first special symbol variation pattern in that the variation time is extremely long. One of the variations A to C is determined. Therefore, in the normal game state, a general player plays the game with a left hand. When the game is played left-handed, the game ball shot toward the game area 1105 can win the first starting hole 1120 instead of the second starting holes 1140A and 1140B.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120 in the normal game state, the main CPU 1201 conducts a first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 123).

Even when the player hits to the right in the normal game state, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the passage gate 1126 and the result of the normal symbol hit is obtained, the normal electric accessory 1146 is activated. Although there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the second start port 1140B after opening, only one prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the second start port 1140B. Also, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 1140A without the normal electric accessory 1146 being opened, only one prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the second starting port 1140A. Furthermore, when the game ball wins in the second start openings 1140A and 1140B, since the second special symbol is displayed in any one of the long fluctuations A to C with extremely long fluctuation times, the small winning big winning opening 1151 The frequency of opening is extremely small. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first start port 1120, more prize balls (for example four) are paid out than when game balls enter the second start ports 1140A and 1140B. Further, the variation time of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 1120 is approximately 10000 msec. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, the probability that the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol (the probability of opening the normal electric accessory 1146) is high (see FIG. 127), and the normal lottery result is the normal symbol. Since the pattern variation time is relatively short (see FIG. 128), when the player hits to the right, the normal electric accessory 1146 is opened to a considerable extent. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 1126 has a high possibility of winning the second starting port 1140B, and even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, it is distributed downstream of the second starting port 1140B. A situation in which a game ball flows into the provided small winning big winning opening 1151 is less likely to occur. Further, even if the result of the normal lottery is a loss in the normal game state and the normal electric accessory 1146 is not opened, the variation time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small win. is extremely long, so it is difficult to get a ball with a small hit.

The big winning opening opened at the time of the big win and the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning may be different big winning openings or may be the same big winning opening. Further, it is possible to appropriately design the arrangement positions of the big winning opening that opens when a big win and the big winning opening that opens when a small win occurs. For example, the big winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146, and the big winning opening opened at the time of a big hit may be provided upstream of the normal electric accessory 1146. Also, both the big winning opening opened at the time of the big win and the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146 . Also, a large winning opening (also used as a large winning opening) opened at the time of a big win or a small win may be provided downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146 . In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball that did not enter the big winning opening that opens at the time of the small hit, a game ball that did not enter the big winning opening that opens at the time of the big winning, and a game ball that did not enter the second start opening 1140B. A second starting port 1140A (a starting port for special figure 2 in which normal electric accessories are not provided) that can win a game ball or the like that was not provided is provided. The position of the second starting port 1140A is downstream of the normal electric accessory 1146 and downstream (lower) than the big winning port that opens when a small hit is made, or opens when a small hit is made with the normal electric accessory 1146. It is possible to assume a gap between the big winning opening and the like. Even when such a second starting opening 1140A is provided, it may be used both as a big winning opening opened at the time of a big win and a big winning opening opened at the time of a small win. In addition, in a mode in which the big winning opening opened at the time of the big win is provided downstream from the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning, the big winning opening opened at the time of the small winning and the opening at the time of the big winning. It is possible to assume a case where the second start opening 1140A is arranged between the big winning opening and the case where the second starting opening 1140A is arranged downstream of the big winning opening opened at the time of a big hit. is. In addition, in this embodiment, as a start opening provided with a normal electric accessory, an example of disposing a start opening for the special figure 2 (second start opening 1140B) is described, but the normal electric accessory As a starting port provided with, a starting port for the first special symbol may be provided. For example, separately from the starting opening for the first special symbol in which the ordinary electric accessory is not provided, the starting opening for the first special symbol in which the ordinary electric accessory is provided may be arranged.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 124) to determine the winning selection symbol command. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 125), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined hit select symbol command, and controls the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 69, since the big winning opening 1131 for big winning is arranged in the right area 1107, in the big winning game state, the game is played by hitting to the right.

Next, the game state after the big hit game state based on the so-called first hit is completed will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the electric sapo control is not executed, and when the so-called first-hit-based big-hit game state ends, the probability variation flag is always set to ON, so that the first-hit-based big-hit game state ends. After that, the main CPU 1201 controls to the high-probability-low base state. In this high-probability-low base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-speed variation with a variation time of, for example, 1000 msec, which is extremely short. (Refer to FIG. 126), the game is played by hitting to the right.

In the high probability low base state after the end of the big win game state based on the first win, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be super-speed fluctuation with high probability and the small win is derived, so that the big prize for the small win. The mouth 1151 is repeatedly opened at an extremely high frequency compared to the normal game state. However, when the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol per pattern, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern with a variation time of 500 msec. In addition, since most of the right-handed game balls pass through the passage gate 1126 and continuously hit the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 1146 and the normal electric shutter 1147 are almost fully opened. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high-probability-low base state is the normal symbol hit, all or substantially all of the game balls hit to the right win the second start hole 1140B, so even if the big win hole for the small win Even if 1151 is opened at a high frequency, winning to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is inhibited. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B is one as described above.

On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10000 msec, 20000 msec, 30000 msec and 600000 msec. The main CPU 1201 stops the variable display of the normal symbols, and performs the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 1146 and the normal electric shutter 1147 based on the fact that the mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols is derived, so that the normal symbols are displayed variably. While doing so, or when the normal symbol hit is not derived even if the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, the normal electric accessory 1146 is not opened. Therefore, while the normal electric accessory 1146 is closed, winning to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is not hindered, and most of the game balls hit to the right win the small winning big winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加Become. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small-hit big prize-winning hole 1151 is 10 as described above. Therefore, in a high-probability-low base state in which the result of the normal lottery can be determined to be a normal loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the increased speed of output balls increases as the fluctuation time of the normal symbols increases.

Thus, in the fifth pachinko game machine, until the jackpot game state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the result of the normal lottery is normal losing and the normal symbol with a longer fluctuation time. It is a game property such as whether it is possible to draw a fluctuation pattern of

In such a fifth pachinko game machine, there is a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never normal losing during one high-probability-low base state, or the result of the normal lottery is normal losing only once. Even if the fluctuation time of the normal design is determined to be 10000msec, or the result of the normal lottery is normal twice and the fluctuation time of the normal design is determined to be 600000msec both times. can occur.

Therefore, according to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, a simple configuration is provided in which a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times of the normal symbols are provided, and the state is different from the big win game state. To provide an unprecedented new game property that enables realization of an advantageous game state (high-probability-low base state) in various payout increasing patterns as a high-probability-low base state advantageous to a player. becomes possible, and interest can be enhanced.

Also, when the result of the normal lottery in the high-probability-low base state is normal loss, the sub CPU 1301 that receives the normal symbol variation pattern command preferably executes an effect based on the normal symbol variation time. That is, when the variation time of the normal symbol is 10000 msec, when it is 20000 msec, when it is 30000 msec, and when it is 600000 msec, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained is different. Then, an effect may be executed in which the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained) can be grasped. For example, when the variation time of the normal symbols is 10000 msec, an effect such as "Per 1 round!" is 30000 msec, an effect such as "3 round win!" is executed, and when the normal pattern change time is 600000 msec, an effect such as "super win" is executed. In this way, when an advantageous game state is executed in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time may exceed 1, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , it is possible to increase interest.

The effects executed by the sub CPU 1301 include display effects displayed on the display device 1007 via the display control circuit 1304, sound effects output from the speaker 1032 via the audio control circuit 1305, and the LED control circuit 1306. At least one or more of the light emission effect of the LED group 1046 executed via the control circuit 1307 and the action effect of the performance accessory group 1058 executed via the character control circuit 1307 corresponds.

By the way, in the high-probability-low base state, if the result of the normal lottery is normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600000 msec, for example, the second special lottery will be held before the normal symbol fluctuation ends. It is possible that the result is a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, since the time during which the jackpot game state is controlled is approximately 180000 to 300000 msec, even after the jackpot game state ends, the variable display of the normal symbols with the fluctuation time of 600000 msec may continue without ending. can occur. As described above, since the normal electric accessory 1146 is not opened while the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the normal electric accessory 1146 does not hinder the winning of the small winning big winning opening 1151, and the player is hit to the right. Most of the game balls that have been played will win a prize in the big prize opening 1151 for a small hit. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, even if the big win game state is controlled before the fluctuation display of the normal symbols ends, when the big win game state ends, the normal If the variation display of the symbols continues without stopping, even if the result of the ordinary lottery does not become ``normal loss'' in the game state after the big win game state ends, the advantageous game state is immediately established after the big win game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game even while it is controlled in the jackpot game state. For example, when the variation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, and after the variation of the normal symbols is started, for example, the jackpot game state of 300000 msec is started, approximately 300000 msec after the jackpot game state ends is for the small win. It is possible to win as many prizes as possible to the big prize opening 1151 and to increase interest.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the variation time of the normal symbols is digested even during the big win game state and the small win game state, but during the big win game state and the small win game state, It may be configured so that the variation time of normal symbols is not digested (the elapse of the variation time is stopped). For example, when the fluctuation time of the normal design is determined to be 600000 msec, and when the big hit game state starts at the time when 300000 msec has passed since the start of the normal design fluctuation, after the big hit game state ends, it lasts for 300000 msec. (During the jackpot game state, the remaining time of the normal symbol variation does not decrease).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the electric sapo control is not executed, but the present invention is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which the electric sapo control is executed in the game state after the jackpot game state is finished. be able to. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is determined to be 600000 msec, even though the electric support control is executed in the game state after the big win game state is finished, It is possible to cause most of the right-handed game balls to win the big winning opening 1151 for small winning.

<Transition flow of production mode>
FIG. 129(a) is a diagram showing transition of the production mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 129(b) is a table summarizing transition conditions of the production mode related to the fifth pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 1300 manages the performance mode (sub-game state) as shown in FIG. 129(a). As production modes, a normal mode, a first hit mode, a variable probability mode, and a bonus mode are provided.

Specifically, referring to FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), when the jackpot game state starts in the normal mode, the sub-control circuit 1300 shifts the production mode from the normal mode to the first hit mode. (Refer to transition condition (1)).

When the big hit game state ends in the first hit mode, the sub-control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the first hit mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (2)). When the special symbol variation display (special symbol variation) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the variable probability mode, the sub-control circuit 1300 shifts the production mode from the variable probability mode to the normal mode (see transition condition (3)). .

When the jackpot gaming state starts in the variable probability mode, the sub-control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode (see transition condition (4)). Also, in the variable probability mode, when the variable display of normal symbols (normal symbol loss length variation) by the variable pattern “05H” (see FIG. 128) starts, the sub-control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the variable probability mode to the bonus mode. (Refer to transition condition (4)).

When the normal symbol losing length variation ends in the bonus mode, the sub-control circuit 1300 shifts the effect mode from the bonus mode to the probability variable mode (see transition condition (5)). Further, when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first win is less than a predetermined number (five times) (if the limiter is not reached), the sub-control circuit 1300 , the performance mode is shifted from the bonus mode to the variable probability mode (see transition condition (5)). If the normal symbol losing length variation is being executed when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, the bonus mode is maintained, and when the normal symbol losing length variation ends in the bonus mode, the jackpot game state is in effect. If so, the bonus mode may be maintained.

When the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first win is a predetermined number (five times) (if the limiter is reached), the sub-control circuit 1300 enters the bonus mode. to the normal mode (see transition condition (6)).

It should be noted that the normal mode is an effect mode that is controlled in the normal game state. In the normal mode, the sub-control circuit 1300 manages the performance stage. As production stages, a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage are provided. Each production stage will be described in detail later.

Also, although not shown, a special effect mode may be provided as a normal mode (an effect mode controlled in the normal game state). The special performance mode can be a performance mode that is controlled from the end of the bonus mode until the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

<Lottery processing for first production stage notice content>
FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the lottery process for the first effect stage announcement content related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

130 shows the lottery process for the notice contents of the first production stage, in the first production stage (see FIG. 129(a)), after the game ball has entered the first start hole 1120, the special symbol variation related to the start prize is displayed. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) when starting. In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

In the first effect stage notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes pseudo continuous stage effect outline lottery process (step S9001). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs lottery based on random numbers to determine the outline of the effect to be performed during the special symbol variation related to the first start opening win, based on the sub variation pattern. Although the details will be described later, the sub CPU 1301 sets a sub-fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation related to the first start opening winning before the first effect stage notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 130 is started. have decided. The sub-fluctuation pattern contains information about the pseudo-continuous performance.

The pseudo-continuous effect is a effect in which the decorative symbols are displayed as if they were stopped (temporary stop display) during the period from when the special symbols were variably displayed based on one start memory until when they were finally fixedly displayed. . The state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative symbols are vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the display is completely stopped. In this embodiment, the pseudo-continuation effect may be simply referred to as "pseudo-continuation", and the effect in which the pseudo-continuation does not occur may be referred to as "no pseudo-continuation". As the pseudo-continuous effect in this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs once and a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs twice are provided. A pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop indication occurs once is called "pseudo 2", and a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop indication occurs twice is called "pseudo 3".

In the "pseudo 2", after the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed). The symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In "pseudo 3", the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern occurs once, and the second time after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed). is generated, and after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed from the temporary stopped display state (the third pseudo-variable display is performed), the decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed. The stage until the first temporary stop display occurs is called "pseudo 1", and the stage from the start of the second pseudo fluctuation display to the second temporary stop display is called "pseudo 2”, and the stage after the start of the third pseudo-variation display is sometimes called “pseudo 3”. In addition, in the effect of "no simulation", the process from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the stop display of the decorative symbols may be called "simulation 1".

The sub-fluctuation pattern includes, as information related to the pseudo-continuous effect, information indicating whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect occurs, information indicating the number of occurrences of the temporary stop display state of the decorative pattern (to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect progresses), and , contains information indicating the outline of the production performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous production. For example, "pseudo 1" is a 20-second production, "pseudo 2" is a 16-second production, and sub-fluctuation pattern containing information that develops after reach is established in "pseudo 3" and leads to the latter half of super reach has been determined, in the process of step S9001, the sub CPU 1301 determines, in "Pseudo 1" (while the decorative pattern is fluctuating for 20 seconds) through what kind of effect, "Bell", which will be described later. The outline of the production such as whether to stop the icon, or through what kind of production to stop the "watermelon" icon described later in "Pseudo 2" (while the decorative pattern is fluctuating for 16 seconds) decide. As a result, the outline of the effect in each stage and final variation in the pseudo-run is determined.

[24] 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, [24] 6-second effect (bonus) pattern, and the like are provided as a general framework of effects performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous effect. [24] In the 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, after 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative design (restart), it has become tenpai, and 24 seconds have passed since 22 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative design (restart). Icons are displayed for a period of time, and after that, for four seconds, an advance notice is generated after the icon stops (see, for example, effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" shown in FIG. 136). [24] In the 6-second production (bonus) pattern, after the production starts 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern fluctuation, the production is successful, and 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern fluctuation. The icon is displayed for a period of 24 seconds from the elapsed time, and a post-icon stop announcement is generated for 4 seconds thereafter (see, for example, effect number "76" shown in FIG. 142).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes effect intensity lottery processing (step S9002). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect intensity at each stage of the pseudo-run based on the sub-fluctuation pattern by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect intensity for pseudo 1 when the sub variation pattern corresponding to "no pseudo" is determined, and the sub variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 2" is determined. If so, the effect intensity for the pseudo 1 and the effect intensity for the pseudo 2 are determined, and if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 3" is determined, the effect intensity for the pseudo 1, the pseudo 2 and the effect intensity for Pseudo 3 are determined. The effect intensity is an index indicating the degree of expectation of the effect performed in each stage of the pseudo-run. Levels 1 to 7 are provided as the intensity of the effect, and the higher the level, the more likely it is to perform the effect with a high expectation of a big hit. The effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2 is set to be higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 1, and the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 3 is set to be higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2. is set to

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9003). When determining that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9004). When judging that the pseudo continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 executes the notice content lottery process for pseudo 3 (step S9005). The preliminary announcement lottery process for pseudo 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 .

When it is determined in step S9004 that the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9005, the sub CPU 1301 executes the notice content lottery process for pseudo 2 (step S9006). The preliminary announcement content lottery process for pseudo 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 .

When it is determined in step S9003 that the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the processing of step S9006, the sub CPU 1301 executes pseudo-1 preliminary announcement lottery processing (step S9007). The preliminary announcement lottery process for pseudo 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 . After executing the process of step S9007, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 131 is a process performed in the pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 3 change main notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pseudo 3 change main notice content based on the pseudo 3 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 3) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 130 (step S9011). ). In this processing, the sub CPU 1301 determines the type of the big hit notice effect to be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect and the content of the big hit notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random value. In this embodiment, as the jackpot preview effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3", there are multiple types of jackpot preview effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, fourth notice effect, etc.). ) is provided. In addition, a plurality of performance contents are provided as the contents of each jackpot announcement performance. For example, as the content of the first notice effect, first notice effect content A, first notice effect content B, first notice effect content C, first notice effect content D, and so on are provided. The first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described in detail later.

In the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 1301 determines one big hit notice effect (for example, first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of jackpot notice effects as pseudo three-variation main notice contents, and also determines the big hit notice effect. One effect content (for example, first notice effect content A) is determined as the content. After that, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

In addition, in the pseudo 3 announcement content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 130), prior to performing the pseudo 3 change main announcement content lottery process shown in FIG. good too. In the ready-to-win effect, decorative patterns are displayed in a ready-to-win mode (decorative pattern located on the left side (left decorative pattern), decorative pattern located on the right side (right decorative pattern), and decorative pattern located in the center (middle decorative pattern ), two decorative patterns are statically displayed in the same pattern, and the remaining one decorative pattern is variably displayed). In this case, in the processing of step S9011, the sub CPU 1301 may determine the effect content whose effect time is shorter than the time from the start (restart) of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the establishment of the reach. For example, in the case where there is a production content that can be completed within 10 seconds and a production content that requires 10 seconds or more to complete, from the start (restart) of the variable display of decorative patterns to the establishment of ready-to-win. When the ready-to-win effect is determined such that the time of is 10 seconds, it may be possible to determine the effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds as the pseudo 3-variation main notice content. .

<Pseudo 2 change main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 2 change main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 132 is a process performed in the pseudo 2 change main notice content lottery process (see step S9006 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 2 change main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 2 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 2) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9021). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the type of the big hit notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "Pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect and the content of the big hit notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random value. In this embodiment, as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 2", the same kind of jackpot notice effect as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 3" (first notice effect, second notice effect, A third notice effect, a fourth notice effect, etc.) are provided. In addition, as the content of each big hit notice performance, the same content as the content of the big win notice performance that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9021, the sub CPU 1301 selects one jackpot notice effect (for example, first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of jackpot notice effects as pseudo two-variation main notice content (provisional), and selects the jackpot notice effect. One effect content (for example, first notice effect content B) is selected as the content of the notice effect. It should be noted that the pseudo 2 change main notice content (temporary) selected here is provisional, and the pseudo 2 change main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9024).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the type of the big hit announcement effect selected as the pseudo 2-variation main announcement content (provisional) is a specific big hit announcement effect (step S9022). The specific big hit notice effect is a big hit notice effect in which the effect performed at each stage of the pseudo-continuation has a story, and as the stage of the pseudo-continuation progresses, a predetermined story develops. be. For example, the first announcement effect, which is one of the specific jackpot announcement effects, is an effect in which the characters have a conversation, and the lines of the characters uttered at each stage of the pseudo-run are associated with each other. For example, the content of the conversation in "pseudo 3" is based on the content of the conversation in "pseudo 2". ing. In addition, the conversation content is set as an index indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. In this embodiment, a fifth notice effect is provided in addition to the first notice effect as the specific big hit notice effect. On the other hand, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect do not correspond to the specific big hit notice effect.

When the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 1301 selects the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of effect is the same as the type of big hit announcement effect determined as the content of the pseudo 3-variation main announcement (see step S9011 in FIG. 131) (step S9023). In this process, for example, the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2nd change main notice content (temporary) and the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 3rd change main notice content are both the first notice effect. If there is, the sub CPU 1301 assumes that these types are the same. On the other hand, one of the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional) and the type of the jackpot notice effect decided as the pseudo 3 change main notice content is the first notice effect If the other one is the fifth foretelling effect, the sub CPU 1301 considers that these types are different. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 selects the big hit notice effect as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional) is not the same as the type of the big hit announcement effect determined as the pseudo 3-variation main announcement content.

When the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 3 change main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 performs pseudo 2. The change main notice content (temporary) is replaced with other effect content, and the effect content after replacement is determined as the formal pseudo second change change main notice content (step S9024).

In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect content after replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Although not shown, in the conversation content replacement table, for each presentation content (conversation content) before replacement, the presentation content after replacement (already Conversation content that can be selected for the determined pseudo 3-variable main announcement content) is defined. As a result, for example, in a situation where the first notice effect is determined as the pseudo 3 change main notice content, when the first notice effect is selected as the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional), in the "pseudo 2" So that the conversation content does not feel uncomfortable with the conversation content in "pseudo 3" (for example, the expectation level of the conversation content in "pseudo 2" is higher than the expectation level of the conversation content in "pseudo 3" ) can be adjusted. In addition, in the process of step S9024, the sub CPU 1301 maintains the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional) for the type of the big hit notice effect, while maintaining only the content of the big hit notice effect. Replace.

If it is determined that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional) in step S9022 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or if it is selected as the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional) in step S9023 If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined is not the same as the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined as the pseudo 3-variation main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 2-variation main notice content (temporary ) is determined as the formal pseudo 2-variation main notice content (step S9025).

After executing the process of step S9024 or step S9025, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 133 is a process performed in the pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery process (see step S9007 in FIG. 130).

In the pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 1 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 1) determined in step S9002 of FIG. Select (step S9031). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine the type of jackpot announcement effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "no pseudo" effect, and the jackpot announcement. Decide on the content of the presentation. In this embodiment, as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 1", the jackpot notice effect of the same kind as the jackpot notice effect that can be performed in the stage of "pseudo 3" (first notice effect, second notice effect, 3rd notice effect, 4th notice effect, etc.) are provided. Further, as the content of each big hit notice performance, the same content as the content of the big win notice performance that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9031, the sub CPU 1301 selects one jackpot announcement effect (for example, first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of jackpot announcement effects as pseudo one-variation main notice contents (provisional), and selects the jackpot announcement effect. One effect content (for example, first notice effect content C) is selected as the content of the advance notice effect. It should be noted that the content of the pseudo 1 change main notice (provisional) selected here is provisional, and the content of the pseudo 1 change main notice may be replaced with another effect content (see steps S9034 and S9036). ).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 judges whether or not the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content (temporary) is a specific jackpot notice effect (step S9032). As described above, in this embodiment, the first notice effect and the fifth notice effect are provided as the specific big hit notice effect.

When the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 1301 selects the big win notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of effect is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect determined as the content of pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice (see step S9024 and step S9025 in FIG. 132) (step S9033). In this process, when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur (when the process of step S9006 in FIG. 130 is not executed), the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the jackpot announcement effect selected as the pseudo 1 fluctuation main announcement content (provisional) is , is not the same as the type of the big hit announcement effect determined as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main announcement contents.

When judging that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 2 change main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 performs pseudo 1. The change main notice content (temporary) is replaced with other effect content, and the effect content after replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 change main notice content (step S9034). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect content after replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided as the main notice content replacement table. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined is the content of the pseudo second change main notice. In addition, in the process of step S9034, the sub CPU 1301 maintains the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) for the type of the big hit notice effect, while maintaining only the content of the big hit notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined in step S9033 that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 change main notice content (provisional) is not the same as the type of the big win notice effect decided as the pseudo 2 change main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 Whether or not the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1st fluctuation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3rd change main notice content (see step S9011 in FIG. 131) is determined (step S9035). In this process, if the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur or if the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. It is determined that the type of the big hit notice performance selected as (temporary) is not the same as the type of the big hit notice performance determined as the pseudo three-variation main notice content.

When judging that the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variation main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the big hit notice effect decided as the pseudo 3 change main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 performs the pseudo 1 change. The change main notice content (temporary) is replaced with other effect content, and the effect content after replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 change change main notice content (step S9036). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect content after replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided as the main notice content replacement table. Here, the content of the conversation that has already been determined is the content of the pseudo 3-variable main notice. In addition, in the processing of step S9036, the sub CPU 1301 maintains the type of the big hit notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) for the type of the big hit notice effect, while maintaining only the content of the big hit notice effect. Replace.

If it is determined in step S9032 that the type of jackpot announcement performance selected as pseudo 1-variation main announcement content (provisional) is not a specific jackpot announcement performance, or in step S9035 it is selected as pseudo 1-variation main announcement content (provisional) If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined is not the same as the type of the big hit notice effect that has been determined as the pseudo 3-variation main notice content, the sub CPU 1301 selects the pseudo 1-variation main notice content (temporary ) is determined as the formal pseudo 2-variation main notice content (step S9037).

After executing the process of step S9034, step S9036, or step S9037, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Big hit notice production (only for the first production stage)>
As described using FIGS. 130 to 133, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are respectively stages of “pseudo 1” to “pseudo 3”. can occur in For example, the first notice effect occurs in all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", the second notice effect occurs in all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and the "pseudo 1” to “pseudo 3”, the third notice effect occurs at all stages of “pseudo 1” to “pseudo 3”, or the fourth notice effect occurs at all stages of “pseudo 1” and “pseudo 1” and “ The first notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 2", the second notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 3", or the second notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 1" and "Pseudo 2", and the third notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 3". Effects occur, the first notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 1", the third notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3", the first notice effect occurs in "Pseudo 1", and " A second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2", and a third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3".

In this way, the type of the big-hit advance notice effect performed in each stage of "pseudo-1" to "pseudo-3" is determined independently of the type of the big-hit advance notice effect performed in the other stages. However, when the first notice effect is performed over multiple stages, the content of the conversation that occurs in these first notice effects will not feel strange (see step S9024 in FIG. 132 and steps S9034 and S9036 in FIG. 133).

Here, in this embodiment, an icon may be displayed when the stages of the pseudo-continuous effect progress. For example, when the “bell” icon is displayed in “pseudo 1”, the transition to “pseudo 2” occurs, when the “watermelon” icon is displayed in “pseudo 2”, the transition to “pseudo 3” occurs, and the “pseudo 2” transitions to “pseudo 3”. 3", when the "cherry" icon is displayed, the game shifts to super reach (a reach with a relatively high expectation of a big hit). Based on the above, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described below.

<First notice production>
FIG. 134(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first notice effect. FIG. 134(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the first notice effect.

The first notice effect shown in FIGS. 134(a) and 134(b) is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

The effect corresponding to the effect number "1" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as the conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. After being displayed at 1007, it is an effect of fading out. The effect corresponding to the effect number "2" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as the conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 1007, a predetermined character's speech is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the second stage from the time point of 6.5 seconds to the time of 10 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. , It is a production that fades out. The effect corresponding to the effect number "3" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as the conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 1007, and from the point in time when 6.5 seconds have elapsed since the start (resumption) of the decorative pattern variation to the point in time when 10 seconds have elapsed, the speech of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the second stage, and decorated. During the period from 10 seconds to 13.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the pattern variation, a dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 as a conversation for the third stage, and then faded out. be.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "4" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as the conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 7.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and after that, from the point of 10 seconds to the point of 13.5 seconds after the start of variation of the decorative pattern (resume), the conversation for the second stage or As a conversation for the third row, the speech of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007, and is produced by fading out. The button image is an image imitating the effect button 1054 . The button valid time is set from the point of 8 seconds to the point of 10 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. When the production button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, a predetermined character is displayed as the conversation for the second stage or the conversation for the third stage for 3.5 seconds from the time the production button 1054 is operated. may be displayed on the display device 1007. Also, if the production button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, the speech of a predetermined character may not be displayed on the display device 1007 .

The effect corresponding to the effect number "5" is that the lines of a predetermined character are displayed on the display device as a conversation for the first stage from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 7.5 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 10 seconds to 13 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. It is a performance. The button valid time is set from the point of 8 seconds to the point of 10 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. When the production button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the icon may be displayed on the display device 1007 from the time the production button 1054 is operated. At this time, regardless of the timing at which the production button 1054 is operated, the icon may be displayed on the display device 1007 until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative symbols. In addition, even if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 10 seconds to 12 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. You may do so. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later.

A plurality of conversation contents (lines) are provided for each of the conversation for the first stage, the conversation for the second stage, and the conversation for the third stage, and one conversation content is selected. Each conversation content is associated with a predetermined character color, and displayed on the display device 1007 in the corresponding character color. The character color is associated with the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, when a pseudo-run occurs, the expectation of a big win is higher than when no pseudo-run occurs, and the fact that the conversation content is displayed in purple suggests that a pseudo-run will occur. . Also, when super reach (SP) occurs, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when super reach does not occur. high expectations). Also, the fact that the content of the conversation is displayed in gold suggests that the probability of a big hit is very high (the degree of expectation is higher than that in red). In addition, the fact that the content of the conversation is displayed in rainbow color suggests that the big win (the occurrence of the premium SP) has been confirmed (higher expectations than gold). In addition, as the conversation for the first stage, the conversation content is displayed in one of the default colors, purple, red, and gold, and as the conversation for the second stage, the default color, purple, and red , and gold, and the conversation for the third row is displayed in one of red, gold, and rainbow colors.

As icons that can be displayed in the first notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon (a "premium" icon), and a second specific icon are provided. In this embodiment, the "Bell" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "Pseudo 1", and when the "Bell" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 1", it shifts to "Pseudo 2". The "watermelon" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 2", and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3". The "cherry" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it shifts to a predetermined super reach. The first specific icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the first specific icon is displayed, the game shifts to the first specific super reach (premier SP). The second specific icon is an icon that can be displayed in any stage of "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the second specific icon is displayed, the game shifts to the second specific super reach.

<Second notice performance>
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the flow of the second advance notice effect. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a time chart of the second advance notice effect. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between the second notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The second notice effect shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

The effect corresponding to the effect number "11" is that after 1.5 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation and 3 seconds have passed, after a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007, It is a production that becomes a fade-out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "12", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates counterclockwise from the time point of 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and 4 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the item is displayed on the display device 1007 from the point in time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the point in time when 7.5 seconds have elapsed. Items that can be displayed here include items that suggest that at least reach will occur, items that suggest that at least super reach will occur, items that at least suggest that certain super reach will occur, fake items, etc. can be mentioned.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates counterclockwise from the point of time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (resume), and 6 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. From the point of time to the point of time of 8 seconds, an image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the point of time of 8 seconds to the point of time of 19 seconds from the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, the mission is started. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image corresponding to the fact that the result of the mission is a failure is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. It is displayed on the device 1007, and after that, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates counterclockwise from the point of time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (resume), and 6 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. From the point of time to the point of time of 8 seconds, an image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the point of time of 8 seconds to the point of time of 19 seconds from the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, the mission is started. An image related to the execution is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image corresponding to the success of the mission is displayed from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. It is displayed on the device 1007, and after that, the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from 22 seconds to 24 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later. During the execution of the mission, a reward (icon) given when the mission is successful is suggested, and the icon will be displayed when the mission is successful.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "15", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotating clockwise, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which a reliability-related item is displayed on the display device 1007 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variably displayed from the point in time when 5 seconds have elapsed to the point in time when 10 seconds have elapsed. As reliability items, a plurality of items with different degrees of expectation for big wins (for example, a first item with a low degree of expectation for big wins, a second item with medium degree of expectation for big wins, and a third item with high degree of expectation for big wins). etc.) are provided. For example, the first item is likely to be selected in the case of a loss, and the third item is likely to be selected in the case of a big hit. The degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by displaying one of these items.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "16", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotating clockwise, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. As a result of the roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variably displayed from the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, an icon suggestive item is displayed on the display device 1007, and thereafter, from the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from the 10 seconds elapsed point to the 12 seconds elapsed point. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later.

As the icon suggesting items, there are provided a "bell" icon suggesting stop item, a "watermelon" icon suggesting stop item, a "cherry" icon suggesting stop item, a first specific icon stop suggesting item, and a second specific icon stopping suggesting item. It is When the "bell" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "bell" icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "watermelon" icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the "cherry" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "cherry" icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the first specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first specific icon is displayed immediately afterward. When the second specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the second specific icon is displayed immediately afterward.

As icons that can be displayed in the second notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, a second specific icon, and a third specific icon are provided. . The "bell" icon, the "watermelon" icon, the "cherry" icon, the first specific icon, and the second specific icon are icons that can also be displayed in the first notice effect. is. In addition to these icons, a third specific icon can be displayed in the second advance notice effect. The third specific icon is an icon that can be displayed in any stage of "Pseudo 1" to "Pseudo 3", and when the third specific icon is displayed, the game moves to the third specific super reach.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "17" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 rotates to the right from 3 seconds to 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “13” except that The effect corresponding to the effect number "18" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 rotates to the right from 3 seconds to 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “14” except that

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "19", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotated upward, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. From the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, the display device 1007 displays an image related to a battle effect in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other, and 12 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative symbols. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the fact that the result of the battle effect is a failure is displayed on the display device 1007 over a period of seconds.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "20", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotated upward, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. From the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, the display device 1007 displays an image related to a battle effect in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other, and 12 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative symbols. An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the display device 1007 over a period of seconds. This is an effect in which the reliability items described above are displayed on the display device 1007 .

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "21", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation, the screen of the display device 1007 is displayed as if it is rotated upward, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. From the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 10 seconds, the display device 1007 displays an image related to a battle effect in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other, and 12 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative symbols. An image corresponding to the fact that the result of the battle effect is successful is displayed on the display device 1007 for 12 seconds to 14 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. , the above-described icon-suggestion type item is displayed on the display device 1007, and thereafter, the icon corresponding to the icon-suggestion type item is displayed on the display device from 14 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation to 16 seconds. This is the effect displayed in 1007 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "22" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 rotates upward from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “13” except that The effect corresponding to the effect number "23" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 is rotated upward from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 6 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “14” except that

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "24", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates downward from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, and 4 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. From the time point of 5 seconds to the time point of 9 seconds, an image related to the start of the continuous hit effect is displayed on the display device 1007, and from the time of 9 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern to the time of 15 seconds (effect button 1054), the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and the result of the continuous hit effect is failure from the time point of 15 seconds to the time point of 18 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. An image corresponding to what has happened is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display to return to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "25", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 1.5 seconds to the time point of 3 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The screen of the display device 1007 is displayed in such a manner that it rotates downward from the time point of 3 seconds to the time point of 4.5 seconds after the start (restart) of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, From 5 seconds to 9 seconds, the display device 1007 displays an image related to the start of the continuous hit effect, and from 9 seconds to 15 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation (effect button 1054), the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and the result of the repeated hit effect is successful from the time point of 15 seconds to the time point of 18 seconds after the start (restart) of the decorative pattern variation. An image corresponding to the event is displayed on the display device 1007, and thereafter, the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 from the time point of 18 seconds to the time of 20 seconds after the start (resumption) of the variation of the decorative pattern. be. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The post-icon stop notice will be described later. It should be noted that during execution of the repeated hitting effect, a reward (icon) given when the repeated hitting effect is successful is indicated, and the icon is definitely displayed when the repeated hitting effect succeeds.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "26" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 rotates downward from the point of 3 seconds to the point of 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13" except that The effect corresponding to the effect number "27" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the display device 1007 rotates downward from the point of 3 seconds to the point of 6 seconds after the start (restart) of the variation of the decorative pattern. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number “14” except that

FIG. 137(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "24" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "24" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbols is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 137(a), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 18 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start (restart), and then for 2 seconds. It stops over and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, when the second notice effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, it appears to the player that the decorative symbols are stopped. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when the effect corresponding to the effect number "24" is performed.

FIG. 137(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "25" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to the effect number "25" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of decorative symbols is 20 seconds. Figure 137
In the example shown in (b), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior and maintain a high-speed fluctuating state until 20 seconds after the fluctuation start (restart). Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "25" is performed.

FIG. 137(c) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The effects corresponding to the effect numbers '13', '17', '22', and '26' can occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 137(c), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 22 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start (restart), and then for 2 seconds. It stops over and the pattern is confirmed. As a result, when the second notice effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, it appears to the player that the decorative symbols are stopped. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for performing effects corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26".

FIG. 137(d) shows the relationship between the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols. The effects corresponding to the effect numbers '14', '18', '23', and '27' may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 137(d), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern show the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation until 24 seconds after the fluctuation start (restart). . Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for performing effects corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27".

<3rd notice production>
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the flow of the third advance notice effect. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a time chart of the third advance notice effect. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third advance notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The third notice effect shown in FIGS. 138 and 139 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

Effects corresponding to effect numbers "41" and "42" can occur only in "pseudo 1". Effects corresponding to effect numbers "43" to "48" can occur only in "pseudo 2". Effects corresponding to effect numbers "49" to "52" can occur only in "pseudo 3". As icons that can be displayed in the third advance notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. Note that the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed in the third advance notice effect.

In "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3", an enemy attack effect is performed. In the enemy attack presentation, three numerical patterns are repeatedly changed and stopped, and every time a continuous dot is stopped and displayed, the friend character attacks the enemy character. Continuing dots (combination of three number patterns) are “1.2.2”, “2.3.3”, “3.4.4”, “4.5.5”, “5.6”.・6”, “6.7.7” and “7.1.1” are provided. When a friendly character attacks an enemy character, the enemy character's physical strength gauge decreases. A health gauge indicates the availability of an icon. When the enemy character falls in conjunction with the prompting of whether or not the icon will stop (icon stop prompting), a situation such as acquisition of the icon or tenpai (expansion to SP) is given to the player. . In addition, when the enemy character is defeated, a predetermined character may be displayed, and the color of the character indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “41” is a effect of fading out after the image related to the third notice effect title completion hype is displayed on the display device 1007 . In the effect corresponding to the effect number "42", after the image related to the title completion prompt of the third notice effect is displayed on the display device 1007, the image corresponding to the success of the title completion effect is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the “bell” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007 . When the "bell" icon is displayed (the "bell" icon is acquired), after that, after the icon is stopped, the announcement is made.

Four timings are provided as the timings at which the urge to complete the title may occur. Specifically, when an image related to the title completion prompt is displayed on the display device 1007 after 1 second from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols (timing 1), and after 5 seconds from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the title completion prompt is displayed. is displayed on the display device 1007 (timing 2), and when an image regarding title completion is displayed on the display device 1007 after 9 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 3), A case (timing 4) is provided in which an image related to title completion is displayed on the display device 1007 after 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. The title completion prompt occurs at one of these four timings.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “43” is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop swaying (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the “watermelon” icon is confirmed on the display device 1007. It is a production that is displayed (stopped). When the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given. The effect corresponding to the effect number “44” is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop swaying (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the display device 1007 stops displaying the continuation result. After that, the display device 1007 displays an image related to the icon stop prompt (second time), an image corresponding to the failure of the icon stop prompt is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the display device 1007 performs wipe display. It is a production that returns to the normal background.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "45" is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the “watermelon” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. When the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given. The effect corresponding to the effect number “46” is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop swaying (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the display device 1007 stops displaying the continuation result. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompt (2nd time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompt (3rd time) is displayed. An image is displayed on the device 1007 and corresponds to the failure of the icon stop prompting.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "47" is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompt (2nd time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompt (3rd time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1007 , and then the “watermelon” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007 . When the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given. The effect corresponding to the effect number "48" is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompt (2nd time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompt (3rd time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1007, after that, the number pattern is displayed on the display device 1007 in a tenpai manner, and after a predetermined connecting effect, the effect develops into the third specific super reach (first half).

The effect corresponding to the effect number “49” is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the “cherry” icon is confirmed on the display device 1007. It is a production that is displayed (stopped). When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon has been acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given. The effect corresponding to the effect number "50" is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompting (second time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the “cherry” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007. When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon has been acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the notice is given.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “51” is that after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop swaying (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the display device 1007 stops displaying the continuation result. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompt (2nd time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompt (3rd time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1007 , and then the “cherry” icon is definitely displayed (stopped) on the display device 1007 . When the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon has been acquired), after that, the icon is stopped and then the advance notice is displayed. In the effect corresponding to the effect number “52”, after the enemy attack effect is performed, an image related to the icon stop-flashing (first time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, the continuous display is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image related to the icon stop prompt (2nd time) is displayed on the display device 1007, and furthermore, after the continuation roll is stopped and displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the icon stop prompt (3rd time) is displayed. It is displayed on the device 1007, after that, the number pattern is displayed on the display device 1007 in a tenpai manner, and after a predetermined connection effect, the third specific super reach (second half) is produced.

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “49” to “52”, the display device 1007 displays images related to the icon stop prompt (first time), the icon stop prompt (second time), and the icon stop prompt (third time). , the button image is also displayed on the display device 1007 . Thereby, the operation of the production button 1054 is accepted. When the button image is displayed, a predetermined button valid time (for example, 2 seconds during which the image related to the icon stop prompting is displayed, see FIG. 139) is set. When the production button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the display following the icon stop prompt is displayed at the time the production button 1054 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button valid time has not expired). (display of a "cherry" icon, display of consecutive numbers, or display of tenpai numbers). On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends), the display (icon display, continuation Display of the outcome, or Tenpa display of number patterns) is performed. Such a button image is not displayed in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48". That is, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “43” to “48”, even if the effect button 1054 is operated while the image related to the icon stop swaying is being displayed, the operation is triggered (the icon Before the 2-second period for displaying the image related to the stop prompt expires), the display following the icon stop prompt (display of the "cherry" icon, display of continuous numbers, or display of tenpai with numerical patterns) is performed. no. Also, when the enemy attack effect starts, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by operating a predetermined movable accessory. The relationship between the action mode of the movable accessory and the degree of expectation for the big win is the same as the notice after the icon stops, which will be described later.

FIG. 140(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140(a), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 1 second. Then, after stopping for 1 second, it fluctuates again at high speed. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to effect number "42" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 140(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "pseudo 1" is 16 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over one second, stops for one second, and then fluctuates again at high speed. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for when an effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 140(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3) and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, and after decelerating over 1.5 seconds, it fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to effect number "42" (timing 3) is performed.

FIG. 140(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 140(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates again at high speed. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, and after decelerating over 1.5 seconds, it fluctuates again at high speed. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively for when an effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) is performed.

It should be noted that "stop" in the decorative pattern in FIG. 140 means temporary stop display. As described above, the temporary stop display state is a state in which the decorative symbols vibrate or the like, and cannot be said to be a completely stop display state.

<Fourth notice production>
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the flow of the fourth advance notice effect. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth advance notice effect. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the relationship between the fourth advance notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The fourth advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)).

Effects corresponding to effect numbers "71" and "72" can occur only in "Pseudo 1". Effects corresponding to effect numbers "73" to "77" can occur in "pseudo 2" or "pseudo 3". As icons that can be displayed in the fourth advance notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. Note that the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed in the fourth advance notice effect.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "71", the "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern, and the image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" pattern becomes a tenpai (four-pattern tenpai fanning) is displayed. After being displayed on the display device 1007, an image corresponding to the failure of the 4-symbol tenpai-fighting is displayed on the display device 1007, and the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display to return to the normal background. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "72", the "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern, and an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" pattern will become Tenpai (four-pattern Tenpai fanning) is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, the display device 1007 displays an image corresponding to the success of the 4-symbol tenpai-fighting, and the display device 1007 displays an image of normal reach in the dedicated background state after the success, and then the icon is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed in 1007 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

Two timings are provided as timings at which the 4-symbol Tenpai swing can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the 4-pattern tenpai is displayed on the display device 1007 from 3.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols (timing 1), and from the time of 7 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols A case (timing 2) in which an image related to the 4-symbol tenpai-flashing is displayed on the display device 1007 is provided. The 4-symbol ten-pai sway occurs at one of these two timings.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "73" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides. is displayed on the display device 1007 and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops. The effect corresponding to the effect number "74" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to the influence of whether or not the "7" symbol will become a tenpai (7 symbol tenpai influence) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is an effect displayed on the display device 1007 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "75" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image relating to the influence of whether or not the "7" symbol will become a tenpai (7 symbol tenpai influence) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" The display device 1007 displays an image related to whether or not the pattern will be tenpai (4 pattern tenpai) and an image in which the "4" pattern is slid, and the display device 1007 displays whether or not the "7" pattern will be tenpai ( An image related to the 7 symbol tenpai sway) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007. When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "76" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image relating to the influence of whether or not the "7" symbol will become a tenpai (7 symbol tenpai influence) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" The display device 1007 displays an image related to whether or not the pattern will be tenpai (4 pattern tenpai) and an image in which the "4" pattern is slid, and the display device 1007 displays whether or not the "7" pattern will be tenpai ( An image related to the 7 symbol tenpai swaying) and an image in which the '7' symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to the swaying which of the '4' symbol and the '7' symbol is the tenpai. is displayed on the display device 1007 and then the icon is displayed on the display device 1007 . When the icon is displayed, after that, it shifts to the notice after the icon stops.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "77" is, after entering the dedicated background state, an image related to the fanning of whether or not the "4" symbol will become a tenpai (4 symbol tenpai fanning) and an image of the "4" symbol sliding. is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image relating to the influence of whether or not the "7" symbol will become a tenpai (7 symbol tenpai influence) and an image of the "7" symbol sliding are displayed on the display device 1007, and "4" The display device 1007 displays an image related to whether or not the pattern will be tenpai (4 pattern tenpai) and an image in which the "4" pattern is slid, and the display device 1007 displays whether or not the "7" pattern will be tenpai ( An image related to the 7 symbol tenpai swaying) and an image in which the '7' symbol slides are displayed on the display device 1007, and an image related to the swaying which of the '4' symbol and the '7' symbol is the tenpai. is displayed on the display device 1007, and then either one of the “4” symbols and the “7” symbols is displayed on the display device 1007 in a tenpai mode, and after a predetermined connecting effect, it develops into the third specific super reach. It is a performance to do.

In addition, after the announcement after icon stop is performed via the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” in “Pseudo 1”, the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77” are performed in “Pseudo 2”. In the case of “Pseudo 2”, in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77”, the pattern “4” became tenpai as a result of the effect in “Pseudo 1” before entering the dedicated background state. A later background is displayed. In addition, after the notice is given after stopping the icon via one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "76" in "Pseudo 2", in "Pseudo 3" the effect number "73" is given. ” to “77” are performed, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “73” to “77” in “Pseudo 3”, before the dedicated background state, the effect in “Pseudo 2” As a result, the background is displayed after the "4" pattern has become tenpai.

FIG. 143(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to effect number "71" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of decorative symbols is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 143(a), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 9 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over one second, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 8 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then It fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. As a result, from the player, after the fourth notice effect ends and the background returns to the normal background, the sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern is 8 seconds, which is the same as the default variation. Each decorative design will appear to vary in a manner. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to effect number "71" (timing 1) is performed. Note that default fluctuations will be described later.

FIG. 143(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. The effect corresponding to effect number "71" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of decorative symbols is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 143(b), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 2 seconds, stops for 1 second, and shakes for 9 seconds. , Further, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 22 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over one second, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11.5 seconds, shakes for 0.5 seconds, decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, After swaying for 2 seconds, it fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and after swaying for 2 seconds, the pattern is determined. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) is performed.

FIG. 143(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 143(c), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 12 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation, then operates at a speed of one frame feed every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to effect number "72" (timing 1) is performed.

FIG. 143(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative pattern in "Pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 143(d), the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 8.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then operates at a speed of one frame feed every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of decorative symbols is a variation pattern exclusively used when an effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) is performed.

<Notice after the icon stops>
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the effect content of the notice after icon stop. 145 and 146 are diagrams showing the relationship between the notice after icon stop and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “91” is an effect performed after the “bell” icon or the “watermelon” icon has stopped (deterministically displayed). In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91", the predetermined movable accessory operates in the first mode after the first connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “92” is an effect performed after the “bell” icon or the “watermelon” icon has stopped (deterministically displayed). In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "92", after the first connecting effect is performed, the predetermined movable accessory operates in the second mode.

The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “93” is an effect performed after the “cherry” icon has stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “94” is an effect performed after the first specific icon is stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "94", the third connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “95” is an effect performed after the second specific icon is stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "95", a fourth connecting effect is performed. The post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number “96” is an effect performed after the third specific icon is stopped (deterministically displayed). In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth transition effect is performed. Predetermined movable accessories do not operate in the post-stop notices of the icons corresponding to the production numbers "93" to "96".

It should be noted that "the icon is stopped (definitely displayed)" means that the icon is stopped and displayed separately from the decorative pattern. As explained in detail in this example, the icon serves as a landmark that indicates the development to the next stage in pseudo-run or super-reach. Therefore, at the time when the icon is stopped and displayed, the result of the big hit determination has not yet been derived, and at that time, at least one of the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design fluctuates. It is in the displayed state. In addition, when one icon is statically displayed, it is assumed that the icon will be temporarily displayed before the display is finalized. It clarifies that it is not such a provisional display. "Temporary display" means that the icon is displayed in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that the icon will be displayed as fixed (an effect that encourages the icon to be stopped and displayed) is performed).

FIG. 145(a) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the production number "91", after the first connecting production is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights up for 1 second and moves to a predetermined position for 1 second. The accessory operates in the first mode, and then the movable accessory is stored. The first connecting effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (first background image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91" occurs due to the display of the "bell" icon in "Pseudo 1", "Pseudo 2" occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. Become. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2" and the notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "91" is generated, "pseudo 3 ”. That is, the motion of the predetermined movable accessory is performed in the next stage of the pseudo-ream.

FIG. 145(b) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "92" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number “92”, after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination is turned on for 1 second, and the predetermined time is displayed for 2.5 seconds. The movable accessory operates in the second mode, and then the movable accessory is stored. On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" will be displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after icon stop. Become. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2" and the notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "92" is generated, "pseudo 3 ”. That is, the motion of the predetermined movable role is performed in the next stage of the pseudo-ream.

The predetermined movable accessory is configured to be displaceable among a first state, a second state, and a third state. Specifically, when the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state, it goes through the second state. That is, the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state, and then displaced from the second state to the third state, thereby being displaced from the first state to the third state. It is possible. In the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state (displacement of one step). On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state (displacement in two steps). The first state is a state in which a predetermined movable accessory is housed in a predetermined position, and when the notice ends after the icons stop, the predetermined movable accessory returns to the first state.

Further, during the time period during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the effect number "91". It's been longer than it has been. The time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating corresponds to the degree of expectation for the big win, and the longer the time, the higher the degree of expectation for the big win. The degree of expectation of a big hit is a probability that the result of the judgment of a big hit related to the special symbol change of this time is a big hit, and is an index showing how much a big hit can be expected when the effect is generated. As a result, when the notice after the stop of the icon corresponding to the performance number "92" is generated, the player gets a big hit compared to the case where the notice after the stop of the icon corresponding to the performance number "91" is generated. It can give you a great sense of anticipation.

FIG. 146(a) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "93" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "93", the second transition effect is performed for four seconds. A second transition effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (second background image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the "Cherry" icon is displayed in "Pseudo 3" and the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the production number "93" is generated, a predetermined super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops. .

FIG. 146(b) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "94" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "94", the third connecting effect is performed for four seconds. A third transition effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (third background image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon stops corresponding to the performance number "94" is generated by displaying the first specific icon, the first specific super ready-to-win occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon stops.

FIG. 146(c) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "95" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed for four seconds. A fourth transition effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (fourth background image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after icon stop corresponding to the effect number "95" is generated by displaying the second specific icon, the second specific super reach occurs 4 seconds after the start of the notice after icon stop.

FIG. 146(d) shows the relationship between the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "96" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the post-icon stop notice corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth transition effect is performed for four seconds. A fifth transition effect is a effect in which a predetermined background image (fifth background image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . On the other hand, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after icon stop corresponding to the performance number "96" is generated by displaying the third specific icon, the third specific super reach occurs after 4 seconds from the start of the notice after icon stop.

In the first transition effect, the second transition effect, the third transition effect, the fourth transition effect, and the fifth transition effect, different background images (first background image to fifth background image) ) is displayed on the display device 1007 . Basically the same transition effect (first transition effect) is performed when the “bell” icon is displayed and when the “watermelon” icon is displayed. A connecting effect (common) and a first connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the post-icon stop notice generated by displaying the 'bell' icon or the 'watermelon' icon in the big hit notice effects other than the third notice effect, the first connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the third notice effect, the first transition effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the first connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the first connection effect (common). In the third notice effect, a background image different from the usual background image is displayed as the background image for the third notice effect, and the background image exclusively for the third notice effect is also used as the background image displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped. is doing. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the display of the normal background image in the post-icon stop notice that occurs subsequent to the third notice effect.

Similarly, as the second transition effect, a second transition effect (common) and a second transition effect (dedicated) are provided. In the post-icon stop notice generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the second connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the post-icon stop notice generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the third notice effect, the second transition effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the second connection effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the second connection effect (common). As described above, in the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed. As for the connection effect of 5, no effect dedicated to the third notice effect is provided.

In this embodiment, the "connecting effect" refers to a effect in which a background image is displayed to fill the gap between the end of one effect and the start of another effect. The first transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed. The second transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the "cherry" icon is displayed, the third transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the first specific icon is displayed, and the fourth transition effect is a transition effect exclusively for when the first specific icon is displayed. The connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively for when the second specific icon is displayed, and the fifth connecting effect is a connecting effect exclusively for when the third specific icon is displayed.

Also, the "bell" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), and the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (second half). When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the first connecting effect is performed as a notice after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time is the first connecting effect ( Common) is slightly different from the background image displayed in. Similarly, when the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, a second connecting effect is performed as a notice after the icon stops, but the background image displayed at that time is the second It is slightly different from the background image displayed in the connection effect (common). In the third specific super reach, a battle between an ally character (first ally character) and an enemy character is performed. When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), the game shifts to the third specific super reach (second half). When the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (second half), the game shifts to a predetermined super reach.

The third specific super reach is a super reach that can occur only in the first production stage (see FIG. 129(a)). On the other hand, the predetermined super reach is a super reach that can occur in any one of the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage. When the "cherry" icon is displayed in the big-hit announcement effect, the same super reach (predetermined super reach) is entered regardless of the type of the big-win announcement effect. In a predetermined super reach, another ally character participates in the fight against one ally character. Each of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage is associated with a main friendly character (a friendly character that appears frequently). A first teammate character appears, a second teammate character basically appears in the second production stage, and a third teammate character basically appears in the third production stage. For example, the predetermined characters (ally characters) appearing in the above-described first notice effect, second notice effect, and third notice effect are all first friend characters. When a predetermined super reach occurs in the first production stage, the second teammate character participates in the fight against the first teammate character. Further, when predetermined super reach occurs in the second production stage, the third teammate character participates in the fight against the second teammate character, and when predetermined super reach occurs in the third production stage, the third teammate character participates in the battle. The first ally character participates in the battle against the 3 ally characters.

As described above, when the icon is displayed in the big hit announcement effect, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern continue to fluctuate at high speed. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols may or may not be temporarily stopped when progressing from one stage to the next stage in the pseudo continuous effect. If the decorative symbols are not temporarily stopped when progressing from one stage to the next stage in the pseudo-continuous effect, displaying the icon is a condition for progressing to the next stage.

<Specific aspects of jackpot announcement effect>
147 to 149 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the first advance notice effect. 150 to 152 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the second advance notice effect. 153 to 156 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the third advance notice effect. 157 to 159 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the fourth advance notice effect. FIG. 160 and FIG. 161 are diagrams showing a specific aspect of the notice after icon stop. FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining examples of icons.

FIG. 147 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 134(a)) corresponding to the effect number "3". In the effect shown in FIG. 147, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147(a)), and then the first teammate character 9002 appears (see FIG. 147(b)). Then, as the conversation for the first stage, the line of the first ally character 9002 ("Is it hot?") is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147(c)), followed by the conversation for the second stage. is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147(d)). It's too hot!" is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 147(e)), and then the decorative pattern 9001 becomes the ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 147(f)).

FIG. 148 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 134(a)) corresponding to the effect number "5". In the effect shown in FIG. 148, first, as the effect in "Pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148(a)), and then the first teammate character 9002 appears. At the same time, the line of the first ally character 9002 ("Push the button") is displayed on the display device 1007 as the conversation for the first stage (see FIG. 148(b)), followed by the button image 9003 on the display device 1007. (see FIG. 148(c)), followed by a large display of a “bell” icon confirmation image 9011 on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148(d)), followed by a pseudo consecutive step notification bell image 9021. It is displayed smaller than the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 148(e)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 148(f)). The “bell” icon confirmation image 9011 is an image corresponding to the “bell” icon being definitely displayed. The pseudo-run stage notification bell image 9021 is an image corresponding to the stage of the pseudo-run being "pseudo 2", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during "pseudo 2".

In FIG. 149, after the effect shown in FIG. 148 is performed in "pseudo 1", the effect corresponding to effect number "5" is performed in "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3" (see FIG. 134(a)). An example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in this case is shown. In the production shown in FIG. 149, after shifting to "Pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. The icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149(a)), the watermelon image 9022 for notification of pseudo consecutive stages is displayed on the display device 1007, and the transition to "pseudo 3" is performed (see FIG. 149(b)). )reference). A “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is an image corresponding to the “watermelon” icon being definitely displayed. The watermelon image 9022 for notification of pseudo-run stage is an image corresponding to the pseudo-run stage being "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during "pseudo 3".

After that, through the conversation of the first teammate character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown), the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149(c)), and the pseudo-continuation stage is performed. An informing cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 149(d)), and the game shifts to a predetermined super reach (not shown). The “cherry” icon finalized image 9013 is an image corresponding to the final display of the “cherry” icon. The pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is an image corresponding to development to super reach in “pseudo 3”, and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the display device 1007 during super reach. After that, if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the decoration pattern 9001 is stop-displayed in a mode corresponding to the big win (see FIG. 149(e)), and the game becomes a big win (see FIG. 149(f)).

FIG. 150 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 135) corresponding to effect number "13". In the effect shown in FIG. 150, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 150(a)), and then the cut of the first teammate character 9002 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 150(a)). (see FIG. 150(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 150(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is displayed as if it is rotating counterclockwise. (Refer to FIG. 150(d)), subsequently, an image relating to the description and start of the mission is displayed on the display device 1007 (Refer to FIGS. 150(e) and (f)), after which the result of the mission is a failure. Correspondingly, the decorative pattern 9001 is stop-displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 150(g)).

151 and 152 show an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 135) corresponding to the effect number "16". In the effects shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 151(a)). (see FIG. 151(b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 151(c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is rotated to the right. (see FIG. 151(d)), followed by a plurality of items (here, "Chance", "CHANCE", "Chansu", "Gekiatsu", "Intense heat", "Iron plate", "NEXT ”, and the “Bell” icon stop suggesting item 9031) is performed (see FIGS. 151(e) to 152(a)). The "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031 is selected (see FIGS. 152(b) and (c)), and then the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 152(d)). Subsequently, a pseudo-continuous-step notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 1007 in a size smaller than the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 (see FIG. 152(e)). (f)).

FIG. 153 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 138) corresponding to the effect number "41". In the effect shown in FIG. 153, first, the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 153(a)), and then the title completion image 9004 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 153 ( b)), subsequently, in response to the failure of the title completion prompting image 9004, the title completion prompting image 9004 disappears, and the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the failure (Fig. 153(c) and (d)).

FIG. 154 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 138) corresponding to the effect number "42". In the effect shown in FIG. 154, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154(a)). 1007 (see FIG. 154(b)). Subsequently, in response to the success of title completion prompting, a title completion prompting success image 9005 is displayed on the display device 1007 (FIG. 154(c) )), the decorative pattern 9001 becomes a ready-to-win state (see FIG. 154(d)), and then the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 154(e)). A pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the display device 1007 in a size smaller than the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 (see FIG. 154(f)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2" (see FIG. 154(g). ).

In FIG. 155, after the effect shown in FIG. 154 is performed in “Pseudo 1”, the effect (see FIG. 138) corresponding to effect number “43” is performed in “Pseudo 2” is displayed on the display device 1007. 1 shows an example of an image that In the production shown in FIG. 155, after shifting to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 154(g), an enemy character 9006 appears on the display device 1007 (see FIG. Each time the eyes (for example, "2, 3, 3") are stopped and displayed, an effect (enemy attack effect) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9006 is performed (FIGS. 155(b) to (d). (see FIG. 155(e) and (f)), followed by the icon stop promotion in which the display of the promotion watermelon image 9007 on the display device 1007 becomes larger and larger (see FIGS. 155(e) and (f)), followed by the success of the icon stop promotion. In response to this, the enemy character 9006 falls down, and the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 155(g)). At 1007, it is displayed smaller than the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 (see FIG. 155(h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 156, after the effect shown in FIG. 155 is performed in "pseudo 2", the effect (see FIG. 138) corresponding to the effect number "49" is performed in "pseudo 3" is displayed on the display device 1007. 1 shows an example of an image that In the production shown in FIG. 156, after shifting to "pseudo 3", an enemy character 9008 appears on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 4”) is stop-displayed, an effect (enemy attack effect) in which the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9008 is performed (see FIGS. 156(b) to (d)). 156(e) and (f)) is performed (see FIGS. 156(e) and 156(f)). As it falls down, a "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 156(g)), and then a pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the display device 1007. is displayed smaller than (see FIG. 156(h)), and then transitions to super reach.

Incidentally, when the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third foretelling effect, the third foretelling effect may always be performed in the next pseudo continuous stage. That is, when the "bell" icon is displayed in the effects ("pseudo 1") corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42", the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" is set as the "pseudo 2". You may make it always perform the production|presentation of any of. In addition, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 2") corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48", the "pseudo 3" corresponds to the effect numbers "49" to "52". Any one of the effects may be always executed.

FIG. 157 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the effect (see FIG. 141) corresponding to the effect number "72". In the effect shown in FIG. 157, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative pattern 9001 starts to change on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 157(a)), followed by "4" as the left decorative pattern 9001L. The symbols are stopped (see FIGS. 157(b) and (c)), followed by a 4-symbol tenpai fanning in which the display of the "4" symbol as the right decorative symbol 9001R becomes larger and larger (see FIG. 157(d)). , Subsequently, in response to the successful 4-pattern Tenpai fanning, the background (not shown) displayed only when the 4-pattern Tenpai fanning succeeds (background after 4-pattern Tenpai success), and the left decoration A large "4" pattern is displayed as a pattern 9001L and a right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIG. 157(e)), followed by a ready-to-win state in which the middle decorative pattern 9001C rotates horizontally (see FIG. 157(f)). Then, the “bell” icon confirmation image 9011 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 157(g)). is also displayed in a small size (see FIG. 157(h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2". It should be noted that the normal background is displayed on the display device 1007 before the background becomes the background after the success of the 4-symbol tenpai (at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 9001).

In FIG. 158, after the effect shown in FIG. 157 is performed in “Pseudo 1”, the effect (see FIG. 141) corresponding to effect number “73” is performed in “Pseudo 2”. 1 shows an example of an image that At the start of the presentation shown in FIG. 158 (when transitioning to "pseudo 2"), it is a specific background. The background may be the same background as the background after successful 4-symbol ten-pai, or may be different from the background after successful 4-symbol ten-pai. The subsequent effects are performed in the dedicated background state. The background in the dedicated background state may be the same background as the background after successful 4-pattern tenpai, may be a background different from the background after successful 4-pattern tenpai, or may be the same background as the specific background. Alternatively, it may be a background different from the specific background. In the dedicated background state, a 4-pattern tenpai fanning is performed in which the "4" pattern is changed at high speed as the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R (see FIGS. 158(a) and (b)). After the display disappears, the “watermelon” icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 158(c)), and then the pseudo-continuous-step notification watermelon image 9022 is displayed on the display device 1007 as the “watermelon” icon. It is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 158(d)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 159, after the effect shown in FIG. 158 is performed in "pseudo 2", the effect (see FIG. 141) corresponding to the effect number "75" is performed in "pseudo 3" is displayed on the display device 1007. 1 shows an example of an image that At the start of the presentation shown in FIG. 159 (when transitioning to "pseudo 3"), the specific background is set. Then, subsequent effects are performed in the dedicated background state. In the dedicated background state, a 4-pattern tenpai fanning is performed in which the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R fluctuate at high speed (see FIG. 159(a)), followed by the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern. A 7-pattern tenpai fanning is performed as a pattern 9001R in which the "7" pattern changes at high speed (see FIG. 159(b)), followed by a left decorative pattern 9001L and a right decorative pattern 9001R in which the "4" pattern fluctuates at high speed. A 4-symbol ten-pie fanning is performed (see FIG. 159(c)), followed by a 7-symbol ten-pie fanning in which the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R fluctuate at high speed (Fig. 159(d)). )), and after the display of the “7” pattern disappears, a “cherry” icon determination image 9013 is displayed in a large size on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 159(e)), followed by a pseudo consecutive step notification cherry image. 9023 is displayed on the display device 1007 in a smaller size than the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 (see FIG. 159(f)), after which the transition to super reach occurs.

It should be noted that the modes of the 4-symbol Tenpai-fighting to the 7-symbols Tenpai-fighting are not particularly limited. It is also possible to vibrate the pattern to the "7" pattern.

FIGS. 160(a) and 160(b) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 1007 in the post-icon stop announcement (see FIG. 144) corresponding to the effect number "91". . FIGS. 160(c) and 160(d) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the display device 1007 in the post-stop notice of the icon corresponding to the effect number "92" (see FIG. 144). . In the notice after icon stop shown in FIGS. 160(a) and 160(b), after the “bell” icon confirmation image 9011 (or “watermelon” icon confirmation image 9012) is displayed (see FIG. 160(a)). , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the first mode (see FIG. 160(b)). In the notice after icon stop shown in FIGS. 160(c) and 160(d), after the “watermelon” icon confirmation image 9012 (or “bell” icon confirmation image 9011) is displayed (see FIG. 160(c)). , the movable accessory 9041 operates in the second mode (see FIG. 160(d)). The movable accessory 9041 is an accessory that imitates a predetermined character, and has a first state (accommodated state), a second state (a state in which the character lowers its arm, see FIG. 160(b)), and a second state. State 3 (the state in which the character raises its arm, FIG. 160)
(d) reference).

FIG. 161 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 in the post-icon stop announcement (see FIG. 144) corresponding to the effect number "93". In the notice after icon stop shown in FIG. 161, after the "Cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed (see FIG. 161(a)), the background image 9042 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 161(b)). ). Thereafter, a predetermined super reach is developed, and a battle between an ally character (for example, the first ally character 9002) and an enemy character 9043 is performed (see FIGS. 161(c) to 161(e)), and the result of the jackpot determination is If it is a big hit, the decoration pattern 9001 is stop-displayed in a mode corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 161(f)).

A specific example of the big hit announcement effect has been described above with reference to FIGS. 147-161. In this example, a case has been described in which predetermined patterns such as the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, and the like are adopted as icons. Icons in the present embodiment can appropriately employ icons configured by characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof. For example, FIG. 162(a) shows, as an example of the first specific icon, a first specific icon confirmation image 9014 formed of a pattern including numbers or letters "7" and "PREMIUM". Further, for example, a character image of "NEXT" may be adopted as an icon, and the display of "NEXT" may be used as a trigger to develop the next stage in the pseudo-continuation.

Further, for example, instead of the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012, and the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013, "X" icons as shown in FIGS. A confirmation image 9051, a "Y" icon confirmation image 9052, and a "Z" icon confirmation image 9053 may be employed. In this manner, as the icon in this embodiment, it is possible to appropriately employ a pattern in which a predetermined character (for example, an English word) is surrounded by a square. In this case, instead of the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023, the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y An image 9062 and a Z-image 9063 for pseudo continuous stage notification may be employed (see FIGS. 162(e) and (f)). In FIG. 162(e), the X-image 9061 for pseudo-continuous-stage notification and the Y-image for pseudo-continuous-stage notification 9062 are displayed brightly, while the Z-image for pseudo-continuous-stage notification 9063 is displayed dark. It is shown to be "Pseudo 3". By displaying the "Z" icon confirmation image 9053 in this state, in FIG. All images 9063 are displayed brightly. This would later lead to the development of Super Reach.

In the above description, the decorative pattern 9001 is displayed in a large size (at the center of the display device 1007) and the decorative pattern 9001 is displayed in a small size (at the lower right corner of the display device 1007). In this embodiment, while the icon is displayed and before and after the icon is displayed, the larger decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, the smaller decorative pattern 9001 is not displayed, or both decorations are displayed. The design 9001 may be configured not to be displayed. Further, when an icon is displayed, a pattern corresponding to the icon may be displayed as a part of the smaller decorative patterns 9001 (for example, a middle decorative pattern 9001C), or the part may be displayed. (for example, the middle decorative pattern 9001C) may be displayed in a variable manner (the left decorative pattern 9001L and the right decorative pattern 9001R are stopped and displayed), or the left decorative pattern 9001L, the middle decorative pattern 9001C, and the right All of the decorative patterns 9001R may remain displayed in a variable manner.

<Big hit notice production (common to each production stage)>
The first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect described above are the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)). ), it can occur only in the first production stage. On the other hand, the sixth and seventh advance notice effects described below can occur in any of the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage. Further, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are effects that can occur during the pseudo continuous effect, while the sixth to seventh notice effects occur. If you do, the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur. In the following, after explaining the variation patterns of decorative symbols in each production stage, the sixth and seventh advance notice effects will be explained.

<Variation patterns of decorative patterns>
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing variation patterns of decorative symbols in the first production stage. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing variation patterns of decorative symbols in the second production stage. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing variation patterns of decorative symbols in the third production stage.

FIG. 163(a) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 4 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern show the same behavior, respectively, fluctuating at high speed until 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 1 second, stopping for 1 second, The pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 163(b) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 8 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 3.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over one second, stops for one second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 4 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 163(c) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 13 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then determines the pattern. Become. The medium decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 10.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for one second, and is finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 8.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 163(d) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the first production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then determines the pattern. Become. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 14.5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for one second, and is finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 12.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 164(a) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 4 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5. It will stop for a second, and the pattern will be confirmed.

FIG. 164(b) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 8 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5 It stops for seconds, and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 164(c) shows the case where the decorative symbol variation time is 13 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5 It stops for seconds, and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 164(d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds in the second production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed until 16 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to reach 0.5 It stops for seconds, and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 165(a) shows the case where the decorative pattern variation time is 4 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 2.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerating over 0.5 seconds, and 1 It stops for a second, and the pattern is confirmed.

FIG. 165(b) shows the case where the decorative pattern variation time is 8 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 4.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then confirms the pattern. Become. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 6.5 seconds have passed since the fluctuation start, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the pattern is determined. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 5.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 1 second, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 165(c) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 13 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the pattern is determined. Become. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 11.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for one second, and is finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 9.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

FIG. 165(d) shows the case where the variation time of the decorative pattern is 17 seconds in the third production stage. In this case, the left decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then confirms the pattern. Become. The middle decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 15.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for one second, and is finalized. The right decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed until 13.5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, swings for 2 seconds, and then the pattern is determined.

The variation patterns of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 163 to 165 are default variation patterns, and in this embodiment, unless otherwise described (for example, FIGS. 137, 140, 143, 168, etc.), The decorative pattern basically fluctuates according to the above fluctuation pattern.

<6th notice performance>
FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the flow of the sixth advance notice effect. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth advance notice effect. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sixth advance notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The sixth notice effect shown in FIGS. 166 and 167 occurs when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)). It is a performance that can be obtained. In the sixth advance notice performance, the first special zone rushing is performed, and when the said stirring is successful, the player enters the first special zone. The first special zone is a pre-stage special zone that develops into the fourth specific super reach.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “101” is a effect of fading out after the first indication (effect for the first stage) occurs. The effect corresponding to the effect number "102" is that after the first sign (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then fades out. It is a performance. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "103", after the first sign (effect for the first step) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second step) occurs, and then the third sign (effect for the second step) occurs. A sign of bullets (effect for the third hit) is generated, and then fades out.

In the production corresponding to the production number "104", after the first indication (effect for the first step) occurs, the second indication (effect for the second step) occurs, and furthermore, the third indication occurs. A sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rush is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the first special zone rush is failed. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display device 1007 . In the effect corresponding to the effect number "105", after the first sign (effect for the first step) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second step) occurs, and then the third sign (effect for the second step) occurs. A sign of the bullet (the effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 1007, and an image corresponding to the successful first special zone rushing is displayed. An effect is displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the player enters the first special zone. After finishing the first special zone, the game moves to the fourth specific super reach.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "106", the third indication (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 1007, and then, An effect is displayed on the display device 1007 in which an image corresponding to the failure to enter the first special zone is displayed. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "107", the third sign (effect for the third step) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 1007, and the first An image corresponding to the successful entry into the special zone is displayed on the display device 1007, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the display device 1007, and then the player enters the first special zone. After completing the first special zone, the game moves to the fourth specific super reach.

In the first special zone, the screen is switched between the screen corresponding to the first character and the screen corresponding to the second character, and the decoration pattern is tense in any of the screens. After that, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and develops into the fourth specific super reach, and in the fourth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the character corresponding to the screen on which the tenpai occurred is performed. In addition, in the first sign, the second sign, and the third sign, instead of (or in addition to) generating a predetermined effect, an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed. It may be displayed on the display device 1007 . In this case, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "106" and "107", the impetus to enter the first special zone suddenly occurs without going through the indication. After the game ball wins in the first start port 1120, when the look-ahead effect is performed before the special symbol variation related to the start win is started (when the sixth notice effect occurs via the look-ahead effect) , In the sixth notice effect that occurs at the time of the special symbol change, it is possible to always pass through the sign. On the other hand, when the sixth advance notice effect occurs without going through the look-ahead effect, the sign may or may not be passed through in the sixth notice effect occurring at the time of the special symbol variation.

FIG. 168(a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "104" and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "104" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 168(a), the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern exhibit the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over one second. Then, it stops for 1 second, and the pattern is determined.

FIG. 168(b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "105" and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 168(b), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

FIG. 168(c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "106" and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. An effect corresponding to the effect number "106" may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbols is 17 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 168(c), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, fluctuating at high speed until 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and then decelerating over one second. Then, it stops for 1 second, and the pattern is determined.

FIG. 168(d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number "107" and the variation pattern of decorative symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 168(d), the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design each show the same behavior, and fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until at least entering the first special zone.

Here, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106", the image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the display device 1007 from the point of time when 11 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the default variation pattern (see FIGS. 163(d) and 165(d)) in the first production stage and the third production stage, the left decorative pattern is decelerated and stopped at the timing. When the decorative pattern stops, a predetermined stop sound (for example, a sound confirming that it is lost) is output from the speaker 1032. In addition, when the stop sound is generated, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the result of the urge to enter the first special zone in the middle of the urge to enter the first special zone. In view of this point, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" to "106" are performed, a dedicated variation pattern (first special zone rushing fan) as shown in Fig. 168 (a) to (c) The decorative design is changed in a variation pattern such that the decorative design stops after the end. As a result, it is possible to avoid spoiling the success or failure of the rush to enter the first special zone through the stop sound of the decorative pattern. Incidentally, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the decorative symbol stop sound can be a sound peculiar to the loss (a sound that can be generated only in the case of a loss).

Such variation patterns shown in FIGS. 168(a) to (c) are employed when effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage, When the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the default variation patterns (Fig. 164 (d) ), the decorative pattern may be varied. In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 164(d), the timing at which the decorative symbols are decelerated and stopped is delayed. Even if the decorative pattern is changed, there is no concern of spoiling as described above. However, even when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the decorative symbols may be varied according to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 168(a) to (c).

It should be noted that there is a variation pattern between when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the first effect stage and when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the third effect stage. may be different. For example, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the third effect stage, each decorative pattern is varied at a higher speed than the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 168(a) to (c). The time may be lengthened by a predetermined time (eg, 0.5 seconds) and the deceleration time may be shortened by a predetermined time (eg, 0.5 seconds). Also, in one production stage (for example, the second production stage) among the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage, the sixth advance notice production is not performed during the execution of the look-ahead production. can be configured to In this case, in a production stage other than the one production stage (for example, the first production stage and the third production stage), the sixth advance notice production may be performed even during execution of the look-ahead production. .

<7th notice performance>
FIG. 169(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the seventh advance notice effect. FIG. 169(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh advance notice effect.

The seventh notice effect shown in FIG. 169 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)). be. In the seventh advance notice effect, a temptation to enter the second special zone is performed, and if the temptation is successful, the game enters the second special zone. The second special zone is a special zone before developing into the fifth specific super reach.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” is that after the screen darkens (the screen freezes) as if the display device 1007 is turned off, the screen returns from the freeze and enters the second special zone. An image related to the fanning is displayed on the display device 1007, a button image is displayed on the display device 1007, the operation of the production button 1054 is accepted, and then an image corresponding to failure of the fanning to enter the second special zone is displayed on the display device. This is the effect displayed in 1007 . After that, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is that after the screen darkens (the screen freezes) as if the display device 1007 has been turned off, the image related to the second special zone rushing is restored after returning from the freeze. is displayed on the display device 1007, the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted, and then the image corresponding to the success of the second special zone rushing (the second special zone rushing A success image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . When entering the second special zone, the display device 1007 displays a scene in which a predetermined ally character appears and then a predetermined enemy character is defeated. After that, it develops into the fifth specific super reach, and in the fifth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the final battle with the enemy character is performed. The fifth specific super reach is the reach with the highest degree of expectation for a big win (excluding the first specific super reach where the big win is confirmed).

Two timings are provided as timings at which screen freezing may occur. Specifically, the case where the screen freezes 6 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1) and the case where the screen freezes 12 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing 2) are provided. It is Screen freezing occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, compared to timing 1, all effects following freezing occur with a delay of 6 seconds.

Further, a predetermined button valid time is set while the button image is being displayed. When the production button 1054 is operated during the button effective time, at the time the production button 1054 is operated (immediately after the operation even if the button effective time has not expired), the second special zone rushing is performed. An effect corresponding to failure or success is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends), it is determined that the second special zone entry has failed or succeeded. A corresponding performance is performed.

Although not shown, as an effect corresponding to the success of the second special zone entry promotion (second special zone entry success production), a second special zone entry success image (for example, a title related to the second special zone In addition to an effect in which an image and an image related to a predetermined icon) are displayed, an effect in which a predetermined decoration lamp (logo lamp) emits light is performed. The logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo cover is provided at a predetermined portion of the game board unit 1010 (for example, the upper side of the display device 1007) and is made of translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). Further, the logo cover is decorated in the shape of letters (for example, letters displayed as icons) indicating a logo or the like according to the model. A full-color LED is adopted for the logo lamp, and it is possible to emit multiple kinds of colors including red, blue, and green, and it is possible to change the effect color of the logo cover.

It should be noted that the second special zone rushing success effect (e.g., light emission of a logo lamp) is performed over a predetermined time (3 seconds) regardless of whether the effect button 1054 is operated or not or when the operation is performed. Even if the effect button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the time is not extended. Since the timing of entering the second special zone (the timing at which a predetermined ally character appears) is fixed (in the case of timing 1 above, when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation, in the case of timing 2 above, the decorative pattern 36 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), if the production button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, there is a gap between the end of the second special zone rushing success production and the timing of entering the second special zone. However, the gap time is compensated for by displaying the predetermined icon in a swaying state.

<Stage change>
FIG. 170(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the stage change announcement effect. FIG. 170(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change announcement effect. FIG. 170(c) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs.

In this embodiment, in each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage), basically, while the special symbol fluctuation is performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), Stay. After shifting to one production stage, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), the one production stage can be shifted to another production stage. On the other hand, when the seventh notice effect occurs, even if the number of special symbol variations performed after shifting to one effect stage does not reach the predetermined number (20 times), the effect stage is always performed. A transition occurs.

In the present embodiment, such transition of production stage is also called "stage change". Note that the production stage after the transition is determined randomly by lottery, but the same production stage as the production stage before the transition may be determined as the production stage after the transition. The transition of the production stage (stage change) is a concept that includes such a case.

When a stage change is performed, a stage change announcement effect shown in FIG. 170 is performed. In the effect (stage change notice effect) corresponding to the effect number "131", after the background transition image corresponding to the effect stage after transition is displayed on the display device 1007, an image indicating the name of the effect stage after transition is displayed. This effect is displayed on the display device 1007 and resets (restores) the display content of the counter image on the display device 1007 .

As background transition images, a first background transition image, a second background transition image, and a third background transition image are provided. The first background transition image is an image suggesting the first effect stage, and when the effect stage after transition is the first effect stage, the first background transition image is displayed. The second background transition image is an image suggesting the second effect stage, and when the effect stage after transition is the second effect stage, the second background transition image is displayed. The third background transition image is an image suggesting the third effect stage, and when the effect stage after transition is the third effect stage, the third background transition image is displayed.

The counter image is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol variations performed after the occurrence of the stage change. When a stage change occurs, "0/20" is displayed as a counter image after reset. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol variations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of special symbol variations that occurred after the stage change occurred. While the counter image stays in each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage), the counter image is basically constantly displayed at a predetermined location on the display device 1007 (some production is (except while it is being done). As the number of special symbol variations after the occurrence of the stage change increases, the counter image changes like "1/20", "2/20", . . . "19/20".

Here, the counter image (0/20) when the stage change occurs is displayed in various colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, iridescent, or gold). In this embodiment, as described in the second pachinko game machine, a plurality of different set values (six levels from "1" to "6") are provided for various data related to the pachinko game. White, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow colors correspond to set values 1 to 6, respectively, and are the colors of the counter image (0/20) displayed when a stage change occurs. is the color corresponding to the setting value. As a result, the counter image (0/20) suggests the set value.

The method of suggesting the set value by the counter image is not limited to this example, and for example, a counter image including numbers (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the set value may be displayed. For example, when the set value is "6", a counter image of "0/66" may be displayed. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the number of times of special symbol fluctuations related to the stage change generation condition is a specified value (20 times), but the number of times of special symbol fluctuations may be determined by lottery. good. On top of that, for example, when the set value is "6", it is possible to configure so that "66" is relatively likely to be determined as the number of times of the special symbol variation.

Also, when the counter image (0/20) at the time of stage change occurrence is displayed in gold, it is confirmed that the player enters the second special zone. In this regard, as the seventh advance notice effect, an effect corresponding to the effect number "121" and an effect corresponding to the effect number "122" are provided. A stage change always occurs in any of these effects. In addition, the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change can be displayed in gold only when the stage change occurs based on the performance corresponding to the effect number "122". is configured as

Two timings are provided as the start timing of the stage change announcement effect. Specifically, when the background transition image is displayed from the beginning of the decorative pattern fluctuation (timing 1), and when the background transition image is displayed 6 seconds after the decorative pattern fluctuation starts (timing 2). and is provided. The stage change announcement effect occurs at one of these two timings. At the timing 2, all effects occur with a delay of 6 seconds compared to the timing 1. - 特許庁

When a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh advance notice effect, the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed is the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed. corresponds to That is, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 1) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 1) is performed, the effect number "131" An effect corresponding to (timing 1) is performed. On the other hand, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 2) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 2) is performed, the effect number "131" An effect corresponding to (timing 2) is performed.

On the other hand, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a predetermined number (20 times), basically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 1) is displayed. done. In this case, the stage change notice effect is performed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. Exceptionally, when the seventh advance notice effect occurs in a special symbol variation (regular number reaching game) in which a stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol variations reaching a predetermined number (20 times). , an effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 2) is performed. That is, as conditions for stage change occurrence, the following conditions (I) and (II) are provided. After the passage of time, a stage change announcement effect will be performed.

Condition (I): The number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times) Condition (II): The seventh advance notice production occurs (production number " 121” or “122” is selected)

The fact that the number of special symbol variations has reached a predetermined number (20 times) can be grasped by the player through the counter image, and when the number of special symbol variations reaches the predetermined number (20 times), It is considered highly probable that the player is conscious of the occurrence of the stage change. In this regard, the configuration as described above makes it possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the stage change notice effect is not performed immediately after the start of the variation of the decorative symbols in the specified number reaching game. In this case, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed at the timing 2 described above. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of the seventh notice effect (entering the second special zone) after the stage change notice effect is performed.

Further, as described above, the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage are associated with the first teammate character, the second teammate character, and the third teammate character, respectively. . Although not shown, the game board unit 1010 is provided with a first character lamp, a second character lamp, and a third character lamp. The first character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first character decoration part, the second character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second character decoration part, The third character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third character decoration section.

The first character decoration section is provided at a first predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, the right side of the display device 1007), and the second character decoration section is provided at a second predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, the display device). 1007), and the third character decoration section is provided at a third predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, the lower left side of the display device 1007). The first character decoration section, the second character decoration section, and the third character decoration section are decorated with decorations that represent the first, second, and third ally characters, respectively. . Also, the first character decoration section, the second character decoration section, and the third character decoration section are each formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). The first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp employ full-color LEDs, respectively, and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green. Thereby, the effect colors of the first character decoration section, the second character decoration section, and the third character decoration section can be changed.

In this embodiment, while staying in the first production stage, basically the first character lamp is on, and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are off. While staying in the second production stage, basically the second character lamp is on, and the first character lamp and the third character lamp are off. While staying in the third production stage, basically the third character lamp is on, and the first character lamp and the second character lamp are off. Although not shown, in the stage change notice effect, one of the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp (character lamp corresponding to the effect stage after transition) blinks.

Specifically, when the effect stage after transition is the first effect stage, the first character lamp blinks, and when the effect stage after transition is the second effect stage, the second character lamp blinks. Then, when the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the third character lamp blinks. Such blinking of the character lamp is performed for 1.5 seconds, and the blinking period coincides with the display period of the background transition image. That is, while the first background transition image is displayed, the first character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the second background transition image is displayed, the second character lamp blinks. It blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the third background transition image is being displayed, the third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds.

FIG. 170(c) shows the state of each character lamp before and after the transition from the first production stage to the second production stage. In the previous game of the specified number reaching game, the first character lamp is lit, and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are extinguished. When the specified number reaching game starts, the first character lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state, the second character lamp switches from the extinguished state to the flashing state, and the third character lamp remains in the extinguished state. After that, the second character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds and then turns on. After that, the lighting state of the second character lamp continues and the state of extinguishing the first character lamp and the third character lamp continues until the next stage change notice effect is generated.

After the stage change notice effect is performed, the background corresponding to the effect stage after transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is shifted. It should be noted that, as described above, after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the normal background is restored. Also, after the effect in the fifth specific super ready-to-win that moves via the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is completed, the background returns to normal. The normal background is the background corresponding to the production stage after transition (not the production stage before transition).

In the above description, the above conditions (I) and (II) are provided as conditions for the stage change to occur. Here, regarding the above condition (I), the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is when the fluctuation display (variation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 1120) is performed in the first special symbol display section 1163 However, it is not counted when the variable display (variable display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second start ports 1140A and 1140B) is performed in the second special symbol display section 1164. Therefore, in the normal game state, even if the player plays the game with the right hand and the variation display in the second special symbol display section 1164 is repeatedly performed, the count is not performed, and in this case, the stage is changed. is never done. In addition, the count is performed when the special symbol variation starts.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the stage change will be performed in a case other than when the above condition (I) or (II) is satisfied. Specifically, in a situation where the number of special symbol variations performed after shifting to one stage has not reached a predetermined number of times (20 times), as an effect performed when special symbol variations are performed , When a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs, a production stage shift lottery before reaching the specified number is performed. Then, on the condition that the lottery for the production stage transition before reaching the specified number is won, the transition of the production stage occurs.

Moreover, even if the number of times of special symbol variation performed after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times), there is a possibility that the stage change is not performed. Specifically, when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs in the specified number reaching game, a lottery holding lottery to suspend production stage transition at the time of reaching the specified number is performed. If the lottery for suspending production stage transition at the time of reaching the specified number is not won, the transition of the production stage occurs in the specified number reaching game. On the other hand, if you win the production stage transition suspension lottery when the specified number is reached, the production stage transition does not occur in the specified number reaching game, and the production stage transition occurs in the next special symbol change of the specified number reaching game. occurs.

<Stage change section holding ball>
171 to 173 are diagrams for explaining the stage change section holding ball.

Details will be described later, but when a game ball wins in the first starting port 1120, the sub control circuit 1300 selects a sub variation pattern by lottery. Here, the result of the lottery (sub-fluctuation pattern selection lottery) may differ depending on the production stage staying during the special symbol fluctuation related to the first starting entrance winning, and the first starting entrance winning has occurred. If a stage change occurs during the period from to when the special symbol variation related to the first start gate winning is performed, the special symbol variation (stage change game) in which the stage change is performed will start in the production stage after the transition. not determined until Therefore, for such a first start winning prize, the sub-variation pattern cannot be selected at least until the stage change game is started. The lottery related to the look-ahead effect is performed based on the sub-variation pattern, and the lottery related to the look-ahead effect cannot be performed unless the sub-variation pattern is selected.

In view of this point, in the present embodiment, the concept of "stage change section holding ball" is provided. The stage change section reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start winning prize related to the stage change game, and a special symbol change related to the stage change game after the first start winning prize related to the stage change game occurs. It refers to the reserved ball corresponding to the first starting entrance winning that occurred before the start. For such a stage change section holding ball, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect is not performed. In addition, among the stage change section reserved balls, the reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening winning prize related to the stage change game is also particularly referred to as "stage change section relevant reserved ball".

FIG. 171(a) shows a state in which the 16th special symbol variation is performed after shifting to the current production stage and a state in which there is no reserved ball. In FIG. 171(b), after the state shown in FIG. 171(a), while the 16th special symbol variation is being performed, 4 game balls are shown in the first starting port 1120. ing. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 17th to 20th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage. In FIG. 171(c), after the state shown in FIG. 171(b), the state in which the 17th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage is shown. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 3rd reserved balls are the 18th to 20th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage. It should be noted that there is no fourth ball on hold.

In FIG. 171(d), after the state shown in FIG. 171(c), while the 17th special symbol variation is being performed, one game ball wins in the first start port 1120. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed in the production stage after the shift. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the fourth ball on hold is the ball on hold in the stage change section (the ball on hold in the stage change section), and the fourth ball on hold cannot be read ahead.

FIG. 171(e) shows a state in which the 18th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage after the state shown in FIG. 171(d). In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 2nd reserved balls are the 19th to 20th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage, and correspond to the 3rd reserved ball. The special symbol variation to be performed is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. It should be noted that there is no fourth ball on hold.

In FIG. 172(a), after the state shown in FIG. 171(e), while the 18th special symbol variation is being performed, one game ball wins the first start port 1120. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the second special symbol variation after shifting to the next performance stage. The fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball cannot perform a look-ahead effect.

In FIG. 172(b), after the state shown in FIG. 172(a), the 18th to 20th special symbol variations are performed, during which two game balls enter the first starting port 1120, and then, A stage change occurs, and a state is shown in which the first special symbol variation is performed after shifting to the next performance stage. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the first to third reserved balls are the second to fourth special symbol variations after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 3rd reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 3rd reserved balls cannot be read ahead. It should be noted that there is no fourth ball on hold.

In FIG. 172(c), after the state shown in FIG. 172(b), while the first special symbol variation is being performed, a state in which one game ball wins the first start port 1120 is shown. ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the fifth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The fourth reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening winning after the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol variation related to the stage change game). Therefore, the fourth held ball is not the stage change section held ball, and the fourth held ball can be read ahead.

In FIG. 172(d), after the state shown in FIG. 172(c), the 1st to 2nd special symbol fluctuations are performed after the occurrence of the stage change, during which two games are placed in the first start port 1120. It shows the state in which the third special symbol variation is performed after the ball wins and then the stage change occurs. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the fourth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the first reserved ball cannot perform the look-ahead effect. On the other hand, the special symbol variations corresponding to the second to fourth reserved balls are the fifth to seventh special symbol variations after the stage change occurs. The 2nd to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first starting entrance winning after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the stage change section corresponding to the suspended ball has started. is a sphere. Therefore, the second to fourth held balls are not the stage change section held balls, and the second to fourth held balls can be read ahead.

In FIG. 173(a), in a state where there is no reserved ball, after the 20th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage, while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed , shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first start port 1120. FIG. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 21st to 24th special symbol variations after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st to 24th special symbol variations are performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 1st to 4th special symbol variations after shifting to the next performance stage. As a result, the first to fourth held balls are the stage change section held balls, and the first to fourth held balls cannot be read ahead.

In FIG. 173(b), in a state where there is no reserved ball, after the 20th special symbol variation is started after shifting to the current production stage, while the 20th special symbol variation is being performed , shows a state in which one game ball has won in the first start port 1120 . In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current performance stage. In the 21st special symbol variation, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol variation is performed in the production stage after the shift. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the first reserved ball cannot be subjected to a look-ahead effect. There are no second to fourth held balls.

In FIG. 173(c), after the state shown in FIG. 173(b), the 20th special symbol variation is performed, then a stage change occurs, and the first special after shifting to the next production stage. It shows a state in which four game balls have entered the first starting port 1120 while symbol variation is being performed. In this state, the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved balls are the 2nd to 5th special symbol variations after the occurrence of the stage change. The 1st to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first starting entrance winning after the special symbol variation (special symbol variation related to the stage change game) corresponding to the relevant suspended ball in the stage change section has started. is a sphere. Therefore, the 1st to 4th held balls are not stage change section held balls, and the 1st to 4th held balls can be read ahead.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 173(a), the number of times of special symbol variation that cannot perform the look-ahead effect is 4, whereas the examples shown in FIGS. 173(b) and (c) Then, the number of times of special symbol variation that cannot perform the look-ahead effect is one time. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of times of special symbol variation that cannot perform the look-ahead effect is not uniformly fixed. The number of times is changed according to the context of.

<First start gate winning process>
FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the processing at the time of winning the first start opening relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the stage change section determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 176 and 177 are diagrams for explaining the look-ahead effect.

174 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub-control circuit 1300 when the game ball has won the first start hole 1120. is. The sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the game ball has won the first starting hole 1120 by receiving the winning command of the first starting hole winning transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

In the first start opening winning processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes stage change section determination processing (step S9001). The stage change section determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the stage change section determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the stage change section relevant reserved ball exists among the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times (step S9151). As described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the stage-change-interval pending ball is a pending ball corresponding to the first start-up winning in the stage-change game (special symbol variation in which the stage is changed). In the processing of step S9151, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether information indicating the stage change section relevant held ball (stage change section relevant held ball information) is stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 1303 or not.

Specifically, as described above, the work RAM 1303 contains the first sub-reserving area (0), the first sub-reserving area (1), the first sub-reserving area (2), the first sub-reserving area (3), and , a first sub-reservation area (4) is provided. Information corresponding to this special symbol variation (the variation) is stored in the first sub-reserving area (0), and the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (4) are reserved. Information corresponding to four special symbol variations is stored. That is, as described above, the first sub-reserving area (0) and the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (4) are respectively the first special symbol start storage areas provided in the main RAM 1203 (0) to correspond to the first special symbol start storage area (4). The winning command for the first start winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the result of the big hit determination and information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbols. The sub CPU 1301 stores information corresponding to these pieces of information in the first sub-reserving area corresponding to the current first start winning by receiving the winning command of the first starting opening winning.

Also, when a stage change is performed in one special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 stores the stage change section relevant retained ball information in the first sub retaining area corresponding to the special symbol variation (see step S9155). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the stage change section relevant held ball information is stored in any of the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (3). In addition, when one special symbol variation ends and the next special symbol variation starts, the sub CPU 1301 stores the information stored in the first sub reservation area (1) to the first sub reservation area (4), Shift to the first sub-reserving area (0) and the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (3) respectively. At that time, if the stage change section relevant reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (1), the sub CPU 1301 transfers information from the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (0) With the transfer of the stage change section, the relevant held ball information is erased. Therefore, the situation that the stage change section relevant reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (0) does not occur.

In step S9151, when it is determined that the stage change section relevant held ball exists among the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times, the sub CPU 1301 reserves the held ball related to the first start winning prize of this time for the stage change section. It is specified as a sphere (step S9152). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating that the ball is a stage change section reserved ball (stage change section reserved ball information) in the first sub reserved area corresponding to the current first start opening winning prize. As a result, for example, in a situation where the stage change section relevant held ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (3), when the first start opening prize corresponding to the fourth held ball occurs, Stage change section reserved ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) (see FIG. 172(a)).

In step S9151, when it is determined that the stage change section relevant held ball does not exist among the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times, the sub CPU 1301 changes the special symbol variation counted after shifting to the current production stage. number of times (variation count number after stage transition) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize of this time (step S9153). The post-transition variation count number is stored in the work RAM 1303, and the value is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the transition to the stage does not reach a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start winning prize this time, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the special pattern variation corresponding to the first start winning prize of this time It is determined whether or not the seventh notice effect is generated in the symbol variation (step S9154). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern (main variation pattern) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start winning prize is the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to effect number "121" or "122"). It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern corresponding to . Since the winning command for the first starting winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, by receiving the winning command for the first starting winning prize, the sub CPU 1301 can recognize the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize this time. Further, the variation pattern includes information corresponding to the effect performed during the special symbol variation. The sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the seventh advance notice effect is performed during the special symbol variation based on the information.

In step S9153, when it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, or corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time When it is determined that the seventh notice effect will occur in the special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 specifies the pending ball related to the first start opening winning prize this time as the pending ball in the stage change section (step S9155). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores the stage change section relevant reserved ball information in the first sub reserved area corresponding to the current first start opening winning prize. As a result, for example, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize this time (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball) is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage , the stage change section relevant held ball information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) (see FIG. 171(d)). Also, although not shown, for example, when the seventh notice effect occurs during the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize this time (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball), the first sub-reserved area In (4), the stage change section relevant held ball information is stored.

Although not shown, similarly, a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs during the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start winning prize this time, In addition, when winning the performance stage shift lottery before reaching the prescribed number, the stage change section relevant reserved ball information may be stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the current first start opening winning prize. In addition, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting entrance winning this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the 5th specific Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you do not win the production stage transition reservation lottery when the specified number is reached, in the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the first start entrance prize this time , the stage change section relevant held ball information may be stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting entrance winning this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the 5th specific Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you win the production stage transition reservation lottery when the specified number is reached, the stage will be in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the next first start entrance winning It is also possible to store change section pertinent held ball information.

After executing the processing of step S9152 or step S9155, or when it is determined in step S9153 that the seventh notice effect does not occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening prize this time, the sub CPU 1301 executes this subroutine. finish.

The stage change section determination processing performed in step S9101 of FIG. 174 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 174 .

After executing the process of step S9101, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pending ball related to the current first starting entrance winning is the stage change section pending ball (including the stage change section pending ball) (step S9102). When the sub CPU 1301 determines that the held ball related to the first start opening winning prize this time is the stage change section held ball, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending ball related to the current first starting point winning prize is not the stage change section pending ball, the sub CPU 1301 sets the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting point winning to a fixed value. It is determined whether or not they correspond (step S9103). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, the first jackpot that is relatively advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot with a short time) is relatively A disadvantageous second jackpot (for example, a jackpot with a small number of rounds or a jackpot with no short working hours) may be provided. On top of that, the probability that a predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) is selected when the first jackpot is achieved and the probability that the predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) is selected when the second jackpot is achieved are the same, while the probability of selecting a predetermined variation pattern (unspecified jackpot) in the case of the first jackpot and the predetermined variation pattern (unspecified jackpot) in the case of the second jackpot are selected. It may be configured to be different from the probability. In this case, the predetermined variation pattern (fixed value) and the predetermined variation pattern (indeterminate jackpot) may perform the special symbol variation with the same variation pattern. In the processing of step S9103, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first starting opening winning is a variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value) other than a predetermined variation pattern (indefinite jackpot). or not. When the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start opening winning prize is not the variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start winning prize this time is a variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the timing at which the first start winning prize of this time occurs is It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined time (for example, time corresponding to 41 frames) after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed (step S9104). If it is determined that the timing at which the current first start opening win occurs is within a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing at which the first starting opening winning this time occurs is not within a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 1301 performs the sub variation pattern (second half) lottery process. Execute (step S9105). The sub-variation pattern is composed of the first half and the second half, and the main variation pattern (variation pattern of the special symbols) is also composed of the first half and the latter half. In the process of step S9105, the sub CPU 1301, the main variation pattern information (information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol) included in the winning command of the first start winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, and the current effect The content of the second half of the sub-fluctuation pattern is determined by performing a lottery based on random numbers based on the stage.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes a sub variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9106). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number, based on the sub-variation pattern (second half) and the main variation pattern determined in step S9105 and the current production stage, the first half of the sub-variation pattern. Determine content. Information indicating the current performance stage is stored in a performance stage flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303. can be recognized.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (step S9107). When determining that the second special symbol variation is being displayed, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the second special lottery corresponding to the second special symbol variation is a loss or a small hit (step S9108). ). When determining that the result of the second special lottery is neither a loss nor a small win (a big win), the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine. In this embodiment, as in the second pachinko game machine, a method (simultaneous variation type) is adopted in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Therefore, a situation in which a big hit related to the second special symbol suddenly occurs is assumed, but by executing the processing of steps S9107 and S9108, even in such a situation, unintended game characteristics may occur. It seems that there is no

If it is determined in step S9107 that the second special symbol is not being changed and displayed, or if it is determined in step S9108 that the result of the second special lottery is a loss or a small hit (not a big hit), the sub CPU 1301 , executes a look-ahead effect lottery process (step S9109). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random value, based on the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106, regarding the first start-up winning this time (for the sub-variation pattern ) Determines whether or not to generate a look-ahead effect, and determines the contents of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 183) when the look-ahead effect is to be generated (step S9109).

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a look-ahead effect will occur for the current first starting opening prize, based on the result of the look-ahead effect lottery process in step S9109 (step S9110). When judging that the look-ahead effect will be generated for the first starting opening prize this time, the sub CPU 1301 sets the look-ahead flag to ON (step S9111). The look-ahead flag is a flag indicating that a look-ahead effect is generated for one first starting opening winning, and is set off when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning starts. As a result, the result of the first special lottery related to the first start-up winning is suggested between the occurrence of the first start-up winning and the start of the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start-up winning. An effect (read-ahead effect) will be performed.

If it is determined in step S9110 that the look-ahead effect will not occur for the current first starting opening prize, or after executing the process of step S9111, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the processing of steps S9109 to S9111 may be configured as follows. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start-up prize this time, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the first start-up prize this time is a reserved ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect. do. The holding ball that can perform the look-ahead effect is a specific sub-variation pattern (for example, sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 182), and based on the main variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value It is a reserved ball for which production is performed by the determined sub-variation pattern. If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the reserved ball related to the current first starting opening prize is a reserved ball that can perform the prefetch effect, the sub CPU 1301 stores the prefetching in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening prize this time. Enabled information (information indicating that the read-ahead effect can be performed) is stored. If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the reserved ball related to the current first starting opening prize is a reserved ball that cannot perform the prefetch effect, the sub CPU 1301 puts the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening prize this time into the prefetching area. Impossible information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect cannot be performed) is stored.

In FIG. 176(a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 while one special symbol variation is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is read ahead. It shows a state in which the enabled information is stored. In FIG. 176(b), after the state shown in FIG. 176(a), one game ball enters the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second game ball It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. In FIG. 177(a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 1120 while one special symbol variation is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is read ahead. It shows a state in which the enabled information is stored. In FIG. 177(b), after the state shown in FIG. 177(a), one game ball enters the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the second game ball It shows a state in which the read-ahead disabled information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. In FIG. 177(c), after the state shown in FIG. 177(b), one game ball enters the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third game ball It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball.

When it is determined that a prefetch effect will occur for the current first start win, the sub CPU 1301 performs a prefetch effect for the first start win in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start win. Information indicating that (prefetch relevant information) is stored. And, if the pre-readable information is stored in all the first sub-reserving areas (excluding the first sub-reserving area (0)) corresponding to the first starting opening winning before the first starting opening winning this time, the sub The CPU 1301 rewrites the read-ahead enabled information stored in these first sub-reserve areas to read-ahead information. The prefetching information is information indicating that the prefetching effect is performed until the special symbol variation corresponding to the first sub-reserving area in which the prefetching information is stored is started.

In FIG. 176(c), after the state shown in FIG. 176(b), one game ball enters the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the third game ball It shows a state in which the prefetched information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. At this time, prefetching information is stored instead of prefetchable information in the first sub-holding areas corresponding to the first and second holding balls. As a result, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first and second held balls is being performed, the look-ahead performance suggesting the result of the big hit judgment relating to the third held ball is performed. In addition, in FIG. 176(d), after the state shown in FIG. 176(c), one game ball enters the first start port 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and four It shows a state in which the read-ahead disabled information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the eye-holding sphere. Thus, when the prefetch relevant information is stored in the first sub-reserving area corresponding to one reserved ball, the pre-reading disabled information is stored in the first sub-reserving area corresponding to the next reserved ball.

In addition, when it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur for the first start-up winning this time, the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0 )), if there is a first sub-reserving area in which pre-reading disabling information is stored, there are a plurality of first sub-reserving areas in which pre-reading disabling information is stored In this case, the read-ahead enabled information stored in the first sub-reservation area with a larger number than the first sub-reservation area with the largest number is rewritten to the pre-reading information. In FIG. 177(d), after the state shown in FIG. 177(c), one game ball enters the first starting port 1120 while the one special symbol variation continues, and the fourth game ball It shows a state in which the prefetched information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. At this time, prefetching information is stored instead of prefetchable information in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the third holding ball. As a result, while the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st and 2nd reserved balls are being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the 3rd reserved ball is performed. While being held, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the big hit determination related to the fourth held ball is performed.

In addition, if the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a stage change section reserved ball, it is possible to store the unpredictable information in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening prize this time. good. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 172(d), when it is determined to generate the prefetch effect for the fourth reserved ball, the prefetch stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the first reserved ball The non-readable information may be left as it is, and the prefetchable information stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the second to third holding balls may be rewritten to the prereading information. In this case, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to third reserved balls cannot be performed. While being performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the big-hit determination relating to the fourth held ball is performed.

Alternatively, if the reserved ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is the holding ball in the stage change section, while prefetching disabled information is stored in the first sub-reserving area corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time, If the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a stage change section reserved ball other than the stage change section relevant reserved ball, the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the first start opening prize this time Prefetchable information may be stored. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 172(d), if it is determined to generate a look-ahead effect for the 4th reserved ball, it is stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the 1st to 3rd reserved balls. It is also possible to rewrite the pre-readable information that has been pre-read to the pre-read information. In this case, while the special symbol variations corresponding to the 1st to 3rd held balls are being performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the big hit judgment relating to the 4th held ball is performed. Become.

In addition, as described above, the first sub reservation area is provided in the work RAM 1303 and corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area provided in the main RAM 1203 . Information similar to the information stored in the first sub-reserving area of work RAM 1303 can be configured to be stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of main RAM 1203 as well. In this case, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 1303 is controlled to be generated by the sub-control circuit 1300 according to the information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 1203. is possible. Further, the main control circuit 1200 may determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 1203 . In addition, regarding the information stored in the first sub-reserving area of the work RAM 1303, it may be configured such that a suggestive effect corresponding to the information is performed to such an extent that the player can recognize it.

<Processing at the start of the first special symbol variation>
FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the process at the start of the first special symbol variation related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing stage count processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the stage change occurrence lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern selection table. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a sub-fluctuation pattern replacement table.

In the first special symbol variation start time process shown in FIG. 178, in the normal mode (see FIG. 129(a)), after the game ball wins the first start opening 1120, the special symbol variation related to the start winning starts. This is the process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 . Also, prior to executing the processing shown in FIG. 178, the sub CPU 1301 updates the information stored in the first sub-reserving area (1) to the first sub-reserving area (4) to the first sub-reserving area. (0), and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (3).

In the first special symbol variation start time processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing (step S9201). The stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 179 .

In the stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not this special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode (step S9251). When determining that this special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9252). The stage change flag is a flag indicating that a condition for generating a stage change is satisfied, and when the stage change flag is set to ON, a stage change is performed. After executing the process of step S9252, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining in step S9251 that this special symbol variation is not the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 1301 executes stage count processing (step S9253). The stage count process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the stage count process, first, the sub CPU 1301 adds 1 to the value of the post-transition variation counter (step S9261). The value of the post-stage shift variation counter indicates the number of first special symbol variations counted after shifting to the current production stage (post-stage shift variation count number), and is stored in the work RAM 1303 . The sub CPU 1301 adds the value of the post-stage change variation counter each time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display unit 1163) is performed, while the second special symbol variation (second special symbol display 1164) is performed, the value of the post-transition variation number counter is not incremented.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the value of the post-stage change fluctuation counter is 20 (step S9262). If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the value of the post-transition fluctuation number counter is not 20, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 1301 determines that the value of the post-transition variation number counter is 20, it sets the specified number reaching flag to ON (step S9263). The specified number arrival flag is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuation counts after stage transition has reached the number of special symbol fluctuations (20 times) related to the conditions for generating a stage change. When the specified number reach flag is set to ON when one special symbol variation starts, basically (unless you win the production stage transition suspension lottery when reaching the specified number (see step S9273 in FIG. 181)) , Stage change will be performed in the special symbol variation.

After executing the process of step S9263, the sub CPU 1301 sets the post-stage change fluctuation number counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage change fluctuation number counter) (step S9264). After that, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The stage count processing performed in step S9253 in FIG. 179 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 179 .

After executing the process of step S9253, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 174) is set to ON (step S9254). When determining that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes stage change occurrence lottery processing (step S9255). The stage change generation lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the stage change occurrence lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the next change change flag is set to ON (step S9271). The change flag at the time of the next change has reached the number of special symbol variations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence conditions after the stage transition in one special symbol variation, but the stage change will occur in the next special symbol. This is a flag indicating that the change is carried over (see step S9279). When determining that the next change change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9272). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9272, the sub CPU 1301 sets the change flag for the next change to OFF (step S9273), and terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9271 that the next change change flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the specified number reaching flag (see step S9263 in FIG. 180) is set to ON (step S9274). When it is determined that the specified number reaching flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) occurs during this special symbol variation. It is determined whether or not (step S9275). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the variation pattern in this special symbol variation is a variation pattern corresponding to a specific super reach. As described above, the winning command of the first start winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the sub CPU 1301, based on the information, determines the current special symbol. It is possible to recognize effects that may occur during fluctuations.

When it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 executes a production stage shift suspension lottery upon reaching the specified number (step S9276). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the lottery for suspending production stage shift upon reaching the prescribed number is won (step S9277).

When it is determined in step S9275 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol variation, or when it is determined in step S9277 that the production stage transition suspension lottery at the time of reaching the specified number is not won, the sub CPU 1301 A stage change flag is set to ON (step S9278). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9278, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding stage transition to production at the time of reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the change flag at the time of the next change to ON (step S9279). As a result, the stage change will be performed in the next special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9279, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9274 that the specified number reaching flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect will occur during this special symbol variation (step S9280). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the process result of step S9154 in FIG. In the process of step S9154, when the sub CPU 1301 determines that the seventh notice effect will occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning, in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the first starting opening winning, Information (seventh notice effect generation information) indicating that the seventh notice effect is generated during the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning prize is stored. At the time of executing the process of step S9280, the information stored in the first sub-reserving area has been shifted to the first sub-reserving area (0). In the process of step S9280, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the seventh notice effect will occur during the current special symbol change when the seventh notice effect occurrence information is stored in the first sub reservation area (0).

When determining that the seventh notice effect will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9281). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. After executing the process of step S9281, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 1301 determines that the seventh notice effect will not occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 selects a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the fifth specific super reach) during this special symbol variation. ) occurs (step S9282). This process is similar to the process of step S9275. When it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pre-specified number reaching production stage shift lottery (step S9283). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers. At that time, the sub CPU 1301 changes the winning probability of the effect stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number according to the value of the post-stage transition variation counter.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the lottery for transition to the production stage before reaching the specified number has been won (step S9284). If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the lottery for transition to the production stage before reaching the specified number has been won, it sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9285). As a result, the stage change will be performed in this special symbol variation. If it is determined in step S9282 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol variation, or if it is determined in step S9284 that the production stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number has not been won, or the processing of step S9285 is performed. After executing, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The stage change generation lottery process performed in step S9255 of FIG. 179 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 179 .

If it is determined in step S9254 that the prefetch flag is set to ON, or after executing the process of step S9255, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. In addition, when the seventh advance notice effect occurs during this special symbol variation, all the pending balls that exist at the time when the special symbol variation of this time is started are stage change section pending balls (see FIG. 175). Since no look-ahead effect is performed for the stage change section reserved ball (see FIG. 174), when the seventh notice effect occurs during this special symbol variation, the determination result of step S9254 is always "NO".

The stage change occurrence presence/absence determination processing performed in step S9201 of FIG. 178 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 178 .

After executing the process of step S9201, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 181) is set to ON (step S9202). ).

When determining that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes stage change destination lottery processing (step S9203). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the stage change destination lottery table and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the effect stage after the transition due to the stage change. Although not shown, in the stage change destination lottery table, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be the production stage after transition is defined in association with the random value range. It is As the stage change lottery tables, a stage change lottery table for the first production stage, a stage change lottery table for the second production stage, and a stage change lottery table for the third production stage are provided. The random value ranges are different in the stage change destination lottery table. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage to draw a lottery, and when the current production stage is the second production stage. draws a lottery with reference to the stage change lottery table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, lottery is drawn with reference to the stage change lottery table for the third production stage. I do.

As a result, when the effect stage after transition is determined, the sub CPU 1301 performs control to shift to the determined effect stage. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 updates the information stored in the production stage flag storage area to information corresponding to the production stage after transition. Then, the sub CPU 1301 sets the post-stage change fluctuation number counter to "0" (clears the value of the post-stage change fluctuation number counter) (step S9204).

When it is determined that the stage change flag is not set to ON in step S9202, the sub CPU 1301 sub-variation pattern (step S9105 of FIG. 174 and (see step S9106) is determined (step S9205). If it is determined that the sub-variation pattern has been determined when the first starting opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs, the sub CPU 1301 determines when the first starting opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs. (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174) and the current production stage are the same (step S9206).

If it is determined that the sub-variation pattern (see step S9105 and step S9106 in FIG. 174) is not determined when the first start opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs in step S9205, or in step S9206 It was determined that the current production stage is not the same as the production stage (at the time when the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174 is executed) when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs. In this case, the sub CPU 1301 executes a sub-variation pattern (second half) lottery process (step S9207), and further executes a sub-variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9208). Since the processing in steps S9207 and S9208 is the same as the processing in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174, description thereof will be omitted here.

In step S9206, when the first starting opening winning corresponding to this special symbol variation occurs, the production stage (at the time of executing the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174) and the current production stage are the same. If so, or after executing the process of step S9208, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the prefetch flag (see step S9111 in FIG. 174) is set to ON (step S9209).

When determining that the look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes sub variation pattern replacement processing (step S9210). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a process of replacing the already determined sub-variation pattern with another sub-variation pattern as necessary. A specific description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 182, the main variation pattern and the sub-variation pattern are defined in association with each other. As the main variation patterns, main variation pattern "1", main variation pattern "2", main variation pattern "3", and so on are provided. For example, although not shown, the main variation pattern "10" is the main variation pattern (see step S9154 in FIG. 175) corresponding to the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to effect number "121" or "122"). there is One main variation pattern is associated with a plurality of sub-variation patterns, and when the one main variation pattern is selected, any sub-variation pattern out of the plurality of sub-variation patterns selected. For example, in the processing of steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174, the sub CPU 1301 receives information indicating that the main variation pattern is "1" as the variation pattern command from the main control circuit 1200, the sub variation pattern One sub-variation pattern is selected from "1" to "30" (30 types of sub-variation patterns).

The sub-variation patterns include a sub-variation pattern (read-ahead possible sub-variation pattern) that can perform a look-ahead effect and a sub-variation pattern (a look-ahead impossible sub-variation pattern) that cannot perform a look-ahead effect. FIG. 182 also shows whether each sub-variation pattern is classified into a pre-readable sub-variation pattern or a non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. For example, sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns, and sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns. For example, if it is determined in step S9110 in FIG. 174 that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start-up winning this time, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a look-ahead possible sub-variation pattern. For example, read-ahead enabled information (information indicating that a read-ahead effect can be performed) is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning prize of this time. On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a non-prefetchable sub-variation pattern, the first sub-reservation area corresponding to the first start opening prize of this time is filled with non-prefetchable information (performing a prefetch effect information indicating that it is not possible to

After that, when the first starting opening winning occurs and the look-ahead effect occurs for the first starting opening winning (when the look-ahead flag is set to ON in step S9111), the description will be made with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. As described above, the sub CPU 1301 rewrites the read-ahead enabled information stored in the first sub-reserve area to the read-ahead information. In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 178, the sub CPU 1301 is stored in the first sub-reserving area (first sub-reserving area (0)) corresponding to this special symbol variation (step S9105 and If the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9106 is a pre-readable sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is replaced. On the other hand, the sub CPU1301, if prefetching disabled information is stored in the first sub reservation area (first sub reservation area (0)) corresponding to this special symbol variation (sub determined in step S9105 and step S9106 If the fluctuation pattern is a non-prefetchable sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is not replaced.

In the sub-variation pattern replacement table shown in FIG. 183, the sub-variation pattern after replacement is defined in association with the look-ahead effect pattern for each sub-variation pattern before replacement. As the sub-variation pattern before replacement, only the pre-readable sub-variation pattern is specified among the pre-readable sub-variation pattern and the non-prefetchable sub-variation pattern. The look-ahead effect pattern indicates the type of look-ahead effect, and is determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 174). The sub-variation pattern after replacement is a sub-variation pattern (pre-reading sub-variation pattern) corresponding to the look-ahead effect. In FIG. 183, as an example of the look-ahead sub-variation pattern, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "50" corresponding to the main variation pattern "1" are shown. Prefetching sub-variation patterns "31" to "35" are associated with pre-readable sub-variation patterns "1" to "5", and pre-reading sub-variation patterns "36" to "40" are pre-readable sub It is associated with the fluctuation patterns "6" to "10", and the prefetching sub fluctuation patterns "41" to "45" are associated with the prefetchable sub fluctuation patterns "11" to "15", prefetching The sub-variation patterns for "46" to "50" are associated with the pre-readable sub-variation patterns "16" to "20".

In the process of step S9210 in FIG. 178, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the sub-variation pattern replacement table to replace the already determined sub-variation pattern (prefetchable sub-variation pattern) with a new look-ahead sub-variation pattern. sub-fluctuation pattern. For example, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174 is the sub-variation pattern "1", and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in the pre-reading effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 174) is the pre-reading effect pattern. In the case of A, the sub CPU 1301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern “31” as the sub-variation pattern after replacement. Also, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 174 is the sub-variation pattern "10", and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in the pre-reading effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 174) is the pre-reading effect pattern. In the case of B, the sub CPU 1301 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern “37” as the sub-variation pattern after replacement.

Thus, for example, when the main variation pattern "1" is selected, one of the sub variation patterns "1" to "50" can be selected, but the sub variation pattern selection table does not define the look-ahead sub-variation patterns “31” to “50”. As a result, in both cases where the look-ahead effect is performed and when the look-ahead effect is not performed, it is possible to select the sub-variation pattern by a common method in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the processing related to determination of the variation pattern. On top of that, when the look-ahead effect is performed, by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table, by replacing it with the look-ahead sub-variation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead effect pattern, the sub-variation pattern that matches the look-ahead effect It is possible to change the decorative pattern with . The sub-variation pattern selection table and the sub-variation pattern replacement table are stored in the program ROM 1302.

Also, although not shown, as sub-variation pattern selection tables, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern selection table for the third production stage are provided. It is In these sub-variation pattern selection tables, the random value range assigned to each sub-variation pattern is different from each other, and the sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the first production stage, only in the second production stage A sub-variation pattern that can be selected and a sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the third production stage are set respectively. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 selects the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, and the current production stage is the second production stage. , the sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage A sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the pattern selection table.

Similarly, the sub-variation pattern replacement table includes a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the third production stage. is provided. In these sub-variation pattern replacement tables, the correspondence relationships between the sub-variation patterns before replacement and the sub-variation patterns after replacement are different from each other, and some of the types of the look-ahead effect patterns are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 1301 replaces the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, and the current production stage becomes the second production stage. , the sub-variation pattern is replaced by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage The sub-variation pattern is replaced by referring to the pattern replacement table.

If it is determined in step S9209 that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, or after executing the processing in step S9210, the sub CPU 1301 converts the already determined sub-fluctuation pattern into a sub-fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation scale. A replacement process is performed (step S9211). In this process, the sub CPU 1301, if the already determined sub-variation pattern is a normal system sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern corresponding to the default variation pattern shown in FIGS. 163 to 165), changes as necessary change the time. For example, at the time when the first starting opening prize corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation occurs, the first starting opening prize corresponds to the fourth reserved ball, and the sub-variation corresponding to the 4 second fluctuation A pattern is selected, but after that, when all of the suspension is digested and the special symbol variation is reached, processing is performed to replace with a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the 13-second variation.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see steps S9273, S9278, S9281, and S9285 in FIG. 181) is set to ON (step S9212). When determining that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 executes stage change wipe color lottery processing (step S9213). The stage change wipe color lottery process will be described below.

As described above, when the stage change is performed based on the fact that the number of special symbol variations (variation count after stage transition) reaches a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (Fig. 170) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. Also, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh advance notice effect, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (see FIG. 169) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is displayed. Transition to the corresponding background. In addition, after the effect in the fifth specific super reach that transitions via the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is completed, the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after transition (first effect stage) , second production stage, or third production stage).

A predetermined wipe image is displayed on the display device 1007 when transitioning to the background corresponding to the production stage after transition in this manner. The wipe image can be displayed in various colors (default color, gold, or special color). Specifically, when the production stage after transition is the first production stage, the wipe image for the first production stage in default color, the wipe image for the first production stage in gold, or the first production stage in special color A wipe image is displayed. When the production stage after transition is the second production stage, the wipe image for the second production stage in default color, the wipe image for the second production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the second production stage in special color is displayed. Is displayed. When the production stage after transition is the third production stage, the wipe image for the third production stage in default color, the wipe image for the third production stage in gold, or the wipe image for the third production stage in special color is displayed. Is displayed. In the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 1301 refers to the stage change wipe color lottery table and performs lottery based on random values to determine the color of the wipe image. Although not shown, in the stage change wipe color lottery table, various colors (default color , gold, and special colors) and random number ranges are defined in association with each other.

Stage change wipe color lottery tables include a first stage change wipe color lottery table, a second stage change wipe color lottery table, a third stage change wipe color lottery table, a fourth stage change wipe color lottery table, and a fifth stage. A change wipe color lottery table and a sixth stage change wipe color lottery table are provided, and these stage change wipe color lottery tables have different random value ranges. The 1st stage change wipe color lottery table to the 6th stage change wipe color lottery table respectively correspond to the setting values "1" to "6", and the sub CPU 1301 performs the stage change corresponding to the current setting value. A wipe color lottery table is referenced. In each stage change wipe color lottery table, the random value range for the special color is set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the special color will be selected. For example, when the setting value is "4", the probability of displaying a special color wipe image is higher than when the setting value is "2". , the probability that the special color wipe image is displayed is higher. As a result, the set value is suggested through the appearance frequency of the special color wipe image.

In the above, as an example, when the stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh notice effect (including the case where the seventh notice effect occurs in the game reaching the specified number), the effect number "121" It has been explained that the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed before the corresponding effect or effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. However, in this case, only the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" may be performed, and the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" may not be performed. In addition, both the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" and the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" are performed. Even if the wipe image is not displayed after the corresponding effect is performed, and the wipe image is displayed only after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. good. When adopting such a configuration, the wipe image is displayed only once in one stage change. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the wipe image.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, when a predetermined look-ahead effect occurs, the stage change wipe color lottery process may be performed during the previous special symbol variation of the stage change game. The predetermined look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance that can be performed during the previous special pattern variation of the stage change game when a variation pattern corresponding to the seventh advance notice performance is determined as a main variation pattern in the stage change game. In the look-ahead effect, the game freezes in a state where a predetermined image is displayed, and shifts to the stage change game in that state. In this case, in the stage change game, the processing of steps S9212 and S9213 may not be performed (wipe image may be displayed). Also, the predetermined look-ahead effect may be configured to occur only in one effect stage (for example, the second effect stage).

When determining that the stage change flag is not set to ON in step S9212, or after executing the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect lottery process corresponding to the effect stage (step S9214). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on the random value, the finally determined sub-fluctuation pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern determined by executing the process of step S9211), and the current production stage Based on the above, a process for determining the specific content of the effect is performed. For example, if the current effect stage is the first effect stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first effect stage announcement lottery process (see FIG. 130). Further, when the current production stage is the second production stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the second production stage announcement content lottery process, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub CPU 1301 executes the third production stage. A performance stage announcement content lottery process is executed. In the second production stage notice content lottery process and the third production stage notice content lottery process, as in the first production stage notice content lottery process, the special symbol variation related to the first start entrance winning is based on the sub-variation pattern. The content of the performance to be performed during the event is determined. After executing the process of step S9214, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Basic screen display in each production stage>
FIG. 184(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first production stage. FIG. 184(b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the second production stage. FIG. 184(c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the third production stage.

As shown in FIG. 184(a), in the first production stage, a first production stage name image 9101 indicating the name of the first production stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 1007. FIG. As shown in FIG. 184(b), in the second effect stage, a second effect stage name image 9102 indicating the name of the second effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 1007. FIG. As shown in FIG. 184(c), in the third production stage, a third production stage name image 9103 indicating the name of the third production stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the display device 1007. FIG. The first production stage name image 9101, the second production stage name image 9102, and the third production stage name image 9103 are displayed at the same positions on the display device 1007, respectively.

Also, a counter image 9104 is displayed on the display device 1007 in each production stage. As described above, the counter image 9104 is an image corresponding to the number of times of special symbol fluctuations (the number of post-shift fluctuation counts) performed after the occurrence of the stage change. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol variations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The number in the numerator indicates the number of fluctuation counts after the current stage shift.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184(a), in the first effect stage, a pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, a pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and a pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 are displayed. ing. As described above, the pseudo-continuous-step notification bell image 9021, the pseudo-continuous-step notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo-continuous-step notification cherry image 9023 are either dark or bright. can be displayed (see FIG. 162). In addition, the pseudo-continuous-stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo-continuous-stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo-continuous-stage notification cherry image 9023 are always displayed while staying in the first production stage. It has become.

Specifically, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not occurring, or when the pseudo-continuous effect is occurring and the stage of the pseudo-continuous stage is "pseudo 1", the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-continuous stage notification The watermelon image 9022 for continuous stage notification and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed darkly. When the pseudo-continuous effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-continuous stage is "pseudo 2", the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is brightly displayed, and the pseudo-continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 and the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9022 are displayed brightly. A cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. When the pseudo-continuous effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-continuous stage is "pseudo 3", the pseudo-continuous stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022 are displayed brightly, A cherry image 9023 is displayed darkly. In the case of developing into super ready-to-win via the pseudo continuous effect, during the super ready-to-win, pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 are displayed. displayed brightly.

Also, as shown in FIG. 184(b), a stock timer image 9110 is displayed in the second production stage. The stock timer image 9110 is an image corresponding to any numerical value (“PLAY TIME”) from “00:00” to “99:99”. "PLAY TIME" indicates the length of time during which super reach is performed, and the effect in super reach is performed over the time corresponding to "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110. Such "PLAY TIME" is added (stocked) according to the effect (time stock notice) performed during the second effect stage.

Although not shown, as the time stock notice, a first time stock notice, a second time stock notice, and a third time stock notice are provided. In the first time stock notice, a predetermined item lamp lights up, a predetermined item decoration part (movable part) rattles, and at the same time the item decoration part jumps forward, a numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" is displayed. increases. The item lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the item decoration. The item decoration portion is provided at a predetermined location of the game board unit 1010 (for example, as part of the second character decoration portion) and is made of translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.). Also, the item decoration portion is decorated with a predetermined item. In the second time stock notice, there is no light emission of the item lamp and rattling movement of the item decoration portion as in the first time stock notice, and the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" suddenly increases. In the third time stock notice, after a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, an image is displayed such that the effect is absorbed by the item decoration portion, and at the same time the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" increases.

Also, the display pattern of the stock timer image 9110 corresponds to the display pattern of the background image. When "00:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the default pattern. When any numerical value from "05:00" to "30:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with the effect level 1 pattern. When any numerical value from "35:00" to "60:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with the effect level 2 pattern. When any numerical value from "65:00" to "95:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with the effect level 3 pattern. When "99:99" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed with the effect level MAX pattern. As the stock timer image 9110, "00:01" to "04:99", "30:01" to "34:99", "60:01" to "64:99", "95:01" to The numerical value of "99:98" is not displayed.

The effect level 1 pattern has a higher chance of winning a big hit than the default pattern, the effect level 2 pattern has a higher chance of winning a big win than the effect level 1 pattern, and the effect level 3 pattern has a higher chance of winning than the effect level 2 pattern. In comparison, the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and the effect level MAX pattern has the highest degree of expectation for a big win. In effect level 1 pattern to effect level 3 pattern, a background image based on orange is displayed, and the higher the effect level, the more flashy the display mode. In the effect level MAX pattern, a background image based on red is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184(c), in the third production stage, a character appearance meter image 9120 is displayed. The character appearance meter image 9120 includes a left character appearance meter image 9120L and a right character appearance meter image 9120R. The left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are images imitating meters.

Specifically, the left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are respectively in the initial display mode (the meter is not charged), the level 1 display mode (the meter is charged by one level), Level 2 display mode (the meter is filled to two levels), level 3 display mode (the meter is filled to three levels), and level MAX display mode (the meter is full). It can be displayed in any manner.

The meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 accumulates in accordance with the effect (the meter UP notice) performed during the third effect stage. In the meter UP notice, there are cases where the meter accumulates by one stage, two stages, and three stages. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L becomes the level MAX display mode, the left character 9121L appears on the display device 1007 (enters a standby state). When the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R becomes the level MAX display mode, the right character 9121R appears on the display device 1007 (enters a standby state).

When only the left character 9121L of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enters the standby state, the super reach (left character super reach) corresponding to the left character 9121L develops. When only the right character 9121R of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enters the standby state, the super reach (right character super reach) corresponding to the right character 9121R develops. When both the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R enter the standby state, the super reach (super reach for both characters) corresponding to both characters develops.

In the left character super reach, when the right character 9121R appears on the display device 1007, it shifts to both character super reach. transition to Also, when the first teammate character appears on the display device 1007 in the super reach for the left character, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Similarly, when the first teammate character appears on the display device 1007 in the super reach for the right character, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Also, in the double-sided character super reach, if the button repeated effect is successful, the super reach develops into a predetermined super reach. These predetermined super reach are the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 146(a)) which is shifted when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first production stage.

The silhouettes of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are displayed on the display device 1007 even when the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full. Specifically, when the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed in the default state on the display device 1007, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R. is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed on the display device 1007 in the default state. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 1 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L blinks in blue, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 1 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R blinks in blue.

When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 2 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L blinks in green, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 2 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R blinks in green. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 3 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is lit and displayed in red, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 3 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is illuminated in red. In this way, as the level of the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 increases, the degree of expectation for a big win increases.

Note that even if the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the left character 9121L to the right character 9121R may enter the standby state. Specifically, when the decorative pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, the screen of the display device 1007 may be displayed in a rotating mode, and after the rotation is completed, various icons may be stopped and displayed. Icons that can be stopped and displayed in this manner include a left character icon, a right character icon, a "cherry" icon, and the like. When the left character icon is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the left character super reach. When the right character icon is stopped and displayed, it shifts to right character super reach. When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed, the predetermined super reach is performed.

<8th notice production>
FIG. 185(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 185(b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 185(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of decorative symbols.

The eighth notice effect shown in FIG. 185 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the second effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)). The eighth notice effect can occur only in the second effect stage.

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "151" to "155", first, a sign that the decorative symbols will become tenpai (reaching state) is generated. The sign suggests that the second character lamp (see FIG. 170(c)) blinks, and that the ten-pai fanning will occur. In the above explanation, it is assumed that the corresponding character lamp is always lit while staying in each production stage. However, in a game other than the specified number reaching game, the corresponding character lamp may basically be extinguished. In such a configuration, the indication may be that the second character lamp is turned on.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “151” is a effect that fades out after the occurrence of the sign. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "152", after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the fanning of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai is displayed on the display device 1007. After that, an image corresponding to the failure of the ten-pie fanning (failed ten-pie fanning image) is displayed on the display device 1007, and the display device 1007 becomes a wipe display to return to the normal background. In the effect corresponding to the effect number “153”, after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the fanning of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai is displayed on the display device 1007 . , and after that, an image corresponding to the success of the ten-pie fanning (ten-pie fanning successful image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . When the tenpai-inciting success image is displayed, after that, it shifts to the announcement after the tenpai-success.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number “154”, after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the fanning of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai is displayed on the display device 1007 . , and after that, an image corresponding to the success of the ten-pie-fighting (successful ten-pie-fighting image) is displayed on the display device 1007, and "PLAY TIME" is stocked. When the tenpai-inciting success image is displayed, after that, it shifts to the announcement after the tenpai-success. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "155", after the occurrence of the sign, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to the fanning of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai is displayed on the display device 1007. , and after that, an image corresponding to the success of the ten pie-fighting (successful ten-pie fanning image) is displayed on the display device 1007 . When the tenpai fanning success image is displayed, it then shifts to the intense heat notice.

The predetermined movable accessory that operates in the presentation corresponding to the presentation numbers "152" to "155" is the same movable accessory that operates in the notice after the icon stops (see FIG. 145). Further, when the ten-pie-flavoring success image is displayed in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "153" to "155", the decoration pattern is displayed in the ready-to-win mode. Further, after the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "153" and "154" are performed, the transition is made to the advance notice after the success of the tenpai, and when the notice is completed after the success of the tenpai, the sixth specific super reach, the seventh specific super reach, and Develop into any super-reach of the first specified super-reach. In the notice after the success of Tenpai, a connecting effect corresponding to the development destination Super Reach is performed.

In particular, when it develops to the 6th specific super reach, an image showing the title of the 6th specific super reach is displayed on the display device 1007 in the notice after the success of Tenpai. A predetermined slot game is played in the sixth specific super reach. In the slot game, a plurality of types of icons including a "cherry" icon are variably displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 1007, and then stopped. When the "cherry" icon is stopped in three rows of left, middle, and right in the slot game (when three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The predetermined super reach is the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 146(a)) that shifts when the "cherry" icon is displayed in the first effect stage. Therefore, the slot game can be said to be a mission for transitioning to a predetermined super reach.

When the slot game starts, "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 gradually decreases. While "PLAY TIME" remains (is greater than 0), the slot game is played repeatedly. Then, when the "PLAY TIME" becomes 0, the slot game ends. That is, the slot game is played for a period of time corresponding to "PLAY TIME". If three "cherry" icons are collected within the time period, the mission is completed, and a predetermined super reach is achieved. In other words, "PLAY TIME" is the time limit given to clear the mission.

As described above, "PLAY TIME" is stocked in the effect corresponding to the effect number "154", but this stock is due to the second time stock notice. In the second production stage, both the time stock announcement and the big hit announcement production (for example, the eighth announcement production) may occur during one special pattern variation.

In the intense heat notice that shifts after the effect corresponding to the effect number “155” is performed, one or more characters among the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are displayed on the display device 1007. appear in Then, it develops into super reach according to the combination of characters that have appeared. The intense heat notice can also occur in the first production stage and the third production stage.

Four timings are provided as timings at which the sign may occur. Specifically, when the sign occurs 4.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when the sign occurs 8.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 2). , when the sign occurs 12.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 3), when the sign occurs 16.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 4), is provided. A sign occurs at one of these four timings. At timing 2, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 1, and at timing 3, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 2. However, at timing 4, all effects following the omen occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 3. In FIG. 185(b), only timing 1 is illustrated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185(c), in the production (timing 1) corresponding to production number "152", each decorative design (left decorative design, middle decorative design, and right decorative design) changes from the start of fluctuation. When 11 seconds have passed (when the display of the failed image of the ten-pie fanning ends), the process is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that each decorative pattern is stopped when the wipe display returns to the normal background after failing in the tenpai fanning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the results of the tenpai-fighting. From the same point of view, the timings 2 to 4 are also the stop timing of each decorative pattern, which is 15 seconds after the start of variation, 19 seconds after the start of variation, and 23 seconds after the start of variation.

<Logo lamp preview>
FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the logo lamp announcement effect. FIGS. 186(b) and 186(c) are diagrams showing time charts of the logo lamp announcement effect.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined portion of the game board unit 1010 (for example, the upper side of the display device 1007), and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo lamp will be described in more detail below.

The logo cover has a first logo portion, a second logo portion and a third logo portion. The first logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the first word, the second logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the second word, and the third logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the second word. The logo portion is decorated with a shape representing the third word. The first word, the second word, and the third word are predetermined words (character strings), respectively. The third word is sometimes referred to as "Z". The first logo portion is provided on the left side of the logo cover, the second logo portion is provided on the central portion of the logo cover, and the third logo portion is provided on the right side of the logo cover. .

The logo lamp is composed of a first logo lamp, a second logo lamp, and a third logo lamp. The first logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first logo portion, the second logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second logo portion, The third logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third logo portion. Thus, by lighting the first logo lamp, the letter "X" is lit, by lighting the second logo lamp, the letter "Y" is lit, and by lighting the third logo lamp, the letter "Z" is lit. can create the appearance of lighting up

In this embodiment, the logo lamp announcement effect is performed using such a logo lamp. The logo lamp notice effect shown in FIG. 186 is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)). . The logo lamp notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with other big hit notice effects during one special pattern variation.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “161” is that after the first logo lamp (character “X”) lights up for a predetermined time (one second), the first logo lamp (character “X”) turns off. It is a performance to turn off the lights. The effect corresponding to the effect number “162” is that after the first logo lamp (character “X”) lights up for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character “Y”) is turned on for a predetermined time (1 seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (character “X”) continues to be illuminated), and then the first logo lamp (character “X”) and the second logo lamp (character “Y”). It is a production that lights out.

The effect corresponding to the effect number “163” is that after the first logo lamp (character “X”) lights up for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character “Y”) is turned on for a predetermined time (1 second) (during which the first logo lamp (character “X”) continues to be illuminated), and then the third logo lamp (character “Z”) is illuminated (first logo lamp (character “X”). character) and the second logo lamp (character "Y") continues to light up). Lighting of the first logo lamp (character "X"), the second logo lamp (character "Y"), and the third logo lamp (character "Z") continues until the end of the special symbol variation.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" are effects related to the influence of whether or not the decorative pattern will become Tenpai. As the characters are lit up in sequence like "X"→"Y"→"Z", the possibility that the decorative pattern will be Tenpai increases. Then, when all the characters are lit (when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed), it is determined that the decorative pattern is tenpai (always in the ready-to-win mode). That is, the logo lamp forewarning effect is a effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win increases as the number of lit logo lamps increases.

FIG. 186(b) shows a time chart when the logo lamp announcement effect is performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage. Here, two timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (“X” character) lights up 5.5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (for 10 seconds tenpai), and when 9.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern A case where the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up from the point of time (for 14 seconds tenpai) is provided. In the 1st production stage and the 3rd production stage, when the decorative pattern fluctuates with the default fluctuation pattern, when it becomes a reach state after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation (10 seconds tenpai) and after 14 seconds from the start of fluctuation With a reach state There is a time (14 seconds tenpai) (see FIGS. 163 and 165).

The two timings in FIG. 186(b) correspond to such two types of tenpai timings. As a result, when the decorative pattern enters the ready-to-win state 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be lit at the timing indicated by "for 10 seconds tenpai" in FIG. 186(b). In addition, when the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing indicated by "for 14 seconds tenpai" in FIG. 186(b).

When the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed in the second effect stage, four timings are provided as lighting timings of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (“X” character) lights up 6 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern (timing 1), and when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the first logo lamp ( (timing 2), when the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up after 14 seconds from the start of the variation of the decorative design (timing 3), and when the decorative design A case (timing 4) is provided in which the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up after 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In FIG. 186(c), only timing 1 is illustrated. These four timings respectively correspond to the four timings at which the above-described eighth notice effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to light the logo lamp at the timing when the tenpai fanning is being performed in the eighth notice effect.

The logo lamp advance notice effect described above may also be performed at each stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. That is, any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" can occur in each of the "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2", and "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect. For example, in "pseudo 1", the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative design, and in "pseudo 2", the first logo lamp has been lit after a predetermined time has elapsed since the restart of the variation of the decorative design. The logo lamp (character "X") lights up, and in "Pseudo 3", the first logo lamp (character "X") lights up after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern. At this time, for example, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in the "pseudo 1", the transition to the "pseudo 2" is not performed, while the "pseudo 1" corresponds to the effect number "163". It may be so arranged that the transition to the "pseudo 2" is performed when the effect to do so is performed. Also, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in the "pseudo 2", the process does not shift to the "pseudo 3", while the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed in the "pseudo 2". If done, it may be shifted to "pseudo 3". In addition, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" are performed in the "pseudo 3", the transition to the super reach is not performed, while the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed in the "pseudo 3". You may make it shift to a super reach in the case where it is.

<Lottery processing for the content of the first production stage logo lamp notice>
FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the performance stage announcement content lottery process (see FIG. 130).

In the first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect will occur based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9301). When determining that the pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect progresses to "Pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9302). When judging that the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 executes the lottery process for the details of the logo lamp notice for pseudo 3 (step S9303). The pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 188 .

In the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect (step S9321). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is a sub-variation pattern (10 seconds tenpai variation pattern ), and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "pseudo 3". do.

When it is determined that 10 seconds tenpai or 14 seconds tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 1301, based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation, the contents of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice is determined (step S9322). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp announcement effect will not be performed in the "pseudo 3" (step S9323). . After executing the process of step S9322 or step S9323, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo 3 logo lamp notice lottery process performed in step S9303 of FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 187 .

When it is determined in step S9302 that the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9303, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo-2 logo lamp notice lottery process (step S9304). The lottery process for pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content will be described below with reference to FIG. 189 .

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect (step S9341). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is a sub-variation pattern (10-second tenpai variation pattern ) and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation in "pseudo 2". do.

When judging that 10-second tenpai or 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo-2" in the pseudo-continuous effect, the sub CPU 1301 judges whether or not the details of the logo lamp notice for pseudo-3 have been determined (step S9342). In this process, if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 188 has been executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the details of the simulation 3 logo lamp announcement have been determined. or when the pseudo-continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo-3"), it is determined that the pseudo-3 logo lamp announcement content has not been determined.

If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 decides the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9343). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number “163” is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in “pseudo 3”, the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number “161” as the logo lamp forecast effect to be performed in “pseudo 2”. to decide one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" has been determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2". determines the corresponding performance.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents of the pseudo 3 logo lamp announcement have not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the pseudo 2 logo lamp announcement based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time (step S9344). . In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9341 that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp announcement effect will not be performed in the "pseudo-2" (step S9345). ). After executing the process of step S9343, step S9344, or step S9345, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo-2 logo lamp notice lottery process performed in step S9304 of FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 187 .

When it is determined in step S9301 that the pseudo-continuous effect will not occur, or after executing the process of step S9304, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo-1 logo lamp notice lottery process (step S9305). The pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 190 .

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "no simulated" effect. (Step S9361). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time is a sub-variation pattern (10 seconds tenpai variation pattern ), and a sub-variation pattern (14-second tenpai variation pattern) in which the decorative pattern in "pseudo 1" becomes a reach mode 14 seconds after the start of variation. do.

If it is determined that the 10-second tenpai or 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the contents of the pseudo-2 logo lamp announcement have been determined. It judges (step S9362). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the details of the simulation 2 logo lamp announcement have been determined if the process of step S9343 or step S9344 of FIG. 189 is being executed. If the processing of step S9345 is being executed, or if the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo-2 logo lamp announcement has not been determined.

If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 decides the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9363). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". to decide one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "162" has been determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". determines the corresponding performance.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 1301 determines that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice has not been determined, it determines whether or not the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice has been decided (step S9364). In this process, if the process of step S9322 in FIG. 188 has been executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the details of the simulation 3 logo lamp announcement have been determined. is executed, the pseudo-continuous performance does not progress to ``pseudo-3'', or the pseudo-continuous performance does not occur), it is determined that the contents of the announcement of the logo lamp for pseudo-3 have not been determined.

If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 decides the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9365). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". to decide one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" has been determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". determines the corresponding performance.

On the other hand, when judging that the content of the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 decides the content of the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time (step S9366). . In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9361 that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 1301 performs the logo lamp notice effect in the "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no (step S9367). After executing the processing of step S9363, step S9365, step S9366, or step S9367, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The simulation 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9305 of FIG. 187 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 187 .

After executing the process of step S9305, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the content of the second production stage logo lamp notice>
FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the performance stage announcement content lottery process.

In the second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 185) will occur during this special symbol change (step S9401). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301, in the second effect stage notice content lottery process, selects the contents of the effect to be performed during the special symbol change based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol change of this time. have decided. In the processing of step S9401, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the eighth notice effect has been determined as the effect to be performed during this special symbol variation.

When determining that the eighth notice effect will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp notice based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation (step S9402). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the logo lamp announcement effect by drawing lots based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when determining that the eighth notice effect will not occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp notice effect will not be performed (step S9403). After executing the process of step S9402 or step S9403, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery process for third production stage logo lamp notice content>
FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the lottery process for third effect stage logo lamp notice content relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing pseudo-2 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the performance stage announcement content lottery process.

In the third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect will occur based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9451). When determining that the pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 executes pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery processing (step S9452). In the third production stage, the stages in the pseudo continuous production progress only up to "pseudo 2". The lottery process for the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content will be described below with reference to FIG. 193 .

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect (step S9461). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301, based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time, during the special symbol variation, what kind of pattern is the decorative symbol at the stage of "pseudo 2"? It is determined whether to stop (decorative design stop pattern). In the processing of step S9461, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the decorative symbol stop pattern is a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol enters a ready-to-win mode 10 seconds after the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in "pseudo 2"; In the "pseudo 2", it is determined whether or not the decorative pattern stop pattern is one of the decorative pattern stop patterns (14-second tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

When it is determined that 10 seconds tenpai or 14 seconds tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 1301, based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation, the contents of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice is determined (step S9462). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 2".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the logo lamp announcement effect will not be performed in the "pseudo 2" (step S9463). . After executing the process of step S9462 or step S9463, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo-2 logo lamp notice lottery process performed in step S9452 of FIG. 192 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 192 .

When it is determined in step S9451 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after executing the process of step S9452, the sub CPU 1301 executes the lottery process for the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content (step S9453). The pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process will be described below with reference to FIG. 194 .

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a 10-second tenpai or a 14-second tenpai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "no simulated" effect. (Step S9471). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 1301, based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time, during the special symbol variation, what kind of pattern is the decorative symbol at the stage of "pseudo 1"? It is determined whether to stop (decorative design stop pattern). In the processing of step S9471, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the decorative symbol stop pattern is a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tenpai stop pattern) that makes the decorative symbol enter a ready-to-win state 10 seconds after the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in "Pseudo 1"; In "Pseudo 1", it is determined whether or not the decorative design stop pattern is one of the decorative design stop patterns (14-second tenpai stop pattern) in which the decorative design becomes a ready-to-win mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. .

If it is determined that the 10-second tenpai or 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the contents of the pseudo-2 logo lamp announcement have been determined. It judges (step S9472). In this process, if the process of step S9462 in FIG. 193 has been executed, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the details of the simulation 2 logo lamp announcement have been determined. is being executed, or the pseudo-continuous effect is not generated), it is determined that the content of the pseudo-2 logo lamp announcement has not been determined.

If the sub CPU 1301 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 1301 decides the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9473). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. For example, when the effect corresponding to effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". to decide one of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "162" has been determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 1301 selects effect number "161" as the logo lamp forewarning effect to be performed in "pseudo 1". determines the corresponding performance.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice has not been determined, the sub CPU 1301 decides the content of the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time (step S9474). . In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the details of the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp announcement effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1".

When it is determined in step S9471 that neither the 10-second tenpai nor the 14-second tenpai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo", the sub CPU 1301 performs the logo lamp notice effect in the "pseudo-1". It is determined that there is no (step S9475). After executing the process of step S9473, step S9474, or step S9475, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process performed in step S9453 of FIG. 192 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 192 .

After executing the process of step S9453, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Screen display in probability mode>
FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the variable probability mode.

As described above, in the probability variable mode, when the normal symbol losing length variation (variation display of normal symbols such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts, the game shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 129(a)). In the bonus mode, while the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol variation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit to the right enter the small winning big winning opening 1151, and a large number of game balls are paid out.

Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the player plays the game expecting that a variation pattern with a variation time of 600000 msec (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128) will be determined as the normal symbol variation pattern. For this reason, in the probability variation mode, whenever the normal pattern variation is performed, an effect (drum variation effect) corresponding to the pattern of the normal pattern variation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 195, in the variable probability mode, drum images 9201 (a left drum image 9201L, a middle drum image 9201C, and a right drum image 9201R) are displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. A drum image 9201 is an image imitating a drum (reel). In the area where each drum image 9201 is displayed, the drum patterns 9202 (the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R) can be variably displayed and stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 195(a), the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are displayed in such a manner that they are fluctuating. In the example shown in FIG. 195(b), the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped as "bell" patterns, "watermelon" patterns, and "cherry" patterns, respectively. displayed in such a manner. Thus, in the variable probability mode, every time the normal symbol variation is performed, an effect (drum variation effect) simulating reel variation display and stop display (slot game) is performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 195, in the variable probability mode, the number of remaining STs image 9203 and the number of winning balls image 9204 are also displayed on the display device 1007 . The remaining ST number of times image 9203 is an image corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (remaining ST number of times) performed in the probability variation mode. When the variable probability mode starts, "50" is displayed as the remaining ST number of times image 9203, and after that, the number shown as the remaining ST number of times image 9203 decreases by one each time the special symbol variation is performed once. When the number shown as the remaining number of STs image 9203 becomes "0", the variable probability mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. The winning ball number image 9204 is an image corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the normal symbol losing length variation as a trigger is called the first bonus mode. In the first bonus mode, the value indicating the number of remaining STs is updated (subtracted by 1) each time the special symbol variation is performed, similarly to the variable probability mode. Then, when the value indicating the number of remaining STs becomes 0, the first bonus mode is shifted to the normal mode. Therefore, the variable probability mode and the first bonus mode are combined and called the remaining ST number subtraction mode. In addition, when shifting from the probability variable mode to the first bonus mode, the remaining ST number in the probability variable mode is not reset, and the remaining ST number is inherited in the first bonus mode. In this embodiment, the remaining ST number subtraction mode may also be called a variable probability mode.

On the other hand, even when the condition for starting the jackpot gaming state is established in the variable probability mode, the game shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 129(a)). In the present embodiment, the bonus mode that shifts when the jackpot game state starts is called the second bonus mode. When shifting to the second bonus mode, the remaining ST count is reset, and in the second bonus mode, the remaining ST count is not updated (managed). When the second bonus mode ends, if the limiter has not been reached, "50" is set as the remaining number of STs.

<Drum fluctuation effect determination processing>
FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing a drum variation effect determination process relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The drum fluctuation effect determination process shown in FIG. 196 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub-control circuit 1300 when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 (gate passage). is. The sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126 by receiving a ball passage detector passage detection command indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 1126 . The ball passing detector passing detection command is set by the main control circuit 1200 in the ball passing detector passing detection process and sent to the sub control circuit 1300 .

In the drum variation effect determination process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the variable probability mode (see FIG. 129(a)) (step S9501). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303, and the sub CPU 1301 can recognize the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. can be done.

When determining that the current effect mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current production mode is the probability variable mode, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by the current gate passage is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation shown in FIG. 128 It is determined whether it is the pattern "05H") (step S9502). Since the ball passing detector passage detection command contains information indicating the normal symbol variation pattern, by receiving the ball passing detector passage detection command, the sub CPU 1301 detects the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the current gate passage. can be recognized.

When it is determined that the normal symbol variation pattern determined with the current gate passage as a trigger is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the number of remaining STs is a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more. (step S9503). The remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode (probability variation mode and first bonus mode). A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is less than the predetermined number of times (10 times), the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the ST recovery is confirmed (whether it is determined to shift to the jackpot gaming state) (step S9504). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 confirms the ST recovery when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the currently performed special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a big hit. (It is decided to shift to the jackpot game state). As described above, after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variable probability flag is set to ON (see FIG. 125), and the variable probability mode is restored (ST recovers). However, when the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first hit becomes a predetermined number (5 times) by executing the jackpot game state (when the limiter is reached), the variable probability mode is not returned. , to switch to normal mode. Therefore, in this case, it may be determined that ST recovery is not confirmed.

If it is determined that the normal symbol variation pattern determined in step S9502 as a trigger of this gate passage is not a pattern corresponding to normal symbol loss length variation, or ST recovery is not determined in step S9504 (jackpot game state is not determined), the sub CPU 1301 determines the drum fluctuation effect pattern as a losing pattern (step S9505). As for the missing patterns, an all-missing pattern and a partially-missing pattern are provided. The all-missing pattern is a drum variation performance pattern in which all different symbols are stopped and displayed as a left drum symbol 9202L, a middle drum symbol 9202C, and a right drum symbol 9202R. In the partially lost pattern, two of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, and the remaining one pattern is a pattern different from the two patterns. This is a drum variation production pattern such that is stopped and displayed.

For example, as the all-losing pattern, a "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. or a pattern in which a "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, a "cherry" symbol is stop-displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and a "bell" symbol is stop-displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. etc. are provided. For example, the left drum pattern 9202L is a "bell" pattern, the middle drum pattern 9202C is a "bell" pattern, and the right drum pattern 9202R is a "watermelon" pattern. or a pattern in which a "watermelon" pattern is stop-displayed as the left drum pattern 9202L, a "watermelon" pattern is stop-displayed as the middle drum pattern 9202C, and a "cherry" pattern is stop-displayed as the right drum pattern 9202R. A plurality of patterns such as patterns are provided.

In the processing of step S9505, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on random values to select one losing pattern from among such multiple losing patterns (a plurality of all losing patterns and a plurality of partial losing patterns). It is determined as the pattern of the drum variation presentation performed during the normal pattern variation corresponding to the passage through the gate this time. After executing the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined that the remaining ST number of times is a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more in step S9503, or ST recovery is determined in step S9504 (it is determined to shift to the big hit game state) In this case, the sub CPU 1301 determines the drum variation effect pattern as the winning pattern (step S9506). The hit pattern is a drum fluctuation performance pattern in which the same symbols are all stop-displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. The winning patterns include, for example, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns are provided, such as a pattern in which a "cherry" symbol is statically displayed. In the processing of step S9506, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to select one winning pattern from among such a plurality of winning patterns during the normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the current gate. It is determined as a pattern of drum variation effect.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 executes a losing length variation look-ahead lottery (step S9507). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers. Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the winning length variable look-ahead lottery is won (step S9508). When determining that the winning length variation look-ahead lottery is won, the sub CPU 1301 sets the length variation look-ahead flag to ON (step S9509). As a result, in the subsequent drum variation effect, it is suggested that the normal symbol losing length variation is determined (the losing length variation look-ahead effect is performed) (see FIG. 197). The loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to OFF when normal symbol variation (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to this gate passage starts.

If the sub CPU 1301 determines in step S9508 that the winning length variable prefetch lottery has not been won, or after executing the processing in step S9509, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the start of drum variation effect>
FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing a process at the start of drum fluctuation production relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

197 is the processing at the start of the drum variation production shown in FIG. 197, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, when the normal symbol variation related to the passage of the gate starts, the sub-control circuit 1300 performs the production mode determination processing (see FIG. 53). This is the processing performed in step S504). In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and sent to the sub-control circuit 1300 when the normal symbol variable display starts in the normal symbol variable display start process (see step S293 in FIG. 43). be.

In the drum fluctuation production start time processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the current production mode is the probability variable mode (see FIG. 129(a)) (step S9521). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303, and the sub CPU 1301 can recognize the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. can be done.

When determining that the current effect mode is not the variable probability mode, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current production mode is the probability variable mode, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the drum fluctuation production pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to this normal pattern fluctuation occurs is a losing pattern (step in FIG. 196). S9505) is determined (step S9522).

If the sub CPU 1301 judges that the drum variation production pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol variation occurs is not a losing pattern, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 1301 determines that the drum variation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the current normal symbol variation occurs is the missing pattern, the sub CPU 1301 sets the missing length variation look-ahead flag (see step S9509 in FIG. 196). ) is turned on (step S9523).

If the sub-CPU 1301 determines that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub-CPU 1301 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 changes the drum variation production pattern to a look-ahead pattern (step S9524). The look-ahead pattern is the above-described partially lost pattern.

In the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the drum fluctuation production patterns (see step S9505 in FIG. 196) determined when the passage of the gate corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation of this time occurs are all missing patterns. By performing a lottery based on the above, one partial losing pattern is selected from among a plurality of partial losing patterns, and the pattern of the drum fluctuation production performed during this normal pattern fluctuation is selected as the selected partial losing pattern. Replace pattern. It should be noted that, if the drum variation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation occurs this time is a partially lost pattern, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform such replacement processing, and has already been determined. Maintains the drum fluctuation effect pattern that is present. After executing the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Specific aspects of drum variation production>
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the variation time of the normal symbol variation and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the currently performed normal symbol variation and the reserved ball. 199 to 201 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the drum variation effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol variation pattern determination random number) are reserved. In FIG. 198(a), there are three reserved balls in the situation where one normal symbol variation is performed, and 500 ms is determined as the variation time of this normal symbol variation, and the first retained ball 500 ms is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to , 500 ms is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the second retained ball, and the normal corresponding to the third retained ball It shows a state in which 500 ms is determined as the variation time of the pattern variation.

In FIG. 198(b), after the state shown in FIG. 198(a), one game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 while the normal symbol variation is being performed, and the normal lottery accompanying the passage ( It shows a state in which 600000 ms is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball). FIG. 198(c) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(b) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198(d) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(c) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198(e) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(d) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 198(f) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(e) is finished and the next normal symbol variation (600000 ms) is being performed.

FIG. 199(a) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b). FIG. 199(b) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 199(a) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 198(a) and 198(b), corresponding to the variation time of normal symbol variation of 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 199(c) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(c). FIG. 199(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 199(c) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(c) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 199(e) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(d). FIG. 199(f) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 199(e) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(d) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 199(g) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(e). FIG. 199(h) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 199(g) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(e) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 199(i) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(f). FIG. 199(j) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 199(i) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(f) is 600000 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at . In FIG. 199(k), the display device 1007 displays an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shift to bonus mode).

As described above, one drum fluctuation effect includes the fluctuation display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern. 9202R stop display. The fluctuation display of the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R starts at the same time as the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, and is performed over 500 ms, and each drum pattern 9202 stops at the same time. Here, when the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol hit, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is 500 ms. It matches the stop timing of the normal design.

Further, the stop display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R is performed over 1500 ms. Therefore, after 1500 ms have passed since the fluctuation of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R has stopped in one drum fluctuation effect, it is possible to start the fluctuation display of the next drum fluctuation effect. be. On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery is the normal symbol hit, the time from the end of the normal symbol variation (after the normal symbol stops) to the end of opening the normal electric accessory 1146 is 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the next normal symbol variation after 1500 ms have elapsed since the normal symbol stopped in one normal symbol variation. As a result, the cycle of the drum fluctuation effect and the cycle of the normal pattern fluctuation can be matched.

FIG. 199 shows an example in which the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol losing length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern, but the losing length variation look-ahead lottery is not won. On the other hand, FIG. 200 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to a normal symbol losing length variation is determined as a normal symbol variation pattern, and the losing length variation look-ahead lottery is won.

FIG. 200(a) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b). FIG. 200(b) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 200(a) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 200(b), left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are shown in FIG. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 200(c) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(c). FIG. 200(d) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 200(c) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. A symbol 9202C and a right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed as part of the missing pattern.

FIG. 200(e) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(d). FIG. 200(f) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 200(e) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. The variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. A symbol 9202C and a right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed as part of the missing pattern.

FIG. 200(g) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(e). FIG. 200(h) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 200(g) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. The variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(e) is 500 ms, and corresponding to winning the losing length variation look-ahead lottery, the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum are shown in FIG. A symbol 9202C and a right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed as part of the missing pattern.

FIG. 200(i) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(f). FIG. 200(j) shows that the variable display shown in FIG. 200(i) is finished, and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198(f) is 600000 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at . In FIG. 200(k), an image corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (transition to bonus mode) is displayed on the display device 1007 .

Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 200, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the winning pattern (see FIG. 200(j)). A drum pattern 9202L, a middle drum pattern 9202C, and a right drum pattern 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a false pattern (see FIGS. 200(d), 200(f), and 200(h)), This suggests that the normal symbol losing length variation has been determined (normal symbol losing length variation has been elected). In addition, even if the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, there is a possibility that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed as a losing pattern ( See step S9505 in FIG. 196). When a partial losing pattern appears even though the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the stop display of the partial losing pattern can be said to be a fake effect.

In the above, an example in which some of the losing patterns are stopped and displayed as the loss length variable look-ahead effect has been described. The loss length variable look-ahead effect is not limited to this example, and for example, a loss length variable look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 201 may be employed.

FIG. 201(a) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 198(a) and (b). FIG. 201(b) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 201(a) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 201(b), left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are shown in FIG. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 201(c) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(c). FIG. 201(d) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 201(c) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(c) is 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at .

FIG. 201(e) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIGS. 198(d) and (e). As described above, the variable display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R is normally performed over 500 ms. On the other hand, the variable display shown in FIG. 201(e) is performed over 4500 ms. FIG. 201(f) shows a state where the variable display shown in FIG. 201(e) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. 198(d) and (e), corresponding to the variation time of normal symbol variation of 500 ms, in FIG. is displayed in a stop pattern with a missing pattern.

FIG. 201(g) shows how the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 198(f). FIG. 201(h) shows a state in which the variable display shown in FIG. 201(g) is finished and the left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the variation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 198(f) is 600000 ms, in FIG. is displayed to stop at . In FIG. 201(i), the display device 1007 displays an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (transition to the bonus mode).

In the example shown in FIG. 201, while the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 198 (d) and the normal symbol fluctuation (two normal symbol fluctuations) shown in FIG. It is supposed to be As a result, it is suggested that you have won the normal symbol loss length variation. In this way, as the loss length variation look-ahead effect, one drum variation effect may be performed while the normal symbol variation is performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that such a longer than usual drum fluctuation production (long-time drum fluctuation production) is preferably performed when the normal pattern losing length fluctuation is won, but the normal pattern losing length fluctuation is not won. It may be done in any case. In the case where the normal symbol losing length variation is won and when the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, in the form where the drum variation effect can be performed for a long time, the normal symbol losing length variation is won. When it is, compared with the case where the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, it is preferable to configure so that the drum variation performance can be performed for a long time with a high probability.

As described above, in FIGS. 199 to 201, gate passage occurs in a situation where the number of remaining STs is a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage corresponds to normal symbol loss length variation. An example in which a pattern has been determined has been described. In this case, the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stop-displayed in the winning pattern. On the other hand, gate passage occurs in a situation where the number of remaining STs is less than the predetermined number (10 times), and the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation is determined as the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. In this case, the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stop-displayed in a lost pattern (see step S9503 in FIG. 196).

The normal symbol losing length variation is performed over a long period of time (600000 ms), and when the normal symbol losing length variation occurs after the number of remaining STs has decreased, the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed. Then, the probability variation mode (probability variation gaming state) ends. When the probability variable gaming state ends, when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes very long (see FIG. 126), so the game ball is placed in the big winning hole 1151 for the small win. It becomes almost impossible to win a prize. Therefore, in this case, since the significance of winning the normal symbol losing length variation is lost, the appearance of the winning pattern is refrained.

Although the variation time of the normal symbol loss length variation is described as being 600000 ms, it is not limited to this example. For example, as the variation time of normal pattern loss length variation, a plurality of variation times such as 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds are provided It may be possible to In this case, the number of remaining STs for which a winning pattern can appear may be varied according to the variation time of the normal symbol losing length variation. For example, as the variation time of the normal symbol losing length variation, T1 seconds (eg, 60 seconds) and T2 seconds (eg, 120 seconds) (T1 < T2) is provided, the normal symbol losing length variation of T1 seconds When it is determined, the number of remaining STs is N1 times (for example, 10 times) or more, so that a hit pattern appears on the condition that the number of remaining STs is N2 times ( For example, a winning pattern may appear under the condition of 20 times or more (N1<N2).

In addition, it is possible to vary the mode of the winning pattern according to the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol losing length variation is determined. For example, when the remaining ST count is 40 times or more when the normal symbol losing length variation is determined, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and the normal symbol losing length variation is determined. When the remaining ST number is 20 times or more and less than 40 times, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and when the normal symbol losing length variation is determined, the remaining ST number is less than 20 times. , a "bell" pattern may be stopped and displayed as the drum pattern 9202. FIG.

Also, in the above, it has been explained that the fluctuation display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R is started simultaneously with the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. The start timing of the variation display of the drum pattern 9202 is not limited to this example, and the variation display of the drum pattern 9202 may be started while the normal pattern variation is being performed. For example, the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R may start to be displayed 1000 ms after the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. In this case, for example, the fluctuation display of the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R is performed from the point of time when 1000 ms has elapsed since the start of one normal pattern fluctuation to the point of time when 1500 ms has elapsed. , The left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped from the time when 1500 ms has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern variation until the time when 1000 ms has elapsed since the next normal pattern variation is started. It can be configured to display.

In this way, by performing the fluctuation display and the stop display of the drum pattern 9202 across two normal pattern fluctuations, for example, while the normal pattern fluctuation shown in FIG. For example, 1500 ms after the start of the normal pattern variation), the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R are stopped and displayed in the winning pattern (see FIG. 199(j)). becomes possible. As a result, the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) is performed before the normal symbol losing length variation shown in FIG. 198(f) is started, and as a result, the normal symbol losing length variation is started. Immediately after that, an image as shown in FIG. 199(k) can be displayed. From this point of view, the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) may end before the normal symbol losing length variation starts or at the same time when the normal symbol losing length variation starts.

It should be noted that, in the above description, it is assumed that the image shown in FIG. 199(k) is displayed after the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) is performed, and then, or at the same time, normal symbol loss length variation starts. At the start of normal symbol loss length variation, either the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) or the image display shown in FIG. 199(k) may be configured not to be performed. However, it may be configured not to display both. In addition, instead of the stop display shown in FIG. 199(j) and the display of the image shown in FIG. It may be configured to indicate the start of fluctuation.

<Normal pattern loss length fluctuation Remaining time indication effect>
Figures 202 and 203 are diagrams showing an example of a normal symbol losing length variation remaining time suggestive effect.

As described above, in the variable probability mode (see FIG. 129 (a)), when the normal symbol losing length variation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the variation time is 600000 msec) starts, it moves to the first bonus mode. . In the first bonus mode, a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time suggesting effect is performed. In the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed on the display device 1007 . The normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is an image showing the time corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation, and the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation is suggested through the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image. .

In FIG. 202( a ), a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210 a is displayed on the display device 1007 . The normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is displayed after the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stop-displayed in the winning pattern (see FIG. 199(j)), and the drum symbol 9202 concerned. Displayed when the display of has ended. The normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an example of an image (see FIG. 199(k)) corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shift to the first bonus mode). In this example, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an image corresponding to the number "600:00" as the normal symbol losing length fluctuation of 600000 ms starts.

After the state shown in FIG. 202(a), the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. Remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210h→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210i→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j. The normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j are displayed sequentially for a short period of time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a → normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210b→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210c→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210h→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210i→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j As the number indicated by the image changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. becoming. The color of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. there is

In the above, an example in which the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed at the start of the first bonus mode has been described, but the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed in the middle of the first bonus mode. .

In the first bonus mode, a battle effect during the first bonus mode may be performed as an effect suggesting the possibility that the result of the second special lottery is a big win. In the battle effect during the first bonus mode, the display device 1007 displays a battle between the ally character and the enemy character. When the ally character defeats the enemy character in such a battle effect during the first bonus mode, a normal symbol losing length variable remaining time image may be displayed. That is, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image can be displayed in a situation where the expectation that the result of the second special lottery is a big win is relatively high.

In FIG. 203( a ), a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211 a is displayed on the display device 1007 . In this example, the normal symbol losing length variation remaining time image 9211a corresponds to the fact that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is about 30000 ms at the time when the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle effect during the first bonus mode. is an image corresponding to the number "30:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 203(a), the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. Remaining time image 9211c→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211d→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211e→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211f→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211h→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211i→Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j. Normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j are respectively displayed sequentially for a short period of time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Like the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j, although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol losing Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211a→normal symbol losing long fluctuation remaining time image 9211b→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211c→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211d→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211e→normal symbol losing Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211f→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211g→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211h→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211i→normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j and the corresponding image As the number indicated by changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. The color of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. there is

In addition, the number indicated by the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image does not necessarily strictly correspond to the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation. As a normal pattern loss length fluctuation remaining time image, a plurality of remaining times (for example, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds , and 600 seconds) are provided. When the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed, an image corresponding to the remaining time closest to the (actual) remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation at that time is selected, and the selected normal symbol losing length A variable remaining time image is displayed. A normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9210 shown in FIG. 202 is a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image corresponding to 600 seconds, and a normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image 9211 shown in FIG. 203 corresponds to 30 seconds. It is a normal pattern loss length fluctuation remaining time image.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image as described above is displayed on the display device 1007, the drum fluctuation effect is not performed (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and The right drum pattern 9202R is not displayed on the display device 1007).

<First bonus mode middle jackpot processing>
FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the first bonus mode middle jackpot process according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the first bonus mode middle jackpot time process shown in FIG. 204, when the condition for starting the jackpot game state is established in the first bonus mode and the jackpot game state starts, the sub-control circuit 1300 performs the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 204). 53 (see step S504). As described above, the first bonus mode is a bonus mode that shifts with the start of the normal symbol losing length variation as a trigger. In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that a big-hit game state starts by receiving a big-hit start command.

In the first bonus mode middle jackpot process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes prize balls counter addition process (step S9601). The number-of-balls counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the second bonus mode (step S9602). The second bonus mode is a bonus mode that shifts when the conditions for starting the jackpot gaming state are met in the variable probability mode or the first bonus mode. In the process of step S9602, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the second bonus mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303. FIG. After that, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the process at the end of the second bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The second bonus mode ending process shown in FIG. 205 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determining process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) when the jackpot game state ends in the second bonus mode. . In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the big-hit game state ends by receiving the big-hit end command. The jackpot end command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and sent to the sub-control circuit 1300, for example, when the jackpot flag is cleared.

In the process at the end of the second bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the limiter number of times has been reached due to the current jackpot game state (step S9621). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the number of times of the jackpot game state executed from the first win is a predetermined number (5 times) (the jackpot game state to end this time is the fifth jackpot after the first win (including the first win)). game state).

When it is determined that the number of limiter times has not been reached due to the state of the big hit game this time, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length is fluctuating (currently, the normal symbol losing length is being varied). It judges (step S9622). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern relating to the normal symbol variation has expired after the variation display of the normal symbol relating to the normal symbol loss length variation has started. The sub CPU 1301 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the above-described normal symbol variation start command. In addition, the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 128). It is possible to recognize the variation time of the pattern. Then, the sub-control circuit 1300 manages the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation while the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed. The remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation is updated by a timer update process (not shown) performed at a predetermined cycle. In the processing of step S9622, the sub CPU 1301 judges that the normal symbol losing length variation is in progress when the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is longer than 0.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length is fluctuating, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the first bonus mode (step S9623). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the first bonus mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303 .

On the other hand, when judging that the normal symbol losing length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the variable probability mode (step S9624). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in a production mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303 .

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9625). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 during the jackpot game state, the normal lottery is performed (the normal symbol variation pattern is determined) as in the non-jackpot game state. and The normal symbol variation corresponding to the gate passage may be performed during the big win game state or after the big win game state is finished.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9626). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the big win is won when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the reserved special symbol variations is a big hit.

After executing the process of step S9623, when it is determined that the normal symbol losing length variation is won in step S9625, or when it is determined that the big hit is won in step S9626, the sub CPU 1301 determines the number of prize balls A counter addition process is executed (step S9627). The number-of-balls counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S9627, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9621 that the limiter number of times has been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the normal mode (step S9628). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the normal mode in an effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303 .

If it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9628, the sub CPU 1301 executes a bonus mode result display process (step S9629). The bonus mode result display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S9629, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the first bonus mode>
FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of the first bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode ending process shown in FIG. 206 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determining process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) when the normal symbol losing length variation ends in the first bonus mode. is. As described above, while the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 1300, and the sub-control circuit 1300 controls the normal symbol losing length variation. By referring to the remaining time, it can be recognized that the normal symbol loss length variation ends.

In the process at the end of the first bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9641). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9642). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the big win is won when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the reserved special symbol variations is a big hit.

If it is determined in step S9641 that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, or if it is determined that the big hit is won in step S9642, the sub CPU 1301 executes prize ball number counter addition processing (step S9643 ). The number-of-balls counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes bonus mode result display processing (step S9644). The bonus mode result display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S9643 or step S9644, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the variable probability mode (step S9645). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 stores information indicating the variable probability mode in a production mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 1303 . After that, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Number of prize balls counter addition processing>
FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing prize ball number counter addition processing according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The processing for adding the number of prize balls counter shown in FIG. This is the process performed in the mode termination process (see step S9643 in FIG. 205).

In the winning balls counter addition process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the extra game flag is set to ON (step S9661). The extra game flag is a flag indicating that an extra game has occurred. In this embodiment, when shifting from the variable probability mode to the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode, and after the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode ends, the player stays in the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode There is In this case, it is assumed that the bonus mode continues (continuous). Hereinafter, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode that first shifts from the variable probability mode will be referred to as the initial game. Also, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode that stays continuously after the end of the initial game is called an extra game.

When judging that the extra game flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 sets an initial game winning ball counter (step S9662). The value of the initial game prize ball number counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode as the initial game). The total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode is managed in the work RAM 1303 as needed. In the process of step S9662, the sub CPU 1301 stores the total number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 1303 as the value of the initial game prize ball number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 1301 sets the extra game flag to ON (step S9663).

On the other hand, when determining that the extra game flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 sets the value of the extra game winning ball counter to the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as an extra game). The total number of game balls paid out is added (step S9664). The value of the extra game prize ball number counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the extra game, and is stored in the work RAM 1303 . In the processing of step S9664, the sub CPU 1301 stores the value of the extra game winning ball number counter stored in the work RAM 1303 as the game balls paid out during the current extra game (first bonus mode or second bonus mode). , is stored in the work RAM 1303 as a new value of the counter for the number of prize balls during the extra game.

After executing the process of step S9663 or step S9664, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Result display processing during bonus mode>
FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the result display processing during the bonus mode according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The bonus mode result display process shown in FIG. 208 is a process performed in the second bonus mode ending process (see step S9629 in FIG. 205) or the first bonus mode ending process (see step S9644 in FIG. 206). be.

In the bonus mode result display process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the extra game flag (see step S9663 in FIG. 207) is set to ON (step S9681).

When determining that the extra game flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 calculates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode as the initial game) ( The value of the initial game winning ball counter) is displayed on the display device 1007 (step S9682).

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 1301 determines that the extra game flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display the sum of the value of the initial game prize ball counter and the value of the extra game prize ball counter ( step S9683). The total value corresponds to the total number of game balls paid out during the period from the transition from the variable probability mode to the initial game to the present (bonus mode consecutive section). Subsequently, the sub CPU 1301 sets the extra game flag to off (step S9684).

After executing the process of step S9682 or step S9684, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the second bonus mode termination effect processing shown in FIG. 209, for example, when it is determined that the normal symbol losing length is fluctuating in step S9622 of FIG. performed by

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the remaining time of normal symbol losing length variation is 10 seconds or more (step S9701). As described above, while the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 1300, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation. can do.

When determining that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation is less than 10 seconds, the sub CPU 1301 sets the effect data for returning to the variable probability mode (step S9702). The effect data for returning to the variable probability mode is effect data corresponding to the effect (variable probability mode return effect) indicating returning to the variable probability mode, and is stored in the program ROM 1302 . By executing the process of step S9702, the variable probability mode return effect is performed. For example, a variable probability mode return image (an image indicating returning to the variable probability mode) is displayed on the display device 1007 .

On the other hand, when judging that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation is 10 seconds or more, the sub CPU 1301 sets the effect data for entering the extra game (step S9703). The effect data for entering the extra game is effect data corresponding to the effect indicating entering the extra game (extra game entering effect), and is stored in the program ROM 1302 . By executing the process of step S9703, an extra game entry effect is performed. For example, an extra game entering image (an image indicating entering into an extra game) is displayed on the display device 1007 .

After executing the process of step S9702 or step S9703, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

Note that when the process of step S9702 is executed, the sub CPU 1301 may proceed to the process of step S9625 in FIG. Also, when it is determined in step S9622 in FIG. 205 that the normal symbol losing length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 1301 is the same as the effect data for returning to the probability variable mode set in step S9702 (for entering the extra game set in step S9703). Effect data different from the effect data) may be set, or effect data different from the effect data for returning to the variable probability mode (also different from the effect data for entering the extra game) may be set.

<1st bonus mode middle process>
FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing processing during the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The processing during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 210 is processing performed at a predetermined timing in the effect mode determination processing (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by the sub-control circuit 1300 in the first bonus mode. For example, the process during the first bonus mode is performed when the second special symbol variation starts in the first bonus mode.

In the process during the first bonus mode, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is 15 seconds or more (step S9721). As described above, while the normal symbol losing length variation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is managed by the sub-control circuit 1300, and the sub CPU 1301 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation. can do.

When determining that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode processing (I) (step S9722). The processing (I) during the first bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when determining that the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9723). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode processing (II) (step S9724). The processing (II) during the first bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the first bonus mode processing (III) (step S9725). The processing (III) during the first bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S9722, step S9724, or step S9725, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<First bonus mode middle processing (I)>
FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the processing (I) during the first bonus mode relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (I) shown in FIG. 211 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9722 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode processing (I), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9741). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9742). In this processing, the sub CPU 1301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (A) during the first bonus mode (step S9743). In the first bonus mode production (A), the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST count is 5 times or more, and a big win is won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9743, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. Alternatively, the sub CPU 1301 executes a lottery to encourage the end of the first bonus mode, and causes the display device 1007 to display an image to encourage the end of the first bonus mode when the player wins the lottery. The end-of-the-first-bonus-mode-promoting image is an image that encourages the end of the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9743, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9742 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (B) during the first bonus mode (step S9744). In the first bonus mode production (B), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9744, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. The image displayed by the process of step S9744 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (A). After executing the process of step S9744, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is less than 5 in step S9741, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9745). In this processing, the sub CPU 1301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (C) during the first bonus mode (step S9746). In the first bonus mode production (C), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5 times, and a big win is won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9746, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that ST recovery is confirmed although the number of STs is low. The image displayed by the process of step S9746 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (B) during the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9746, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9745 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (D) during the first bonus mode (step S9747). The effect (D) in the first bonus mode is that the remaining time of normal pattern losing length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the number of remaining STs is less than 5, and the jackpot is not won in the first bonus mode. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9747, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9747 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (C) during the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9747, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<First Bonus Mode Middle Processing (II)>
FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing the first bonus mode processing (II) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode processing (II) shown in FIG. 212 is processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9724 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode middle process (II), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9761). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9762). In this processing, the sub CPU 1301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (E) during the first bonus mode (step S9763). In the first bonus mode effect (E), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST number is 5 times. In addition to the above, this is an effect performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9763, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9763 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (A). After executing the process of step S9763, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9762 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (F) during the first bonus mode (step S9764). In the first bonus mode production (F), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, and the remaining ST number is 5 times. In addition to the above, this is an effect performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9764, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9764 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (E). Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (B). After executing the process of step S9764, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is less than 5 in step S9761, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9765). In this processing, the sub CPU 1301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (G) during the first bonus mode (step S9766). In the first bonus mode production (G), the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the remaining ST count is less than 5 times, and This is an effect performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9766, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that ST recovery is confirmed although the number of STs is low. The image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (F) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (C). After executing the process of step S9766, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9765 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (H) during the first bonus mode (step S9767). In the first bonus mode production (H), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, and the remaining ST count is 5 times. This is an effect that is performed when the amount is less than and the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9767, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (G) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (D). After executing the process of step S9767, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<First bonus mode middle process (III)>
FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing the first bonus mode processing (III) relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The first bonus mode process (III) shown in FIG. 213 is a process performed in the first bonus mode process (see step S9725 in FIG. 210).

In the first bonus mode processing (III), first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the number of remaining STs is 5 or more (step S9781). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol variations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the number of remaining STs is stored in the work RAM 1303, and is updated each time a special symbol variation is performed.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9782). In this processing, the sub CPU 1301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9783). In the first bonus mode production (I), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is won, and the remaining ST count is 5 times or more. , and is an effect that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the processing of step S9783, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is short. The image displayed by the process of step S9783 may be the same as or different from the images that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (E) during the first bonus mode.

If it is determined in step S9782 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (J) during the first bonus mode (step S9784). In the first bonus mode production (J), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is won, and the remaining ST number is 5 times or more. , and is an effect performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9784, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is short. The image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same as or different from the image that can be displayed in the first bonus mode effect (I). Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (B) to (F) during the first bonus mode.

When determining that the number of remaining STs is less than 5 in step S9781, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9785). In this processing, the sub CPU 1301 wins a big hit when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one of the special symbol variations and the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls performed this time is a big hit. I judge.

When determining that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect (K) during the first bonus mode (step S9786). In the first bonus mode production (K), the remaining time of the normal pattern losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal pattern losing length variation is won, the remaining ST count is less than 5 times, and a big hit. It is a production that is performed when you are elected to. In the process of step S9786, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that ST recovery is confirmed although the number of STs is low. The image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (J) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (C) to (G) during the first bonus mode.

When it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in step S9785, the sub CPU 1301 executes the effect during the first bonus mode (L) (step S9787). In the first bonus mode production (L), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol losing length variation is won, and the remaining ST count is less than 5 times. , and is an effect performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9787, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is running low and the bonus mode will end soon. The image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (K) during the first bonus mode. Also, the image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the effects (D) to (H) during the first bonus mode.

After executing the processing of step S9783, step S9784, step S9786, or step S9787, the sub CPU 1301 extends the remaining time of normal symbol loss length variation (step S9788). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 sets the variation time (for example, 600000 ms) of the winning normal symbol variation as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation. The winning normal symbol variation is a normal symbol variation related to a normal symbol loss length variation among the reserved normal symbol variations. In addition, when a plurality of winning normal symbol variations are included in the reserved normal symbol variations, the sub CPU 1301 selects the winning normal symbol variation whose variation starts first among the plurality of winning normal symbol variations. The fluctuation time is set as the remaining time of normal pattern loss length fluctuation. The remaining time of the new normal symbol losing length fluctuation set in this manner is not updated by timer update processing until the winning normal symbol fluctuation starts, and is subtracted after the winning normal symbol fluctuation starts.

After executing the process of step S9788, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine. As a result, thereafter, an effect corresponding to the remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length variation is performed. In other words, it is treated as if the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation is extended when the content of the effect is determined. For example, in the second special symbol variation this time, due to the processing of step S9725 in FIG. On the other hand, in the next second special symbol variation, the process of step S9722 in FIG. 210 is performed, and any one of the effects (A) to (D) during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 211 is performed. It will be.

The processing during the first bonus mode described above with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213 may be performed in the first bonus mode as the initial game described above, or in the first bonus mode as an extra game (see FIG. 207). mode, or both of these first bonus modes. As described above, in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation, the presence or absence of winning the normal symbol losing length variation, the remaining ST number, and the presence or absence of winning the big hit. Rendering can be performed according to one of the elements or any two or more elements.

In addition, in the first bonus mode, the above-described drum variation effect may be performed as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. For example, when the result of the big hit determination related to one special symbol variation is a big hit, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a winning pattern as a drum variation effect (performed during the special symbol variation) corresponding to the special symbol variation. If the result of the big hit determination related to one special symbol variation is not a big hit, the drum symbol 9202 is stop-displayed in a losing pattern as a drum variation effect (performed during the special symbol variation) corresponding to the special symbol variation. It may be assumed that Also, if the result of the big hit determination related to one special symbol variation is a big hit, before the special symbol variation starts, the look-ahead effect (for example, the same effect as the above-mentioned loss length variation look-ahead effect) is performed. It may be assumed that As such a look-ahead effect, the same effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining STs, or depending on the number of remaining STs Different effects may be performed depending on the case.

Further, when a drum variation effect is performed as an effect corresponding to the special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be associated with one special symbol variation. For example, while one special symbol variation is being performed, a drum variation effect may be performed a plurality of times as an effect suggesting the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation. In addition, before one special symbol variation is started, a drum variation effect may be performed a plurality of times as an effect suggesting the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation. One drum variation effect is completed in about 2 seconds as described above, and it is possible to configure such that the drum variation effect is repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

<Remaining ST count adjustment processing>
FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing remaining ST count adjustment processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

It has been described above that the remaining ST number image 9203 is displayed on the display device 1007 in the variable probability mode (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (see FIG. 195). The remaining ST number image 9203 may indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number, or may not necessarily indicate an accurate value of the remaining ST number (suggesting the remaining ST number). In the following description, it is assumed that the remaining ST number image 9203 suggests the remaining ST number.

The remaining ST number adjustment process shown in FIG. 214 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. For example, the remaining ST count adjustment process is performed when the first bonus mode starts or when the first bonus mode ends.

In the remaining ST count adjustment processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count (step S9801). The value of the actual number of remaining STs is an accurate value of the number of remaining STs, and as described above, the value is updated (subtracted by 1) each time a special symbol variation is performed. The value of the number of remaining STs for display is an approximate value of the number of remaining STs, and the value is updated (decreased by 1) each time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 corresponds to the value of the remaining ST number for display. The value of the actual remaining ST count and the value of the remaining ST count for display are stored in the work RAM 1303, respectively.

When determining that there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, the sub CPU 1301 sets the value of the remaining ST count for display to the value of the actual remaining ST count (step S9802). ). As a result, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed to the value of the actual remaining ST number, and the remaining ST number image 9203 is corrected so as to indicate the correct value of the remaining ST number. For example, when the first bonus mode (normal symbol losing length variation) starts or when the first bonus mode (normal symbol losing length variation) ends, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 increases or decreases. .

If it is determined in step S9801 that there is no difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, or after executing the processing of step S9802, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

Note that the ST number adjustment process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. For example, during normal operation, the value of the remaining ST count for display is updated (decremented by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. If it is larger (smaller) than the value of the number of times, it can be configured to increase (decrease) the update frequency or increase (decrease) the value to be subtracted in one update. .

<Remaining ST count update process for display>
FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing the remaining ST number update process for display according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In the above description, the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated (decremented by 1) each time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated is not limited to this example. For example, each time the drum variation effect is performed (when the variation of the drum pattern 9202 starts), the value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated, or the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation The value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated when the second special symbol variation) starts. Below, an example in which the value of the number of remaining STs for display is updated when the second special symbol variation starts will be described.

The remaining ST number update process for display shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the control circuit 1300 in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

In the remaining ST number update process for display, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a big hit (step S9821). When judging that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a big hit, the sub CPU 1301 judges whether or not the big hit of this time is a 10R big hit (see FIG. 125) (step S9822). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 contains the information indicating the result of the big hit determination and the type of the big hit, the sub CPU 1301 receives the special symbol effect start command. It is possible to make a judgment of

If it is determined in step S9821 that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is not a big hit (losing or a small hit), or in step S9822, the big hit this time is not a 10R big hit (it is a 2R big hit). If so, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10) (step S9823). The error of the remaining ST number for display is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the remaining ST number for display from the value of the actual remaining ST number. Here, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 50 is set as the value of the actual remaining ST number, and 40 is set as the value of the remaining ST number for display. Therefore, the initial value of the error of the number of remaining STs for display is 10.

When the sub CPU 1301 determines that the error of the remaining ST count for display is the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining ST count for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9824). After that, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error in the remaining ST count for display is not the predetermined value (10), it is determined whether the error in the remaining ST count for display is greater than the predetermined value (10) (step S9825). When determining that the error of the remaining ST count for display is larger than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 adds 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9826). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery to decide which process to perform, either the process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display or the process of maintaining the value of the remaining ST count for display. may be determined. After executing the process of step S9826, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining that the error of the remaining ST count for display is smaller than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 2 from the value of the remaining ST count for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9827). After that, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9822 that the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts 3 from the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (step S9827). Here, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 10R big hit is 15 seconds. The sub CPU 1301 may subtract 1 from the value of the number of remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 1303 (subtract 3 in total) every 5 seconds while the special symbol variation is being performed. . After executing the process of step S9827, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

It should be noted that the total time of the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the 2R big win (see FIG. 125) and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of opening the big winning hole 1131 for the big win is 10 seconds. It's becoming In addition, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation related to the small win and the time from the end of the special symbol variation to the end of the opening of the big winning hole 1151 for the small win is 5 seconds. Also, the variation time of the special symbol variation related to the loss is 5 seconds. Also, when a jackpot game state occurs, the value of the remaining ST count for display may or may not be reset, but in the form where the remaining ST count update process for display shown in FIG. 215 is performed, , is not reset (after the second bonus mode is over, the value of the number of remaining STs for display before the start of the second bonus mode is inherited).

In the above description, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 suggests the remaining ST number. In this embodiment, instead of the remaining ST number image 9203, a rank image (not shown) may be displayed on the display device 1007 as an image suggesting the remaining ST number. The rank image is, for example, an image corresponding to a character such as "A", "B", "C", "D", etc., and the character (rank) suggests the number of remaining STs. For example, when the remaining ST count subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST count for display managed in the processing of FIG. ” is displayed, and when the remaining ST count for display is 40 or more and less than 60, “B” is displayed as a rank image, and when the remaining ST count for display is 20 or more and less than 40, as a rank image It is possible to adopt a configuration in which "C" is displayed and "D" is displayed as a rank image when the number of remaining STs for display is 5 or more and less than 20. When the number of remaining STs for display becomes less than 5, the rank image may be deleted.

In addition, the value of the remaining ST count for display is set so that the value of the remaining ST count for display always becomes a specific value (eg, 0) when the actual remaining ST count reaches a predetermined value (eg, 5). It is also possible to control update (subtraction or addition). For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST number for display, and after that, every time a special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining ST number for display is set by 5. After subtraction and the value of the remaining ST number for display reaches 30, the remaining ST number for display may not be subtracted (added or maintained) by lottery even if the special pattern variation is performed. . As a result, if the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes 30 when the value of the actual remaining ST count reaches 11, then every time the special symbol variation is performed (when the special symbol variation ends), the remaining display ST count becomes 30. The ST count is decremented by 5, and when the value of the actual remaining ST count becomes 5, the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes 0. It is possible to employ such a configuration. Note that when the actual remaining ST number becomes a predetermined value (eg, 5) or less (when the value of the remaining ST number for display becomes a specific value (eg, 0)), the actual remaining ST number If the value is greater than a predetermined value (eg, 5), the mode may shift to a mode in which a different background is displayed.

In the above description, the remaining ST count (rank) for display is updated based on the result of the jackpot determination or the type of the jackpot. It may be configured such that the number of remaining STs (rank) is updated. For example, if you have won the normal symbol losing length variation, compared to the case where you have not won the normal symbol losing length variation, even if the value to be subtracted or added in one update is larger (smaller) good. Similarly, when the result of the big win determination is a big win, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be increased (smaller) than when the result of the big win determination is not a big win. As a result, it is possible to suggest the presence or absence of winning to the big hit and the presence or absence of winning to the normal symbol losing length variation through the remaining ST number image 9203 and the rank image.

<Possible change mode mid-normal map look-ahead effect processing>
FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing the probabilistic variable mode normal map foreseeing effect processing relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Normal figure prefetch effect processing in probability variation mode shown in FIG. This is the process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53) by 1300. FIG. In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

In the probable variable mode mid-normal pattern look-ahead effect processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a normal pattern look-ahead lottery (step S9841). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the general pattern prediction lottery has been won (step S9842). If it is determined that the general/universal pattern prefetch lottery is not won, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the general pattern pre-reading lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a big hit (step S9843). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 contains information indicating the result of the big hit determination, by receiving the special symbol effect start command, the sub CPU 1301 makes the determination. is possible.

When judging that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9844). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A) (step S9845). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (A) wins the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the variable mode, the result of the jackpot judgment related to this special pattern change is a big hit, and when the normal pattern loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in In the process of step S9845, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that both the big win and the normal symbol losing length variation have been won. The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9845, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9844 that the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol prefetch effect (B) (step S9846). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (B) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the variable mode, the result of the big hit determination related to this special pattern change is a big hit, and you have not won the normal pattern loss length change. It is a production performed in In the process of step S9846, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the player has won the big prize. The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9846 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effect (A). After executing the process of step S9846, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9843 that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is not a big hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a small hit ( step S9847). Since the special symbol effect start command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 contains information indicating the result of the big hit determination, by receiving the special symbol effect start command, the sub CPU 1301 makes the determination. is possible.

When judging that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9848). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C) (step S9849). In the normal pattern pre-reading effect (C), in the variable mode, the general pattern pre-reading lottery is won, the result of the big hit determination related to the special pattern change this time is a small hit, and the normal pattern loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9849, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that both the small winning and the normal symbol losing length variation have been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9849 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (B). After executing the process of step S9849, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9848 that the normal symbol losing length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes a normal pattern look-ahead effect (D) (step S9850). In the normal pattern prefetching effect (D), in the variable mode, the general pattern prefetching lottery is won, the result of the big hit determination related to the special pattern variation this time is a small hit, and the normal pattern loss length variation is not elected. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9850, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that a small prize has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9850 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (C). After executing the process of step S9850, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9847 that the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is not a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the normal symbol losing length variation is won (step S9851). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that the variation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol variations is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). In that case, it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been elected.

When determining that the normal symbol losing length variation is won, the sub CPU 1301 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (E) (step S9852). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (E) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the probability variation mode, the result of the big hit determination related to this special pattern change is a loss, and when you win the normal pattern loss length variation It is a production performed in In the process of step S9852, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the player has won the normal symbol losing length variation. The image displayed by the process of step S9852 may be the same image as or different from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (D). After executing the process of step S9852, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9851 that the normal symbol losing length variation is not won, the sub CPU 1301 executes a normal symbol prefetch effect (F) (step S9853). Normal pattern look-ahead effect (F) is when you win the normal pattern look-ahead lottery in the probability variation mode, the result of the big hit determination related to this special pattern change is a loss, and you have not won the normal pattern loss length variation. It is a production performed in In the process of step S9853, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that neither the big or small win nor the normal symbol losing length variation is won. The image displayed by the process of step S9853 may be the same image as or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the normal map look-ahead effects (A) to (E). After executing the process of step S9853, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

In the general map look-ahead effect (A), the general map look-ahead effect (C), and the general map look-ahead effect (E), the general map look-ahead effect (B), the general map look-ahead effect (D), and the general map look-ahead effect A specific image (an image suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation is won) is displayed with a high probability compared to (F). As a result, during the special symbol variation, it is suggested that the normal symbol loss length variation is won. As an image that can be displayed in the general pattern look-ahead effect (A), the general pattern look-ahead effect (C), and the general pattern look-ahead effect (E), images that cannot be displayed in other effects (normal pattern loss length variation) An image that confirms that the

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the general pattern look-ahead effect (A), the general pattern look-ahead effect (C), and the general pattern look-ahead effect (E), different images are displayed according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal pattern loss length fluctuation. It may be displayed on the device 1007 .

Further, in the above description, it was explained that the probable variable mode mid-normal map prefetch effect processing shown in FIG. You can do it.

<Special figure look-ahead effect processing in probability mode>
Figure 217 is the flowchart which shows the special figure pre-reading effect processing in probability variation mode which relates to the 5th pachinko game machine.

The special figure prefetch effect processing in the probability variation mode shown in FIG. This is the process performed in the determination process (see step S504 in FIG. 53). In addition, the sub-control circuit 1300 can recognize that the normal symbol variation starts by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 1200 and sent to the sub-control circuit 1300 when the normal symbol variable display starts in the normal symbol variable display start process (see step S293 in FIG. 43). be.

In the probability variation mode special figure prefetch effect processing, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a special figure prefetch lottery (step S9861). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines winning or non-winning by drawing lots based on random numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the special figure prefetch lottery is won (step S9862). If it is determined that the special figure prefetch lottery is not won, the sub CPU 1301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure prefetch lottery has been won, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 128). It is determined whether or not (step S9863). Since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 128), by receiving the normal symbol variation start command, the sub CPU 1301 can make the determination. It is possible.

When determining that the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol losing length variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit is won (step S9864). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that a big win is won when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a big win.

When judging that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (A) (step S9865). In the special figure prefetching performance (A), the special figure prefetching lottery is won in the probability variable mode, the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9865, for example, the sub CPU 1301 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9845 of FIG. 216) suggesting that both the jackpot and normal symbol losing length variation have been won. Display on the device 1007 . The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9865, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When judging that the jackpot has not been won in step S9864, the sub CPU 1301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (B) (step S9866). In the special figure prefetching performance (B), the special figure prefetching lottery is won in the probability variation mode, the variation pattern of the current normal symbol variation is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is not won. It is a production performed in case. In the process of step S9866, for example, the sub CPU 1301 displays on the display device 1007 an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9852 of FIG. 216) suggesting that the normal symbol losing length variation has been won. Let The image displayed by the processing of step S9866 may be the same image or a different image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure prefetch effect (A). After executing the process of step S9866, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S9863 that the current variation pattern of the normal symbol variation is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol losing length variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a big hit has been won (step S9867). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines that a big win is won when the result of the big hit determination related to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls is a big win.

When judging that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 1301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (C) (step S9868). In the special figure prefetching performance (C), the special figure prefetching lottery is won in the variable probability mode, the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is won. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9868, for example, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9846 of FIG. 216). The sub CPU 1301 may cause the display device 1007 to display different images according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9868 may be the same image or a different image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure prefetch effects (A) to (B). After executing the process of step S9868, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

When judging that the jackpot has not been won in step S9867, the sub CPU 1301 executes a special figure prefetch effect (D) (step S9869). In the special figure prefetching performance (D), the special figure prefetching lottery is won in the probability variable mode, the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, and the big hit is not won. It is a production performed in case. In the processing of step S9869, for example, the sub CPU 1301 displays an image suggesting that neither the jackpot nor the normal symbol losing length variation has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9853 of FIG. 216). is displayed on the display device 1007 . The image displayed by the process of step S9869 may be the same image or a different image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure prefetch effects (A) to (C). After executing the process of step S9869, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

In the special pre-reading effect (A) and the special pre-reading effect (C), a specific image (that you won the jackpot) has a higher probability than the special pre-reading effect (B) and the special pre-reading effect (D) image) is displayed. As a result, it is suggested that a big hit is won during normal symbol variation. As an image that can be displayed in the special figure foreseeing performance (A) and the special figure foreseeing performance (C), an image that cannot be displayed in other performances (an image that confirms winning of the jackpot) may be provided. Also, in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D), respectively, depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 10 times or more, 5 times or more and less than 10 times, 5 times It may be configured such that a different image is displayed when it is less than). Further, as the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D), the above-described drum variation effects may be performed.

In this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of variation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (B), different images may be displayed on the display device 1007 according to the variation time of the winning normal symbol losing length variation.

Also, in the above, it was explained that the special figure foreseeing effect processing during probability variation mode shown in FIG. You can do it.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation becomes a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length variation, basically, the production corresponding to the start of the normal symbol loss length variation (Fig. 199 (j) and ( k)) will be performed, but if a big hit is won (for example, if the process of step S9865 is performed), the effect may not be performed. That is, in this case, when the normal symbol losing length variation (first bonus mode) starts, the state shifts to the big win game state (second bonus mode) soon after, until the start time of the big win game state, "BONUS ” may be suspended from being performed. For example, when the process of step S9865 is performed, the drum pattern 9202 may be stopped and displayed in the losing pattern (even though the normal pattern losing length variation is won), or the drum pattern 9202 may be stopped. While the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 199(k)) may not be performed at that time. After that, when shifting to the jackpot game state, it is possible to perform an effect (hit notification effect) to excite the start of the "BONUS".

<Icon stop suggestion notice effect>
FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first production stage. FIG. 218(b) is a diagram showing a pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), in the first effect stage, the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 ("Bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, "Watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and " A "Cherry" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c) is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. The “bell” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a, the “watermelon” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301b, and the “cherry” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c are images imitating meters.

Specifically, the “bell” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a, the “watermelon” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301b, and the “cherry” icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c are each in the initial display mode (the meter is full). level 1 display mode (the meter is filled to one level), level 2 display mode (the meter is filled to two levels), and level MAX display mode (the meter is full) ) can be displayed in any mode.

The meter indicated by the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 accumulates according to the effect (icon stop suggestion advance notice effect) performed during the first effect stage. The icon stop suggestive notice effect shown in FIG. 218(b) is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)). The icon stop suggestive notice performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit notice performances during one special pattern variation. Note that the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect is a effect that can be performed only in the first effect stage.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number “171” is a effect in which the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a is level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “172” is a effect in which the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "173" is a effect in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" are effects suggesting the possibility that the above-described "bell" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode, the "bell" icon is displayed in a higher level than when the "bell" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301a is in the initial display mode. Icons are likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode, the “bell” icon display mode is higher than when the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the “bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the “bell” icon display mode is higher than when the “bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is in the level 2 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to "pseudo 2".

The effect corresponding to the effect number “174” is a effect in which the display mode of the “watermelon” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “175” is a effect in which the display mode of the “watermelon” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "176" is a effect in which the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" are effects suggesting the possibility that the above-described "watermelon" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop-suggesting meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode, the "watermelon" icon is displayed in a higher level than when the "watermelon" icon stop-suggesting meter image 9301b is in the initial display mode. Icons are likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than when the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than when the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the "watermelon" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to "pseudo 3".

The effect corresponding to the effect number “177” is a effect in which the display mode of the “cherry” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c is level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “178” is a effect in which the display mode of the “cherry” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c is level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number “179” is an effect in which the display mode of the “cherry” icon stop suggesting meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" are effects suggesting the possibility that the above-described "cherry" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is in the initial display mode. Icons are likely to be (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop-suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode. ” icon will likely be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the "cherry" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to a predetermined super reach.

The production corresponding to the production numbers "171" to "179" is basically, after the game ball has won the first start opening 1120, when the special symbol variation related to the start winning is being performed, the special It is performed as an effect for suggesting to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during pattern fluctuation progresses. That is, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. Similarly, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "watermelon" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation. In addition, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c during one special symbol variation suggests the possibility that the "cherry" icon will be displayed during the special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173", after the game ball has entered the first starting hole 1120, the prefetching effect is performed before the special symbol variation related to the starting winning starts. In some cases, the look-ahead effect may be performed as an effect for suggesting to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the special symbol variation progresses. In this case, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a during one special symbol variation is the possibility that the "bell" icon will be displayed during the next and subsequent special symbol variations (to be read ahead). will suggest Therefore, in the look-ahead effect for one starting prize, if the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggesting meter image 9301a becomes the level MAX display mode, the simulation performed during the special symbol variation related to the starting prize In the continuous effect, it is determined that at least "pseudo 2" is shifted.

<Lottery process for icon stop suggestion notification contents>
FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The lottery process for icon stop suggestion notice contents shown in FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the content lottery process (see FIG. 130).

In the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not a look-ahead effect will occur during the current special symbol variation, based on information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9901). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the sub variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation is the look-ahead sub variation pattern (see FIG. 183).

When determining that the look-ahead effect will occur during this special symbol variation, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect will occur based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9902). When determining that a pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3" based on information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9903).

When judging that the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 1301 executes the lottery processing of icon stop suggestion advance notice content for pseudo 3 (step S9904). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3", and to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3". In that case, the content of the effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect to be performed in "pseudo 3". As a result, in "pseudo 3", the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c can be changed.

If it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3", or after executing the process of step S9904, the sub CPU 1301 executes the pseudo 2 icon stop suggestion notice lottery process (step S9905). ). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "Pseudo 2", and to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "Pseudo 2". In that case, the content of the effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect to be performed in "Pseudo 2". As a result, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b can be changed in "pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo-continuous effect will not occur, or after executing the processing in step S9905, the sub CPU 1301 executes pseudo-1 icon stop suggestion notice lottery processing (step S9906). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "Pseudo 1", and to perform an icon stop suggestion notice effect in "Pseudo 1". In that case, the content of the effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect to be performed in "Pseudo 1". As a result, in "pseudo 1", the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9901 that the look-ahead effect will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 1301 executes a look-ahead icon stop suggestion notice lottery process (step S9907). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random value to determine whether or not to perform an icon stop suggestion advance notice effect in the look-ahead effect. Determine the content of the performance. Specifically, the sub CPU 1301 determines one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “171” to “173” as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect performed in the look-ahead effect. As a result, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed in the look-ahead effect.

After executing the process of step S9906 or step S9907, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

<Relevant hold change effect lottery processing>
220 and 221 are flowcharts showing the holding change effect lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), the reserved ball image 9302 is displayed on the display device 1007 in the first effect stage. The reserved ball image 9302 is an image corresponding to the current (currently performed) special symbol variation (the reserved ball). Also, according to the number of reserved special symbol variations, one or more of the first reserved ball image 9303a, second reserved ball image 9303b, third reserved ball image 9303c, and fourth reserved ball image 9303d. image is displayed. The first reserved ball image 9303a is an image corresponding to the first reserved ball, the second reserved ball image 9303b is an image corresponding to the second reserved ball, and the third reserved ball image 9303c is It is an image corresponding to the third reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d is an image corresponding to the fourth reserved ball.

In this embodiment, an effect of changing the color of the pending ball image 9302 (the pending change effect) is performed. Through the color of the reserved ball image 9302, the result of the big hit determination related to this special symbol variation is suggested. The pending change effect is a effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)). The pending change performance is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit announcement performance during one special pattern variation. Note that the colors of the first reserved ball image 9303a, the second reserved ball image 9303b, the third reserved ball image 9303c, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d may change due to the look-ahead effect.

The holding change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is the first effect when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol variation start time process (see FIG. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 1300 after the stage announcement content lottery process (see FIG. 130). The pending change effect lottery process may be performed even when the current effect stage is the second effect stage or the third effect stage.

In the pending change effect lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 executes a pending change pattern combination lottery process (step S9921). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the holding change effect (at what timing and how the color of the holding ball image 9302 is to be changed) by performing a lottery based on random numbers. The content of the pending change effect is defined by a combination of pending change patterns. The pending change pattern includes pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern (6), pending change Pattern (7), pending change pattern (8) and pending change pattern (9) are provided.

Combinations of pending change patterns include, for example, a combination of pending change pattern (1) and pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), and pending change pattern (3). The combination of change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (7), pending change pattern (8), And, a combination of pending change pattern (9), pending change pattern (1), pending change pattern (2), pending change pattern (3), pending change pattern (4), pending change pattern (5), pending change pattern ( 6), pending change pattern (8), and pending change pattern (9). A combination of pending change patterns always includes a pending change pattern (9). In addition, when the combination of pending change patterns includes the pending change pattern (7), the combination must also include the pending change pattern (8). In the processing of step S9921, the sub CPU 1301 selects one combination from a plurality of combinations of pending change patterns provided in advance.

Next, sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns determined in step S9921 (step S9922). Suspended change pattern (1) changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 1” stage in the pseudo continuous effect or “no pseudo” effect starts (when this special symbol variation starts). It is a pattern that makes

When determining that pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (1) (step S9923). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “simulated 1” stage in the simulated continuous effect or the “no simulated” effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green”, “blinking → purple”, “blue → purple”, “green → purple”, “blinking → red”, “blue → red”, “green → red”, “purple → red” determine the aspect of This will cause the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in a determined manner at the start of the "pseudo 1". The color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9922 is performed is the same as the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a immediately before the special symbol variation of this time is started. When the color of the reserved ball image 9303 is changed by the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 1301 determines the color change mode of the reserved ball image 9302 based on the color of the first reserved ball image 9303a.

If it is determined in step S9922 that the pending change pattern (1) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the processing in step S9923, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (2) (step S9924). Suspended change pattern (2) is a pattern that changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or the effect of "non-simulated". The combination including the pending change pattern (2) can be selected only when a sub-variation pattern is determined in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode in "Pseudo 1".

When determining that pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (2) (step S9925). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the stage of "simulated 1" in the simulated continuous effect or the effect of "no simulated". For example, the sub CPU 1301 sets “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when ten pie occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9924 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9923 when the processing of step S9923 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9923 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9922 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9924 that the pending change pattern (2) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9925, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (3) (step S9926). The pending change pattern (3) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 2” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. A combination including the pending change pattern (3) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs.

When determining that pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (3) (step S9927). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 2” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of This will cause the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in a determined manner at the start of the "pseudo 2". Note that the color of the suspended ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9926 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9925 when the processing of step S9925 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9925 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9924 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9926 that the pending change pattern (3) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9927, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (4) (step S9928). Suspended change pattern (4) is a pattern that changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 2” stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. The combination including the pending change pattern (4) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and a sub-variation pattern is determined in which the decorative pattern is in the reach state in "pseudo 2". It's becoming

When determining that pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (4) (step S9929). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when a tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, the sub CPU 1301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when ten pie occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9928 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9927 when the processing of step S9927 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9927 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9926 is performed.

When it is determined in step S9928 that the pending change pattern (4) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9929, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (5) (step S9930). The pending change pattern (5) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 3” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. A combination including the pending change pattern (5) can be selected only when a pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the "pseudo 3" stage.

When determining that pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (5) (step S9931). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 when the “pseudo 3” stage in the pseudo continuous effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 1301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of This will cause the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in a determined manner at the start of the "pseudo 3". Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9930 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9929 when the processing of step S9929 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9929 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9928 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9930 that the pending change pattern (5) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the processing in step S9931, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (6) (step S9932). Suspended change pattern (6) is a pattern that changes the color of the suspended ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 3” stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. The combination including the pending change pattern (6) is such that a pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3", and the decorative pattern is in a ready-to-win mode at "pseudo 3". can be selected only when an appropriate sub-fluctuation pattern has been determined.

When determining that pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (6) (step S9933). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the held ball image 9302 when Tenpai occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, the sub CPU 1301 sets “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner when ten pie occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9932 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9931 when the processing of step S9931 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9931 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9930 is performed.

When it is determined in step S9932 that the pending change pattern (6) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9933, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (7) (step S9934). The pending change pattern (7) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending sphere image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the pending sphere image 9302 reaches the final color. . The timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (7) can be, for example, the first half of super reach.

When determining that pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (7) (step S9935). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the reserved ball image 9302 in a situation where two more color changes remain before the reserved ball image 9302 reaches the final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 1301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of This causes the pending sphere image 9302 to change color in the determined manner with two more color changes remaining. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9934 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9933 when the processing of step S9933 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9933 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9932 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9934 that the pending change pattern (7) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9935, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (8) (step S9936). The pending change pattern (8) is a pattern that changes the color of the pending sphere image 9302 in a situation where one more color change remains before the pending sphere image 9302 reaches the final color. . The timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (8) can be, for example, the first half or the second half of super reach.

When determining that the pending change pattern (8) is included in the pending change pattern combination, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change content based on the pending change pattern (8) (step S9937). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the retained ball image 9302 in a situation where one more color change remains before the retained ball image 9302 reaches the final color. decide. For example, the sub CPU 1301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the retained ball image 9302 changes in the determined manner in a situation where one more color change remains. Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9936 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9935 when the processing of step S9935 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9935 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9934 is performed.

When it is determined in step S9936 that the pending change pattern (8) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9937, the sub CPU 1301 determines the pending change pattern determined in step S9921. includes the pending change pattern (9) (step S9938). The pending change pattern (9) is a pattern used to change the color of the pending sphere image 9302 to the final color. Although detailed explanation is omitted, before the holding change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. (the final color of the reserved ball image 9302) is determined. In the process of step S9938, the sub CPU 1301 always determines that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of pending change patterns. The timing of the color change based on the pending change pattern (9) is, for example, when a tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 1” stage, when “pseudo 2” starts, when a tenpai occurs in the “pseudo 2” stage, “pseudo 3 , the first half or second half of Super Reach, and so on.

When determining that pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of pending change patterns, sub CPU 1301 determines pending change content based on pending change pattern (9) (step S9939). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines how to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 in order to change the color of the pending ball image 9302 to the final color. For example, the sub CPU 1301 determines “no color change”, “blinking→blue”, “blinking→green”, “blue → green", "blinking → purple", "blue → purple", "green → purple", "blinking → red", "blue → red", "green → red", "purple → red" determine the aspect of As a result, the color of the held ball image 9302 changes in the determined mode, and the color of the held ball image 9302 is changed by the lottery performed before the holding change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. Final color determined by (original lottery). Note that the color of the held ball image 9302 determined before the processing of step S9938 is performed is the changed color determined by the processing of step S9937 when the processing of step S9937 is performed. Yes, and if the process of step S9937 has not been performed, the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9936 is performed.

If it is determined in step S9938 that the pending change pattern (9) is not included in the combination of pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9939, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

If the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined before the process of step S9938 is already the final color, the sub CPU 1301 determines "NO" in the process of step S9938. good too. In this case, the sub CPU 1301 may display the reserved ball image 9302 in the final color, or may display it in another color (default color). When the color of the reserved ball image 9302 changes to another color after the color of the reserved ball image 9302 becomes the final color, it may be determined that the reserved change effect is a false effect.

<Slot game in the 6th specific super reach>
FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the contents of effect blocks in the sixth specific super reach. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process related to the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in the second effect stage (see FIG. 129(a)), the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 185) may be performed. There is a possibility that it will develop into a specific super reach. In the sixth specific super reach, a game (slot game during the sixth specific super reach) is performed in which a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the display device 1007 and then stopped. . When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right three columns in the sixth specific super-reach slot game (when all three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super-reach. The sixth specific super reach middle slot game is composed of a plurality of effect blocks. FIG. 222 illustrates the contents of the effect block.

In effect block “1”, the display device 1007 displays an image corresponding to the description of the sixth specific super reach slot game. In the effect block “2”, an image (for example, an image showing a title of a predetermined super reach) indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has been successful (developing to a predetermined super reach) is displayed on the display device 1007 . to be displayed. In effect block “3”, the display device 1007 displays an image indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has failed (the sixth specific super reach slot game ends).

In the effect block "4", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 1007 in three columns on the left, middle, and right for eight seconds, and an image that encourages the gathering of the "additional" icons. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "additional" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "additional" icons are not aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "4" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In the production block "5", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 1007 in three columns of left, middle, and right for 8 seconds, and an image encouraging the "additional" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "additional" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "additional" icons are aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "5" is performed, the value of the above-described "PLAY TIME" (see FIG. 184(b)) is added by a predetermined number, and the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. .

In the production block "6", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 1007 in three columns of left, middle, and right for 8 seconds, and an image encouraging the "mission" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "Mission" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "Mission" icons are not aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "6" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game ends. In production blocks "7" and "8", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 1007 in three columns of left, middle, and right for eight seconds, and the "mission" icons are encouraged to be aligned. After such an image is displayed on the display device 1007, "Mission" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "Mission" icons are aligned), and a predetermined mission begins. After that, the mission fails in production block "7", and succeeds in the mission in production block "8". When the effect corresponding to the effect block "7" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues, and when the effect corresponding to the effect block "8" is performed, a predetermined super reach. develop into.

In the production block "9", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 1007 in three columns of left, middle, and right for eight seconds, and an image encouraging the "cherry" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "cherry" icons are not stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right three columns (the "cherry" icons are not aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "9" is performed, the sixth specific super reach slot game continues. In the production block "10", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed on the display device 1007 in three columns of left, middle, and right for eight seconds, and an image encouraging the "cherry" icons to be aligned. is displayed on the display device 1007, the "cherry" icons are stopped and displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right (three "cherry" icons are aligned). When the effect corresponding to the effect block "10" is performed, it develops into a predetermined super reach.

The sixth specific super ready-to-win contents lottery process shown in FIG. or "154" is performed by the sub-control circuit 1300. The content of each effect block is determined by performing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 1301 determines the content of the final effect block (step S9941). In this process, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation is a sub-variation pattern that develops into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect block "2" as the final effect block. . On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation is a sub-variation pattern that does not develop into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect block "3" as the final effect block.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the effect block immediately before the final effect block (step S9942). In this process, when the effect block "2" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 1301 selects the effect block "2" as the effect block immediately before the final effect block by performing a lottery based on the random number value. Determine "8" or "10". On the other hand, when the effect block "3" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 1301 selects the effect block "4" as the effect block immediately before the final effect block by performing a lottery based on random numbers. ” or “6”.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9943). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9942 from the value of the stock timer at the start of the sixth specific super reach, and adds it to the new stock timer. is stored in the work RAM 1303 as a value of . The value of the stock timer at the time when the 6th specific super reach starts corresponds to the value of "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110 at the time when the slot game starts during the 6th specific super reach during this special symbol variation. is doing. The value is determined before the sixth specific super reach content lottery process is started.

Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "4" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "4". The time corresponding to effect block "6" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to effect block "6". The time corresponding to the effect block "8" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect (excluding the mission) corresponding to the effect block "8". The time corresponding to the effect block "10" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "10". Note that the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach is started is always a value corresponding to 8 seconds or more.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 determines whether or not the value of the stock timer is greater than 0 (step S9944). When determining that the value of the stock timer is greater than 0, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the final effect block among the undetermined effect blocks (step S9945). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 performs a lottery based on a random value to select one of the effect block "5", the effect block "7", and the effect block "9" as the last effect block. Determine the production block.

Next, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9946). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9945 from the stock timer value stored in the work RAM 1303 as a new stock timer value. It is stored in the work RAM 1303 . Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "5" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "5". The time corresponding to the effect block "7" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect (excluding the mission) corresponding to the effect block "7". The time corresponding to effect block "9" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to effect block "9". If effect block "5" is determined in step S9945, the sub CPU 1301 subtracts the value of the stock timer and adds a predetermined number (additional time) to the value of the stock timer. The value of the stock timer is configured to be N times 8 seconds (N is an integer).

After executing the process of step S9946, the sub CPU 1301 shifts the process to step S9944. When determining that the value of the stock timer is 0 in step S9944, the sub CPU 1301 determines the contents of the first effect block (step S9947). In this process, the sub CPU 1301 determines the effect block "1" as the first effect block. After executing the process of step S9947, the sub CPU 1301 terminates this subroutine.

The contents of the sixth specific super reachable slot game are determined by executing the sixth specific super reachable lottery process described above. For example, in the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, effect block "2" is determined in step S9941, effect block "10" is determined in step S9942, effect block "9" is determined in step S9945, and further. Effect block "5" is determined in step S9945, effect block "7" is determined in step S9945, and then effect block "1" is determined in step S9947. The order of block "1" → production block "7" → production block "5" → production block "9" → production block "10" → production block "2" (the order determined in the 6th specific super reach content lottery process In the reverse order), an effect corresponding to each effect block is performed.

<Effects and logo lamps on the LCD screen>
FIG. 224(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the first presentation stage logo effect announcement presentation. FIG. 224(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the second presentation stage logo effect announcement presentation. 225 to 227 are diagrams showing specific aspects of the second production stage logo effect forewarning production.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined portion of the game board unit 1010 (for example, the upper side of the display device 1007), and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. As effects using such logo lamps, there are cases where a first effect stage logo effect preview effect and a second effect stage logo effect preview effect are performed.

The first effect stage logo effect forewarning effect shown in FIG. 224(a) is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the first effect stage. The logo effect forewarning effect for the first effect stage can occur only in the first effect stage. In addition, the logo effect forewarning performance for the first production stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit forewarning performances during one special pattern variation.

Although not shown, before the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "181" to "184" are performed, first, the decorative symbols become tenpai after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation. After that, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "181" to "184", the button image is displayed on the display device 1007 and the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted. Then, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, nothing in particular occurs in the effect corresponding to the effect number "181", and the effect ends. On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "182" to "184", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner after a predetermined period of time (one second) has passed since the absorption of the effect.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "182", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which the characters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in white in the first logo portion, the second logo portion, and the third logo portion, respectively. Further, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "183", the logo lamp emits red light. As a result, an appearance is created in which the characters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in red in the first logo portion, the second logo portion, and the third logo portion, respectively.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "184", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates the appearance that a given word (eg, "CHANCE") is lit white throughout the logo cover. A large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix (grid) on the back side of the logo cover, and any word can be formed by appropriately selecting the LEDs to emit light.

The performance corresponding to the performance number ``182'' has a higher expectation for a big hit than the performance corresponding to the performance number ``181'', and the performance corresponding to the performance number ``183'' is the performance corresponding to the performance number ``182''. , and the effect corresponding to the effect number "184" has the highest degree of expectation for a big hit.

The logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage shown in FIG. 224(b) is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed in the second effect stage. The logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage can occur only in the second effect stage. In addition, the logo effect forewarning performance for the second performance stage is a performance that can occur in combination with other big hit forewarning performances during one special pattern variation.

In the effects corresponding to the effects numbers "191" to "193", after the decorative pattern starts to change (see FIG. 225(a)), the screen (monitor) of the display device 1007 becomes a reduced image display. (See FIG. 225(b)). Then, an image is displayed such that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the left (see FIG. 225(c)), and a plurality of icons are displayed in place of the decorative pattern, and each icon flashes in sequence. The displayed roulette effect is performed (see FIG. 225(d)), the button image is displayed on the display device 1007, and the operation of the effect button 1054 is accepted (see FIG. 225(e)). After that, one icon is selected as a result of the roulette effect, and an image indicating the title of the effect corresponding to the icon (for example, “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 225(f)) is displayed on the display device 1007 . "CHANCE" indicates the title of an effect in which the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed by the logo cover (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that a predetermined button effective time is set while the button image is being displayed. If the production button 1054 is operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, " CHANCE” is selected). On the other hand, if the effect button 1054 is not operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, "CHANCE" is selected at the end of the button valid time (at the moment the button valid time ends). screen).

After that, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", an effect in which the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect) is performed. In the effect absorption production, a predetermined effect appears on the display device 1007, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "191", the display device 1007 displays an image corresponding to the fact that the logo lamp does not emit light in a predetermined manner and the result of the effect absorption effect is a failure. becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "192" and "193", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined manner. As a result, an appearance is created in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in predetermined colors in the first logo portion, the second logo portion, and the third logo portion, respectively. As the predetermined effect, a plurality of types of effects with different colors (white effect, red effect, etc.) may be provided, and the logo lamp may be configured to emit light in the same color as the color of the appearing effect. . After the logo lamp emits light, the decorative pattern becomes Tenpai. At this time, "PLAY TIME" is stocked in the effect corresponding to the effect number "193". After that, it shifts to the notice after the success of Tenpai. As described above, in the announcement after the success of Tenpai, a connecting effect corresponding to the development destination Super Reach is performed (see FIG. 185(b)).

FIG. 226 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 after the start of the effect absorption presentation in the presentation corresponding to the presentation number "192". As shown in FIG. 226, when the effect absorption presentation is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 226(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. It is displayed in such a manner as to approach the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 226(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so as to form the character "X" 9410L (see FIG. 226(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 1007, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 226(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp lights up so that the character "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 226(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 1007, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 226(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears and the third logo portion 9401R emits light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo portion 9401R, and the logo lamp lights up so that the character "Z" 9410R is formed (see FIG. 226(e)). After that, the image display is such that the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see FIG. 226(e)), and the decorative pattern 9001 becomes the ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 226(f)).

FIG. 227 shows an example of an image displayed on the display device 1007 after the start of the effect absorption presentation in the presentation corresponding to the presentation number "191". As shown in FIG. 227, when the effect absorption presentation is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the display device 1007 (see FIG. 227(a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. It is displayed in such a manner as to approach the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 227(b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 disappears. At the same time, the first logo portion 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is lit so that the letter "X" 9410L is formed (see FIG. 227(c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the display device 1007, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 227(c)). ), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp lights up so that the character "Y" 9410C is formed (see FIG. 227(d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the display device 1007, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo portion 9401R while being gradually reduced (see FIG. 227(d)). ), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears, but the third logo portion 9401R does not emit light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed into the third logo portion 9401R, but the letter "Z" 9410R is not formed. After that, the logo lamp is extinguished (“X” character 9410L and “Y” character 9410C disappear), and the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) becomes an image display that moves to the right (see FIG. 227(e)). , the decorative pattern 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 227(f)).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227, in the logo effect forewarning effect for the second effect stage, an effect in which the effect on the display device 1007 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect) is performed. Although not shown, a similar effect absorption effect is performed in the logo effect forewarning effect for the first effect stage. Effect absorption rendering is a rendering that presents an appearance as if the image is acting on the logo cover (absorbed by the logo cover) by reducing or disappearing the image displayed near the logo cover. is.

In FIGS. 226 and 227, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R are divided (adjacent logo portions are not formed continuously and there is a gap). Although the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R may be integrally formed. In particular, when an arbitrary word is displayed on the entire logo cover, such as the effect corresponding to the effect number "184", it is desirable that the entire logo cover is integrally formed.

By the way, even in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to the A reduced working hours game state after the end of the jackpot game state, and if the condition for transition to the B reduced working hours game state is satisfied, it will shift to the B reduced working hours gaming state. Then, when the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, the state is shifted to the C time saving game state.
[5-3. Production control related to transition to B time-saving gaming state]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, in a gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the sub CPU 1301 , in the display device 1007, the display of the first display effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, while the display of the second display effect is performed even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started. do not have. In addition, in the gaming state (for example, high probability short working hours gaming state, high probability non-short working hours gaming state, or low probability short working hours gaming state), the sub CPU 1301, in the display device 1007, the second While the display of the second display performance is started with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the display of the first display performance is not performed even if the variable display of the first special symbols is started. Note that the display device 1007 is preferably a liquid crystal display device.

The first display effect whose display is started with the variable display of the first special symbol is, for example, a display effect performed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Variable display of decorative patterns, display effects by characters, etc.) correspond. Regardless of the game state, the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol blinking at one corner of the display device 1007, for example, is not included in the first display effect.

Similarly, the second display effect whose display is started with the variable display of the second special symbol is, for example, a display effect performed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. (For example, variable display of decorative patterns, display effect by characters, etc.) corresponds. Regardless of the game state, the symbol corresponding to the second special symbol blinking at one corner of the display device 1007, for example, is not included in the second display effect.

By the way, in a pachinko game machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the variable display of either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the final ceiling fluctuation. If the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the variable display of one of the special symbols, there is a risk that the display performance will be unnatural and the interest will be reduced.

For example, at any timing from the start of the variable display of one special pattern as the final ceiling change to the end of this variable display (for example, when the variable display of the special pattern is started) to the B time-saving gaming state In the case of transition, a situation may occur in which the first display effect is performed on the display device 1007 while the state is internally transitioned to the B time-saving gaming state. In particular, when the variable display of one special pattern is started as the final ceiling change and the variable display of the other special pattern is started until this variable display is finished, the first display effect is changed to the second display effect. It can be unnatural to switch to

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display effect performed when shifting to the B time-saving game state in the final ceiling change is performed in a natural manner as described below, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed. . Below, the production control related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state performed by the sub CPU 1301 will be described.

[5-3-1. Production control in normal pattern related to transition to B time saving game state]
Figure 228 is a time chart showing the production control in the normal pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, (A) time chart showing an example of production control performed in the first normal pattern, (B) the It is a time chart which shows an example of the production|presentation control performed by 2 normal patterns.

First, mainly referring to FIG. 228(A) and supplementarily referring to FIG. 229, the effect control in the first normal pattern will be described. FIG. 229 shows an example of the display effects of the first normal pattern displayed in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007. FIG.

In the first normal pattern shown in FIG. 228(A), the variable display immediately before the final ceiling change (hereinafter referred to as "pre-final ceiling change") is the variable display of the first special symbol, and the final ceiling change is the first. It is a pattern when the variable display of the special design and the variable display of the second special design are started during the variable display of the first special design in the ceiling final fluctuation. Note that the “liquid crystal effect” shown in FIG. 228 corresponds to the display effect displayed on the display device 1007 . In addition, "Special 1_losing variation" represents a variation pattern when the result of the hit determination processing for the first special symbol is a loss, and "Special 1_big hit variation" indicates that the result of the hit determination processing for the first special symbol is a big hit. It shows a variation pattern in a certain case. Similarly, "special 2_loss variation" represents the variation pattern when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a loss, and "special 2_small hit variation" represents the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol. A variation pattern in the case of a small hit is represented, and "special 1_big hit variation" represents a variation pattern in the case where the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is a big hit.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the change before the ceiling final, the sub CPU 1301 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in the display area 1007a of the display device 1007, as shown in FIG. 229(a). When the variable display of the first special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed and the display mode of the lost is derived to the 1 special symbol display section 163, as shown in FIG. Confirm and display the image showing .

As shown in FIG. 228(A), in the first normal pattern, the sub CPU 1301 performs the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling change. , for example, the shutter closing effect is started. This shutter closing effect functions as an effect indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value, that is, as a transition effect to the B time-saving game state.

The shutter closing rendering is an image shown in FIG. 229(c). In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 also performs a right-hand navigation effect for instructing a right-hand shot. Incidentally, the sub CPU 1301, in the shutter closing effect, instead of or in addition to the right-hand navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , you may perform an effect related to the progress of the game. In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 also displays an image indicating that the night mode is being prepared. In this embodiment, the night mode is a display effect suggesting that it is controlled to the B time saving game state, and the night mode preparation is a display effect suggesting that the B time saving game state is being prepared. be.

By the way, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed as the ceiling final variation, the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol may be a big hit or a time saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling change is a big hit, the sub CPU 1301 does not execute the shutter closing effect, but executes a normal jackpot change effect. .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol whose variable display is started as the final ceiling change is a time saving hit, the sub CPU 1301 follows the process when a plurality of time saving game states overlap, B time saving game When transitioning to the state, a transition effect (for example, shutter closing effect) to the B time saving game state is performed, and when moving to the C time saving game state, a transition effect suggesting a transition to the C time saving game state is performed. . In this case, the transition effect to the B time saving game state and the transition effect to the C time saving game state may be the same or substantially the same effect in appearance, or may be different effects.

In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit. When the variable display of the special symbol is performed, it is possible that the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the main CPU 1201, after controlling to the small winning game state, shifts to the B time saving game state, so the sub CPU 1301 performs a small winning winning effect suggesting that the small winning game state has been won. It is preferable to give priority to transition effect (for example, shutter closing effect) to . However, it is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may give priority to the transition effect to the B time saving game state over the small hit winning effect.

Also, the variable display of the second special pattern is started during the variable display of the first special pattern in the final change of the ceiling, and the result of the hit determination processing of the second special pattern may be a big hit or a time-saving hit.

For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling change is a big hit, the sub CPU 1301 ends the shutter closing effect, irregular It is preferable to execute a big hit variation production. In other words, it is preferable that the irregular big hit variation effect is preferentially executed over the transition effect to the B time saving game state.

Also. If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol whose variable display is started during the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling change is a small hit, the sub CPU 1301 transitions to the B time saving gaming state (for example , Shutter closing effect) is ended, a night mode display effect is started as a display effect suggesting that the B time saving game state is controlled, and in this night mode display effect, a small hit is suggested. It is preferable to perform a hit suggestion production. That is, it is preferable to give priority to the small hit suggestion effect over the transition effect to the B time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may give priority to the transition effect to the B time-saving game state over the small hit suggestion effect.

During the variable display of the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the big hit variation) is started as the variable display of the first rotation in the B time-saving gaming state, the main special symbol is the second. It is changed from 1 special design to 2nd special design.

In such a case, when the variable display of the second special symbol (excluding the big hit variation) is started, the sub CPU 1301, for example, opens the closed shutter (ends the shutter closing effect) and displays the second special symbol. A night mode display effect is started as the second display effect associated with the variable display (see FIG. 229(d)). That is, when the main special symbol changes from the first special symbol to the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol in the ceiling final fluctuation, the sub CPU 1301 changes from the first display effect to the second display effect. switch to Therefore, the night mode display effect functions as an effect indicating the transition to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 228(A), the sub CPU 1301 internally shifts to the B time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol as the ceiling final variation is started. Until the variable display of the 2 special symbols is started (until the night mode display effect is started), the shutter closing effect as the first display effect is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unnatural situation in which the display effect associated with the variable display of the special pattern is not started even though the variable display of the first special pattern is started in the final ceiling change, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

After completing the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling change, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display effect at least while being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

The sub CPU 1301, while the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the first variable display of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state, is performed, night mode display effect (see FIG. 229 (d)), game explanation effect ( 229(e)), a landing effect (see FIG. 229(f)), a right-handed instruction display effect (see FIG. 229(g)), and a count-up effect (see FIG. 229(g)).

The night mode display effect is, as described above, a display effect indicating that the game state has shifted to the B time-saving game state, and is, for example, a display effect in which the background image changes to night. The game explanation (see FIG. 229(e)) corresponds to a display effect in which explanations related to the game are displayed, such as information indicating that the game is in the B time-saving game state. In the landing effect (see FIG. 229(f)), the text "Count Up" is displayed, and the 7-segment display 1071 provided on the lower right side of the display device 1007, for example, is hit by a ball of light. A display effect such as Although it is difficult to grasp from the illustration in FIG. 229, when the impact effect is performed, the sub CPU 1301 starts high-speed fluctuation on the 7-segment display 1071 with this as a trigger. After that, the sub CPU 1301 performs a right-hand hitting instruction display effect for instructing right-hand hitting (see FIG. 229(g)). Although not shown, the count-up effect corresponds to a display effect in which the information displayed on the 7-segment display 1071 (for example, the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state, etc.) seems to increase. The sub CPU 1301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 1071 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing a series of display effects from the night mode display effect to the count-up effect, and B time saving game. Information indicating the end timing of the state (for example, the number of time reductions) is displayed (see FIG. 229(h)). After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the second display effect associated with the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the display area 1007 a of the display device 1007 .

In the first normal pattern, in this way, switching of the display effect from the first display effect to the second display effect that is performed with the transition to the B time-saving game state can be performed in a natural manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 228(B), effect control in the second normal pattern will be described. The second normal pattern is variable display of the first special pattern for the final fluctuation of the ceiling, variable display of the first special pattern for the final fluctuation of the ceiling, variable display of the first special pattern for the first time in the B time saving game state, B time saving game It is a pattern when the second time in the state is a variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 228(B), in the second normal pattern, the sub CPU 1301, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (losing variation), which is the final variation of the ceiling, is accompanied by the variable display of the first special symbol. As the display effect, for example, the shutter closing effect described above is started. In this shutter closing effect, the sub CPU 1301 also performs a right-hand navigation effect for instructing a right-hand shot. Incidentally, the sub CPU 1301, in the shutter closing effect, instead of or in addition to the right-hand navigation effect, for example, an effect suggesting the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, an effect related to the start of the B time-saving game state, etc. , you may perform an effect related to the progress of the game.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is not started until the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed, the sub CPU 1301 performs the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation. Even if is completed, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is not displayed in the shutter effect which is the first display effect, and the first variable display of the second special symbol is started in the B time-saving game state. The first display effect is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started before the variable display of the second special symbol is started after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished as the final ceiling change, this first A new first display effect accompanying the variable display of special symbols is not performed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second time in the B time-saving gaming state (the first variable display after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state as the second special symbol), the sub CPU 1301 is the final ceiling fluctuation. The first display performance started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is ended, and the second display performance accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed when the variable display of the second special symbol is started for the second time in the B time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 1301 can display the second special symbol according to the variable display of the second special symbol. Start display rendering.

After shifting to the B time saving game state, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is started, the sub CPU 1301 starts the night mode display effect, and then the game explanation effect, the landing effect, and the count-up effect. Perform a series of display effects up to. By the way, when the variable display time of the second special symbol performed first after shifting to the B time saving gaming state is short, the above-mentioned series of display effects are performed until the variable display of this second special symbol is completed. There may be cases where it cannot be finished. In such a case, the sub CPU 1301 stops the high-speed fluctuation of the 7-segment display 1071 at the stop timing of the variable display of the second special symbol after performing the above-described series of display effects, performs a count-up effect, Information indicating the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state (for example, the number of times of time-saving) is displayed. That is, if the second special symbol is being variably displayed when the timing at which the series of display effects described above can be terminated has come, the sub CPU 1301 will be displayed in accordance with the end timing of the variable display of the second special symbol. , ends the above series of display effects. However, there are cases where the second special symbol is not being variably displayed when it is time to end the above series of display effects. A count-up effect is performed when receiving the information, information indicating the end timing of the B time-saving game state (for example, the number of times of time-saving) is displayed, and the above series of display effects is terminated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, until the number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed in the night mode display effect (that is, the remaining number of time saving) is displayed. In the meantime, the variable display by the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be performed and the remaining number of time reduction may change, so in order to absorb and display the variable display number of times, the second special symbol is displayed. Waiting for the end of the variable display, the count-up effect is performed.

The sub CPU 1301 performs the second display effect when the first variable display of the special symbols in the B time-saving gaming state is the second special symbol variable display, while the first variable of the special symbols in the B time-saving gaming state. Although the first display effect is not performed when the display is the variable display of the first special symbol, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the first variable display of special symbols in the B time-saving gaming state is the variable display of the first special symbols, the first display effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. . However, the frequency with which the first display effect is performed when the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state is the variable display of the first special symbol is the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state of the second special symbol. It is preferable that the frequency of the second display effect is lower than that of the variable display.

In this embodiment, in a game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol, the second special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, while right-handed hitting is regular. In the game state of the game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, if the game specification is such that the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed when the game is played with the left hand, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed when the game is played with the right hand. In the game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the second special symbol corresponds to the main special pattern, the first special symbol corresponds to the sub-special symbol, and the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. Then, the first special symbol corresponds to the main special symbol and the first special symbol corresponds to the sub special symbol.

[5-3-2. Production control in irregular pattern related to transition to B time saving game state]
FIG. 230 is a time chart showing production control in an irregular pattern related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, (A) a time chart showing an example of production control performed in the first irregular pattern, (B ) A time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the second irregular pattern, (C) A time chart showing an example of the effect control performed in the third irregular pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 230(A), effect control in the first irregular pattern will be described. The first irregular pattern is a pattern in which the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the first special symbol, and the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 230 (A), when the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the first special symbol and the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 At the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the ceiling final fluctuation, for example, the above-described shutter closing effect is started. That is, even though the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling variation is not started after the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is finished, the first special symbol is displayed in the above-described normal pattern. A shutter closing effect that functions as the first display effect associated with the variable display is displayed.

After shifting to the B time saving game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the B time saving game state, the sub CPU 1301 ends the above-mentioned shutter closing effect and performs the night mode display effect. Start. That is, the sub CPU 1301 continues to display the shutter effect started at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol as the ceiling final fluctuation until the variable display of the second special symbol starts after the B time-saving game state. do.

In addition, in FIG. 230 (A), the "ceiling final fluctuation (long fluctuation)" illustrated in the columns of "special 2_losing fluctuation" and "special 2_small hit fluctuation" are all over a long period of time such as approximately 600000 msec. 2 It is a long variation in which a variation display of special symbols is performed, but for convenience, it is shown with a narrow width. Incidentally, the variable display time of the second special symbol over a long fluctuation is not limited to approximately 600000 msec, and may be within the range of 360000 msec to 600000 msec, for example.

Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started while the first special symbol is variablely displayed as the ceiling final variation, the sub CPU 1301 causes the display device 1007 to display the , Performs a right-handed small navigation effect (right-handed instruction display in small letters). That is, even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed (for example, during the reach effect), the right-handed small navigation effect is performed. As a result, even if the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling change is started and the game state is shifted to the B time-saving game state, the player can be instructed to play the game mode (right hitting) at an appropriate timing, Unnecessary consumption of game balls can be suppressed, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the variable display of the second special symbol as the first variable display in the B time-saving gaming state (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol as the final ceiling variation) Even when the ready-to-win effect is performed as the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed small navigation effect is performed in this ready-to-win effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230(B), effect control in the second irregular pattern will be described. The second irregular pattern is variable display of the second special symbol (long variation) before the ceiling final variation, variable display of the first special symbol for the final ceiling variation, and variable display of the first special symbol which is the final ceiling variation. , B is a pattern when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after shifting to the B time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 230(B), when the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display (long fluctuation) of the second special symbol, and the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the first special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the final ceiling change, as the first display effect associated with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, the above-described shutter closing effect is started.

Also, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the final ceiling variation, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 1301 is the final ceiling variation. Even if the variable display of a certain first special pattern has not ended, the above shutter closing performance is ended and the night mode display performance is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol as the final ceiling change ends, the sub CPU 1301 ends the night mode display effect, and performs a series of display effects including a game explanation effect, a landing effect, and a count-up effect. After that, a right-handed instruction display effect is performed.

It should be noted that, after the end of the ceiling final fluctuation, at least until the B time-saving gaming state is ended, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230(C), effect control in the third irregular pattern will be described. The third irregular pattern is variable display of the second special symbol (long variation) before the ceiling final variation, variable display of the second special symbol for the final ceiling variation, and the first variable display after transition to the B time-saving game state. It is a pattern in the case of variable display of 2 special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 230 (C), the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation), the ceiling final fluctuation is a variable display of the second special symbol, and the first time after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state When the variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the above-described shutter closing effect, and at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time after the transition to the B time-saving game state, suddenly the night mode. Perform display effects. After the night mode display effect is performed, the sub CPU 1301 does not perform the first display effect associated with the variable display of the first special symbol until at least the end of the B time saving game state.

In addition, after performing the night mode display effect for a predetermined time, the sub CPU 1301 performs a series of display effects including a game explanation effect, a landing effect, and a count-up effect, and then performs a right-handed instruction display effect.

By the way, in the fifth pachinko game machine, as described above, in the probability variation mode, when the normal symbol losing length variation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the variation time is 600000 msec) is started, it shifts to the bonus mode. (See FIG. 129(a)). In the bonus mode, while the variation display of normal symbols (normal symbol variation) is being performed (over 600000 msec), most of the game balls hit to the right enter the small winning big winning opening 1151, and a large number of game balls are paid out.

Therefore, as in the fifth pachinko game machine, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, in the pachinko game machine that shifts from the normal game state or the C time saving game state to the B time saving game state, the transition to the B time saving game state Before and after the transition, the probability that the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the loss length variation may be different. In this case, before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to win the losing length variation as the normal pattern variation pattern, and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the winning length variation is not elected as the normal symbol variation pattern. It is preferable to make it possible (probability 0).

After the shift to the B time-saving game state, the frequency of being controlled to the small winning game state is increased, but after the shift to the B time-saving game state, by making it impossible to win the long fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, B After shifting to the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress the winning of game balls into the big winning hole for small wins, and consequently suppress the increase in the number of paid balls.

In addition, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, instead of making it impossible to win the long variation as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the losing length variation is reduced compared to before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state. You may do so. Even in such a case, after the shift to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the winning of the game ball into the big winning hole for the small win and thus suppressing the increase in the number of balls. .

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the passage gate 1126 is arranged in the right area 1107, but it may be arranged in the left area 1106. However, when the passage gate 1126 is arranged in the left side area 1106, it is preferable to lower the normal per pattern probability so as not to increase the operation frequency of the normal electric accessory 1146, for example.

FIG. 231 is a modification of the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. In addition, the time saving flag is off before the transition to the B time saving game state, and the time saving flag is on after the transition to the B time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the time saving flag is off, the main CPU 1201 determines the length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is on. By doing so, before the shift to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to expect the payout of game balls by winning the small winning big winning opening 1151 compared to after the shift to the B time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, after shifting to the B time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress the payout of game balls by the small winning big winning opening 1151 compared to before the shift to the B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 1201 may determine the loss length variation (normal symbol variation pattern command 90H05) with a higher probability than when the time saving flag is OFF. In this case, after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, compared to before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, game balls can be expected to be paid out by winning the small winning big winning opening 1151, so the B time-saving gaming state is more improved. It is possible to make the game state more interesting.

By the way, the main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbols by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74) before transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state. After the transition to is determined with reference to the special figure fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75). Therefore, the expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time is higher after transition than before transition to the B time-saving gaming state. That is, the average variable display time after transition to the B time saving gaming state is shorter than the average variable display time before transition to the B time saving gaming state. In addition, the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) is a big hit (jackpot probability), and the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol (normal symbol Hit probability) is the same before and after the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

In addition, the sub CPU 1301 is, for example, a 7-segment display, before the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state (for example, the variable display number of special symbols until transition to the B time-saving gaming state. Ceiling counter, etc.) is displayed, and after the transition to the B time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state (for example, the remaining number of time saving in the B time saving game state, etc.) may be displayed. In this case, when the contents of the display effect displayed on the display device 1007 change due to the transition of the game state, the sub CPU 1301 forcibly changes the display contents displayed on the 7-segment display 1071 to 0, for example. should be

[6. Sixth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described below. This sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-type 2-types mixture machine, similar to the third pachinko gaming machine, and the starting condition of the second special symbol is higher than the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variator in which the conditions are preferentially established.

Hereinafter, in describing the sixth pachinko game machine, the description of points common to the third pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of this sixth pachinko game machine are the same as those of the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, the time saving management process (see S131 in FIG. 31) is basically the process performed in the third pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game because it is common to the first pachinko game machine. It is common with the processing whose explanation is omitted in the machine. Therefore, in the description of this sixth pachinko game machine, among the time-saving management processes described with reference to FIGS. The explanation shall be omitted.

Also, the configuration and processing having the same functions as those of the third pachinko game machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the third pachinko game machine. However, the points different from the third pachinko game machine, that is, the configuration and processing to be newly explained in the explanation of the sixth pachinko game machine are given new reference numerals and step numbers.

[6-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 232, the game board unit 5010 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine will be mainly described in terms of differences from the third pachinko game machine.

FIG. 232 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 5010 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine. Among the configurations provided in the game board unit 5010 of the sixth pachinko game machine, the major difference from the configuration provided in the game board unit 2010 (see FIG. 87) of the third pachinko game machine is the first described below. Different point to fourth different point.

First, the first difference is that when a game ball enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 due to the actuation of the attacker 2152, the probability that this game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155 (hereinafter simply referred to as "V winning probability ”). Although this V winning probability is not particularly mentioned in the third pachinko game machine, it is a probability close to 100% (for example, 99.9%) in the sixth pachinko game machine. For example, by changing the opening time and closing time of the V shutter 2158, which is explained in the description of the third pachinko game machine as "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed", the V winning probability is increased. can be increased.

In this specification, the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 due to the actuation of the attacker 2152 passes through the V winning opening 2155 is referred to as "V winning".

The second difference is that the sixth pachinko game machine has a first start port 5120 instead of the first start port 2120 provided in the third pachinko game machine. When the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. The first starting port 5120 will be described in the later-described game ball sorting device 5400. FIG.

The third difference is that the sixth pachinko machine has passage gates 5125A and 5125B in addition to the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko machine. The passage gates 5125A and 5125B will be described in the later-described game ball sorting device 5400.

The fourth different point is that the third pachinko machine does not have a game ball distribution device 5400, but the sixth pachinko game machine has a game ball distribution device 5400.例文帳に追加This game ball sorting device 5400 includes the above-described first starting port 5120 and passage gates 5125A and 5125B.

[6-2. Game ball distribution device]
The game ball distribution device 5400 will be described below. The game ball distribution device 5400 has a first starting port 5120 and passage gates 5125A and 5125B as passage ports through which game balls can pass. It is a device that appropriately distributes to one of the passage openings (first starting opening 5120, passage gates 5125A and 5125B). The game ball distribution device 5400 is arranged substantially in the lower center of the game area 2105, and allows game balls flowing down the left side area 2106 to enter, but cannot or cannot enter game balls flowing down the right side area 2107. it is extremely difficult.

The first starting port 5120 has a different arrangement position than the first starting port 2120 provided in the third pachinko game machine. It is the same as the first starting port 2120 in that the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

The pass gate 5125A or the pass gate 5125B is similar to the above-described pass gate 2126 in that the normal symbol hit determination process is performed when the game ball passes through, but a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when the game ball passes through. It differs from the pass gate 2126 described above in that the The number of prize balls paid out based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B is, for example, about the same as or more than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the first start port 5120. A small number of prize balls. However, it is not essential that the prize balls are paid out based on the passage of the game balls to the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B.

In this embodiment, when comparing the number of first starting ports and the number of passing gates possessed by the game ball distribution device 5400, the number of passing gates is greater than the number of first starting ports (one of the first starting ports 5120). (two pass gates 5125A and 5125B) are larger, but not limited to this. For example, the number of first start ports and the number of pass gates may be the same, or the number of first start ports may be greater than the number of pass gates. Furthermore, in addition to the first starting opening and the passage gate, an out opening may be provided, and a return opening for returning the game ball to the game area 2105 may be provided. Although the details will be described later, during the high probability mode described later (during high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true)), the execution frequency of variable display of normal symbols is higher than the execution frequency of variable display of the first special symbol A higher frequency is preferred.

[6-2-1. Configuration of game ball sorting device]
The configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 233 to 240. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 235. FIG. FIG. 233 is an example of an external perspective view when the game ball distribution device 5400 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. Also, FIG. 234 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the game ball distribution device 5400 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. Furthermore, FIG. 235 is an example of an external perspective view when the game ball distribution device 5400 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine is viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rear direction.

The game ball distribution device 5400 is for distributing game balls A (see FIG. 238 described later) to a plurality of passages. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes a base member 5410 , a rotation distribution mechanism 5420 , a plate member 5430 , a crew member 5440 , a guide member 5450 , a pressing member 5460 and a sensor group 5470 .

The base member 5410 is a member for guiding the game ball A inside the game ball sorting device 5400 . The base member 5410 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear side surface. A right portion of the base member 5410 protrudes upward more than other portions. The base member 5410 includes an inlet 5411 , an introduction path 5412 , a left guide path 5413 , a right guide path 5414 , an installation space 5415 and an opening 5416 .

The inflow port 5411 is a hole (entrance) for allowing the game ball A to enter. The inlet 5411 is formed in the upper right end (projecting portion) of the base member 5410 . The inflow port 5411 is formed in a generally rectangular shape in plan view. The inflow port 5411 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter. The inlet 5411 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007 . The inflow port 5411 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from above.

Incidentally, the third pachinko game machine is configured such that a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is released directly above the first start opening 2120 . Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It was explained that it is designed to win (pass) at mouth 2120. Instead, in this sixth pachinko game machine, game balls entering the chance entrance 2119 are released directly above the inflow port 5411 . Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. The ball enters the game ball sorting device 5400 from the above.

As shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the introduction path 5412 is a path for guiding the game ball A entered into the inflow port 5411 downward. The introduction path 5412 is formed to extend downward from the inlet 5411 . Note that FIG. 236 is an example of an external perspective view of the base member 5410, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, the croon 5440, and the guide member 5450 when viewed from above the rear.

The left guide path 5413 is a path for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the lead-in path 5412 to the lower left. The left guide path 5413 is formed to extend leftward and downward from the lower end of the introduction path 5412 .

The right guide path 5414 is a path for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the lead-in path 5412 downward to the right. The right guide path 5414 is formed so as to extend downward and to the right from the lower end of the introduction path 5412, and the extended end is formed so as to extend downward. The right guide portion is formed from the upper and lower middle portions of the base member 5410 to the lower end portion. The right guide path 5414 includes a guide portion 5414a.

The guide portion 5414a is for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end portion of the right guide path 5414 backward. The guide portion 5414a is formed at the lower end portion of the right guide path 5414 and has a substantially arc shape in a side view.

The installation space 5415 is an internal space of the base member 5410 in which a clone 5440 and the like, which will be described later, are provided. The installation space 5415 is formed from the middle part of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the left end. The installation space 5415 communicates with the left guide path 5413 at its right end.

The opening 5416 is formed at the upper end of the front side surface of the base member 5410 and passes through the base member 5410 in the front-rear direction. The opening 5416 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The opening 5416 is formed from the middle part of the base member 5410 (to the left of the left guide path 5413) to the vicinity of the left end. The opening 5416 communicates with the upper end of the installation space 5415 . The opening 5416 is formed so that the width in the vertical direction is such that the game ball A can be entered, and the entire area of the opening 5416 is configured so that the game ball A can be entered from the front direction. The opening 5416 is closed by the glass door 4 (for example, see FIG. 1) when the player plays a game, and the game ball A cannot be entered.

The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414 . A rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is provided at the lower end of the introduction path 5412 . The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 includes a rotor 5421 , a pin 5422 , a metal plate 5423 and a magnet 5424 .

Rotating body 5421 is formed in a generally inverted T-shape when viewed from the rear, having a portion extending in the left-right direction and a portion extending in the upward direction. As shown in FIG. 236, the rotating body 5421 includes a base portion 5421a, a projecting portion 5421b, a left receiving portion 5421c and a right receiving portion 5421d.

The base portion 5421a is a portion of the rotating body 5421 extending in the left-right direction. The base portion 5421a is formed so that its width in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the introduction path 5412 .

The projecting portion 5421b is a portion of the rotating body 5421 that extends upward. The projecting portion 5421b is formed to extend from the left-right central portion of the base portion 5421a.

The left receiving part 5421c is a part that receives the game ball A at the left part of the rotating body 5421 . The left receiving portion 5421c is formed by the left upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the left side surface of the projecting portion 5421b.

The right receiving portion 5421d is a portion that receives the game ball A in the right portion of the rotating body 5421 . The right receiving portion 5421d is formed by the right portion of the upper surface of the base portion 5421a and the right side surface of the projecting portion 5421b.

The pin 5422 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The pin 5422 is inserted through the base 5421 a of the rotating body 5421 . The pin 5422 has its front end fixed to the base member 5410 and its rear end fixed to a plate member 5430 (see FIG. 235) described later. Thereby, the pin 5422 supports the rotating body 5421 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the base member 5410 .

The metal plate 5423 is a plate-shaped member fixed to the rear side surface of the base 5421 a of the rotating body 5421 . The metal plate 5423 is formed such that its left end and right end are larger than the other portions. The metal plate 5423 is made of a magnetic material such as iron that is attracted by magnetic force.

A magnet 5424 shown in FIG. 235 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The magnet 5424 is fixed to a pressing member 5460 to be described later and arranged behind the metal plate 5423 . The magnet 5424 attracts the left end of the metal plate 5423 to hold the rotor 5421 with the right receiving portion 5421d facing upward and the left receiving portion 5421c facing left as shown in FIG.

A notch (not shown) extending in the horizontal direction is formed in the lower surface of the rotating body 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . A protrusion (not shown) formed on the base member 5410 is arranged inside the notch. Rotation of the rotating body 5421 exceeding a predetermined angular range is restricted by the notch appropriately abutting on the protrusion. The predetermined angular range is a range from the state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to the state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward (the state shown in FIG. 240 described later). The rotating body 5421 can rotate counterclockwise in a rear view from a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward. In addition, the rotating body 5421 can be rotated clockwise in rear view from a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward to a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward.

In the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 configured in this way, the rotating body 5421 rotates in an appropriate direction, and the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 is guided to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. Allocate. It should be noted that the distribution operation of the game ball A by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, the plate member 5430 is for covering the right rear portion of the base member 5410. As shown in FIGS. The plate member 5430 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The plate member 5430 is formed such that its vertical width and horizontal width are wider than the vertical width and horizontal width of the base member 5410 . The plate member 5430 has a left through hole 5431 and a right through hole 5432 .

The left through-hole 5431 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the left portion of the plate-like member 5430 . The left through-hole 5431 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the installation space 5415 when viewed from the front.

The right through-hole 5432 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the lower right portion of the plate-like member 5430 . The right through-hole 5432 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The right through-hole 5432 is formed to have a size through which the game ball A can pass.

The plate member 5430 is arranged behind the base member 5410 and fixed to the base member 5410 with screws. Thereby, the left through-hole 5431 communicates with the installation space 5415 . The right through-hole 5432 communicates with the lower end of the right guide path 5414 .

As shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the croon 5440 is a dish-shaped member for distributing the game balls A. As shown in FIG. The croon 5440 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view, and is configured so that the game ball A can roll on its upper surface. Also, the upper side surface of the croon 5440 is formed in a shape that gradually slopes downward toward its center. That is, the upper surface of the croon 5440 is formed into a shape capable of guiding the game ball A to the central portion. Clune 5440 includes connection portion 5441 , first starting port 5120 , passage gates 5125 A and 5125 B and protrusion 5445 .

The connecting portion 5441 is a portion formed so as to extend rightward from the front end portion of the upper surface of the croon 5440 (a portion having a substantially circular shape in a plan view). The connecting portion 5441 is configured so that the game ball A can enter from the right end thereof. In addition, the connecting portion 5441 is configured to be able to guide the game ball A to the left.

The first starting port 5120 is a substantially circular hole in plan view formed in the front portion of the croon 5440 . The first starting port 5120 vertically penetrates the crew 5440 . The first starting port 5120 has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter.

The passage gate 5125A is a generally circular hole in plan view formed in the rear left portion of the crew 5440 (the rear left portion of the first starting port 5120). The passage gate 5125B is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the right rear portion of the cloon 5440 (to the right of the passage gate 5125A). The passage gates 5125A and 5125B are formed to have substantially the same shape as the first starting port 5120. As shown in FIG.

The projecting portion 5445 is a substantially triangular pyramid-shaped portion formed in the central portion of the croon 5440 . The protrusion 5445 is formed to protrude upward from the top surface of the crown 5440 . The protruding part 5445 appropriately flips the game ball A guided by the cloon 5440, thereby allowing the game ball A to enter the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B. As a result, the game ball A guided by the crew 5440 can be distributed to the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B.

The croon 5440 configured in this manner is fixed to the plate member 5430 with screws. A front end of the croon 5440 protrudes forward from the left through-hole 5431 and is disposed above the installation space 5415 . The connecting portion 5441 is connected at its right end to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413, and is configured to be able to guide the game ball A guided to the lower left end of the left guide path 5413 in the left direction. Also, the clown 5440 is positioned rearwardly and downwardly of the opening 5416 .

As shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the guide member 5450 is a member for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B to the holding member 5460 described later. The guide member 5450 is formed in such a shape that the upper surface of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member is appropriately recessed downward. The guide member 5450 is formed so that its width in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the croon 5440 . The guide member 5450 includes a projecting portion 5451 , a mounting portion 5452 , a front guide path 5453 and a rear guide path 5454 .

The protruding portion 5451 is a portion that protrudes rearward from the left rear end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450 . The projecting portion 5451 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape.

The mounting portion 5452 is a recess formed in the front end portion of the upper surface of the guide member 5450 . The mounting portion 5452 has a side wall and a bottom surface that are substantially U-shaped in plan view. A first starting switch 5121, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment portion 5452. As shown in FIG.

The front side guide path 5453 is a recess formed in the upper surface of the guide member 5450 and is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5120 to the pressing member 5460 . The front guide path 5453 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view such that it extends rightward and the extended end extends rearward. The front side guide path 5453 is arranged below the mounting portion 5452 at its front portion.

The rear side guide path 5454 is a recess formed in the rear portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450, and is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the passage gates 5125A and 5125B to the holding member 5460. The rear guide path 5454 extends rightward and is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view such that the extended end extends rearward. A rear guide path 5454 is formed between the projecting portion 5451 and the mounting portion 5452 . The rear guide path 5454 is formed so as not to communicate with the front guide path 5453 .

The guide member 5450 configured in this manner is fixed to the lower portion of the crown 5440 by screws. The guide member 5450 is fixed to the plate-like member 5430 via the crown 5440 and arranged below the installation space 5415 . The mounting portion 5452 and the front side guide path 5453 are arranged below the first starting port 5120 of the cloon 5440 and are connected to the left side guiding path 5413 of the base member 5410 via the first starting port 5120 . The rear guide path 5454 has its left end and right front end located below the passage gates 5125A and 5125B, and is connected to the left guide path 5413 via the passage gates 5125A and 5125B.

As shown in FIGS. 234, 235 and 237, the pressing member 5460 is a member for pressing the plate member 5430 from behind. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape capable of closing the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 from the rear. The pressing member 5460 is formed in such a shape that its front side surface is appropriately recessed in the rearward direction. The pressing member 5460 includes a mounting portion 5461 , a right side discharge path 5462 , a front side discharge path 5463 and a rear side discharge path 5464 . Note that FIG. 237 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the guide member 5450 and the pressing member 5460 when viewed obliquely from the upper left in the forward direction.

The mounting portion 5461 is a depression formed in the upper left portion of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460 . The mounting portion 5461 is formed in a generally arcuate shape in a plan view so as to follow the shape of the rear portion of the croon 5440 . The mounting portion 5461 is formed from the left end portion of the pressing member 5460 to the left and right middle portions. The mounting portion 5461 is recessed downward from the other portions from the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower surface to the left and right halfway portions.

The right discharge path 5462 is a passage for discharging the game ball A that has passed through the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400 . The right discharge passage 5462 extends rearward and is shaped such that the lower surface of the extended end is open to the outside. The right discharge path 5462 is formed at the right end of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460 .

The front discharge path 5463 is a recess formed in the lower part of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and the game ball A guided to the rear end of the front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450 is discharged from the game ball sorting device 5400. It is a passage for discharging to the outside. The front discharge path 5463 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The front discharge path 5463 is formed below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the right discharge path 5462 . The front discharge path 5463 is formed to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460 .

The rear discharge path 5464 is a recess formed in the lower left part of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460, and distributes game balls A guided to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450. It is a passage for discharging to the outside of the device 5400 . The rear discharge path 5464 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The rear discharge path 5464 is arranged below the mounting portion 5461 and to the left of the front discharge path 5463 . The rear discharge path 5464 is formed to extend downward from below the mounting portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460 .

The pressing member 5460 configured in this way is fixed to the rear side surface of the plate-like member 5430 by a screw, and closes the left through hole 5431 and the right through hole 5432 (the front side guide path 5453 and the rear side guide path 5454) from the rear direction. do. The rear portion of the croon 5440 is placed on the placement portion 5461 . In addition, the projecting portion 5451 of the guide member 5450 is placed on the portion of the placing portion 5461 that is recessed downward. The right discharge passage 5462 is connected at its front end to the right through hole 5432 . The front discharge path 5463 is connected at its upper end to the rear end of the front guide path 5453 . The rear discharge path 5464 is connected at its upper end to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454 .

The sensor group 5470 is for detecting that the gaming ball A has entered the right side guide path 5414, the front side guide path 5453 and the rear side guide path 5454. FIG. The sensor group 5470 includes various switches such as a first starting switch 5121 and a passage gate switch 5126B.

The first starting port switch 5121 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the front side guide path 5453 . That is, the game ball A that has passed through the first starting port 5121 is detected by the first starting port switch 5121 .

The switch 5126A is a sensor for detecting that the gaming ball A has entered the right guide path 5414. As shown in FIG. The switch 5126A is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The switch 5126A has a through hole 5127A.

The through hole 5127A is a substantially circular hole extending through the switch 5126A in the front-rear direction. The through hole 5127A has an inner diameter through which the game ball A can pass. A through hole 5127A is formed below the switch 5126A.

The switch 5126A configured in this manner is attached to the right front end of the pressing member 5460. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the through hole 5127A is arranged behind the right through hole 5432 of the plate member 5430 . The switch 5126A, for example, forms a magnetic field in the through-hole 5127A and is configured to be able to detect an eddy current generated when the game ball A passes through the magnetic field (through-hole 5127A). The switch 5126A detects that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 based on the detection result of the eddy current.

The passage gate switch 5126B is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the rear side guide path 5454 . The passage gate switch 5126B is configured in the same manner as the first starter switch 5121 except that it is attached below the mounting portion 5461 of the pressing member 5460 . The through hole 5127B is arranged below the rear discharge passage 5464 .

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the game ball sorting device 5400 configured in this manner has a first passage 5501 and a second passage 5502 as passages for sorting the game balls A flowing in from the inflow port 5411. Prepare.

The first passage 5501 is a passage for guiding game balls A distributed to the left guide path 5413 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . The first passage 5501 includes the left side guide path 5413 of the base member 5410, the connecting portion 5441 of the croon 5440, the first starting port 5120 and the passage gates 5125A and 5125B, the front side guide path 5453 and the rear side guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, and a front side discharge path 5463 and a rear side discharge path 5464 of the pressing member 5460 . The first passageway 5501 splits into two passageways at cloon 5440 . The first passage 5501 has a third passage 5503 and a fourth passage 5504 as branched passages.

The third passage 5503 is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the first starting port 5120 of the croon 5440 . The third passage 5503 is configured by the first starting port 5120 of the cloon 5440 , the front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450 and the front discharge path 5463 of the pressing member 5460 .

The fourth passage 5504 is a passage for guiding the game ball A entering the passage gates 5125A and 5125B of the croon 5440 . The fourth passage 5504 is constituted by the passage gates 5125A and 5125B of the cloon 5440, the rear side guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, and the rear side discharge path 5464 of the pressing member 5460.

In this embodiment, the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 passes through the first start port 5120 with a probability of about one-third, and passes through the first start port 5120 with a probability of about two-thirds It is configured to pass through pass gate 5125A or pass gate 5125B with probability.

The second path 5502 is a path for guiding game balls A distributed to the right guide path 5414 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . The second passage 5502 is constituted by a right guide path 5414 of the base member 5410 , a right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 235) of the plate member 5430 and a right discharge path 5462 of the pressing member 5460 .

Next, the operation mode of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be described. In the following, as shown in FIG. 238, it is assumed that the game ball A is entered from the inlet 5411 with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 facing upward. Note that FIG. 238 is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are distributed to the second path.

First, the game ball A entering the inflow port 5411 is guided downward by the introduction path 5412 and collides with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotor 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 . As a result, the rotor 5421 and the metal plate 5423 rotate counterclockwise in rear view. By this rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower right direction and distributes it to the second path 5502 (right guide path 5414). The right end of the metal plate 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 235) when it is rotated until the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward. As a result, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the left receiving portion 5421c facing upward (see FIG. 240 described later).

The game ball A distributed to the second passage 5502 (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A2") is guided downward along the right guide path 5414 and then guided backward by the guide portion 5414a. The game ball A2 passes through the right through-hole 5432 (see FIG. 234) of the plate member 5430 in the backward direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 239, the game ball A2 is guided to the front end of the right discharge path 5462 of the pressing member 5460. As shown in FIG. At this time, the game ball A2 passes backward through the through hole 5127A of the switch 5126A. Thereby, the switch 5126A detects that the game ball A2 has been distributed to the second path 5502 (right guide path 5414). The game ball A2 that has passed through the through hole 5127A is guided rearward through the right discharge path 5462 and discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. FIG. 239 is an example of a diagram showing the flow of game balls distributed to the second, third and fourth passages.

Thus, in the second passage 5502, the right guide path 5414, the right through hole 5432, and the right discharge path 5462 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. Also, the second passage 5502 is arranged downstream of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, and has a switch 5126A in the middle thereof.

Also, as shown in FIG. 240, when the game ball A is entered into the inlet 5411 of the base member 5410 with the left receiving portion 5421c facing upward, the game ball A moves to the left side of the rotating body 5421. It collides with the receiving portion 5421c. As a result, the rotor 5421 and the metal plate 5423 rotate clockwise when viewed from the back. By this rotation, the rotating body 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower left direction and distributes it to the first passage 5501 (left guide path 5413). The left end of the metal plate 5423 is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 235) when it is rotated until the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward. As a result, the rotor 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the right receiving portion 5421d facing upward (see FIG. 238). It should be noted that FIG. 240 is an example of a diagram showing a state in which game balls are distributed to the first path.

The game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 is guided in the lower left direction through the left guide path 5413, and then guided to the vicinity of the first starting port 5120 through the connecting portion 5441 of the croon 5440. The game ball A is guided along the upper side surface of the croon 5440 in the clockwise direction in plan view, and is gradually guided to the central portion of the croon 5440 . At this time, the projecting portion 5445 of the croon 5440 flips the game ball A appropriately. As a result, the crew 5440 makes the game ball A enter either the first starting port 5120 or the passage gates 5125A and 5125B. In this way, the clown 5440 distributes the game balls A to the third path 5503 or the fourth path 5504 .

Thus, the first passage 5501 includes, in order from the upstream side, the left guide passage 5413, the connection portion 5441, the upper surface of the croon 5440 (a substantially circular portion in plan view), the third passage 5503, and the fourth passage. A passageway 5504 is provided. The opening 5416 is formed so as to open to the connecting portion 5441 and the top surface of the croon 5440 . That is, the opening 5416 is provided at the same position as the upper surfaces of the connecting portion 5441 and the cloon 5440 (downstream of the left guide path 5413 and upstream of the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504). Also, the first passage 5501 is arranged downstream of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 .

As shown in FIGS. 239 and 240, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as "game ball A3") distributed to the third passage 5503 (entered the first start port 5120) is the first start It passes downward through the through hole 5121A (see FIGS. 234, 235, 236, and 238) of the mouth switch 5121 . Thereby, the first starting port switch 5121 detects that the game ball A3 has been distributed to the third path 5503 (front guide path 5453). The game ball A3 that has passed through the through hole 5121A is guided to the left front end of the front guide path 5453. As shown in FIG. Then, the game ball A3 is guided to the right through the front guide path 5453 and then to the rear, and guided to the upper end of the front discharge path 5463 . The game ball A3 is guided downward through the front side discharge path 5463 and discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. - 特許庁

Thus, in the third passage 5503, the first starting port 5120, the front guide path 5453, and the front discharge path 5463 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. Also, the third passage 5503 is provided with a first starting port switch 5121 in the middle thereof.

On the other hand, the game ball A distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (entered the passage gates 5125A and 5125B) (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A4”) is guided to the left front end of the rear side guide path 5454. be done. Then, the game ball A4 is guided rightward through the rear guide path 5454, then guided backward, and is guided to the upper end portion of the rear discharge path 5464. - 特許庁The game ball A4 is guided downward through the rear side discharge path 5464 and discharged to the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400. - 特許庁At this time, the game ball A4 passes downward through the through hole 5127B of the passage gate switch 5126B. As a result, the passage gate switch 5126B detects that the game ball A4 has been distributed to the fourth path 5504 (rear guide path 5454).

Thus, passage gates 5125A and 5125B, a rear guide path 5454, and a rear discharge path 5464 are arranged in the fourth passage 5504 in this order from the upstream side. A passage gate switch 5126B is provided in the middle of the fourth passage 5504 . That is, the game ball A4 that has passed through the passage gates 5125A and 5125B is detected by the passage gate switch 5126B.

As described above, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game balls A to the first path 5501 or the second path 5502 in order (with a probability of 1/2). In addition, the crew 5440 distributes the game ball A distributed to the first passage 5501 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/3, and distributes it to the fourth passage 5504 with a probability of 2/3. . That is, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the crew 5440 distribute the game ball A entered into the inflow port 5411 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/6, and the fourth with a probability of 2/6. Allotted to passage 5504 .

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment is provided with two means for distributing the game balls A (including the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the crew 5440), but is not limited to this. , at least one means for allocating game balls A (for example, Krun 5440) may be provided.

Particularly, in this embodiment, the game ball A entering the game ball sorting device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 is transferred to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 by the rotation sorting mechanism 5420 in half. distributed by probability. The game ball A distributed to the first path 5501 passes through the first starting port 5120 with a probability of approximately one-third, and passes through the passage gates 5125A and 5125B with a probability of approximately two-thirds. That is, of the game balls A entering the game ball sorting device 5400 from the inlet 5411, the number of the game balls A passing through the first starting hole 5120 is approximately one-sixth.

On the other hand, in the third pachinko game machine, the first starting port 2120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the inlet 5411 described above. Therefore, simply thinking, the probability that the game ball A passes through the first start port 5120 in the sixth pachinko game machine is approximately the probability that the game ball passes through the first start port 2120 in the third pachinko game machine. becomes one-sixth.

Therefore, in the sixth pachinko game machine, all or almost all of the game balls A entering the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 go to the first passage 5501 without providing the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. By doing so, it is preferable to increase the probability that the game ball A passes through the first starting port 5120 . However, it is not essential to not provide a distribution mechanism such as the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. For example, a distribution mechanism that distributes more game balls to the first passage 5501 than to the second passage 5502 is provided. Therefore, more game balls A entering the game ball sorting device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 may be directed to the first passage 5501 .

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to making more of the game balls A entering the game ball distribution device 5400 from the inflow port 5411 go to the first passage 5501, the left area 2106 (see FIG. 232) A game ball shot toward it is configured to easily enter the inflow port 5411, for example, due to the gauge configuration, compared to the ease of passing through the first start port 2120 in the third pachinko game machine. preferable.

In the game ball distribution device 5400, the means for distributing the game balls A (the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the croon 5440) do not necessarily have to have different structures, and even if the means for distributing the game balls A have the same structure. good. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 5400 may include two croons 5440 or two rotary distribution mechanisms 5420 .

Also, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game ball A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages), but is not limited to this, and three or more passages. The game ball A may be distributed to the .

In addition, the cloon 5440 distributes the game ball A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504 (two passages), but is not limited to this, and the game ball is distributed to three or more passages. A may be distributed.

In addition, the base member 5410 may have an opening into which the game ball A can enter at the lower right portion of the front side surface (the position overlapping the right side guide path 5414 when viewed from the front). With this configuration, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A can be directly entered into the second passage 5502 from the opening. As a result, the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 can be efficiently inspected. In this case, the opening 5416 and the opening formed in the lower right portion of the front side surface of the base member 5410 function as openings that allow the flow to flow into the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 individually. do. In addition, the switch 5126A functions as a second detecting means capable of detecting the game ball A distributed to the second passage 5502.

Also, the configurations of the switch 5126A, the first start switch 5121 and the passage gate switch 5126B are not limited to this embodiment, and the game ball A can be detected by appropriate means.

As another embodiment of the game ball distribution device 5400, unlike the game ball distribution device 5400 described above, the positions of the first starting port 5120 and the passage gates 5125A and 5125B may be reversed. By providing the inflow port of the first starting port 5120 on the far side of the cloon 5440, it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts through the opening 5416. Furthermore, a passage provided with sensors (more specifically, a passage that guides the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) is provided at the back of the crown 5440 (that is, placed at a position far from the opening 5416), and the sensor A passage (passage for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) where no class is provided may be arranged at a position close to the opening 5416 . For example, the inflow port on the back side (passage gate 5125A) is provided with a first start port switch, another inflow port on the back side (same passage gate 5125A) is provided with an out port switch, and the inflow port on the front side (passage gate 5125A) Similarly, no sensor should be provided at the first starting port 5120). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent tampering with the sensor even when the opening 5416 is provided.

[6-3. electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 241 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine. The control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine differs greatly from the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine in the following two points.

The first point is that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine was equipped with a first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88) for detecting passage (winning) of a game ball to the first starting port 2120. However, in the control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine, instead of this, a first starter switch 5121 for detecting passage (winning) of a game ball to the first starter 5120 is provided.

Next, the second point is that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine was provided with a passage gate switch 2127 (see FIG. 88) for detecting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126, but the sixth In addition to this, the control circuit of the pachinko game machine is provided with a passage gate switch 5126B for detecting the passage of game balls to the passage gates 5125A and 5126B. In this embodiment, the game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 5126B regardless of whether it passes through the pass gate 5125A or the pass gate 5125B. A passing gate switch for detection and a passing gate switch for detecting game balls that have passed through the passing gate 5125B may be provided separately.

[6-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 242 to 250, basic specifications of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Incidentally, the sixth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, in the 6th pachinko game machine, probability variation control is not performed like the 3rd pachinko game machine. Further, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 performs time-saving control as a game state (a game state that is not a jackpot game state) in which variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed. The normal game state that is not executed, the A time-saving game state that can be executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state that can be executed on the condition that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process. It is configured to be controllable to any game state out of the C time-saving game state that can be executed on the condition that it is a "time-saving hit".

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state and C time-saving game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the A time-saving game state and B time-saving game state.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 2201 can be controlled to any one of the normal game state, the reduced working hours game state A, the reduced working hours game state B, and the reduced working hours game state C. It is not essential to be controllable, for example, it may be controllable to any game state among the normal game state, the A time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state can be overlapped and executed. When the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state are configured to be executed repeatedly, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving gaming state is the first time-saving performance that is the same as the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, and the C time-saving gaming state. A first method of providing a second time-saving performance different from the time-saving performance may be adopted. In this first method, when the C time-saving gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state are overlapped (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value before the end of the C time-saving gaming state), the first time-saving performance is activated, and when the B time-saving game state is executed without overlapping with the C time-saving game state (for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game state), the second time-saving performance is activated.

In addition, when the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state are configured to be executed repeatedly, as a method different from the above-described first method, the time saving performance of the B time saving game state is changed to that of the C time saving game state. You may employ|adopt the 2nd method which makes only the same one time-saving performance as time-saving performance. In this second method, the one time saving performance is activated both when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game state.

It should be noted that, when configured so that the C time-saving gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state can be executed repeatedly, even if either the first method or the second method is adopted, before the end of the C time-saving gaming state If the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the number of times of time saving will be added without changing the time saving performance.

[6-4-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 242 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 242, when the game ball wins (passes) through the first starting port 5120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol hit determination random number value. Based on this, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing". Also, when the game ball wins (passes) through the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol hit determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit", "accessory release hit" or "losing".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed.

In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning of the first start port 5120 include "time saving hit", "big hit ” Or the range (width) of the random number value for the determination of the first special symbol determined to be “losing”, and the corresponding determination value data (“time saving determination value data”, “jackpot determination value data”, “loss determination value data"). In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, "time saving hit", "big hit", "accessory open hit" or "losing" The range (width) of the random number value for the determination of the second special symbol to be determined, and the corresponding determination value data ("time reduction hit determination value data", "big hit determination value data", "accessory open per determination value data" , “loss judgment value data”).

Incidentally, if the sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the time saving winning probability and the accessory opening winning probability are common to all settings.

In addition, as in the third pachinko machine, conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player (for example, the probability of a big hit, the probability of opening a role, the frequency of opening the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152) ), opening time, number of continuous time reduction, etc.), so that the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state is higher in the high setting than in the low setting. may

[6-4-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 243 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 243, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the symbol random number of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. In either case, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is either 0 to 6 or 8 to 99 (that is, a symbol random number value other than 7), the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and selects the symbol. Select "zA2" as the designated command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 7, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z3" is selected as the command, and "zA3" is selected as the design designation command.

Also, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" is selected as the symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the winning determination value data for opening the role product is obtained as a result of the winning determination process of the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 , selects "z5" as the selection symbol command, and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z6" is selected as the command, and "zA6" is selected as the design designation command.

Furthermore, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA7" is selected as the design designation command.

In addition, as in the first pachinko game machine, third pachinko game machine, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "first pachinko game machine, etc."), the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table. A special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to (see FIG. 12(A)) is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 241) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Further, in the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the winning prize or the display mode of losing is derived based on the result of the special symbol win determination processing. be.

[6-4-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 244 is an example of a hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is used when determining the number of rounds, the game state of the transition destination, and the time saving end condition according to the winning type (selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol). Referenced. The transition destination game state indicates a game state to transition after the end of the jackpot game state, or a game state to transition after the display mode of the time saving win is derived as a result of the hit determination process in the normal game state. In addition, "A" shown in the column of the game state of the transition destination in FIG. It shows that it moves to the time saving game state.

In addition, "special 1" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in Fig. 244 indicates the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol as one of the time saving end conditions. Similarly, "Special 2" indicates the number of variable display times of the second special symbol as one of the time saving end conditions. In addition, "general electricity" indicates the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) based on the result of the normal symbol hit determination process as one of the time saving end conditions. Furthermore, if the conditions defined by the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol are included in the time-saving end conditions, the "special 1" column of the time-saving end conditions in FIG. and "Special 2" are indicated by "Special 1 + Special 2". For example, if the time saving end condition includes the condition of "the sum of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol = 12 times", the column of "special 1" and the column of "special 2" and "Toku 1+Toku 2=12". Then, if any one of the plurality of time-saving end conditions shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 244 is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state ends. It should be noted that the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened based on the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is defined as one time when the normal symbol hit determination process is performed once. Therefore, for example, in a mode in which the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened twice based on the result of one normal symbol per determination process (for example, in the mode of "first open ⇒ closed ⇒ second open ⇒ closed") Even if there is, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessary product 2146 based on the result of the hit determination process of one normal symbol is one time.

If the condition of "Special 1 + Special 2 = 12" is included in the time saving end condition, the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol (1 time or more) and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol (1 time or more) is 12 times, the number of variable display times of the first special symbol is 12 times and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 0 times, and the number of variable display times of the first special symbol is 0 times and the variable display of the second special symbol The number of times is 12, and the time saving end condition is satisfied.

Although not shown in FIG. 244, the operation of the condition device is also one of the time-saving end conditions regardless of the type of hit (that is, regardless of the "selected symbol command").

Next, the number of rounds determined according to the type of hit, the game state of the transition destination, and the time saving end condition will be described.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the normal game state, when the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z4" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving win"), the main CPU 2201 For example, the game state of the transition destination is determined to be the C time-saving game state, and the time-saving end condition (the end condition of the C time-saving game state) is set to 20 times of the variable display of the first special symbol and 1 of the variable display of the second special symbol. 2146 (see FIG. 232) is determined to be 12 times.

However, in the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z4" (the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit"). Even if there is, the main CPU 2201 ignores the result of the "time saving win" and does not execute the C time saving game state over any one of the time saving game states. In this case, the main CPU 2201 derives the display mode of losing to the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164 (see FIG. 232) even if the result of the special symbol win determination processing is "time saving win" (display for time saving win). (do not derive the mode), or after deriving the display mode of the time saving hit to the special symbol display parts 2163 and 2164, the result of "time saving hit" may be ignored.

In addition, the method for preventing the C time-saving game state from being executed in addition to the time-saving game state is not limited to the above method. "Hit" (time saving hit determination value data) may be included, and "time saving hit" may not be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process executed in the time saving game state.

In the normal game state, when the selected symbol command is "z1" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "3R jackpot"), the main CPU 2201 determines, for example, the number of rounds to be 3 rounds, and shifts. The previous game state is determined to be the A time-saving game state, and the time-saving end conditions are determined to be special 1 = 5, special 2 = 1, and general electricity = 10000. The condition of Special 1 = 5 is defined so as not to be satisfied before the condition of Special 2 = 1 as long as the player hits to the right in the A reduced working hours game state after the end of the jackpot game state. be. That is, even if the holding number of the start information of the first special symbol at the time of finishing the jackpot game state is four, which is the upper limit, the condition of special 2=1 is established first by hitting to the right. It is made to be heard. Therefore, the condition of special 1=5 may be a number (5 or more in the present embodiment) larger than the upper limit of holding of the starting information of the first special symbol. Moreover, the condition of general electric = 10000 should just be the conditions which are theoretically almost impossible to be materialized.

In the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), if the selected symbol command is "z1" (if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "3R big hit"), The main CPU 2201, for example, determines the number of rounds to be 3 rounds, determines the game state to be shifted to the A short-time gaming state, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be Special 1+Special 2=12, Normal Electric=10000.

Regardless of whether it is a normal game state or a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), if the selected symbol command is “z2” or “z6” (special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is “10R jackpot”), the main CPU 2201, for example, determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines the game state to be shifted to the A time-saving game state, and sets the time-saving end condition to 1 + special 2 = 12, general electricity = 10000.

In addition, regardless of whether it is a normal game state or a time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), the selected symbol command is "z5" (as a result of the special symbol hit determination process is “per item release”) and wins V, the main CPU 2201, for example, determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines the game state to be shifted to the A time saving game state, and sets the time saving end condition to , Toku 1 + Toku 2 = 12, and general electricity = 10000. However, even if the selected symbol command is "z5", if the V prize is not won, the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state. No need. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z5" and V wins, one operation of the V attacker 2152 executed based on the winning prize is regarded as one round, so it is executed after V wins. The number of rounds actually executed in the jackpot game state is 9 rounds.

In addition, according to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 244), in any of the normal game state and the time saving game state (A time saving game state, B time saving game state, C time saving game state), the special symbol hit determination process As one of the time-saving end conditions when the result is a big hit or a hit for opening the accessory, the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) based on the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is set. is not limited to For example, in all the A time-saving gaming state or a specific A time-saving gaming state, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit or the opening of the accessory, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is It is possible to include only the number of times of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) without including the number of times of opening the normal electric accessory 2146 based on.

[6-4-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 245 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 246 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine. 245 and 246, the column of "remarks" is shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 245 and 246 is a table referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process (see S1037 in FIG. 78) described in the first pachinko gaming machine, for example.

In the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 245, for example.

On the other hand, in the A time-saving game state or B time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start shown in FIG. 246, for example. be done.

In this sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first to fifth pachinko game machines, a look-ahead flag is set to execute a look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, in this embodiment, when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 246), the look-ahead flag is not set, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in both the normal game state and the C time-saving game state. Not limited. For example, the main ROM 2202 of the main CPU 2201 stores a special symbol variation pattern table A for low start used in the normal game state and a special symbol variation pattern table B for low start used in the time saving game state C. It may be configured as

[6-4-4. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 247 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As can be seen by referring to FIG. 247, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 is in any of the normal game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. When the normal symbol hit determination process is performed, it is determined as "normal symbol hit" with a probability of 100%, and the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". That is, the probability of being judged as "losing", that is, the judgment value data is never decided as "losing judgment value data". However, it is not limited to this, and the winning probability of "per normal symbol" can be set as appropriate.

[6-4-5. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 248 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the game state, the determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gates 2126, 5125A, 5125B (see FIG. 232). , is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 248, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of normal symbol hit determination processing, the main CPU 2201 determines that the normal symbol symbol random number value is 0. If it is one of 2, 4-6, 8-65535 (that is, a symbol random number other than 3 and 7), select "fz0" as the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol is 3 Or if it is 7, "fz1" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 determines that the normal symbol symbol random number value is If it is any one of 0 to 5955, select "fz0" as the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit, and if the symbol random number of the normal symbol is any of 5956 to 65535, select "fz2" as the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit. ”.

In the B time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state (indicated as "Normal ⇒ B time-saving game state" in FIG. 248) that was shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state, and the C time-saving game state that the ceiling was reached With the B time-saving gaming state (shown as “C ⇒ B time-saving gaming state” in FIG. 248), the time-saving performance, that is, the opening of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in FIG. 249 described later Different patterns.

Specifically, in the B time-saving game state that has been shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state, as in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, The main CPU 2201 selects "fz0" as a selection symbol command at the time of winning a normal symbol if the random symbol value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 5955, and if the random symbol value of the normal symbol is any of 5956 to 65535. For example, "fz2" is selected as a selection symbol command when a normal symbol is hit.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving gaming state, which is shifted due to reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hitting determination processing, the main CPU 2201 normally determines the pattern randomness of the symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 0 to 5955, "fz0" is selected as the selected pattern command at the time of normal design, and if the random number value of the normal design is any of 5956 to 65535, it is used as the selected pattern command at the time of normal design. Select "fz1".

In addition, in the C time-saving game state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 determines that the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is If it is any of 0 to 64170, "fz0" is selected as the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol per. ”.

It should be noted that, in the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, which were shifted by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance, that is, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in FIG. 249 described later are the same.

In this way, in the B time-saving game state, a plurality of time-saving performances are provided, and the B time-saving game state that is shifted by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state and the B time-saving game that is transferred by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state Different time-saving performance is activated depending on the state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the same time-saving performance is activated without distinguishing between the B time-saving game state that transitioned by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state and the B time-saving game state that shifted by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state. may

[6-4-6. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 249 is an example of a normal symbol per type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the sixth pachinko game machine. The normal per symbol type determination table determines the release pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232), in response to the normal per symbol select symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the normal symbol. When determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric auditors 146 executed in the normal symbol game determination process of S295 of FIG. 43 described in the first pachinko game machine) .

The "interval before opening" shown in the column of the normal electric accessory release pattern in FIG. ) corresponds to the wait time until the first opening is executed. The "first opening time" is, for example, the first opening time of the normal electric accessory 2146 that is executed after the pre-opening interval time has elapsed (that is, the time from when the normal electric accessory 2146 starts operating until it is closed). time) corresponds to The “interval during opening” corresponds to, for example, the wait time after the first opening time of the normal electric accessory 2146 has elapsed until the second opening of the normal electric accessory 2146 is executed. "Second opening time" corresponds to, for example, the second opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 which is executed after the interval time during opening has elapsed.

In this embodiment, the number of times the normal electric accessary 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened is only once when the selected symbol command is "fz0" or "fz2" at the time of normal symbol winning. When the selected symbol command is "fz1", it is twice.

In this specification, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) when the selected symbol command is "fz0" at normal per symbol is called "normal short circuit open", and the selected symbol command at normal per symbol is The operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 in the cases of "fz1" and "fz2" is called "normal electric long open". In addition, when the normal electric accessary 2146 operates in "normal long open" (when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1" and "fz2"), the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal electric When the normal electric accessory 2146 operates in the "normal short open" mode (when the selected symbol command is "fz0" at normal symbol hit), the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is called "normal It is called "Electrical short circuit opening".

It should be noted that when the player is hitting to the right, even if the normal electric accessory 2146 is activated by the "normal electric short circuit open", the game ball flowing down the right area 2107 does not reach the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). The expected value of passing (winning a prize) is extremely low.

In addition, the number of openings of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) shown in the column of "universal electric" which is one of the time saving termination conditions shown in FIG. It is the sum of the number of times of "universal electric long open", but it is not limited to this. In addition, as described above, the number of times the normal electric accessary product 2146 is opened is set to 1 based on the result of the hit determination process for one normal symbol. For example, as shown in the normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 249), when the normal per symbol selection symbol command is "fz1", the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened twice. Even so, the number of openings of the normal electric accessary product 2146 based on the result of one normal symbol hit determination process is one.

By the way, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 249, the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 differs between when the normal winning symbol command is "fz1" and "fz2". In particular, the time of the "interval before opening" differs greatly between the two.

As described above, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command "fz1" can be selected in the normal game state or the C short gaming state in which left-handed hitting is a regular game mode, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command "fz2". can be selected in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. When hitting to the left, the game ball hit to the right reaches the normal electric accessory 2146 even if the result of the hit determination processing of the normal symbol is led to the normal symbol display part 2161 and immediately changed to the hitting to the right. It takes time to Therefore, considering this time, the time of "before opening interval" when the selected symbol command is "fz1" at normal per symbol is "before opening" when the selected symbol command at normal per symbol is "fz2" It's longer than the "interval" time.

However, for example, before the result of the normal design hit determination process is normally derived to the design display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241) (ie during variable display of the normal design), a command indicating the result of the normal design hit determination process is executed under the control of the sub CPU 2301 that receives from the main CPU 2201, the time of the "interval before opening" when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", It is not necessary to make it longer than the time of the "interval before opening" when the selected symbol command is "fz2" at the time of the normal winning symbol.

It should be noted that the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) when the selected symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is "fz1" is that approximately four (five if the timing is right) game balls are the second start. It is an operation mode to the extent that it can pass through the mouth 2140 (see FIG. 232) (win a prize). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of "universal electric long open per" (when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol per is "fz1"), "universal electric long open" per normal electric accessory 2146 The number of winning prizes to the second starting port 2140 that can be expected in , is, for example, approximately four. However, it is not limited to this.

On the other hand, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz2" is that approximately two (three if the timing is right) game balls are the second start. It is an operation mode to the extent that it can pass through the mouth 2140 (winning a prize). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of "universal electric long open per" (when the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol per is "fz2"), "universal electric long open" per normal electric accessory 2146 The number of winning prizes to the second starting port 2140 that can be expected in , is, for example, approximately two. However, it is not limited to this.

[6-4-7. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 250 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The main CPU 2201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and the normal symbol effect selection random value extracted based on the game state and the passage of the game ball through the passage gates 2126, 5125A, and 5125B (see FIG. 232). Based on, the normal pattern variation pattern is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, even if the normal symbol effect selection random number is any of 0 to 99, the normal symbol variation pattern determined is the same. Based on that, the normal pattern variation pattern is determined.

As shown in FIG. 250, in the normal game state, even if the random number for normal symbol effect selection is any of 0 to 99, the normal symbol variation pattern is "01H" and the normal symbol variable display time is, for example, 10000 msec. is determined by In addition, in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, even if the random number value for normal design production selection is any of 0 to 99, the normal design variation pattern is "02H", and the normal design variable display time is, for example, 1000 msec. is determined by Furthermore, in the C time saving game state, even if the normal symbol effect selection random number is any of 0 to 99, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined to be "03H" and the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 8000 msec.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same normal pattern variation pattern is used in the B time-saving game state that transitioned by reaching the ceiling in the normal game state and the B time-saving game state that transitioned by reaching the ceiling in the C time-saving game state. Although it is determined, it is not limited to this, and it may be determined to be a variation pattern of different normal symbols.

[6-4-8. Summary of basic specifications]
Based on the above description, the variable display time of the normal symbols in the A reduced working hours game state and the B reduced working hours game state (for example, 1000 mec) is the variable display time of the normal symbols in the normal gaming state or the C reduced working hours game state (for example, 10000 msec, 8000 msec). Furthermore, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 248, the winning probability (for example, Approximately 1/1.1) is relatively high compared to the winning probability of "general electric long open hit" (selected symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit) in the normal game state or C time saving game state.

Thus, in the A reduced working hours game state and the B reduced working hours game state, the "general electric long open" of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is high frequency (in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248, for example 1. It is a game state that is executed with a probability of 1/1. In this case, in the "general electric long open", about two prizes can be expected at the second start port 2140 for the opening of the normal electric accessary product 2146 based on the result of the hit determination processing of one normal symbol. Therefore, as long as the game is played with the right hand, it is assumed that the number of pending start information of the second special symbol will not be interrupted. That is, the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state are game states in which the game is performed in anticipation of the derivation of the "jackpot" or the "accessory release hit" as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol. be. In addition, in the time-saving game state and B time-saving game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls (or prize data) for the number of shot balls per unit time is higher than in the normal game state and C time-saving game state, and the player's balls decrease rate is slow.

On the other hand, in the C time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) “normal electric long open” is medium frequency (in this embodiment, for example, the probability of 1/48 as shown in FIG. 248) It is a game state executed in . In this case, in the "general electric long open", about four prizes can be expected at the second starting port 2140 for the opening of the normal electric accessary product 2146 based on the result of the hit determination processing of one normal symbol. That is, the C time-saving gaming state becomes "general electric long open per hit" until the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state is satisfied, and furthermore, when the second special symbol game is won and V This is a game state in which a game is played in anticipation of winning a prize.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 244, the conditions for ending the time-saving game state C include “20 variable display times of the first special symbol” and “the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened. 12 times” is included. Therefore, in the C time-saving game state, in which the game is performed in anticipation of becoming a "general electric long open hit" until the end condition of the C time-saving game state is satisfied, rather than the variable display of the first special symbol, It is preferable that variable display of normal symbols is promoted. Therefore, in the C time-saving game state, it is preferable to set the variable display time of the normal symbols to be the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbols, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. In this embodiment, in the C time saving game state, the variable display time of the first special symbol is 8000 msec or more (see FIG. 245), and the variable display time of the normal symbol is 8000 msec (see FIG. 250).

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, instead of or in addition to making the variable display time of normal symbols the same as or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbols, for example, pass gates 5125A, 5125B ( 232) is higher than the winning rate to the first starting port 5120 (see FIG. 232), the variable display of normal symbols is promoted more than the variable display of the first special symbols. good too. In this embodiment, the number of passing gates 5125A and 5125B through which a game ball can pass when hitting left is greater than the number of first starting ports 5120 through which a game ball can win when hitting left.

Furthermore, in the C time saving game state, it is not essential to make the variable display time of the normal symbols always equal to or shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbols. For example, even if the average value of the variable display time of the normal symbols is shorter than the average value of the variable display time of the first special symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is promoted more than the variable display of the first special symbols. It is possible.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the "general electric long open" of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is executed, approximately four prizes can be expected at the second start port 2140 per operation. However, this is a game state in which it is almost impossible to expect that the "universal electric long open hit" will occur (in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248, the game is executed only with a probability of, for example, 1/32768). That is, the normal game state is a game state in which a game is played with the expectation that a "big hit" or "time saving hit" will be derived as a result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In addition, in any of the normal game state, the reduced working hours game state A, the reduced working hours game state B, and the reduced working hours game state C, if it is not "general electric long open hit", the winning to the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232) is almost Unexpected "Public/Public short-circuit hit".

In addition, the end conditions for each of the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state are as described above. However, in this embodiment, in the C time-saving gaming state, establishment of a specific condition is also included in the time-saving end condition. This specific condition is, for example, that the normal symbol display unit 2161 displays a display mode indicating that the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "fz1" (that is, "normal long open hit") at normal symbol hit. It is set to hold when it is derived. In the present embodiment, the time saving end condition of the C time saving game state is established when winning even once in the C time saving game state "normal electric long open per", but not limited to this, for example, "normal electric The time saving end condition of the C time saving game state may be established when the "long open win" is won for a prescribed number of times. In addition, instead of establishing the time-saving end condition based on the "universal electric long open hit", based on the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) based on the "universal electric long open hit" , the time saving end condition of the C time saving game state may be satisfied. In addition, it is not essential to set the "Public electric long open hit" as a time saving termination condition for the C time saving game state, and even if the "Public electric long open hit" is won, the C time saving game state is not terminated. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the establishment of the above-mentioned specific condition is the end condition of the C time saving game state, but instead of or in addition to the end condition of the C time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state may be

[6-5. Main control processing]
In the following, among the time-saving management processes described in the first pachinko game machine and the like, different processes will be mainly described.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine or the like, when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving counter is subtracted, but this sixth pachinko game In the machine, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the first time saving counter is subtracted, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the second time saving counter is subtracted. When the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol reaches a specified value as the termination condition of the time-saving game state, and the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second This is to make it possible to cope with both the case where the end condition of the time-saving game state is that one of the variable display times of the special symbols has reached a specified value. However, in the first pachinko game machine or the like, instead of setting the sum of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol to a prescribed value as the termination condition of the time-saving gaming state. Additionally or additionally, when either one of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol reaches a specified value, it is possible to set the termination condition of the time-saving game state.

[6-5-1. Time saving counter update process]
First, the time saving counter update process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2151).

In S2151, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not on, that is, if it is determined that the time saving flag is off (if the determination in S2151 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving counter update process and shifts the process to the counter update process (Fig. 33).

When it is determined in S2151 that the time saving flag is ON (when S2151 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2152.

In S2152, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is variable and the first time saving counter is greater than zero.

In S2152, when it is determined that the first special symbol is variable display and the first time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S2152), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2153.

On the other hand, in S2152, when it is not determined that the variable display of the first special symbol and the first time saving counter is greater than 0 (NO determination in S2152), that is, the variable display of the first special symbol or that the first time saving counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2154.

In S2153, the main CPU 2201 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the first time saving counter. After executing the process of S2153, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2154.

In S2154, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is variable and the second time saving counter is greater than zero.

In S2154, when it is determined that the second special symbol is variable and the second time saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S2154), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2155.

On the other hand, in S2154, when it is not determined that the second special symbol is variable display and the second time saving counter is greater than 0 (S2154 is NO determination), that is, the second special symbol is variable display or the second time-saving counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

In S2155, the main CPU 2201 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the second time saving counter. After executing the process of S2155, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

[6-5-2. Counter judgment processing]
Next, the counter determination process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing an example of counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time reduction transition determination processing (S2161). The details of this time saving transition determination will be described later with reference to FIG. 253 . After executing the process of S2161, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2162.

In S2162, the main CPU 2201 performs time saving transition processing. The details of this time saving shift process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254 . After executing the process of S2162, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2163.

In S2163, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the time saving mode is 2 or 4. In addition, as described in the first pachinko game machine and the like, the time saving mode is set to 2 at the time of transition to the B time saving game state. That is, the game state when the time saving mode is 2 is the B time saving game state.

Further, in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z1", for example, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the jackpot end process, The main CPU 2201 sets the time saving mode to 1. That is, the game state when the time saving mode is 1 is the A time saving game state.

In the following cases, for example, the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving mode to 4 in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the jackpot end process.
· When a jackpot is won in the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state, and the selected symbol command (see Fig. 244) is "z1".
- When a jackpot is won in the normal game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state or C time saving game state and the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6".
・In the normal game state, the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, or the time saving game state C, the player wins the winning prize (the selected symbol command is “z5”) and wins V.

That is, the game state when the time saving mode is 4 is also the A time saving game state. However, the conditions for ending the A time saving game state differ depending on whether the time saving mode is 1 or 4.

In S2163, when it is determined that the time saving mode is 2 or 4 (S2163 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2164.

In S2164, the main CPU 2201 determines, for example, whether or not the requirements expressed by the following formula (1) are satisfied.
H- (first time-saving counter + second time-saving counter) ≤ K expression (1)

In addition, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the A time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A time saving game state in the special symbol game end setting processing (see S282 in FIG. 42) in the jackpot end processing. set the conditions. In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 2201, in the B time saving control mode determination process (see S2182 in FIG. 254 described later), although the details will be described later, the B time saving game state related to the number of variable display times of special symbols determine the termination conditions, etc. In addition, when the time saving hit is won, the main CPU 2201, in the C time saving control mode determination process (see S2185 in FIG. 254 described later), will also be described in detail later, but the C time saving game state related to the number of variable display times of the special symbol Determine termination conditions, etc. When setting the end condition of the time saving gaming state related to the number of variable display times of special symbols in each of the above processes (S282, S2182, S2185), the main CPU 2201 sets both the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter. , set the values of "H" and "K" shown in equation (1) above. "H" is the sum of the value set in the first time-saving counter and the value set in the second time-saving counter, and "K" is the value for ending the time-saving gaming state.

For example, when the prize is released (the selected symbol command (see FIG. 244) is "z5") and V wins, the main CPU 2201 sets 12 to the first time saving counter as a condition for ending the A time saving game state. 12 is set to the second short time counter, 24 is set to "H", and 12 is set to "K". In addition, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 sets 5 to the first time saving counter, sets 1 to the second time saving counter, and sets 24 to "H". set and set "K" to 12.

In S2164, if the requirement shown in the above formula (1) is not satisfied (NO in S2164), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2168.

On the other hand, in S2164, if the requirements shown in the above formula (1) are satisfied (YES determination in S2164), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2165.

In S2165, the main CPU 2201 executes flag reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 executes variable display of the time saving flag, time saving mode, first time saving counter, second time saving counter, the values of “H” and “K” shown in the above formula (1), and normal symbols. Reset the time-saving normal figure counter etc. that is subtracted when it is done. After executing the process of S2165, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2168.

Returning to S2163, if it is determined that the time saving mode is not 2 or 4 (NO determination in S2163), that is, if the time saving mode is 1 or 3, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2166. In addition, as described above, the game state when the time saving mode is 1 is the A time saving game state. Further, as described in the first pachinko game machine and the like, the time saving mode is set to 3 when shifting to the C time saving game state. That is, the game state when the time saving mode is 3 is the C time saving game state.

In S2166, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first time saving counter is smaller than one or whether the second time saving counter is smaller than one.

In S2166, if the first time saving counter is not less than 1 and the second time saving counter is not less than 1 (when S2166 is determined as NO), that is, both the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter are 1 or more If so, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2168.

On the other hand, in S2166, if the first time saving counter is less than 1, or if the second time saving counter is less than 1 (when S2166 is YES determined), at least of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter If either is smaller than 1, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2167.

In S2167, the main CPU 2201 executes flag reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time-saving flag, time-saving mode, first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, time-saving normal map counter, etc. If values have been set, reset these values as well. After executing the process of S2167, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2168.

At S2168, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing (S2169) of the time saving transition command. In addition, the time-saving transition command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. . After the processing of S2169, the main CPU 2201 ends the counter determination processing and returns the processing to the time saving management processing (see FIG. 32).

[6-5-3. Time reduction shift determination process]
Next, the time reduction transition determination process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 253 . FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The difference between the time reduction transition determination process shown in FIG. 253 and the time reduction transition process determination process in FIG. 37 is that the process of S191 executed in FIG. 37 is not executed. This is because the variable probability flag is never set to ON in this sixth pachinko game machine.

253, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the ceiling reach flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (S2171), the ceiling count prohibition flag is on (S2172), Each process of turning on the flag (S2173) and turning on the ceiling reaching flag (S2174) is executed. Each of these processes is executed in FIG. 37 to determine whether or not the ceiling reach flag is off and the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (S192), the ceiling count prohibition flag is on (S193), and the ceiling flag is on (S193). S194) and turning on the ceiling reaching flag (S196), so the description is omitted.

Further, similarly to the first pachinko game machine, the main CPU 2201 sets the ceiling reaching flag to OFF and clears the ceiling counter, for example, when the condition device is activated. However, the processing to set the ceiling reaching flag to OFF and/or the processing to clear the ceiling counter are executed when the condition device is activated, and when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting (for example, the setting change processing in FIG. 47 The first normal game pre-processing (see S344) called as a subroutine during execution), and when clearing the RAM without changing the settings (for example, the first normal game called as a subroutine during the initial setting process at startup in FIG. 24) It may also be executed in pre-game processing (see S56).

[6-5-4. Time reduction transition processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 254, the time saving transition process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine or the like, will be described. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the ceiling flag is on (S2181).

If it is determined in S2181 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S2181), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2182.

In S2182, the main CPU 2201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the end condition of the B time saving game state, the time saving mode, the type of the B time saving game state, etc. are set.

The end condition of the B time saving game state determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) is, for example, the end condition related to the variable display count of the first special symbol and the end condition related to the variable display count of the second special symbol , each value of "H" and "K" shown in the above formula (1), and an end condition related to the number of times of variable display of normal symbols. In addition, the end conditions related to the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (for example, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened, the number of times that "general electric long open" is derived, etc.) are included in the end conditions of the B time-saving game state. You may do so.

Moreover, the time saving mode determined in B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) is 2, for example.

In addition, the type of the B time saving game state determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S2182) is, for example, the B time saving game state that reached the ceiling in the normal game state, and the B time saving game state that reached the ceiling in the C time saving game state. This is information for distinguishing between In addition, by differentiating the determined time saving mode between the B time saving game state in which the ceiling is reached in the normal game state and the B time saving game state in which the ceiling is reached in the C time saving game state, both may be distinguished. .

Returning to S2181, if it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (NO in S2181), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2183.

In S2183, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S2183, if it is determined that the time saving hit flag is not ON (S2183 is NO determination), that is, if the time saving hit flag is off, the main CPU2201 ends the time saving transition process, the process, the counter determination process (See FIG. 252).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2183 that the time saving hit flag is ON (S2183 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2184.

In S2184, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time saving flag is off.

In S2184, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not off (NO determination in S2184), that is, when the time saving flag is on, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving transition processing, and the processing is changed to the counter determination processing (Fig. 252).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2184 that the time saving flag is off (YES in S2184), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2185.

In S2185, the main CPU 2201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the end condition of the C time saving game state, the time saving mode and the like are determined. After executing the process of S2185, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2186.

The end condition of the C time saving game state determined in the C time saving control mode determination process (S2185) is, for example, the end condition related to the variable display count of the first special symbol and the end condition related to the variable display count of the second special symbol And end conditions related to the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (eg, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened, the number of times the “normal long open win” is derived, etc.).

Moreover, the time saving mode determined in C time saving control mode determination process (S2185) is 3, for example.

In S2186, the main CPU 2201 executes a time saving setting process. This time saving setting process will be described below.

[6-5-5. Time saving setting processing]
Next, the time saving setting process, which is one of the processes different from the first pachinko game machine or the like, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving setting processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2191).

When it is determined in S2191 that the time saving flag is ON (when S2191 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2192. It should be noted that the YES determination in S2191 is only when the ceiling is reached in the C time saving game state because the ceiling is not reached in the A time saving game state in this embodiment. In this respect, for example, not only when the ceiling is reached in the C time saving game state, but also in the state where the A time saving game state, B time saving game state, or C time saving game state is executed first, the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed. It is different from the first pachinko game machine etc. that can be played.

In S2192, the main CPU 2201 performs time saving counter resetting processing. This process is a process that is executed when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed in a state where the C time-saving gaming state is executed first, and the current time-saving counter value (that is, the number of time-saving remaining times) and a new It is determined which of the number of times of time saving is greater, and the number of times of time saving which is greater between the remaining number of times of time saving and the new number of times of time saving is reset as a new time saving counter. In this case, the time saving performance to be executed is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the C time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the B time-saving game state is executed in a state where the C time-saving game state is executed first, the remaining number of time-savings in the C time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving games in the B time-saving game state. The number of times of time saving in the B time saving game state is always larger than the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving game state. In such a case, in the time-saving counter resetting process (see S2192), the value of the current time-saving counter (that is, the remaining number of times of time-saving) and the new number of times of time-savings (that is, the number of times of time-savings in the B time-saving game state) There is no need to judge whether there are many. Therefore, in such a case, the main CPU 2201 resets the number of times of time saving in the B time saving game state as a new time saving counter without determining which of the remaining time saving number of times and the new time saving number of times is larger. can be

The time-saving performance is, as described above, a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 2140 (see FIG. 232)). , the variable display time of normal symbols, and/or the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessories 2146, and the like.

Returning to S2191, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO determination in S2191), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2193.

In S2193, the main CPU 2201 performs a time saving mode setting process. In this process, the time saving end condition (end condition related to the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol, variable End conditions related to the number of times of display, each value of "H" and "K" shown in the above formula (1), end conditions related to the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146, etc.) and time saving mode are set. After executing the process of S2193, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2194.

In S2194, the main CPU 2201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S2194, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 254).

[6-5-6. Time saving setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the time-saving normal figure determination process, which is one of the processes not explained in the first pachinko game machine or the like, will be explained. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing an example of time-saving normal figure determination processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving normal figure determination process shown in FIG. 256 is executed in the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43) of the normal symbol control process described in the first pachinko game machine or the like. In FIG. 43, the normal symbol game determination process of S295 is not illustrated as a subroutine, but in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol game determination process of S295 is called as a subroutine. In addition, this time-saving normal figure determination process may be performed before the normal electric accessary product release process (see S296 in FIG. 43) ends.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving mode is 3, that is, whether or not the game is in the C time saving game state (S2201).

In S2201, when it is determined that the time saving mode is not 3 (when S2201 is determined as NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal diagram determination process, and processes. is returned to the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving mode is 3 in S2201 (when S2201 determines YES), that is, when it is determined that the C time saving game state is in progress, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2202. .

In S2202, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a "universal electric long open win", that is, whether or not the stopped normal symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a "universal electric long open win".

If it is determined in S2202 that it is not a "normal electric long open hit" (NO determination in S2202), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2204. In the present embodiment, since the "normal symbol win" is won with a probability of 100%, when the "general/universal electric short circuit open win" is won, S2202 is determined as NO. However, in the case of a pachinko game machine with specifications other than 100% normal per symbol probability, S2202 is determined as NO even when the winning per normal symbol is not won (losing).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2202 that it is a "commercial electric long open hit" (when S2202 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2203.

In S2203, the main CPU 2201 executes flag reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time-saving flag, time-saving mode, first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, time-saving normal map counter, etc. If values have been set, reset these values as well. After executing the process of S2203, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2204.

At S2204, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs time saving transition command transmission reservation processing (S2205). In addition, the time-saving transition command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. . After the processing of S2205, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving normal diagram determination processing, and returns the processing to the normal symbol game determination processing (see S295 in FIG. 43).

In this way, the main CPU 2201 terminates the C time saving game state when the “universal electric long open hit” is derived in the C time saving game state.

It should be noted that, when the "universal electric long open win" is derived and the V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 controls to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the V prize is not won even though the "general electric long open win" is derived, the main CPU 2201 controls to the normal game state.

In addition, as described above, when the "universal electric long open hit" is derived in the B time saving game state, the B time saving game state may be ended. In this case, the "general electric long open hit" is derived, and at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 is activated, the game ball is entered into the second starting port, and the role open hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol game. When the V attacker 2152 is released, the V prize is won with a probability close to 100% as long as the right hand is hit, so the B time-saving gaming state is originally a blissful gaming state for the player. However, in such a B time-saving game state, even though the "general electric long open hit" was derived, if V did not win, by terminating the B time-saving game state and shifting to the normal game state, the game It is possible to keep the person feeling tense and suppress the decline in interest. Moreover, in the case of shifting to the normal game state in this way, since the above-mentioned ceiling reaching flag is ON, in this normal game state, unless once controlled to the big hit game state, it can be controlled to the B time saving game state. do not have.

[6-5-7. Short working hours chart management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a description will be given of the time-saving general chart management process, which is one of the processes not described in the first pachinko game machine or the like. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving normal diagram management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol does not become a loss (it is a normal electric short open hit or a normal electric long open hit), so the time saving normal figure management process is the first pachinko game machine It is executed in the normal symbol per end process (see S297 in FIG. 43) of the normal symbol control process described in the above. In FIG. 43, the normal per symbol end process of S297 is not shown as a subroutine, but in this sixth pachinko game machine, the normal per symbol end process of S297 is called as a subroutine. In addition, in a pachinko game machine with a specification that includes a loss in the result of the win determination process for normal symbols, if the result of the win determination process for normal symbols is a loss, the time-saving normal figure management process is performed by the first pachinko game machine, etc. It is executed in the normal symbol game determination process (see S295 in FIG. 43) described in .

The main CPU 2201 first performs a time saving normal figure counter update process (S2211). The details of this time-saving normal figure counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258 . After executing the process of S2211, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2212.

In S<b>2212 , the main CPU 2201 performs time-saving/normal figure counter determination processing. The details of the time saving normal figure counter determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 259 . After executing the process of S2212, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving normal diagram management process, and returns the process to the normal symbol per end process (see FIG. 43).

[6-5-8. Time saving normal figure counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the time-saving normal figure counter update process, which is one of the processes not explained in the first pachinko game machine or the like, will be explained. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of the time-saving normal figure counter update process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, in this sixth pachinko game machine, when variable display of normal symbols is executed in the A reduced working hours game state, B reduced working hours game state or C reduced working hours game state, the reduced working hours normal figure counter is subtracted.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving normal map counter is greater than 0 (S2221). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving normal figure counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state.

The time-saving normal figure counter indicates the number of variable display times of executable normal symbols in the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of normal symbols is completed, the time-saving normal figure counter is subtracted, and when the time-saving normal figure counter becomes 0, the time-saving game state is terminated. , Not limited to this, when the variable display of normal patterns is completed, the time-saving normal figure counter is added, and when the time-saving normal figure counter reaches the number of times when the time-saving general figure counter is set, the time-saving game state is terminated. may In addition, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving normal figure counter when the variable display of the normal design ends, the time-saving normal figure counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the normal design, and the time-saving general figure counter is When it becomes 0 (in the case of subtraction method) or when the time reduction normal figure counter reaches the set time reduction number (in the case of addition method), the time reduction game state may be terminated.

In S2221, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and the time saving normal map counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S2221), the main CPU 2201 terminates the time saving normal map counter update process. , the processing is returned to the time-saving normal chart management processing (FIG. 257).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2221 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving normal map counter is greater than 0 (S2221 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the time saving normal map counter (S2222). After executing the process of S2222, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving normal chart counter update process, and returns the process to the time-saving normal chart management process (FIG. 257).

[6-5-9. Time saving normal figure counter judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the time-saving normal figure counter determination process which is one of the processes which are not explained in the first pachinko game machine or the like will be explained. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of time-saving normal figure counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2231).

In S2231, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (when S2231 is determined NO), that is, when the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 2201 ends the time saving normal figure counter determination processing, and the processing is changed to the time saving Return to normal map management processing (see FIG. 257).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2231 that the time saving flag is ON (when S2231 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2232.

In S<b>2232 , the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the time reduction/normal figure counter is smaller than one.

When it is determined in S2232 that the time-saving normal map counter is not smaller than 1 (when S2232 determines NO), that is, when the time-saving normal map counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2234. .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2232 that the time saving normal figure counter is smaller than 1 (when S2232 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2233.

In S2233, the main CPU 2201 executes flag reset processing. In this process, the main CPU 2201 resets the time-saving flag, time-saving mode, first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, time-saving normal map counter, etc. If values have been set, reset these values as well. After executing the process of S2233, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2234.

At S2234, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs time saving shift command transmission reservation processing (S2235). In addition, the time-saving transition command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 241) in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. . Then, after the processing of S2235, the main CPU 2201 ends the time-saving normal diagram counter determination processing, and returns the processing to the time-saving normal diagram management processing (see FIG. 257).

[6-6. Game mode]
Next, the game mode performed by the display device 2007 constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. FIG. FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of game mode transition controlled by the sub CPU 2301 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 261 shows various probabilities for each game mode excluding the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode in the sixth pachinko gaming machine (various probabilities in the special symbol game, probability of "general electric long open hit" in the normal symbol game). ) is a table showing an example.

A game mode is a game state that a player can visually grasp, and is called a game mode to distinguish it from an internal game state controlled by the main CPU 2201, for example. The sub CPU 2301 controls such that an effect image corresponding to the game mode is displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 which is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display.

In the present embodiment, the game modes include the first jackpot mode, second jackpot mode, normal mode, high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), high accuracy mode B (false). , challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), special mode, remaining pending mode, and bliss mode. The sub CPU 2301 is configured to be controllable to one of these game modes.

The term "normal mode" is also used in the fifth pachinko machine, but the "normal mode" used in the sixth pachinko machine is different from the "normal mode" used in the sixth pachinko machine. different.

Normal mode, high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), and high accuracy mode B (false) correspond to the "normal game mode" of the present invention. Also, the special mode corresponds to the "advantageous game mode" of the present invention. Since the blissful mode is not essential in the present embodiment, the blissful mode is not included in the "advantageous game mode" of the present invention, but the blissful mode may be included in the "advantageous game mode" of the present invention.

By the way, in the description of the first pachinko game machine, etc., the decorative patterns are composed of nine patterns, for example, 1 to 9, on the left side, and ten patterns, for example, 1 to 9 and time-saving patterns, on the middle pattern. , and explained that the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. However, in this sixth pachinko gaming machine, when the second special symbol game is executed, a winning is possible per opening of the role, so the middle symbols are, for example, 1 to 9, time-saving symbols and chance symbols. It shall consist of the design of Then, when the result of the second special symbol game is a winning of the opening of the role, by stop-displaying the middle symbol as a chance symbol, the player can grasp that the winning of the opening of the role is won.

Details of each game mode will be described below.

[6-6-1. First jackpot mode]
In the first jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the first jackpot mode is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal.

The starting condition of the first jackpot mode is, for example, that the condition device operates based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbols in the normal game state is "3R jackpot" (the selected symbol command is "z1"). is.

In addition, the end condition of the first jackpot mode is, for example, that the 3R jackpot game state ends.

During the first jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot game state. Although the starting information of the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is withheld, variable display of the special symbols is not executed. However, even during the first jackpot mode, variable display of normal symbols is performed.

(Games in the first jackpot mode)
In the first jackpot mode, since hitting to the right is the regular game mode, the player plays the game by hitting to the right. It should be noted that the sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed instruction effect when shifting the game mode to the first jackpot mode.

When the player plays the game with the right hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . In the first jackpot mode, the round game in which the big winning hole 2131 (see FIG. 232) shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period (for example, a period in which 10 game balls can be won per round) is, for example, 3 rounds. carried out over the Therefore, in the first jackpot mode, the game ball flowing down the right area 2107 is likely to win the big prize opening 2131 . Then, when the game balls flowing down the right area 2107 enter the big winning hole 2131 (see FIG. 232), ten game balls, for example, are paid out as prize balls per winning.

In the first big win mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the big win game state (3R big win game state) has ended from the main CPU 2201, it ends the first big win mode and changes the game mode to the first challenge mode. migrate.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 2301 displays, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, a zone notice effect image for notifying that a zone effect, which will be described later, will be performed, when shifting to the first challenge mode.

[6-6-2. Second jackpot mode]
In the second jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot game state or the 10R jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the second jackpot mode is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal.

The conditions for starting the second jackpot mode are, for example, as follows.
・Based on the fact that the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state) is “3R big hit” (selected symbol command is “z1”), Condition device must work.
・Regardless of the game state, the condition device is activated based on the fact that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "10R big win" (selected symbol command is "z2" or "z6").
・Regardless of the game state, the conditional device is activated based on the fact that the result of the special symbol win determination process is "Accessory release win" (selected symbol command is "z5") and V win.

In addition, the end condition of the second jackpot mode is, for example, that the jackpot game state (3R jackpot game state, 10R jackpot game state) ends.

During the second jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the 3R jackpot game state or the 10R jackpot game state. Winning), although the starting information of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is withheld, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed. However, even during the second jackpot mode, variable display of normal symbols is performed.

(Game in second jackpot mode)
In the second jackpot mode, since hitting to the right is the regular game mode, the player plays the game by hitting to the right. It should be noted that the sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed instruction effect when shifting to the second jackpot mode.

When the player plays the game with the right hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . In the second jackpot mode, the above-described round game may be played over 10 rounds, for example. Therefore, in the second jackpot mode, the player has a higher expectation that a large amount of game balls will be awarded as prize balls compared to the first jackpot mode.

In the second jackpot mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the jackpot game state (3R or 10R jackpot game state) has ended from the main CPU 2201, it ends the second jackpot mode and changes the game mode to the special mode. migrate.

[6-6-3. Normal mode]
In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal game state. In this embodiment, the normal mode is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the normal mode are, for example, as follows. In addition, the various probabilities shown below are probabilities based on a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 242), a special symbol determination table (see FIG. 243), and a hit type determination table (see FIG. 244). The reference table is the same for the game mode of ).

(1) When the first special symbol game is executed (1-1) Various probabilities/jackpots: 1/319
・ Per item opening ... 0
・ Shorter working hours: 1/64
(1-2) Distribution ratio in case of winning a jackpot 3R jackpot (selected symbol command “z1”) … 99/100
・ 10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z2”) … 1/100

(2) When the second special symbol game is executed (2-1) Various probabilities/jackpots: 1/319
・Per item open: 1/10.5
・ Shorter working hours: 1/10.5
(1-2) Distribution ratio when winning a jackpot 10R jackpot (selected symbol command “z6”) … 100/100

For example, various probabilities when the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the normal mode are as follows. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol hit determination process is executed, as described above, the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained with a probability of 100%, and when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained, , The normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 248) is referred to, and distributed to normal electric long open per or normal electric short open per (the same applies to other game modes to be described later).

(3) When the normal symbol game is executed - Normal electric long open hit (selected symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit) ... 1/32768
・Public electric short open per (selected pattern command "fz0" when per normal pattern) ... 32767/32768

(Conditions for transition and destination of transition)
In the normal mode, for example, when any one of the following conditions is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to another mode. Also shown are transition destinations of the game mode based on establishment of the transition condition. It should be noted that the following "election for time saving hit" may be that the display mode indicating the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164, or the display mode indicating the time saving hit is the special symbol display unit 2163, It may be the start of the next game derived to 2164 (the same applies to other game modes).
・Winning the 3R jackpot (selected pattern command "z1") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Switch to the 1st jackpot mode ・Winning the 10R jackpot (selected pattern command "z2", "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode ・Winning time-saving hits (selected pattern commands "z0", "z4") ⇒ Shift to high-precision mode A・The ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value ⇒ Shift to bliss mode

Although the occurrence frequency is extremely low, when the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened based on the "general electric short circuit opening hit", the game ball wins the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232). , When the result of the second special symbol game is a win (selected symbol command is "z5") and V wins, the mode shifts to the second big win mode.

(Direction)
In the normal mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays a normal effect image on the display device 2007 so that the player can understand that the game mode is not advantageous.

Also, although not shown, the display device 2007 has, for example, a main area that occupies most of the display area, and an inconspicuous small sub-area at one corner of the display area, for example. The sub CPU 2301 performs a variable display effect using decorative symbols in this main area. Also, the sub CPU 2301 performs a variable display effect using mini symbols in the sub area. The main area is the area that the player pays the most attention to and visually recognizes, while the sub-area is the area that is difficult for the player to pay attention to.

In the normal mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area, and a variable display effect of mini symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Display in subregions. However, not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the main area, and the variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in the sub area It may be displayed. Also, for example, mini-symbol A and mini-symbol B are displayed in sub-regions, the variable display effect of mini-symbol A is performed corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the variable display effect of mini-symbol B is normally displayed. You may make it correspond to a design and it may be made to carry out.

(Game in normal mode)
In the normal mode, since left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the player plays the game with left-handed hitting. It should be noted that, when the game is played with the right hand, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a warning or a left hand instruction effect for instructing the left hand. Specifically, the sub CPU 2301 displays a warning image and an effect image instructing a left-handed strike in the display area of the display device 2007, and also outputs a warning sound and a voice instructing a left-handed strike from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241), for example. Output (hereinafter simply referred to as "left-handed instruction effect" or "right-handed instruction effect", and detailed description is omitted).

When the player plays the game with the left hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the left area 2106 . When a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232), the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A and the passage gate 5125B (both see FIG. 232). enter one of them. On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) out of the game balls flowing down the left region 2106 enter the general winning hole 2122 or are discharged outside the machine from the out hole 2178. be done.

When a game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the first start port 5120 (wins a prize), the main CPU 2201 reserves the start information of the first special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the condition for starting the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the payout/emission control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the winning ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, and the payout device 82 is controlled to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls.

When the first special symbol game is started, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area of the display device 2007 . Then, for example, an effect image indicating a big win is displayed with a probability of 1/319, and an effect image indicating a time saving win is displayed with a probability of 1/64, for example.

When the sub CPU 2301 receives from the main CPU 2201 a command indicating that a display mode indicating a big win has been derived, the sub CPU 2301 ends the normal mode, for example, shifts to the first big win mode with a probability of 99%, and shifts to the first big win mode with a probability of 1%. Shift to the second jackpot mode. Further, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the display mode indicating the time-saving hit has been derived from the main CPU 2201, the normal mode is terminated and the high accuracy mode A is entered.

On the other hand, when a game ball that has entered the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the pass gate 5125A or the pass gate 5125B, the main CPU 2201 holds up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of start information for normal symbols. , When the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the winning ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, The payout device 82 is controlled to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out is, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls pass through the first starting port 5120, or the number of prize balls to be paid out. However, as described above, it is not essential that the prize balls are paid out based on the passage of the game balls to the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B.

When the normal pattern game is started, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" in the normal mode is, for example, 1/32768, so the player almost never wins the "general electric long open hit". I can't wait.

Therefore, in the normal mode, the game is played in anticipation of a big win with a probability of 1/319, for example, or a quick win with a probability of 1/64, for example. However, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value without winning the jackpot (that is, without shifting to either the first jackpot mode or the second jackpot mode), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the bliss mode.

In addition, when the normal symbol game is executed in the normal mode and, for example, the probability of 1/32768 is 1/32768, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. However, it is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the second challenge mode in the normal symbol game of the high accuracy mode A or the high accuracy mode B (true) when winning the "general electric long open hit", and the normal mode. In the normal symbol game 2, when winning the "normal electric long open hit", the normal mode may be continued without shifting to the second challenge mode.

Further, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 performs variable display in the normal symbol display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241), and the sub CPU 2301, for example, the main game of the display device 2007. In the area, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is performed, and the variable display effect using the decorative pattern, the mini pattern, etc. corresponding to the normal pattern is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display effect using decorative symbols or mini symbols corresponding to normal symbols may be performed using, for example, the display device 2007 or another display device.

Further, as described above, when the game is played with the right hand, a warning or a left hand instruction effect is performed. However, for example, as a result of the player hitting the right against the warning sound or the left hitting instruction effect, the normal electric role 2146 (see FIG. 232) may be opened, or the normal electric role 2146 (see FIG. 232) may be opened by a malicious person. ) by illegal means, an unintended second special symbol game may be executed. Even in such a case, for example, there is a probability of 1/10.5 that the prize will be released, and if V wins, the game mode will shift to the second jackpot mode. Therefore, when the second special symbol game is executed by winning the "general electric long open hit" as a result of playing the game in the left hand which is the regular game mode, and the second special symbol game is executed in an unintended mode. It is preferable to allow, for example, hall officials to distinguish between when the game is played. For example, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened even though the normal symbol game is not executed, or when the right hand is hit in spite of being in the normal mode, the hall computer 2186 (both refer to FIG. 241), it is preferable to output an illegal signal.

[6-6-4. high accuracy mode]
The high-accuracy mode includes a high-accuracy mode A and a high-accuracy mode B (true). In the high accuracy mode, in both the high accuracy mode A and the high accuracy mode B (true), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the C time saving game state. In this embodiment, the high accuracy mode is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal in both high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true).

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the high probability mode (high probability mode A and high probability mode B (true)) (jackpot probability, role release hit Probability, time saving probability) is omitted because it is the same as the normal mode.

However, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), it is ignored by the main CPU 2201 even if the time saving hit is won, and the time saving hit is invalidated. This point differs from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode (C time saving game state) when elected for time saving.

Various probabilities when the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)) are as follows, for example.
・Public electric long open per (selected pattern command "fz1" when per normal pattern) ... about 1/48
・Per normal electric short open (selected pattern command “fz0” when per normal pattern) … Approximately 47/48

In this way, in the high-probability mode (high-probability mode A, high-probability mode B (true)), compared to the normal mode, it is possible to win the "general electric long open hit" with a higher probability. That is, the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal as in the normal mode, but is a game mode more advantageous to the player than the normal mode.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the high-accuracy mode A are, for example, as follows.
・ Winning the "time saving win" in the normal mode and being controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time saving game state.

It should be noted that, when the "time saving hit" is won in the normal mode, although it is internally controlled to the C time saving game state by the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 immediately enters the high probability mode A with the winning of the "time saving hit". Alternatively, the normal mode may be continued until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times). If the normal mode is to continue until the predetermined condition is satisfied without immediately shifting to the high-precision mode A, although the "time-saving hit" is elected in the normal mode, the sub CPU 2301, for example, transfers to the high-precision mode A. It is possible to execute a suggestive inciting effect, and it is possible to increase interest.

For example, the conditions for starting the high-accuracy mode B (true) are as follows.
· Winning the "time saving hit" in the remaining reservation mode, and being controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the C time saving game state.

(Termination conditions and transition destination)
The end condition is the same in the high probability mode A and the high probability mode B (true) (same as the end condition of the above-mentioned C time saving game state). Specifically, for example, any one of the following conditions must be satisfied. Also shown are transition destinations of the game mode based on the satisfaction of the end condition.
・The first special symbol is displayed 20 times ⇒ Normal mode ・The second special symbol is displayed 1 times based on winning the second starting gate by "Electronic short open hit" ⇒ Normal mode (If the result of the second special symbol game is a loss)
・The number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times ⇒ Switch to normal mode ・Winning 3R jackpot (selected pattern command “z1”) (when condition device is activated) ⇒ Switch to 2nd jackpot mode ・10R jackpot (selected pattern command “ z2", "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Switch to the 2nd jackpot mode ・ Win the prize (selected pattern command "z5") and win a V prize (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ 2nd Shift to jackpot mode ・When the "Public Electric Long Open Hit" is derived ⇒ Shift to 2nd challenge mode ・Ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value ⇒ Shift to bliss mode

In this embodiment, since the ceiling counter never reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (true), there is no case where the high accuracy mode B (true) shifts to the blissful mode. However, if the pachinko game machine has specifications that allow the ceiling counter to reach the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (true), the high accuracy mode B (true) may shift to the blissful mode.

In addition, if you do not win the V prize even though you have won the role release hit (selected pattern command "z5"), the condition ""Public electric long open hit" is derived" is satisfied, and the probability is high. The modes (high accuracy mode A and high accuracy mode B (true)) are terminated.

The conditions for ending the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)) include "1 time of variable display of the second special symbol", which is, for example, "general electric short It is a termination condition that is established when the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) wins at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened by deriving "open hit". It should be noted that when the "commercial electric long open hit" is derived, the end condition is established at this point.

In the high-probability mode (high-probability mode A and high-probability mode B (true)), the allocation rate to the 3R jackpot or the 10R jackpot is the same as in the normal mode. However, in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), even if you win any one of the 3R jackpot and 10R jackpot, it will shift to the second jackpot mode. This is different from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the first big win mode when the 3R big win is won.

(Direction)
In the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true), the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image on the display device 2007 (Fig. 232 2032 (see FIG. 241).

In the above description, the sub CPU 2301 simply displays the effect image on the display device 2007, but in practice, as described above, the process is performed as follows. That is, the display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 2301, and the image data is stored in the frame buffer at a predetermined timing. image data is supplied to the D/A converter. The D/A converter supplied with the image data converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In the following, explanation of these processes will be omitted, and the explanation will simply be based on the fact that the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image.

Similarly, in the above description, the sub CPU 2301 simply outputs from the speaker 2032, but in practice, as described above, the process is performed as follows. First, the audio control circuit 2305 has a sound source IC, audio data ROM, AMP, and the like. Then, the sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM of the sound control circuit 2305 according to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301, and selects the selected sound. Data is read out from the audio data ROM, the audio data is converted into a predetermined audio signal, and the converted audio signal is supplied to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects and outputs them from the speaker 2032 . In the following, description of these processes will be omitted, and the description will simply be based on the fact that the sub CPU 2301 outputs the effect sound.

It should be noted that the high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true) are both internally controlled to the C time-saving gaming state by the main CPU 2201, but the sub-CPU 2301 controls the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true ), control is performed so that different effect images are displayed in both modes.

In addition, in this high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A and high-accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of a decorative symbol corresponding to a normal symbol in the main area, and a first special symbol. And the variable display effects of the mini symbols corresponding to each of the second special symbols are displayed in the sub-regions. However, not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area, and the variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sub It may be displayed in the area or the like.

(Game in high accuracy mode)
Although the effect images displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 are different between the high-accuracy mode A and the high-accuracy mode B (true), the same control is internally executed by the main CPU 2201 . That is, the same game is performed in the high probability mode A and the high probability mode B (true).

In the high-accuracy modes (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), since left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the player plays the game with left-handed hitting. Thus, in this embodiment, both the normal mode and the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)) with different degrees of advantage for the player are left-handed regular game modes. .

In addition, when the game is played with the right hand in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 performs the left hand instruction effect as in the normal mode.

In the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the game progresses in the same flow as in the normal mode, so differences from the normal mode will be mainly described.

When the player hits to the left and the first special symbol game is executed to win the time saving hit, the normal mode (that is, the normal game state) was triggered by the sub CPU 2301 to shift to the high accuracy mode A. In the certain mode (high certainty mode A, high certainty mode B (true), ie, C time saving game state), the main CPU 2201 ignores the winning of the time saving hit, and the sub CPU 2301 does not shift to another game mode. Continue in sure mode.

In addition, in the high-probability mode (high-probability mode A, high-probability mode B (true)), when the jackpot is won, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 100%, for example. However, in this case, it is not essential to shift to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 100%. , the probability of transition to the second jackpot mode should be higher in the high-probability mode (high-probability mode A, high-probability mode B (true)) than in the normal mode.

However, in the high probability mode (high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true)), when the first special symbol game is executed 20 times without winning the jackpot, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high probability mode. , to shift the game mode to the normal mode.

Also, when the player hits left and the normal symbol game is executed, in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), unlike the normal mode, the probability is, for example, 1/48. Win the "Puden long open hit". In this respect, the high-probability mode A is significantly different from the normal mode in which it is almost impossible to expect winning of the "Public Electricity Long Open Win".

When winning the "universal electric long open win" in the high-accuracy mode (high-accuracy mode A, high-accuracy mode B (true)), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. When shifting to the second challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs a right-handed instruction effect and various effects (for example, a chance effect indicating that there is a high expectation that a zone effect described later will be performed).

Thus, in the high probability mode (high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true)), for example, the game is played in anticipation of the winning probability of 1/48 of the "general electric long open hit". Become. However, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value without transitioning to either the first jackpot mode or the second jackpot mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the blissful mode.

On the other hand, in the high-probability mode (high-probability mode A, high-probability mode B (true)), if you win the "general electric short open hit", it is not possible to win the game ball to the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232). Although it is difficult, in rare cases, a game ball may enter the second starting port 2140 and the second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the high accuracy mode and shifts the game mode to the normal mode. However, if the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit (selected symbol command "z6") or if the character is released (selected symbol command "z5") and V wins, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high accuracy mode. Then, the game mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode. In the case of winning a role release (selected symbol command "z5") and not winning a V prize (so-called, if the role release hit is punctured), the sub CPU 2301 may continue the high accuracy mode (that is, You may continue the C time-saving gaming state even if the role per opening is punctured), or you may end the high-precision mode and shift the game mode to the normal mode (that is, per opening) Puncture may be a condition for ending the C time-saving gaming state.).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the high probability mode (high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true)), the main CPU 2201 is normally variable in the symbol display section 2161 (see FIG. 241). Along with displaying, the sub CPU 2301 performs variable display effects of decorative symbols corresponding to normal symbols in the main area of the display device 2007, for example. However, it is not limited to this, and like the normal mode, for example, in the main area of the display device 2007, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol may be performed.

In addition, as in the normal mode, as a result of playing the game in the left-handed mode, which is the regular game mode, the "general electric long open win" is won and the second special symbol game is executed. It is preferable to make it possible to distinguish between the case where the 2 special symbol game is executed and to prevent cheating and prevent playing in an illegal game mode.

[6-6-5. High accuracy mode B (false)]
In the high accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal game state. In this embodiment, the high-probability mode B (false) is a game mode in which left-handed hitting is normal.

(Various probabilities)
When the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in high accuracy mode B (false), various probabilities (big hit probability, role opening probability, time saving probability) are normal mode is omitted because it is the same as

In the high probability mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal game state, so when winning the time saving hit, the main CPU 2201 shifts from the normal game state to the C time saving game state. .

Various probabilities when the normal symbol game is executed in the high probability mode B (false) are the same as in the normal mode. That is, the winning probability of the general electric long open hit (the selection symbol command "fz1" at the time of the normal symbol hit) is extremely low, for example, 1/32768.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the high-accuracy mode B (false) are, for example, as follows.
- The results of the special symbol games in the remaining pending mode are all lost and the predetermined performance conditions are satisfied.

It should be noted that the predetermined effect condition, for example, at the end of the remaining pending mode, by the control of the sub CPU2301 performs a transition lottery to the high-probability mode B (false), it is good as winning the transition lottery. In this case, if the transition lottery is won, the sub CPU 2301 should shift from the remaining pending mode to the high probability mode B (false). Further, for example, in the last special symbol game of the remaining reserved mode, it may be determined whether to shift to the high probability mode B (false) according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Furthermore, when the remaining pending mode ends, the mode may be shifted to the high accuracy mode B (false) without fail.

(Termination conditions and transition destination)
The condition for ending the high-accuracy mode B (false) is, for example, satisfying any one of the following conditions. Also shown are transition destinations of the game mode based on the satisfaction of the end condition.
・The first special symbol is displayed 20 times ⇒ Normal mode ・The second special symbol is displayed 1 times based on winning the second starting gate by "Electronic short open hit" ⇒ Normal mode (If the result of the second special symbol game is a loss)
・The number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times ⇒ Switch to normal mode ・Winning 3R jackpot (selected pattern command “z1”) (when condition device is activated) ⇒ Switch to 1st jackpot mode ・10R jackpot (selected pattern command “ z2", "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Switch to the 2nd jackpot mode ・ Win the prize (selected pattern command "z5") and win a V prize (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ 2nd Shift to jackpot mode ・Elect to short time hit (selected pattern command "z0", "z4") ⇒ Shift to high probability mode A or high probability mode B (true) ・"Electric long open hit" is derived ⇒ Move to second challenge mode

Although the occurrence frequency is extremely low, when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened based on the "general electric short circuit opening hit", the game ball wins the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232). , the second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, when the result of the second special symbol game is a winning prize (the selected symbol command is "z5") and the player wins V, the game shifts to the second big winning mode. If the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the normal mode is entered as described above.

Further, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter never reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (false), so there is no case of shifting from the high accuracy mode B (false) to the blissful mode. However, if the pachinko game machine has specifications that allow the ceiling counter to reach the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode B (false), it may shift from the high accuracy mode B (false) to the blissful mode.

The termination conditions and the transition destination of the game mode are the same as, for example, the high-probability mode B (true), except for the case of winning the jackpot. By doing so, when the high accuracy mode B (false) ends, it becomes difficult to grasp whether it was the high accuracy mode B (true) or the high accuracy mode B (false). It is possible to increase It should be noted that the transition destination when winning the jackpot is the same as in the normal mode.

However, the end condition of high probability mode B (false) is not limited to the above, for example, a special symbol game over a specified number of times (eg, a predetermined number of times, the number of times determined at the end of the remaining pending mode, etc.) may be executed. Also, if the specification is to always shift to high-precision mode B (false) when the remaining pending mode ends, for example, the stay period of high-definite mode B (false) at the end of the remaining pending mode (for example, the number of staying games ) may be determined by the sub CPU 2301, and the sub CPU 2301 may end the high-accuracy mode B (false) and shift to the normal mode when the determined stay period elapses.

(Direction)
The high accuracy mode B (false) is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state in the same way as in the normal mode, so as described above, the probability of "general electric long open hit" is 1/32768. It is extremely low, and in this respect it is more disadvantageous to the player than the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)).

However, the sub CPU 2301 performs the same effects in the high accuracy mode B (false) as in the case of the high accuracy mode B (true), for example. That is, the sub CPU 2301, in the high accuracy mode B (false), for example, displays the same effect image as in the high accuracy mode B (true) in the display area of the display device 2007 (see FIG. 232), The effect sound similar to that in the sure mode B (true) is output from the speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). Therefore, even if the remaining hold mode ends, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's desire to continue playing the game, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Thus, in this embodiment, similar effects are performed in high-precision mode B (true) and high-precision mode B (false). By making the displayed background image the same, etc., the player cannot distinguish between the high-accuracy mode B (true) and the high-accuracy mode B (false), or the appearance is such that it is difficult to distinguish. A performance similar to the above corresponds.

It should be noted that, when winning per time reduction in the high probability mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 may shift the game mode to the high probability mode A, or the same production as the high probability mode B (true) The high accuracy mode B (false) may be continued.

In addition, in this high-accuracy mode B (false), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to normal symbols in the main area, and mini display corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A variable display effect of the pattern is displayed in the sub-region. However, not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area, and the variable display effect of the mini symbol corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is sub It may be displayed in the area or the like.

(Game in high accuracy mode B (false))
In the high-accuracy mode B (false), since left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the player plays the game with left-handed hitting. It should be noted that, when the game is played with the right hand, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a warning or a left hand instruction effect for instructing the left hand.

When the player plays the game with the left hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the left area 2106 . When a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232), the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A and the passage gate 5125B (both see FIG. 232). enter one of them. On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) out of the game balls flowing down the left region 2106 enter the general winning hole 2122 or are discharged outside the machine from the out hole 2178. be done.

When a game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the first start port 5120 (wins a prize), the main CPU 2201 reserves the start information of the first special symbol up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the condition for starting the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 5120, the payout/emission control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the winning ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, and the payout device 82 is controlled to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls.

When the first special symbol game is started, the sub CPU 2301 variably displays the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the main area of the display device 2007 . Then, for example, an effect image indicating a big win is displayed with a probability of 1/319, and an effect image indicating a time saving win is displayed with a probability of 1/64, for example.

When the sub CPU 2301 receives from the main CPU 2201 a command indicating that a display mode indicating a big hit has been derived, it terminates the high-probability mode B (false), for example, shifts to the first big win mode with a probability of 99%, Shift to the second big hit mode with a probability of 1%.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 receives from the main CPU 2201 a command indicating that the display mode indicating the time saving win has been derived, the appearance is the same as the high accuracy mode B (false) or the high accuracy mode B (true) that is difficult to distinguish. ). That is, since it is difficult or impossible to distinguish between high-precision mode B (true) and high-precision mode B (false) from the player's point of view, it is daringly described as "high-precision mode B" here. ) appears to be continuing. However, the main CPU 2201 shifts from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state. That is, when winning in the time-saving mode in the high-accuracy mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 internally shifts from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state, but the same mode appears to continue. It will happen.

Further, when a game ball entering the game ball sorting device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the pass gate 5125A or the pass gate 5125B, the main CPU 2201 reserves the starting information of normal symbols up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). , When the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started. Further, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 5125A or the passage gate 5125B, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 based on the prize ball control command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, The payout device 82 is controlled to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls as prize balls. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out is, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls pass through the first starting port 5120, or the number of prize balls to be paid out.

When the normal pattern game is started, the winning probability of "Public electric long open hit" is, for example, 1/32768 probability in high probability mode B (false), so originally "Public electric long open hit" Although the player can hardly expect to win the game, the player may play the game believing that the game is in the high-probability mode (true).

Also, in the high probability mode B (false), when the first special symbol game is played 20 times, the sub CPU 2301 ends the high probability mode B (false) and shifts the game mode to the normal mode.

In addition, in the high-probability mode B (false), when the normal symbol game is executed and the "general/universal electric short open hit" is won, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232). However, in rare cases, a game ball may enter the second starting port 2140 and the second special symbol game may be executed. In this case, if the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the high accuracy mode B (false) and shifts the game mode to the normal mode. However, when the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit (selected symbol command "z6") or when the role is released (selected symbol command "z5") and V wins, the sub CPU 2301 is in high accuracy mode B ( False) is terminated, for example, it is shifted to the first big win mode with a probability of 99%, and is shifted to the second big win mode with a probability of 1%. In the case of winning a role release (selected symbol command "z5") and not winning a V prize (so-called opening of a role has been punctured), the sub CPU 2301 may continue the high accuracy mode B (false). Then, the game mode may be shifted to the normal mode by terminating the high accuracy mode B (false).

In addition, when the normal symbol game is executed in the high-probability mode B (false), for example, when the probability of winning the "normal electric long open win" is 1/32768, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second challenge mode. Let

Also, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol game is started in the high probability mode B (false), the main CPU 2201 performs variable display in the normal symbol display section 2161 (see FIG. 241), and the sub CPU 2301, for example, In the main area of the display device 2007, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is performed, and the variable display effect using the decorative pattern or mini pattern corresponding to the normal pattern is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display effect using decorative symbols or mini symbols corresponding to normal symbols may be performed using, for example, the display device 2007 or another display device.

Further, as described above, when the game is played with the right hand, a warning or a left hand instruction effect is performed. However, for example, as a result of the player hitting the right against the warning sound or the left hitting instruction effect, the normal electric role 2146 (see FIG. 232) may be opened, or the normal electric role 2146 (see FIG. 232) may be opened by a malicious person. ) by illegal means, an unintended second special symbol game may be executed. Even in such a case, for example, there is a probability of 1/10.5 that the prize will be released, and if V wins, the game mode will shift to the second jackpot mode. Therefore, when the second special symbol game is executed by winning the "general electric long open hit" as a result of playing the game in the left hand which is the regular game mode, and the second special symbol game is executed in an unintended mode. It is preferable to allow, for example, hall officials to distinguish between when the game is played. For example, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened even though the normal symbol game is not executed, or when the right stroke is made in spite of the high accuracy mode B (false), the external terminal board 2184 It is preferable to output an illegality signal to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 241 for both) via.

[6-6-6. Challenge mode]
In the challenge mode, there is a first challenge mode that shifts after the first jackpot mode ends, and a normal pattern game such as a high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), etc. There is a second challenge mode that is shifted by winning.

In this specification, after the conditions for starting the challenge mode, which will be described later, are satisfied, until the second special symbol game for the start information of all the reserved second special symbols is executed (until the end), the challenge Define mode.

In addition, as described above, the sixth pachinko game machine is a priority variation machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established preferentially over the starting condition of the first special symbol, so the challenge mode must be completed. (That is, unless the second special symbol game is executed for all of the suspended second special symbol start information), the first special symbol game is not executed. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball wins the first starting hole 5120, the first special symbol game is not executed until the challenge mode ends.

(Conditions for starting the first challenge mode)
The conditions for starting the first challenge mode are, for example, as follows.
- The first jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) must end.

(Conditions for starting the second challenge mode)
The conditions for starting the second challenge mode are, for example, as follows.
- The normal symbol display portion 2161 should display a display mode indicating "general electric long open hit" in the normal symbol game in the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)).
- The normal symbol display section 2161 should display a display mode indicating "normal electric long win" in the normal symbol game in the normal mode.
・In the normal symbol game in the high accuracy mode B (false), the normal symbol display portion 2161 displays the display mode indicating “normal long open win”.

It should be noted that the condition for starting the second challenge mode is not limited to the fact that the display mode indicating "universal electric long open win" is displayed in the normal symbol display section 2161, and the result indicating "universal electric long open win" is the normal symbol. It may be a predetermined trigger (that is, during variable display of normal symbols) before being displayed on the display unit 2161 (see FIG. 241). The predetermined opportunity corresponds to, for example, the start of variable display of normal symbols (when the hit determination process of normal symbols is performed), or performing a right-handed instruction effect after the start of variable display of normal symbols.

(Conditions for ending the first challenge mode and the second challenge mode)
End conditions of the challenge modes (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) and transition destinations of the game mode are as follows, for example.
・ Winning the 10R jackpot (selected pattern command "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Switch to the second jackpot mode ) ⇒Transition to the 2nd jackpot mode/The 2nd special symbol game is executed with respect to the starting information of all the 2nd special symbols that have been withheld (at the end) ⇒Transition to the high accuracy mode A or the normal mode/Ceiling counter reaches the ceiling ⇒ shift to bliss mode

However, for the second challenge mode, in addition to the above end conditions, when the game ball could not be won in the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232) at the time of the operation of the first normal electric accessory ( The so-called case where the second challenge mode is punctured) is also an end condition.

It should be noted that, if the V prize is not won in spite of winning the prize release (selected symbol command "z5"), the sub CPU 2301 reserves the remaining start information for the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "remaining pending ”), the second challenge mode is continued (in terms of appearance), and the second challenge mode is terminated if there is no remaining reservation for the start information of the second special symbol.

Also, when the second special symbol game is executed for the starting information of all the second special symbols that have been withheld, the transition destination of the game mode is the high accuracy mode A or the normal mode as described above. will be explained in detail.

In this embodiment, as long as the result of the second special symbol game is not a big hit, the challenge mode is continued until the second special symbol game for all the reserved second special symbol start information is completed.

Therefore, when the winning time is short in either one of the second special symbol games performed during the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) or multiple times, the sub CPU 2301 is suspended. After the second special symbol game for all the starting information of the second special symbols is executed, the game mode is shifted from the challenge mode to the high accuracy mode A.

In addition, the results of the second special symbol game once or multiple times performed during the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) are all lost (V winning even though the character was released) Including the case of not doing so), the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode from the challenge mode to the normal mode.

(Internal game state)
The first challenge mode is started when the first jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) ends, as described above. When the first jackpot mode ends, internally, the main CPU 2201 shifts to the A time-saving game state that includes "special 2 = 1" (the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 1) as the time-saving end condition (Fig. 244). reference). That is, after the end of the first jackpot mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time-saving game state until the first variable display of the second special symbol is executed (until the end). Then, when the first variable display of the second special symbol ends and the A time saving game state ends, the main CPU 2201 internally shifts to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the first challenge mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time-saving game state until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed, and the first variable display of the second special symbol is performed. After the game ends, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal game state.

Therefore, in the first challenge mode, from the start of the first challenge mode to the end of the first variable display of the second special symbol, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, but the first second special symbol is a game mode. After the variable display of is completed, the left-hand shot becomes the regular game mode.

In the second challenge mode, as described above, in the normal symbol game of the high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), the display mode indicating "general electric long open hit" is the normal symbol display section 2161 is derived to . In addition, when the display mode indicating "general electric long open hit" is derived to the normal symbol display section 2161, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal game state, and the sub CPU 2301 performs right hand hitting instruction.

In the second challenge mode, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode until the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on the winning of the "Public electric long open hit" is completed, but the "Public electric long open hit" After the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 based on the winning is completed, left-handed hitting becomes the regular game mode.

By the way, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), if the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit, the state is internally shifted to a C time saving game state. Even if it internally shifts to the C time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 2301 continues the challenge mode (internal In other words, the game mode is changed to the high-accuracy mode A after the second special symbol game for all the reserved second special symbol start information is finished.

However, the sub CPU 2301 is not limited to this, and, for example, when the result of the time saving hit is derived, the second special symbol game for all the suspended second special symbol start information is completed. You may make it shift to high accuracy mode A from challenge mode (1st challenge mode, 2nd challenge mode), even if it is not.

As described above, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), when the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") is won, and when the role is released (selected symbol command "z5") , the sub CPU 2301 ends the challenge mode even if the second special symbol game regarding the starting information of all the reserved second special symbols has not ended, and enters the second big win mode. migrate. In this case, if the start information of the second special symbol remains pending at the end of the challenge mode, the second special symbol game of the start information of the second special symbol is played in the special mode after the end of the second big win mode. executed.

By the way, as described above, even if the time saving win is won in the A time saving game state, the time saving win is ignored by the main CPU 2201 and the time saving win becomes invalid. Therefore, in the case of the first challenge mode, the main CPU 2201 ignores the time-saving win even if the time-saving win is won until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed, and the game does not shift to the C time-saving game state.

However, in the first challenge mode, until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed, it is essential to ignore the time saving hit even if the time saving win is won and not to shift to the C time saving game state. do not have. For example, the main CPU 2201 may determine the result of the second special symbol game after executing the end processing of the A time-saving gaming state. That is, in this case, even if the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is a time saving hit, the A time saving gaming state has ended when the result of the second special symbol game is determined. It will happen. Therefore, when the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is a time saving win, the time saving win is not ignored, and the main CPU 2201 internally shifts to the C time saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the first challenge mode.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode) (big hit probability, role release probability, time saving hit probability) is omitted because it is the same as the normal mode.

In addition, when the normal symbol game is executed in the first challenge mode, the winning probability of the "universal electric long open win" is as shown below, for example. In addition, until the first variable display of the second special symbol ends (internally in the case of A time-saving game state), and after the first variable display of the second special symbol ends (internally normal game state in the case of ).

(1) Until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed ・ Winning probability of normal electric long open per (selected symbol command "fz2" when per normal symbol) ... about 1/1.1
(2) After the first variable display of the 2nd special symbol is completed ・Probability of winning the normal electric long open per (selected symbol command "fz1" when per normal symbol) ... 1/32768

That is, in the first challenge mode, until the first variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the winning probability of "general electric long open hit" (selected symbol command "fz2" at normal symbol hit) in the normal symbol game is approximately 1/1.1. Therefore, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is operated for the first time after the end of the first jackpot mode, the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232) could not be won until the hold of the second start information reached the upper limit. Even so, even after the normal electric accessory 2146 is closed, it is possible to expect the winning of the "general electric long open win" in the normal symbol game, so that it is possible to increase the interest.

However, after the first variable display of the second special symbol in the first challenge mode is completed, the winning probability of "general electric long open hit" (selected symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit) is, for example, 1/32768. and extremely low probability.

In addition, in the second challenge mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal game state unless a time-saving hit or a big hit is won. The winning probability of the command "fz1") is, for example, 1/32768, which is extremely low.

However, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), if the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit, the second special symbol game for the start information of all the second special symbols that has been withheld is finished. If the specification continues the challenge mode until the game is played, the main CPU 2201 may internally control the C time-saving game state. In this way, in the challenge mode, when it is internally in the C time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" (selected symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit) is 1/48, for example.

(Direction)
In this challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 performs a zone effect in the main area of the display device 2007 indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the jackpot mode. This zone effect is a effect that is performed while the second special symbol game is being executed. This is an effect or the like that makes the player expect that the game will stop on double rolls.

However, in the challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the maximum number of times of the second special symbol game assumed is, for example, 5 times (1 time of the variation + the maximum number that can be held, hereinafter "specified number of times ”), the sub CPU 2301 does not execute the zone effect beyond this specified number of times. However, exceptionally, it cannot be said that the second special symbol game is executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode. For example, during the challenge mode, the player continues to hit to the right, and the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) is opened by winning the "normal electric long open win" in the normal symbol game, and the second start port 2140 (Refer to FIG. 232), when the game ball wins, the second special symbol game can be executed in the challenge mode exceeding the prescribed number of times. In particular, in the second special symbol game performed during the challenge mode, if the "time saving win" is won, the winning probability of the "general electric long open win" is increased, so the possibility is high. Further, even when the normal electric accessory 2146 is illegally released, the second special symbol game can be executed more than the prescribed number of times in the challenge mode. Therefore, the sub CPU 2301 ends the zone effect when the second special symbol game is completed a specified number of times, and when the second special symbol is executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode, a separate effect lottery is performed. A single performance is executed based on the result of this performance lottery. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 preferably executes a predetermined effect that is not executed during the normal mode or that is executed infrequently, as the single effect to be executed. By doing so, since the player can easily grasp that the second special symbol has been executed more than the specified number of times in the challenge mode, it is possible to increase the interest when the predetermined effect is executed. .

In this challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A variable display effect of mini symbols corresponding to each symbol is displayed in the sub-area (however, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is always stopped). In this case, the sub CPU 2301 may perform an effect image that can grasp the remaining number of times of the challenge mode (that is, the remaining number of pending start information of the second special symbol), a countdown effect until the challenge mode ends, etc. .

Also, for example, when shifting from high accuracy mode A to the second challenge mode (that is, for example, when winning "general electric long open per" in the normal symbol game in high accuracy mode A), the sub CPU 2301 performs the above-mentioned zone production It is preferable to perform a chance presentation indicating that the expectation that the event will be performed is high.

(Game in the first challenge mode)
When shifting to the first challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed instruction effect.

When the player plays the game with the right hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passage gate 2126, and the normal symbol game is executed.

In the first challenge mode, for example, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the A time-saving game state until the first variable display of the second special symbol ends. Win the "Puden long open hit" with a probability of 1/1. When winning the "Public electric long open hit", the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the mode of "Public electric long open", and the player hits to the right, so that about two games are played. It is possible to let the ball enter the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232).

When the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the mode of "normal electric long open", when the game ball can be won in the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the second start The second special symbol game is executed for the number of wins (maximum 5 (relevant variation + 4 reserved)) that have won the mouth 2140 .

It should be noted that even if it is not possible to win the game balls up to the upper limit (for example, 5) in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the main CPU 2201 will continue to operate until the first variable display of the second special symbol ends, for example. Because it is internally controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, by winning again after that, the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232) game balls to the upper limit (for example, 5) It is possible to win prizes.

Therefore, for example, when the first variable display of the second special symbol has not ended in the first challenge mode (when the main CPU 2201 controls the A time-saving game state), the variable display time of the second special symbol , During the variable display of the second special symbol, it is preferable to set the time during which the variable display of the normal symbol can be performed at least once, more preferably a plurality of times. In this embodiment, the variable display time of normal symbols in the A time saving game state is 1000 msec (see FIG. 250). In addition, considering the time until the game ball fired toward the right area reaches the passage gate 2126, if the result of the second special symbol game is a loss, the second special symbol is variable in the A time-saving gaming state. The display time is 7000 msec (see FIG. 246).

When the second special symbol game is executed, the jackpot is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and the prize is won with a probability of 1/10.5, for example.

When the first variable display of the second special symbol ends, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed instruction effect.

In the first challenge mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the big win has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the first challenge mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. The mode is shifted to the second big hit mode with a probability of 100%. However, it is not essential to shift to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 100% in the first challenge mode.

It should be noted that the above "even if there is a remaining hold on the start information of the second special symbol" is precisely "a command indicating that there is a remaining hold on the start information of the second special symbol. (same below).

Also, in the first challenge mode, if the player wins the winning prize for releasing the accessory, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100% as long as the player hits to the right. Then, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the V prize has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the first challenge mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. Let

In the first challenge mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the V prize was not won in spite of the fact that the prize was won in the prize release, the start information of the second special symbol is still pending. , the first challenge mode is continued, and if there is no remaining reservation for the start information of the second special symbol, the first challenge mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal game state.

In the first challenge mode, when the first variable display of the second special symbol ends, the A time-saving game state ends internally and the main CPU 2201 controls the normal game state, so the second special symbol after the second time. In the game, in addition to the big win and the free prize, for example, with a probability of 1/10.5, you can also win a time-saving win.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the time saving hit is won in the first challenge mode, if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the first challenge mode is continued, and the start information of the second special symbol is continued. If there is no remaining pending, the first challenge mode is terminated. That is, even if the winner is selected in the first challenge mode, the transition to the high probability mode A is made until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all the start information of the second special symbol that is being held. Without doing, the first challenge mode continues.

In addition, the first challenge mode is continued in spite of winning the time-saving prize in the first challenge mode, and after that, before the end of the first challenge mode, the jackpot is won or the prize is won. In addition, when receiving a command indicating that a V prize has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second jackpot mode. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 does not clearly indicate to the player that the prize has been won for the time saving prize. In addition, as described above, after the second jackpot mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts from the second jackpot mode to the special mode.

When the first challenge mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to high accuracy mode A or normal mode.

The sub-CPU 2301 shifts to the high-accuracy mode A when the time-saving hit is won in either one or more of the second special symbol games executed before the end of the first challenge mode. .

In addition, the reason why the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the normal mode is that all of the second special symbol games that have been executed once or multiple times before the end of the first challenge mode are lost (even if the character is released). (Including the case where V was not won regardless). However, if all of the second special symbol games executed once or multiple times until the end of the first challenge mode are lost, it is not necessary to shift to the normal mode. For example, it may be shifted to a high-precision mode A (false) that is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the high-precision mode A in appearance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the time saving hit is won in the first challenge mode, the first challenge mode continues until the second special symbol game for all of the pending second special symbol start information is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of winning per hour in the first challenge mode, even if the first challenge mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the high accuracy mode A regardless of whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is retained. good.

(Game in the second challenge mode)
Since the second challenge mode is started when the display mode indicating "universal electric long open hit" is displayed in the normal symbol display section 2161, the sub CPU 2301 first performs, for example, a right hitting instruction effect.

Then, when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the mode of “normal electric long open”, if the game ball can be won in the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 232), the second The second special symbol game is executed for the number of prizes won in the second start port 2140 (maximum 5 (the variation + 4 pending)).

In addition, when receiving a command indicating the end of operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a left-handed instruction effect.

When the game ball could not be won in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232) at the timing when the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) was operated (so-called second challenge mode was punctured), The second challenge mode ends.

When the second special symbol game is executed, similarly to the first challenge mode, the jackpot is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and the prize is won with a probability of, for example, 1/10.5.

In the second challenge mode, when a command indicating that the jackpot has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301, as in the first challenge mode, even if there is a remaining pending start information for the second special symbol. The second challenge mode is ended, and the mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode with a probability of 100%, for example. However, it is not essential to shift to the second big hit mode with a probability of 100% in the high probability mode A.

Also, as in the first challenge mode, when winning the winning prize in the second challenge mode, as long as the player hits to the right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%. Then, when a command indicating that the V prize is won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the second challenge mode and shifts to the second jackpot mode even if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. Let

When receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player did not win the V prize despite winning the winning prize in the second challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 receives the second special symbol in the same manner as in the first challenge mode. The second challenge mode is continued if there is a remaining reservation for the starting information, and if there is no remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the normal game state.

Since the second challenge mode is internally controlled to the normal game state by the main CPU 2201, in the second special symbol game, for example, the probability of winning is 1/10.5.

However, in the present embodiment, as in the first challenge mode, even if the second challenge mode wins the time saving, if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is continued, The second challenge mode is ended if there is no remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol. That is, even if the second challenge mode is won in the short time, the transition to the high probability mode A is performed until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all the start information of the second special symbol that is being held. Without doing, the second challenge mode continues.

In addition, the second challenge mode is continued in spite of winning the time-saving prize in the second challenge mode, and then, before the end of the second challenge mode, the player wins the big prize or wins the free prize. In addition, when receiving a command indicating that a V prize has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second jackpot mode. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 2301 does not clearly indicate to the player that the prize has been won for the time saving prize.

When the second challenge mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode A or the normal mode as in the first challenge mode.

As in the first challenge mode, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high-accuracy mode A in one or more of the second special symbol games executed until the second challenge mode ends. If you were elected.

In addition, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the normal mode because, like the first challenge mode, all of the second special symbol games executed once or multiple times until the second challenge mode ends are lost (characters Including the case where V was not won even though it was an open hit).

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the time saving hit is won in the second challenge mode, the second challenge mode continues until the second special symbol game for all of the pending second special symbol start information is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when winning in the second challenge mode in a short time, regardless of whether or not there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, even if it is made to end the second challenge mode and shift to the high probability mode A good.

[6-6-7. special mode]
In the special mode, it is controlled internally by the main CPU 2201 to the A time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the special mode is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (big hit probability, role release probability, time saving probability) when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the special mode are the same as in the normal mode. omitted.

However, in the special mode, similarly to the high-probability mode, even if the time saving hit is won, the time saving hit is ignored by the main CPU 2201, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the special mode. This point differs from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode (the C time saving game state by the main CPU 2201) when the time saving hit is won.

When the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the special mode, the winning probability of the normal electric long open hit (selected symbol command "fz2" at normal symbol hit) is approximately 1/1.1.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the special mode are, for example, as follows.
- The second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state, 10R jackpot game state) should end.

(Termination conditions and transition destination)
The conditions for ending the special mode are the same as the conditions for ending the above-described A time-saving gaming state. Specifically, for example, any one of the following conditions must be satisfied. Also shown are transition destinations of the game mode based on the satisfaction of the end condition.
・The number of variable display times of special symbols is 12 times (the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 12 times) ⇒Remaining hold mode Shift to remaining hold mode ・Winning 10R jackpot (selected pattern command "z6") (when condition device is activated) ⇒ Shift to 2nd jackpot mode ・Winning prize (selected pattern command "z5") and winning V (When the condition device is activated) ⇒ Transition to the second jackpot mode

In this way, the special mode continues until, for example, the variable display of special symbols is performed 12 times. Moreover, as described above, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" (the selection symbol command "fz2" at the time of the normal symbol hit) is as high as approximately 1/1.1. Furthermore, the winning probability per opening of the accessory is, for example, 1/10.5. Therefore, the special mode is a game mode advantageous to the player compared to the normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), challenge mode, and remaining pending mode. .

Further, in the present embodiment, in the special mode, if the winning per prize (selected symbol command "z5") is won but the V prize is not won (so-called puncture per opening of the prize), the main CPU 2201 executes A time-saving game. continue the state. Also, in the special mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won the prize, but receives a command indicating that the V prize has not been won, or receives a command indicating that the V prize has been won. is not received, the special mode continues.

However, it is not limited to this, and in the special mode, if the player wins the prize per release (selected symbol command "z5") but does not win the V prize (so-called puncture per release of the role), the main CPU 2201 performs A time saving. The game state may be ended and the normal game state may be entered. Also, in the special mode, when the sub CPU 2301 receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the player has won the prize, but receives a command indicating that the V prize has not been won, or receives a command indicating that the V prize has been won. is not received, the special mode may be terminated, for example, it may be shifted to another game mode such as the normal mode, or the normal mode or the residual Shift to the reservation mode (for example, if there is no remaining reservation for the start information of the second special symbol, shift to the normal mode, and if there is a remaining reservation for the start information of the second special symbol, shift to the remaining reservation mode ).

(Direction)
The sub CPU 2301 is advantageous to the player in the special mode, for example, compared to the normal mode, the high accuracy mode A, the high accuracy mode B (true), the high accuracy mode B (false), the challenge mode, and the remaining pending mode. A special performance is executed that enables the game mode (excluding the first big win mode and the second big win mode) to be grasped. Specifically, in the special mode, sub CPU 2301 displays a special effect image in the display area of display device 2007 (see FIG. 232) and outputs a special effect sound from speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241). This makes it possible to increase interest in the special mode.

Also, in this special mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and variable mini symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Display the display effect in the sub-region. In the special mode, it is considered that the mini-symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are almost stopped since there is little possibility that the holding of the start information of the second special symbol is interrupted.

(Game in special mode)
In the special mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed instruction effect. When the game is played with a left-handed player, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a warning or a right-handed instruction effect.

When the player plays the game with the right hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passage gate 2126, and the normal symbol game is executed.

The special mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the A short-time gaming state, so when the normal symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" is approximately 1/1.1. do. Then, every time the "Public electric long open hit" is won, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the "Public electric long open" mode, and when the player hits to the right, approximately two It is possible to win about the game balls in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). Such operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 continues until the special mode ends.

When the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the mode of "normal electric long open", when the game ball wins the second start port 2140 (see Fig. 232), the start information of the second special symbol is reserved. Then, when the condition for starting the second special symbol is established, the second special symbol game is executed.

When the second special symbol game is executed, the jackpot is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and the prize is won with a probability of 1/10.5, for example.

In the special mode, when receiving a command indicating that the jackpot has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode even if there is a remaining hold for the starting information of the second special symbol, and for example, 100%. To shift to a second big hit mode with probability.

Also, in the special mode, if the player wins the winning prize by releasing the accessory, as long as the player hits to the right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%. Then, when receiving a command indicating V winning from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode even if there is a remaining hold for the starting information of the second special symbol, and shifts to the second big win mode.

In the special mode, when the player does not win the V award even though he or she wins the winning prize for releasing the accessory, the special mode is continued unless the end condition of the special mode is satisfied. However, as described above, if the player does not win the V prize in spite of winning the winning prize in the special mode, the special mode may be ended and another game mode such as the normal mode may be entered. You may make it shift to normal mode or remaining reservation mode according to the presence or absence of remaining reservation about the starting information in a 2nd special design.

Since the special mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the A time-saving game state, even if the time-saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 ignores this and invalidates the time-saving win.

In the special mode, the main CPU 2201 issues a command indicating that the termination condition (for example, the number of variable display times of the special symbol is 12 times and the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened is 10000 times) is satisfied, except for the case of shifting to the second jackpot mode. , the sub CPU 2301 terminates the special mode and shifts to the remaining hold mode. However, when the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved when the special mode ends, it is preferable to shift to a mode different from the remaining reserved mode (for example, normal mode or high accuracy mode B (false)). . Furthermore, even if the start information of the second special symbol is suspended when the special mode ends, it is not limited to always shifting to the remaining suspension mode, and when the special mode ends, the remaining suspension If the conditions for transitioning to the mode are satisfied, the mode is shifted to the remaining pending mode, and if the conditions for transitioning to the remaining pending mode are not satisfied, a mode different from the remaining pending mode (for example, normal mode or high accuracy mode B ( false)).

In other words, the special mode has a game feature of how to win a prize and win a V prize by opening a character in a special pattern game limited in number of times.

In the special mode, although hitting to the right is the normal game mode, the player hits to the left, or the game ball flows down the left area 2106 even though the player hits to the right, causing the first There is a case where the starting gate 5120 is won. In this case, there is a possibility that the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied and the first special symbol game is executed because the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved. When the first special symbol game is executed, a jackpot is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and a time saving prize is won with a probability of, for example, 1/64. Then, when receiving a command indicating that the big win has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second big win mode without shifting from the special mode to the first big win mode. However, since the winning type in the case of winning a big win is determined by the main CPU 2201 with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 244), the number of rounds is divided (that is, the selection symbol commands "z1" and "z2"). ratio) is the same as in normal mode. On the other hand, when the time saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 ignores the time saving win.

[6-6-8. Remaining hold mode]
In this specification, after the conditions for starting the remaining pending mode, which will be described later, are satisfied, until the second special symbol game for the start information of all the second special symbols that are suspended is executed (until the end). , is defined as the remaining pending mode.

In addition, as described above, this sixth pachinko machine is a priority variation machine in which the starting condition for the second special symbol is established preferentially over the starting condition for the first special symbol, so the remaining reservation mode ends. If not (that is, if the second special symbol game is not performed for all of the reserved second special symbol start information), the first special symbol game is not performed. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball wins the first starting hole 5120, the first special symbol game is not executed in the remaining reservation mode.

(Initiation condition)
Conditions for starting the remaining hold mode are, for example, as follows.
· The special mode (A time-saving game state) must end.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special mode, if you win the prize for opening the role (selected symbol command "z5") but do not win the V prize (so-called puncture per opening for the role), the special mode (A time saving game state) continues. However, it is not limited to this, and as described above, if there is a remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol, it may be made to shift to the remaining reservation mode. That is, in the special mode, the start condition of the remaining reservation mode may be that the prize is not won in the winning per prize, but there is a remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol.

(Termination conditions and transition destination)
The conditions for ending the remaining pending mode and the transition destination of the game mode are as follows, for example.
・ Winning the 10R jackpot (selected pattern command "z6") (when the conditional device is activated) ⇒ Switch to the second jackpot mode ) ⇒ Execution of the second special symbol game for the starting information of all the second special symbols that have been shifted to/suspended in the second big hit mode (at the end) ⇒ High accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false) or go to normal mode

It should be noted that, when receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the V prize was not won despite the winning of the free prize (selected symbol command "z5"), the sub CPU 2301 receives the starting information of the second special symbol. If there is a remaining reservation, the remaining reservation mode is continued, and if there is no remaining reservation for the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining reservation mode is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

Also, when the second special symbol game is executed for the starting information of all the second special symbols that have been withheld, the transition destination of the game mode is the high probability mode B (true) and the high probability mode B as described above. (false), or normal mode, which will be explained in detail.

In this embodiment, unless the result of the second special symbol game is a big win or the character item is a hit and V prize is won, the second special symbol game for all of the reserved second special symbol start information is executed. The remaining hold mode is continued until the end.

Therefore, when receiving from the main CPU 2201 a command indicating that the time-saving hit has been won in either one or more of the second special symbol games performed during the remaining pending mode, the sub CPU 2301 is suspended. After the second special symbol game for all the starting information of the second special symbols is executed, the game mode is shifted from the remaining reservation mode to the high probability mode B (true).

Further, as described above, when all the results of the special symbol game in the remaining reservation mode are lost and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the high probability mode B (false). On the other hand, when all the results of the special symbol game in the remaining pending mode are lost and the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the normal mode.

In addition, in the remaining hold mode, even though all the results of the second special symbol game are winning (selected symbol command "z5"), if V has not been won even once, the time saving winning is won. Clearly not. Therefore, in this case, the sub CPU 2301 always shifts the game mode to the normal mode without shifting to the high accuracy mode B (false). However, this is not essential, and even if it is clear that you have not won the time saving hit in the remaining reservation mode, if the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 2301 changes the game mode to the high probability mode B (false ).

(Internal game state)
Remaining pending mode, as described above, is started when the special mode (A time-saving game state) ends. Therefore, the remaining hold mode is internally controlled to the normal game state by the main CPU 2201 unless winning is made for time saving.

Also, in the remaining pending mode, similarly to the challenge mode, if the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit, the state is internally shifted to the C time saving game state. Even when receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that the internal transition to the C time-saving gaming state has been made, the sub CPU 2301 does not perform the second special symbol game for all the reserved second special symbol start information. Continue the remaining pending mode until it ends (internally C time-saving game state), and after the second special symbol game for the start information of all the suspended second special symbols is completed, the high probability mode B (true ).

However, the sub CPU 2301 is not limited to this, and, for example, when the result of the time saving hit is derived, the second special symbol game for all the suspended second special symbol start information is completed. Even if not, the remaining hold mode may be shifted to the high accuracy mode B (true).

As described above, when a command indicating that the 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z6") has been won is received from the main CPU 2201 in the remaining hold mode, and when the winning prize is released (selected symbol command "z5") , and receives a command from the main CPU 2201 indicating that it has won the V prize, the sub CPU 2301 receives the remaining second special symbol game for all of the suspended second special symbol start information even if the second special symbol game has not ended. The holding mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode. In this case, if the start information of the second special symbol remains on hold at the end of the remaining hold mode, the second special symbol game for the start information of the second special symbol is the special mode after the end of the second jackpot mode. is executed in

(Various probabilities)
When the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the remaining pending mode, various probabilities (big hit probability, role release probability, time saving probability) are the same as in the normal mode. therefore omitted.

Further, when the normal symbol game is executed in the remaining hold mode, the winning probability of "general electric long open win" is extremely low, for example, 1/32768.

However, in the remaining pending mode, if the result of the special symbol game is a time saving hit, the remaining pending mode continues until the second special symbol game for the start information of all the suspended second special symbols is completed. If so, the main CPU 2201 may internally control the C time-saving gaming state. In this way, when the main CPU 2201 is internally controlled to the C time-saving gaming state in the remaining hold mode, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" (selected symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit) is 48, for example. becomes 1 of

(Direction)
In this remaining hold mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs zone effects in the main area of the display device 2007 in the same manner as in the challenge mode.

Also, in this remaining pending mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and mini symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A variable display effect is displayed in the sub-area (however, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is always stopped).

(Game in Remaining Hold Mode)
In the remaining reservation mode, when the second special symbol game corresponding to the remaining reservation is executed, a big win is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and a prize is won with a probability of, for example, 1/10.5.

When receiving from the main CPU 2201 a command indicating that the jackpot has been won in the remaining reserve mode, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the remaining reserve mode even if there is a remaining reserve for the starting information of the second special symbol, for example, 100%. is shifted to the second jackpot mode with a probability of

Also, in the remaining hold mode, when the player wins with the prize released, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100% as long as the player hits to the right. Then, when a command indicating the V winning is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the remaining reservation mode even if there is a remaining reservation regarding the starting information of the second special symbol, and shifts to the second big win mode. .

Even if the V prize is not won in spite of winning per prize release in the remaining reservation mode, the remaining reservation mode continues as long as the remaining reservation of the second special symbol remains.

In addition, since the remaining hold mode is internally controlled to the normal game state by the main CPU 2201, in the second special symbol game, for example, the probability of 1/10.5 is 1/10.5.

However, in this embodiment, even if winning per time saving in the remaining hold mode, if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining hold mode is continued, and the remaining start information of the second special symbol is continued. If there is no hold, the remaining hold mode is terminated. That is, even if you win in the time saving mode in the remaining reservation mode, until the second special symbol game is executed (finished) for all the start information of the second special symbol that is being suspended, the high probability mode B (true) The remaining pending mode is continued without transitioning to .

In addition, the remaining suspension mode is continued in spite of winning the short-time winning in the remaining suspension mode, and then, before the end of the remaining suspension mode, the player wins the jackpot or wins the prize release and wins the V prize. When receiving a command indicating that the game has been played from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second jackpot mode. In this case, it is preferable not to indicate to the player that the prize has been won.

When the remaining pending mode ends, the sub CPU 2301 shifts to high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), or normal mode.

The transition to the high probability mode B (true) is made when winning in any of a plurality of second special symbol games executed until the end of the remaining reservation mode ends.

In addition, the transition to the high-accuracy mode B (false) is because all of the multiple second special symbol games that were executed until the end of the remaining hold mode were lost (even though the character was released) (including the case where V is not won), and the above-described predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

In addition, the transition to the normal mode is due to the fact that all of the multiple second special symbol games that have been executed until the end of the remaining hold mode are lost (even though the character was released, the V prize was not won. ), and the above-described predetermined effect condition is not established.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if winning is made in the time saving mode in the remaining reservation mode, the remaining reservation mode is continued until the second special symbol game for all the start information of the second special symbol that is being reserved is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when winning in the time saving mode in the remaining hold mode, the remaining hold mode is terminated regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol, and the mode is shifted to the high probability mode B (true). good too.

[6-6-9. bliss mode]
In the blissful mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the B time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the blissful mode is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal.

(Various probabilities)
Various probabilities (big hit probability, role release probability, time saving probability) when the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) is executed in the bliss mode are the same as in the normal mode. omitted.

Moreover, in the blissful mode, even if the main CPU 2201 wins a time-saving hit, it is ignored, and the sub CPU 2301 continues the blissful mode in the same way as in the high-probability mode. This point differs from the normal mode in which the sub CPU 2301 shifts to the high accuracy mode (C time saving game state) when elected for time saving.

When the normal symbol hit determination process is executed in the blissful mode, the winning probability of the "universal electric long open win" (selected symbol command "fz2" at normal symbol win) is approximately 1/1.1.

(Initiation condition)
The conditions for starting the bliss mode are, for example, as follows.
・Normal mode, high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), or high accuracy mode B (false) (that is, when the main CPU 2201 controls the normal game state or C time saving game state ), the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value.

(Termination conditions and transition destination)
The conditions for ending the blissful mode are, for example, satisfying any one of the following conditions. Also shown are transition destinations of the game mode based on the satisfaction of the end condition.
・ 500 times of variable display of special symbols (the sum of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 500 times) ⇒ Normal mode (However, the ceiling counter is not updated)
・Winning the jackpot (selected pattern command "z1", "z2", "z6") (when the condition device is activated) ⇒ Switch to the first jackpot mode or second jackpot mode ・Accessory release hit (selected pattern command "z5") ) and win a V prize (when the condition device is activated) ⇒ Move to the second jackpot mode

In the blissful mode, the probability of winning the "general electric long open win" (selected symbol command "fz2" at the time of the normal symbol win) in the normal symbol game is as high as 1/1.1. Moreover, the winning probability per opening of the special symbol game is, for example, 1/10.5. Therefore, the condition of "500 variable display times of special symbols" is a condition that is not normally satisfied. Therefore, the blissful mode is a game mode in which the transition to the second jackpot mode is almost decided.

In addition, the condition for ending the blissful mode is not limited to the above. For example, the "general electric long open hit" is derived, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10000 times as a condition that is not usually met), and the accessory open hit (Selected symbol command "z5"), but not winning V (so-called puncture per opening of the character), etc. may be included in the end condition of the blissful mode. By including such a condition in the end condition of the blissful mode, it is possible to make the player feel tense even in the blissful mode, and to increase the amusement of the game.

(Direction)
In the blissful mode, the sub CPU 2301 executes, for example, a blissful effect that allows the player to know that the game mode is almost guaranteed to shift to the second jackpot mode. Specifically, sub CPU 2301 displays a blissful effect image in the display area of display device 2007 (see FIG. 232) and outputs a blissful effect sound from speaker 2032 (see FIG. 241) in the blissful mode. This makes it possible to enhance the interest in the blissful mode.

In addition, bliss mode is normal mode, high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true)), or high accuracy mode B (false) game mode when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, that is It is a game mode in the B time-saving game state. Therefore, there is no need to provide the bliss mode in a pachinko game machine that does not have the B time-saving game state.

Also, in this blissful mode, the sub CPU 2301 displays, for example, a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol in the main area, and variable mini symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A display effect is displayed in the sub-area (however, the mini-symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is always stopped).

(Game in bliss mode)
In the blissful mode, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a right-handed instruction effect. When the game is played with a left-handed player, the sub CPU 2301 performs, for example, a warning or a right-handed instruction effect.

When the player plays the game with the right hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the right area 2107 almost passes through the passage gate 2126, and the normal symbol game is executed.

Since the blissful mode is internally controlled by the main CPU 2201 to be in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" is approximately 1/1.1. do. Then, every time the "Public electric long open hit" is won, the ordinary electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 232) operates in the "Public electric long open" mode, and when the player hits to the right, approximately two It is possible to win about the game balls in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 232). Such operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2146 continues until the blissful mode ends.

When the normal electric accessory 2146 (see Fig. 232) operates in the mode of "normal electric long open", when the game ball wins the second start port 2140 (see Fig. 232), the start information of the second special symbol is reserved. Then, when the condition for starting the second special symbol is established, the second special symbol game is executed.

When the second special symbol game is executed, the jackpot is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and the prize is won with a probability of 1/10.5, for example.

In the blissful mode, when a command indicating that the jackpot has been won is received from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 ends the blissful mode even if there is a remaining hold for the starting information of the second special symbol, and for example, 100%. To shift to a second big hit mode with probability.

Also, in the blissful mode, if the player wins by releasing the accessory, as long as the player hits to the right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%. Then, when receiving a command indicating the V winning from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the blissful mode even if there is a remaining hold for the starting information of the second special symbol, and shifts to the second jackpot mode.

In the blissful mode, when the player does not win the V prize despite winning the winning prize (so-called, when the winning prize is broken), the blissful mode continues. However, as described above, if the player does not win the V prize even though the prize is won in the prize release, the sub CPU 2301 may end the blissful mode and shift to the normal mode.

In the blissful mode, since the main CPU 2201 internally controls the B time-saving game state, even if the time-saving win is won by the main CPU 2201, it is ignored and the time-saving win is invalidated.

The blissful mode ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed, for example, 500 times. Therefore, there is almost no case where the blissful mode ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, for example, 500 times.

Thus, it can be said that the blissful mode is a game mode in which the player can enjoy the best feeling in which the shift to the second jackpot mode is almost guaranteed as long as the player hits to the right.

When receiving a command from the main CPU 2201 relating to conditions for ending the blissful mode, such as that the variable display of special symbols has been executed 500 times, the sub CPU 2301 terminates the blissful mode and shifts to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the main CPU 2201 internally controls the game state to the normal game state, so that it is possible to win a time-saving hit in the special symbol game. However, in the normal mode transferred from the blissful mode (that is, the normal game state that was transferred from the B time saving game state), the ceiling counter is not updated by the main CPU 2201 until the jackpot is won, so the bliss mode again (that is, the B time saving game state). no transition to

In the blissful mode, although hitting to the right is the normal game mode, the player hits to the left, or the game ball flows down the left area 2106 even though the player hits to the right, causing the first ball to fall. There is a case where the starting gate 5120 is won. In this case, there is a possibility that the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied and the first special symbol game is executed because the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved. When the first special symbol game is executed, a jackpot is won with a probability of, for example, 1/319, and a time saving prize is won with a probability of, for example, 1/64. When the sub CPU 2301 receives a command indicating that the big win has been won from the main CPU 2201, the sub CPU 2301 shifts the game mode to the second big win mode. However, when the time saving win is won, the main CPU 2201 ignores this and invalidates the time saving win.

[6-6-10. Overall game flow]
Next, the overall game flow seen from the player will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 and 260. FIG. The game flow described below assumes that the game is started in the normal mode. Further, internal control is executed by the main CPU 2201, and control of decorative symbols and effect images displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007 is executed by the sub CPU 2301. In order to explain with emphasis on the flow, the description of the main CPU 2201 and the sub CPU 2301 is omitted.

(normal mode)
In the normal mode, when the player plays the game with a left hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the left area 2106 . When a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400, the game ball enters one of the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A and the passage gate 5125B. On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 out of the game balls flowing down the left area 2106 enter the general prize winning opening 2122 or are discharged from the out opening 2178 to the outside of the machine.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball sorting device 5400 passes through the first start port 5120 (winning a prize), the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the condition for starting the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started.

When the first special symbol game is started, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007 . Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the first special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the first special symbol game, the probability that the stop mode indicating the big win is displayed is, for example, 1/319, and the probability that the stop mode that indicates the short time winning is displayed is, for example, 1/64. When neither the stop mode indicating the big win nor the stop mode indicating the time saving win is displayed, the stop mode indicating the loss is displayed.

When the stop mode indicating the big win is displayed, the normal mode is shifted to the big win mode. In this case, for example, there is a probability of 99% that the mode is shifted to the first jackpot mode, and a probability of 1% that the mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode. When it shifts to a 1st big-hit mode, it is controlled by 3R big-hit game state, for example, and when it shifts to a 2nd big-hit mode, it is controlled by 10R big-hit game state.

When the stop mode indicating the time-saving hit is displayed, the game shifts from the normal mode to the high-accuracy mode A.

When the stop mode indicating the failure is displayed, the normal mode continues.

In this way, in the normal mode, the probability of shifting to the high probability mode A is higher than the probability of shifting to the jackpot mode.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the pass gate 5125A or the pass gate 5125B, the starting information of normal symbols is withheld up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started. However, even if the normal symbol game is started, the winning probability of "normal electric long open hit" is extremely low (for example, 1/32768), and the normal symbol is only variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 2161. Therefore, it is considered that the player is hardly conscious of the result of the normal symbol game.

However, in the case that the "normal electric long open hit" is won as a result of the execution of the normal symbol game, the game shifts to the second challenge mode. In the normal mode, as described above, the winning probability of the "Public electric long open win" is extremely low, so when the "Public electric long open win" is won, the player is surprised by shifting to the second challenge mode. It is possible to increase interest.

(high accuracy mode A)
When shifting from the normal mode to the high-accuracy mode A, although the point that the player plays the game with the left hand is the same as the normal mode, compared to the normal mode, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" in the normal pattern game is increased. dramatically increased.

When the left-handed game ball enters the game ball sorting device 5400 and enters the pass gates 5125A and 5125B, the starting information of normal symbols is held up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started.

In the high accuracy mode A, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007 . Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the normal symbol game is displayed. However, in the high accuracy mode A, it is not essential that the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the normal design is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007, and the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design is displayed. You may

As a result of the normal symbol game, the probability of displaying the stop mode indicating "general electric long open hit" is, for example, 1/48, and the probability of displaying the stop mode indicating "general electric short open hit" is, for example, It is 47/48.

It is preferable that the stop mode indicating the "universal electric long open win" be a stop mode that allows the player to grasp that the result is advantageous, such as double rolls or chance rolls. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol game is "general electric long open hit", the ready-to-win effect is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol, and then "normal electric long open hit" is stopped. It is preferred to display aspects.

It is preferable that the stop mode indicating the "universal electric short-circuit hit" is a stop mode in which it is possible to grasp that the result is not advantageous to the player, such as a loose eye or a reach loss.

When the stop mode indicating "general electric long open win" is displayed in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, the second challenge mode is entered.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol game is performed 20 times without displaying the stop mode indicating "normal electric long open hit" in high accuracy mode A, or when the normal electric accessory 2146 opens 12 times (that is, normal When the symbol game is played 12 times), the high accuracy mode A is shifted to the normal mode.

(Second challenge mode)
When shifting to the second challenge mode, the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened in a predetermined release pattern (refer to the column of the selected symbol command "fz1" at normal symbol hit in FIG. 249). In addition, in a display area 2007a of the display device 2007, a right-handed hitting instruction effect for instructing a right-handed hit and a chance effect indicating that the zone effect is expected to be performed are displayed.

When the player hits to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, and the game ball hit to the right wins the second start port 2140, the maximum number of starting information of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). retained until That is, in the second challenge mode, the second special symbol game can be executed up to five times. While the second special symbol game is being executed, in the main area of the display device 2007, a zone effect is performed indicating that there is a high possibility of shifting to the jackpot mode. This zone effect is one of the effect modes in the second challenge mode.

On the other hand, when the game ball cannot be made to enter the second starting port 2140 while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, the second challenge is performed without executing the zone effect and the second special symbol game. mode ends.

When the second challenge mode ends, the normal mode is entered. However, this is not essential, for example, if the first special symbol game is less than 20 times and the opening of the normal electric accessory 2146 is also less than 12 times (that is, the normal symbol game is less than 12 times), the probability is high. You may make it return to mode A.

While the zone effect is being performed, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007 . Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the second special symbol game, the probability of displaying a stop mode indicating a big win is, for example, 1/319, but the probability of displaying a stop mode indicating a winning of a role is much higher than that of a big win. (eg, 1/10.5).

When the stop mode indicating the big win is displayed, the second challenge mode is ended and the mode shifts to the second big win mode.

On the other hand, even if the stop mode indicating the big win is not displayed, when the stop mode indicating the accessory release win is displayed, the V-attacker 2152 releases in a predetermined release pattern, and the V-attacker 2152 is made to enter the game ball. is displayed in the display area 2007 a of the display device 2007 .

Then, when the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the game shifts to the second jackpot mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the player wins the prize when the prize is released, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100% as long as the player hits to the right.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the stop mode indicating the winning of the accessory release is a stop mode (for example, doubles) indicating that the result is advantageous for the player. In this case, it may be a stop mode that can distinguish between the mode of indicating a free prize win and the mode of indicating a big win, or the mode of stopping that is difficult or impossible to distinguish between the mode of indicating a free prize win and the mode of indicating a big win. may be

When the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 during the opening of the V attacker 2152 does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the second challenge mode is continued if there is a remaining hold for the start information of the second special symbol. , If there is no remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol, the second challenge mode is terminated.

After the end of the second challenge mode, in the second special symbol game of one or more times (maximum 5 times) performed in the second challenge mode, if it is won in the short time, it shifts to the high probability mode A. , If all are lost, it shifts to normal mode.

In addition, even if you have won the time saving hit in the second challenge mode, in order to conceal whether or not you have won the time saving hit, if you win the time saving hit, the same stop mode as the stop mode showing the loss is displayed. preferably displayed. As a result, even if the second challenge mode ends without winning the jackpot or the free winning prize in the second challenge mode, the player is expected to move to the high probability mode A. It is possible to increase interest by giving it to.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit or a free hit, a long-time effect such as a ready-to-win effect is not performed. As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 245), regardless of the result of the second special symbol game, the variable display time in one second special symbol game is, for example, 8000 msec or 13000 msec. is.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 245), in the second challenge mode, if the variable display time of the second special symbol or the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is relatively long ( For example, when the variable display time is 13000 msec), the expected value for displaying the stop mode indicating the big win or the stop mode indicating the winning of the accessory is high compared to when the variable display time is relatively short (eg, when it is 8000 msec). However, the variable display time does not vary greatly according to the result of the second special symbol game, and a simple effect image is displayed compared to the first special symbol game in the normal mode, for example.

In addition, if the first stopped symbol (eg, left symbol) and the second stopped symbol (eg, right symbol) are the same symbol (if it is a reach), for example, "Kakeen" or "Keen ” is output from the speaker 2032 to enhance interest.

In this way, the second challenge mode shifts to the second big win mode by winning the prize when the character is released rather than expecting to win the big prize in the second special symbol game which can be executed up to five times. This is a mode in which the game is played with the expectation that

(Second jackpot mode)
The second jackpot mode continues until the 3R jackpot game state or the 12R jackpot game state ends. Then, when these jackpot game states are finished, the second jackpot mode is finished and the game shifts to the special mode.

(special mode)
In the special mode, the time-saving function of the A time-saving game state is activated, and the game is played right-handed. In this special mode, when the player plays the game with the right hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . When the game ball flowing down the right region 2107 passes through the passage gate 2126, the starting information of normal symbols is withheld up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started.

In the special mode, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007 . Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

In the special mode, as a result of the normal symbol game, the probability of winning the "universal electric long open win" is, for example, 1/1.1 (see FIG. 248), so when the normal symbol game is performed, it is almost the same as every game. Then, the normal electric accessary 2146 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (refer to the column of the selected symbol command "fz2" at the time of normal symbol per reference in FIG. 249).

When the player hits to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open and the game ball hit to the right wins the second start port 2140, the start information of the second special symbol is withheld. In addition, even if the second starting port 2140 cannot be won while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, the special mode is continued.

When the second special symbol game is performed, the probability of displaying the stop mode indicating the big win is, for example, 1/319, but the probability of displaying the stop mode indicating the free winning of the character is much higher than the big win. probability (eg, 1 in 10.5).

Then, when the stop mode indicating the winning of the accessory release is displayed, the V-attacker 2152 releases in a predetermined release pattern, and the display device 2007 displays an effect image or the like prompting the V-attacker 2152 to enter the game ball. It is displayed in area 2007a.

Then, including the case of winning a big hit, when the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the game shifts to the second big winning mode. Incidentally, as described above, when the player wins the winning prize for releasing the accessory, as long as the player hits to the right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%. However, in the present embodiment, the special mode continues even if the V prize is not won when the winning prize is opened, but the special mode is not limited to this. For example, it may be shifted to another game mode such as the normal mode, or may be shifted to the normal mode or the remaining reservation mode according to the presence or absence of the remaining reservation for the start information of the second special symbol.

In this special mode, the variation pattern and the variable display time are determined with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 246) of special symbols for high start.

In the special mode, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 12 times (exactly, the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 12 times), the special mode ends.

When the special mode ends, if the starting information of the second special pattern is reserved, the mode is shifted to the remaining reserved mode, and if the starting information of the second special pattern is not reserved, the mode is transferred to the normal mode.

(remaining pending mode)
In the remaining pending mode, the second special symbol game is executed up to four times. Also, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, the zone effect explained in the second challenge mode is performed while the second special symbol game is being executed.

In this remaining pending mode, the main area of the display device 2007 displays a variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed. In addition, the remaining hold mode is a normal game state in which the time saving function does not operate internally.

In the remaining pending mode, as in the special mode, the probability that the stop mode indicating the big win is displayed as a result of the second special symbol game is, for example, 1/319. On the other hand, the probability that the stop mode indicating the winning of the free prize is displayed is much higher than that of the big winning (for example, 1/10.5).

When the stop mode indicating the big win is displayed, the remaining pending mode is ended and the second big win mode is entered. At this time, if there is a remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol, this remaining reservation is used in the special mode after the second big win mode is finished, and is executed as the second special symbol game.

On the other hand, even if the stop mode indicating the big win is not displayed, when the stop mode indicating the accessory release win is displayed, the V-attacker 2152 releases in a predetermined release pattern, and the V-attacker 2152 is made to enter the game ball. is displayed in the display area 2007 a of the display device 2007 .

Also, when the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V winning opening 2155, the second jackpot mode is entered. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the player wins the prize when the prize is released, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100% as long as the player hits to the right.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the stop mode indicating the winning of the accessory release is a stop mode (for example, doubles) indicating that the result is advantageous for the player, as in the second challenge mode. In this case, it may be a stop mode that can distinguish between the mode of indicating a free prize win and the mode of indicating a big win, or the mode of stopping that is difficult or impossible to distinguish between the mode of indicating a free prize win and the mode of indicating a big win. may be

When the game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 during the opening of the V attacker 2152 does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, if there is a remaining reservation for the start information of the second special symbol, the remaining reservation mode is continued, If there is no remaining reservation for the starting information of the second special symbol, the remaining reservation mode is terminated.

After the end of the remaining reservation mode, when winning in any of the second special symbol games in the remaining reservation mode four times at maximum, the game is shifted to the high probability mode B (true). Therefore, when it transfers to high probability mode B (true), it becomes possible to suppress the decline of the interest by the completion|finish of remaining pending|holding mode. Since the game in the high accuracy mode B (true) is the same as the game in the high accuracy mode A described above, the explanation is omitted.

After the end of the remaining hold mode, if the results of the second special symbol game in the remaining hold mode performed up to 4 times are all lost, it will shift to the high probability mode B (false) at a certain rate. Otherwise, switch to normal mode.

When moving to the high accuracy mode B (false), the game itself is the same as the normal mode, but the appearance is similar to the high accuracy mode B (true) to the extent that it can not be distinguished. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest due to the termination of the hold mode.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol game in the remaining reservation mode that has been performed up to 4 times is all the winnings of the opening of the role, but the V prize has not been won even once, the winning of the time saving has not been won. Since it is clear, it shifts to normal mode.

In this way, the remaining hold mode is a mode in which the game is played in the expectation that the second big win mode will be pulled back by winning the free prize in the second special symbol game that can be executed up to four times.

In addition, even if the time saving win is won in the remaining reservation mode, in order to conceal the time saving win, the variable display of the second special symbol when the time saving win is won is a stop mode that indicates a loss. It is preferable to display the same stop mode. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (FIG. 245), the result of the second special symbol game is a time saving hit and a loss, normal variation The selectivity for each of A and normal variation B is the same. As a result, in the second special symbol game that can be executed up to four times in the remaining pending mode, it is possible to further grasp whether or not the winner has been won in the short time, even if it shifts to the high probability mode B (false). Even if there is, it becomes difficult to find out that it is in the normal game state internally, and it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as in the second challenge mode, even if the result of the second special symbol game is a big hit or a free hit, a long-time effect such as a ready-to-win effect is not performed. As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 245), regardless of the result of the second special symbol game, the variable display time in one second special symbol game is, for example, 8000 msec or 13000 msec. is.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 245), in the remaining pending mode, the variable display time of the second special symbol (that is, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol) is relatively long. When the variable display time is relatively short (for example, when it is 8000 msec), the expected value for displaying the stop state indicating the big win or the stop state indicating the free winning of the accessory is higher. high. However, the variable display time does not vary greatly according to the result of the second special symbol game, and a simple effect image is displayed compared to the first special symbol game in the normal mode, for example.

(High accuracy mode B (false))
In the high-accuracy mode B (false), when the player plays the game with a left hand, the shot game ball mainly flows down the left area 2106 . When a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 enters the game ball sorting device 5400, the game ball enters one of the first starting port 5120, the passage gate 5125A and the passage gate 5125B. On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the game ball sorting device 5400 out of the game balls flowing down the left area 2106 enter the general prize winning opening 2122 or are discharged from the out opening 2178 to the outside of the machine.

When the game ball that has entered the game ball sorting device 5400 passes through the first start port 5120 (winning a prize), the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the condition for starting the first special symbol is established, the first special symbol game is started.

When the first special symbol game is started, a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the main area of the display device 2007 . Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the first special symbol game is displayed.

As a result of the first special symbol game, the probability that the stop mode indicating the big win is displayed is, for example, 1/319, and the probability that the stop mode that indicates the short time winning is displayed is, for example, 1/64. When neither the stop mode indicating the big win nor the stop mode indicating the time saving win is displayed, the stop mode indicating the loss is displayed.

When a stop mode indicating a big win is displayed, the game shifts from the high probability mode B (false) to the big win mode. In this case, for example, there is a probability of 99% that the mode is shifted to the first jackpot mode, and a probability of 1% that the mode is shifted to the second jackpot mode. When it shifts to a 1st big-hit mode, it is controlled by 3R big-hit game state, for example, and when it shifts to a 2nd big-hit mode, it is controlled by 10R big-hit game state.

When the stop mode indicating the time-saving hit is displayed, the game shifts from the high accuracy mode B (false) to the high accuracy mode B (true). However, since the high-accuracy mode B (false) and the high-accuracy mode B (true) are the same or difficult to distinguish from the appearance, the player does not want the high-accuracy mode B (high-accuracy mode B in appearance). (true) and high-accuracy mode B (false) cannot be distinguished or are difficult to distinguish, so it is daringly described as "high-accuracy mode B" here) seems to continue.

In addition, when the first special symbol game is played 20 times, for example, without displaying the stop mode indicated by the big win or the time-saving win, the high-accuracy mode B (false) is terminated, and it is preferable to shift to the normal mode. This is not required.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the game ball distribution device 5400 (see FIG. 232) passes through the pass gate 5125A or the pass gate 5125B, the starting information of normal symbols is withheld up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started. However, even if the normal symbol game is started, the winning probability of "normal electric long open win" is extremely low (for example, 1/32768). However, in terms of appearance, it is difficult to distinguish or difficult to distinguish from the high probability mode B (true), which has a relatively high winning probability (for example, 1/48) for “Public Electric Long Open”. It becomes possible.

However, as described above, although the winning probability of the "general electric long open win" is extremely low, when the "universal electric long open win" is won as a result of executing the normal symbol game, the second challenge mode is entered. In this case, it is possible to increase interest by making the player believe that it was in the high-precision mode B (true) (internally C time-saving game state) even though it was in the normal game state internally. becomes.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened 12 times (that is, when the normal symbol game is played 12 times), it is preferable to shift to the normal mode, but this is not essential.

(1st jackpot mode)
As described above, in the normal mode or the high probability mode B (false), when the stop mode indicating the big win is displayed as a result of the first special symbol game, the mode shifts to the first big win mode with a probability of 99%. This first big win mode continues until the 3R big win game state ends. Then, when the 3R big win game state ends, the first big win mode ends and shifts to the first challenge mode.

(1st challenge mode)
When shifting to the first challenge mode, the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened in a predetermined release pattern (refer to the column of the selected symbol command "fz2" at the time of normal symbol hit in FIG. 249). In addition, in the display area 2007a of the display device 2007, an effect image instructing a right-hand shot and a zone forewarning effect image for notifying that a zone effect will be performed are displayed.

When the player hits to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, and the game ball hit to the right wins the second start port 2140, the maximum number of starting information of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). retained until That is, in the first challenge mode, as in the second challenge mode, the second special symbol game can be executed a maximum of five times. Also, while the second special symbol game is being executed, the above-described zone effect is performed in the main area of the display device 2007 as in the second challenge mode.

However, even if the second starting port 2140 cannot be won while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, the first challenge mode will not end, and the second special symbol game will always be executed at least once. It differs from the second challenge mode in that

Also, in the first challenge mode, in the first second special symbol game, the variation pattern and the variable display time are determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 246). In the second special symbol game, the variation pattern and the variable display time are determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 245). Therefore, if the result of the first second special symbol game in the first challenge mode is a loss, the variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 7000 msec. It is possible to accumulate a hold.

Except for the above points, the game in the first challenge mode is the same as the game in the above-described second challenge mode except for the control by the main CPU 2201 and the sub CPU 2301, so other explanations are omitted. .

(bliss mode)
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in normal mode or high probability mode A, when the number of variable display times of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number (when reaching the ceiling value), shift to bliss mode do. However, as described above, this blissful mode is not essential, so unless you win a jackpot in normal mode or high probability mode A or win a prize and win V, normal mode or high probability mode A continues. You may make it

In the blissful mode, the time-saving function of the B time-saving game state is activated, and the game is played with the right hand. However, as described above, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the ceiling value in normal mode and when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the ceiling value in high accuracy mode A, the time saving function, that is, the normal electric role The opening pattern of object 2146 is different (see Figures 248 and 249). That is, when the number of times of variable display of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value in the high probability mode A, the same time saving function as the time saving function in the high probability mode A operates.

However, the time saving function in the blissful mode may be the same when the number of variable display times of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value in the normal mode and when the number of variable display times of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value in the high accuracy mode A. In this case, since it is not necessary to install a plurality of time-saving functions, it is possible to suppress the control load.

When the game ball flowing down the right region 2107 passes through the passage gate 2126, the starting information of normal symbols is withheld up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). Then, when the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, the normal symbol game is started.

In the blissful mode, the main area of the display device 2007 displays a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the result of the second special symbol game is displayed.

In the blissful mode, the probability of winning the "general electric long open hit" as a result of the normal symbol game is, for example, 1/1.1 (see FIG. 248). Therefore, when the normal symbol game is performed, the normal electric accessory 2146 is released in a predetermined pattern (see FIG. 249, the column of the selected symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" at the time of the normal symbol hit) as in almost every game. , and the game ball can enter the second starting port 2140.

When the player hits to the right while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open and the game ball hit to the right wins the second start port 2140, the start information of the second special symbol is withheld. In addition, even if it is not possible to win the second starting port 2140 while the normal electric accessory 2146 is open, the blissful mode is continued. However, as described above, the blissful mode may be ended when the "universal electric long open win" is won as a result of the normal symbol game.

When the second special symbol game is performed, the probability of displaying the stop mode indicating the big win is, for example, 1/319, but the probability of displaying the stop mode indicating the free winning of the character is much higher than the big win. probability (eg, 1 in 10.5).

Then, when the stop mode indicating the winning of the accessory release is displayed, the V-attacker 2152 releases in a predetermined release pattern, and the display device 2007 displays an effect image or the like prompting the V-attacker 2152 to enter the game ball. It is displayed in area 2007a.

In addition to the case of winning the jackpot, when the game ball entering the V prize winning device 2150 while the V attacker 2152 is open passes through the V prize opening 2155, the second jackpot mode is entered. Incidentally, as described above, when the player wins the winning prize for releasing the accessory, as long as the player hits to the right, the V prize can be won with a probability close to 100%.

When the V-attacker 2152 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern by the display of the stop mode indicating the winning of the prize, and the V-award is not won, the blissful mode continues. However, as described above, if the V-attacker 2152 does not win a prize even though the V-attacker 2152 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern, the blissful mode is ended (so-called blissful mode is punctured) and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. can be However, the normal mode shifted in this way is a normal mode that can no longer be expected to shift to the bliss mode.

Thus, in the blissful mode, when the normal symbol game is played, the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened by winning the "general electric long open win" at 1/1.1, for example. Then, when the second starting port 2140 is won when the normal electric accessory 2146 is opened, the second special symbol game is executed. In this second special symbol game, for example, it is possible to win the winning prize with a probability of 1/10.5, and shift to the second jackpot mode after winning the V prize. Therefore, once shifting to the blissful mode, the shift to the second jackpot mode is almost decided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest that may occur when the normal mode or the high-probability mode A does not shift to the jackpot mode for a long time.

In addition, although it was mentioned above that it is not essential to provide a blissful mode, not only the blissful mode but also the first jackpot mode, second jackpot mode, normal mode, high accuracy mode (high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true) )), high probability mode B (false), challenge mode (first challenge mode, second challenge mode), special mode, and remaining pending mode are not necessarily provided, any one or A plurality of modes may not be provided.

[7. Seventh pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the seventh pachinko game machine will be described below. This seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixing machine, similar to the third pachinko gaming machine and the sixth pachinko gaming machine. is also a priority variation machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is preferentially established.

Hereinafter, in describing the seventh pachinko game machine, the description of points common to the third pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the description of the seventh pachinko game machine are the same as those of the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine described below, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include the C time saving hit, and the specification is not controlled to the C time saving game state, but this is not limited to this. Instead, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include the C time saving hit. In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine described below, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (for example, 300 times) and has a specification that is controlled to B time-saving game state, but not limited to this, B time-saving game state It may be a specification that is not controlled by

In addition, in the following description of the seventh pachinko game machine, the configuration and processing having the same functions as those of the third pachinko game machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the third pachinko game machine. However, the points different from the third pachinko game machine, ie, the configuration and processing to be newly explained in the explanation of the seventh pachinko game machine, are given new reference numerals and step numbers.

[7-1. Game board unit]
Since the game board unit 2010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine is the same as that of the third pachinko game machine shown in FIG.

[7-2. electrical configuration]
Since various members such as various control circuits and various switches provided in the seventh pachinko game machine are the same as those of the third pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 88, description of these various members will be omitted.

[7-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 265, basic specifications different from the third pachinko game machine will be described. Incidentally, the seventh pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function is omitted below.

It should be noted that, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine described below, like the third pachinko gaming machine, variable probability control is not executed, and the main CPU 2201 performs variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). can be executed (game state that is not a jackpot game state), the normal game state in which the time saving control is not executed, the A time saving game state in which the time saving control is executed from the next game after the jackpot game state has ended, and the ceiling counter It is possible to control to one of the game states of the B time-reduction game state in which the time-reduction control is executed when reaches the ceiling value. The regular game mode in the normal game state is left-handed, and the regular game mode in the A time-reduction game state and B time-reduction game state is right-handed.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 can control any one of the A1 time saving game state, A2 time saving game state and A3 time saving game state as the A time saving game state.

The game state controllable by the main CPU 2201 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be a specification that can be controlled in one of the normal game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state (specification including all of each time saving game state of A to C). However, even if it is a specification that can be controlled in any of the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state (a specification that does not include only the B time-saving game state among the time-saving game states of A to C) Alternatively, it may be a specification that can be controlled to either the normal game state or the A time saving game state (specification that includes only the A time saving game state among the time saving game states A to C).

[7-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 262 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

When the game ball wins (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing based on the first special symbol hit determination processing using the first special symbol hit determination random number value. The result of is determined as "big hit", "hit to release the character" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes through) the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol hit determination process based on the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol hit determination random number value. The result of the determination process is determined as "big win", "accessory release win" or "losing".

Incidentally, the "accessory winning" is generally called a "minor winning", but is referred to as a "accessory winning" in the explanation of the seventh pachinko game machine.

In addition, among the "big win", "accessory release win" and "loss" as the results of the special symbol win determination process, the result accompanied by the operation of the condition device is only the "big win". If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "a winning role", the display mode indicating that "a winning role" is displayed on the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2163). Display unit 2164) (also referred to as "confirmed display" in this specification) alone does not operate the conditional device, and the conditional device is activated based on the V winning. Therefore, if the display mode indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 2163, second special symbol display portion 2164) but does not win V, the condition Device does not work.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 performs the big winning hole opening control process (see FIG. 94) as described in the third pachinko game machine. In this seventh pachinko game machine, the game state when the big winning hole opening control process is being executed is called a jackpot game state. In this jackpot game state, variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not performed.

In the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 activates the special electric shutter 2134 by the special electric solenoid 2135, and performs a round game in which the big winning opening 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. Assuming that the number of games that can be won in the big winning hole 2131 in one round of the round game is, for example, 10, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning one game ball in the big winning hole 2131 is, for example, 10. For example, 100 game balls are paid out as prize balls per round.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "a winning prize", the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) as described in the third pachinko game machine. )I do. In this seventh pachinko game machine, the game state when the V winning device opening control process is being executed is referred to as the game state for opening the accessory. Then, the game ball entered into the V winning device 2150 by being controlled to the game state per opening (that is, the V attacker 2152 was operated to open the open/close winning opening 2151) passes through the V winning opening 2155. When it does (when it wins V), the main CPU 2201 controls to the jackpot game state. In this embodiment, as long as the player hits to the right in the per-accessory game state, the probability of winning V is close to 100%. However, if the V prize is not won even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory hit", the main CPU 2201 controls to the jackpot game state after the accession game state is ended. Without doing so, the game state is returned to the game state when the player wins the prize when the accessory is released.

In the V-winning device opening control process, the main CPU 2201 activates the V-attacker 2152 and controls the opening/closing winning port 2151 to be in a prize-open winning game state in which the open/close winning port 2151 is kept open for a predetermined period of time from the closed state. Assume that the number of games that can be won in the opening/closing winning opening 2151 in this per-access game state is, for example, 9, and the number of prize balls paid out when one game ball wins in the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is, for example, 9. , for example, 81 game balls are paid out as prize balls in the game state per opening of the accessory.

In addition, when the V prize is won in the accessory open winning game state, the main CPU 2201 controls to the big win game state in which the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. In this jackpot game state, the V winning device opening control process (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) executed in the accessory open winning game state is set as the first round game, and then the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. It is in a jackpot game state. In this case, the first round round game is a game in which the V attacker 2152 is activated and the V winning device 2150 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time. is operated to shift the V winning device 2150 from a closed state to open information for a predetermined period. However, the game is not limited to this, and in round games from the second round onward, the special electric shutter 2134 may be operated to open the big winning opening 2131 for a predetermined period of time.

Therefore, the expected value (e.g., 81) of the number of games paid out to the player as prize balls in the winning game state when the accessory is released once, and the number of games paid out as prize balls to the player in the one-time jackpot game state When compared with the expected value of , the expected value of the number of games paid out to the player as prize balls in one big win game state (for example, 100 per round game×the number of rounds) is larger.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "big win", the main CPU 2201 operates the special electric shutter 2134 in the big win game state to keep the big winning hole 2131 closed for a predetermined period of time. A round game that shifts to an open state over a plurality of rounds is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol win determination process is "a prize to be released" and a V prize is won, the main CPU 2201 activates the V attacker 2152 in the jackpot game state, causing the V prize device 2150 to move from the closed state. A round game shifting to an open state over a predetermined period is performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game state controlled based on the jackpot winning and the jackpot game state controlled based on the jackpot winning and the V winning are different in the role that operates as the round game. However, not limited to this, for example, a jackpot game state controlled based on the jackpot winning without the special electric role product unit 2130, and a jackpot game state controlled based on the jackpot winning and the V winning. A common role (eg, V Attacker 2152) may be activated to execute a round game.

In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 may determine that the win is a "accessory win" when the win determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but this is not essential. For example, the main CPU 2201 does not determine the "accessory release win" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but only when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed. It may be possible to make a decision by "hit".

As shown in FIG. 262, the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes special symbols that are executed based on the winning of the start opening (first start opening 2120, second start opening 2140). (First special symbol, second special symbol) as data used in the hit determination process, "big hit", "accessory hit" or "losing" according to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The range (width) of the random number value for judging a special symbol determined in , and the judgment value data corresponding to it ("jackpot judgment value data", "accessory open judgment value data", "losing judgment value data") and relationship is stipulated.

In addition, in this seventh pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the special symbol hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, both the first special symbol hit determination random number value and the second special symbol hit determination random number value are generated in the range of 0 to 65535 (width).

As shown in FIG. 262, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, when the main CPU 2201 executes the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, a big hit is determined with a probability of approximately 1/100.05, It is decided with a probability of 1/65536 when the character is released, and the rest is decided as a loss. On the other hand, when the main CPU 2201 executes the winning determination process for the second special symbol, for example, a big win is determined with a probability of approximately 1/100.05, and a winning character is determined with a probability of approximately 1/34.5. is determined to be, and the others are determined to be lost.

Thus, the big hit probability is the same between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, the winning probability of opening the accessory is higher when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed than when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed.

[7-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 263 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is stopped based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the start port (first start port 2120, second start port 2140) and the aforementioned determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected pattern command" and the "designated pattern command" that determine the pattern. The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big win when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win or a free winning combination. ' is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when variable display of special symbols is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 263, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. select as That is, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 2120 is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command, Select "zA1" as the design designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the second starting port 2140 is any one of 30 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command, Select "zA1" as the design designation command.

Also, when the winning determination value data for opening the first special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 , selects "z2" as the selection symbol command, and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z3" is selected as the command, and "zA3" is selected as the design designation command.

Also, when big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, a selected symbol command and a symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 40 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the winning determination value data for open role is obtained as a result of the second special symbol winning determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 53, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 54 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z8" is selected as the command, and "zA6" is selected as the design designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the seventh pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display portion 2163 or the second special symbol display portion 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. Also, in the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 2163, second special symbol display portion 2164), a big hit display mode, the display mode for winning the prize, or the display mode for losing. When the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a big hit or a free hit, for example, a display mode corresponding to each of the selected pattern commands "z0" to "z2" and "z4" to "z7" is displayed. . Therefore, the player can determine the type of win by checking the display mode derived to the first special symbol display portion 2163 or the second special symbol display portion 2164 .

[7-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 264 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table corresponds to the game state (normal game state, A short game state, B short game state) at a predetermined timing and the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referred when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned "game state at a predetermined timing" is, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a big hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"). If there is, it corresponds to the time when the special symbol variable display is started, that is, the time when the special symbol variable display start process (see S2013 in FIG. 94) is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit. The game state at the time of V winning after this is derived corresponds to the "game state at a predetermined timing". When the V prize is not won even though it is derived that the winning of the special symbol is a winning as a result of the winning determination process, the main CPU 2201 does not control to the big winning game state.

The jackpot type determined with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) is, for example, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state, and the game state after the jackpot game state (that is, the jackpot game A type of time saving flag set at the end of the state). In this embodiment, the types of the A time saving flag are three types of A1 time saving flag, A2 time saving flag and A3 time saving flag, which will be described later.

The main CPU 2201 sets the determined number of rounds at the start of the big win game state (that is, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94)). Further, the main CPU 2201 sets the determined A time saving flag at the end of the jackpot game state (that is, jackpot end processing (S2020 in FIG. 94)).

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit (for example, the selected symbol command "z1") and the game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 performs a round The number is determined to be "3", and the A time reduction flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A3 time reduction flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "3" in the big winning opening preparation process, and sets the A3 short time flag in the jackpot ending process.

In addition, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the winning of the free bonus (for example, the selected symbol command "z6") and the game state at the time of the V win is the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 performs the round The number is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to “10” in the big winning opening preparation process, and sets the A2 short time flag in the jackpot ending process.

Furthermore, for example, if the result of the special symbol win determination process is a winning of the accession (for example, the selected symbol command "z6") and the game state at the time of the V win is the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 The number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A1 time saving flag. Then, the main CPU 2201 sets the number of rounds to "10" in the big winning opening opening preparation process, and sets the A1 short time flag in the jackpot ending process.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264), the result of the special symbol hit determination process is per open per role (for example, the selected symbol command "z7") and in the A time-saving game state In the column, the number of rounds and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state are not set. Although the details will be described later, in the A time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit (for example, the selected symbol command "z7"), the game state at the time of V winning becomes the normal game state. , A time-saving game state is impossible. Also, in the same way, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the per item release (for example, the selected symbol command "z6", "z7"), and in the column of the B time saving game state, the number of rounds and the big hit game The A time saving flag that is set when the state ends is not set. Details will be described later, but in the B time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit (for example, the selected symbol command "z6", "z7"), the game state at the time of V winning is This is because it is impossible for the player to be in the normal game state and in the B time-saving game state. However, in the above case, although it is not referred to in the big hit type determination process, the number of rounds and the A time saving flag set at the end of the big hit game state may be set.

In the following description of the seventh pachinko game machine, a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z5") is called a "3R jackpot". Similarly, a big win (selected symbol command "z4") in which the number of rounds is determined to be "10" according to the game state at the start of the variable display of special symbols is called a 10R big win.

In addition, in the description of the seventh pachinko game machine, the number of rounds is determined to be "10" according to the game state at the time of V winning. ) is referred to as "10R corresponding accessory release win", and the number of rounds is determined to be "3" according to the game state at the time of V winning (accessory release hit of the selected symbol command "z7") ) is referred to as “3R-compatible accessory release win”.

Furthermore, when the 3R jackpot is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164), or when the 3R-compatible accessory release hit is the special symbol display unit (in this embodiment, The jackpot game state that is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164) and is controlled when V wins is referred to as the 3R jackpot game state. Similarly, when the 10R jackpot is drawn to the special symbol display unit (the second special symbol display unit 2164 in this embodiment), or the 10R-compatible accessory release hit is the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 2163 , second special symbol display portion 2164) and controlled when V winning is referred to as a 10R jackpot game state.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 264, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win or a prize release hit, no matter what kind of big win (that is, the selected symbol command), A1 Among the time saving flag, the A2 time saving flag and the A3 time saving flag, it is determined as one of the A time saving flags. That is, after the end of the jackpot game state, it is always controlled to the A time saving game state in which one of the A1 time saving flag, A2 time saving flag and A3 time saving flag is set to ON. However, it is not limited to this, and after the end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot type that is controlled to the normal game state without setting any A time saving flag may be provided.

In addition, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 265, but in this embodiment, when the A1 time saving flag is set, when the A2 time saving flag is set, and when the A3 time saving flag is set , A end condition of the time saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "A time saving end condition") is different.

[7-3-3. A time saving end condition determination table]
FIG. 265 is an example of the A time saving end condition determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine. The A time saving end condition determination table refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 264) based on the determination of the big hit type. It is referred to when determining the A time saving end condition according to the type of flag).

The main CPU 2201 sets the determined A time saving end condition at the end of the big win game state (that is, the big win end process (S2020 in FIG. 94)).

As shown in FIG. 265, in this embodiment, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of saving time and the number of times of derivation per opening of the role product are determined. When either one of the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction end condition and the number of lead-out times per release of the accessory is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 ends the A time reduction game state and controls to the normal game state. In addition, the number of derivations per role release is determined for each of the types of per release per role (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"). and "z7" are all determined as the time-saving end condition A, the main CPU 2201 at the time when any one of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", and "z7" is derived. Ends the A time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 also terminates the A time-saving gaming state when the conditional device is activated.

In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction end condition differs according to the type of the A time reduction flag set after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction gaming condition corresponds to the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the first special symbol The sum of the number of times of variable display and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is simply referred to as "the number of times of variable display of special symbols"). However, not limited to this, in addition to or instead of determining the number of times of variable display of special symbols as the A time saving end condition, each of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is set to A It may be determined as a time saving end condition, and the A time saving game state may be ended when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

In addition, the number of derivation times per release of the role determined as the A time saving end condition is displayed in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164) per release of the role (selected symbol command " z2", "z6", and "z7") correspond to the fixed display count.

(If the A1 time saving flag is determined)
In this embodiment, when the A time saving flag set after the end of the big hit gaming state is determined to be the A1 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition, for example, 296 times, and releases the role. The number of derivations of winning (selected pattern command "z7") is determined to be, for example, one, while the number of derivation of winning (selected pattern command "z2", "z6") is not determined as A time saving end condition.

When the A1 time reduction flag set after the end of the big win game state is determined to be the A1 time reduction flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time reduction flag to ON at the end of the big win game state, and from the next game after the end of the big win game state, Control is made to the A1 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed, for example, 296 times at maximum. In view of the fact that the starting information of the second special symbol can be held up to four pieces at maximum, when the A1 short time flag is set to ON, the main CPU 2201 can perform the variable display of the second special symbol up to 300 times. Become.

Then, in the A1 time-saving game state, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed, for example, 296 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A1 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state.

However, in the A1 time-saving gaming state, the second special symbol display section 2164 is the display mode indicating that the special symbol is a hit (selected symbol command "z7") until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 296 times. , the main CPU 2201 immediately (at least, before it becomes possible for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 2155 by executing the per-accessory-opening gaming state), the A1 time-saving gaming state. and control to the normal game state. In other words, when the bonus release hit (selected symbol command "z7") is confirmed and displayed in the second special symbol display unit 2164, the game state when the variable display of the second special symbol is started is the A time saving game state. Even if there is, when the display mode indicating the winning of the free bonus (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the game state at the time of V winning becomes the normal game state. .

On the other hand, in the A1 time-saving gaming state, the display mode indicating that the special symbol is a variable display (selected symbol command "z2", "z6") until the variable display is executed 296 times is special. When the symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 2163, second special symbol display portion 2164) is confirmed and displayed, the main CPU 2201 controls to continue the A1 time-saving game state. That is, in this case, the game state at the time of V winning becomes the A1 time-saving game state.

(If determined as A2 time saving flag)
When the A2 time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times as, for example, 26 times as the A time saving end condition, and also determines the number of times of time saving to be, for example, 26 times. "z2", "z6", and "z7") is determined to be, for example, once.

When the A2 time reduction flag set after the end of the big win game state is determined to be the A2 time reduction flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time reduction flag to ON at the end of the big win game state, and from the next game after the end of the big win game state, Control is made to the A2 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed, for example, 26 times at maximum. In view of the fact that the starting information of the second special symbol can be reserved up to four pieces, when the A2 short time flag is set to ON, the main CPU 2201 can perform the variable display of the second special symbol up to 30 times. Become.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 26 times in the A2 time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time saving game state and controls to the normal game state.

However, in the A2 time-saving gaming state, the special symbol per hit (one of the selected symbol commands "z2", "z6" and "z7") is a special symbol until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 26 times. When it is confirmed and displayed on the display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164), the main CPU 2201 immediately (at least, the execution of the game state per accessory release to the V winning opening 2155 Before the passage of the game ball becomes possible), the A2 time-saving game state is terminated and the game state is controlled to the normal game state.

(If determined as A3 time saving flag)
When the A3 time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A3 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times as, for example, 4 times as the A time saving end condition, and the role release hit (selected symbol command "z2", "z6", and "z7") is determined to be, for example, once.

When the A short time flag set after the end of the big win game state is determined to be the A3 short time flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A3 short time flag to ON at the end of the big win game state, and from the next game after the end of the big win game state, Control is performed to the A3 time-saving game state in which the variable display of special symbols can be executed, for example, four times at maximum. In view of the fact that up to four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol can be reserved, when the A3 short time flag is set to ON, the main CPU 2201 can perform variable display of the second special symbol up to eight times. Become.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed, for example, four times in the A3 time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A3 time saving game state and controls the normal game state.

However, in the A3 time-saving gaming state, until the variable display of the special symbol is executed, for example, four times, the bonus per release (any of the selected symbol commands “z2”, “z6” and “z7”) is special. When the symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 2163, second special symbol display portion 2164) is confirmed and displayed, the main CPU 2201 immediately (at least, enters the V winning opening 2155 by executing the game state per opening of the accessory). (before the passage of the game ball becomes possible), the A3 time-saving game state is terminated and the game state is controlled to the normal game state.

The time reduction performance may be the same in the A1 time reduction game state, the A2 time reduction game state, and the A3 time reduction game state, or may be different between the A1 time reduction game state, the A2 time reduction game state, and the A3 time reduction game state. Alternatively, only one of the time saving performances of the A1 time saving game state, A2 time saving game state and A3 time saving game state may be made different from the other two time saving performances. When at least one of the A1 time-saving game state, A2 time-saving game state, and A3 time-saving game state is different from the other time-saving performances, the A1 time-saving game state may be the most advantageous time-saving performance for the player. , The A2 time saving game state may be the most advantageous time saving performance for the player, and the A3 time saving game state may be the most advantageous time saving performance for the player. It should be noted that the time-saving performance is, as described above, the performance of changing the ease of winning the game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 2140 (see FIG. 87) in this embodiment), Winning probability of "per symbol", variable display time of normal symbol, or/and opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the A time saving flag set after the end of the big hit game state is the A1 time saving flag, in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), per release (selected symbol command "z2" , “z6”) is not determined as the A time saving end condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of derivation times (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6") per release of the role product may be determined a plurality of times (for example, two times).

That is, if the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is the A1 time saving flag, the number of derivations of the per open role (selected symbol command "z2", "z6") is not determined as the A time saving end condition, In the A1 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 determines that the winning per release of the role (selected symbol commands “z2”, “z6”) is determined regardless of the number of derivations of the per released per (selected symbol command “z2”, “z6”). The A1 time-saving game state is not terminated based on the derivation.

On the other hand, if the A time-saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is the A1 time-saving flag, the number of derivation times of the role release hit (selected symbol command "z2", "z6") is determined to be, for example, two times. , In the A1 time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 2201 continues the A1 time-saving gaming state without terminating the A1 time-saving gaming state based on the derivation of the first accessory release hit (selected symbol command “z2”, “z6”). Therefore, the game state at the time of V winning becomes the A1 time-saving game state.

Then, when the first prize release per (selection symbol command "z2", "z6") is derived, if the V prize cannot be won, the game in the A1 time-saving game state continues, and this A1 In the time-saving gaming state, there may occur a case where the second accessory release hit is derived. In the case where the second role release win is derived, not only when the derived role release win is the selected symbol command "z7" but also when the selected symbol command "z2" or "z6" is selected. , the main CPU 2201 ends the A1 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state based on the derivation of the second prize release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"). Therefore, in this case, the game state at the time of V winning becomes the normal game state.

[7-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 266 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 267 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for high start in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine. 266 and 267 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding.

The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

The special symbol variation pattern tables of FIGS. 266 and 267 are tables referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process (see S1037 of FIG. 78) described in the first pachinko gaming machine, for example.

In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to a special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 266, for example.

On the other hand, in the A time-saving game state or B time-saving game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start shown in FIG. 267, for example. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, in any of the A time-saving gaming state and the B time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start shown in FIG. 267, for example. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined with reference to different variation pattern tables in the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state. Furthermore, the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined by referring to different variation pattern tables in the A1 time-saving gaming state, the A2 time-saving gaming state, and the A3 time-saving gaming state, or the A1 time-saving gaming state and A2. A variation pattern of a special symbol may be determined by referring to a different variation pattern table in either one of the time saving game state and the A3 time saving game state and the other A time saving game state. .

Also, in this seventh pachinko game machine, as in the first to sixth pachinko game machines, it is preferable to execute a look-ahead effect, but the explanation of the look-ahead effect is omitted here. .

[7-4. Main control processing]
As described above, in the seventh pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include the C time saving hit, and the specification is not controlled to the C time saving game state. Therefore, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 does not execute the processing (control) related to the C time-saving gaming state, but the other processing is basically the third processing except for the processing described below. Execute the same processing as the pachinko game machine. Hereinafter, among the processes executed by the main CPU 2201 of the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the processes different from those of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

[7-4-1. Special symbol variable display start processing]
In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol variable display start process shown in FIG. 268 instead of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 95). FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 268, after executing the special symbol determination process (S2024), the main CPU 2201 determines that the result of the special symbol hit determination process executed in S2023 is a big hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"). , “z4”, “z5”) (S2024A).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is a big win (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5") (if S2024A is YES), the main CPU 2201 With reference to the type determination table (see FIG. 264), the jackpot type determination process (S2025) is executed to determine the type of jackpot. As described above, what is determined in the jackpot type determination process is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state, and the type of A time saving flag set after the jackpot game state ends. It should be noted that the above-described jackpot type determination process (S2025) may be executed even when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is a loss.

On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) is not a big hit (selected symbol command "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"), that is, a free hit (selected symbol command "z2", “z6”, “z7”) (NO in S2024A), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

Thus, in the seventh pachinko game machine, only when the result of the special symbol win determination process (S2023) is a big win (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5") , special symbol variable display start processing (see S2013 in FIG. 94), that is, at the start of the variable display of special symbols, the jackpot type determination processing (S2025) is executed, and the result of the special symbol hit determination processing (S2023) is a winning per item. (Selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7"), the jackpot type determination process (S2025) is not executed at the start of variable display of special symbols. In this respect, after the special symbol determination process (S2024) is executed, the jackpot type determination process (S2025) is executed regardless of whether the jackpot is a jackpot or the role release hit. different from

[7-4-2. Special symbol game determination process]
In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol game determination process shown in FIG. 269 instead of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97). FIG. 269 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 269, in the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94), when it is determined to be a winning prize (if S2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 determines that the winning prize is open. A flag process (S2060A) is executed. This accessory release hit flag process (S2060A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 executes a prize release hit flag process (S2026A), and then shifts the process to S2061. In this respect, when it is determined that the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is the winning of the opening of the role (when S2060 determines YES), the opening of the role hitting flag process (S2060A) is executed. It is different from the third pachinko machine that moves the process to S2061 without

[7-4-3. Flag processing at the time of accessory release]
Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the accessory open hit flag process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2060A during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269) will be described. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing an example of the accessor product opening hit flag process (S2060A) executed during the special symbol game determination process of the seventh pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the A3 time saving flag is ON (S2251).

When it is determined in S2251 that the A3 time reduction flag is ON (when S2251 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2252.

At S2252, the main CPU 2201 executes the corresponding per-accessory-product-per-counter subtraction process. More specifically, the main CPU 2201 includes, as a counter for a 10R-compatible accessory release, a 10R-compatible accessory-open counter (z2) that counts the number of derivations of a 10R-compatible accessory-open win (selected symbol command “z2”). A role release winning counter (z6) that counts the number of derivations of wins (selected symbol command "z6") and a role release per counter that counts the number of derivation times of 3R-compatible role release winnings (selected symbol command "z7") (z7). Then, when the prize is won (S2060 determines YES), the subtraction process of the prize open hit counter corresponding to the prize hit is executed. For example, when winning the 10R corresponding role item open hit (selected symbol command "z2"), the corresponding role item open hit counter (z2) subtraction processing is executed as the corresponding role item open hit counter. After executing the process of S2252, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2253.

At S2253, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the corresponding bonus-release winning counter, that is, the bonus-release winning counter subtracted at S2252 is smaller than one.

In addition, in S2253, it may be determined whether or not not only the corresponding prize-released counter but also all prize-released counters are smaller than one.

When it is determined in S2253 that the corresponding prize-release counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S2253), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2254.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2253 that the corresponding accessory-opened hit counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S2253), the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory-opened-hit time flag process, and proceeds to the special symbol game. Return to the judgment processing (see FIG. 269).

In S2254, the main CPU 2201 sets the A3 time reduction flag to OFF. Although not shown, here, in addition to setting the A3 time saving flag to OFF, it is preferable to reset the flags and counters related to time saving control such as the counter for opening the role item and the A time saving flag. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag process, and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), when the A3 time saving flag is set, the per product release ("z2", "z6", "z7" each) is set to "once" as the number of derivations. Therefore, when the process of S2252 is executed, it is not judged to be less than 1 in S2253 (NO judgment in S2253), and it is always judged to be smaller than 1 in S2253 (YES judgment in S2253). Therefore, if the determination in S2253 is NO, error processing may be executed.

Returning to S2251, if it is determined that the A3 time saving flag is not ON (NO determination is made in S2251), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2255.

In S2255, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the A2 time saving flag is ON.

When it is determined in S2255 that the A2 time saving flag is ON (when S2255 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2256.

At S2256, the main CPU 2201 executes the corresponding per-accessory-per-accession counter subtraction process. This process is the same as the process of S2252. For example, when winning the 10R corresponding role item open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the corresponding role item open hit counter (z6) subtraction processing is executed as the corresponding role item open hit counter. After executing the process of S2256, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2257.

At S2257, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the corresponding bonus-released winning counter, that is, the bonus-released winning counter subtracted at S2252 is smaller than one. This process is the same as the process of S2253. Therefore, in this S2257 as well, it may be determined whether or not not only the corresponding prize-released hit counter but also all prize-released hit counters are smaller than one.

In S2257, when it is determined that the corresponding prize release counter is smaller than 1 (YES in S2257), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2258.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2257 that the corresponding role-opening hit counter is not smaller than 1 (S2257 is determined as NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the role-opening-hit time flag process, and the process proceeds to the special symbol game. Return to the judgment processing (see FIG. 269).

In S2258, the main CPU 2201 turns off the A2 time saving flag. Although not shown, here, in addition to setting the A2 time saving flag to OFF, it is preferable to reset the flags and counters related to time saving control such as the counter for opening the role item and the A time saving flag. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag process, and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In addition, as in the case where the A3 time saving flag is set, even when the A2 time saving flag is set, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), per release ("z2", " z6” and “z7”) is set to “once” as the number of derivations. Therefore, when the process of S2256 is executed, it is never determined that it is less than 1 in S2257 (NO determination in S2257), and it is always determined that it is less than 1 in S2257 (YES determination in S2257). Therefore, error processing may be executed even if the determination in S2257 is NO.

Returning to S2255, if it is determined that the A2 time saving flag is not ON (NO determination is made in S2255), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2259.

In S2259, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the A1 time saving flag is ON.

When it is determined in S2259 that the A1 time saving flag is ON (when S2259 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2260.

In S2260, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the winning prize is the 3R corresponding prize of the selected symbol command "z7".

In S2260, the winning prize is not the 3R corresponding role release hit of the selected symbol command "z7", that is, the 10R corresponding role opening hit (selected symbol command "z2") or the 10R corresponding role opening hit (selected symbol command command "z6") (if NO is determined in S2260), the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory open hit flag process, and shifts the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269). back to When the A1 time saving flag is set, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), the number of times of derivation per 10R corresponding role release ("z2", "z6") is not set. be.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2260 that the winning prize is the 3R corresponding prize of the selected symbol command "z7" (if YES is determined in S2260), the main CPU 2201 proceeds to S2261. to

In S2261, the main CPU 2201 executes a bonus release per counter (z7) subtraction process. After executing the process of S2261, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2262.

When it is determined in S2262 that the accessory release hit counter (z7) is less than 1 (YES in S2262), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2263.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2262 that the prize-opened-hit counter (z7) is not less than 1 (NO in S2262), the main CPU 2201 ends the prize-opened-hit flag process, and the processing is changed to a special symbol. Return to the game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In S2263, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time reduction flag to OFF. Although not shown, here, in addition to setting the A1 time saving flag to OFF, it is preferable to reset the flags and counters related to time saving control such as the counter for opening the role item and the A time saving flag. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the accessory release hit flag process, and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 269).

In addition, when the A1 time saving flag is set, as shown in the A time saving end condition determination table (see FIG. 265), "1 time" is set as the number of derivations per 3R-compatible role release ("z7"). be. Therefore, when the process of S2261 is executed, it is never determined that it is not less than 1 in S2262 (NO determination in S2262), and it is always determined that it is less than 1 in S2262 (YES determination in S2262). Therefore, if a NO determination is made in S2262, error processing may be executed.

Thus, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, in the A2 time-saving gaming state or the A3 time-saving gaming state, the special symbol display unit (the second 1 special symbol display portion 2163, second special symbol display portion 2164), the derived role release hit is 3R corresponding role release hit (selected symbol command "z7") or 10R corresponding role The main CPU 2201 terminates the A2 time-saving game state or A3 time-saving game state, and controls to the normal game state regardless of whether it is an opening hit (selected symbol commands “z2”, “z6”). In other words, when the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is executed as the game state for opening the accessory, the game state is controlled to the normal game state.

On the other hand, in the A1 time-saving gaming state, the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 2163, second special symbol display portion 2164) is a display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the role item open hit. , the A1 time-saving flag is set off only when the display mode indicates that the derived role release hit is the 3R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z7") ( (see S2260 to S2263). Then, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, Even if it is led to the second special symbol display unit 2164), the main CPU 2201 does not set the A1 time saving flag to OFF (see the case of NO determination in S2260). That is, when the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is executed as the game state per bonus release, control is continued to the A1 time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, first, the established A time saving flag is determined (S2251, S2255, S2259), and according to the established A time saving flag, counter subtraction processing (S2252, S2256, S2261 ), but it is not limited to this. For example, first, it is determined whether or not the selected symbol command "z7" is the role release hit, and if the selected symbol command "z7" is the role release hit, the role regardless of the established A time saving flag Object open hit counter (z7) subtraction processing is executed, and if the selected symbol command "z2" or "z6" is a hit of the role item open, the flag processing at the time of the role item open is ended, and the A2 short time flag is turned on or the A3 short time flag is turned on. If so, the per-accessory-release counter (z2) or the per-accessory-release counter (z6) subtraction process may be executed.

[7-4-4. V winning device opening control process]
In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 2201 executes the V winning device opening control process shown in FIG. 271 instead of the V winning device opening control process (see FIG. 100). FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 271, when it is determined that V winning is detected in the V winning device opening control process, that is, when V winning is made (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing (S2095A). to run. In this jackpot type determination process (S2095A), similar to the jackpot type determination process executed in S2025 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 268), the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state, and The type of A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined.

After executing the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

Thus, in the seventh pachinko game machine, when the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. When the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is executed as the object opening game state and the V prize is won, the jackpot type determination process (S2095A) is executed.

In addition, as described above, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268) is a big hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"), the big hit type determination The process (see S2025 in FIG. 268) is executed at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[7-5. Game state transition when controlled to jackpot game state]
Next, the game state transition in the case of being controlled to the jackpot game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 shows an example of the transition of the game state when the big win or the accessory release win is derived (confirmed display) to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 2163, second special symbol display portion 2164). (A) A time chart showing the transition of the game state when the prize is released in the A2 time-saving gaming state, (B) When the prize is released in the A1 time-saving gaming state. It is a time chart showing the transition of the game state of.

In addition, in FIG. 272, for the sake of convenience, only the normal game state, the A1 time reduction game state, the A2 time reduction game state, the A3 time reduction game state and the jackpot game state are illustrated as game states, but the game states controlled by the main CPU 2201 is not limited to these game states.

In addition, while the variable display of the special symbols can be executed in the normal game state, the A1 short game state, the A2 short game state and the A3 short game state, the variable display of the special symbols is not executed in the jackpot game state. If so, it is not preferable to show the normal game state, the A1 reduced-hours game state, the A2 reduced-hours game state, the A3 reduced-hours game state, and the jackpot game state in the same row as in FIG. For example, in FIG. 272, if you win a jackpot in the normal game state with the time saving flag off, or if you win a prize and win a prize in the open role, the normal game state is ended and the jackpot game state is entered. In the jackpot game state, it can be interpreted as if the time saving flag is on. However, since various flags including the time saving flag and various counters are reset at the start of the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is not turned on in the jackpot game state.

In addition, in FIG. 272, for the sake of convenience, derivation of big win (selected symbol command "z0"), derivation of big win (selected symbol command "z4"), derivation of big win (selected symbol command "z5"), 10R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z6") and derivation of per 3R-compatible role release (selected symbol command "z7") are simply "z0", "z4", "z5" and "z6" respectively. , and “z7”.

Also, in the following, so that you can understand which jackpot game state is explained, jackpot game state (first time), jackpot game state (second time), jackpot game state (third time) and jackpot game state ( 4th time). However, the number of the big hit game state is only for convenience of explanation, and the number of times is meaningless in the explanation of the present embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 272, the jackpot game state (first time) is simply indicated as "first time", the jackpot game state (second time) is simply indicated as "second time", and the jackpot game state (third time) is simply indicated as " 3rd time", and the jackpot game state (4th time) is simply illustrated as "4th time".

First, as shown in FIGS. 272(A) and (B), in the normal game state, when the display mode indicating the big hit (selected symbol command "z0") is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163, the main The CPU 2201 controls to a big hit game state (first time).

When the jackpot (selected symbol command "z0") is drawn to the first special symbol display unit 2163 in the normal game state, the game state at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is the normal game state, so the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds, for example, to "3", determines the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state (first time) as, for example, the A2 time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times as the A time saving end condition to, for example, 26 times. At the same time, the number of times of derivation for each release of the accessory (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one. Then, when the jackpot game state (first time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time reduction flag and controls the A2 time reduction game state.

(When the accessory release hit is derived in the A2 time saving game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 272(A), the transition of the game state when the accessory release hit is derived in the A2 time saving game state will be described including the game flow of the premise thereof.

For example, when a big win (selected symbol command "z5") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164 in the A2 time-saving game state after the big win game state (first time) is completed, the main CPU 2201 enters the big win game state (2 second time).

When the jackpot (selected symbol command "z5") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164 in the A2 time-saving gaming state, the gaming state at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is the A2 time-saving gaming state. The main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, “3”, determines the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state (second time) as, for example, the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition, for example, 26. In addition, the number of derivations for each release of the role product (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one. Then, when the jackpot game state (second time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time reduction flag and controls the A2 time reduction game state.

For example, in the A2 time-saving game state after the jackpot game state (second time) ends, when the 10R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 The A2 time-saving game state is ended, and the normal game state is controlled. When a free winning prize is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the game state at the time of V winning. Therefore, here, the kind of jackpot is determined based on the normal game state which is the game state at the time of V winning. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, “10”, determines the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (third time) as, for example, the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times for each release of the character (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one. Then, when the jackpot game state (third time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time reduction flag and controls the A2 time reduction game state.

In the A2 time-saving game state after the jackpot game state (third time) ends, for example, when the 3R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 The A2 time-saving game state is ended, and the normal game state is controlled. When a free winning prize is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the game state at the time of V winning. Therefore, here, the kind of jackpot is determined based on the normal game state which is the game state at the time of V winning. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, “3”, determines the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (fourth time) as, for example, the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be 4 times, and the number of derivation times for each release of the role product (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be 1 time. Then, when the jackpot game state (fourth time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time reduction flag and controls the A2 time reduction game state. In addition, in FIG. 272(A), the variable display of special symbols is executed, for example, 26 times in this A2 time saving game state, the A2 time saving game state is ended, and the normal game state is controlled.

In this way, in the A2 time-saving gaming state, when the bonus per release is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164), Regardless of the type (selected symbol commands “z2”, “z6”, “z7”), the main CPU 2201 ends the A2 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot based on the normal game state, which is the game state at the time of the V winning after the free prize is derived.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the big win or the free-accessory winning is derived in the A2 time-saving gaming state has been described, but the main CPU 2201, when the big winning or the free-accessory winning is derived in the A3 time-saving gaming state, The same processing as in the case where a big win or an accessory release win is derived in the A2 time-saving game state is executed.

(When the role release hit is derived in the A1 time saving game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 272(B), the transition of the game state in the case where the accessory release hit is derived in the A1 time-saving game state will be described, including the flow of the premise part of the game.

For example, when a big win (selected symbol command "z4") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164 in the A2 time-saving gaming state after the big winning gaming state (first time) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters the big winning gaming state (2 second time).

When the jackpot (selection symbol command "z4") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164 in the A2 time saving game state, the game state at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is the A2 time saving game state, The main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, “10”, determines the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state (second time) to be, for example, the A1 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times to, for example, 296 as the A time saving end condition. In addition, the number of times of derivation per release of the 3R-compatible accessory (selected symbol command "z7") is determined to be one. It should be noted that the number of derivations per 10R-compatible role product release (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6") is not determined. Then, when the jackpot game state (second time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time reduction flag and controls the A1 time reduction game state.

For example, in the A1 time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state (second time), when the role item open hit (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 is the normal game Continue the A1 time-saving game state without controlling to the state. When a free winning prize is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the game state at the time of V winning. Therefore, here, the kind of jackpot is determined based on the A1 time-saving game state, which is the game state at the time of V winning. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, “10”, determines the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state (third time) as, for example, the A1 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be 296 times, and the number of times of derivation of the selected symbol command "z7" per release of the 3R-compatible role product is determined to be 1 time. It should be noted that the number of times the selected symbol command "z2" or "z6" is derived per release of the 10R corresponding role product is not determined. Then, when the jackpot game state (third time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A1 time reduction flag and controls the A1 time reduction game state again. In this way, the A1 time-saving game state is looped.

In the A1 time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state (third time), for example, when the 3R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the 3R-compatible role Since the number of derivations per open (selected symbol command "z7") is determined to be one, the main CPU 2201 terminates the A1 time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state. When a free winning prize is derived, the type of jackpot is determined based on the game state at the time of V winning. Therefore, here, the kind of jackpot is determined based on the normal game state which is the game state at the time of V winning. That is, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, “3”, determines the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot gaming state (fourth time) as, for example, the A2 time saving flag, and sets the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition. For example, it is determined to be 26 times, and the number of derivation times for each release of the character (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be one. Then, when the jackpot game state (fourth time) ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A2 time reduction flag and controls the A2 time reduction game state.

Thus, in the A1 time-saving gaming state, when the per access per special symbol is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164), per per per per access per access symbol release Depending on the type, the A1 time reduction game state is maintained, or the A1 time reduction game state is ended and the normal game state is controlled. Therefore, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot according to the gaming state at the time of the V winning after the prize release win is derived.

[7-6. Production mode]
Next, the presentation mode performed by the display device 2007 constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a table showing an example of the relationship between the performance mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 and the game state controlled by the main CPU 2201 in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The performance mode is a game state that the player can perceive from the appearance, and is called the performance mode in order to distinguish it from the internal game state controlled by the main CPU 2201, for example. The sub CPU 2301 controls such that an effect image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 which is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display.

In this embodiment, the production modes include a normal mode, a super special mode, a special mode, a chance mode, a blissful time mode, a first big win mode and a second big win mode. The sub CPU 2301 is configured to be controllable to one of the plurality of game modes based on the current game state information sent from the main CPU 2201 .

As shown in FIG. 273, the normal mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is the effect mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 controls the normal game state.

In addition, the super special mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is a production mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 controls the A1 time-saving game state, and is more likely to be played than any of the normal mode, special mode, and chance mode. It is an advantageous production mode for the person.

In addition, the special mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 controls the A2 time-saving game state, and is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode or the chance mode. production mode.

The chance mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 controls the A3 time-saving game state, and is an effect mode more advantageous to the player than the normal mode.

Also, the blissful time mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is a performance mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the B time-saving game state.

Also, the first big win mode (10R) controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the 10R big win game state.

Also, the second big win mode (3R) controlled by the sub CPU 2301 is an effect mode controlled when the main CPU 2201 is controlling the 3R big win game state.

In the normal mode, super special mode, special mode, chance mode and blissful time mode, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols can be executed, while the first big win mode (10R) and the second big win mode (3R) ), variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is not executed.

It should be noted that the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164), the sub CPU 2301 controls to the role release winning mode in the role release winning game state, ends the role release winning mode when V wins, and the first It controls to big hit mode or 2nd big hit mode. However, in the explanation of the seventh pachinko game machine, for convenience of explanation, the explanation of the accessory release winning mode will be omitted.

[7-7. Game flow]
Next, the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 87, 274 and 275. FIG. FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010, as explained in the third pachinko game machine. 274 and 275 are diagrams showing an example of the transition of the effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In addition, as described above, the effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 and the game state controlled by the main CPU 2201 are in correspondence. Therefore, in FIG. 274 and FIG. 275, the game state controlled by the main CPU 2201 is written together with the effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 in parentheses. However, for the game state written together in parentheses, for convenience, the normal game state is written together as "normal", the A1 time saving game state is written together as "A1", the A2 time saving game state is written together as "A2", and A3 The time saving game state is written together as "A3", the B time saving game state is written together as "B", the 10R big win game state is written together as "10R", and the 3R big win game state is written together as "3R".

Also, in the following description, the game state controlled by the main CPU 2201 is shown in parentheses for the effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301, except when it is clear that the control is by the main CPU 2201 or the sub CPU 2301. shall be written together.

Also, in FIGS. 274 and 275, the transition of the production mode that can occur when the game is executed in the regular game mode is illustrated by solid line arrows, and can occur when the game is not executed in the regular game mode. The transition of the production mode is illustrated by the dashed arrow.

For example, in the normal mode (normal game state), left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, so in the normal mode, the variable display of the first special symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is mainly executed. . Therefore, in FIG. 274, when the current production mode is the normal mode, the case of winning the jackpot (selected pattern command "z0", "z1") and the winning of the free prize (selected pattern command "z3") In the case of and, the transition of the production mode is illustrated by a solid arrow.

On the other hand, in the normal mode (normal game state), when hitting to the right, which is not a normal game mode, the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed. Therefore, in FIG. 274, when the current game mode is the normal mode, the jackpot (selected symbol command "z4", "z5") is won, and the 10R compatible accessory release (selected symbol command "z6", "z7"), the transition to the production mode is indicated by a dashed arrow.

In addition, the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), and the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state) are all right-handed game modes. Therefore, in these production modes (game state), the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, in FIG. 274 and FIG. 275, the current production mode is super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), special mode (A2 time-saving game state), chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) and blissful time mode (B time-saving game state ), when winning a jackpot (selected symbol commands "z4", "z5") and when winning a 10R-compatible accessory open hit (selected symbol commands "z6", "z7") Regarding and, the transition of the production mode is illustrated with a solid arrow.

On the other hand, one of the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), special mode (A2 time-saving game state), chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) and blissful time mode (B time-saving game state) (game state) , the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed when hitting to the left, which is not a regular game mode. Therefore, in FIG. 274 and FIG. 275, the current production mode is super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), special mode (A2 time-saving game state), chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) and blissful time mode (B time-saving game state ), the case of winning the big hit (selected symbol command "z0", "z1") and the case of winning the 10R corresponding accessory release (selected symbol command "z2"), The transition of the production mode is illustrated by the dashed arrow.

[7-7-1. Game flow when the current production mode is the normal mode]
When the current presentation mode is the normal mode (normal game state) and the player plays the game in the normal form, left-handed, the shot game ball mainly flows down the left area 2106 . The game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can win the first start port 2120, and when the first start port 2120 wins, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld, and the starting condition of the first special symbol is established. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the first special symbol game. In this first special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes the first special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 262), for example, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/100.05, and the winning prize is 1/100.05. The odds are 1 in 65536. As described above, in the normal mode (normal game state), the probability of winning the winning prize is extremely low, so the player expects to win the jackpot and executes the game.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big win (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A), and variable display of the first special symbol. to start. Then, when the display mode indicating the big win (3R big win) is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163, the sub CPU 2301 displays a performance image indicating that the big win has been won and also displays a performance image instructing to hit to the right, Furthermore, the normal mode is terminated and the second jackpot mode is entered.

If the winning jackpot is the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z0", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) ends, the game shifts to a special mode (A2 short-time game state). The special mode (A2 time-saving game state) is an A time-saving game state with a maximum of 26 times of time-saving times.

On the other hand, when the winning jackpot is the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z1", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) ends, the game shifts to the chance mode (A3 short-time game state). Chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is an A time-saving game state with a maximum of four times of time-saving times.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a 10R compatible accessory open hit)
Although the probability is extremely low, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z2"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). , start variable display of the first special symbol.

In the normal mode (normal game state), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a 10R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z2"), the sub CPU 2301 gives the player a great sense of expectation. It is preferable to execute a premium presentation.

In the normal mode (normal game state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the display mode indicating the winning of the 10R-compatible accessory (selected symbol command "z2") is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the V winning device opening control process, that is, controls to the game state for winning prizes. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 10R corresponding role item open win (selected symbol command "z2") is derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163, produces an effect image indicating that the role item has been won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the accessory open winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and controls the 10R jackpot game state (that is, the big win opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94). ). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the open-access game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image instructing to hit to the right, and ends the normal mode. Then, control to the first big hit mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) ends, the game moves to a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state). Super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) is an A time-saving game state with a maximum of 296 times of time-saving times.

On the other hand, if the result of the win determination process for the first special symbol is a 10R-compatible role product open win (selected symbol command "z2"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 continues the normal mode.

(when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value)
When the current effect mode is the normal mode (normal game state), when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 2201 controls to the B time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the ceiling value has been reached, displays an effect image instructing to hit to the right, and ends the normal effect mode to perform bliss time. control mode. The blissful time mode (B time-saving game state) is a production mode (game state) in which the number of times of time reduction is set to, for example, 296 times, and on the condition that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the variable display of special symbols is maximized. can be executed 296 times, for example.

(others)
When the current production mode is the normal mode (normal game state), the player plays the game in a right-handed manner, which is not a normal mode, or the game ball unintentionally enters the right area 2107 even though it is not right-handed. When it flows down, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) happens to operate, the game ball wins the second start port 2140, and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed. . In this case, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4"), after the 10R jackpot gaming state ends, as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. He is trying to shift to a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is the 3R big hit (selected symbol command "z5"), after the 3R big hit game state ends, the chance mode is entered as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. (A3 reduced working hours game state). That is, after the jackpot game state, the player wins a 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4") more effectively than the 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5"). mode.

However, not limited to this, when the current production mode is the normal mode (normal game state), the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a 10R big hit (selected symbol command "z4") and a 3R big hit (selected symbol command " z5 ”), it may be shifted to a super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), a special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state), or a chance mode ( You may make it shift to A3 time saving game state).

In addition, when the current production mode is the normal mode (normal game state), if the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a 10R compatible accessory open hit (selected symbol command "z6") and V wins, After the end of the 10R big hit game state, as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory open hit (selected symbol command "z7") and a V prize is won, after the 3R jackpot game state ends, a dashed arrow in FIG. As shown, the game is shifted to the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state). That is, the jackpot game when winning the 10R correspondence (selected pattern command "z6") and winning the V prize is higher than when winning the 3R corresponding accessory release hit (selected pattern command "z7") and winning the V prize. After the end of the state, the game shifts to an effect mode advantageous to the player.

However, not limited to this, when the current production mode is the normal mode (normal game state), the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is the 10R corresponding role release (selected symbol command "z6") and the 3R corresponding role Even if the object is released (selected symbol command "z7"), it may be transferred to a super special mode (A1 time saving game state) or to a special mode (A2 time saving game state). Alternatively, the game may shift to a chance mode (A3 time-saving game state).

[7-7-2. Flow of the game when the current production mode is the super special mode]
When the current performance mode is the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) and the player plays the game with the right hand, which is the normal mode, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the right region 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes normal symbol hit determination processing. When the normal symbol game is executed in the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), for example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1. In addition, not only the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), but also the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) and the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), in the A time-saving game state, the normal pattern is compared to the normal game state. The variable display time of is short. Therefore, in the A time saving game state, the frequency that the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is usually derived to the symbol display section 2161 is larger than that in the normal game state.

When the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) operates, and the player hits to the right, causing the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 87), it is possible to win a game ball.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140 (see FIG. 87), the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld, and when the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 executes the second special symbol game. do.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes second special symbol hit determination processing (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 262), for example, the probability of the big hit is approximately 1/100.05. The odds are 1 in 34.5.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 10R big win (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won and also displays the effect image instructing the right hit, Furthermore, the super special mode is ended and the control is performed to the first jackpot mode.

If the winning jackpot is the 10R jackpot of the selected symbol command “z4”, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 again enters the super special mode (A1 time saving game) with a maximum of 296 time saving times. game state).

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R big win (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) to display the variable second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the big win has been won and also displays the effect image instructing to hit to the right, Furthermore, the super special mode is ended and the second big hit mode is controlled.

When the winning jackpot is the 3R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a special mode (A2 shortening gaming state) with a maximum of 26 times of working hours reduction. to control.

In this embodiment, as can be understood from the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 263), when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the selection rate and selection of the selected symbol command "z4" big hit The ratio of the jackpot selection rate of the symbol command "z5" to the jackpot selection rate is, for example, 4 to 6, and the probability (expected value) that the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5" is selected is that the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4" is selected. higher than the probability (expected value) of

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory open hit)
When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is the 10R-compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs the A1 time-saving game. While the state is continued, the V winning device opening control process is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the game state for opening the accessory. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible role item open win (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, produces an effect image indicating that the role item has been won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to be the A1 time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the A time-saving game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. . Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A1 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 296 times, and the number of times of derivation per 3R corresponding role release (selected symbol command "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the open-access game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and furthermore, displays a super special mode. End and control to the first jackpot mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on winning the 10R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z6”) and winning the V prize is completed, the number of time saving times exceeds 296 times at maximum. It shifts to a special mode (A1 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 10R-compatible role product open win (selected symbol command "z6"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 continues the super special mode. .

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory open hit)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory release win (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible role release hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs the A1 time saving game. The state is ended, and in the state of being controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control processing is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the accessory opening winning game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible role release win (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 generates an effect image indicating that the win is won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 26 times, and the number of times of derivation of per access (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the open-access game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and furthermore, displays a super special mode. End and control to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z7”) and winning the V prize is completed, a special mode with a maximum of 26 times of time saving ( A2 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 ends the A1 time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 ends the super special mode and controls to the normal mode.

In this embodiment, as can be grasped from the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 263), when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is the open per character, the 10R corresponding role of the selected symbol command "z6" The ratio of the selection rate for the object release and the selection rate for the selected symbol command "z7" for the 3R corresponding role release is, for example, 54 to 46, and the selected symbol command "z6" for the 10R corresponding role release is selected. The probability (expected value) of winning is slightly higher than the probability (expected value) of selecting the 3R-corresponding accessory release hit of the selected symbol command “z7”.

Also, as can be understood from the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 262), when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, the big hit probability (for example, 1/100.5) and the accessory open probability (For example, 1/34.5) is approximately 1:3, and the probability (expected value) of winning the winning prize is higher than the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot.

(When the special pattern of the number of times of working hours is executed)
When the current production mode is a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the time-saving number of times (for example, 296 times) without being controlled to a big hit game state, the main CPU 2201 is A1 The time-saving game state is ended, and the normal game state is controlled. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301 ends the super special mode and controls to the normal mode when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches the number of time reductions without being controlled to the jackpot game state. In this case, the sub CPU 2301 is not limited to ending the super special mode and controlling to the normal mode when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the number of time saving times. For example, if there is a hold (that is, remaining hold) remaining for the start information of the second special design when the number of times of variable display of the special design reaches the number of times of time reduction, variable display of the second special design for this remaining reservation is executed, the super special mode may be terminated and the normal mode may be controlled.

(others)
When the current production mode is a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), the player plays the game in a left-handed manner that is not a regular mode, or unintentionally plays the left side area 2106 even though the player does not shoot left-handed. When the ball has flowed down, etc., the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"), after the big hit game state ends, the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is entered. does not shift, and as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. However, not limited to this, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol command "z0", "z1") in the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) in the current production mode , Chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) or normal mode (normal game state).

Furthermore, when the current production mode is a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a role release hit (selected symbol command "z2") and V winning, jackpot game state After the end of , it is not essential to be controlled to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), and it may be shifted to another effect mode.

In addition, since the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) is an effect mode (game state) in which the number of times of time saving is set to, for example, 296 times, the second special symbol game is executed, for example, 300 times at maximum, including the reserved portion. It is possible. Therefore, in the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), in view of the probability (for example, 1/34.5) when the second special symbol game is executed, the super special mode (A1 time-saving game There is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or prize release before the end of the state).

In addition, in the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), as long as the player executes the game with the right hand, which is a regular mode (if the game ball unintentionally enters the first start port 2120, Except), when it is controlled to the big hit game state, the probability that the super special mode loops (it is controlled again to the A1 short time game state after the end of the big hit game state) is about 50%. In addition, the probability of being controlled to the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state is also approximately 50%. On the other hand, as long as the player executes the game in the right-handed hitting which is the regular game mode after the end of the jackpot game state (excluding the case where the game ball has entered the first start hole 2120 unintentionally), the chance It is not controlled to the mode (A3 time-saving game state).

Thus, the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state) is advantageous for the player among the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) and chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state). It can be said that this is the production mode (game state) with the highest degree.

[7-7-3. Flow of the game when the current production mode is the special mode]
When the current presentation mode is the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) and the player plays the game with the right hand, which is the normal mode, the shot game ball mainly flows down the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the right region 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes normal symbol hit determination processing. When the normal symbol game is executed in the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), for example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1.

When the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display portion 2161, and the game ball wins the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 87) and the second special symbol start condition is established, the main CPU 2201 2 Run a special symbol game.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes second special symbol hit determination processing (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, for example, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/100.05, and the role-product-opening probability is 34.0, similarly to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state). It is one fifth.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 10R big win (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won and also displays the effect image instructing the right hit, Furthermore, the special mode is ended and the control is performed to the first big hit mode.

If the winning jackpot is the 10R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4", when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state ).

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R big win (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) to display the variable second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the big win has been won and also displays the effect image instructing to hit to the right, Furthermore, the special mode is ended and the second jackpot mode is controlled.

When the winning jackpot is the 3R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a special mode (A2 shortening gaming state) with a maximum of 26 times of working hours reduction. to control.

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory open hit)
When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is the 10R-compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs the A2 time saving game. The state is ended, and in the state of being controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control processing is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the accessory opening winning game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible role item open win (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, produces an effect image indicating that the role item has been won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 26 times, and the number of times of derivation of per access (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the open-accessory game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and then ends the special mode. Then, control to the first big hit mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on winning the 10R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z6”) and winning the V prize ends, the main CPU 2201 again returns to the maximum number of times of time saving. Control to 26 times special mode (A2 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is the 10R compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory open hit)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory release win (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs the A2 time saving game. The state is ended, and in the state of being controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control processing is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the accessory opening winning game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible role release win (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 generates an effect image indicating that the win is won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 26 times, and the number of times of derivation of per access (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a V prize in the open-accessory game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and then ends the special mode. Then, control to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z7”) and winning the V prize is completed, a special mode with a maximum of 26 times of time saving ( A2 time-saving game state).

In this way, when the current production mode is the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), as long as the player executes the game with the right hand that is the regular mode, per opening of the accessory (selected symbol command "z6", 'z7') is not controlled to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) after the end of the big win game state, and only when the big win (selected symbol command 'z4') is won, after the end of the big win game state. It can be controlled in a super special mode. It should be noted that, when the player executes the game in a left-handed manner, which is not a regular mode, if the player wins the winning prize (selected symbol command "z2") and wins V, the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) is entered. Although the game is controlled to the super special mode after the game ends, the winning probability of opening the character (selected symbol command "z2") when the first special symbol game is executed is extremely low, for example, 1/65536.

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory open win (selected symbol command "z7"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal mode.

(When the special pattern of the number of times of working hours is executed)
When the current production mode is the special mode (A2 time saving game state) and the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the time saving number of times (for example, 26 times) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 performs the A2 time saving game. End the game state and control to the normal game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301 ends the special mode and controls to the normal mode when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches the number of times of reduced working hours without being controlled to the jackpot game state.

(others)
When the current performance mode is a special mode (A2 time-saving game state), the player plays the game in a left-handed manner, which is not a normal mode, or unintentionally puts a game ball in the left area 2106 even though the player does not hit left-handed. , etc., the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, even if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1"), the big hit game state is the same as when the current production mode is the super special mode. 274, it does not shift to the chance mode (A3 time saving game state), but instead shifts to a special mode (A2 time saving game state) as a remedy as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. However, not limited to this, when the current effect mode is a special mode (A2 time-saving game state), the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol command "z0", "z1"), You may make it transfer to a chance mode (A3 short-time game state) or normal mode (normal game state).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol command "z0", "z1"), if the current production mode is a super special mode, a special Mode (A2 short-time game state), and in the case of the current production mode super special mode, shift to chance mode (A3 short-time game state) or normal mode (normal game state) after the end of the jackpot game state. good too.

Furthermore, when the current production mode is a special mode (A2 time-saving game state), the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is an open per character (selected symbol command "z2") and V wins, the jackpot game state After the end, it is not essential to shift to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), and it is possible to shift to another effect mode.

In addition, since the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) is an effect mode (game state) in which the number of times of time saving is set to, for example, 26 times, the second special symbol game can be executed, for example, 30 times at maximum, including the reserved portion. is possible. Therefore, in the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state), when the second special symbol game is executed, the probability of opening the role (for example, 1/34.5) is taken into consideration, and the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) There is a possibility of winning a jackpot or a prize release before the end of the game.

In addition, in the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state), as long as the player executes the game in the right-handed manner, which is a regular mode (excluding the case where the game ball unintentionally enters the first start port 2120) ), when it is controlled to the big hit game state, the probability of being controlled to the super special mode (A1 short time game state) after the end of the big hit game state is about 10%. Also, the probability of being controlled to the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state is approximately 56%. In addition, the probability of being controlled to the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state is approximately 34%.

In this way, the special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state) is not as great as the super special mode (A1 time-saving gaming state), but the degree of advantage for the player is relatively higher than the chance mode (A3 time-saving gaming state). It can be said that it is a high production mode (game state).

[7-7-4. Flow of the game when the current production mode is the chance mode]
In this embodiment, when the current production mode is the chance mode, only the number of times of time saving is different from the case where the current production mode is the special mode, and the flow of other games is the same as the special mode, For the time being, the flow of the game when the current presentation mode is the chance mode will be described below.

When the current presentation mode is the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), when the player plays the game with the right hand, which is the normal mode, the game ball that is shot flows down mainly in the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the right region 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes normal symbol hit determination processing. When the normal symbol game is executed in the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), for example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1.

When the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display portion 2161, and the game ball wins the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 87) and the second special symbol start condition is established, the main CPU 2201 2 Run a special symbol game.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes second special symbol hit determination processing (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, for example, the jackpot probability is about 1/100.05 in the same way as the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) and the special mode (A2 time-saving game state). , the probability of winning the role item is 1/34.5.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 10R big win (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won and also displays the effect image instructing the right hit, Furthermore, the chance mode is terminated and the game is controlled to the first jackpot mode.

If the winning jackpot is the 10R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4", when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a super special mode (A1 time saving gaming state ).

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R big win (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) to display the variable second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the big win has been won and also displays the effect image instructing to hit to the right, Furthermore, the chance mode is ended and the second jackpot mode is entered.

When the winning jackpot is the 3R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a special mode (A2 shortening gaming state) with a maximum of 26 times of working hours reduction. to control.

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory open hit)
When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is the 10R-compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs the A3 time-saving game. The state is ended, and in the state of being controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control processing is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the accessory opening winning game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible role item open win (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, produces an effect image indicating that the role item has been won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 26 times, and the number of times of derivation of per access (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a prize V in the prize-opening game state, the sub-CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and ends the chance mode. Then, control to the first big hit mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on the winning of the 10R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z6”) and the V prize is completed, the main CPU 2201 can reduce the number of times of time saving up to 26 times. special mode (A2 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is the 10R compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory open hit)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory release win (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs A3 time saving game. The state is ended, and in the state of being controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control processing is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the accessory opening winning game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible role release win (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 generates an effect image indicating that the win is won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 26 times, and the number of times of derivation of per access (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins a prize V in the prize-opening game state, the sub-CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and ends the chance mode. Then, control to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z7”) and winning the V prize is completed, a special mode with a maximum of 26 times of time saving ( A2 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory open win (selected symbol command "z7"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal mode.

(When the special pattern of the number of times of working hours is executed)
When the current production mode is the chance mode (A3 time saving game state) and the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the number of times of time saving (for example, 4 times) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 performs A3 time saving. End the game state and control to the normal game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301 ends the chance mode and controls to the normal mode when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches the number of times of reduced working hours without being controlled to the jackpot game state.

(others)
When the current performance mode is the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), the player plays the game in a left-handed manner, which is not a regular mode, or unintentionally puts the game ball in the left area 2106 even though the player does not hit left-handed. , etc., the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol command "z0"), the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is not entered after the big win game state ends. , As shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 275, as a relief measure, the game is shifted to a special mode (A2 time-saving game state). On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol command "z1"), after the big hit game state is finished, the chance mode (A3 It is designed to shift to a time-saving gaming state). However, not limited to this, in the current production mode is the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is any of the selected symbol commands "z0" and "z1". Also, it may be shifted to a special mode (A2 time reduction game state), or may be shifted to a chance mode (A3 time reduction game state). Furthermore, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z0" or/and "z1", after the jackpot game state is completed, the transition to a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) is made. You may make it

Furthermore, when the current production mode is the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state), the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is the role release hit (selected symbol command "z2") and V win, the jackpot game state After the end, it is not essential to shift to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), and it is possible to shift to another effect mode.

In addition, since the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is an effect mode (game state) in which the number of times of time reduction is set to, for example, four times, the second special symbol game can be executed only eight times at maximum, including the reserved portion. Can not. Further, as described above, when the second special symbol game is executed, the probability of winning the role item is, for example, 1/34.5. The probability of winning a jackpot or a winning prize before the chance mode (A3 time-shortening game state) ends is lower than either of the super special mode (A1 time-shortening game state) and the special mode (A2 time-shortening game state).

However, in the chance mode (A3 short-time gaming state), once it is controlled to the big-hit gaming state, as long as the player executes the game in the normal mode, right-handed, the big-hitting game can be played in the special mode (A2 short gaming state). Similar to the case of being controlled to the state, the probability of being controlled to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state is approximately 10%. Also, the probability of being controlled to the special mode (A2 time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state is approximately 56%. In addition, the probability of being controlled to the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state is approximately 34%.

In this way, once the chance mode (A3 short-time gaming state) is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to a super special mode (A1 short-time gaming state) or a special mode (A2 short-time gaming state). However, the probability (expected value) of being controlled to the big hit game state during the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is relatively low. Therefore, the chance mode (A3 time reduction game state) is the most advantageous for the player among the super special mode (A1 time reduction game state), special mode (A2 time reduction game state) and chance mode (A3 time reduction game state). It can be said that it is a low production mode (game state).

[7-7-5. Flow of the game when the current production mode is the blissful time mode]
When the current presentation mode is the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state) and the player plays the game with the right-handed hitting which is the normal mode, the game ball that is shot flows down mainly in the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the right region 2107 can pass through the passage gate 2126, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 2126, the main CPU 2201 executes a normal symbol game. In this normal symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes normal symbol hit determination processing. When the normal symbol game is executed in the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state), for example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1. Also, in the B time-saving game state, the variable display time of normal symbols is shorter than in the normal game state. Therefore, in the B time-saving gaming state, the frequency at which the display mode indicating the normal symbol winning is usually derived to the symbol display section 2161 is higher than in the normal gaming state.

When the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display portion 2161, and the game ball wins the second start port 2140 (see FIG. 87) and the second special symbol start condition is established, the main CPU 2201 2 Run a special symbol game.

In this second special symbol game, the main CPU 2201 executes second special symbol hit determination processing (see S2023 in FIG. 268).

When the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, for example, the jackpot probability is similar to the super special mode (A1 time saving game state), special mode (A2 time saving game state) and chance mode (A3 time saving game state) It is approximately 1/100.05, and the probability of opening a character is 1/34.5.

(When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit)
When the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 10R big win (selected symbol command "z4"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) and starts variable display of the second special symbol. . Then, when the display mode indicating the 10R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 10R jackpot is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the jackpot has been won and also displays the effect image instructing the right hit, Furthermore, the blissful time mode is ended and the first jackpot mode is entered.

If the winning jackpot is the 10R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4", when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a special mode (A2 time saving gaming state) with a maximum of 26 times of time saving. to control. Thus, in the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state), even if the 10R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4" is won, unlike the A time-saving game state, it is not controlled to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state). .

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R big win (selected symbol command "z5"), the main CPU 2201 executes a big win type determination process (S2095A) to display the variable second special symbol. Start. Then, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display section 2164, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R big win gaming state.

On the other hand, when the display mode indicating the 3R big win is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 displays the effect image indicating that the big win has been won and also displays the effect image instructing to hit to the right, Furthermore, the blissful time mode is ended and the second jackpot mode is entered.

If the winning jackpot is the 3R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 enters a special mode (A2 shortening gaming state) with a maximum of 296 times of working hours reduction. to control. However, not limited to this, if the winning jackpot is the 3R jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5", when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot gaming state) ends, the main CPU 2201 will set a maximum of 4 chances of time saving. You may make it control to mode (A3 time saving game state).

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 10R compatible accessory open hit)
When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is the 10R-compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs B time saving game The state is ended, and in the state of being controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control processing is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the accessory opening winning game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 10R-compatible role item open win (selected symbol command "z6") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, produces an effect image indicating that the role item has been won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 26 times, and the number of times of derivation of per access (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 10R jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins V in the open-access game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and furthermore, displays the blissful time mode. End and control to the first jackpot mode.

In addition, when the first jackpot mode (10R jackpot game state) based on the winning of the 10R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z6”) and the V prize is completed, the main CPU 2201 can reduce the number of times of time saving up to 26 times. special mode (A2 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is the 10R compatible role product open hit (selected symbol command "z6"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal mode.

(When the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R compatible accessory open hit)
If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory release win (selected symbol command "z7"), the main CPU 2201 does not execute the jackpot type determination process (S2095A), and the second special symbol Start variable display.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible accessory release hit (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the main CPU 2201 performs B time saving game The state is ended, and in the state of being controlled to the normal game state, the V winning device opening control processing is executed, that is, the game state is controlled to the accessory opening winning game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301, when the display mode indicating the 3R-compatible role release win (selected symbol command "z7") is derived to the second special symbol display unit 2164, the sub CPU 2301 generates an effect image indicating that the win is won. is displayed, and an effect image instructing a right-hand shot is displayed.

Then, when the V prize is won in the free winning game state, the main CPU 2201 executes the jackpot type determination process (S2095A). In this case, since the game state is controlled by the main CPU 2201 to the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 refers to the normal game state column of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 264) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, the number of rounds is determined to be "3", and the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A2 time saving flag. Furthermore, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of special symbol variable display is determined to be 26 times, and the number of times of derivation of per access (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") is determined to be once. After that, the main CPU 2201 controls to the 3R jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 2301 wins V in the open-access game state, the sub CPU 2301 displays an effect image indicating that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, displays an effect image that instructs to hit to the right, and furthermore, displays the blissful time mode. End and control to the second jackpot mode.

In addition, when the second jackpot mode (3R jackpot game state) based on winning the 3R-compatible role release (selected symbol command “z7”) and winning the V prize is completed, a special mode with a maximum of 26 times of time saving ( A2 time-saving game state).

Thus, in this embodiment, when the current production mode is the blissful time mode (B time-saving gaming state), compared to the case where the current production mode is a special mode (A2 time-saving gaming state), the jackpot game state The production mode to be shifted after the end may be different. In particular, when the current performance mode is the special mode (A2 time-saving game state), when the big win of the selected symbol command "z4" is won, the game shifts to the super special mode after the big win game state. On the other hand, if the current production mode is the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state), even if any jackpot (selected symbol command "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5") is made, Furthermore, even if you win any of the role release hits (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7") and win the V prize, after the jackpot game state ends, the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) out of control. However, not limited to this, if the current production mode is the blissful time mode (B time reduction game state), the distribution of the production mode that shifts after the jackpot game state is over, and the current production mode is a special mode (A2 time reduction game state ) may be the same as in the case of In this case, when the current production mode is the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state), when a specific jackpot (for example, the selected symbol command "z4") is won, a super special mode is performed after the jackpot game state ends. It will be controlled to (A1 time-saving game state).

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol win determination process is a 3R-compatible accessory open win (selected symbol command "z7"), but the V prize is not won, the main CPU 2201 controls the normal mode.

(When the number of variable display times of special patterns reaches the number of times of reduced working hours)
When the current production mode is the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state), the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the time-saving number of times (for example, 296 times) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 B The time-saving game state is ended, and the normal game state is controlled. On the other hand, the sub CPU 2301 ends the blissful time mode and controls to the normal mode when the number of times of variable display of the special symbols reaches the number of times of reduced working hours without being controlled to the jackpot game state.

(others)
When the current performance mode is the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state), the player plays the game in a left-handed game that is not a regular mode, and unintentionally plays the left side area 2106 even though the player does not play left-handed. When the ball has flowed down, etc., the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol command "z0"), the chance mode (A3 time-saving game state) is not entered after the big win game state ends. , As shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 275, as a relief measure, the game is shifted to a special mode (A2 time-saving game state). On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit (selected symbol command "z1"), after the big hit game state is finished, the chance mode (A3 It is designed to shift to a time-saving gaming state). However, not limited to this, in the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state) in the current production mode, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is any of the selected symbol commands "z0" and "z1". Alternatively, the game may be shifted to a special mode (A2 time-reduced gaming state), or may be shifted to a chance mode (A3 time-reduced game state). Furthermore, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot of the selected symbol command "z0" or/and "z1", after the jackpot game state is completed, the transition to a super special mode (A1 time-saving game state) is made. You may make it

Furthermore, when the current effect mode is the blissful time mode (B time-saving game state), the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is the opening of the role (selected symbol command "z2") and V winning, the jackpot game state After the end of , it is not essential to shift to the super special mode (A1 time-saving game state), and it is possible to shift to another performance mode.

Thus, in the seventh pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268) is a big win (selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z4", "z5"). If there is, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 268) is a role item release hit (selected symbol commands "z2", "z6", "z7), the jackpot type at different timings Decision processing (S2025 in Fig. 268, S2095A in Fig. 271) is executed.However, the main CPU 2201 starts variable display of special symbols when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a big win. If the kind of big win is determined according to the game state at the time, and if the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbol is the winning of the prize, the kind of big win is determined according to the game state when the V prize is won. The big win type determination processing may be executed at the same timing when the result of the special pattern win determination processing is a big win and when the result of the special pattern win determination processing is a winning of the open-accessory.

[7-8. Modification]
Next, as modifications of the seventh pachinko game machine, a first modification and a second modification will be described below. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the seventh pachinko game machine is simply referred to as "the pachinko game machine according to the first modification", and the pachinko game according to the second modification of the seventh pachinko game machine The machine is simply referred to as "the pachinko game machine according to the second modification".

Hereinafter, in describing the pachinko game machine according to the first modification and the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, description of points common to the seventh pachinko game machine will be omitted as much as possible. Therefore, the points not mentioned in the explanations of the pachinko game machine according to the first modification and the pachinko game machine according to the second modification are the same as those of the seventh pachinko game machine.

Further, in the following description of the pachinko game machine according to the first modification and the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, the configuration and processing having the same functions as those of the seventh pachinko game machine Description will be made using the same reference numerals and step numbers as the machine. However, the points different from the seventh pachinko game machine, ie, the configuration and processing to be newly explained in the explanation of the seventh pachinko game machine, are given new reference numerals and step numbers.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the first modified example and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modified example may be pachinko gaming machines with setting functions, but below, the description related to the setting functions is omitted.

[7-8-1. First modification]
First, the pachinko game machine according to the first modified example will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification is a pachinko gaming machine called a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, similar to the 7th pachinko gaming machine, and the second special symbol than the starting condition of the first special symbol It is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of is preferentially established.

[7-8-1-1. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277, basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modified example will be described.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification, the main CPU 2201 can control the A4 time saving game state or the A5 time saving game state as the A time saving game state.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine according to the first modified example is equipped with a time saving limit function. The time-saving limit function is, for example, in the A time-saving game state after the end of the big win game state, setting an upper limit on the number of times (that is, the number of consecutive games) that is controlled again to the big win game state before shifting to the normal game state, It is a function to prevent the jackpot game state from being controlled by a series of games exceeding a predetermined specified number of times.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification, when a jackpot game state occurs in the normal game state or the B time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 sets the limit number to, for example, "5 times", and in the A time saving game state When a jackpot game state occurs, 1 is subtracted from the limit number 1. - 特許庁At the end of the jackpot game state, if the limit number after subtraction is greater than 0, it is possible to control the time saving game state A after the jackpot game state is finished, and if the limit number after subtraction is 0, the jackpot game state ends. After that, it is controlled to the normal game state without being controlled to the A time saving game state. In addition, in the A time-saving game state after the end of the big win game state, when the A time-saving game state ends without being controlled to the big win game state (shifts to the normal game state), the main CPU 2201 resets the limit number.

[7-8-1-1-1. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 276 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 276, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the winning determination value data for opening the first special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 , selects "z11" as the selection symbol command, and selects "zA12" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z12" is selected as the command, and "zA13" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z13" is selected as the command, and "zA14" is selected as the design designation command.

In addition, when the winning determination value data for open role is obtained as a result of the second special symbol winning determination process, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 2201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA15" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 20 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z16" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA15" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 determines the selected symbol. "z16" is selected as the command, and "zA16" is selected as the design designation command.

[7-8-1-1-2. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 277 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification. The jackpot type determination table corresponds to the game state (normal game state, A short game state, B short game state) at a predetermined timing and the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referred when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, the "game state at a predetermined timing" is the same as in the seventh pachinko game machine. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit (selected symbol command "z10", "z13"), the game state at the time of execution of the special symbol hit determination process, that is, at the start of the variable display of the special symbols. It corresponds to "game state at a predetermined timing". In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit. The game state at the time of V winning after this is derived corresponds to the "game state at a predetermined timing". When the V prize is not won despite the derivation of the winning of the winning of the special symbol as a result of the winning judgment processing, the main CPU 2201 does not control to the big winning game state and does not determine the kind of the big winning.

The jackpot type determined with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277) is, for example, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends (that is, the jackpot game A type of time saving flag set at the end of the state). In the present embodiment, there are two types of A time saving flag, A4 time saving flag and A5 time saving flag, which will be described later.

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit (for example, the selected symbol command "z10") and the game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 performs a round The number is determined to be "3", and the A time reduction flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A4 time reduction flag.

In addition, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is the winning of the free bonus (for example, the selected symbol command "z14"), and the game state at the time of V winning is the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 The number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A5 time saving flag.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a winning of the free access (for example, the selected symbol command "z15"), and the game state at the time of V winning is the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 The number of rounds is determined to be "10", and the A time saving flag set at the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A5 time saving flag.

[7-8-1-1-3. A time saving end condition determination table]
FIG. 278 is an example of the A time saving end condition determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification. After the jackpot type is determined with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the A time saving end condition determination table corresponds to the jackpot type (that is, the type of A time saving flag set after the jackpot game state ends). It is referred to when determining the A time saving end condition.

As shown in FIG. 278, in this embodiment, as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of saving time and the number of times of derivation per opening of the role product are determined. When either one of the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction end condition and the number of lead-out times per release of the accessory is satisfied, the main CPU 2201 ends the A time reduction game state and controls to the normal game state. In addition, the number of derivations per role release is determined for each of the types of per release per role (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15"). and "z15" are all determined as the time-saving end condition A, the main CPU 2201 at the time when any one of the selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", and "z15" is derived. Ends the A time-saving game state and controls to the normal game state. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 also terminates the A time-saving gaming state when the conditional device is activated.

In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction end condition differs according to the type of the A time reduction flag set after the end of the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the number of time reductions determined as the A time reduction gaming condition corresponds to the number of variable display times of special symbols (the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol). . However, not limited to this, in addition to or instead of determining the number of times of variable display of special symbols as the A time saving end condition, each of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is set to A It may be determined as a time saving end condition, and the A time saving game state may be ended when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

In addition, the number of derivation times per release of the role determined as the A time saving end condition is displayed in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164) per release of the role (selected symbol command " z11", "z14", and "z16") correspond to the fixed display count.

In the present embodiment, when the A4 time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A4 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times as, for example, 99 times as the A time saving end condition, while the role is released. The number of derivations of hits (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15") is not determined. That is, in this case, the number of times of derivation per release of the role product is not included in the A time saving end condition. When the A4 short-time flag set after the end of the big win game state is determined to be the A4 short-time flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 short-time flag to ON at the end of the big win game state, and from the next game after the end of the big win game state, The variable display of the special pattern is controlled to the A4 time-saving game state in which the variable display can be executed, for example, 99 times at maximum. In view of the fact that up to four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol can be reserved, when the A4 time-saving flag is set to ON, the main CPU 2201 can execute the variable display of the second special symbol up to 103 times. Become. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times in the A4 time saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A4 time saving game state and controls the normal game state.

In addition, when the A5 time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be the A5 time saving flag, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of time saving times as, for example, 99 times as the A time saving end condition, and the role release hit (selection The number of derivations of symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15") is determined to be, for example, once. When the A5 time reduction flag set after the end of the big win game state is determined to be the A5 time reduction flag, the main CPU 2201 sets the A5 time reduction flag to ON at the end of the big win game state, and from the next game after the end of the big win game state, The variable display of the special symbols is controlled to the A5 time-saving game state in which the variable display can be executed, for example, 99 times at maximum. In view of the fact that up to four pieces of starting information of the second special symbol can be reserved, when the A5 time-saving flag is set to ON, the main CPU 2201 can execute the variable display of the second special symbol up to 103 times. Become. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times in the A5 time-saving game state, the main CPU 2201 ends the A5 time-saving game state and controls the normal game state. However, in the A5 time-saving gaming state, the special symbols are hit (one of the selected symbol commands "z11", "z14" and "z15") until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 99 times. When it is confirmed and displayed on the display unit (first special symbol display unit 2163, second special symbol display unit 2164), the main CPU 2201 immediately (at least, the execution of the game state per accessory release to the V winning opening 2155 Before the game ball can pass), the A5 time-saving game state is ended and the normal game state is controlled.

The time saving performance may be the same in the A4 time saving game state and the A5 time saving game state, or may be different between the A4 time saving game state and the A5 time saving game state. It should be noted that the time-saving performance is, as described above, the performance of changing the ease of winning the game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 2140 (see FIG. 87) in this embodiment), Winning probability of "per symbol", variable display time of normal symbol, or/and opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87).

[7-8-1-2. Time saving limit function]
Next, the processing related to the operating mode of the time saving limit function will be described with reference to FIG. 279. FIG. FIG. 279 is a time chart showing an example of the game state transition controlled by the main CPU 2201 according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and (A) Time showing an example of the case where the time reduction limit function is activated. (B) a time chart showing an example of a case where the limit number is reset; (C) a time chart showing an example of a case where the chance of resetting the limit number is missed;

In FIG. 279, for the sake of convenience, only the normal game state, the A4 short-time game state, the A5 short-time game state, and the jackpot game state are shown as game states, but the game states controlled by the main CPU 2201 are these game states. is not limited to

In FIG. 279, for the sake of convenience, winning a big win (selected symbol command "z10") is simply illustrated as "z10", and winning a big win (selected symbol command "z13") is simply illustrated as "z13". Winning and V winning in open winning (selected symbol command "z14") is simply illustrated as "z14", and winning and V winning in open role (selected symbol command "z15") is illustrated simply as "z15". there is

In addition, in FIG. 279(B), for the sake of convenience, the confirmation display of winning the role item (selected symbol command "z14") is illustrated as "z14 derivation", and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is simply "V winning". ” is illustrated.

In addition, the operation of the time saving limit function is simply illustrated as "limit operation", and the reset of the limit number is illustrated as "limit reset".

In addition, the first big win game state is simply illustrated as "first time", and the second big win game state occurring before shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big win game state is simply illustrated as "second time", The third big win game state that occurs before shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big win game state is simply indicated as ``third time'', and the fourth time that occurs after the end of the big win game state and before shifting to the normal game state. The big winning game state is simply illustrated as "fourth time", and the fifth big winning game state generated before shifting to the normal game state after the end of the big winning game state is simply illustrated as "fifth time".

(Example of when the time saving limit function is activated)
As shown in FIG. 279(A), for example, when a big win (selected symbol command "z10") is drawn to the first special symbol display section 2163 in the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 enters the first big win game state. Control. When a big win (selected symbol command "z10") is drawn to the first special symbol display unit 2163 in the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, "3", and enters the big win game state. For example, the A time saving flag set after the end is determined as the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined as 99 times as the A time saving end condition (the number of times of derivation per role release is not decided). Therefore, after the end of the first big win game state, the main CPU 2201 controls to the A4 time-saving game state.

In the A4 short-time gaming state after the end of the first big-hitting gaming state, for example, when an open-access prize (selected symbol command "z14") is derived and V wins, the main CPU 2201 executes the processing according to the gaming state at the time of V winning. to determine the kind of jackpot, and control to the second jackpot game state. When the accessory release win is derived in the A4 short gaming state, the gaming state is maintained in the A4 short gaming state, so that the main CPU 2201 executes the round For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined, for example, as the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined as 99 times as the A time saving end condition (per opening of the role) does not determine the number of derivations). Then, when the second jackpot game state is completed, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time reduction flag and controls the A4 time reduction game state.

For example, when a big win (selected symbol command "z13") is derived in the A4 short game state after the second big win game state is completed, the main CPU 2201 returns to the game state at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. The kind of jackpot is determined accordingly, and control is made to the third jackpot game state. In this case, as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277), the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be, for example, "10", and changes the A time saving flag set after the jackpot gaming state to, for example, the A4 time saving flag. Decide, and determine the number of times of time saving as the A time saving end condition, for example, 99 times (the number of times of derivation per role release is not decided). Then, when the third big hit game state is completed, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time reduction flag and controls the A4 time reduction game state.

In the A4 time-saving game state after the third big win game state is completed, for example, when a free-access prize (selected symbol command "z14") is derived and V wins, the main CPU 2201 responds to the game state when V wins. to determine the kind of jackpot, and control to the fourth jackpot game state. When the accessory release win is derived in the A4 short gaming state, the gaming state is maintained in the A4 short gaming state, so that the main CPU 2201 executes the round For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined, for example, as the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined as 99 times as the A time saving end condition (per opening of the role) does not determine the number of derivations). Then, when the fourth jackpot game state is completed, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 time reduction flag and controls the A4 time reduction game state.

In the A4 time-saving game state after the fourth big win game state is completed, for example, when a free-access prize (selected symbol command "z14") is derived and V wins, the main CPU 2201 determines the game state according to the game state at the time of the V win. to determine the kind of jackpot, and control to the fifth jackpot game state. When the accessory release win is derived in the A4 short gaming state, the gaming state is maintained in the A4 short gaming state, so that the main CPU 2201 executes the round For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined, for example, as the A4 time saving flag, and the number of time saving times is determined as 99 times as the A time saving end condition (per opening of the role) does not determine the number of derivations). However, in this case, after the end of the big win game state, the big win game state occurred five times in succession before shifting to the normal game state, so the main CPU 2201 activates the time reduction limit. When the time saving limit operates, the main CPU 2201 does not control to the A4 time saving game state but to the normal game state even if it is decided to set the A4 time saving flag after the jackpot game state ends.

In this way, the big hit game state is not controlled by consecutive games over a predetermined specified number of times (for example, 5 times).

(Example of when the limit number is reset)
As shown in FIG. 279(B), the process until the second big win game state is completed is the same as in FIG. 279(A), so the description is omitted.

After the second big win game state is over, for example, when a role release win (selected symbol command "z15") is derived in the A4 short game state, the main CPU 2201 generates a big win according to the game state when the V prize was won. The type is determined and controlled to the third big win game state. When the accessory release win is derived in the A4 short gaming state, the gaming state is maintained in the A4 short gaming state, so that the main CPU 2201 executes the round For example, the number is determined to be "10", the A time saving flag set after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be A5 time saving flag, for example, and as the A time saving end condition, the number of times of time saving is decided to be 99 times, for example, and the role is released. The number of derivations for each winning (selected symbol commands "z11", "z14", "z15") is determined to be one. Then, when the third big hit game state is completed, the main CPU 2201 sets the A5 time reduction flag and controls the A5 time reduction game state.

In the A5 time-shortened game state after the third big win game state is completed, for example, when a role item release win (selected symbol command "z14") is derived, the main CPU 2201 immediately ends the A5 time-shortened game state and starts the normal game. state and reset the limit number based on this. In other words, although the number of consecutive games in the big win game state continued up to three consecutive games, the number of consecutive games in the big win game state is reset to 0 by resetting the limit number. After that, when the player wins a V prize, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot according to the game state (here, the normal game state) when the player wins a V prize, and controls to the first jackpot game state. After deriving the winning symbol (selected symbol command "z14"), when V is won in the normal game state, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds, for example, as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 277). Determine "10", set the A time saving flag to be set after the end of the jackpot game state, for example, the A4 time saving flag, and determine the number of time saving times as the A time saving end condition, for example, 99 times do not decide). Then, when the first big hit game state ends, the main CPU 2201 sets the A4 short working hour flag and controls to the A4 short working hour game state.

In this way, in a game machine having a time-saving limit function, by making it possible to reset the limit number, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive games in the big win game state while suppressing the big win game state from being unnecessarily repeated. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest that may occur due to being

(Example of missing a chance to reset the limit)
By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modified example, although there is a chance to reset the limit number, the chance to reset the limit number may be missed. An example of a case where the chance of resetting the limit number is missed will be described below with reference to FIG. 279(C).

As shown in FIG. 279(C), the process until the third big win game state is completed is the same as in FIG. 279(B), so the description is omitted.

In FIG. 279(B), in the A5 time-saving game state after the third jackpot game state is completed, for example, a per character release (selected symbol command "z14") is derived. However, as shown in FIG. 279(C), in the A5 time-saving game state after the third big win game state is completed, a jackpot (for example, a selected symbol command "z13") is derived instead of a free-access prize. If so, the main CPU 2201 determines the type of jackpot according to the game state (here, A5 short-time game state) at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the fourth jackpot without resetting the limit number. Control to game state. In this case, although there was a chance to reset the limit number, the chance to reset the limit number is lost.

In this way, in a game machine having a time-saving limit function, even though there is a chance to reset the limit number, the chance can be lost, so that the player can be made to feel tense, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. becomes possible. In addition, it is also possible to further prevent the jackpot game state from continuing unnecessarily by allowing the reset chance of the limit number to be missed.

[7-8-2. Second modification]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the second modification will be described. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixture machine, like the seventh pachinko gaming machine. However, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification differs from the seventh pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. The control by the main CPU 2201 that variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel is performed by the main CPU 1201 of the second pachinko game machine that variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Similar to control.

[7-8-2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 280 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 2010 provided in a pachinko game machine according to the second modification. The game board unit 2010 provided in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification has the following points, the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine (that is, the seventh pachinko game machine) shown in FIG. very different from
・When the special electric accessory 2133 is not provided and the jackpot is won, the V attacker 2152 operates in the same manner as when the accessory is released and the V prize is won.
· The point that the normal electric accessory unit 2145 is arranged at almost the same position as the special electric accessory unit 2130 in the third pachinko game machine.
・On the downstream side of the normal electric role product unit 2145, the small winning electric role product unit 2190 is arranged.
- In addition to the second starting port 2140, a second starting port 2140A is provided.

The small winning electric accessory unit 2190 includes a small winning winning opening 2191 in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as winning balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and winning of the game balls to the small winning winning opening 2191. A small win win count switch (not shown) for detecting (passing), a small win shutter 2193, and a small win solenoid (not shown) capable of operating the small win shutter 2193. It is a unit body integrated with an electric accessory for use (no reference numeral).

The small winning electric accessory unit 2190 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 2145, and a game ball hit to the right can win a small winning prize opening 2191. - 特許庁The small-hit winning opening 2191 is configured such that, for example, the ease of winning can be changed by operating the small-hit shutter 2193 in the front-rear direction. Incidentally, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning prize opening 2191 is, for example, five, but is not limited to this.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, it is possible to win inside the V winning device 2150 based on the result of the winning judgment processing of the second special symbol being the winning of the prize release. Here, the prize release hit may be referred to as a small hit. However, in the explanation of the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, when the V winning prize is given to the inside of the V winning device 2150, the V winning prize attached to the opening of the V winning device 2150 and the inside of the V winning device 2150 It includes the V winning non-useful object opening hit that does not trigger the winning of a prize. When the game is won in the V-win accessory release hit, the V-attacker 2152 is activated, and when the V-win is won, the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when winning the V winning non-accessory open hit, although the small winning electric accessory (that is, the small winning shutter 2193) operates, even if the game ball wins the small winning prize opening 2191, the state of the big winning game is entered. Not controlled. In other words, the V winning accessory release hit can trigger the occurrence of the big win game state, but the V winning non-accessory open hit cannot trigger the occurrence of the big win game state. Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko game machine according to the second modification, the V-winning accessory open win is referred to as "accessory open win", and the V-winning non-accessory open win is referred to as "minor win".

In addition, the second starting port 2140A, apart from the second starting port 2140, in the right area 2107 so that the right-handed game ball can win (left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) , is arranged downstream of the electric accessory unit 2190 for small hits. The second starting port 2140A is arranged in the right region 2107 so that a game ball that has not won inside the V winning device 2150, the second starting port 2140, or the small winning prize port 2191 can win a prize. It is arranged downstream from all of the device 2150 , the normal electric role product 2146 and the small winning electric role product unit 2190 .

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140A, it triggers the second special symbol hit determination process in the same way as when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140A. However, the second starting port 2140A does not change the winning rate of game balls, unlike the second starting port 2140 in which winning is facilitated by the operation of the normal electric accessory 2146 . When a game ball enters the second start port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out, whereas when a game ball enters the second start port 2140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

In this embodiment, of the game balls that did not win in either the V winning device 2150 or the second start port 2140, for example, approximately 1/5 to 1/10 of the game balls enter the second start port 2140A. Although it is possible to win a prize, this is an example and is not limited to this. However, it is preferable that the rate of the left-handed game ball winning the first starting port 2120 is the same or easier to win.

In this embodiment, the special electric accessory 2133 is not provided, and when the jackpot is won, the V-attacker 2152 is activated and the round game is executed in the same way as when the accessory is won and the V prize is won. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a special electric accessory 2133 is provided, and the main CPU 2201 executes a round game in which, when a jackpot is won, the special electric shutter 2134 is operated to open the big prize opening 2131 from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time. When the game is won by opening the object and wins the V prize, the V attacker 2152 may be activated to execute a round game in which the V winning device 2150 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period.

[7-8-2-2. electrical configuration]
The control circuit provided in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification is basically the same as the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine (seventh pachinko game machine) shown in FIG. do not do. However, the control circuit provided in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification includes a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball to the small winning prize opening 2191, a small winning solenoid capable of operating the small winning shutter 2193, And, a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140A is connected to the main control circuit 2200, and when these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control via the I/O port 2205. It differs from the control circuit shown in FIG. 88 in that it is output to circuit 2200 . In addition, the control circuit provided in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification does not include the special electric solenoid 2135 and the big winning opening count switch 2132 (not connected to the main control circuit 2200), but this point is also , differs from the control circuit shown in FIG.

[7-8-2-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 286, basic specifications different from the seventh pachinko game machine will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, the main CPU 2201 is controllable to a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

The main CPU 2201 controls to the variation pattern selection state 1 or the variation pattern selection state 2 when controlling to the non-time-saving gaming state. The regular game mode in the variation pattern selection state 1 is left-handed, and the regular game mode in the variation pattern selection state 2 is right-handed. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection state 1, the first special symbol game is mainly executed, and in the variation pattern selection state 2, the second special symbol game is mainly executed.

In addition, the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern selection state 2 have different variation pattern tables that are referred to when executing the variable display of the special symbols, and the variation pattern selection state 2 is the per unit time The expected value of the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is larger than that in the variation pattern selection state 1. - 特許庁The special symbol variation pattern table referred to in each of the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern selection state 2 will be described later.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 does not necessarily control to the variation pattern selection state 1 or the variation pattern selection state 2 in the non-time-saving gaming state, and another variation different from the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern selection state 2 It may be controllable to the pattern selection state.

The main CPU 2201 controls to the variation pattern selection state 3 when controlling to the time saving game state. The regular game mode in the variation pattern selection state 3 is right-handed. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection state 3, the second special symbol game is mainly executed.

In the variation pattern selection state 3, the variation pattern table referred to when executing the variable display of the special symbols is the variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern selection state 2. is different from either In the variation pattern selection state 3, the variable display time of the special symbols is shortened, and the expected value of the number of variable display times of the special symbols per unit time in the variation pattern selection state 3 is the number of special symbols per unit time in the variation pattern selection state 1. Large compared to the expected value of the variable display count. In addition, the expected value of the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed per unit time in the variation pattern selection state 3 is equal to or higher than the expected value of the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed per unit time in the variation pattern selection state 2. big. The special symbol variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern selection state 3 will be described later.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 does not necessarily control to the variation pattern selection state 3 in the time saving game state, and may be able to control to another variation pattern selection state different from the variation pattern selection state 3. In addition, the variation pattern table of the special symbols referred to in the variation pattern selection state 3 is not essential to be different from both the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern selection state 2. For example, the special symbols referred to in the variation pattern selection state It may be the same as the pattern variation pattern table.

[7-8-2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 281 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification. Various probabilities such as big hit probability, small hit probability and accessory release probability are shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 281).

According to the special symbol win determination table shown in FIG. 281, when the first special symbol win determination process is executed, a small win is won with a probability of approximately 1/10. However, the first starting port 2120 enables the game ball to win by hitting to the left, while the small winning electric accessory unit 2190 is arranged in the right region 2107 . Further, when the display mode indicating the small win is derived, the main CPU 2201 immediately operates the small win shutter 2193. Therefore, even if the result of the win determination process for the first special symbol is a small win, It is difficult to win a game ball into the small hit winning opening 2191 .

[7-8-2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 282 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification.

When the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. , 2140A), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins.

[7-8-2-3-3. Fluctuation pattern selection state transition condition determination table]
FIG. 283 is an example of a variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modified example, when the current game state (jackpot (selected symbol command "z20", "z23", "z24") or winning (selected symbol command "z5") is won game state), it is controlled to the variation pattern selection state 2 or the variation pattern selection state 3 after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, when the prize is won with the prize open, the game state when the prize is won with the prize open (selected symbol command “z5”) and the V prize may be set as the current game state.

In the variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table of FIG. 283, the variation pattern selection state described at the top is the current gaming state. Moreover, the variation pattern selection state described in the second row from the top is the variation pattern selection state controlled after the big hit game state ends. Then, the number specified according to the selected pattern command is controlled from the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state 2 or variation pattern selection state 3) controlled after the end of the jackpot game state to the variation pattern selection state 1. It is the variable display number of special symbols up to.

For example, when the current game state is the variation pattern selection state 1, when winning the free prize (selected symbol command "z25") and winning V, the main CPU 2201 changes to the variation pattern selection state after the jackpot game state. 2, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the variation pattern selection state 1 is controlled.

Further, for example, when the current game state is the variation pattern selection state 2, if a big win (selected symbol command "z24") is won, the main CPU 2201 controls to the variation pattern selection state 2 after the big win game state ends, When the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, the control is made to the variation pattern selection state 1. - 特許庁

Furthermore, when the current game state is the variation pattern selection state 3, if a big win (selected symbol command "z24") is won, the main CPU 2201 controls to the variation pattern selection state 3 after the big win game state ends, and the special symbol. is executed 100 times, control is made to change pattern selection state 1 .

In this way, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game state and the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game state (variation pattern selection state 2, variation pattern selection state 3) are shifted to the variation pattern selection state 1 The number of times of variable display of special symbols, which is the condition of (1), is determined by the main CPU 2201 based on the current game state and the selected symbol command. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit (selected symbol command "z21") or a loss (selected symbol command "z22", "z26"), it is not determined.

[7-8-2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
284 to 286 are examples of variation pattern tables stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification. More specifically, FIG. 284 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols in the variation pattern selection state 1 . FIG. 285 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols in the variation pattern selection state 2 . FIG. 286 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when performing variable display of special symbols in the variation pattern selection state 3 .

In the variation pattern selection state 1, as described above, since left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the variation pattern selection state 1, the first special symbol game is normally executed. Even if the game ball is struck to the right as an irregular game mode and the game ball wins the second start hole 2140, 2140A, the game ball wins the first start hole 2120 as shown in FIG. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed for a long time (for example, approximately 600000 ms).

In addition, as described above, the variation pattern selection state 2 is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal, so in the variation pattern selection state 2, the second special symbol game is normally executed. As shown in FIG. 285, in variation pattern selection state 2, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is larger than in variation pattern selection state 1 . That is, the average time of the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter in the variation pattern selection state 2 than in the variation pattern selection state 1. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection state 2, the special symbol game is promoted as compared with the variation pattern selection state 1, and the time until the big win game state is controlled is relatively short. In addition, when the first special symbol game is executed, the winning of the free prize that can trigger the occurrence of the big win game state is not possible, but when the second special symbol game is executed, the occurrence of the big win game state is triggered. It can be elected per open role. Therefore, it can be said that the variation pattern selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state that is more advantageous to the player than the variation pattern selection state 1 .

In addition, as described above, the variation pattern selection state 3 is a game mode in which hitting to the right is normal, so in the variation pattern selection state 3, the second special symbol is usually executed. As shown in FIG. 286, in variation pattern selection state 3, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is larger than in variation pattern selection state 2. FIG. That is, the average time of the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter in the variation pattern selection state 3 than in both the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern selection state 2. Therefore, in the variation pattern selection state 3, the special symbol game is promoted compared to the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern selection state 2, and the time until the big win game state is controlled is the shortest.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern selection state 1 and the variation pattern selection state 2, time saving control is not performed, but in the variation pattern selection state 3, time saving control is performed. When the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is increased. Thus, among the variation pattern selection state 1, the variation pattern selection state 2 and the variation pattern selection state 3, the variation pattern selection state 3 has the highest degree of advantage for the player, and the variation pattern selection state 1 is the highest for the player. It can be said that the degree of advantage is the lowest.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, when executing the variable display of the special symbols, different variation pattern tables are referred to in the variation pattern selection state 2 and the variation pattern selection state 3, but as described above The same variation pattern table may be referred to in the variation pattern selection state 2 and the variation pattern selection state 3. For example, in both the variation pattern selection state 2 and the variation pattern selection state 3, the variation pattern table in FIG. 285 may be referred to, and the variation pattern table in FIG. 286 may be referred to.

[7-8-2-4. Production mode]
Next, the presentation mode performed by the display device 2007 constituted by, for example, a liquid crystal display will be briefly described.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, the sub CPU 2301 selects state 1 effect mode, state 2 effect mode, state 3 effect mode, and jackpot mode based on the current game state information command-transmitted from the main CPU 2201. Either of them is configured to be controllable.

The state 1 effect mode is a effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 controls the variation pattern selection state 1 .

The state 2 effect mode is a effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 controls the variation pattern selection state 2, and is more advantageous to the player than the state 1 effect mode.

The state 3 effect mode is a effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 controls the variation pattern selection state 3, and is more beneficial to the player than either the state 1 effect mode or the state 2 effect mode. It is an advantageous production mode.

The jackpot mode is an effect mode controlled by the sub CPU 2301 when the main CPU 2201 controls the jackpot game state.

[7-8-2-5. Transition of fluctuation pattern selection state]
Next, transition of the variation pattern selection state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing an example of variation pattern selection state transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification. Although a plurality of jackpot game states are illustrated in FIG. 287, this is for convenience of explanation.

(If the current variation pattern selection state is variation pattern selection state 1)
As shown in FIG. 287, when a big win (selected symbol command "z20") is won in the variation pattern selection state 1, the main CPU 2201 ends the variation pattern selection state 1 and controls to the big win game state. When this jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 2201 controls to change pattern selection state 2 .

In the variation pattern selection state 1, the first special symbol game is mainly executed, so it usually does not occur. Also when (selected symbol command "z25") is won and V is won, the main CPU 2201 controls to the variation pattern selection state 2 after the big win game state. That is, when a big win game state occurs in the variation pattern selection state 1, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification always shifts to the variation pattern selection state 2 after the big win game state ends.

In the variation pattern selection state 2, which has shifted from the variation pattern selection state 1 to the jackpot game state, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times, the main CPU 2201 terminates the variation pattern selection state 2 and enters the variation pattern selection state. Control to 1.

In addition, in FIG. 287, the transition destination and the specified number of times when the variable display of the special symbol is executed the specified number of times in the variation pattern selection state 2 that has moved from the variation pattern selection state 1 through the jackpot game state are the variation pattern selection state 2 is illustrated by the arrows coming out from below.

As shown in FIG. 287 and the variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see FIG. 283), the above specified number of times is selected by winning a big hit (selected symbol command "z20") in the variation pattern selection state 1. It is 10 times when transitioning to state 2. It should be noted that, exceptionally, if you win a big hit (selection pattern command "z23", "z24") in the variation pattern selection state 1 and shift to the variation pattern selection state 2, 20 times, in the variation pattern selection state 1 The number of times is 100 in the case of shifting to the variation pattern selection state 2 by winning the open hit (selected symbol command "z25") and winning the V prize.

(If the current variation pattern selection state is variation pattern selection state 2)
As shown in FIG. 287, when a big win (selected symbol commands "z23", "z24") is won in the variation pattern selection state 2, the main CPU 2201 returns to the variation pattern selection state 2 after the jackpot gaming state is completed. Control.

In addition, when winning the free prize (selected symbol command "z25") and winning V in the variation pattern selection state 2, the main CPU 2201 controls to the variation pattern selection state 3 after the big win game state.

Thus, in the variation pattern selection state 2, when the big win game state occurs, after the end of the big win game state, it is controlled to the variation pattern selection state 3 at a constant rate (about one-third in this embodiment), Others are controlled to the variation pattern selection state 2.

In the variation pattern selection state 2, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, so it does not normally occur. After the end, it is controlled to the variation pattern selection state 2.

In the variation pattern selection state 3, which has shifted from the variation pattern selection state 2 to the jackpot game state, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times, the main CPU 2201 terminates the variation pattern selection state 3 and enters the variation pattern selection state. Control to 1. In this case, the prescribed number of times and the transition destination are, for example, 100 times, as shown in FIG. 287 and the variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see FIG. 283).

In the variation pattern selection state 2, which is controlled again from the variation pattern selection state 2 through the jackpot game state, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times, the main CPU 2201 terminates the variation pattern selection state 2 and displays the variation pattern. Control to selection state 1. In this case, the prescribed number of times and the transition destination are as indicated by the arrows extending from the bottom of the variation pattern selection state 2 .

That is, the specified number of times is 20 when the big hit (selected symbol command "z23", "z24") is won in the variation pattern selection state 2 and the variation pattern selection state 2 is controlled again. Exceptionally, when the big hit (selected symbol command "z20") is won in the variation pattern selection state 2 and the variation pattern selection state 2 is controlled again, the number of times is 10.

(If the current variation pattern selection state is variation pattern selection state 3)
As shown in FIG. 287, in the variation pattern selection state 3, when a big win (selected symbol command "z24") is won, and when a role item is released (selected symbol command "z25"), V is won. In this case, the main CPU 2201 again controls to the variation pattern selection state 3 after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, when a big win (selected symbol command "z23") is won in the variation pattern selection state 3, the main CPU 2201 controls to the variation pattern selection state 2 after the big win game state is finished.

In the case where the variation pattern selection state 3 is controlled again to the variation pattern selection state 3 through the jackpot game state, the main CPU 2201 terminates the variation pattern selection state 3 and changes when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times. Control to pattern selection state 1. In this case, the prescribed number of times and the transition destination are, for example, 100 times, as shown in FIG. 287 and the variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see FIG. 283).

In this way, the variation pattern selection state 3 does not shift to the variation pattern selection state 1 until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 100 times, and as long as the second special symbol game is executed, the big hit (selected symbol command The variation pattern selection state 3 continues until "z23") is won.

In the variation pattern selection state 3, the second special symbol game is mainly executed, so it does not normally occur. After the end, it is controlled to the variation pattern selection state 2.

In the variation pattern selection state 3, when the jackpot (selected symbol command "z20", "z3") is won and the game state shifts to the variation pattern selection state 2 after the jackpot game state is ended, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times. Then, the main CPU 2201 terminates the variation pattern selection state 2 and controls to the variation pattern selection state 1 . Note that the prescribed number of times and the transition destination in this case are illustrated by arrows extending from above the variation pattern selection state 2 . That is, as shown in FIG. 287 and the variation pattern selection state transition condition determination table (see FIG. 283), when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times in the variation pattern selection state 2 in this case, the main CPU 2201 End the variation pattern selection state 2 and control to the variation pattern selection state 1.

Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification, by providing a plurality of variation pattern selection states with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to provide unprecedented new game features. becomes. Moreover, based on the selected pattern command and the current variation pattern selection state, not only the variation pattern selection state of the transition destination, but also the staying period of the variation pattern selection state of the transition destination is determined, a new unprecedented It is possible to provide game properties.

[8. Eighth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the eighth pachinko game machine will be described below. This eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and the first special symbol is displayed. It is assumed that it is a priority variable machine in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is preferentially established over the starting condition of . However, the invention described in the eighth pachinko gaming machine can be applied not only to the first pachinko gaming machine, but also to any of the first to seventh pachinko gaming machines. Also, the number of special symbols is not limited to two (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the number of special symbols may be one.

In describing the eighth pachinko game machine below, the explanation of the points in common with the first pachinko game machine, such as the appearance configuration, electrical configuration, functions, shape, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted as much as possible. Differences from the pachinko game machine will be mainly described.

In addition, when explaining the eighth pachinko game machine, when explaining with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine will be used. .

In addition, below, the pachinko game machine of 1st Example and the pachinko game machine of 2nd Example are demonstrated as an 8th pachinko game machine.

[8-1. Pachinko machine of the first embodiment]
First, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment will be explained below.

[8-1-1. basic specifications]
Basic specifications of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 309. FIG.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 201 performs a normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, and both the variable probability control and the time saving control are performed when proceeding with the game in which the variable display of the special symbols is performed. A high-probability time-saving game state to be executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "time-saving game state") in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed. It is possible to proceed. Further, it may be possible to progress the game in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the variable probability control is executed although the time-saving control is not executed. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this. In addition, the time saving game state executed in the high probability time saving game state is the A time saving game state. "state" means the A time-saving game state that is executed in the low-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state and a C time saving game state. In the following, when simply referred to as "time saving game state", it means a generic term for A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, except when there is a description in parentheses.

A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state are as explained in the first pachinko game machine. It should be noted that it is not essential for a pachinko machine to have all of the time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C, and only some of these time-saving game states are installed. It can be a thing. For example, as the time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may be installed, and the B time-saving game state may not be installed.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, the C time saving game state includes a C1 time saving game state, a C2 time saving game state, a C3 time saving game state and a C4 time saving game state. there is In the following, when simply referred to as "C time-saving gaming state", unless there is a description in parentheses, C1 time-saving gaming state, C2 time-saving gaming state, C3 time-saving gaming state and C4 time-saving gaming state In the second embodiment, it means the general term of C3 time saving game state, C4 time saving game state and C5 time saving game state).

In addition, it is not essential that all of the C1 time saving game state, C2 time saving game state, C3 time saving game state and C4 time saving game state are included in the C time saving game state, and only a part of these C time saving game states may be included.

In the C1 time saving game state, the C2 time saving game state and the C3 time saving game state, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a time saving hit (C1 time saving hit, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving win), and corresponds to these time saving hits. When the display mode to be displayed is derived to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, it is a time-saving game state controlled by switching from the current game state to the time-saving game state. Even when the display mode corresponding to the time saving win is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164 in the time saving game state, the current time saving game state is ended and the new time saving game state is switched to the C time saving game state and controlled. .

In the C4 time-short game state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state is the C4 time-time hit, and when the display mode corresponding to the C4 time-time hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the normal game is performed. It is a time saving game state that is controlled by switching from the state to the C4 time saving game state. However, when the current game state is the time-saving game state, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the C4 time-saving hit, and the display mode corresponding to the C4 time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Even if it is, this is ignored, and the current normal game state is continued without being switched to the C4 time-saving game state. In the above, as a result of determining that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C4 short time hit, this result is ignored, but not limited to this, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C4 You may make it not perform the determination itself of whether it is a time-saving hit.

That is, the C1 time-saving game state, the C2 time-saving game state and the C3 time-saving game state are in the C time-saving game state that can be newly controlled by switching from the time-saving game state under control even if it is controlled to another time-saving game state. On the other hand, the C4 time saving game state is a C time saving game state that does not operate when it is controlled to the time saving game state.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the normal game state in which the electric sapo control is not executed, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the high-probability short-time gaming state and the low-probable short-time gaming state in which the electric sapo control is executed Then, including all the C time-saving game states, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. However, it is possible to appropriately and arbitrarily design which of left-handed and right-handed shots is the regular game mode in each game state, for example, depending on the nature of the game. Although it is not installed in the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is a regular game mode in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state in which the electric sapo control is not executed.

[8-1-1-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol win determination processing, for example, based on the special symbol win determination table shown in FIG. 10 described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 is an example in the case of setting 1, but the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment can be set to one of a plurality of setting values such as settings 1 to 6. It may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function capable of setting, or it is not limited to this, and may be a pachinko game machine without a setting function.

In addition, the time saving probability is a common probability for all set values, unlike the jackpot probability, and the probability variation flag is "1" (on) and "0" (off). be. For example, regardless of the setting value, in both cases where the probability variation flag is "1" and "0", the time saving probability when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is executed is 160 minutes. 1. The time saving hit probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is executed is 1/240. The time saving hit probability may be different between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but may be the same.

However, the time saving probability may be different depending on the setting value, and if the time saving probability is a common probability for all setting values, the time saving number and time saving performance to be set should be different depending on the setting value. You can let The time-saving performance, as described above, is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), , the variable display time of normal symbols, and/or the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessories 146, and the like.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol win determination process may include a small win. When a small hit is included in the target of the hit determination, the small hit probability is preferably set to a common probability for all set values. In addition, when a small hit is included in the target of the hit determination, a small hit is won when the hit determination processing of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You may make it possible. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the aspect of not performing the determination itself of whether or not the small hit was won, whether or not the small hit probability was set to 0 may be determined.

The above-mentioned time-saving hit probability and the small hit probability when including the small hit in the target of the hit determination may be a common probability with all set values as described above, but not limited to this, as a different probability according to the set value good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of set values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6, or the jackpot probability may be set to be the same for all set values.

[8-1-1-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 288 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 288, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 4, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 5 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 10 to 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 40 to 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z7" and select "zA5" as the design designation command.

When the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 4, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 5 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 10 to 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 40 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z14" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z15" and select "zA10" as the design designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, the determination value data is determined based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table ( 288), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination value data, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value.

In addition, for some judgment value data (for example, big hit judgment value data) out of the judgment value data, with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see FIG. 10), a special symbol hit judgment random value extracted Determine the determination value data based on, and then refer to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 288) to determine the selected symbol command and symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, while the remaining determination As for the value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted special symbol hit determination random number value. As a specific example of the latter (remaining judgment value data), for example, when the random number for judging the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 19, the main CPU 201 outputs "z0 ”, and select “zA1” as the design designation command. Further, when the first special symbol hit determination random number value is, for example, any one of 20 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Since the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are similarly selected when the value of the first special symbol hit determination random number value is other, the description is omitted here.

As described in the first pachinko game machine, the main CPU 201 displays the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 in the same manner as the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12(A), for example. (See FIG. 5), the stop mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (that is, the selected symbol command) is derived.

[8-1-1-3. Hit type determination table]
Figures 289 to 295 are examples of winning type determination tables stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit or a big hit, the display mode indicating the time saving hit or the display mode indicating the big hit is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second The winning type determination table that the main CPU 201 refers to when determining the winning type differs depending on the gaming state when the special symbol display unit 164) is displayed.

In FIGS. 289 to 295, the number shown in the column of the number of rounds is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. In addition, since the round game is not executed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, "-" is displayed in the columns of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11". It is shown.

In addition, the number "1" shown in each flag (probability variable flag, time saving flag, A time saving flag, B time saving flag, C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag, C4 time saving flag) indicates that the flag is on. Indicates that it is set.

In addition, the time saving flag is a flag for managing whether or not the current game state is the time saving game state. In addition, the A time saving flag, the B time saving flag, the C1 time saving flag, the C2 time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag are flags for managing the types of the time saving game state.

The number shown in the column of the number of times of reduced working hours indicates the number of times of reduced working hours to be set. For example, "300" indicates that the number of times of time saving is set to 300 times.

In addition, the number of times of time saving is one of a plurality of time saving end conditions. The time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving number of times include, for example, being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, the number of time reduction in the present embodiment is the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol, but the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the variable number of the second special symbol The number of times of display may be included in the time saving end condition.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit (that is, if the selected symbol command is one of "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11"), the main CPU 201 In the time saving control mode determination process (see S207 in FIG. 38), the mode of the C time saving game state (for example, the type of time saving per type and the opening pattern of the normal electric auditors 146) is determined, and the determined C time saving game state Depending on the mode, various data related to the control of the C time saving game state (time saving flag, time saving number of times, etc.) are set to time saving mode setting processing (see S514 in FIG. 311 described later) or time saving mode reset processing (see FIG. 311 described later) is set in S513). In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting processing of the normal electric accessory 146 is performed in the normal symbol variable display start processing (S293 in FIG. 43). However, it may be performed in the time saving mode setting process (see S514 in FIG. 311 described later) or in the time saving mode resetting process (S513 in FIG. 311 described later).

Thus, in this embodiment, the timing for setting various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state is the execution of the special symbol game end process (see S130 in FIG. 30), that is, the display mode indicating the time-saving hit is the special symbol display. (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol display portion 164), but not limited to this, the display mode indicating the time saving hit was derived to the special symbol display portions 163, 164 It may be when the variable display of the next special symbol is started (that is, when the special symbol variable display start process is executed (see S83 in FIG. 27)).

[8-1-1-3-1. Hit type determination table in normal game state]
Figure 289 is a hit type determination table in the normal game state, that is, in the normal game state, the display mode indicating the time saving hit or the display mode indicating the big hit is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol It is an example of the hit type determination table when it is derived to the display unit 164).

As shown in FIG. 289, in the normal game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the selected symbol command is a display mode corresponding to one of "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11". is derived to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol display portion 164), the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to "1" and performs the time saving mode setting process ( In S514 of FIG. 311 to be described later), various data related to the control of the time-saving game state are set. Various data related to the control of the C time-saving gaming state set in the time-saving mode setting process (see S514 in FIG. 311 described later) are, for example, time-saving flags of types according to the selected symbol command, time-saving times, and the like.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z0" is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag to "1", and sets 300 times as the number of times of time saving. to set. Further, for example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z11" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving flag to "1". Set 50 times.

As shown in FIG. 289, when the result of the hit determination process in the specific game state is a time saving hit, the selected symbol command corresponds to one of "z0" to "z3" and "z8" to "z11". Depending on whether the display mode to be displayed is derived to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol display portion 164), the number of time saving times, which is one of the plurality of time saving end conditions, is different. . The same applies to FIGS. 290 to 295 and FIGS. 314 to 319 which will be described later.

Further, the selected symbol command is one of "z4" to "z6" and "z12" to "z14", and the display mode indicating the big hit is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol display portion 163). 2 special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various flags (probability variation flag, time saving flag , A time saving flag, B time saving flag, C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag, C4 time saving flag) are initialized (cleared), and the number of rounds is set according to the selected symbol command. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the flag corresponding to the selected symbol command to the " 1”, and set the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the selected symbol command.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z4" is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163, the main CPU 201 sets the number of rounds to be executed in the big win game state to "3" at the start of the big win game state. ” is set, and at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving flag and A time saving flag are set to “1” (probability variation flag is not set to “1”), and the number of time saving times is set to “30”.

Also, for example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z14" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be executed in the big win game state at the start of the big win game state. "10" is set, and at the end of the jackpot game state, the variable probability flag, the time reduction flag and the A time reduction flag are set to "1", and the A time reduction game state can be continued until the next jackpot game state is controlled. For example, the number of times to save time is set to "10000".

The winning type determination table in the normal game state in FIG. 289 is only an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. , may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the B time saving game state (for example, 300 times). to set.

[8-1-1-3-2. Hit type determination table in A time-saving gaming state]
Figure 290 is a hit type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state, that is, in the A time-saving gaming state, the display mode showing the time-saving winning or the display mode showing the big hit is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second It is an example of the hit type determination table when it is derived to the special symbol display unit 164).

Hereinafter, the winning type determination table in the A time-saving game state shown in FIG. 290 will be described, but the description of common points with the winning type determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the A time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to one of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2" and "z8" to "z10" is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU201, in the later-described time-saving mode reset processing (see S513 in FIG. 311 described later), various set the data.

As shown in Figure 290, specifically, after initializing various flags, the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command to set.

That is, in the A time-saving gaming state, the display mode showing a specific time-saving hit (in this embodiment, for example, C1 time-saving hit, C2 time-saving hit, C3 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 terminates the A time-saving gaming state being controlled, and outputs the selected symbol command derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164 (i.e., time-saving A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the winning type) is started.

For example, in the A time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 sets the A time-saving flag and the C3 time-saving flag to "1". and set the number of time reductions to "50".

On the other hand, in the A time-saving gaming state, assuming that the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164) However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the current A time-saving game state without controlling to the C4 time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the A time saving game state is a time saving hit, even if the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is determined as the time saving hit type, this is determined. Although it is disregarded, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the first place in the A time saving game state without being limited to this.

Also, the hit type determination table in the A time-saving game state of FIG. 290 is just an example, and the hit types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 290, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter never reaches the ceiling value in the A time-saving game state. However, the specification is not limited to this, and the value of the ceiling counter may reach the ceiling value in the A time-saving game state.

[8-1-1-3-3. Hit type determination table in B time-saving gaming state]
Figure 291 is a hit type determination table in the B time saving gaming state, that is, in the B time saving gaming state, the display mode indicating the time saving hit or the display mode indicating the big hit is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second It is an example of the hit type determination table when it is derived to the special symbol display unit 164).

Below, the hit type determination table in the B time-saving game state shown in FIG. 291 will be described, but the description of common points with the hit type determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the B time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to one of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2" and "z8" to "z10" is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU201, in the later-described time-saving mode reset processing (see S513 in FIG. 311 described later), various set the data.

As shown in Figure 291, specifically, after initializing various flags, set the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command to "1", and the time saving number of times corresponding to the selected symbol command to set.

That is, in the B time-saving gaming state, the display mode showing a specific time-saving hit (in this embodiment, for example, C1 time-saving hit, C2 time-saving hit, C3 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 terminates the current B time-saving gaming state, and the selected symbol command derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164 (i.e., time-saving per type) to start a new C time-saving game state corresponding to

For example, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z9" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag and the C2 time-saving flag to "1". , set the number of times of time saving to "300".

By the way, as described above, in the normal game state or A time saving game state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, if it is a C2 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), As shown in Figures 289 and 290, the number of times of shortening working hours to be set is only "5". However, in the B time-saving gaming state, which is relatively advantageous to the player in the time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C2 time-saving hitting, as shown in FIG. The number of times the time is saved is '300'. This is because if '5' is set as the number of times of time saving when winning the C2 time saving game despite being controlled to the B time saving game state by reaching the ceiling with much effort, interest is greatly reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning the C2 time saving game state in the B time saving game state, similarly to when reaching the ceiling or winning the C1 time saving game, by setting "300" as the number of times of time saving, the interest is increased. It is possible to suppress the decline.

Also, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C3 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), as shown in FIG. 291, the number of time saving times to be set is "200". Also in this case, even though the game reaches the ceiling and is controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the C3 time-saving win is won, the interest may decrease depending on the remaining time-saving number of the B time-saving game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning the C3 time saving game state in the B time saving game state, although it is less than the case of winning the C2 time saving time, by setting "200" as the number of times of time saving, the decline in interest is suppressed. I am making it possible.

However, the number of times of time reduction set when winning C2 time reduction or C3 time reduction in B time reduction game state is elected to C2 time reduction or C3 time reduction in other time reduction game state (excluding C1 time reduction game state) It is not essential to have more than the number of time saving times set in the case. For example, even if C2 time saving hit or C3 time saving hit is won in any time saving game state, the number of time saving times to be set may be the same or substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving gaming state, assuming that the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164) However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the current B time saving game state without controlling to the C4 time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is a time saving hit, even if the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is determined as the time saving hit type, this is accepted. Although it is disregarded, it is not limited to this, and in the B time saving game state, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the first place.

Also, the hit type determination table in the B time-saving gaming state of FIG. 291 is only an example, and the hit types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 291, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, since the number of ceiling values set as the condition for starting the B time saving game state is one, the value of the ceiling counter never reaches the ceiling value in the B time saving game state. However, it is not limited to this, and a specification may be adopted in which a plurality of ceiling values are provided and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the B time-saving game state.

[8-1-1-3-4. Hit type determination table in C1 time-saving gaming state]
Figure 292 is a hit type determination table in the C1 time saving gaming state, that is, in the C1 time saving gaming state, the display mode indicating the time saving hit or the display mode indicating the big hit is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second It is an example of the hit type determination table when it is derived to the special symbol display unit 164).

Below, the hit type determination table in the C1 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 292 will be described, but the description of common points with the hit type determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the C1 time-saving gaming state, as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z0" or "z8" is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164 ), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, which will be described later).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 292, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving is set to "300". That is, the C1 time saving game state being controlled ends, and a new C1 time saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, the display mode corresponding to one of the selected symbol commands "z1", "z2", "z9" and "z10" is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, When it is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311 to be described later). Specifically, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set.

For example, in the C1 time saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". , set the number of times of time saving to "50".

Thus, in the C1 time saving game state, the display mode indicating the specific time saving hit (C1 time saving hit, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving hit) among the time saving hits is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second 2 special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 terminates the C1 time saving game state under control, including the case where the derived time saving hit is the C1 time saving hit, and the special symbol display unit 163, 164 to start a new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command (that is, the type of time-saving hit).

By the way, as described above, in the normal game state or A time saving game state, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, if it is a C2 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), As shown in Figures 289 and 290, the number of times of shortening working hours to be set is only "5". However, in the C1 time-saving gaming state relatively advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C2 time-saving hitting, as shown in FIG. 292, The number of time reductions to be set is "200". If "5" is set as the number of times of time saving when winning the C2 time saving game despite being controlled to the C1 time saving game state with great pains, the interest is greatly reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning the C2 time saving game state in the C1 time saving game state, although it is less than when winning the C1 time saving winning, it is the second largest number when winning the C1 time saving winning "200" as the time saving number of times. By setting, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Also, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C3 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z2"), as shown in FIG. 292, the number of time saving times to be set is "100". Also in this case, if the C3 time saving win is won in spite of being controlled to the C1 time saving game state, the interest may decrease depending on the number of remaining time saving times in the C1 time saving game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning the C3 time saving game state in the C1 time saving game state, it is less than the case of winning the C2 time saving time, but by setting "100" as the number of time saving times, the decline in interest is suppressed. I am making it possible.

On the other hand, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, assuming that the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164) However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the current B time saving game state without controlling to the C4 time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the C1 time saving game state is a time saving hit, even if the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is determined as the time saving hit type, this is determined. Although it is ignored, it is not limited to this, and the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the first place in the C1 time saving game state.

Also, the hit type determination table in the C1 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 292 is only an example, and the hit types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 292, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C1 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and enters the B time saving game state. Set the corresponding number of times of time saving (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C1 time-saving game state under control may be ended and the B time-saving game state may be executed, or the B time-saving game state may be executed after the C1 time-saving game state during control is ended. good too.

[8-1-1-3-5. Hit type determination table in C2 time-saving gaming state]
Figure 293 is a hit type determination table in the C2 time saving gaming state, that is, in the C2 time saving gaming state, the display mode indicating the time saving hit or the display mode indicating the big hit is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second It is an example of the hit type determination table when it is derived to the special symbol display unit 164).

Hereinafter, the winning type determination table in the C2 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 293 will be described, but the description of common points with the winning type determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In the C2 time-saving gaming state, as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z1" or "z9" is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164 ), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, which will be described later).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 293, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C2 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving is set to "5". That is, the C1 time saving game state being controlled ends, and a new C2 time saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C2 time-saving gaming state, the display mode corresponding to one of the selected symbol commands "z0", "z2", "z8" and "z10" is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, When it is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311 to be described later). Specifically, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set.

For example, in the C2 time saving game state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". , set the number of times of time saving to "50".

Thus, in the C2 time saving game state, the display mode indicating the specific time saving hit (C1 time saving hit, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving hit) among the time saving hits is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second 2 special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 terminates the C2 time saving game state under control, including the case where the derived time saving hit is the C2 time saving hit, and the special symbol display unit 163, 164 to start a new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command (that is, the type of time-saving hit).

On the other hand, in the C2 time-saving gaming state, assuming that the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164) However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the C2 time-saving game state under control without executing the C4 time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the C2 time saving game state is a time saving hit, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" can be determined as the time saving hit type. However, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the C2 time-saving game state.

Also, the winning type determination table in the C2 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 293 is only an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 293, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C2 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and enters the B time saving game state. Set the corresponding number of times of time saving (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C2 time saving game state being controlled may be ended and the B time saving game state may be executed, or the B time saving game state may be executed after the end of the C2 time saving game state being executed. good too.

[8-1-1-3-6. Hit type determination table in C3 time-saving gaming state]
Figure 294 is a hit type determination table in the C3 time saving gaming state, that is, in the C3 time saving gaming state, the display mode indicating the time saving hit or the display mode indicating the big hit is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second It is an example of the hit type determination table when it is derived to the special symbol display unit 164).

Below, the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 294 will be described, but the description of common points with the winning type determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In addition, the hit type determination table in the C3 time saving game state shown in FIG. 294 is the same table as the hit type determination table in the A time saving game state shown in FIG. A common hit type determination table may be used. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state, since there is room for widening the range of game characteristics.

In the C3 time-saving gaming state, as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z2" or "z10" is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164 ), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state in the time-saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311, which will be described later).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 294, various flags are initialized, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving is set to "50". That is, the C3 time saving game state being executed ends, and a new C3 time saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C3 time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to one of the selected symbol commands "z0", "z1", "z8" and "z9" is a special symbol display unit ( First special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 controls the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S513 in FIG. 311 to be described later). Set various related data. Specifically, the time saving flag and the C time saving flag corresponding to the selected symbol command are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set.

For example, in the C3 time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z8" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag and the C1 time-saving flag to "1". , set the number of times of time saving to "300".

Thus, in the C3 time saving gaming state, the display mode indicating the specific time saving hit (C1 time saving hit, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving hit) among the time saving hits is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second 2 special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 terminates the C3 time-saving game state under control, including the case of the C3 time-saving winning, and the selections derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164 A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the symbol command (that is, the kind of time-saving hit) is started.

On the other hand, in the C3 time-saving gaming state, assuming that the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164) However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the C3 time saving game state being controlled without executing the C4 time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the C3 time saving game state is a time saving hit, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" can be determined as the time saving hit type. However, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the C3 time-saving game state.

Also, the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 294 is only an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 294, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and enters the B time saving game state. Set the corresponding number of times of time saving (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C3 time-saving game state under control may be ended and the B time-saving game state may be executed, or the B time-saving game state may be executed after the C3 time-saving game state under control is ended. good too.

[8-1-1-3-7. Hit type determination table in C4 time-saving gaming state]
Figure 295 is a hit type determination table in the C4 time saving gaming state, that is, in the C4 time saving gaming state, the display mode indicating the time saving hit or the display mode indicating the big hit is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second It is an example of the hit type determination table when it is derived to the special symbol display unit 164).

Below, the hit type determination table in the C4 time-saving game state shown in FIG. 295 will be described, but the description of common points with the hit type determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 289 will be omitted.

In addition, the hit type determination table in the C4 time saving game state shown in FIG. 295 is the hit type determination table in the A time saving game state shown in FIG. Since the table is similar to the type determination table, a common hit type determination table may be used for these. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state, since there is room for widening the range of game characteristics.

In the C4 time-saving gaming state, as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to one of the selected symbol commands "z0" to "z2" and "z8" to "z10" is the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU201, in the later-described time-saving mode reset processing (see S513 in FIG. 311 described later), various set the data.

As shown in Figure 295, specifically, after initializing various flags, set the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command to set.

For example, in the C4 time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z10" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, the time-saving flag and C3 The time saving flag is set to "1" and the number of time saving is set to "50".

Thus, in the C4 time saving game state, the display mode showing the specific time saving hit (C1 time saving hit, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving hit) among the time saving hits is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second 2 special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 ends the C4 time-saving gaming state being controlled, and selects symbol commands derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 (that is, types of time-saving hits). Start the corresponding new C time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, in the C4 time-saving gaming state, it is assumed that the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164). However, since the main CPU 201 ignores this, it is possible to continue the C4 time saving game state under control without executing the new C4 time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the C4 time saving game state is a time saving hit, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" can be determined as the time saving hit type. However, the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" may not be determined in the C4 time-saving game state.

Also, the winning type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 295 is only an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 295, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and enters the B time saving game state. Set the corresponding number of times of time saving (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C4 time-saving game state under control may be ended and the B time-saving game state may be executed, or the B time-saving game state may be executed after the C4 time-saving game state under control is ended. good too.

[8-1-1-3-8. Extension example of hit type determination table]
In this embodiment, even if it is controlled to any time-saving game state, a specific time-saving hit (in this embodiment, for example, C1 time-saving hit, C2 time-saving hit, C3 time-saving hit) among time-saving hits When the display mode shown is derived to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol display portion 164), the time-saving game state being controlled is terminated, and is derived to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164. A new C time-saving gaming state corresponding to the selected symbol command (that is, the kind of time-saving hit) is started, but it is not limited to this.

For example, when a display mode indicating a specific time-saving game state is derived in the C time-saving gaming state, the C time-saving gaming state under control is ended, and a new C time-saving gaming state corresponding to the derived selected symbol command is displayed. When the display mode indicating the specific time saving hit is derived in the A time saving game state or B time saving game state, the A time saving game state or B time saving game state under control is continued, and the derived A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command may not be started.

Also, for example, when a display mode indicating a specific time saving hit is derived in the A time saving game state or C time saving game state, the A time saving game state or C time saving game state under control is terminated, and the derived selection A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the symbol command is started, and when a display mode indicating a specific time-saving win is derived in the B time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state under control is continued and derived. A new C time-saving game state corresponding to the selected symbol command may not be started.

Also, for example, in the A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state or C time-saving gaming state, when a display mode indicating a C time-saving hit that can be executed by switching from the time-saving gaming state under control is derived, the derived C time-saving When the hit is a specific C time reduction hit (for example, C1 time reduction hit), the A time reduction game state under control, the B time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state is terminated, and the derived specific C time reduction hit The corresponding specific C time-saving gaming state is newly started, and when the derived C time-saving hit is a non-specific C time-saving hit (for example, C2 time-saving hit, C3 time-saving hit), A under control The time saving game state, the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state may be continued, and the C time saving game state corresponding to the derived non-specific C time saving game state may not be newly started.

Also, for example, C time-saving gaming state most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state (for example, C1 time-saving gaming state) other than C time-saving gaming state (that is, C2 time-saving gaming state, C3 time-saving gaming state) When the display mode indicating the time-saving win is derived, a new C time-saving game state corresponding to the derived selection pattern command is started, and the C time-saving game most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving game state is played. When a display mode indicating a specific time saving hit is derived in the state (for example, C1 time saving game state), the C time saving game state (for example, C1 time saving game state) under control is continued, and the derived selection symbol command A new C time-saving game state corresponding to may be prevented from being started.

Also, for example, when a display mode indicating a specific time-saving hit is derived in the C time-saving gaming state (for example, C2 time-saving gaming state) most disadvantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, the derived selection symbol command A new C time-saving game state corresponding to is started, and a C time-saving game state other than the C time-saving game state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the C time-saving game states (for example, C1 time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state ), if a display mode indicating a specific time-saving hit is derived, the C time-saving game state under control (for example, C1 time-saving game state) is continued, and a new C time-saving game corresponding to the derived selected symbol command A state may not be initiated.

Also, for example, when a display mode indicating a specific time-saving game is derived in the C time-saving gaming state, the new C time-saving gaming state corresponding to the derived selected symbol command is better than the C time-saving gaming state under control. is advantageous or equivalent to the player, a new C time-saving game state is started, and the new C time-saving game state corresponding to the derived selected symbol command is disadvantageous to the player. In the case of , the C time-saving gaming state under control may be continued. For example, in the C3 time-saving gaming state, when the display mode indicating the C1 time-saving winning is derived, the C3 time-saving gaming state is terminated and the C1 time-saving gaming state is newly started, and the display mode indicating the C2 time-saving winning is derived. In this case, it corresponds to a mode in which the C3 time reduction game state being controlled is continued without newly starting the C2 time reduction game state. However, in the C3 time saving game state, if the display mode indicating the C2 time saving game state is derived, depending on the number of remaining time saving times in the C3 time saving game state, the C3 time saving game state is continued, or the C3 time saving game state is terminated. The C2 time-saving gaming state is not newly started. To the last, when the display mode indicating the C2 time saving game state is derived in the C3 time saving game state, consistency is required to continue the C3 time saving game state regardless of the number of remaining time saving times.

[8-1-1-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Next, an example of the variation pattern table that the main CPU 201 refers to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 to 306. FIG. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects a variation pattern table to be referenced according to the gaming state and selection conditions described later, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol using the selected variation pattern table. The columns of "remarks" shown in FIGS. 296 to 306 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 296 to 306 are all stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine. The "variation pattern" of the present invention may be interpreted as the "variation pattern table" described below, or may be interpreted as any one "variation pattern" selected from the variation pattern table, for example. good too.

[8-1-1-4-1. Fluctuation pattern table in normal game state or A reduced time game state]
FIG. 296 is an example of a variation pattern table A that is referred to in the normal game state or the A time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the variation pattern table referred to in the normal game state and the A reduced working hours game state is the same, but it is not limited to this, and a different variation pattern table may be used in the normal gaming state and the A reduced working hours gaming state. good.

The variation pattern table A is a variation pattern table in which the expected value of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable display times of the second special symbol per unit time. Therefore, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the progress speed of the game is faster when hitting the left hand than when hitting the right hand.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern table in the normal game state and the variation pattern table in the A time-saving game state are shared, but these may be separate tables. In this case, in the table referred to in the normal game state, the expected value of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol per unit time is a higher variation pattern than the expected value of the number of variable display times of the second special symbol per unit time. In the table referred to in the time-saving game state A, the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. A pattern table is preferred.

[8-1-1-4-2. Variation pattern table in B time-saving gaming state]
Figures 297 to 299 are examples of variation pattern table B-1 to variation pattern table B-3 referenced in the B time-saving gaming state.

In the fluctuation pattern table B-1 to fluctuation pattern table B-3, the expected value of the number of variable display times of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol per unit time. It is a fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, when variation pattern table B-1 to variation pattern table B-3 are selected, the progress speed of the game is faster when hitting with the right than with hitting with the left.

In this embodiment, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table B-1 shown in FIG. Any variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-1 can be used to variably display the special symbols.

The main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of special symbols starting from the transition to the B time-saving gaming state, and this count value (hereinafter referred to as “the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state”) is between 1 and 150. maintains the state in which the variation pattern table B-1 is selected.

However, when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state exceeds, for example, 150, the main CPU 201 switches from the variation pattern table B-1 to the variation pattern table B-2 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform variable display of special symbols in any one of the variable patterns selected from -2.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern table B-1 and the variation pattern table B-2 (especially refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is lost), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time The expected value of the number of times is larger in the variation pattern table B-2 than in the variation pattern table B-1. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when the variation pattern table B-2 is selected than when the variation pattern table B-1 is selected.

By the way, if the state of not being controlled to the jackpot game state continues for a long period of time in the B time-saving game state, there is a possibility that the interest will decrease. Therefore, when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number of times (for example, 150 times), the progress speed of the game is increased to shorten the time until the big win is derived, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It made it possible to

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table B-3 shown in FIG. It is possible to variably display the special symbols with such a variability pattern.

The variation pattern table B-3 has the largest expected value for the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time among the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 that can be selected in the B time-saving gaming state. In this way, the game progressing speed is accelerated in the case of shifting from the C time saving game state to the B time saving game state than in the case of shifting from the normal game state to the B time saving game state. It is possible to increase the interest of

In this embodiment, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the variation pattern table B-3 is selected, but instead, the variation pattern table B-2 is selected. You may do so. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the variation pattern table B-3, and it is only necessary to provide two tables, the variation pattern table B-1 and the variation pattern table B-2, so the data stored in the main ROM 202 (see FIG. 6) It is possible to prevent the capacity from increasing unnecessarily.

Also, in this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter does not reach the ceiling value in the A reduced working hours game state, but the value of the ceiling counter may reach the ceiling value in the A reduced working hours game state. If there is, select the variation pattern table B-3 (or variation pattern table B-2) when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the A time-saving gaming state, and this variation pattern table B-3 (or variation pattern table B-2), the special symbols may be variably displayed according to any one of the variability patterns selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern table selected when transitioning from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state B has the fastest game progress speed among the variation pattern tables that can be selected in the time-saving game state B. However, it is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table selected when the number of special symbol games in the B time saving game state exceeds a specified number (for example, 150) may be the variation pattern table with the fastest game progress speed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation pattern table selected when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number (for example, 150) is the variation pattern table with the fastest game progress speed. Not limited to this, when the number of special symbol games in the B time-saving gaming state exceeds a prescribed number, a variation pattern table with a relatively slow progress speed of the game may be selected. In this case, by slowing down the progress of the game when the end of the B time saving game state is near, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

[8-1-1-4-3. Variation pattern table in C2 time-saving gaming state and C3 time-saving gaming state]
Figures 300 and 301 are examples of the variation pattern table C-1 and the variation pattern table C-2 referred to in the C2 time saving game state or the C3 time saving game state.

In the fluctuation pattern table C-1 and the fluctuation pattern table C-2, the expected value of the number of variable display times of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol per unit time. It is a fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, when the variation pattern table C-1 or the variation pattern table C-2 is selected, the progress speed of the game is faster when hitting the right hand than when hitting the left hand.

In this embodiment, in the normal game, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the display mode indicating the C2 short time hit or the C3 short time hit is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. , the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table C-1 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols in any one of the variable patterns.

On the other hand, in one of the time-saving gaming states, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the display mode indicating the C2 time-saving hit or the C3 time-saving hit is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164. Then, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table C-2 shown in FIG. 296, and can perform the variation display of the special symbol with any variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-2. It is possible.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern table C-1 and the variation pattern table C-2 (especially refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is lost), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time The expected value of the number of times is larger in the variation pattern table C-2 than in the variation pattern table C-1. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when the variation pattern table C-2 is selected than when the variation pattern table C-1 is selected.

In this way, when winning in any of the time-saving game states, it is possible to end the current time-saving game state and shift to a new time-saving game state. Compared to the case of shifting from the state to the C2 time reduction game state or the C3 time reduction game state, when the time reduction game state is shifted to the C2 time reduction game state or the C time reduction game state, the progress speed of the game is accelerated. It is possible to increase the player's interest in the game state.

In addition, as described above, the C4 time saving hit is ignored even if it is elected in any time saving game state and does not shift to a new time saving game state. Then, in the normal game state, when winning the C4 short time game state and shifting to the C4 time short game state, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table C-1 and selects one of the variation pattern tables C-2. It is made possible to perform the variable display of the special design with such a variable pattern. However, the variation pattern table selected in the C4 time saving game state is not limited to this.

[8-1-1-4-4. Variation pattern table in C1 time-saving gaming state]
Figures 302 and 303 are examples of variation pattern tables C-3 and C-4 referenced in the C1 time-saving gaming state.

In the fluctuation pattern table C-3 and the fluctuation pattern table C-4, the expected value of the number of variable display times of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol per unit time. It is a fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, when the variation pattern table C-3 or the variation pattern table C-4 is selected, the progress speed of the game is faster when hitting the right hand than when hitting the left hand.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game state, when the display mode indicating the C1 time saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the main The CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table C-3 shown in FIG. 302 in the subsequent game state (that is, the C1 time-saving game state), and any variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-3 It is possible to perform variable display of special symbols.

The main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of the special symbols starting from the transition to the C1 time-saving gaming state, and this count value (hereinafter referred to as “the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state”) is between 1 and 150. maintains the state in which the variation pattern table C-1 is selected.

However, when the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state exceeds, for example, 150, the main CPU 201 switches from the variation pattern table C-1 to the variation pattern table C-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform variable display of special symbols in any one of the variable patterns selected from -4.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern table C-3 and the variation pattern table C-4 (especially refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is lost), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time The expected value of the number of times is larger in the variation pattern table C-4 than in the variation pattern table C-3. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when the variation pattern table C-4 is selected than when the variation pattern table C-3 is selected.

By the way, if the state in which the jackpot game state is not controlled over a long period of time continues in the C1 time-saving game state, interest may decrease. Therefore, when the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number of times (for example, 150 times), the progress speed of the game is increased to shorten the time until the big hit is derived, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It made it possible to

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation pattern table selected when the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number (for example, 150) is changed so that the progress speed of the game is faster than before exceeding the specified number. Although it is a variation pattern table, it is not limited to this, and when the number of special symbol games in the C1 time-saving gaming state exceeds a specified number, a variation pattern table with a relatively slow progress speed of the game may be selected. In this case, by slowing down the progress of the game when the end of the C1 time-saving game state is near, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Also, in this embodiment, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table C-3 or C-4, but not limited to this, for example, in the B time-saving gaming state The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol may be determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table B-1 or the fluctuation pattern table B-2.

[8-1-1-4-5. Fluctuation pattern table in high-precision time-saving gaming state]
Figures 304 and 305 are examples of the variation pattern table D-1 and the variation pattern table D-2 that are referred to in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the display mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot (either of the selected symbol command "z5", "z6", "13" or "14") is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 When derived, the variation pattern table D-1 or the variation pattern table D-2 is selected in the game state after the jackpot game state is completed.

The variation pattern table D-1 is a variation pattern table in which the expected value of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of variable display times of the second special symbol per unit time. Therefore, when the variation pattern table D-1 is selected, the progress speed of the game is faster when hitting with the left than with hitting with the right. However, since the electric sapo control is executed in the high-probability short-time gaming state, hitting to the right is a regular game mode.

The variation pattern table D-2 is a variation pattern table in which the expected value of the number of variable display times of the second special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol per unit time. Therefore, when the variation pattern table D-1 or the variation pattern table D-2 is selected, the progress speed of the game is faster when hitting to the right than to hitting to the left.

In addition, the expected value of the number of times the second special symbol is variably displayed per unit time in the variation pattern table D-2 is higher than the expected value of the number of times the second special symbol is variably displayed per unit time in the variation pattern table D-1. big.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern table A is selected, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, a display mode indicating a big hit is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164. 304, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table D-1 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform variable display of special symbols in any of the selected variable patterns.

The variation pattern table A is, as described above, a variation pattern table that can be selected in the normal game state or the A time-saving game state. Therefore, when the display mode indicating the big win is derived in the normal game state or the A time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state is controlled after the big win game state based on this big win ends, the main CPU 201 changes the variation pattern table A. to select.

On the other hand, when one of the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3, the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4, the variation pattern table D-1 and the variation pattern table D-2 is selected, the special symbol As a result of the hit determination process, the display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and the big win game state performed based on the derivation of the big win When finished, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table D-2 shown in FIG. 305, and can perform the variation display of the special symbol in any variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2. It is possible.

That is, the variation pattern table D-1, when the display mode indicating the big hit is derived as a result of the first special symbol game mainly performed in the normal game state or the A time-saving game state, the big win game state based on this big win. It is a selectable table in the high-probability time-saving game state after the end.

On the other hand, the variation pattern table D-2, when a display mode indicating a big hit is derived as a result of the second special symbol mainly performed in the B time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state or the high probability time-saving game state, this big win. It is a table that can be selected in a high-probability short-time game state after the end of the big hit game state based on.

Here, when comparing the variation pattern table D-1 and the variation pattern table D-2 (in particular, refer to the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is lost), the variable display of the special symbol per unit time The expected value of the number of times is larger in the variation pattern table D-2 than in the variation pattern table D-1. That is, the progress speed of the special symbol game is faster when the variation pattern table D-2 is selected than when the variation pattern table D-1 is selected.

In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 switches the selected variation pattern table between the variation pattern table D-1 and the variation pattern table D-2 according to, for example, the number of times the special symbol is executed. You may do so.

For example, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table D-2 so that the progress of the game is relatively fast until the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) in the high-accuracy time-saving game state. However, when the special symbol game exceeds the predetermined number of times, the variation pattern table D-1 may be selected so that the progress of the game becomes relatively slow, or until the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times. may select the variation pattern table D-2, and select the variation pattern table D-1 when the special symbol game exceeds a predetermined number of times.

As a specific example, for example, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 70 times), the high-accuracy time-saving game state ends, and the case of a pachinko machine that is controlled to the normal game state or the time-saving game state , the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table D-2 until the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) smaller than the specified number of times, and when the special symbol game exceeds the predetermined number of times. , the variation pattern table D-1 is preferably selected. Until the special symbols are executed the predetermined number of times in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, it is possible to shorten the time until the jackpot is won by relatively speeding up the progress of the game, and the predetermined number of times. This is because, after being executed, it is possible to delay the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state by relatively slowing down the progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that can continue the high-probability short-time gaming state until the next big hit is won, the main CPU 201 will change the variation pattern table D- until the special symbol is executed a specific number of times (for example, 50 times). 1 is selected, and when the number of special symbols exceeds the specific number of times, it is preferable to select the variation pattern table D-2. By doing so, after the end of the big win game state, the time until the next big win is won relatively long until the special symbols are executed for the specified number of times, thereby suppressing the number of balls released in a short period of time. On the one hand, it is possible to suppress the increase in the gambling nature in vain, and on the other hand, when the number of executions of the special symbols exceeds a specific number of times, the time until winning the next big win is relatively shortened, thereby increasing the interest in the high-probability, time-saving game state. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the display mode corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot (selected symbol command "z4" or "12") is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 Then, the display mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot (selected symbol command "z5", "z6", "13" or "14") is displayed in the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164. The variation pattern table to be selected is different from the derived case. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance interest.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern table D-1 is selected when the big win game state is completed based on the fact that the big win is derived while the variation pattern table A is selected. Also, when any one of the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3, the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4, the variation pattern table D-1 and the variation pattern table D-2 is selected, a big hit is made. The variation pattern table D-2 is selected when the big win game state performed based on the derivation is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is performed based on the fact that a big hit is derived when one of the variation pattern table A, the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 and the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 is selected. The variation pattern table D-1 is selected when the big win game state ends, and the big win is derived when the variation pattern table D-1 or the variation pattern table D-2 is selected. The variation pattern table D-2 may be selected when the big win game state ends.

[8-1-1-4-6. Summary of special pattern fluctuation pattern table]
In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table according to the selection conditions described above. FIG. 306 shows a table summarizing the selection conditions described above. FIG. 306 is a table showing a variation pattern table selected according to the game state and selection conditions.

In this embodiment, when comparing the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3, the number of executions of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time in the variation pattern table A.

Also, when comparing the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 and the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4, the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4.

Also, when comparing the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4, the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time in the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time in the variation pattern table A.

That is, among the normal game state, the reduced working hours game state A, the reduced working hours game state B and the reduced working hours game state C, the fastest progress of the game is the reduced working hours game state B, followed by the reduced working hours game state C. The slowest progress speed of the game is the normal game state or the A time-saving game state.

By the way, since the A time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state when the A time-saving game state ends, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player by being controlled in the A time-saving game state for a longer time. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the progress speed of the game in the A time-saving game state is relatively slow compared to the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state (especially the B time-saving game state), it is often expected to win a big hit while being controlled in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state. Therefore, in the B time-saving game state and C time-saving game state, compared to the normal game state and the A time-saving game state, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is increased, and the game progress speed is increased. By making the

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the reduced working hours game state A, the reduced working hours game state B and the reduced working hours game state C, the magnitude relationship of the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is "normal game State=A time saving game state<C time saving game state=B time saving game state”. Focusing only on the time saving game state, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is "A time saving game state<C time saving game state=B time saving game state". However, not limited to this, on the premise that the expected value of the number of times of variable display of special symbols per unit time in the normal game state is the smallest, the expected value of the number of times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is calculated. , "A time saving game state <C time saving game state <B time saving game state", "A time saving game state = C time saving game state <B time saving game state", "A time saving game state = C It is good also as time saving game state = B time saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time differs depending on the type of the C time-saving gaming state. Regardless of the type, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time may be the same or substantially the same in any C time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the C short gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the C short gaming states (for example, C2 short gaming state), other C short gaming states (for example, C1 short gaming state, C3 short gaming state, C4 short gaming state State), the progress speed of the game may be relatively slowed down by making the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time smaller. Furthermore, for example, in the C time-saving gaming state that is most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state (for example, C1 time-saving gaming state), the expected value of the execution frequency of variable display of special symbols per unit time is the largest. In addition, in the C time-saving game state (for example, C2 time-saving game state) that is most disadvantageous to the player in the C time-saving game state, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is minimized. , In the remaining C time-saving gaming state (for example, C3 time-saving gaming state, C4 time-saving gaming state), the expected value of the number of times of execution of variable display of special symbols per unit time is smaller than C1 time-saving gaming state and C2 time-saving gaming state may be larger than

In addition, when the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is changed according to the type of C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is, for example, "C2 time saving game state <A time saving game state <C3 time saving game state <B time saving game state = C1 time saving game state" or "A time saving game state <C2 time saving game state = C3 time saving game state <B time saving game State = C1 reduced working hours game state”, or “A reduced working hours gaming state <C2 reduced working hours gaming state <C3 reduced working hours gaming state <C1 reduced working hours gaming state <B reduced working hours gaming state”. It should be noted that the magnitude relationship of the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is merely an example, and needless to say, the present invention is not limited to this.

[8-1-1-4-7. Expansion example 1 of the special symbol variation pattern table]
In this embodiment, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table B-1 shown in FIG. 297 in the subsequent game state. In addition, regardless of the game state, when the display mode indicating the C1 time-saving hit is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 As described above, the variation pattern table C-3 shown in FIG. 302 is selected in the subsequent game state.

However, for example, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the normal game state, there is a case where the time saving hit (for example, C3 time saving win) is won in the variable display of the same special pattern (that is, in the same interrupt processing). In this case, the main CPU 201 can determine the destination time-saving gaming state according to the processing order of the program.

For example, when the process of deriving (finally displaying) the display mode of the C3 time saving hit is performed prior to the ceiling counter updating process, the main CPU 201 performs the process of deriving (determining) the display mode of the C3 time saving hit. As a result, the process of moving to the C3 time saving game state is performed once, but after that, the process of moving to the B time saving game state can be performed as a result of the ceiling counter update process. That is, as a result, it is the same as when reaching the ceiling in the C3 time saving game state. Therefore, in this case, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table B-1) selected in the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, for example, when the process of deriving (finally displaying) the display mode of the C3 time saving hit is performed after the ceiling counter update process, the main CPU 201 temporarily shifts to the B time saving game state as a result of the ceiling counter update process. However, after that, as a result of the processing of deriving (determining display) the display mode for the C3 time saving, it is possible to perform the processing of shifting to the C3 time saving game state. That is, as a result, it is the same as when the C3 time saving hit is derived in the B time saving gaming state. Therefore, in this case, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table C-1) selected in the C3 time-saving gaming state.

It should be noted that, in the above, in the variable display of the same special pattern in the normal game state (that is, in the same interrupt processing) ceiling reaching and per time-saving (for example, C3 time-saving per) was elected and has been described, but the time-saving game It is the same when reaching the ceiling and winning a time saving hit (for example, C3 time saving hit) occur in the variable display of the same special symbol in the state.

In addition, in the above, when the ceiling reaching and the time saving hit (for example, C3 time saving hit) occur in the variable display of the same special symbol (that is, in the same interrupt process), the time saving of the transition destination according to the processing order of the program Instead of determining the game state, regardless of the processing order of the program, the destination time-saving game state may be determined as a specific time-saving game state (for example, the B time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player). good. When the specific time-saving gaming state is the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table B-1) selected in the B time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the specific time-saving gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 selects the variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table C-1) selected in the C3 time-saving gaming state.

[8-1-1-4-8. Expansion example 2 of the special symbol variation pattern table]
Also, in this embodiment, the variation pattern table C-3 or C-4 is selected in the C1 time-saving gaming state, and the variation pattern table C-1 or C-2 is selected in the C2 time-saving gaming state and the C3 time-saving gaming state, Although it has been described above that the variation pattern table C-1 is selected in the C4 time-saving gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 selects a specific variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table C-4) in the special symbol game before reaching the ceiling. can be By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for shifting to the B time-saving game state due to the change in the variation pattern of the special symbols, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In addition, the main CPU 201 may select the specific variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table C-4) in the last special symbol game before reaching the ceiling, or for a predetermined period before reaching the ceiling. (For example, a period during which the variable display of special symbols is performed 10 times) may be selected.

[8-1-1-5. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 307 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 307, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79 as "normal symbol hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol per determination value data". In addition, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 80 to 99 as "losing", and sets the determination value data to "losing determination value data". decide.

In addition, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state, and the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol winning determination random number value is any one of 0 to 98 as "normal symbol winning". Then, the determination value data is determined as "normal symbol per determination value data". In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the extracted normal symbol winning determination random number value is 99, the main CPU 201 determines “losing” and determines the determination value data as “losing determination value data”.

In the C time-saving gaming state, the probability that the judgment value data is determined as the "normal symbol per judgment value data" differs depending on the type of the C time-saving gaming state.

Specifically, for example, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, the probability that the determination value data is determined to be the “normal symbol per judgment value data” is the other C time-saving gaming state ( For example, it is higher than C2 time saving game state, C3 time saving game state, C4 time saving game state).

In this embodiment, for example, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, the probability of being determined as the "normal symbol per judgment value data" is changed to the "normal symbol per judgment value data" in the B time-saving gaming state. However, this is not essential and is merely an example.

Further, for example, the probability of being determined as the "normal symbol hit determination value data" in the C2 time-saving gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, may be the lowest in the C time-saving gaming state. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the judgment value data is determined as the "normal symbol per judgment value data" is different depending on the type of the C time-saving gaming state, but not limited to this, the type of the C time-saving gaming state Regardless, the probability that the determination value data is determined to be the "normal per symbol determination value data" may be the same or substantially the same.

[8-1-1-6. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 308 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 308, in the normal game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 99. Also, the main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the selection symbol command for normal winning symbols.

In addition, in the high-probability time-saving game state and the A time-saving game state, when the normal design hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal design hit determination process, for example, the normal design random number value is any of 0 to 99 Even if there is, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the selection symbol command at normal winning symbol.

Also, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main The CPU 201 selects "fz2" as the selection symbol command for normal winning.

In the C time reduction game state, when the normal design hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal design hit determination process, the selected pattern command at the time of the normal design hit is different according to the type of the C time reduction game state. there is

Specifically, for example, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol per judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hitting judgment processing, for example, the normal symbol Regardless of whether the symbol random number is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "fz2" as the selected symbol command at normal winning symbol.

In the present embodiment, for example, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hitting determination processing, the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained in the B time-saving gaming state. As a result of the symbol hit determination process, the same normal symbol hit time selection symbol command as in the case where the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained is selected, but this is not essential. This is just one example.

Also, for example, in the C2 time-saving gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol per determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hitting determination process, for example, the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "fz4" as the selected symbol command at the time of the normal winning symbol.

In addition, in the C3 time-saving game state or the C4 time-saving game state, when the normal design hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal design hit determination process, for example, the normal design random number value is any of 0 to 99 Even so, the main CPU 201 selects "fz3" as the selected symbol command at the time of a normal winning symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 307), determines the determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value, and then determines the determination value data. , The normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 308) is referred to, and the normal symbol per selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value and the normal symbol symbol random number value, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit may be determined together.

[8-1-1-7. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 309 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 309, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol win", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example, the first opening time is 1000 msec, the waiting time is Decide on none, no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec. The release pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at normal symbol winning is "fz0" is the most disadvantageous opening pattern for the player among the normal symbol winning types.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example, the first opening time is 3000 msec, the waiting time is It is determined to be 200 msec and the second opening time is 3000 msec. The release pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz1" is the most advantageous release pattern for the player among the normal symbol hit types.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2500 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2500 msec. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2" is next to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1". This opening pattern is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 1000 msec, the waiting time of 300 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2500 msec. The release pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz3" is next to the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2". This opening pattern is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz4", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example, the first opening time is 1000 msec, the waiting time is Decide on none, no second opening. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz4" is higher than the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz0". This opening pattern is advantageous to the player, but is more disadvantageous to the player than the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the selected symbol command is "fz3" at the time of winning the normal symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the normal game. state, high-probability short-time game state, A short-time game state, B short-time game state and C short-time game state, the most advantageous degree is the disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the normal electric accessory 146 is opened.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the normal game state, A Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, the most advantageous degree is an advantageous mode, but this is not essential and is merely an example.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", and the C1 time saving game state The degree of advantage is the same (including substantially the same) as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time reduction game state is "normal symbol hit" is changed to the normal symbol hit determination process result in the C1 time reduction game state. It may be more advantageous than the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 in the case of "normal hit", or vice versa.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal electric role 146 (Fig. 4) is the mode with the most advantageous degree, and the result of the hit determination process for normal symbols in the C2 time-saving gaming state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, is "normal design winning". Although the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) in a certain case is the most advantageous and disadvantageous mode, it is not limited to this. For example, in the C1 time-saving gaming state, which is most advantageous to the player in the C time-saving gaming state, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is opened when the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is "normal design winning". The pattern is set to be the mode with the most advantageous degree, and the result of the hit determination processing of the normal symbol in the C2 time-shortened game state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player in the C time-shortened game state, is ``normal pattern hit''. The release pattern of the accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) may be set to the mode with the highest degree of advantage.

In addition, in the present embodiment, according to the type of the C time-saving gaming state, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is opened (that is, Time saving performance) are different, but not limited to this, the time saving performance may be the same or substantially the same regardless of the type of the C time saving gaming state.

Also, for example, if the time saving performance is the same or substantially the same regardless of the type of the C time saving game state, the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same as the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, or may be different. good.

In addition, the normal symbol variation pattern table may be the same as the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. .

[8-1-2. Main control processing]
In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the various processes described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 52 in the first pachinko game machine. Common for the most part. Below, with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311, the time-saving counter updating process (see FIG. 34) and the time-saving setting process (see FIG. 39), which are processes different from the processes executed in the first pachinko game machine, will be described. explain. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) described in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[8-1-2-1. Time saving counter update process]
The time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 310 performs only the process of S161 and S162 among the time saving counter update processes shown in FIG.

Specifically, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

In S161, if it is not determined that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (if the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process, and shifts the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33). return.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). The main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

[8-1-2-2. Time saving setting processing]
As shown in FIG. 311, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S511).

When it is determined in S511 that the time saving flag is ON (when S511 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S512.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S511 that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S511), that is, when the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S514.

In S<b>512 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a C4 short time win.

When it is determined in S512 that it is not the C4 short time hit (when S512 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S513.

In S513, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode resetting processing. The time-saving mode resetting process is a process of resetting the current time-saving mode to a newly started time-saving mode. In this embodiment, as described above, in this time saving mode resetting process (S513), after initializing various flags, as various data related to the control of the C time saving game state, corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command A process of setting the C time saving flag (C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag) to "1" and setting the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is performed. In addition to these processes, as described above, the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 may be performed. After performing the time-saving mode resetting process in S513, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process, and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time saving mode resetting process (S513), after initializing various flags, the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1", but this Not limited to, without initializing the time saving flag, after initializing the A time saving flag, B time saving flag, C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag and C4 time saving flag, it corresponds to the selected symbol command You may set a C time saving flag to "1". In addition, without initializing the time saving flag, A time saving flag and B time saving flag, after initializing the C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag, C3 time saving flag and C4 time saving flag, C time saving corresponding to the selected symbol command A flag may be set to "1".

On the other hand, when it is determined in S512 that it is the C4 time saving hit (when S512 determines YES), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38). In this way, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z3" or "z11" in the time-saving gaming state is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164). However, the main CPU 201 ignores this and ends the time saving setting process without performing the time saving mode resetting process (S513).

In addition, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process in S514. The time-saving mode setting process is a process of setting a newly started time-saving mode in an area where nothing is set. In this embodiment, as described above, in this time saving mode setting process (S514), as various data related to control of the C time saving game state, for example, C time saving flag (C1 time saving flag, C2 time saving flag , C3 time saving flag) is set to "1", processing of setting the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command, and the like are performed. In addition to these processes, as described above, the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 may be performed. After performing the time saving mode setting process of S514, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S515.

In S515, the main CPU 201 performs a process of turning on the time saving flag, that is, setting the time saving flag to "1". After performing the process of S515, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

[8-1-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 312 is an example of a time chart showing the flow of the game.

In addition, in FIG. 312, the game state that can be enjoyed is the current game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. The "jackpot" shown in the column of the game state that can be enjoyed is the jackpot game state, "A reduced working hours" is the A reduced working hours game state, "B reduced working hours" is the B reduced working hours game state, "C1 reduced working hours" is the C1 reduced working hours gaming state, and "C2 "Time reduction" means C2 time reduction game state, "C3 time reduction" means C3 time reduction game state, "C4 time reduction" means C4 time reduction game state, and "Normal" means normal game state.

Also, in FIG. 312, "win C4", "win C1" and "win C3" respectively indicate winning at short time C4, winning at short time C1 and winning at short time C3. there is

In addition, in FIG. 312, the display effect is a display effect displayed on the display device 7 configured by, for example, a liquid crystal display. Each stage effect shown in this display effect column indicates, for example, an appearance state displayed as a background image. Specifically, the stage production "Normal stage" is a background image indicating that the game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is the normal game state. A background image showing that the game state controlled in the mode is the A time-saving game state, and "B stage" indicates that the game state controlled in the mode that the player can enjoy is the B time-saving game state. The background image, similarly "C1 stage" to "C4 stage", is a background image showing that the game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is the C1 time-saving game state to C4 time-saving game state, respectively. ' is a background image indicating that the game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is a jackpot game state.

In addition, "remaining number of times" shown in FIG. 312 is the number of times of remaining short time, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once, it is displayed with 1 subtraction.

Moreover, in FIG. 312, an internal state has shown the state of the time-saving flag and various time-saving flags which are controlled by main CPU201, for example. When each flag is set to "1", it turns ON, and when it is initialized (cleared), it turns OFF.

Also, in FIG. 312, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state or the time saving game state is a time saving hit will be described. The case of winning will not be explained. This is because, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the high-probability time-saving game state is a time-saving hit, the main CPU 201 determines whether the type of time-saving win is This is because this is ignored and the C time saving game state is not performed (that is, it is not activated).

[8-1-3-1. (a) When elected at C4 short time in normal game state]
First, in the normal game state, for example, when the C4 short hit is won (that is, when the display mode indicating the C4 short hit (selected symbol command “z3” or “z11”) is derived in the special symbol display units 163 and 164 ( An example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed (the game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy) will be described.

The main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag to "1", and these flags are turned ON from OFF. Thereby, it will be in the state where the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag are materialized internally. Also, for example, "50" is set as the number of times of time saving.

The sub CPU 301 wins the C4 short time hit (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the time short hit and the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11") or wins the C4 time short hit. A C4 time-saving transition suggesting effect indicating that there is a possibility of having been performed is performed in the display area of the display device 7.例文帳に追加This C4 time reduction shift suggestion effect is, for example, between the start of the variable display of the special symbol from which the display mode indicating the C4 time reduction hit is derived and the display mode indicating the C4 time reduction hit is derived. do it.

In addition, the C4 time-short transition suggestion production indicating that the selected symbol command is “z3” or “z11” means the fixed production of the C4 time-short hit, and indicates that “the C4 time-short hit may have been won. The C4 time-saving transition suggestive performance shown” includes not only the case of winning the C4 short-time hit, but also the so-called fake performance that makes you expect that the C4 short-time win is won even though you have not won the C4 short-time win. The same applies to the C1 time reduction suggestion effect, C2 time reduction suggestion effect, C3 time reduction suggestion effect, and C5 time reduction suggestion effect, which will be described later.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the normal stage to the C4 stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays, for example, “50” in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 as the number of remaining time reductions in the C4 time reduction game state.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the normal game state to the C4 time-saving game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C4 time reduction suggesting effect performed, and the effect background image moves from the normal stage to the C4 stage. I can understand. Also, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 146 (see FIG. 4), it is possible to grasp that the normal game state has shifted to the C3 time reduction game state or the C4 time reduction game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309). ). In addition, by making the opening pattern of the normal electric role product different between the C3 time saving game state and the C4 time saving game state, it may be possible to grasp the C4 time saving game state from the opening pattern of the normal electric role product 146. .

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, when winning C1 short win, C2 short win or C3 short win, or reaching the ceiling, the same processing as in the case of winning C4 short win in the normal game state is performed. should be

[8-1-3-2. (b) If elected per C1 time reduction in C4 time reduction game state]
Next, in the C4 time-saving game state, for example, when the C1 time-saving hit is won (that is, the special symbol display units 163 and 164 show the C1 time-saving hit (selected symbol command "z0" or "z8"). An example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed in the case (see (b) of FIG. 312) will be described.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags, and then sets the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag to "1". Thereby, it will be in the state where the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag are materialized internally. Also, for example, "300" is set as the number of times of time saving.

The sub CPU 301 wins the C1 short time hit (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the time short hit and the selected symbol command is "z0" or "z8") or the C1 time short hit. A C1 time-saving transition suggesting effect indicating that there is a possibility of having been performed is performed in the display area of the display device 7.例文帳に追加This C1 time reduction transition suggestion effect is, for example, between the start of the variable display of a special symbol from which the display mode indicating the C1 time reduction hit is derived and the display mode indicating the C1 time reduction hit is derived. do it.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C4 stage to the C1 stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 . In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform, for example, an additional effect indicating that the remaining time reduction count increases.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C4 time reduction game state to the C1 time reduction game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C1 time reduction winning effect performed, and the background image shifts from the C4 stage to the C1 stage, for example, the voice effect also changes from the C4 time reduction game state to the C1 time reduction game state. I can understand. Also, from the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it is possible to grasp that the C4 time saving game state has shifted to the C1 time saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

It should be noted that, in the C4 time reduction game state, when the C2 time reduction win or the C3 time reduction win is won, or when the ceiling is reached, the same processing as when the C1 time reduction win is won in the C4 time reduction game state is performed. good. However, if the C4 short win is won in the C4 short game state, the C4 short win is ignored, so the originally controlled C4 short game state is continued as it is, and the remaining short time count is continuously displayed without updating. It is better to

Further, in the C4 time saving game state, when winning the C2 time saving game state, the number of remaining time saving times may decrease depending on the number of remaining time saving times in the C4 time saving game state. In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions has decreased. You may make it suppress the decline of interest by the decrease in the number of remaining time reductions.

In addition, in the C4 time saving game state, if a time saving win (for example, C2 time saving win) disadvantageous to the player is won, this may be ignored and the C4 time saving game state may be continued.

[8-1-3-3. (c) If you win the C4 time reduction in the C1 time reduction game state]
Next, when the C4 time reduction hit is won in the C1 time reduction game state (that is, when the display mode indicating the C4 time reduction hit (selected symbol command "z3" or "z11") is derived in the special symbol display units 163 and 164 (See (c) of FIG. 312)), an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

As described above, it is ignored even if winning the C4 time reduction in the C1 time reduction game state. That is, the main CPU 201 maintains the state up to that point without changing the state of each time saving flag, and does not set the number of times of time saving. In addition, the sub CPU 301 not only does not perform the C4 time reduction suggesting effect or the confirmation effect of winning the C4 time reduction hit, but also does not change the effect content such as the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. maintain the status quo.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is maintained in the C1 time-saving game state. In addition, it can be grasped that it is in the C1 time-saving game state from the appearance. That is, for example, not only the background image is maintained at the C1 stage, but also the sound effect is maintained to indicate that the C1 time-saving game state is maintained, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is maintained. Also, the opening pattern in the C1 time-saving gaming state is maintained.

By the way, when the C4 short win is won in the C1 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 displays the display mode indicating the C4 short win (selected symbol command “z3” or “z11”) in the corresponding special symbol display section (first special It is derived to the symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164).

On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 301 wins the C4 short time winning in the C1 time saving game state, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern and the character effect performed in the display area of the display device 7 are performed according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process. It is preferable to perform the same effect as in the case of losing. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will perceive that the C4 short time win was ignored even though it was won, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, the sub CPU 301 performs the expectation effect that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is advantageous to the advantageous player (for example, a big hit, C1 short time hit, etc.), and then performs the special symbol hit determination process. A failure stop image displayed when the result of (1) is a failure may be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the C4 short win is won in the C1 time short gaming state, the main CPU 201 changes the display mode indicating the C4 short win (selected symbol command "z3" or "z11") to the corresponding special symbol display. Although it is derived to the part (first special symbol display part 163 or second special symbol display part 164), instead of this, even if it is a C4 short time hit, it is a loss. can be

Also, in the other time-saving game state (that is, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C2 time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state), C1 time-saving game state also when elected to C4 time-saving game state It is preferable to perform the same processing as in the case of winning at C4 short time.

[8-1-3-4. (d) When the ceiling is reached in the C1 time-saving game state]
Next, an example when reaching the ceiling in the C1 time-saving game state will be described.

After initializing various flags, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1". Thereby, it will be in the state where the time saving flag and the B time saving flag are materialized internally. Also, for example, "300" is set as the number of times of time saving.

The sub CPU 301 performs a ceiling reaching effect in the display area of the display device 7 indicating that the ceiling has been reached. This ceiling reaching effect, for example, when the variable display of the special pattern when reaching the ceiling is started or stopped, not only during the time from when the variable display of the special pattern when reaching the ceiling is started until it is stopped , It may be performed at any timing, including the time until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state, such as an omen effect indicating that the ceiling is approaching, before the ceiling is reached.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C1 stage to the B stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 . In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect indicating that the remaining time reduction count increases.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C1 time saving game state to the B time saving game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only the ceiling reaching effect is performed and the background image moves from the C1 stage to the B stage, but also, for example, the voice effect indicates that the C1 time saving game state has changed to the B time saving game state. I can grasp it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the same in the C1 time saving game state and the B time saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309), but the C1 time saving game state and The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is different from the B time saving game state, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed from the C1 time saving game state to the B time saving game state. It may be arranged such that it is possible to grasp that the migration has occurred.

In addition, when the ceiling is reached in the C2 time reduction game state, when the ceiling is reached in the C3 time reduction game state, and when the ceiling is reached in the C4 time reduction game state, the same processing as when the ceiling is reached in the C1 time reduction game state is performed. It should be done.

[8-1-3-5. (E) If elected per C2 time reduction in B time reduction game state]
Next, when winning the C2 time reduction in the B1 time reduction gaming state (that is, when the display mode indicating the C1 time reduction (selected symbol command "z1" or "z9") is derived in the special symbol display units 163 and 164 (See (e) in FIG. 312)), an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

After initializing various flags, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C2 time saving flag to "1". Thereby, it will be in the state where the time saving flag and the C2 time saving flag are materialized internally. Also, for example, "5" is set as the number of times of time saving.

The sub CPU 301 wins the C2 short time hit (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the time short hit, and the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z9") or wins the C2 time short hit. A C2 time-saving transition suggesting effect indicating that there is a possibility of having been performed is performed in the display area of the display device 7.例文帳に追加This C2 time reduction shift suggestion effect is, for example, between the start of the variable display of the special symbol from which the display mode indicating the C2 time reduction hit is derived and the display mode indicating the C2 time reduction hit is derived. do it.

The sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the B stage to the C2 stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 . In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect indicating that the remaining time reduction count has decreased. In addition, by not displaying the number of remaining time reductions or displaying a different number from the actual number of remaining time reductions, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a decrease in the number of remaining time reductions.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the B time saving game state to the C2 time saving game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C2 time reduction winning effect performed, and the background image shifts from the B stage to the C2 stage, for example, the sound effect also changes from the B time reduction game state to the C2 time reduction game state. I can understand. In addition, it is possible to grasp that it has moved from the B time-saving game state to the C2 time-saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

In addition, when winning the C2 time saving game state in the B time saving game state, the number of remaining time saving times decreases, so that the player shifts from an advantageous time saving game state to a disadvantageous time saving game state. Therefore, even if the C2 time saving hit is won in the B time saving game state, this may be ignored and the B time saving game state may be continued.

Since the number of remaining time reductions may decrease even if the C3 time reduction hit is won in the B time reduction game state, even if the C3 time reduction hit is won in the B time reduction game state, this is ignored and the B time reduction game state is continued. You may do so.

Also, in the case of winning, for example, the C2 short win or the C3 short win in the B short game state, for example, the control by the main CPU 201 is changed from the B short game state to the C2 short win or C3 short win, but the control by the sub CPU 301 is changed. You may make it continue the state of B time saving game state. For example, the main CPU 201 changes all or part of the hit type determination table to refer to, the special symbol variation pattern table to refer to, the normal symbol hit determination table, and the normal symbol determination table, while the sub CPU 301 changes the display. The background image displayed in the display area of the device 7, the sound effects, and the like may be continued without change. By doing so, although it is internally changed from the B time reduction game state to the C2 time reduction game state or the C3 time reduction game state, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the B time reduction game state continues. Thus, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the transition from the B time saving game state to the C2 time saving game state or the C3 time saving game state.

When the C1 time saving hit is won in the B time saving game state, there is a high possibility that the number of remaining time saving times will increase. Therefore, when winning the C1 time saving game state in the B time saving game state, the B time saving game state may be shifted to the C1 time saving game state. That is, in this case, since it is B time saving game state, S511 of the time point setting process (see FIG. 311) is determined YES, and if the C1 time saving hit is won, the time saving mode resetting process (S513) will be performed. Then, in this time-saving mode resetting process, for example, after initializing various flags, the time-saving flag and the C1 time-saving flag are set to "1", and for example, "300" is set as the time-saving number of C1. .

In addition, when the time saving win is won in the B time saving game state, regardless of the kind of the time saving win won, this may be uniformly ignored, and the B time saving game state may be continued.

[8-1-3-6. (f) If you win a jackpot in the C2 time-saving gaming state]
Next, for example, when a big hit is won in the C2 time-saving game state (that is, a big hit in the special pattern display units 163 and 164 (selected pattern commands "z4" to "z6" and "z12" to "z14") ) is derived (see (f) of FIG. 312)), an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

At the start of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the jackpot flag (not shown) to "1", and refers to the hit type determination table (see FIGS. 289 to 295). Set the number of rounds determined according to the selected symbol command. Thereby, internally, it is neither the variable probability game state nor the time saving game state, but the big hit game state.

The sub CPU 301 indicates that the jackpot has been won (that is, the jackpot (one of the selected pattern commands "z4" to "z6" and "z12" to "z14") on the special symbol display portions 163 and 164). The big hit winning performance shown is performed in the display area of the display device 7.例文帳に追加

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C2 stage to the big win stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 hides the remaining time reduction count displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7, for example. In this case, the sub CPU 301 keeps displaying the number of remaining time reductions in the C2 time reduction game state when the jackpot is won, instead of hiding the remaining time reduction count during the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends. , the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 may be updated. For example, after the end of the jackpot game state, when shifting to the A reduced working hours game state, the number of remaining reduced working hours of the A reduced working hours game state is displayed, and when shifting to the variable probability gaming state or the normal gaming state, the remaining reduced number of times is hidden, for example. good too.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C2 time-saving game state to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the big hit confirmation effect performed and the background image shifts from the C2 stage to the big win stage, but also from the sound effect, for example, it can be grasped that the C2 time-saving game state has shifted to the big win game state. can. In addition, in the jackpot game state, a round game in which the jackpot 131 (see FIG. 4) shifts from the closed state to the open state over a predetermined period is also executed, so the transition from the C2 time-saving game state to the jackpot game state is also performed. can be grasped.

In addition, not only when the jackpot is won in the C2 time reduction game state, but also when the jackpot is won in the normal game state, the A time reduction game state, the B time reduction game state, the C1 time reduction game state, the C3 time reduction game state, or the C4 time reduction game state. , the same processing as when winning a jackpot in the C2 time-saving gaming state may be performed.

[8-1-3-7. (g) When the jackpot gaming state ends]
Next, an example of an internal state, a display effect, and a game state that can be enjoyed when the jackpot game state ends will be described.

When the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 clears the jackpot flag, refers to the hit type determination table (see FIGS. 289 to 295), and changes the probability according to the jackpot type determined according to the selected symbol command. The flag, the time saving flag, and the A time saving flag are set to "1", and when controlling to the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times is also set. In (g) of FIG. 312, after the end of the big hit game state, the case where it is controlled to the A time saving game state (that is, the case where the time saving flag "1" and the A time saving flag "1" are set) is illustrated. .

When the big win game state ends, the sub CPU 301 performs a big win end effect in the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that the big win game state has ended.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the big hit stage to the A stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays the number of times of time saving set by the main CPU 201, ie, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state, as the remaining time saving times displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 .

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the jackpot game state to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the big win end effect performed and the background image shifts from the big win stage to the A stage, but also from the sound effect, for example, the big win game state ends and shifts to the A time saving game state. I can understand. In addition, as the round game is no longer executed, it can be grasped from the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) that the jackpot game state has shifted to the C3 time-saving game state (FIGS. 308 and 309). reference).

[8-1-3-8. (h) When winning C3 time saving in A time saving game state]
Next, in the A time-saving gaming state, for example, when the C3 time-saving hit is won (that is, the special symbol display units 163 and 164 show the C3 time-saving hit (selected symbol command "z2" or "z10")) were derived. An example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed in the case (see (h) of FIG. 312) will be described.

After initializing various flags, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". As a result, internally, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are established. Also, for example, "50" is set as the number of times of time saving.

The sub CPU 301 wins the C3 short time hit (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the time short hit and the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z10") or the C3 time short hit wins. In the display area of the display device 7, a C3 time-saving transition suggestive effect indicating that there is a possibility of having been made is performed. This C3 time reduction shift suggestion effect is, for example, between the start of the variable display of the special symbol that may lead to the display mode indicating the C3 time reduction hit and the display mode indicating the C3 time reduction hit being derived. do it.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the A stage to the C3 stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 . In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect when the number of times of shortening remaining time increases, and perform an effect indicating that the number of times of shortening remaining time is decreasing. However, if the number of remaining time reductions decreases, the interest may decrease, so by hiding the remaining time reduction number or displaying a different display from the actual remaining time reduction number, the interest due to the reduction in the remaining time reduction number You may make it suppress the fall of.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the A time saving game state to the C3 time saving game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C3 time reduction winning effect performed, and the background image shifts from the A stage to the C3 stage, for example, the voice effect also shifts from the A time reduction game state to the C3 time reduction game state. I can understand. In addition, from the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it is possible to grasp that the A time-saving game state has shifted to the C3 time-saving game state (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

It should be noted that not only when winning the C3 time short hit in the A time saving game state, but also when winning the C1 time short hit or the C2 time short hit in the A time saving game state, it is the same as when the C3 time short hit is won in the A time saving game state. It is recommended that the processing of

Also, if you win the C3 short win in the B short game state, if you win the C3 short win in the C1 short game state, if you win the C3 short win in the C2 short game state, if you win the C3 short win in the C4 short game state Even when winning, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the case of winning C3 time saving in the A time saving game state.

[8-1-3-9. If you win the same type of time saving hit as the current game state]
Also, although not shown in FIG. 312, if you win C1 time reduction in the C1 time reduction game state, if you win C2 time reduction in the C2 time reduction game state, if you win C3 time reduction in the C3 time reduction game state, The main CPU 201 and sub CPU 301 perform the following processes.

After initializing various flags, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag of the type corresponding to the time saving hit derived to the time saving flag and the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 to "1". For example, when winning the C1 time saving game state, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C1 time saving flag are set to "1". In addition, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, “300” as the number of times of reduced working hours, and starts managing the number of remaining reduced working hours in the C1 reduced working hours gaming state. That is, for example, even if the remaining number of time reductions is less than 300 times due to the expiration of the number of time reductions in the C1 time reduction game state under control, the number of time reductions is reset to "300".

The sub CPU 301 carries out, in the display area of the display device 7, a time-saving transition suggestive effect corresponding to the time-saving hit of the type corresponding to the time-saving hit derived to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164. In addition, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions increases instead of or in addition to the time saving transition suggesting effect.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 on the stage of the type corresponding to the time-saving hit derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 .

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is controlled to a time saving game state of a type corresponding to the time saving winning derived to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, that is, the previous time saving game state is maintained.

Moreover, in terms of appearance, for example, not only the background image is maintained at the C1 stage, but also, for example, it can be grasped from the voice effect that the C1 time-saving game state is maintained. In addition, since the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) does not change, it can be understood that the C1 time-saving game state may be maintained (see FIGS. 308 and 309).

[8-1-4. Expansion example of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment]
In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, a special When the result of the symbol win determination process is a time saving win, the main CPU 201 ignores any type of time saving win. In the first place, the time saving hit may not be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. For example, if the "time saving hit determination value data" shown in the column of probability variation flag "1" of the special symbol hit determination table (Fig. 10) is set to "losing determination value data", the special symbol hit determination in the high probability gaming state The result of processing does not become a time-saving hit.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the A time saving game state, if the C1 time saving win, the C2 time saving win or the C3 time saving win is won, the A time saving game state is ended and the C time saving game state corresponding to the winning is entered. However, it is not limited to this, and the transition from the A time saving game state to the C time saving game state may be prevented. In this case, it may not be possible to move from the A time-saving game state to all C time-saving game states, or from the A time-saving game state to a specific C time-saving game state (for example, the C1 time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player) It may not be shifted to non-specific C time-saving game state (for example, C2 time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the B time reduction game state, if the C1 time reduction hit, C2 time reduction hit or C3 time reduction hit is won, the B time reduction game state is terminated, and the C time reduction game state corresponding to the winning However, it is not limited to this, and the transition from the B time saving game state to the C time saving game state may not be performed. In this case, it may not be possible to transition from the B time-saving game state to all C time-saving gaming states, or from the B time-saving gaming state to a specific C time-saving gaming state (for example, C1 time-saving, which is advantageous to the player in terms of the number of time-saving game state), but may not transition to a non-specific C time saving game state (eg, C2 time saving game state, C3 time saving game state).

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the C1 time reduction game state, if the C1 time reduction hit, the C2 time reduction hit or the C3 time reduction hit is won, the current C1 time reduction game state is terminated, and the C time reduction corresponding to the winning Although it is made to shift to the game state, it is not limited to this, and even if winning is won in the time saving game state in the C1 time saving game state, it may not be shifted to the C time saving game state corresponding to the winning. In this case, it may not be possible to move from the C1 time saving game state to all C time saving game states, or if a specific time saving hit (for example, C1 time saving hit) is won, the C time saving game state under control is terminated. Although the C1 time reduction game state is newly started, if a non-specific time reduction hit (for example, C2 time reduction hit, C3 time reduction hit) is won, the C time reduction game state under control may be continued. .

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, different stage effects are displayed in the C1 time reduction game state, the C2 time reduction game state, the C3 time reduction game state, and the C4 time reduction game state. Although it is possible to grasp whether there is any from the appearance, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a common stage effect may be displayed in the C1 reduced working hours gaming state, the C2 reduced working hours gaming state, the C3 reduced working hours gaming state, and the C4 reduced working hours gaming state. In addition, although the stages are different between the C1 time-saving game state, the C2 time-saving game state, the C3 time-saving game state, and the C4 time-saving game state, the differences are slight, so which C time-saving game state is the appearance? It is also possible to display a stage effect that is difficult to grasp or difficult to grasp.

If a common stage or a stage effect that is difficult to grasp or grasp from the appearance is displayed in the C1 reduced-time gaming state, the C2 reduced-hours game state, the C3 reduced-hours game state, and the C4 reduced-hours gaming state, a predetermined timing (for example, the player At the timing when the number of time reductions in the C time reduction game state other than the C1 time reduction game state, which is most advantageous for the game, is digested), if you perform an effect to incite whether the C time reduction game state continues or ends, the interest can be enhanced. It becomes possible. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the C1 time-saving gaming state is most advantageous to the player, it is preferable to carry out an effect that excites the player's interest.

In addition, the stage displayed in the relatively disadvantageous C time-saving gaming state (for example, C2 time-saving gaming state) and the relatively unfavorable C time-saving gaming state for the player (for example, C1 time-saving gaming state, C3 The stages displayed in the time-saving game state and the C4 time-saving game state) are made different from each other, and in the C time-saving game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, it is not possible or grasped by the appearance which C time-saving game state is. A difficult stage effect may be displayed. In the stage indicating that the C time-saving gaming state is relatively not disadvantageous to the player, at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the time-saving number of times of the C3 time-saving gaming state is exhausted), the C time-saving gaming state continues or ends. It is possible to heighten the interest by performing an effect that arouses the desire to play. Then, when the C time-saving game state continues beyond a predetermined timing and, for example, when it is determined that the C time-saving game state is most advantageous to the player, it is preferable to perform an effect to excite the player's interest. .

In addition, the stage displayed in the C time-saving gaming state relatively advantageous to the player (for example, the C1 time-saving gaming state) and the C time-saving gaming state that is not relatively advantageous to the player (for example, the C2 time-saving gaming state, C3 The stages displayed in the time-saving game state and the C4 time-saving game state are made different from each other, and in the C time-saving game state, which is relatively unfavorable to the player, it is not possible or grasped from the appearance which C time-saving game state is. A difficult stage effect may be displayed.

Furthermore, the relatively advantageous or most advantageous C time-saving gaming state (for example, C1 time-saving gaming state) for the player, or the relatively disadvantageous or most disadvantageous C time-saving gaming state for the player (for example, C2 time-saving A game state) may be displayed in a stage effect that is difficult to grasp or cannot be grasped from the appearance. In this case, for example, after disappointing the player once by displaying a stage effect indicating that the player is in the relatively disadvantageous or most disadvantageous C2 time saving gaming state, a predetermined timing (for example, C2 time saving At the timing when the number of time reductions in the game state is consumed), the stage performance indicating the C1 time reduction game state, which is relatively advantageous or most advantageous for the player, may be displayed to excite the player's interest. good.

[8-2. Pachinko machine of the second embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be explained below. In describing the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the description of the common points with the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment will be omitted as much as possible, and the points that differ from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment will be mainly described. shall be In particular, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment differs from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment in that it is equipped with a C5 time-saving game state, which will be described later. Since other time-saving game states are the same as those of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted as much as possible.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the normal game state in which the electric sapo control is not executed, the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the high-accuracy short-time game state and the low In the fixed working hours game state, including all the C working hours playing state, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode. As with the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, however, which of the left-handed and right-handed shots is the regular game mode in each game state can be appropriately and arbitrarily designed according to, for example, the nature of the game. It is possible. Also, like the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, although it is not installed in this embodiment, left-handed hitting is a regular game mode in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state in which electric sapo control is not executed.

[8-2-1. basic specifications]
The basic specifications of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 to 319. FIG.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 201 performs a game in one of the normal gaming state, the high-probability short-time gaming state, and the low-probability short-time gaming state. It is possible to proceed with However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

Moreover, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the low-probability reduced working hours gaming state includes A reduced working hours gaming state, B reduced working hours gaming state and C reduced working hours gaming state.

In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the C3 time reduction game state, the C4 time reduction game state and the C5 time reduction game state are included in the C time reduction game state. The C3 time saving game state and the C4 time saving game state are the same as the C3 time saving game state and the C4 time saving game state described in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

The C5 time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled to the C5 time saving game state when the result of the hit determination process in the normal game state is the C5 time saving game state. Also, if the result of the hit determination process in the A time saving game state, B time saving game state or C time saving game state is C5 time saving hit, while continuing the current time saving game state being controlled, C5 is internally overlapped It is possible to activate the time saving. In this case, the time-saving game state that can be grasped by the appearance, that is, the time-saving game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, is only the time-saving game state that is actually controlled, and the C5 that is internally overlapping and operating As for time saving, it is impossible or difficult to see from the outside that they are working in layers.

In the following, the time-saving game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is described with the word "time-saving game state", such as C5 time-saving game state, and is internally overlapped. If it is not the C5 time saving game state that the player can enjoy just by doing it, it is simply referred to as "C5 time saving". Therefore, in the following, for example, if it is described as "in a time-saving game state" such as "in a time-saving game state A" or "in a time-saving game state B", "time-saving that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy It means "in the game state".

In addition, it is not essential that all of the C3 time saving game state, C4 time saving game state and C5 time saving game state are included in the C time saving game state, and only part of these C time saving game states is included. Alternatively, other C time-saving gaming states may be included. For example, in addition to one or more (including all) of the C3 time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state, and C5 time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state has been explained in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. The C1 time saving game state or/and the C2 time saving game state may be included in the C time saving game state.
[8-2-1-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 201, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, for example, based on the special symbol win determination table shown in FIG. Then, the hit determination processing of the special symbol is performed.

[8-2-1-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 313 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment.

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 313, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z20" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA21" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 selects "z21" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA22" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z22" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA23" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z23" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA24" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 40 to 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z24" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA24" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z25" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA24" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z26" and select "zA25" as the design designation command.

When the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z27" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA26" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 60 to 79, the main CPU 201 selects "z28" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA27" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z29" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA28" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 0 to 39, the main CPU 201 selects "z30" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA29" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 40 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z31" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA29" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z32" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA29" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z33" and select "zA30" as the design designation command.

[8-2-1-3. Hit type determination table]
314 to 319 are examples of winning type determination tables stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[8-2-1-3-1. Hit type determination table in normal game state]
FIG. 314 is an example of a hit type determination table in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 314, in the normal game state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the selected symbol command is a display mode corresponding to one of "z20" to "z22" and "z27" to "z29". is derived to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol display portion 164), the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to "1" and performs the time saving mode setting process ( In S568 of FIG. 327 to be described later), various data related to the control of the time-saving gaming state are set. Various data related to the control of the C time-saving gaming state set in the time-saving mode setting process (see S568 of FIG. 327 described later) are, for example, time-saving flags and the number of times of time-savings of types according to the selected symbol command.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving number to "50". ” is set. Further, for example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z28" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C4 time saving flag to "1", and sets the time saving flag to "1". Set "50".

Further, the selected symbol command is one of "z23" to "z25" and "z30" to "z32", and the display mode indicating the big hit is the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 163, second special symbol display portion 163). 2 special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 initializes various flags in the big hit game control start setting process (see S123 in FIG. 30) (that is, at the start of the big win game state). , a jackpot flag (not shown) is set to "1", and the number of rounds is set according to the selected symbol command. In addition, in the special symbol game end setting process (see S282 in FIG. 42) (that is, at the end of the big win game state), the main CPU 201 sets the probability variation flag, the time saving The flag and the A time saving flag are set to "1", and when controlling to the A time saving game state, the time saving number of times is also set.

For example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command “z23” is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags at the start of the jackpot game state, and then sets the jackpot flag ( (not shown) is set to "1", and "3" is set as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state. Also, at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving flag and A time saving flag are set to "1" (probability variable flag is not set to "1"), and the number of time saving times is set to "30".

Further, for example, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z32" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags at the start of the big win gaming state, A flag (not shown) is set to "1", and the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is set to "10". In addition, at the end of the jackpot game state, the variable probability flag, the time saving flag and the A time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times as the number of times that the A time saving game state can be continued until the next big hit game state is controlled. is set to, for example, "10000".

The winning type determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 314 is only an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. , may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

[8-2-1-3-2. Hit type determination table in A time-saving gaming state]
Figure 315 is an example of a hit type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state.

In the A time-saving gaming state, as the display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 to be described later). do.

As shown in Figure 315, specifically, after initializing various flags, the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command to set.

That is, in the A time-saving gaming state, for example, when the display mode indicating the C3 time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 is the current The A time-saving game state is ended, and the C3 time-saving game state is newly started. For example, in the A time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z27" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, and the time-saving flag and C3 The time saving flag is set to "1" and the number of time saving is set to "50".

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (the display mode indicating the C4 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special When it is derived to the symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this and does not execute the new C4 time-saving game state, and continues the A time-saving game state being controlled. is possible.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (the display mode indicating the C5 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special When it is derived to the symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 continues the A time reduction game state as long as there is a remaining time reduction number of the A time reduction game state under control, and internally C5 time reduction. to operate. In this case, as long as the A time saving game state continues, the player can enjoy the A time saving game state. For example, in the A time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize various flags, and the duplicate flag and C5 Set the time saving flag to "1". Thereby, internally, it will be in the state where the time saving flag, the A time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are materialized. In addition, for example, "50" is set as the number of time reductions of C5 time reductions that are internally overlapped and operated. In addition, the number of remaining time reductions in the A time reduction game state is continuously managed.

In addition, a "duplication flag" is a flag which shows that time saving (this Example C5 time saving) overlaps internally and is operating. For example, if C5 is won in one of the time-saving gaming states, and the remaining number of times in one time-saving gaming state is greater than 0, the main CPU 201 sets the duplication flag to " 1”. On the other hand, if the C5 short time hit is won in the normal game state, or if the C5 time short win is won in any one of the time saving game states and the remaining number of times in the one time saving game state is 0, based on the C5 time short win In this case, the main CPU 201 does not set the duplication flag to "1" because the C5 time-saving game state is controlled in a mode that the player can enjoy. In addition, when the C5 time saving win is won in a state in which the C5 time saving is already operating internally in one of the time saving gaming states, the main CPU 201 continues the duplication flag state "1". Then, one time-saving game state ends in a state in which two C5 time-savings are internally overlapping and operating in any one time-saving game state, and one of the two C5 time-savings that are internally overlapping and operating When the control of one C5 time saving is started in a mode that the player can enjoy, the main CPU 201 keeps the duplication flag state "1" as long as the other C5 time saving is internally overlapped. In this way, if even one C5 time saving works internally, the duplicate flag is set to '1', and the state of the duplicate flag continues to be '1' until there is no more C5 time saving that works internally. , the overlap flag is initialized or cleared when the C5 time-saver operating internally overlaps. In addition, the number of C5 time reductions that are internally overlapped and operated is managed by a C5 time reduction counter, which will be described later. That is, when the value of the C5 short time counter is greater than 0, the state of the duplication flag is "1".

In the following, the number of time reductions in the time saving game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is referred to as "time reduction number" or "remaining time reduction number". The number of C5 time-savings that are operating in parallel is referred to as the "overlapping number of time-savings."

Also, the hit type determination table in the A time-saving game state of FIG. 315 is only an example, and the hit types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 315, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

[8-2-1-3-3. Hit type determination table in B time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 316 is an example of a hit type determination table in the B time-saving gaming state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 to be described later). do.

As shown in Figure 316, specifically, after initializing various flags, the C time saving flag corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command to set.

That is, in the B time-saving gaming state, for example, when the display mode indicating the C3 time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 is under control End the B time saving game state, and newly start the C3 time saving game state. For example, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z27" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, and the time-saving flag and C3 A time saving flag is set to "1", and the number of time saving is set to "300".

By the way, as described above, in the normal game state or the A time saving game state, even if the result of the special symbol hitting determination process is a time saving hit, it is a C3 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z20", "z27"). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 314 and 315, the set number of working hour reductions is "50". However, in the B time-saving gaming state, which is relatively advantageous to the player in the time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C3 time-saving winning, as shown in FIG. The number of times the time is saved is '300'. This is because despite being controlled to the B time saving game state by reaching the ceiling, if "50" is set as the number of time saving times when the C3 time saving hit is won, the interest may decrease. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning the C3 time saving game in the B time saving game state, similarly to when reaching the ceiling, by setting "300" as the number of time saving times, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. there is

Also, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is C5 time saving hit (selected symbol command "z22", "z29"), the number of time saving times to be set is "100" as shown in FIG. In this case, even if the player wins the C5 time saving game in the B time saving game state, if the number of time saving times to be set is small, there is a possibility that the chance of receiving the winning of the C5 time saving prize is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning the C5 short time game in the B time saving game state, although it is less than the case of winning the C3 time short win, by setting "100" as the number of time saving times, the C5 time short win is won. We are increasing the number of machines that can enjoy what we have done, and are trying to suppress the decline in interest.

However, the number of times of time reduction set when winning C3 time reduction or C5 time reduction in B time reduction game state is elected to C3 time reduction or C5 time reduction in other time reduction game state (excluding C1 time reduction game state) It is not essential to have more than the number of time saving times set in the case. For example, even if C3 time saving hit or C5 time saving hit is won in any time saving game state, the number of time saving times to be set may be the same or substantially the same.

In addition, in the B time saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (the display mode indicating the C4 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special When it is derived to the symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this, so that the new C4 time saving game state is not executed, and the B time saving game state being controlled is continued. is possible.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (the display mode indicating the C5 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 continues the B time reduction game state as long as there is a remaining time reduction number of times in the B time reduction game state under control, and internally C5 time reduction. to operate. In this case, as long as the B time saving game state continues, the player can enjoy the B time saving game state. For example, in the BA time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize various flags, and the duplicate flag and the C5 time-saving Set the flag to "1". Thereby, internally, it will be in the state in which the time saving flag, the B time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are materialized. In addition, for example, "50" is set as the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving that is internally overlapped. In addition, the number of remaining time reductions in the B time reduction game state is continuously managed.

Also, the hit type determination table in the B time-saving game state of FIG. 316 is only an example, and the hit types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 316, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

[8-2-1-3-4. Hit type determination table in C3 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 317 is an example of a hit type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, the hit type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 317 is the same table as the winning type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. A common hit type determination table may be used. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state, since there is room for widening the range of game characteristics.

In the C3 time saving game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 to be described later). do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 317, various flags are initialized, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. That is, the C3 time saving game state being controlled ends, and a new C3 time saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C3 time saving game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (display mode indicating the C4 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special When it is derived to the symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this and does not execute the new C4 time saving game state, but continues the C3 time saving game state being controlled. is possible.

In addition, in the C3 time saving game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (the display mode indicating the C5 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 continues the C3 time reduction game state as long as there is a remaining time reduction number of times in the C3 time reduction game state under control, and internally controls the C5 time reduction. to operate. In this case, as long as the C3 time saving game state continues, the player can enjoy the C3 time saving game state. For example, in the C3 time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 initializes the various flags without initializing the overlap flag and the C5 Set the time saving flag to "1". Thereby, internally, it will be in the state where the time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are materialized. In addition, for example, "50" is set as the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving that is internally overlapped. In addition, the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state is continuously managed.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and enters the B time saving game state. Set the corresponding number of times of time saving (for example, 300 times). In this case, the current C3 time saving game state may be ended and the B time saving game state may be executed, or the B time saving game state may be executed after the end of the C3 time saving game state under control. good.

In addition, when the C5 time reduction is internally overlapping during the control of the C3 time reduction game state (the player can enjoy the C3 time reduction game state), and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 , After initializing various flags except the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag, set the time saving flag and B time saving flag to “1”, and set the number of time saving times corresponding to the B time saving game state (for example, 300 times) . That is, the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy becomes the B time-saving game state, the C5 time-saving operation that is internally activated continues, and the number of C5 time-saving overlaps is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, the B time saving flag, the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag are established.

However, when the C5 time reduction is internally overlapping during the control of the C3 time reduction gaming state and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 internally overlaps and operates the C5 time reduction. Instead of continuing the operation, the C5 time saving operation may be terminated. In this case, the overlapping time saving number of times of C5 time saving is cleared.

Also, the winning type determination table in the C3 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 317 is merely an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 317, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

[8-2-1-3-5. Hit type determination table in C4 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 318 is an example of a hit type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state.

In addition, the hit type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 318 is the hit type determination table in the A time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Since the table is similar to the type determination table, a common hit type determination table may be used for these. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state, since there is room for widening the range of game characteristics.

In the C4 time saving game state, as the display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 to be described later). do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 318, after initializing various flags, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving is set to "50". That is, the C4 time saving game state being controlled ends, and a new C3 time saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C4 time saving game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (display mode indicating the C4 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special When it is derived to the symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this and does not execute a new C4 time saving game state, but continues the C4 time saving game state being controlled. is possible.

In addition, in the C4 time saving game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (display mode indicating the C5 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 continues the C4 time reduction game state as long as there is a remaining time reduction number of times in the C4 time reduction game state under control, and internally controls the C5 time reduction game state. to operate. In this case, the player can enjoy the C4 short gaming state as long as the C4 short gaming state continues. For example, in the C4 time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize the various flags, and the duplicate flag and the C5 Set the time saving flag to "1". Thereby, internally, it will be in the state in which the time saving flag, the C4 time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are materialized. In addition, for example, "50" is set as the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving that is internally overlapped. In addition, the number of remaining time reductions in the C4 time reduction game state is continuously managed.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and enters the B time saving game state. Set the corresponding number of times of time saving (for example, 300 times). In this case, the C4 time-saving game state under control may be ended and the B time-saving game state may be executed, or the B time-saving game state may be executed after the C4 time-saving game state under control is ended. good too.

In addition, when the C5 time-saving game state is controlled internally while the C4 time-saving game state is being controlled (the player can enjoy the C4 time-saving game state), and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 , After initializing various flags except for the duplication flag and the C4 time saving flag, set the time saving flag and B time saving flag to “1”, and set the number of time saving times corresponding to the B time saving game state (for example, 300 times) . That is, the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy becomes the B time-saving game state, the C5 time-saving operation that is internally activated continues, and the number of C5 time-saving overlaps is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, the B time saving flag, the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag are established.

However, when the C5 time reduction is internally overlapping during the control of the C4 time reduction gaming state and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 internally overlaps and operates the C5 time reduction. Instead of continuing the operation, the C5 time saving operation may be terminated. In this case, the overlapping time saving number of times of C5 time saving is cleared.

Also, the winning type determination table in the C4 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 318 is only an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 318, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

[8-2-1-3-6. Hit type determination table in C5 time-saving gaming state]
FIG. 319 is an example of a hit type determination table in the C5 time-saving gaming state.

It should be noted that the hit type determination table in the C5 time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. may use a common hit type determination table. However, it is preferable to provide a winning type determination table for each game state, since there is room for widening the range of game characteristics.

In the C5 time-saving gaming state, as a display mode indicating the time-saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z20" or "z27" (the display mode indicating the C3 time-saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 sets various data related to the control of the time saving game state in the time saving mode resetting process (see S567 in FIG. 327 to be described later). do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 319, various flags are initialized, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time saving times corresponding to the selected symbol command is set. That is, the control of the C5 time saving game state ends, and a new C3 time saving game state starts.

In addition, in the C5 time saving game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z21" or "z28" (display mode indicating the C4 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special When it is derived to the symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 ignores this, and does not execute the new C4 time-saving game state, but continues the C5 time-saving game state being controlled. is possible.

In addition, in the C5 time saving game state, as a display mode indicating the time saving hit, the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z22" or "z29" (display mode indicating the C5 time saving hit) is a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164), the main CPU 201 continues the C5 time saving game state as long as there is a remaining time reduction number of C5 time saving game state under control, and further C5 time saving inside operate repeatedly. In this case, the player can enjoy the C5 time-saving game state that was originally activated. For example, in the C5 time-saving gaming state, when the display mode corresponding to the selected symbol command "z29" is derived to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 does not initialize the various flags, and the duplicate flag and the C5 Set the time saving flag to "1". Thereby, internally, it will be in the state in which the time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are materialized. In addition, for example, "50" is set as the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving that is internally overlapped. In addition, the number of remaining time reductions in the C5 time reduction game state that was originally operating is continuously managed.

In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C5 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to "1", and enters the B time saving game state. Set the corresponding number of times of time saving (for example, 300 times). In this case, internally, the time saving flag and the B time saving flag are established. Also, in this case, the C5 time saving game state under control may be ended and the B time saving game state may be executed, or the B time saving game state may be executed after the end of the C5 time saving game state being controlled. can be

In addition, during the control of the C5 time-saving game state, the C5 time-saving game state is internally activated (the player can enjoy the originally activated C5 time-saving game state), and the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In this case, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags except for the overlap flag and the C5 time saving flag, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to “1”, and sets the time saving number of times corresponding to the B time saving game state (for example, 300 times). That is, the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy becomes the B time-saving game state, the C5 time-saving operation that is internally activated continues, and the number of C5 time-saving overlaps is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, the B time saving flag, the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag are established.

Also, the winning type determination table in the C5 time-saving gaming state of FIG. 319 is only an example, and the winning types are not limited to those shown in FIG. 319, or may not have some or all of the hit types shown in FIG.

[8-2-1-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
Since the variation pattern table of special symbols is the same as that of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the explanation is omitted.

[8-2-1-5. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 320 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment.

Since the win/lose determination value data determined based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value is as shown in FIG. 320, the description is omitted here.

[8-2-1-6. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 321 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment.

When the determination value data determined with reference to FIG. 320 is the determination value data per normal symbol, the selected symbol command at normal per symbol determined based on the game state and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is 321, the description is omitted here.

[8-2-1-7. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 322 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment.

Since the release pattern of the normal electric accessory determined based on the selected symbol command per normal symbol determined with reference to FIG. 321 is as shown in FIG. 322, description thereof will be omitted here.

[8-2-2. Main control processing]
In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as the various processes described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 52 in the first pachinko game machine. Common for the most part. In the following, the processing different from the processing executed in the first pachinko game machine will be mainly described, and the description of the processing similar to the processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be omitted as much as possible.

[8-2-2-1. Time saving counter update process]
FIG. 323 is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, a time saving counter process shown in FIG. 323 is executed instead of the time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 explained in the first pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the reduced working hours counter corresponds to the number of remaining reduced working hours in the reduced working hours game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, and the overlapping reduced working hours counter is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. It corresponds to the number of overlapping time saving of time saving (C5 time saving in this embodiment) that is internally overlapping although it is not working.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S521). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

In S521, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and that the time saving counter is greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S521), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process, and the process is Return to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S521 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S521 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S522). After executing the process of S522, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S523.

In S523, the main CPU 201 performs an overlapping working hours counter update process. This overlapping time-saving counter update process is a process of subtracting 1 from the overlapping time-saving counter of the C5 time-saving counter that is not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, but is internally operated. Details will be described later. After performing the duplication time saving counter update process, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

[8-2-2-2. Duplicate time saving counter update process]
FIG. 324 is a flow chart showing an example of duplication time reduction counter update processing by the main CPU 201 . Duplicate time saving counter update processing is called as a subroutine during execution of the time saving counter update processing (see FIG. 323) described above.

In this overlapping time saving counter update process, the process of subtracting 1 from the overlapping time saving number of times of the internally operating C5 time saving (that is, the value of the overlapping time saving counter) is performed.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of substituting the C5 time saving counter for the variable X (S531). The C5 time-saver counter indicates the number of C5 time-savers that are not controlled in a player-enjoyable manner, but are internally overlaid. After performing the process of S531, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S532.

In S532, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable X is greater than zero. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not there is one or more that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but are internally operating the C5 time-saving gaming state.

In S532, if the variable X is not greater than 0 (NO determination in S532), that is, if the variable X is 0, the main CPU 201 ends the duplicate time saving counter update process, and changes the process to the time saving counter update process ( 323). In addition, when the C5 time saving is not internally overlapped and is not operating or when the subtraction of the overlapping time saving number of times is completed, S532 is determined as NO.

On the other hand, in S532, if the variable X is greater than 0 (YES determination in S532), that is, if the control is not performed in a manner that the player can enjoy, but the C5 time saving is internally operating, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S533.

In S533, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the overlapping working hours counter (X). For example, if the number of C5 time savers that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but are internally superimposed are two, then the second C5 time saver (i.e., the second C5 time saver per The number of times of time saving (that is, the number of times of overlapping time saving) of C5 time saving that has been elected and internally overlapped corresponds to the overlapping time saving counter (X). Also, if the number of C5 time reductions that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but are internally overlapping is one, the first C5 time reduction (that is, the first C5 time reduction per The number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving) that has been elected and internally overlapped corresponds to the overlapping time saving counter (X). That is, the number of times of time saving of C5 time saving operating internally is also subtracted each time the special symbol is variably displayed. After performing the process of S533, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S534.

In S534, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the variable X. After performing the process of S534, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S532, and repeats the processes of S532 to S534 until it is determined that the variable X is 0 (until it is determined NO in S532). This makes it possible to decrement by one the number of overlapping time-savings for all of the C5 time-savings that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but are internally overlapping.

[8-2-2-3. Counter judgment processing]
FIG. 325 is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) described in the first pachinko game machine. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the counter determination process shown in FIG. 325 is executed instead of the counter determination process shown in FIG. 36 explained in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time reduction transition determination processing (S541). Since this time reduction transition determination process (S541) is the same as the time reduction transition determination process described with reference to FIG. 37 in the first pachinko game machine, the description is omitted. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S542 after performing the time reduction transition determination process.

In S542, the main CPU 201 performs time saving shift processing. This time saving transition process (S542) will be described later. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S543 after performing the time saving transition process (S542).

In S543, the main CPU 201 performs overlapping time reduction counter shift processing. This overlapping time reduction counter shift process (S543) will be described later. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S544 after performing the overlapping time reduction counter shift process (S543).

In S<b>544 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than one.

When it is determined in S544 that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S544), that is, when the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S548. In addition, since the value of the time saving counter is the number of times of remaining time saving, when the number of remaining time saving times of the time saving game state controlled in a mode that the player can enjoy is larger than 0, NO determination is made in S544.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S544 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (NO determination in S544), that is, when the time saving counter is 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S545. In addition, when the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is 0, YES determination is made in S544.

In S545, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the C5 time reduction counter is zero. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not the number of C5 time-savings that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but that are internally superimposed is zero.

In S545, when it is determined that the C5 time saving counter is not 0 (NO determination in S545), that is, when there is an internally overlapping C5 time saving, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S547.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S545 that the C5 time saving counter is 0 (S545 determines YES), that is, when there is no C5 time saving operating internally, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S546. .

In S546, the main CPU 201 performs a process of turning off the time saving flag, ie, turning off (clearing) the time saving flag. That is, if the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy disappears and the C5 time reduction is not activated internally, the time reduction game state ends. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S548.

In addition, in S547, the main CPU 201 performs overlapping working hours setting processing. This duplication time saving setting processing will be described later. After performing the overlapping working hours setting process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S548.

At S548, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S549) of the time saving transition command. In addition, the time-saving transition command transmitted in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S549, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination processing and returns the processing to the time saving management processing (see FIG. 32).

[8-2-2-4. Time reduction transition processing]
FIG. 326 is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S542 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 325). In this embodiment, instead of the time-saving transition processing shown in FIG. 38 explained in the first pachinko game machine, the time-saving transition processing shown in FIG. 326 is executed.

In addition, each process of S551, S552, S553, S556 and S557 executed in the time reduction transition process of FIG. 326 is executed in the time reduction transition process of FIG. , so the description is omitted.

After performing the process of S553, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S554.

In S554, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a C5 short time win.

In S554, when it is determined that it is the C5 time saving hit (when S554 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S555.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S554 that it is not the C5 time saving hit (when S554 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S558.

In S555, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the simultaneous winning flag is on. The simultaneous winning flag is a flag that is set to "1" when winning the short C5 time win at the same timing as the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S558.

In S558, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. Since this time saving setting process is different from the time saving setting process described with reference to FIG. 39 in the first pachinko game machine, the details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the time saving setting process (S558), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 325).

[8-2-2-5. Time saving setting processing]
FIG. 327 is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S558 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326). In this embodiment, the time saving setting process shown in FIG. 327 is executed instead of the time saving setting process shown in FIG. 39 described in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S561).

When it is determined in S561 that the time saving flag is ON (when S561 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S562.

In S562, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a C4 short time win. As described above in the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine, the C4 time saving game state corresponding to the C4 time saving game state is the C4 time saving game state that does not operate when it is controlled to the time saving game state.

In S562, when it is determined that it is the C4 time saving hit (when S562 determines YES), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S562 that it is not the C4 time saving hit (when S562 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S563.

In S563, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a C5 short time win. As described above, the C5 time saving hit is a C time saving hit that can be internally overlapped and operated when it is controlled to one of the time saving game states in a manner that the player can enjoy. In other words, the C5 time reduction hit cannot be controlled by switching from the current time reduction game state to the C5 time reduction game state if there is a remaining time reduction number of times in the current time reduction game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. It can be said that it is a short time.

In S563, when it is determined that the C5 time-saving win is achieved (when S563 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S564. In addition, when YES determination is made in S563, the won C5 time reduction hit is the C5 time reduction hit during the time saving game state, so that it is internally overlapped and operated.

On the other hand, in S563, when it is determined that it is not C5 time saving hit (when S563 is NO determination), that is, time saving hit that can be started by ending the current time saving game state and switching to a new time saving game state (In this embodiment, it corresponds to the C3 time saving hit), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S567.

In S564, the main CPU 201 performs overlapping working hours counter setting processing. In this overlapping time saving counter setting process, without initializing various flags, the overlapping flag and C5 time saving flag are set to "1", and the number of overlapping time saving times for the C5 time saving hit that will operate internally set. Concrete processing of this overlapping time saving counter setting processing (S564) will be described with reference to FIG. 328 described later. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S565 after performing the overlapping time saving counter setting process (S564).

In S565, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the simultaneous winning flag is off. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value at the same timing as the winning of the C5 short hour prize.

In S565, when it is determined that the simultaneous winning flag is OFF (when S565 determines YES), that is, when the value of the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value at the same timing as the winning of the short C5 o'clock winning, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S565 that the simultaneous winning flag is not off (NO determination in S565), that is, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value at the same timing as the winning of the short C5 o'clock winning, the main CPU 201 , the process moves to S566.

In S566, the main CPU 201 sets the simultaneous winning flag to OFF. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to the time saving mode resetting process (S567).

In S567, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode resetting processing. In this time-saving mode resetting process, for example, after initializing various flags except for the overlap flag and the C5 time-saving flag, the time-saving flag and the B time-saving flag are set to "1", and the number of time-saving times corresponding to the B time-saving game state is set to, for example, "300". In this way, the current time-saving game state is terminated, and, for example, control of a new B time-saving game state is started. After performing the time-saving mode resetting process (S567), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process, and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

Returning to S561, if it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S561), that is, if the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S568.

In S568, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. In this time saving mode setting process, as described above, after initializing various flags, the C time saving flag (C3 time saving flag, C4 time saving flag, C5 time saving flag) corresponding to the time saving flag and the selected symbol command is set to "1" Processing such as setting and setting the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the selected pattern command is performed. After performing the time saving mode setting process (S568), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S569.

In S569, the main CPU 201 performs a process of turning on the time saving flag, that is, setting the time saving flag to "1". After performing the process of S569, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S570.

In S570, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the simultaneous winning flag is ON. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value at the same timing as the winning of the C5 short hour prize.

In S570, when it is determined that the simultaneous winning flag is not ON (NO determination in S570), that is, when the simultaneous winning flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process, and shifts the process to a time saving transition process. (See FIG. 326).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S570 that the simultaneous hit flag is ON (when S570 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S571.

In S571, the main CPU 201 performs overlapping working hours counter setting processing. This overlapping time saving counter setting process (S571) is the same process as the overlapping time saving counter setting process of S564, and will be described with reference to FIG. 328 described later. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S572 after performing the overlapping time saving counter setting process (S571).

In S572, the main CPU 201 sets the simultaneous winning flag to OFF. After performing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 326).

In the present embodiment, if the C5 time reduction win is won at the same timing as the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the control of the B time reduction game state in a manner that the player can enjoy is started, and the C5 time reduction game state is started. are internally overlapped to operate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control of the B time saving game state in a mode that the player can enjoy may be started, and the C5 time saving may be internally superimposed and not operated. Also, the control of the C5 time-saving game state may be started in a manner that the player can enjoy, and the B time-saving game state may not be controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. In this case, the B time saving game state may be internally superimposed and operated in the C5 time saving game state, and after the C5 time saving game state ends, the control of the B time saving game state may be started in a manner that the player can enjoy. In the C5 time saving game state, the B time saving game state may not be internally overlapped and operated, and even if the C5 time saving game state ends, the control of the B time saving game state may not be started in a manner that the player can enjoy.

[8-2-2-6. Duplicate time saving counter setting process]
FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing an example of overlapping working hours counter setting processing by the main CPU 201 . Duplicate time saving counter setting process is a process called as a subroutine during the execution of the above time saving transition process (see Figure 326) or the above time saving setting process (see Figure 327) (S555 of Figure 326 and S564 of Figure 327 reference). In this process, if you win the time saving (per C5 time saving in this embodiment) that can be operated internally repeatedly, the time saving (in this example C5 time saving) that operates internally overlapped. number of times is set. In addition, in this overlapping time saving counter setting process, without initializing various flags, a process of setting the overlapping flag and the C5 time saving flag to "1" is also performed, but illustration of these processes is omitted.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not it is a C5 time saving win (S581).

In S581, when it is determined that it is not C5 time saving hit (when S581 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping time saving counter setting process, and performs the original process called as a subroutine (time saving transition process ( FIG. 326 reference) or it returns to a time saving setting process (refer FIG. 327).

In S582, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the C5 time saving counter is smaller than two. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of C5 time reductions that can be internally overlapped and actuated is up to two. However, the number of C5 time-savings that can be internally overlapped and activated is not limited to two.

In S582, if it is determined that the C5 short working hours counter is not less than 2 (NO determination in S582), that is, if the C5 short working hours counter is 2, the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping short working hours counter setting process, and the process is Return to the original process (see FIG. 326) or time saving setting process (see FIG. 327) called as a subroutine.

In S582, if it is determined that the C5 time saving counter is less than 2 (if S582 is YES determination), that is, if the number of C5 time saving that is internally overlapping and operating is less than the upper limit (for example, two), The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S583.

In S583, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the C5 time saving counter. After performing the process of S583, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S584.

In S584, the main CPU 201 sets the number of reduced working hours per C5 reduced working hours to the overlapping reduced working hours counter (C5 reduced working hours counter). That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol this time is the C5 time saving hit, for example, "50" is set as the time saving number corresponding to this C5 time saving hit (see FIGS. 315 to 319). After performing the process of S584, the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping time saving counter setting process, and the process is changed to the original process (time saving transition process (see FIG. 326) or time saving setting process (see FIG. 327) called as a subroutine. back to

[8-2-2-7. Duplicate time-saving counter shift processing]
FIG. 329 is a flow chart showing an example of overlapping time-saving counter shift processing by the main CPU 201 . Overlap time reduction counter shift processing is processing called as a subroutine during execution of the counter determination processing (see FIG. 325) described above. This process, among a plurality of C5 time saving that is internally overlapping and operating, for example, when the overlapping time saving counter of the first C5 time saving game state becomes 0, for example, the second C5 time saving game state It is a process of shifting the value of the overlapping time saving counter (that is, the number of overlapping time saving counters) to the storage area of the overlapping time saving counter of the first C5 time saving game state, for example. In this embodiment, the shift processing is performed using an array as a structure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each region may be set and the shift processing may be performed.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of substituting the C5 time saving counter for the variable X (S591). After performing the process of S581, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S592.

In S592, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable X is greater than zero. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not the C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating.

In S592, if it is determined that the variable X is not greater than 0 (NO determination in S592), that is, if the variable X is 0, the main CPU 201 ends the overlapping time reduction counter shift process, Return to the determination process (see FIG. 325). In addition, when the C5 time saving is not internally overlapped and operated, a NO determination is made in S592.

If it is determined in S592 that the variable X is greater than 0 (YES in S592), that is, if the variable X is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S593. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of C5 time saving that can be internally overlapped is two, so when the variable X is 1 or 2, S592 is determined as YES.

In S<b>593 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the overlapping working hours counter (X) is zero. That is, in this process, it is determined whether or not the number of times of overlapping time saving of the X-th C5 time saving operating internally is 0.

In S593, if it is determined that the overlapping time saving counter (X) is not 0 (NO determination in S593), that is, if it is determined that the number of overlapping time saving times of the C5 time saving that is operating internally is not 0, the main The CPU 201 shifts the process to S598.

On the other hand, in S593, if it is determined that the overlapping time-saving counter (X) is 0 (S593 determines YES), that is, it is determined that the number of overlapping time-savings of the C5 time-saving that is internally operating has become 0. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S594.

In S594, the main CPU 201 performs a process of substituting the value obtained by subtracting the variable X from the C5 time saving counter into the variable W. After performing the process of S594, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S595. As shown in FIG. 329, S596 to S612 are looped, and "0" is substituted for the variable W in the first and second loops.

In S595, the main CPU 201 performs processing for substituting the variable X for the variable Y. FIG. After performing the process of S595, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S596.

In S596, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable W is greater than zero.

If it is determined in S596 that the variable W is not greater than 0 (NO determination in S596), that is, if the variable W is 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S597.

In S597, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C5 time saving counter. After performing the process of S597, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S598.

In S598, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the current value of the variable X. After performing the process of S598, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S592, until the variable X is not greater than 0, that is, until the number of remaining time reductions for overlap has been confirmed (until a NO determination is made in S592), S592 The subsequent processing is repeated.

If a NO determination is made in S592, the main CPU 201 ends the overlap time reduction counter shift process as described above, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 325).

Returning to S596, if it is determined that the variable W is greater than 0 (YES in S596), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S599. If there are a plurality of C5 time-savings that are internally overlapping and operating, and the overlapping time-saving counter of the first C time-saving gaming state becomes 0, S596 is determined as YES.

In S599, the main CPU 201 performs a process of shifting the (Y+1)-th overlapping working hours counter to the current Y-th overlapping working hours counter set to 0. For example, among the multiple C5 time-savings that are operating internally, set the value of the second C5 time-saving duplication time-saving counter to the value of the first C5 time-saving duplication time-saving counter that is 0. shift. After performing the process of S599, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S600.

In S600, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the variable Y. FIG. After performing the process of S600, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S601.

In S601, the main CPU 201 sets 0 to an overlapping time saving counter (Y). That is, this process is a process of setting the overlapping short working hours counter of the last (for example, the second) C5 short working hours to 0 by shifting the value of the short overlapping working hours counter of the short C5 working hours. After performing the process of S601, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S602.

In S602, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the variable W. After performing the process of S602, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S596. Although only two C5 time savers can be activated internally in this example, even if this number is greater, the variable W is not greater than 0, i.e., 0. Until it is determined (until YES is determined in S596), by repeatedly performing the processing of S596 to S602, although it is not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, it is internally superimposed C5 time saving It is possible to shift the number of overlapping time reductions for all.

[8-2-2-8. Duplicate time saving setting processing]
FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing an example of overlapping working hours setting processing by the main CPU201. Overlapping time saving setting processing is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described counter determination processing (see FIG. 325). In this process, the time-saving gaming state that has been controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is terminated, and the time-saving (C5 time-saving in this embodiment) that is internally activated is executed in a manner that the player can enjoy. This is the processing performed when starting control.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of substituting 1 for the variable X (S611). After performing the process of S611, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S612.

In S612, the main CPU 201 substitutes the value of the duplication time saving counter (X) into the time saving counter. That is, in this process, the X-th (that is, the first) C5 time-saving overlapped time-saving number of times that has been internally operated is started to control in a manner in which the player can enjoy the remaining time-saving of the C5 time-saving gaming state. Processing to set the number of times is performed. After performing the process of S612, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S613.

In S613, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable X is smaller than the C5 time reduction counter.

In S613, if it is determined that the variable X is smaller than the C5 time saving counter (if S613 is YES determination), that is, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the C5 time saving that can be internally overlapped is two. Therefore, if the C5 time-saving counter is 2 (that is, if there are still C5 time-savings operating internally), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S614 in order to perform that amount of shift processing.

In S614, the main CPU 201 performs a process of substituting a value obtained by subtracting the variable X from the C5 time saving counter for the variable W. The value of this variable W determines the number of loops of S615 to S619. After performing the process of S614, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S615. In this embodiment, the upper limit of C5 time saving that can be internally overlapped is two, so the number of loops of S615 to S619 is one at most.

In S615, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable W is greater than zero.

If it is determined in S615 that the variable W is greater than 0 (YES in S615), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S616.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S615 that the variable W is not greater than 0 (NO in S615), that is, if the variable W is 0, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S621.

In S616, the main CPU 201 performs a process of shifting the overlapping working hours counter (X+1) to the overlapping working hours counter (X). In this process, among a plurality of C5 time-savings that are internally overlapping, for example, the value of the second C5 time-saving overlapping time-saving counter is shifted to the value of the first C5 time-saving overlapping time-saving counter, for example. do. After performing the process of S616, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S617.

In S617, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the variable X. After performing the process of S617, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S618.

In S618, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting 0 to the overlap time reduction counter (X). That is, this process is a process of setting the last (for example, the second) C5 time saving overlapping time saving counter to 0 by shifting the value of the overlapping time saving counter in the C5 time saving game state. After performing the process of S618, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S619.

In S619, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the variable W. After performing the process of S619, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S615. Although only two C5 time-savings can be activated internally in this example, even if this number is greater, the variable W is not greater than 0, i.e., 0. Until it is determined (until YES is determined in S615), by repeatedly performing the processing of S615 to S619, although it is not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, it is internally superimposed C5 time saving It is possible to shift the number of overlapping time reductions for all.

Returning to S613, if it is determined that the variable X is not less than the C5 short time counter (NO determination in S613), that is, if the variable X and the C5 short time counter are the same value (in this embodiment, the internal If the C5 short time counter is 1, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S620.

In S620, the main CPU 201 sets 0 to the overlap time reduction counter (X). That is, this process is a process of setting to 0 the overlapped time saving counter of the C5 time saving that can be internally overlapped and operated by the C5 time saving that is internally overlapping and operating has disappeared. After performing the process of S620, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S621.

In S621, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C5 short time counter. After performing the process of S621, the main CPU 201 terminates the overlapping time reduction setting process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 325).

The processing executed by the main CPU 201 when the time saving (C5 time saving in the present embodiment) capable of operating internally has been described above with reference to FIGS. 323 to 330 . By performing various processes by the main CPU 201 described above, it is possible to install a time-saving (C5 time-saving in this embodiment) that can be operated internally, and it is possible to expand the range of game characteristics. . That is, the time-saving counter (that is, the number of remaining time-savings in the time-saving gaming state under control), the overlapping time-saving counter (that is, the number of overlapping time-savings that are not controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy but are internally overlapping) To provide a pachinko game machine capable of suitably managing the number of C5 time-savings which are not controlled but which are internally operated in a manner that a player can enjoy, and which enhances interest. It becomes possible.

[8-2-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 331 is an example of a time chart showing a game flow.

In addition, in FIG. 331, the game state that can be enjoyed is the current game state that is controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. The "jackpot" shown in the column of the game state that can be enjoyed is the jackpot game state, "A short time" is the A short game state, "B short time" is the B short game state, "C3 short time" is the C3 short game state, and "C4". "Time reduction" means C4 time reduction game state, "C5 time reduction" means C5 time reduction game state, and "Normal" means normal game state.

Also, in FIG. 331, "C3 win" and "C5 win" indicate that the C4 short time win and the C5 short time win are won, respectively. In addition, "C3 end" and "A end" respectively indicate the end of the C3 time saving game state and the end of the A time saving game state. In addition, "C5 start" is the C5 time reduction that has not been controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy although it is internally operated repeatedly. It indicates that

In addition, in FIG. 331, the display effect is a display effect displayed on the display device 7 configured by, for example, a liquid crystal display. Each stage effect shown in the display effect column indicates an external state displayed as a background image, for example, in the same manner as in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG.

In addition, the "remaining number of times" shown in FIG. 331 is the number of remaining time reductions, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 1 is subtracted and displayed.

Moreover, in FIG. 331, the internal state shows the states of the time saving flag and various time saving flags controlled by the main CPU 201, for example, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG.

Also, in FIG. 331, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state or the time reduction game state is C5 time reduction will be described, but the high certainty game state (for example, the high certainty time reduction game state , In a pachinko game machine equipped with a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the case in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a C5 time-saving hit is not described. This is because, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, if the result of the special symbol win determination process in the high probability game state is a C5 time short win, the main CPU 201 ignores this and the C5 time short game state is executed. This is because the

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, if the C5 time saving win is won in the time saving game state, for example, up to two C5 time saving can be internally overlapped and operated, so for convenience of explanation, in FIG. , "C5-1 time-saving flag" and "C5-2 time-saving flag". In addition, as described above, it is not necessary to manage using a plurality of flags corresponding to each of the plurality of C5 time-saving gaming states. However, if both "C5-1 time saving flag" and "C5-2 time saving flag" are set to "1" and both are internally overlapping and operating, the above duplicate time saving counter shift As described in the processing (see FIG. 329), the main CPU 201 can manage which C5 time-saving game state corresponding to which C5 time-saving flag should be started first in a manner in which the player can enjoy.

[8-2-3-1. (a) If winning at C3 time short in normal game state]
First, in the normal game state, for example, when the C3 time short hit is won (that is, when the display mode indicating the C3 time short hit (selected symbol command “z20” or “z27”) is derived in the special symbol display units 163 and 164 ( An example of the internal state, display effect, and enjoyable game state of FIG. 331 (a))) will be described.

The main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1", and these flags are turned ON from OFF. As a result, internally, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are established. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, “50” as the number of times of reduced working hours, and starts managing the number of remaining reduced working hours in the C3 reduced working hours gaming state.

The sub CPU 301 wins the C3 short time hit (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the time short hit and the selected symbol command is "z20" or "z27") or wins the C3 time short hit. In the display area of the display device 7, a C3 time-saving transition suggestive effect indicating that there is a possibility of having been made is performed. This C3 time reduction shift suggestion effect is, for example, between the start of the variable display of the special symbol that may lead to the display mode indicating the C3 time reduction hit and the display mode indicating the C3 time reduction hit being derived. do it.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, a background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the normal stage to the C3 stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays, for example, “50” in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 as the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the normal game state to the C3 time-saving game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C3 time reduction hit confirmation effect performed, and the effect background image shifts from the normal stage to the C3 stage, for example, the sound effect also shifts from the normal game state to the C3 time reduction game state. I can understand. Also, from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it can be understood that the normal game state is the C3 short game state, the C4 short game state, or the C5 short game state (FIG. 321 and FIG. 322). In addition, by making the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory different between the C3 time reduction game state, the C4 time reduction game state, and the C5 time reduction game state, it is possible to grasp the C3 time reduction game state from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146. You may do so.

In the normal game state, when the C4 short win or the C5 short win is won or when the game reaches the ceiling, the same processing as when the C3 short win is won in the normal game state may be performed.

[8-2-3-2. (b) If you win the C3 time reduction in the C3 time reduction game state]
Next, in the C3 time-saving gaming state, for example, when the C3 time-saving winning is won (that is, the special symbol display units 163 and 164 show the C3 time-saving winning (selected symbol command "z20" or "z27") are derived. An example of the internal state, display effect, and external state of the case (see (b) of FIG. 331) will be described.

After initializing various flags, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1". As a result, internally, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are established. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, “50” as the number of times of reduced working hours, and starts managing the number of remaining reduced working hours in the C3 reduced working hours gaming state. That is, for example, even if the remaining number of time reductions is less than 50 times due to the expiration of the number of time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state under control, the number of time reductions is reset to "50".

The sub CPU 301 performs the C3 time reduction suggesting effect in the display area of the display device 7 . In addition, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect indicating that the number of remaining time reductions increases instead of or in addition to the C3 time saving transition suggesting effect.

Also, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 at the C3 stage.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is maintained in the C3 time-saving game state.

Moreover, in terms of appearance, for example, not only the background image is maintained at the C3 stage, but also, for example, it can be grasped from the voice effect that the C3 time-saving gaming state is maintained. Also, from the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), it can be understood that there is a possibility that the C3 time-saving game state is maintained (see FIGS. 321 and 322).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when installing the C1 time reduction game state and the C2 time reduction game state described in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, when winning the C1 time reduction game state in the C1 time reduction game state Also when the C2 short win is won in the C2 short time game state, the same processing as when the C3 short win is won in the C3 short time game state may be performed.

[8-2-3-3. (c) If you win the C5 time reduction in the C3 time reduction game state]
Next, when the C5 short time winning is won in the C3 time short gaming state (that is, when the display mode indicating the C5 short time hitting (selected pattern command "z22" or "z29") is derived in the special symbol display units 163 and 164) (See FIG. 331(c))), an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

The main CPU 201 sets the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag to "1" without initializing the various flags. Thereby, internally, it will be in the state where the time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag, the duplication flag, and the C5 time saving flag are materialized. In FIG. 331, for convenience of explanation, the C5-1 time saving flag is established among the C5-1 time saving flag and the C5-2 time saving flag which are the C5 time saving flags.

In addition, the main CPU 201, while continuing to manage the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state, sets, for example, “50” as the number of overlapping time reductions of the C5 time reductions that are internally operated, and sets the number of overlapping time reductions of the C5 time reductions. Start managing. Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, both the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state and the overlapping time reduction number of C5 time reductions are subtracted by 1.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201, regarding the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the release pattern corresponding to the C3 time-saving gaming state pattern).

The sub CPU 301 wins the C5 short time hit (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the time short hit and the selected symbol command is "z22" or "z29") or wins the C5 time short hit It is possible to perform a C5 time saving shift suggestive effect in the display area of the display device 7 indicating that there is a possibility that the time has been changed.

Whether or not to perform the above-mentioned C5 time-saving transition suggestive effect is determined based on, for example, a random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140. You may That is, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, the main CPU 201 extracts various random numbers including random numbers for effect selection as described in the first pachinko game machine. Then, when the extracted random number for selecting the effect is a specific random value, the main CPU 201 transmits a command to instruct the execution of the C5 time saving transition suggestion effect to the sub CPU 301, and the sub CPU 301 receives the C5 time saving transition suggestion. A performance may be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine whether or not to perform the C5 time reduction suggestive effect using a predetermined random number for effect.

In addition, the C5 time-saving transition suggestion effect is won, for example, for the C5 time-saving hit (that is, the display mode indicating the C5 time-saving hit (selected symbol command “z22” or “z29”) in the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is derived. ) and a predetermined condition is satisfied. "When a predetermined condition is satisfied" is, for example, the number of overlapping time reductions set based on the C5 time reduction hit is greater than the remaining time reduction number of times in the C3 time reduction gaming state. be. That is, if there is a possibility that the C5 time reduction that is internally operating in a overlapping manner will be controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy after the end of the C3 time reduction game state, the C5 time reduction transition suggestive effect is performed, and the player If there is no possibility of being controlled in a manner that can be enjoyed by C5, it is preferable not to perform the C5 time reduction suggesting effect. However, even if the number of overlapping time reductions set based on the C5 time reduction hit is larger than the remaining time reduction number of times in the C3 time reduction game state, it is always controlled to the C5 time reduction game state in a manner that the player can enjoy. is not limited. For example, if the conditions for ending the C5 time saving operation other than the overlapping time saving number of times are satisfied, such as when it is controlled to the jackpot game state before the end of the C3 time saving game state, than the remaining time saving number of times in the C3 time saving game state Even if the number of overlapping time saving times set based on the C5 time saving hit is larger, it is not controlled to the C5 time saving game state in a manner that the player can enjoy.

When performing the C5 time reduction suggestive performance, the C5 time reduction suggestive performance is not limited to being performed when the display mode indicating the C5 time reduction hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163, 164, and the player can enjoy it. It may be until the control of the C5 time saving game state in the mode is started.

It should be noted that even if the C5 time saving hit is won in the C3 time saving game state, if the C5 time saving transition suggestion effect is not performed, the sub CPU 301 changes the variable display effect of the decorative pattern and the character effect performed in the display area of the display device 7, It is preferable to perform the same effect as when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbols is a loss. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to perceive that the C5 time-saving hit has been won, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest unnecessarily.

It should be noted that the ``same effect as when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a loss'' means that the player can recognize that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a loss. The effect is not limited to the effect common to the effect performed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss.

Further, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 at the C3 stage, and does not display the C5 stage indicating that the game is controlled to the C5 time-saving gaming state. Further, the sub CPU 301 performs sound effects according to the C3 time saving game state, and does not perform sound effects according to the C5 time saving game state.

By doing so, even if the C5 time saving flag (C5-1 time saving flag shown in FIG. 331) is set to "1" internally, the game state that the player can enjoy is the C3 time saving game state. , and from the display effect, sound effect, and opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) displayed in the display area of the display device 7, the C5 time-saving game state is internally overlapping and operating. cannot or is difficult to ascertain.

By the way, in a time-saving game state other than the C5 time-saving game state that the player can enjoy, the C5 time-saving game is internally activated, and when the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy ends, When the overlapping number of times of shortening of working hours of C5 operating repeatedly remains, the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 perform the following control.

That is, when the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy ends, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags including the duplication flag, sets the time-saving flag and the C5-1 time-saving flag to "1", and sets the normal electric role. The object 146 (see FIG. 4) is operated with an opening pattern (opening pattern corresponding to the C5 time-saving game state) corresponding to the selected symbol command "fz2" at the time of winning the normal symbol shown in FIG. 322, for example. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessary 146 corresponding to the C5 time reduction game state is the same as the opening pattern in the B time reduction game state, the C3 time reduction game state and the C4 time reduction game state. However, by making it different from these open patterns, it may be easy or possible to grasp that the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is controlled to the C5 time-saving game state.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays, in the display area of the display device 7, a C5 short working hour start effect indicating that the C5 short working hour gaming state is started as a gaming state that the player can enjoy, and updates the number of remaining short working hours. In the update of the remaining time reduction frequency, the remaining time reduction frequency of the C5 time reduction game state is displayed.

In addition, the update of the remaining time reduction number of times is not limited to being performed when the time reduction game state under control (C3 time reduction game state in FIG. 331) ends, for example, the remaining time reduction number of time reduction game state under control remains In such a state, an additional effect may be performed such that the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 at the time when the time saving game state that the player can enjoy is completed is added to the number of times of remaining time saving.

In addition, in a time-saving game state other than the C5 time-saving game state (for example, C3 time-saving game state), the C5 time-saving game state is internally overlapped and operated, and the player can enjoy it. If the number of overlapping time reductions of C5 time reduction becomes 0 before the remaining time reduction number of times of the time reduction game state controlled by becomes 0, the main CPU 201 detects that another C5 time reduction game state overlaps internally. If not, clear the duplicate flag and the C5 time saving flag. Therefore, unless another C5 time-saving game state is internally overlapped and operated in the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy, when the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy ends, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags and normal Control to game state. Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts from the type of stage corresponding to the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy to the normal stage.

Also, if the game state that the player can enjoy is the other time-saving game state (that is, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state, C5 time-saving game state), even if C5 is won, C3 It is preferable to perform the same processing as when winning the C5 time saving win in the time saving game state. Furthermore, when the C1 time reduction game state and the C2 time reduction game state described in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment are installed, even if the C5 time reduction hit is won in the C1 time reduction game state or the C2 time reduction game state, It is preferable to perform the same processing as in the case of winning the C5 time saving game in the C3 time saving game state.

[8-2-3-4. (d) In the case where C5 time reduction is elected in a state where C5 time reduction is internally activated in the C3 time reduction game state]
Next, in the C3 time reduction game state, when the C5 time reduction is activated internally and the C5 time reduction is elected (that is, the C5 time reduction hit on the special symbol display units 163 and 164 (selected symbol command "z22 ” or “z29”) is derived (see (d) of FIG. 331)), an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

The main CPU 201 sets the C5 time saving flag to "1" without initializing various flags. In Figure 331, for convenience of explanation, the C5-1 time saving flag out of the C5-1 time saving flag and the C5-2 time saving flag which is the C5 time saving flag is already set to "1", so the C5-2 time saving flag It is set to "1". As a result, internally, the time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag, the duplication flag, the C5-1 time saving flag and the C5-2 time saving flag are established. In this case, since the C5-1 time-saving flag is set to “1” earlier than the C5-2 time-saving flag, the main CPU 201 is C5 time-saving corresponding to the C5-2 time-saving flag (hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, “th 2 C5 time saving”), rather than the C5 time saving corresponding to the C5-1 time saving flag (hereinafter referred to as “first C5 time saving” for convenience of explanation), control in a manner that the player can enjoy Manage as C5 time saving to start.

In addition, the main CPU 201 continues to manage the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state and the number of overlapping time reductions of the first C5 time reductions that the player can enjoy, and the second C5 time reductions overlap time reduction number of times, for example, "50". , and start managing the number of times of overlapping time saving of the second C5 time saving. Thereby, when the variable display of the special pattern is executed, the remaining time reduction number of times in the C3 time reduction game state, the overlapping time reduction number of the first C5 time reduction and the overlapping time reduction number of the second C5 time reduction are all subtracted by 1. becomes.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201, regarding the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the release pattern corresponding to the C3 time-saving gaming state pattern).

The sub CPU 301 may perform the C5 short working hour transition suggestive effect in the display area of the display device 7, but in the present embodiment, the C5 short working hour winning is won in the same way as when the C5 short working hour winning is won in the C3 short working hour gaming state. The variable display performance of decorative patterns and the character performance performed in the display area of the display device 7 are not performed, and the special symbol hit determination processing is performed without performing the C5 time-saving transition suggestive performance capable of suggesting that there is a possibility of winning or winning. The same effect as when the result of is a loss is performed.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 maintains, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 at the C3 stage in the same manner as when winning the C5 time saving game in the C3 time saving game state, and is controlled to the C5 time saving game state. Do not display the C5 stage indicating that Further, the sub CPU 301 performs sound effects according to the C3 time saving game state, and does not perform sound effects according to the C5 time saving game state.

By doing so, even if the C5 time saving flag (both C5-1 time saving flag and C5-2 time saving flag shown in FIG. 331) is set to "1" internally, the player enjoys The available game state is the C3 time-saving game state, and from the display effect, sound effect, and opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) displayed in the display area of the display device 7, the C5 time-saving game state is internal. It is impossible or difficult to grasp that the operation overlaps with the

By the way, in a time-saving game state other than the C5 time-saving game state, the game state that the player can enjoy is that both the first C5 time-saving and the second C5 time-saving are internally overlapping and operating, and the player can enjoy When the possible time saving gaming state ends, if both the first C5 time saving overlapping time saving number and the second C5 time saving overlapping time saving number of times remain, the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 perform the following control. .

That is, when the time-saving gaming state that the player can enjoy ends, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags except for the duplication flag and the C5-2 time-saving flag, and then sets the time-saving flag and the C5-1 time-saving flag to "1". Set and operate the normal electric accessary 146 (see FIG. 4) with an open pattern (open pattern corresponding to C5 short game state) corresponding to the selected symbol command "fz2" at the time of normal symbol winning shown in FIG. 322, for example. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 146 corresponding to the C5 time saving game state is the same as the opening pattern in the B time saving game state, the C3 time saving game state and the C4 time saving game state (Fig. 322), by making it different from these open patterns, it may be easy or possible to grasp that it is controlled to the C5 time-saving game state from the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays a C5 time saving start effect indicating that the C5 time saving game state is started in the display area of the display device 7, and updates the number of remaining time saving times. In the update of the remaining time reduction frequency, the remaining time reduction frequency of the C5 time reduction game state is displayed.

In addition, the update of the remaining time reduction number of times is not limited to being performed when the time reduction game state under control (C3 time reduction game state in FIG. 331) ends, for example, the remaining time reduction number of time reduction game state under control remains In this state, the number of times of remaining time reduction is the first C5 time reduction overlapping time reduction number at the time when the time reduction game state under control ends (that is, the first C5 time reduction overlap time reduction number and the time reduction game under control You may make it perform the addition production|presentation which adds the difference with the number of remaining short time of a state).

In addition, in a time-saving game state other than the first C5 time-saving game state, the game state that the player can enjoy is internally overlapped with the second C5 time-saving game state, and the number of overlapping time-saving times of the first C5 time-saving game is Before it becomes 0, when the second C5 time saving overlapping time saving number becomes 0, the main CPU 201 clears the C5-2 time saving flag. Therefore, unless the second C5 time saving game state is internally overlapped and operated in the first C5 time saving game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, when the first C5 time saving game state ends, the main The CPU 201 initializes various flags and controls the normal game state. Further, the sub CPU 301 shifts from the type of stage presentation corresponding to the time-saving gaming state being controlled to the normal stage.

In addition, the game state that the player can enjoy is the other time-saving game state (that is, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C4 time-saving game state). Even when winning the time saving prize, the same processing as when winning the C5 time saving prize is performed in a state where the game state that the player can enjoy is the C3 time saving game state and the C5 time saving game is internally activated. It is good to be able to In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of C5 time reduction that can be internally overlapped is up to two, but if more C5 time reduction is internally overlapped and operated, the game state that the player can enjoy is the C5 time saving game state, and even if the C5 time saving win is won in a state in which the C5 time saving is internally activated, the game state that the player can enjoy is the C3 time saving game state, It is preferable to perform the same processing as in the case where the C5 short time win is won while the C5 short time is internally activated. In addition, when the C1 time reduction game state and the C2 time reduction game state described in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment are installed, the C5 time reduction is internally superimposed and operated in the C1 time reduction game state and the C2 time reduction game state. Even if C5 short win is won in the state where C5 short time is won, the same processing as when C5 short win is won in the state where C5 short time is internally activated in the C3 short game state is performed. do it.

[8-2-3-5. (E) When the first C5 time saving ends in a state where the first C5 time saving and the second C5 time saving are internally overlapping and operating in the C3 time saving game state]
Next, when the first C5 time saving ends in a state in which the first C5 time saving and the second C5 time saving are internally overlapping and operating in the C3 time saving gaming state (see (e) of FIG. 331) An example of an internal state, a display effect, and a game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

The main CPU 201 clears the C5-1 time saving flag without initializing various flags. As a result, internally, the time saving flag, the C3 time saving flag, the duplication flag and the C5-2 time saving flag are established. In addition, the main CPU 201 continues to manage the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state and the number of overlapped time reductions of the second C5 time reduction. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state and the number of overlapped time reductions of the second C5 time reduction.

In addition, the main CPU 201, for the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the release pattern corresponding to the C3 time-saving gaming state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the selected symbol command "fz2" at the normal symbol hit shown in FIG. 322) pattern).

The sub CPU 301 may perform an effect in the display area of the display device 7 indicating that the first C5 time saving that has been internally operated has ended, but in the present embodiment, such an effect is not performed. , the variable display performance and character performance of the decorative symbols are performed in the same manner as when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbols is a loss.

Further, the sub CPU 301 continues the C3 stage for, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and continues the sound effect corresponding to the C3 time-saving game state for the sound effect.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 continues to display the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction gaming state that the player can enjoy as the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area of the display device 7 .

By doing so, it is only controlled to the C3 time saving game state as a mode that the player can enjoy, and the first C5 time saving that has been internally operated has ended, and the internal operation It is not possible or difficult to grasp that the second C5 time saving that has been used continues to operate.

In addition, in other time-saving gaming states (for example, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, C4 time-saving gaming state), the first C5 time-saving and the second C5 time-saving are internally overlapping and operating. Even when the 1 C5 time saving ends, the same as when the first C5 time saving ends in a state where the first C5 time saving and the second C5 time saving are internally overlapping and operating in the C3 time saving game state. It is recommended that the processing of In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of C5 time reduction that can be internally overlapped is up to two, but if more C5 time reduction is internally overlapped and operated, the first in the C5 time reduction game state Even if the first C5 time saving ends in a state in which a plurality of C5 time saving including the C5 time saving and the second C5 time saving are internally overlapping and operating, in the C3 time saving game state, the first C5 time saving and It is preferable to perform the same processing as when the first C5 time saving ends while the second C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating. In addition, when installing the C1 time reduction game state and the C2 time reduction game state described in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the first C5 time reduction game state and the second in the C1 time reduction game state and the C2 time reduction game state Even if the first C5 time saving ends while the C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating, the first C5 time saving and the second C5 time saving are internally overlapped and operated in the C3 time saving game state. It is preferable to perform the same processing as when the first C5 time saving is completed in the state of being.

[8-2-3-6. (F) When the C3 time-saving game state ends while the C5 time-saving game is internally overlapping and operating in the C3 time-saving game state]
Next, in the C3 time saving game state, when the C3 time saving game state ends in a state where the C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating (see (f) in FIG. 331), the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed An example of is explained.

As shown in FIG. 331, the main CPU201 initializes various flags, sets the time saving flag and the C5-2 time saving flag to "1", and sets the overlapping time saving number of C5-2 time saving to the remaining time saving number of times. set. As a result, internally, the time saving flag and the C5-2 time saving flag are established, and the game state that the player can enjoy is the C5 time saving game state.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) to the release pattern corresponding to the C5 time-saving gaming state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the selected symbol command "fz2" at the normal symbol hit shown in FIG. 322). ). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322, since the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 corresponding to the C3 time reduction game state and the opening pattern in the C5 time reduction game state are the same, it is assumed that the C3 time reduction game state has ended. Although the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 does not change, by making it different from these opening patterns, it is understood from the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 that the C3 time reduction game state has changed to the C5 time reduction game state. may be made easier or possible.

The sub CPU 301 changes the display of the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the display of the number of remaining time reductions corresponding to the C3 time reduction gaming state to the second C5 time reduction that has been operated internally. (ie, the number of remaining time reductions in the C5 time reduction game state in which the control in the mode that the player can enjoy is started) is updated.

By the way, for example, in the C3 time saving game state, when the C3 time saving game state ends in a state where the second C5 time saving game state is internally overlapping and operating, the second C5 time saving game state is internally overlapping and operating. , it is impossible or difficult for the player to grasp the number of overlapping time-savings of the second C5 time-savings. Therefore, for example, when the C3 time saving game state ends, the sub CPU 301 preferably performs a remaining time saving expectation effect that allows the player to expect the number of remaining time saving times.

The short remaining time expected effect corresponds to, for example, an effect that counts up the number of times the remaining time is shortened displayed in the display area of the display device 7, or an effect that the number of times the remaining time is shortened is displayed by the player performing a predetermined operation. .

In addition, when the C3 time saving game state ends in a state where the C5 time saving game state is internally overlapped in the C3 time saving game state, the sub CPU 301 displays in the display area of the display device 7 that the C3 time saving game state ends. is displayed, and a C5 time saving start effect indicating that the control of the C5 time saving game state in a mode that the player can enjoy is started is displayed.

In addition, instead of performing the C3 time reduction end effect and the C5 time reduction start effect, the sub CPU 301, for example, C5 time reduction transition suggesting effect that suggests that the C5 time reduction hit has been won or may have been won. It is also possible to perform an effect suggesting that the player has won or that there is a possibility of winning, or an effect that suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state. That is, the C5 time reduction hit is the timing at which the C3 time reduction game state ends in a state where the C5 time reduction game state is internally overlapped in the C3 time reduction game state (that is, the variable display of the last special symbol in the C3 time reduction game state Although the winning is actually made before the above timing instead of the timing at which it is performed), the performance is performed as if the player wins a result advantageous to the player such as C5 short winning at the above timing. You may do so. In this case, at the timing (for example, the timing of (c) or (e) in FIG. 331) when winning the C5 time reduction hit, the C5 time reduction game state is internally operated so as not to perform the C5 time reduction transition suggestion effect. It is preferable to make it difficult for the player to perceive that the

In addition, the sub CPU 301 changes, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C3 stage to the C5 stage, and also changes the sound effect from the sound effect corresponding to the C3 time saving game state to the C5 time saving game state. change to a new voice effect.

By doing so, the C3 time saving game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy is ended, and the second C5 time saving that has been operating internally is started. Then, the sub CPU 301 makes it possible to excite the interest by performing an effect as if the winning of the C5 time saving game is won at the timing when the second C5 time saving game state is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the C5 time reduction that is internally overlapping and operating in the C3 time reduction game state is the second C5 time reduction, but instead of the second C5 time reduction, the first C5 time reduction It is the same.

In addition, in the other time-saving game state (for example, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state, C5 time-saving game state) C5 time-saving is internally overlapping and operating in other time-saving game state Even when is finished, the same processing as when the C3 time saving game state ends in a state in which the C5 time saving game state is internally overlapped in the C3 time saving game state may be performed.

Furthermore, when the C1 time reduction game state and C2 time reduction game state described in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment are installed, C5 time reduction is internally superimposed and operated in the C1 time reduction game state and C2 time reduction game state. Even if the C1 time saving game state or the C2 time saving game state ends in the state where the C3 time saving game state ends, the same processing as when the C3 time saving game state ends in the state where the C5 time saving game state is internally superimposed on the C3 time saving game state. should be done.

[8-2-3-7. (g) If you win the C5 time reduction in the C5 time reduction game state]
Next, when the C5 short time winning is won in the C5 time short gaming state (that is, when the display mode indicating the C5 short time hitting (selected pattern command "z22" or "z29") is derived in the special symbol display parts 163, 164) (See (g) in FIG. 331)), an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be described. In the following, as shown in FIG. 331, an example in which the C5 time saving game state is won in the second C5 time saving game state will be described.

The main CPU 201 sets the duplication flag and the C5-1 time saving flag to "1" without initializing the various flags. As a result, internally, the time saving flag, the C5-2 time saving flag, the duplication flag and the C5-1 time saving flag are established.

In addition, the main CPU 201 continues to manage the number of remaining time reductions in the second C5 time reduction gaming state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, while the first C5 time reduction operation is started internally. For example, "50" is set as the overlapping time saving number of times, and management of the overlapping time saving number of times of the first C5 time saving is started. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the number of remaining time reductions in the first C5 time reduction game state and the number of overlapped time reductions of the second C5 time reduction are both subtracted by 1.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201, regarding the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), the release pattern corresponding to the C5 time-saving gaming state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the selected symbol command "fz2" at the normal symbol hit shown in FIG. 322) pattern).

The sub CPU 301 may perform the C5 time saving transition suggestion effect in the display area of the display device 7, but in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that the C5 time saving has been won or may have been won. The variable display performance and character performance of the decorative patterns performed in the display area of the display device 7 are performed in the same manner as when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbols is a loss without performing the transition suggestive performance. there is

In addition, when the sub CPU 301 wins the C5 time saving game state in the C5 time saving game state, the overlapping time saving number set based on the C5 time saving game is larger than the remaining time saving number of times in the C5 time saving game state. A transition suggestive performance may be performed, and if the number of duplicate time reductions set based on the C5 time reduction hit is smaller, the C5 time reduction transition suggestion performance may not be performed.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7, the C5 stage indicating that it is controlled to the C5 time saving game state, and the sound production according to the C5 time saving game state. Perform voice acting.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 continues to display the number of remaining time reductions in the second C5 time reduction game state being controlled as the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area of the display device 7 . However, if the number of overlapping time reductions of the first C5 time reduction is greater than the number of times of the remaining time reduction in the second C5 time reduction gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the first C5 at the time when the second C5 time reduction gaming state ends. An effect (for example, an additional effect) may be performed to add and display the number of times of overlapping time saving of time saving (that is, the difference between the number of times of remaining time saving in the second C5 time saving game state and the number of times of overlapping time saving of the first C5 time saving game state). .

[8-2-3-8. (h) When winning C3 time reduction in C5 time reduction game state]
Next, when the C3 time reduction hit is won in the C5 time reduction game state (that is, when the display mode indicating the C3 time reduction hit (selected pattern command "z20" or "z27") is derived in the special symbol display units 163 and 164 (Refer to (h) in FIG. 331)), an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed will be described.

After initializing various flags, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag to "1", and sets the number of times of time saving to, for example, "50". As a result, internally, the time saving flag and the C3 time saving flag are established.

The sub CPU 301 performs the C3 time reduction suggesting effect in the display area of the display device 7 . This C3 time reduction shift suggestion effect is, for example, between the start of the variable display of the special symbol that may lead to the display mode indicating the C3 time reduction hit and the display mode indicating the C3 time reduction hit being derived. do it.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C5 stage to the C3 stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 displays a C3 time saving start effect indicating that the C3 time saving game state is started in a predetermined display area of the display device 7, and updates the number of remaining time saving times. In updating the number of remaining time reductions, for example, "30", which is the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state, is displayed.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C5 time reduction game state to the C3 time reduction game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only is the C3 time reduction winning effect performed, and the effect background image shifts from the C5 stage to the C3 stage, for example, the voice effect also shifts from the C5 time reduction game state to the C3 time reduction game state. can understand what you have done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the same in the C3 time saving game state and the C5 time saving game state (see FIGS. 321 and 322), but the C3 time saving game state and The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is different from the C5 time saving game state, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed from the C5 time saving game state to the C3 time saving game state. It may be arranged such that it is possible to grasp that the migration has occurred.

Also, in other time-saving game states (that is, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state), if you win the C3 time-saving game state, or if you reach the ceiling in the C5 time-saving game state Also, it is preferable to perform the same processing as in the case of winning the C3 time saving game in the C5 time saving game state.

[8-2-3-9. (i) When reaching the ceiling in a state where C5 time reduction is internally overlapping and operating in the C3 time reduction game state]
Next, about an example of the internal state, the display effect, and the game state that can be enjoyed when reaching the ceiling in the state where the C5 time reduction is internally overlapping and operating in the C3 time reduction game state (see (i) in FIG. 331))) explain. In addition, in FIG. 331, after winning the C3 time reduction in the C5 time reduction game state (see (h) in the same figure), the C5 time reduction hit is won, but the process in this case is C5 in the C3 time reduction game state Since it is the same as the case where the time saving is elected in the state where the time saving is internally overlapping and the C5 time saving is won (see (d) in FIG. 331), the explanation is omitted.

The main CPU 201 initializes various flags except for the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag, sets the time saving flag and the B time saving flag to “1”, and sets the time saving number corresponding to the B time saving game state (for example, 300 times). to set. That is, the time-saving game state that the player can enjoy becomes the B time-saving game state, the C5 time-saving operation that is internally activated continues, and the number of C5 time-saving overlaps is also continuously managed. In this case, internally, the time saving flag, the B time saving flag, the duplication flag and the C5 time saving flag are established.

In addition, the main CPU 201 ends management of the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state, sets the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state to, for example, “50”, and sets the number of remaining time reductions in the B time reduction game state. Start managing. In addition, the main CPU 201 continues to manage the number of overlapped time reductions of the C5 time reductions that are internally operated. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the number of remaining time reductions in the B time reduction game state and the overlapping time reduction number of C5 time reductions operating internally are subtracted by 1.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) to the release pattern corresponding to the B time-saving gaming state (that is, the release pattern corresponding to the selected symbol command "fz2" at the normal symbol hit shown in FIG. 322). pattern).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is the same in the C3 time saving game state and the B time saving game state (see FIGS. 321 and 322), but the C3 time saving game state and The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is different from the B time saving game state, and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is changed from the C3 time saving game state to the B time saving game state. It may be arranged such that it is possible to grasp that the migration has occurred.

The sub CPU 301 performs a ceiling reaching effect in the display area of the display device 7 indicating that the ceiling has been reached. This ceiling reaching effect, for example, when the variable display of the special pattern when reaching the ceiling is started or stopped, not only during the time from when the variable display of the special pattern when reaching the ceiling is started until it is stopped , It may be performed at any timing, including the time until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state, such as an omen effect indicating that the ceiling is approaching, before the ceiling is reached.

Also, the sub CPU 301 shifts, for example, the background image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 from the C3 stage to the B stage.

In addition, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of remaining time reductions displayed in a predetermined display area of the display device 7 . In this case, the sub CPU 301 may perform an additional effect indicating that the remaining time reduction count increases.

The game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy shifts from the C3 time saving game state to the B time saving game state.

In addition, in terms of appearance, not only the ceiling reaching effect is performed and the background image moves from the C3 stage to the B stage, but also, for example, the voice effect indicates that the C3 time saving game state has changed to the B time saving game state. I can grasp it.

In addition, when reaching the ceiling with C5 time reduction internally activated in the C4 time reduction game state, or when reaching the ceiling with C5 time reduction internally activated in the C5 time reduction game state Also, in the C3 time saving game state, it is preferable to perform the same processing as when reaching the ceiling in a state where the C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating.

[8-2-3-10. (J) When a big hit is won in a state where C5 time saving is internally activated in B time saving game state]
Next, in the B time-saving game state, C5 time-saving is activated internally, and a big hit (selected symbol command "z23" to "z25" and "z30" to "z32") is indicated. An example of the internal state, display effect, and external state when the display mode is derived (see (j) in FIG. 331) will be described. In addition, in FIG. 331, after reaching the ceiling (see (i) in the same figure) in a state where C5 time saving is internally activated in the C3 time saving game state, C5 time saving is elected, but this The processing in case is similar to the case where the C5 time saving is elected in the state where the C5 time saving is internally activated in the C3 time saving game state (see (d) of FIG. 331), so the explanation is omitted. do.

At the start of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 initializes various flags and then refers to the winning type determination table (see FIGS. 314 to 319) to set the number of rounds determined according to the selected symbol command. , a jackpot flag (not shown) is set to "1". As a result, internally, it is neither the variable probability game state nor the time saving game state, but the big win game state in which the big win flag is established.

The control performed by the sub CPU 301 and the game state in terms of appearance are the same as "(f) When a jackpot is won in the C2 time-saving game state" described with reference to FIG. 312 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, the description is omitted.

[8-2-3-11. (k), (l) and (m) shown in FIG. 331]
In the case of (k) shown in FIG. 331, that is, when the jackpot game state ends, the internal state (controlled by the main CPU 201), the display effect (controlled by the sub CPU 301) and the game state that can be enjoyed are the pachinko game states of the first embodiment. Since it is the same as "(g) When the jackpot game state ends" explained with reference to FIG. 312 in the machine, the explanation is omitted.

In addition, in the case of (l) shown in FIG. 331, that is, when winning C5 time saving in the A time saving game state, the internal state (control by the main CPU 201), the display effect (control by the sub CPU 301) and the game state that can be enjoyed are Since it is the same as the case where the C5 time saving hit is won in the C3 time saving game state (see (c) in FIG. 331), the explanation is omitted.

In addition, in the case of (m) shown in FIG. 331, that is, when the A time saving game state ends in a state where C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating in the A time saving game state, the internal state (control by the main CPU 201), The display effect (control by the sub CPU 301) and the game state that can be enjoyed are when the C3 time saving game state ends in a state where the C5 time saving game state is internally overlapped in the C3 time saving game state (see (f) in FIG. 331 ), the description is omitted.

In addition, in the normal game state, even if any of the C3 time short hit, C4 time short hit and C5 time short hit is won, from the normal game state to the C time short game state (C3 time short game state, C4 time short game state, C5 time short game state). When the result of the hit determination process in the specific game state in the normal game state is a time saving hit, the sub CPU 301 can suggest that there is a possibility of shifting from the normal game state to the C1 time saving game state. Make a suggestive performance.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state), if the C3 time-saving hit is won, the state shifts to the C3 time-saving game state. Do not move to game state. In addition, even when winning the C5 time saving game, it is not possible to immediately shift to the C5 time saving game state. That is, the sub CPU 301 performs the second C2 time reduction transition suggestion effect when there is a possibility of shifting from one of the time reduction game states to the C time reduction game state, but from any one time reduction game state to the C time reduction game In the case of a short working hour win (for example, C4 short working hour hit, C5 short working hour winning) which may not shift to the state or may not shift immediately, the sub CPU 301 preferably does not perform the second 2 short working hour transition suggesting effect.

Then, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state is the time saving hit, the first ratio of performing the first C time saving transition suggestive effect and the result of the special symbol win determination process in the time saving game state When compared with the second ratio in which the second C time-saving transition suggestive effect is performed when is the time-saving hit, the first ratio is higher than the second ratio. As a result, it is possible to relatively suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state.

[8-2-3-12. Summary of winning per C time saving in each game state]
The processing in the case of winning the C time saving hit in each game state or the case in which the value of the ceiling count reaches the ceiling value has been described above. FIG. 332 is an example of a table summarizing the processing when winning the C time reduction hit in each game state or when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value.

In FIG. 332, the game state indicated in the horizontal direction at the top indicates the current game state (that is, the game state that the player can enjoy). In addition, the items shown in the vertical direction in the leftmost column (C3 time saving hit, C4 time saving hit, C5 time saving hit and reaching the ceiling) indicate items that can trigger the transition to the time saving gaming state. Also, the items shown in the second column from the left in the vertical direction show the outcome when the transition opportunity shown in the item shown in the leftmost column in the vertical direction occurs. For example, if the current game state is the C3 time reduction game state and the C5 time reduction win is won, the C5 time reduction game state, which is the current game state, continues, and the C5 time reduction based on the C5 time reduction win is internally superimposed. It shows that it works. Also, for example, if the current game state is the C5 time-saving game state and the C3 time-saving hit is won, the C5 time-saving game state, which is the current game state, ends, and the C3 time-saving operation based on the C3 time-saving hit starts. , indicating that it is controlled to the C3 time-saving game state.

(When the current game state is normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 332, in the normal game state, even if any of the C3 short win, the C4 short win and the C5 short win are won, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol game won in the C short win (hereinafter referred to as , called "the special symbol game") is completed, the normal game state is terminated, and control of the C time-saving game state corresponding to the winning type is started.

Also, in the normal game state, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 ends the normal game state and starts control of the B time-saving game state when the special symbol game ends.

(If the current game state is A time-saving game state)
When winning the C3 time saving game state in the A time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the A time saving game state and starts control of the C3 time saving game state when the special symbol game ends. However, it is not limited to this, and when the C3 time saving game state is won in the A time saving game state, the A time saving game state may be continued without activating the C3 time saving game state. Also, if "Remaining time reduction number of A time reduction game state > C3 time reduction game state number of time reduction", continue A time reduction game state, "Remaining time reduction number of A time reduction game state < C3 time reduction game state number of time reduction" If there is, it may be shifted to the C3 time-saving game state. In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the C3 time saving hit is won while the C5 time saving is internally operating, the control of the A time saving game state is terminated, and the control of the C3 time saving game state is started. In the C3 time saving game state, the C5 time saving may be internally overlapped and continuously operated.

When winning the C4 time saving game state in the A time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the A time saving game state if the number of remaining time saving times in the A time saving game state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. Ignore the C4 time reduction hit and do not control to the C4 time reduction game state. However, when the special symbol game ends, if the number of remaining time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 0, the control of the A time reduction game state is ended, and the control is performed to the C4 time reduction game state.

When winning C5 in the reduced working hours game state A, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the reduced working hours game state A if the remaining number of reduced working hours in the reduced working hours game state A is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. The C5 time-saver is internally superimposed and activated. However, when the number of remaining time reductions in the A time reduction game state is 0, the A time reduction game state is ended, and the control of the C5 time reduction game state is started without internally overlapping and operating the C5 time reduction game state. It should be noted that, in the A time-saving game state, if the C5 time-saving game is elected while the C5 time-saving game is internally operating, when the control of the A time-saving game state is terminated, the C5 time-saving game state based on the previously elected C5 time-saving game state control is started, and C5 short time winning later may be internally superimposed and operated.

In this embodiment, there is no case where the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the A time saving game state. When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the game state, the main CPU 201 may end the A time saving game state and start control of the B time saving game state when the special symbol game ends, or may start the control of the B time saving game state. You may make it start control of B time saving game state after the end of game state.

(If the current gaming state is B time-saving gaming state)
When winning the C3 time saving game state in the B time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the B time saving game state and starts control of the C3 time saving game state. However, it is not limited to this, and when the C3 time saving game state is won in the B time saving game state, the B time saving game state may be continued without activating the C3 time saving game state. Also, if "Remaining time reduction number of B time reduction game state > C3 time reduction game state number of time reduction", continue B time reduction game state, "Remaining time reduction number of B time reduction game state < C3 time reduction game state number of times" If there is, it may be shifted to the C3 time-saving game state. It should be noted that, in the B time reduction game state, if the C3 time reduction hit is won while the C5 time reduction is internally operating, the control of the B time reduction game state is terminated, and the control of the C3 time reduction game state is started. In the C3 time saving game state, the C5 time saving may be internally overlapped and continuously operated.

When winning the C4 time saving game state in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the B time saving game state if the number of remaining time saving times in the B time saving game state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. Ignore the C4 time reduction hit and do not control to the C4 time reduction game state. However, when the special symbol game ends, if the number of remaining time reductions in the B time reduction game state is 0, the control of the B time reduction game state is ended, and the control is performed to the C4 time reduction game state.

When winning the C5 time saving game state in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the B time saving game state if the number of remaining time saving times in the B time saving game state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. The C5 time-saver is internally superimposed and activated. However, when the number of remaining time reductions in the B time reduction game state is 0, the B time reduction game state is ended, and the control of the C5 time reduction game state is started without internally overlapping and operating the C5 time reduction game state. In addition, if the C5 time saving game state is elected while the C5 time saving game state is internally operating in the B time saving game state, when the control of the B time saving game state is terminated, the C5 time saving game state based on the previously elected C5 time saving game state control is started, and C5 short time winning later may be internally superimposed and operated.

In this embodiment, since the ceiling value is one, the value of the ceiling counter does not reach the ceiling value in the B time-saving game state. is a specification that can reach the ceiling value, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 terminates the current B time saving game state when the special symbol game ends, The control of the B time saving game state may be started, or the control of the new B time saving game state may be started after the end of the current B time saving game state.

(If the current game state is the C3 time-saving game state)
When winning the C3 time saving game state in the C3 time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the current C3 time saving game state and starts control of a new C3 time saving game state based on the C3 time saving game. do. However, not limited to this, if the C3 short game state is elected in the C3 short game state, the new C3 short game state based on the C3 short game state is not activated, and the current C3 short game state is continued. good. In the C3 time-saving game state, if the C3 time-saving game is newly elected while the C5 time-saving game state is internally operating, when the control of the current C3 time-saving game state is terminated, a new C3 time-saving game based on the C3 time-saving game state is executed. Control of the state is started, but in this new C3 time saving game state, C5 time saving may be internally overlapped and continuously operated.

When the C4 time saving win is won in the C3 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the C3 time saving game state if the number of remaining time saving times in the C3 time saving game state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. Ignore the C4 time reduction hit and do not control to the C4 time reduction game state. However, when the special symbol game ends, if the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state is 0, the control of the C3 time reduction game state is ended, and the control is performed to the C4 time reduction game state.

When winning the C5 time saving game state in the C3 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the C3 time saving game state if the number of remaining time saving times in the C3 time saving game state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. The C5 time-saver is internally superimposed and activated. However, when the number of remaining time reductions in the C3 time reduction game state is 0, the C3 time reduction game state is ended, and the control of the C5 time reduction game state is started without internally overlapping and operating the C5 time reduction game state. In addition, in the C3 time-saving game state, if the C5 time-saving hit is won while the C5 time-saving game state is internally operating, when the control of the C3 time-saving game state is terminated, the C5 time-saving game state based on the previously won C5 time-saving game state control is started, and C5 short time winning later may be internally superimposed and operated.

When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the C3 time saving game state and starts control of the B time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C3 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 may start control of the B time saving game state after the end of the C3 time saving game state. In this case, until the C3 time saving game state ends, when the special symbol game is executed, the remaining time reduction number of the B time saving game state may be subtracted, and even if the special symbol is executed, the B time saving game state may be maintained. In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the state where the C5 time saving is internally operating in the C3 time saving game state, the control of the C3 time saving game state is terminated and the control of the B time saving game state is started, In this B time saving game state, the C5 time saving game state may be internally overlapped and continuously operated, or after the end of the C3 time saving game state, the control of the C5 time saving game state is started, and this C5 time saving game state is ended. You may make it control to B time saving game state later.

(If the current game state is C4 time-saving game state)
When winning the C3 time saving game state in the C4 time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the current C4 time saving game state and starts control of the C3 time saving game state. It should be noted that, in the C4 time-saving gaming state, if the C3 time-saving hit is won while the C5 time-saving is internally operating, the control of the C4 time-saving gaming state is ended, and the control of the C3 time-saving gaming state based on the C3 time-saving hitting starts. However, in this C3 time-saving game state, it is preferable to continuously operate C5 time-saving by overlapping it internally.

When the C4 time saving game wins in the C4 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls the current C4 time saving game state if the number of remaining time saving times in the current C4 time saving game state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. , ignores the C4 time reduction hit, and does not control to a new C4 time reduction game state. However, when the special symbol game is completed, if the remaining time reduction number of times in the current C4 time reduction game state is 0, the control of the current C4 time reduction game state is ended, and a new C4 time reduction game state based on the C4 time reduction hit. to control. However, not limited to this, even if you win the C4 short time game in other time saving game states other than the C4 time short game state, it will be ignored. The C4 time saving game state may be ended, and control may be performed to a new C4 time saving game state based on the C4 time saving win.

When winning the C5 time saving game state in the C4 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the C4 time saving game state if the number of remaining time saving times in the C4 time saving game state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. The C5 time-saver is internally superimposed and activated. However, when the number of times of remaining time reduction in the C4 time reduction game state is 0, the C4 time reduction game state is ended, and the control of the C5 time reduction game state is started without overlapping the C5 time reduction game state internally. It should be noted that, in the C4 time-saving game state, if the C5 time-saving game is elected in a state where the C5 time-saving is internally operating, when the control of the C4 time-saving gaming state is terminated, the C5 time-saving gaming state based on the previously elected C5 time-saving winning control is started, and C5 short time winning later may be internally superimposed and operated.

When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time saving game state, when the special symbol game ends, the main CPU 201 ends the C4 time saving game state and starts control of the B time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C4 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 may start control of the B time saving game state after the end of the C4 time saving game state. In this case, until the C4 time saving game state ends, when the special symbol game is executed, the remaining time reduction number of the B time saving game state may be subtracted, and even if the special symbol is executed, the B time saving game state may be maintained. In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the state where C5 time reduction is internally operating in the C4 time reduction game state, the control of the C4 time reduction game state is ended and the control of the B time reduction game state is started, In this B time saving game state, the C5 time saving game state may be internally overlapped and continuously operated, or after the C4 time saving game state ends, the control of the C5 time saving game state is started, and this C5 time saving game state is ended. You may make it control to B time saving game state later.

(If the current game state is C5 time-saving game state)
When winning the C3 time saving game state in the C5 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the current C5 time saving game state and starts control of the C5 time saving game state when the special symbol game ends.

When the C4 short win is won in the C5 short gaming state, the main CPU 201 continues the control of the C5 short gaming state if the number of remaining short working hours in the C5 short gaming state is greater than 0 when the special symbol game ends. Ignore the C4 time reduction hit and do not control to the C4 time reduction game state. However, when the special symbol game ends, if the number of times of remaining time reduction in the C5 time reduction game state is 0, the control of the C5 time reduction game state is ended, and the control is performed to the C4 time reduction game state. It should be noted that, in the C4 time-saving game state, if the C5 time-saving game is elected in a state where the C5 time-saving is internally operating, when the control of the C4 time-saving gaming state is terminated, the C5 time-saving gaming state based on the previously elected C5 time-saving winning control is started, and C5 short time winning later may be internally superimposed and operated.

In the case of winning the C5 time saving game state in the C5 time saving game state, the main CPU 201, when the special symbol game ends, if the number of remaining time saving times in the current C5 time saving game state is greater than 0, the current C5 time saving game state. Continuing control and internally superimposing a new C5 time reduction based on the C5 time reduction hit. However, when the number of times of remaining time reduction in the current C5 time reduction game state is 0, the current C5 time reduction game state is ended, and control of a new C5 time reduction game state based on the C5 time reduction hit is started. In the C5 time-saving game state, if another C5 time-saving game is internally operating and the C5 time-saving hit is elected, after the current C5 time-saving game state ends, the C5 based on the previously elected C5 time-saving hit. The control of the time saving game state is started, but in this C5 time saving game state, it is preferable that the later winning C5 time saving game is internally overlapped and continuously operated.

When the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C5 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C5 time saving game state and starts control of the B time saving game state when the special symbol game ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C5 time saving game state, the main CPU 201 may start control of the B time saving game state after the end of the C5 time saving game state. In this case, until the C5 time saving game state ends, when the special symbol game is executed, the remaining time reduction number of the B time saving game state may be subtracted, and even if the special symbol is executed, the B time saving game state may be maintained. In addition, if the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value while another C5 time saving game state is internally operating in the C5 time saving game state, control of the current C5 time saving game state is terminated and control of the B time saving game state is performed. , and in this B time saving game state, the above another C5 time saving may be internally superimposed and continuously operated, or after the end of the C4 time saving game state, C5 based on the above another C5 time saving It is also possible to start control of the time saving game state and control to the B time saving game state after the end of this C5 time saving game state.

[8-2-4. Expansion example of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment]
In the present embodiment, the hit determination process of the special symbol in the high-accuracy gaming state (for example, although it is a high-accuracy short-time gaming state, the pachinko machine equipped with a high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state includes a high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state) If the result is C5 time saving hit, the main CPU 201 ignores this regardless of the type of time saving hit. You may make it not include time saving hit in the result of hit determination processing. For example, if the "time saving hit determination value data" shown in the column of probability variation flag "1" of the special symbol hit determination table (Fig. 10) is set to "losing determination value data", the special symbol hit determination in the high probability gaming state The result of processing does not become a time-saving hit.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if it is elected to C5 time saving in any time saving game state, C5 time saving is internally superimposed and operated, but not limited to this, a specific time saving game state In the case that C5 time saving is won, the C5 time saving may be internally overlapped so as not to operate. For example, if the C5 time reduction is won in the C time reduction game state, the C5 time reduction is internally overlapped and operated, and if the C5 time reduction game state is won in the A time reduction game state or the B time reduction game state, the C5 time reduction is won. , for example, may be disregarded by C5.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the ceiling is reached in the C5 time-saving game state controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy, the C5 time-saving game state is ended and the B time-saving game state is started. However, after the end of the C5 time saving game state, the B time saving game state may be started.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the state where C5 time saving is internally overlapping during the control of any time saving game state, when winning C3 time saving or reaching the ceiling, C time saving game state or The B time-saving game state is started, and the C5 time-saving operation that has been internally operated is continued, but not limited to this, the duplication flag and the C5 time-saving flag are initialized, and the C5 time-saving game state is operated. may be terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of C5 time-savings that can be internally overlapped and operated is up to two, but the number is not limited to this, and may be three or more, or may be up to one. When the number of C5 time-saving gaming states that can be internally overlapped and operated is set to one, if C5 time-saving winning is won in the C5 time-saving gaming state, C5 time-saving may be internally overlapped and operated, The C5 time saving may be ignored instead of being internally superimposed (ie, the C5 time saving may not be internally superimposed and activated in the C5 time saving game state).

In addition, in the present embodiment, different stage effects are displayed in the C3 time saving game state, the C4 time saving game state, and the C5 time saving game state. , but not limited to this. For example, a common stage effect may be displayed in the C3 reduced working hours gaming state, the C4 reduced working hours gaming state, and the C5 reduced working hours gaming state. In addition, although the C3 time-saving game state, the C4 time-saving game state, and the C5 time-saving game state are different stages, the difference is so small that it cannot be grasped or grasped which C time-saving game state is on the outside. A difficult stage effect may be displayed. Furthermore, when installing the C1 time reduction game state or the C2 time reduction game state like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the C1 time reduction game state, the C2 time reduction game state, or the C3 time reduction game state , the C4 time-saving game state, or the C5 time-saving game state may be displayed in a stage effect that cannot be grasped from the appearance or is difficult to grasp.

In addition, when the C5 time reduction is internally overlapping and operating in any of the time saving gaming states, the sub CPU 301 may perform an effect suggesting that the C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating. good. In addition, even if the C5 time reduction is not activated internally in one of the time reduction gaming states, the sub CPU 301 creates a false effect suggesting that the C5 time reduction is internally activated. You can do it.

In addition, if the number of C5 time reductions that are internally overlapping and operating in any of the time saving gaming states is plural, the sub CPU 301 suggests that a plurality of C5 time saving is internally overlapping and operating. There may be a presentation or a presentation suggesting the number of C5 time-savers that are internally superimposed. Also, if the number of C5 time-saving gaming states that are internally overlapping and operating in any of the time-saving gaming states is not plural (that is, if the number of C5 time-saving gaming states that are internally overlapping is 0 or 1 Even if there is), the sub CPU 301 may perform a false effect suggesting that a plurality of C5 time reductions are internally overlapping and operating. Furthermore, when C5 time saving is internally overlapping in any time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 301 suggests a different number from the number of C5 time saving that is actually internally overlapping. A fake effect may be performed.

[8-3. Expansion example of the eighth pachinko machine]
Below, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment of the eighth pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "first embodiment") and the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as "second embodiment ) will be described. In addition, hereinafter, the term "eighth pachinko game machine" includes both the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

Time saving number set when controlled to A time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "A time saving number") and time saving number set when controlled to B time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "B time saving number" ) and the number of time reductions set when the C time reduction game state is controlled or when the C time reduction game state is activated internally (hereinafter referred to as "C time reduction number") It is not limited to the number of times of time saving described in the pachinko game machine, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, if multiple types of C time-saving game state with different C time-saving times are installed, as in the first embodiment, the first C time-saving game state (e.g., equivalent to C1 time-saving game state of the first embodiment) The number of times of saving time for C is greater than the number of times of saving time of A, and the number of times of saving time of C for the second C time saving hit (e.g., corresponding to the C2 time saving game state of the first embodiment) is less than the number of times of saving time of A. good too. In addition, the number of times of shortening C in the first C time saving game state may be larger than the number of times of saving B, and the number of times of saving C in the second C time saving game state may be smaller than the number of times of saving B. In addition, the number of times of shortening A, the number of times of saving time for the first C time saving game state, and the number of times of saving time of C about the second time saving game state may be the same number of times.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is a regular game mode (for example, a mode in which the game is progressed by winning the first start port 120), and a high-accuracy time-saving game state and a low-certainty time-saving game In the state, including all C time-saving game states, right-handed hitting is a regular game mode (for example, a mode in which the second start port 140 is made to win and the game progresses), but it is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of types of C time-saving game states with different opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) are installed, in the first C time-saving game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the second In the C time-saving game state, hitting to the right may be a regular game mode.

When multiple types of C time-saving gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, C time-saving times, time-saving performance, etc.) are installed, the main CPU 201 determines the time-saving performance in the first C time-saving gaming state (hereinafter “second 1 C time-saving performance”) is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving performance in the second C time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “second C time-saving performance”) (for example, normal electric role The opening time of the object 146 (see FIG. 4) is long, etc.). In this case, the first C time-saving performance and the time-saving performance in the A time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “A time-saving performance”) are the same, or the A time-saving performance is more advantageous than the first C time-saving performance In addition to being advantageous to the player, the A time saving performance and the second C time saving performance may be the same, or the second C time saving performance may be more advantageous to the player than the A time saving performance. .

When a plurality of types of C time-saving gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of times of C time-saving, time-saving performance, etc.) are installed, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the first C time-saving win has been won, or the second It may be difficult or impossible to grasp from the display effect, the sound effect, or the like displayed in the display area of the display device 7 whether or not the C time saving hit has been won. In this case, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the special symbol random number value is a specific symbol random number value, etc.), it is possible to grasp or easily grasp which type of C per time has been won. You may make it perform production and sound production. Furthermore, display that makes it difficult or impossible to grasp which C win is won when the first C win or the second C win is won among a plurality of types of C short game states. It is possible to grasp that a specific C time saving win is won when a specific C time saving win (for example, a C time saving win corresponding to the C time saving game state most advantageous to the player) is won by performing production and voice production. Display effects or voice effects that are easy to grasp may be performed.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, the probability that the result of the winning judgment processing of the first special symbol performed when winning the first starting port 120 is the time-saving winning is determined when winning the second starting port 140.例文帳に追加Although the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is set higher than the probability of the time saving hit, it is not limited to this. For example, the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol performed when the second start port 140 is won is the time saving hit is determined as the hit of the first special symbol performed when the first start port 120 is won It may be higher than the probability that the result of the determination process is a time saving hit, and the probability that the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol performed when the first start port 120 is won is a time saving hit, and the second The probability that the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol performed when winning the second start port 140 is a time saving hit may be the same probability.

Also, if a plurality of types of C time-saving game states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of times of C time-saving, time-saving performance, etc.) are installed, the first C time-saving hit relatively advantageous to the player (for example, , corresponding to the C1 short time hit in the first embodiment) and the second C short time hit (e.g., equivalent to the C2 short time hit in the first embodiment), which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, with the same probability. It is not essential to do so, and the winning probability for the first C time saving may be higher than the winning probability for the second C time saving, or the winning probability for the second C time saving may be set to the first You may make it become higher than the election probability per C time reduction.

A look-ahead performance may be performed to make the player expect that the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be a big hit or a time-saving hit. In this case, the sub CPU 301 can grasp the prefetching effect of the big hit and the prefetching effect of the time saving win, or may perform the prefetching effect in a manner that can be grasped, or it is difficult to grasp the prefetching effect of the big win and the prefetching effect of the time saving hit. Alternatively, the look-ahead effect may be performed in a form that cannot be comprehended. "Let the player expect that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit or a time saving hit" means that when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, not only does the look-ahead effect, but also the special Even if the result of the hit determination process of the pattern is a loss, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect using a predetermined random number for effect) By performing a look-ahead effect , the result of the special symbol hit determination process is expected to be a big hit or a time saving hit.

In addition, when a plurality of types of C time-saving gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of times of C time-saving, time-saving performance, etc.) are installed, the sub CPU 301 selects the first C that is relatively advantageous to the player. A look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility of winning a time-saving hit (e.g., equivalent to the C1 time-saving hit in the first embodiment), and a second C time-saving hit that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (e.g., the first implementation (equivalent to the example C2 time reduction hit or C3 time reduction hit) may be performed in a comprehensible or comprehensible manner, or in a comprehensible or impossible manner. you can go

In addition, the first C time reduction hit that is most advantageous to the player (e.g., equivalent to the C1 time reduction hit in the first embodiment) and the second C time reduction hit that is most disadvantageous to the player (e.g., the first embodiment When the C2 short time hit) is installed, the sub CPU 301 provides a look-ahead effect indicating that there is a possibility that the first C time short win has been won, and that there is a possibility that the second C time short win has been won. and performing in a manner that is difficult or impossible to comprehend, it is possible to increase interest in the prefetching effect.

In addition, when multiple types of C time-saving gaming states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of times of C time-saving, time-saving performance, etc.) are installed, the sub CPU 301 determines, for example, the most advantageous for the player as a result of the look-ahead determination. Even if it is determined that there is a possibility of winning the first C short time hit (e.g., equivalent to C1 time short hit in the first embodiment), it is possible to win another second C short time hit. After performing the pre-reading effect shown below, and then performing the effect indicating that the first C time saving win is won, it is possible to increase interest in the pre-reading effect. In this case, when the second C time saving win is the second C time saving win that is most disadvantageous to the player (for example, it corresponds to the C2 time saving win in the first embodiment), it is possible to further enhance the interest.

In addition, when C time reduction (for example, C5 time reduction in the second embodiment) that can be internally operated repeatedly is installed, the sub CPU 301 has the possibility of winning the C5 time reduction in the normal game state. While it is possible to carry out a look-ahead performance indicating that there is a prize, in any of the time-saving game states, the look-ahead performance indicating that there is a possibility of winning C5 time-saving may not be performed. This is because even if the C5 time saving win is won in any of the time saving game states, the C5 time saving only operates internally, and there is a possibility that the player cannot immediately grasp that the C5 time saving win has been won. .

In addition, in the state in which the C5 time-saving game state is activated internally in any time-saving game state, before the end of the time-saving game state under control (for example, when the number of remaining time-saving times is 1 to 4) , If the number of overlapping time reductions that are operating internally is greater than the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction gaming state under control, the sub CPU 301 is the C5 time reduction gaming state in a mode that the player can enjoy. An effect indicating that there is a possibility that the control will be started may be performed. In this case, for example, if the starting information is suspended, by performing an effect indicating that the C5 time-saving game state may start before the time-saving game state being controlled ends, such an effect can be performed like a look-ahead effect. For example, when the remaining time reduction number of times in the C3 time reduction game state described in the eighth pachinko game machine is 3, and the number of reservations of the start information of the second special symbol is 3, the third of the second special symbol Targeting the holding of , it is possible to perform an effect indicating that there is a possibility that the C5 time-saving game state is started. In this case, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed for the third reservation of the second special symbol is a loss, the variable display of the second special symbol for the third reservation starts. When the game is played, the time-saving C that has been operated internally is started to be controlled in a manner that the player can enjoy. becomes possible. In addition, the aspect of the look-ahead effect is, for example, a mode of changing the display mode of the target's hold image, or a so-called zone look-ahead effect mode of changing, for example, the background image in the look-ahead effect section for a plurality of holds. or all.

In addition, when winning the time saving game state during the control of any time saving game state, the time saving game state being controlled is ended and the time saving game state corresponding to the winning time saving game state can be started. C time reduction hit (for example, C1 time reduction hit, C2 time reduction hit, C3 time reduction hit of the eighth pachinko game machine) and the time reduction game state under control are continued, and the winning time reduction hit is ignored. Second C time reduction hit A third capable of internally superimposing and operating a win (for example, a C4 short-time win of an eighth pachinko game machine) and a time-saving game corresponding to the winning short-time win while continuing the time-saving game state under control. If a plurality of time-saving hits are installed among the C time-saving hits (for example, the C5 time-saving hits in the second embodiment), the sub CPU 301, in the time-saving gaming state, selects a specific time-saving hit (for example, the first C When winning a time-saving win), a pre-reading performance may be performed, and when a non-specific time-saving win (for example, the second C time-saving win, the third C time-saving win) is won, the pre-reading performance may not be performed. . That is, when the time-saving game state under control is ended by winning and the time-saving game state based on winning is started, the player can grasp that the time-saving win has been won. conduct. On the other hand, even if it is won, if it is won in a time saving game corresponding to a time saving game state that is not executed or started immediately, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the time saving game has been won. The intention is to prevent Therefore, in the first game state (for example, normal game state or C time-saving game state), if the time-saving game is won, the time-saving game state is executed, but the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state or B time-saving game state), even if the time-saving prize is won, the time-saving game state is not executed and is ignored, a look-ahead performance indicating the possibility of winning the time-saving prize is performed in the first game state, and the second game state. It is better not to do it in the game state of 2.

Also, in any of the time-saving game states (B time-saving game state, C1 time-saving game state, C2 time-saving game state, C3 time-saving game state, C4 time-saving game state), if you win the C5 time-saving hit in a manner that satisfies the predetermined conditions, The main CPU 201 may select a specific variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern table D-2) for a predetermined period of time, for example. That is, when the C5 time saving hit is won in any of the time saving game states, the control of the current time saving game state continues, and the C5 time saving is internally overlapped. Therefore, when the player cannot or is difficult to grasp that the C5 time saving hit has been won or that the C5 time saving is internally operating repeatedly, a specific variation pattern table is selected. By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by implicitly informing the player that the C5 time saving win has been won and that the C5 time saving is internally operating in an overlapping manner. In addition, "a mode that satisfies a predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, a case where the number of times of overlapping shortened working hours of C5 that operates internally is larger than the number of shortened working hours remaining in the reduced working hours gaming state being controlled. . If the number of overlapping time reductions of C5 time reduction that is activated internally is smaller than the number of time reductions remaining in the controlled time reduction game state, the winning of C5 time reduction and the C5 time reduction are internally overlapped. This is because if the player is informed of the fact that the game is being played, there is a risk that the player will lose interest, which is not preferable. In addition, when the C5 time saving hit is won in any of the time saving game states, the main CPU 201 may uniformly select a specific variation pattern table. When it is less than the specified number (that is, when the current time-saving game state is about to end), if a specific variation pattern table is selected, even if the current time-saving game state ends, control to the C5 time-saving game state It is possible to provide the player with a sense of security that the game will be played, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a plurality of types of C time-saving game states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the number of times of C time-saving, time-saving performance, etc.), for example, a plurality of starting information of the first special symbol are reserved. , When the first C time reduction hit and the second C time reduction hit held after the first C time reduction hit are included in the plurality of reservations, the sub CPU 301 first Although it is possible to carry out the read-ahead performance for the reserved first C time-saving win, it is preferable not to carry out the read-ahead performance for the second C time-saving win held later.

In addition, when winning the time saving game state during the control of any time saving game state, the time saving game state being controlled is ended and the time saving game state corresponding to the winning time saving game state can be started. C time reduction hit (for example, C1 time reduction hit, C2 time reduction hit, C3 time reduction hit of the eighth pachinko game machine) and the time reduction game state under control are continued, and the winning time reduction hit is ignored. Second C time reduction hit When a hit (for example, a C4 short time hit of the eighth pachinko game machine) is installed, in the time saving game state, for example, a plurality of start information of the second special symbol are reserved, and among the plurality of reservations , When the second C time saving hit and the first C time saving hit reserved after the second C time saving hit are included, the sub CPU 301 is the previously reserved second C time saving It is preferable that the read-ahead effect for the win is not performed, and the read-ahead effect for the first C time-saving win, which is later reserved, can be performed. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the suspension includes a third C time-saving win that can be internally operated in an overlapping manner, and a first C time-saving win that is held after the third C time-saving win. Even when it is, the sub CPU 301 does not perform the prefetching effect for the third C time saving hit that was previously reserved, and can perform the prefetching effect for the first C time saving hit that is reserved later. It is preferable to

In addition, in the eighth pachinko game machine, although no particular reference was made to the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols may be constant regardless of the game state, or the fluctuation time of the normal symbols may be changed according to the game state. Different times may be used. In the latter case, for example, in the A time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter than that in the normal game state, while in the C time-saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be the same as or substantially the same as the normal game state. . In addition, in the short working hours game state A, if it is desired to slow down the progress of the game compared to the short working hours game state B and the short working hours game state C, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is lengthened compared to the short working hours game state B and the short working hours game state C. is preferred. Also, when the number of times of reduced working hours to be set is relatively large (for example, the C1 reduced working hours game state or the B reduced working hours game state of the first embodiment) is controlled, the number of reduced working hours to be set is relatively When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the case of being controlled to the reduced working hours game state (for example, the C2 reduced working hours gaming state or the C3 reduced working hours gaming state of the first embodiment), the set number of reduced working hours was relatively large. However, it is possible to relatively accelerate the progress of the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In addition, during the control of any time-saving game state, the time-saving game state under control can be terminated and the time-saving game state corresponding to the winning time-saving game can be started. When winning C1 time reduction hit, C2 time reduction hit, C3 time reduction hit) of the game machine, the remaining time reduction number of times of the time reduction game state under control and the remaining time reduction of the C time reduction game state corresponding to the newly started C time reduction hit The sub CPU 301 preferably performs different display effects depending on which of the number of times and the number of times is greater. For example, the sub CPU 301, if the number of remaining time reductions in the C time reduction game state corresponding to the newly started C time reduction hit is greater than the remaining time reduction number of times in the time reduction game state under control, a special effect that excites the player. If the number of remaining time reductions in the C time reduction game state corresponding to the newly started C time reduction hit is smaller than the remaining time reduction number of times in the time reduction game state under control, an effect different from the above privilege effect is performed. By doing so, it is preferable to suppress a decline in interest. An effect different from the above-mentioned privilege effect may be, for example, a effect in which it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the number of times the remaining time is reduced is reduced, or, for example, a reach-losing effect, which once causes the player to expect it, is expected by the player. It may be an effect indicating that the result was not in line with the above.

In addition, the main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of the special symbols at a predetermined timing such as when the jackpot game state ends or when the backup clear process is performed. Accordingly, it may be possible to switch the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, the main CPU 201 can switch the variation pattern table to be referred to according to the gaming state and the selected symbol command (that is, the special symbol (jackpot symbol) when the jackpot is won) when the conditional device is activated. good.

In addition, when the special electric role is activated although the condition device is not in operation (for example, when a small winning game is executed), the main CPU 201 generates a special symbol triggered by the operation of the special electric role. The number of times of variable display is counted, and switching of the variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol may be executed according to the number of times of variable display of the special symbol. Also, in this case, the main CPU 201 changes the variation pattern table to be referred to according to the gaming state when the special electric accessory is activated and the selected symbol command (that is, the special symbol (small winning symbol) when winning the small winning prize). Switching may be executable.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled in one of a plurality of game states including at least the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, there are a plurality of variation pattern tables that are referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 may be able to determine the variation pattern of the special symbols at least according to the game state.

In addition, a plurality of variation pattern tables are stored to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and when winning the short time B win, the main CPU 201 determines according to the gaming state when winning the short time B win. , It may be possible to determine the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the B time saving game state.

In addition, when the condition for starting the B time saving game state is satisfied by reaching the ceiling, the main CPU 201 starts counting with the game state when the starting condition for the B time saving game state is satisfied and the start of the B time saving game state as a trigger. It may be possible to switch the variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the number of times of variable display of the special symbol.

Further, the pachinko game machine is controllable to one of a plurality of game states including at least the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, and is a variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols. are stored, and the plurality of variation pattern tables preferably include a specific variation pattern table that is referred to only in the C time-saving gaming state.

Further, when the C time saving gaming state is started, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern when determining the special symbol variation pattern according to the special symbol (C time saving winning symbol) when the C time saving winning is won. Table switching may be made executable.

In addition, the main CPU 201 refers to a variation pattern table when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols in the C time-saving gaming state according to the number of variable display times of the special symbols whose counting is started with the start of the C time-saving gaming state. can be made executable.

In addition, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different variation times are stored as a variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the plurality of variation pattern tables store the special symbols in the normal game state. and a second variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the high-probability time-saving game state. is preferred.

In addition, the invention described in the eighth pachinko machine can be applied not only to the first pachinko machine, but also to any of the first to sixth pachinko machines. I mentioned above. Therefore, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine like the third pachinko game machine, after the jackpot game state is completed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, once ), the main CPU refers to the variation pattern table in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively small (that is, the expected value of variable display time is relatively long). It is preferable to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this case, the variable display time of the special symbols is, for example, preferably longer than the average time of the variable display time of the special symbols in the normal game state, and is the longest variable display time of the special symbols in the normal game state. It can be a long time. In addition, the main CPU 201 normally variably displays the first special symbol in a variation pattern determined based on the result of the win determination process for the first special symbol. Until the variable display is performed a specified number of times (for example, once), regardless of the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, it is performed with a specific variation pattern set for a relatively long time compared to usual. It may be determined in advance. In the 1 type 2 type mixing machine, even if the time saving game state after the jackpot game state is ended, there is a case where the starting information of the second special symbol is retained. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed for such a remaining hold is, for example, a small hit and V wins, the player will The game is controlled to the jackpot game state again without playing the game in the normal game state, and there is a possibility that the player can win a large amount of balls in a short time. Promoting a large number of balls in a short period of time is not desirable because it arouses the gambling spirit of the players. Therefore, as described above, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively long (eg, 200 to 600 sec) until the variable display of the first special symbol is performed the specified number of times (eg, once). ), it is possible to suppress the acquisition of a large number of balls in a short period of time, and furthermore, it is possible to preferably suppress the decline in interest. In addition, the specified number of times may be one time, but is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the number of start memories of the first special symbol stored when the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, the main CPU 201 manages game value information (for example, the number of big wins) related to the number of balls released per unit time at a predetermined timing (for example, the first win). It may be possible to execute the stretching process based on. Furthermore, the degree of extension may be varied based on the game value information. It should be noted that the extension process, for example, the variable display time of special symbols and the time related to the jackpot game state (for example, the start interval time when the jackpot game state is started, the interval time between round games, the jackpot game state ends This corresponds to the process of delaying the progress of the game compared to the normal time by making the time end interval time, etc., longer than the normal time.

Further, the main CPU 201 may be capable of executing any one of a plurality of stretching processes with different degrees of stretching in the jackpot game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of the special symbols with the start of the A time-saving gaming state as a trigger, and when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the number of special symbols executed before the jackpot gaming state is controlled. Depending on the variable display count, it may be possible to execute the extension process in this jackpot game state. Further, the degree of extension may be varied according to the number of variable display times of the special symbols executed until the jackpot game state is established.

In addition, in the jackpot game state, any one of a plurality of drawdown processes with different degrees of draw can be executed, and after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot game state, the A time saving function is activated, and then 1 When the jackpot game state is controlled once or multiple times, the main CPU 201 can execute the extension process in the current jackpot game state according to the number of controlled jackpot game states, including a predetermined jackpot game state. may be Furthermore, the main CPU 201 may vary the degree of extension according to the number of controlled jackpot game states, including predetermined jackpot game states. Instead of directly counting the number of times of the big win game state, for example, when the big win game state is controlled again within a predetermined time after the end of the big win game state, the number is counted. You may enable it to grasp the number of times (the same applies to the following).

In addition, the main CPU 201 can control one of a plurality of jackpot game states with different modes (for example, the number of rounds), and in the jackpot game state, one of a plurality of extension processes with different degrees of extension. may be made executable. In this case, after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot game state, the A time-saving game state is started, and after that, when the jackpot game state is controlled once or a plurality of times, a plurality of jackpots including the predetermined jackpot game state. Depending on the number of jackpot game states controlled to a specific jackpot game state (for example, a jackpot game state with a relatively large number of rounds) among game states, it may be possible to execute the extension process in the current jackpot game state. . Further, the degree of extension may be varied according to the number of times of the jackpot game state controlled to a specific jackpot game state among a plurality of jackpot game states including a predetermined jackpot game state.

Further, the main CPU 201 may be capable of executing any one of a plurality of stretching processes with different degrees of stretching in the jackpot game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of the special symbols with the start of the A time-saving gaming state as a trigger, starts the A time-saving gaming state after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot gaming state, and then once or more times. When the jackpot game state is controlled for one time, the number of variable display times of the special symbols executed before the jackpot game state is controlled and the number of controlled jackpot game states including the predetermined jackpot game state. Accordingly, the extension process may be executed in the current jackpot game state. Further, the degree of extension is varied according to the number of variable display times of the special symbols executed before being controlled to the jackpot game state and the number of times of the jackpot game state controlled including the predetermined jackpot game state. can be

In addition, the main CPU 201 can control one of a plurality of jackpot game states with different modes (for example, the number of rounds), and in the jackpot game state, one of a plurality of extension processes with different degrees of extension. may be made executable. In this case, the main CPU 201 counts the number of variable display times of special symbols with the start of the A time-saving game state as a trigger, and after being controlled to a predetermined big win game state, the A time-saving game state starts, and then a plurality of big win games are played. When the state is controlled to a specific jackpot game state (for example, a jackpot game state with a relatively large number of rounds), the number of variable display times of special symbols executed before being controlled to the specific jackpot game state; Depending on the number of controlled specific jackpot game states including predetermined jackpot game states, the extension process may be executed in the current specific jackpot game state. Further, the degree of extension according to the number of variable display times of the special symbols executed before being controlled to the specific jackpot game state and the number of times of the specific jackpot game state controlled including the predetermined jackpot game state. may be different.

In addition, the main CPU 201 can control one of a plurality of jackpot game states with different modes (for example, the number of rounds), and in the jackpot game state, one of a plurality of extension processes with different degrees of extension. can be executed, and after being controlled to a predetermined jackpot game state, the A time saving function is activated, and then a specific jackpot game state among a plurality of jackpot game states (for example, a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds) game state) once or a plurality of times, according to the number of times of the jackpot game state controlled including the predetermined jackpot game state and the number of times of the specific jackpot game state controlled, this specific It may be possible to execute the extension process in the big hit game state. Further, the degree of extension may be varied according to the number of controlled big win game states including predetermined big win game states and the number of controlled specific big win game states.

In addition, the main CPU 201 can execute any one of a plurality of stretching processes with different degrees of stretching in the jackpot gaming state, and counts the number of variable display times of special symbols with the start of the A time-saving gaming state as a trigger. After being controlled to a predetermined jackpot game state, the A time-saving game state is started, and then, once or more times, it is controlled to a specific jackpot game state (for example, a jackpot game state with a relatively large number of rounds). In the case, the number of variable display times of the special symbols executed before being controlled to the specific jackpot game state, the number of controlled jackpot game states including the predetermined jackpot game state, and the controlled specific jackpot game state Depending on the number of times, it may be possible to execute the extension process in this particular jackpot game state. Furthermore, the number of variable display times of the special symbols executed before being controlled to the specific jackpot game state, the number of controlled jackpot game states including the predetermined jackpot game state, and the controlled specific jackpot game state The degree of stretching may be varied according to the number of times of stretching.

Further, the main CPU 201 may control the progress of the game to be relatively delayed when a predetermined condition related to the payout rate per unit time (for example, a condition for executing the extension process) is satisfied.

In addition, when a specific condition is established (for example, when a jackpot is won), the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state in which the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. A round game is started, after the end of the round game, the next round game is started after the lapse of a predetermined interval time, and after the end of the last round game, the jackpot game state can be ended after the lapse of a predetermined ending time, and the unit If a predetermined condition (e.g. execution condition for extension processing) relating to the rate of winning balls per hour is met, at least one of the opening time, interval time and ending time may be made relatively longer. good.

Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, execution conditions for extension processing) relating to the payout rate per unit time is established, the main CPU 201 determines that the time required for one game (for example, the fluctuation pattern of special symbols) is relatively It may be controllable so that it becomes longer.

In addition, when a predetermined condition (for example, execution conditions for extension processing) relating to the payout rate per unit time is established, the main CPU 201 determines a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time as the variation pattern of the special symbols. The probability of doing or deciding may be increased.

In addition, when a predetermined condition related to the ball output rate per unit time (for example, the execution condition of the extension process) is satisfied, and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a specific result (For example, in the case of a 10R jackpot), the main CPU 201 may determine, or increase the probability of determining, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time for the special symbols.

Further, when a predetermined condition related to the payout rate per unit time (for example, the condition for executing the extension process) is established, the main CPU 201 determines that the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively The variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined by referring to a variation pattern table that is relatively small (that is, the expected value of the variable display time is relatively long).

In addition, when a predetermined condition related to the ball output rate per unit time (for example, the execution condition of the extension process) is established, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a specific result (for example, a specific jackpot), The main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern by referring to a variation pattern table in which the expected value of the number of variable display executions per unit time is relatively small (that is, the expected value of the variable display time is relatively long). You may make it

Further, after the end of the big win game state, the main CPU 201 establishes a predetermined flag according to the variable display of the special symbols until the next big win game state is controlled, and the state of establishment of this predetermined flag (ON/OFF). ) and the number of variable display times of the special symbols until the current jackpot game state is controlled after the end of the previous jackpot game state. You can make it soothing.

In addition, after the end of the big win game state, the main CPU 201 adds or subtracts a predetermined count value according to the number of variable display times of the special symbols until the next time the big win game state is controlled, and is controlled to the big win game state. In this case, depending on the predetermined count value, it may be possible to execute the extension process in the current jackpot game state. Furthermore, the main CPU 201 may vary the degree of stretching according to the predetermined count value.

Also, in the description of the time charts (see FIGS. 312 and 331) showing the flow of the game (for example, (b), (d), (h) in FIG. 312, (b) to (d) in FIG. g) and (i), etc.), the additional effect has been described, but the mode of this additional effect is not limited to a specific mode of effect. For example, all of the increasing number of times of time saving may be displayed by one additional performance, or all of the increasing number of times of time saving may be displayed by multiple times of additional performance. “Displaying all of the increasing number of times of saving time with multiple additional effects” means, for example, performing an additional effect indicating that only a part of the number of times of reducing time increases in the first additional effect, and the second time In the additional production, the aspect of performing the additional production showing all the remaining number of times of time saving to be increased corresponds. As a specific example, for example, if the number of time reductions to be increased is 100 times, "30 times reduction in working hours GET!" corresponds to an effect mode indicating the number of times of shortening of working hours to be added by changing the timing and adding a plurality of times of additional effects. In addition, the number of times of the additional effects performed at different timings is not limited to two times, and may be performed three times or more. Furthermore, for example, when the number of times of time saving to be increased is 100 times, the first additional effect displays, for example, "Time saving 30 times GET!" A fake effect may be performed, and, for example, "Get 70 times shorter in working hours!" may be displayed in the third additional effect.

In addition, when winning, for example, the C3 time saving win in any of the time saving game states, it is preferable that the above-mentioned multiple addition performances are performed until the special symbol game winning the C3 time saving win is completed. On the other hand, in any of the time-saving game states, when winning, for example, the short time C5, for example, the first addition performance is performed until the special symbol game winning the short time C5 is completed, and the second and subsequent additions are performed. The effect may be performed until the control of the current time-saving game state is completed (that is, until the control of the C5 time-saving game state is started in a mode that the player can enjoy).

[9. Ninth pachinko machine]
Next, an example of the ninth pachinko game machine will be described below. This ninth pachinko game machine relates to another embodiment of the base door 3 of the first pachinko game machine. However, the invention described in the ninth pachinko gaming machine can be applied not only to the first pachinko gaming machine, but also to any of the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines.

In describing the ninth pachinko game machine below, the description of the features common to the first to eighth pachinko machines in terms of appearance, electrical configuration, function, shape, layout, etc. will be omitted as much as possible. Differences from the first to eighth pachinko gaming machines will be mainly described. Therefore, matters not mentioned about the following ninth pachinko game machine are common to all or any of the first to eighth pachinko game machines.

In addition, in explaining the ninth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the same configurations and functions as those of the first pachinko game machine.

The base door C4000 shown in FIG. 334 relates to another embodiment of the base door 3 of the first pachinko game machine. The base door C4000 is provided generally inside the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 . On the front side of the base door C4000, as shown in FIG. 333, a glass door 4 provided with a dish unit 5 is pivotally supported. The base door C4000 is formed in a frame shape that encloses the top, bottom, left, and right when viewed from the front by the upper base member C4010, the side plate C4020, and the lower base member C4100. Also, as shown in FIGS. 334, 335 and 347(b), the base door C4000 is provided with a binding wiring member C4180, a back cover C4190, a payout unit C4200, a game ball passage C4230 and a wiring guide member C4300. .

The upper base member C4010 shown in FIG. 334 constitutes the upper part of the base door C4000. The upper base member C4010 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. The upper base member C4010 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The upper base member C4010 has a recess C4011.

The recess C4011 is a portion that is recessed forward on the rear surface of the upper base member C4010. The recess C4011 is provided on the right side of the upper base member C4010. A storage tank C4210 of a payout unit C4200, which will be described later, is provided in the recess C4011.

The side plate C4020 constitutes the side portion of the base door C4000. The side plate C4020 is formed in a vertically elongated shape. The side plate C4020 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side. A pair of side plates C4020 are provided on the left and right. The side plate C4020 has upper ends fixed to the left and right ends of the upper base member C4010.

The lower base member C4100 shown in FIGS. 334 and 335 to 340 constitutes the lower portion of the base door C4000. The lower base member C4100 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. The lower base member C4100 is formed in a substantially inverted L shape when viewed from the side. Also, the lower base member C4100 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. Also, the lower base member C4100 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The lower ends of the side plates C4020 are fixed to the left and right ends of the lower base member C4100.

As shown in FIGS. 336 to 338, the lower base member C4100 is attached with a game ball passage C4230, a wiring guide member C4300 and a binding wiring member C4180, which will be described later. The lower base member C4100 includes a first portion C4110, a second portion C4120, a right portion C4130, a left portion C4140, an accommodation space C4150, a first substrate C4160 and a second substrate C4170.

The first portion C4110 shown in FIGS. 339 and 340 is a portion forming the upper portion of the lower base member C4100. The first portion C4110 is formed to extend horizontally. The first portion C4110 includes a horizontal portion C4111, a rear wall portion C4112 and a holding portion C4113.

The horizontal portion C4111 is a portion formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the vertical direction. The horizontal portion C4111 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view.

The rear wall portion C4112 is a portion that protrudes upward at the rear end portion of the horizontal portion C4111. The rear wall portion C4112 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The rear wall portion C4112 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The rear wall portion C4112 is provided over the entire horizontal portion C4111 in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 336, a first wiring member C4181 and a second wiring member C4182, which will be described later, are wired on the front surface of the rear wall portion C4112. The rear wall portion C4112 has a locking portion C4112a.

The locking portion C4112a shown in FIGS. 336 and 339 locks a first wiring member C4181 and a second wiring member C4182 which will be described later. The locking portion C4112a is provided on the front surface of the rear wall portion C4112. The locking portion C4112a locks each wiring member by inserting each wiring member into an opening penetrating in the left-right direction. A plurality of locking portions C4112a are provided along the left-right direction.

The holding portion C4113 is a portion provided so as to protrude rearward from the right portion of the rear wall portion C4112. The holding portion C4113 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens upward. An appropriate connector (not shown) is held in the holding portion C4113.

The second portion C4120 is a portion forming the lower portion of the lower base member C4100. The second portion C4120 is formed to extend downward from the front end portion of the first portion C4110. The second portion C4120 has a vertical portion C4121 and a lower wall portion C4122.

The vertical portion C4121 is a portion formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The vertical portion C4121 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The upper end of the vertical portion C4121 is connected to the front end of the horizontal portion C4111. As shown in FIG. 340, an opening C4121a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the upper left portion of the vertical portion C4121. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 339, the opening C4121a is formed so that the front portion penetrates the vertical portion C4121 in the front-rear direction, and the rear portion penetrates the horizontal portion C4111 in the vertical direction.

The lower wall portion C4122 shown in FIG. 339 is a portion that protrudes forward at the lower end portion of the vertical portion C4121. The lower wall portion C4122 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the vertical direction. The lower wall portion C4122 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The lower wall portion C4122 is provided over the entire left-right direction of the vertical portion C4121.

The right side portion C4130 is a portion that constitutes the right end portion of the lower base member C4100. The right side portion C4130 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The right side portion C4130 is formed in a shape (substantially inverted L shape) that generally corresponds to the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 in a right side view. The right portion C4130 is provided at the right ends of the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120. The right side portion C4130 has a recessed portion C4131.

A recessed portion C4131 shown in FIG. 340 is a portion recessed leftward in the right side portion C4130. The recess C4131 is provided so as to overlap with the first portion C4110 in the right side view. An opening C4131a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in the surface facing the left-right direction of the recess C4131.

The left side portion C4140 shown in FIG. 339 is a portion forming the left end portion of the lower base member C4100. The left side portion C4140 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The left side portion C4140 is formed in a shape (substantially inverted L shape) that generally corresponds to the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 in a left side view. The left side portion C4140 is provided on the left side of the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 with an accommodation space C4150, which will be described later, interposed therebetween.

The housing space C4150 shown in FIGS. 337 to 339 is a space for housing a game ball passage C4230 and a wiring guide member C4300 which will be described later. The accommodation space C4150 is located between the left end portions of the first portion C4110 and the second portion C4120 and the left portion C4140. The accommodation space C4150 comprises a first recess C4151 and a second recess C4152.

The first concave portion C4151 constitutes the upper portion of the accommodation space C4150. The first recess C4151 is formed to be recessed downward on the left side of the first portion C4110. The first recess C4151 accommodates the lower portion of a game ball passage C4230, which will be described later. A locking portion C4151a is provided on the front surface of the first recess C4151. The locking portion C4151a is formed in substantially the same shape as the locking portion C4112a of the rear wall portion C4112.

The second recessed portion C4152 constitutes the lower portion of the accommodation space C4150. The second recessed portion C4152 is formed so as to be recessed rearward on the left side of the second portion C4120. A wiring guide member C4300, which will be described later, is accommodated in the second recess C4152.

The first board C4160 shown in FIGS. 337, 339 and 340 is a board (relay board) provided on the right side of the lower base member C4100. The first board C4160 relays signals relating to the operation (control) of the gaming machine. The first substrate C4160 is provided on the right side of the rear surface of the vertical portion C4121 of the second portion C4120 via an appropriate member (not shown). The first substrate C4160 is provided such that its upper portion is positioned within the recess C4131 of the right side portion C4130. The first substrate C4160 is arranged with the thickness direction facing the left-right direction. The first board C4160 comprises a first connector C4161 and a second connector C4162.

The first connector C4161 shown in FIGS. 337 and 340 connects the first substrate C4160 and a first wiring member C4181, which will be described later. An insertion portion C4181a of a first wiring member C4181, which will be described later, is inserted through the first connector C4161. The first connector C4161 is provided on the upper left surface of the first board C4160.

The second connector C4162 connects the first board C4160 and a second wiring member C4182, which will be described later. An insertion portion C4182a of a second wiring member C4182, which will be described later, is inserted through the second connector C4162. The second connector C4162 is provided on the upper left surface of the first board C4160. The second connector C4162 is provided in front of the first connector C4161.

The second board C4170 shown in FIG. 340 is a board (relay board) provided on the left side of the lower base member C4100. The second board C4170 relays signals relating to the operation (control) of the gaming machine. The second substrate C4170 is provided on the left portion of the rear surface of the vertical portion C4121 of the second portion C4120. The second substrate C4170 is arranged with the thickness direction facing the front-rear direction. A second board C4170 comprises a third connector C4171.

The third connector C4171 shown in FIGS. 337 and 340 connects the second substrate C4170 and a third wiring member C4183 which will be described later. An insertion portion C4183a of a third wiring member C4183, which will be described later, is inserted through the third connector C4171. A third connector C4171 is provided on the front surface of the second substrate C4170.

The binding wiring member C4180 shown in FIGS. 336, 337 and 340 connects the first substrate C4160 and the second substrate C4170 to the substrate (for example, relay substrate) provided on the glass door 4 side. be. The bundled wiring member C4180 is formed by binding a plurality of wiring members (first wiring member C4181, second wiring member C4182, and third wiring member C4183). The binding wiring member C4180 includes a first wiring member C4181, a second wiring member C4182, a third wiring member C4183 and a binding member C4184.

The first wiring member C4181 is connectable to the first connector C4161 of the first substrate C4160. One end of the first wiring member C4181 is provided with an insertion portion C4181a that can be inserted (connected) to the first connector C4161. The other end (not shown) of the first wiring member C4181 is connected to an appropriate connector on the board provided on the glass door 4 side.

The second wiring member C4182 is connectable to the second connector C4162 of the first substrate C4160. An insertion portion C4182a that can be inserted (connected) to the second connector C4162 is provided at one end of the second wiring member C4182. The other end (not shown) of the second wiring member C4182 is connected to an appropriate connector on the board provided on the glass door 4 side.

The third wiring member C4183 is connectable to the third connector C4171 of the second substrate C4170. An insertion portion C4183a that can be inserted (connected) to the third connector C4171 is provided at one end of the third wiring member C4183. The other end (not shown) of the third wiring member C4183 is connected to an appropriate connector on the board provided on the glass door 4 side. The third wiring member C4183 is formed shorter than the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182.

The lengths of the first wiring member C4181, the second wiring member C4182 and the third wiring member C4183 as described above are set according to the distance between the connectors to be connected. Therefore, each wiring member is formed to have a different length. The length of each wiring member is not limited to such a mode, and part or all of each wiring member may be set to the same length.

The binding member C4184 shown in FIG. 347(b) can bind the first wiring member C4181, the second wiring member C4182 and the third wiring member C4183. The binding member C4184 is a band-shaped member that can be bound by tightening each wiring. The binding member C4184 is arranged at an appropriate position where each wiring can be bound. A plurality of binding members C4184 may be provided in forming the binding wiring member C4180, or only one may be provided.

In addition, in the example described above, an example in which the bundled wiring member C4180 is formed by binding three wiring members is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. The number of wiring members included in the binding wiring member C4180 may be more or less than three. The bundled wiring member C4180 is wired along the lower base member C4100, and is guided toward the glass door 4 by a wiring guide member C4300, which will be described later. A detailed description of the wiring mode of the binding wiring member C4180 will be given later.

A rear cover C4190 shown in FIGS. 334 and 349 is provided at the rear of the base door C4000. Specifically, the rear cover C4190 is provided so as to cover the rear portions of the upper base member C4010, the side plates C4020, and the lower base member C4100 which are provided in the shape of a square frame as shown in FIG. The back cover C4190 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The rear cover C4190 has a first hole C4191 and a second hole C4192.

The first hole C4191 shown in FIG. 349 penetrates the rear cover C4190 in the front-rear direction. The first hole C4191 is formed in an elongated hole shape elongated in the vertical direction. A plurality of first holes C4191 are formed at intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions.

The second hole C4192 penetrates the back cover C4190 in the front-rear direction at a portion different from the first hole C4191. The second hole C4192 is formed at a position that overlaps with a hole 98a of the sub-board case 98, which will be described later, when viewed from the rear. The second hole C4192 is formed in an arc shape. A plurality of second holes C4192 are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction and arranged in a circular shape. A plurality of second holes C4192 are formed in the radial direction so as to be arranged in a plurality of concentric circles.

A payout unit C4200 shown in FIGS. 335 and 341 to 343 pays out game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) to the plate unit 5 side. The payout unit C4200 is provided at the rear of the upper base member C4010 and the lower base member C4100. The dispensing unit C4200 comprises a storage tank C4210 and a ball passage C4220.

The storage tank C4210 stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown). The storage tank C4210 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. The storage tank C4210 is provided in the recess C4011 of the upper base member C4010 (see FIG. 334). The storage tank C4210 comprises a storage portion C4211, an alignment portion C4212 and a passage portion C4213.

The storage part C4211 is a part that stores game balls. The storage part C4211 constitutes the right part of the storage tank C4210. The storage part C4211 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens upward. The reservoir C4211 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view.

The aligning portion C4212 shown in FIGS. 341 and 342 can align game balls flowing down from the storage portion C4211 to the ball passage C4220. The alignment section C4212 includes an alignment passage C4212a and a cover section C4212b.

The alignment passage C4212a constitutes a passage through which the game balls in the storage section C4211 can pass leftward. The right end of the alignment passage C4212a is connected to the left end of the reservoir C4211. The alignment passage C4212a is inclined so as to roll the game ball to the left. Also, the alignment passage C4212a is formed such that the width dimension (front-rear dimension) gradually decreases toward the left. The left end of the alignment passage C4212a is formed to have a width dimension through which one game ball can pass. Thereby, the game balls rolling in the alignment passage C4212a can be aligned in a line.

The cover portion C4212b covers the alignment passage C4212a from above. The cover portion C4212b is formed in a shape corresponding to the alignment passage C4212a in plan view. The cover portion C4212b has a contact surface C4212c facing the alignment passage C4212a side (lower side). A plurality of game balls piled up in the storage portion C4211, in the process of moving toward the alignment passage C4212a, contact the contact surface C4212c of the cover portion C4212b so that the height becomes substantially constant (that is, All game balls are leveled so that they roll directly on the floor surface of the aligned passage C4212a). Thereby, the game balls rolling in the alignment passage C4212a can be aligned.

The passage portion C4213 shown in FIGS. 341 to 343 allows the game balls aligned by the alignment portion C4212 to flow down to the ball passage C4220. The passage portion C4213 constitutes a passage elongated in the left-right direction. The width dimension of the passage portion C4213 is formed to be the same as the width dimension of the left end portion of the alignment portion C4212. The passage portion C4213 includes a horizontal portion C4213a, a curved portion C4213b and a cover portion C4213c.

The horizontal portion C4213a is a portion that extends substantially horizontally (lateral direction). The right end of the horizontal portion C4213a is connected to the left end of the alignment portion C4212. The horizontal portion C4213a is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball rolls leftward.

The curved portion C4213b is a portion that curves downward. The curved portion C4213b is provided at the left end of the horizontal portion C4213a. A lower end portion of the curved portion C4213b is connected to an upper end connection portion C4221a of the ball passage C4220.

The cover portion C4213c covers the horizontal portion C4213a and the curved portion C4213b from above. The cover portion C4213c is formed in a shape corresponding to the horizontal portion C4213a and the curved portion C4213b in plan view. The upward movement of the game ball falling over the horizontal portion C4213a and the curved portion C4213b is restricted by the cover portion C4213c.

The ball passage C4220 shown in FIGS. 341 and 343 allows game balls from the storage tank C4210 to flow down to a game ball passage C4230, which will be described later. A ball passage C4220 is attached to the left side plate C4020. The ball passage C4220 comprises a main passage C4221 and a branch passage C4222.

The main passage C4221 is the main structure of the ball passage C4220. The main passage C4221 constitutes a vertically long passage. The main passage C4221 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The main passage C4221 has an upper end connection portion C4221a and a first lower end connection portion C4221b.

The upper end connection portion C4221a is connected to the lower end portion of the curved portion C4213b of the storage tank C4210. The upper end connection portion C4221a is provided at the upper end portion of the main passage C4221. The upper end connection portion C4221a opens upward.

The first lower end connection portion C4221b shown in FIG. 341 is connected to an upper passage C4231 of a game ball passage C4230 which will be described later. The first lower end connection portion C4221b is provided at the lower end portion of the main passage C4221. The first lower end connection portion C4221b opens forward.

The branch passage C4222 is a passage branched from the main passage C4221. The branch passage C4222 is formed in a vertically elongated shape. The branch passage C4222 is provided to the left of the first lower end connection portion C4221b at the lower end of the main passage C4221. The branch passage C4222 is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the main passage C4221. The branch passage C4222 has a second lower end connection portion C4222a.

The second lower end connection portion C4222a is connected to a lower passage C4232 of a game ball passage C4230 which will be described later. The second lower end connection portion C4222a is provided at the lower end portion of the branch passage C4222. The second lower end connection portion C4222a opens downward.

The payout unit C4200 as described above comprises a predetermined payout device (not shown) for paying out the game balls in the storage tank C4210. When a predetermined payout condition is established, the payout device releases a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied from the storage tank C4210 to the ball passage C4220 from the first lower end connection portion C4221b or the second lower end connection portion C4222a. Discharge. As a result, it becomes possible to pay out to the plate unit 5 side via a game ball passage C4230, which will be described later.

The game ball passage C4230 shown in FIGS. 335 to 338, 344 and 345 allows passage of game media from the ball passage C4220 when a predetermined condition (e.g. payout condition) is satisfied. . The game ball passage C4230 is composed of two upper and lower passages, and constitutes a passage elongated in the front-rear direction as a whole. The game ball passage C4230 is provided in the lower base member C4100 such that the lower portion thereof is located in the first recess C4151 of the accommodation space C4150. The game ball passage C4230 is arranged so as to incline forward and downward. The game ball passage C4230 allows the game medium from the ball passage C4220 to pass to the plate unit 5 side. The game ball passage C4230 comprises an upper passage C4231 and a lower passage C4232.

The upper passage C4231 shown in FIG. 344 constitutes the upper part of the game ball passage C4230. The upper passage C4231 allows the game ball from the branch passage C4222 of the ball passage C4220 to pass to the upper plate 51 side of the plate unit 5. Also, the upper passage C4231 guides the game ball from the main passage C4221 (the game ball that did not pass through the branch passage C4222) to the lower passage C4232 described later. The upper passage C4231 includes a first passage portion C4231a and a second passage portion C4231d.

The first passage portion C4231a guides game balls from the main passage C4221 to a lower passage C4232, which will be described later. The first passage portion C4231a is formed from the rear end portion of the upper passage C4231 to the middle portion in the front-rear direction. The first passage portion C4231a includes a first supply port C4231b and an opening portion C4231c.

The first supply port C4231b is a portion connected to the first lower end connection portion C4221b of the main passage C4221. The first supply port C4231b is provided at the rear end portion of the first passage portion C4231a. The first supply port C4231b opens rearward.

The opening C4231c is a portion that opens downward at the front end of the first passage C4231a. By passing through the opening C4231c, the game ball rolling in the first passage C4231a moves downward (drops).

The second passage portion C4231d allows game balls from the branch passage C4222 to pass through to the upper plate 51 side of the plate unit 5 . The second passage portion C4231d is formed over the entire front-rear direction of the upper passage C4231. The second passage portion C4231d is formed to the left of the first passage portion C4231a. In addition, since there is nothing between the second passage portion C4231d and the first passage portion C4231a to prevent the game ball from rolling, the second passage portion C4231d and the first passage portion C4231a communicate with each other. It is The second passage portion C4231d has a second supply port C4231e and a discharge port C4231f.

The second supply port C4231e is a portion connected to the second lower end connection portion C4222a of the branch passage C4222. The second supply port C4231e is provided at the rear end of the second passage portion C4231d. The second supply port C4231e opens upward.

The discharge port C4231f is a portion that discharges the game ball rolling in the second passage portion C4231d to the upper plate 51 side of the plate unit 5 . The outlet C4231f is provided at the front end of the second passage portion C4231d. The outlet C4231f opens forward. The discharge port C4231f is connected to an appropriate path (not shown) that communicates with the dispensing port 53 of the upper tray 51 .

The lower passage C4232 shown in FIGS. 344 and 345 constitutes the lower part of the game ball passage C4230. The lower passage C4232 passes game balls from the main passage C4221 supplied through the opening C4231c to the lower tray 52 side of the tray unit 5 . The lower passage C4232 has a passage portion C4232a and an outlet C4232b.

The passage portion C4232a allows the game ball from the opening portion C4231c to pass through to the lower tray 52 side. The passage portion C4232a is formed over the entire front-rear direction of the lower passage C4232. The rear portion of the passage portion C4232a overlaps the opening portion C4231c in plan view. The game ball dropped from the opening C4231c rolls forward on the passage C4232a. The passage portion C4232a has an outlet C4232b.

The discharge port C4232b is a portion that discharges the game ball rolling in the passage portion C4232a to the lower plate 52 side of the plate unit 5. The outlet C4232b is provided at the front end of the passage portion C4232a. The outlet C4232b opens forward. The passage portion C4232a is connected to an appropriate path (not shown) that communicates with the outlet 55 of the lower tray 52 .

In addition, if the upper plate 51 is full, the game ball cannot be discharged from the discharge port C4231f of the second passage portion C4231d to the upper plate 51 side, and the game ball is discharged to the second passage portion C4231d. The ball will endure. In such a case, the game ball rolls from the second passage portion C4231d to the first passage portion C4231a and is supplied to the passage portion C4232a through the opening portion C4231c. That is, when the upper tray 51 is full, game balls are put out to the lower tray 52 instead of the upper tray 51 .

The wiring guide member C4300 shown in FIGS. 336 to 338, 344, 346 and 347 can guide the wiring direction (passing direction) of the bundled wiring member C4180. The wiring guide member C4300 is provided on the lower base member C4100 so as to be positioned within the second recess C4152 of the accommodation space C4150 (accommodated in the second recess C4152).

As shown in FIG. 336, the wiring guide member C4300 is provided below the game ball passage C4230. The wiring guide member C4300 is arranged such that the upper portion thereof is close to the lower portion of the game ball passage C4230. The wiring guide member C4300 includes a guide case portion C4310, a guide portion C4320 and a cover portion C4330.

The guide case portion C4310 shown in FIGS. 344 and 346 holds a guide portion C4320 and a cover portion C4330 which will be described later. The guide case portion C4310 is provided on the front facing surface of the second recess C4152 (see FIG. 338). The guide case portion C4310 is formed with an accommodation space C4310a that opens downward and accommodates the upper portions of the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330. The guide case portion C4310 has a front portion C4311 and a rear portion C4312.

The front portion C4311 shown in FIG. 346 constitutes the front portion of the guide case portion C4310. The front portion C4311 includes a housing portion C4311a.

The accommodation portion C4311a constitutes the front portion of the accommodation space C4310a. The accommodation portion C4311a opens rearward and downward.

The rear portion C4312 constitutes the rear portion of the guide case portion C4310. The front part C4311 is fixed to the front surface of the rear part C4312. The rear portion C4312 is fixed to the forward facing surface of the second recessed portion C4152. The rear portion C4312 includes a housing portion C4312a and a bearing portion C4312b.

The accommodation portion C4312a constitutes the rear portion of the accommodation space C4310a. The accommodation portion C4312a opens forward and downward.

The bearing portion C4312b pivotally supports a shaft portion C4321a of the guide portion C4320 and a shaft portion C4331a of the cover portion C4330, which will be described later. The bearing portion C4312b is formed so as to be recessed rearward on the front surface of the rear portion C4312. The bearing portions C4312b are provided on both the left and right sides of the housing portion C4312a.

The guide portion C4320 shown in FIGS. 344, 346, and 347 guides the wiring member C4180 by changing the passing direction of the wiring member C4180. The guide portion C4320 is formed in a shape that opens upward and to the right. As shown in FIG. 347, the binding wiring member C4180 passing from the rear to the front is introduced into the guide portion C4320 from the upper opening. As shown in FIG. 346, the guide portion C4320 guides the wiring bundle C4180 introduced from above downward, then forward, and then guides it rightward. Further, the guide portion C4320 guides the binding wiring member C4180 led out to the right further forward. A detailed description of the guidance of the binding wiring member C4180 by the guide portion C4320 will be given later. The guide portion C4320 includes a side portion C4321, an upper conversion portion C4322, a lower conversion portion C4323, a first wall portion C4324, a second wall portion C4325 and a third wall portion C4326.

The side portion C4321 constitutes the left portion of the guide portion C4320. The side portion C4321 is formed in a substantially oval shape elongated in one direction (diagonally up and down direction in the figure) in a side view. The side portion C4321 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the left-right direction. The side portion C4321 has a shaft portion C4321a.

A shaft portion C4321a shown in FIG. 346 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the left bearing portion C4312b. The shaft portion C4321a protrudes leftward from the left surface of the side portion C4321. The shaft portion C4321a is provided on the upper portion of the side portion C4321.

The upper converting portion C4322 shown in FIG. 347(b) is capable of converting the passing direction of the binding wiring member C4180 introduced from above from forward to downward. The upper converting portion C4322 is formed in a substantially columnar shape protruding rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The upper converting portion C4322 is formed at the rear portion of the side portion C4321 above the central portion in the vertical direction. The bundled wiring member C4180 is partially abutted against the upper converting portion C4322, so that the passing direction is changed from the front to the lower side. Note that the conversion of the passing direction by the upper converting portion C4322 is not limited to a mode in which the passing direction is changed by direct contact (contact) of the binding wiring member C4180 with the upper converting portion C4322. For example, it is possible to employ a mode in which the passing direction is changed while the binding wiring member C4180 approaches the upper converting portion C4322 without directly contacting it. The upper converting portion C4322 has a screw hole C4322a.

Appropriate screws for fixing the cover portion C4330, which will be described later, are inserted through the screw holes C4322a. The screw hole C4322a is formed in the right surface of the upper converter C4322.

The lower conversion part C4323 can convert the passing direction of the binding wiring member C4180, which has been converted downward by the upper conversion part C4322, forward. The lower converting portion C4323 is formed in a substantially columnar shape protruding rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The lower converting portion C4323 is formed below the upper converting portion C4322. Also, the lower converting portion C4323 is formed forward of the upper converting portion C4322. More specifically, the lower converting portion C4323 is formed below the central portion in the vertical direction in the middle portion in the front-rear direction of the side portion C4321. The passage direction of the bundled wiring member C4180 is changed from below to forward by a portion of the bundled wiring member C4180 coming close to the lower conversion portion C4323. The lower converting portion C4323 has a screw hole C4323a.

Appropriate screws for fixing the cover portion C4330, which will be described later, are inserted through the screw holes C4323a. The screw hole C4323a is formed in the right surface of the lower converting portion C4323.

The 1st wall part C4324 is a wall formed in the rear part and lower part of the guide part C4320. The first wall portion C4324 is formed to protrude rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The first wall portion C4324 is formed generally along the circumference of the side portion C4321. More specifically, the first wall portion C4324 is formed generally along the circumference of the side portion C4321 from the lower end portion of the upper conversion portion C4322 to the lower portion of the guide portion C4320 (below the lower conversion portion C4323). be.

The second wall portion C4325 is a wall formed on the front side of the first wall portion C4324. The second wall portion C4325 is formed to protrude rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The second wall portion C4325 is formed to extend from the front end portion of the first wall portion C4324 to the lower end portion of the lower conversion portion C4323.

The third wall portion C4326 is a wall formed in the front portion of the guide portion C4320. The third wall portion C4326 is formed to protrude rightward from the right surface of the side portion C4321. The third wall portion C4326 is formed to extend from the upper end portion of the second wall portion C4325 to the front upper portion of the circumference of the side portion C4321. The third wall portion C4326 can suppress the forward and upward movement of the wiring bundle member C4180.

The cover portion C4330 shown in FIGS. 344, 346 and 347(a) covers the right opening of the guide portion C4320. The cover portion C4330 is formed in a shape generally corresponding to the guide portion C4320 (side portion C4321) in a side view. The cover portion C4330 includes a shaft portion C4331, a notch portion C4332 and a hole portion C4333.

The shaft portion C4331 is a portion that is supported by the right bearing portion C4312b (see FIG. 344). The shaft portion C4331 protrudes rightward from the right surface of the cover portion C4330. The shaft portion C4331 is provided on the upper portion of the cover portion C4330.

The notch C4332 shown in FIGS. 346 and 347(a) exposes the lower portion of the guide portion C4320 (below the lower conversion portion C4323) in the right side view. The notch portion C4332 is formed in a shape obtained by notching the lower portion of the cover portion C4330.

An appropriate screw for fixing the cover portion C4330 to the guide portion C4320 is inserted through the hole portion C4333. The hole portion C4333 penetrates the cover portion C4330 in the left-right direction. The hole C4333 is formed at a position overlapping the screw holes C4322a and C4323a in a side view.

The guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330 fixed to each other are attached to the guide case portion C4310 by axially supporting the shaft portions C4321a and C4331a to the bearing portion C4312b of the guide case portion C4310. In this state, the upper portions of the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330 are accommodated in the accommodation space C4310a of the guide case portion C4310 (see FIG. 344). Further, as shown in FIG. 347(b), the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330 are provided so as to be able to swing about the axes of the shaft portions C4321a and C4331a with respect to the guide case portion C4310.

Below, the procedure for wiring the binding wiring member C4180 in the base door C4000 as described above will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 346 and 347(b), the wiring bundle member C4180 is attached to the guide portion C4320. At this time, as shown in FIG. 347(b), the passage direction (for example, the front-rear direction) of the bundled wiring member C4180 introduced from the upper portion of the guide portion C4320 should be brought into contact with (approach) the upper conversion portion C4322. to convert downwards. In addition, the passing direction of the bundled wiring member C4180, which has been converted downward by the upper converting portion C4322, is converted forward by abutting (approaching) the lower converting portion C4323. That is, the bundled wiring member C4180 is guided in a substantially S-shape by the guide portion C4320.

In addition, the bundled wiring member C4180 whose passing direction has been changed forward by the lower conversion portion C4323 is guided rightward by abutting (approaching) the rear surface of the second wall portion C4325.

Next, the cover portion C4330 is fixed to the guide portion C4320 using appropriate screws. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring bundle C4180 from coming off the guide portion C4320. In this state, the bundled wiring member C4180 is led out to the right from the rightward opening defined by the first wall portion C4324, the second wall portion C4325, and the notch portion C4332. Also, the binding wiring member C4180 led out to the right is guided further forward by abutting (approaching) the right end portion of the second wall portion C4325 (see FIG. 346).

Next, as shown in FIG. 346, the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330 are attached to the guide case portion C4310 to form the wiring guide member C4300.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the wiring guide member C4300 is attached to the second recess C4152 of the lower base member C4100.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 336 and 337, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 of the binding wiring member C4180 on the upper side of the guide portion C4320 are attached to the rear wall portion of the lower base member C4100. Pass along C4112. At this time, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 are locked by the locking portion C4112a of the first concave portion C4151 and the locking portion C4112a of the rear wall portion C4112.

Next, as shown in FIG. 340, one end sides of the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 (the side of the insertion portion C4181a and the insertion portion C4182a) are inserted into the opening portion C4131a, and the lower base member C4100 ( It is led out to the rear side of the vertical portion C4121). Also, the insertion portion C4181a of the first wiring member C4181 and the insertion portion C4182a of the second wiring member C4182 are inserted into the first connector C4161 and the second connector C4162 of the first substrate C4160.

Next, as shown in FIG. 340, one end side (insertion portion C4183a side) of the third wiring member C4183 of the binding wiring member C4180 on the upper side of the guide portion C4320 is attached to the lower base member C4100 (vertical portion C4121). is inserted through the opening C4121a of the vertical portion C4121 and led out to the rear surface side of the vertical portion C4121. Also, the insertion portion C4183a of the third wiring member C4183 is inserted into the third connector C4171 of the second substrate C4170.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 336 to 338, the game ball passage C4230 is attached to the first recess C4151. In this state, the wire guide member C4300 and the game ball passage C4230 are close to each other.

According to the base door C4000 as described above, the wire bundle C4180 can be wired appropriately by guiding the wire bundle C4180 in the passing direction by the wire guide member C4300 (the guide portion C4320).

In other words, the guide portion C4320 (upper conversion portion C4322) guides downward the passage direction of the binding wiring member C4180 directed forward. Thereby, interference with the game ball passage C4230 arranged close to the upper portion of the wiring guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320) can be suppressed.

Further, the guide portion C4320 (lower conversion portion C4323) guides forward the downward passage direction of the binding wiring member C4180. As a result, the wiring guide member C4300 can be preferably wired toward the substrate provided on the glass door 4 side.

Further, according to the wiring guide member C4300 (the guide portion C4320), it is possible to collectively guide the binding wiring member C4180 composed of three wiring members. This facilitates the management and work of each wiring member, unlike the case where the passage direction of each wiring member is changed individually. Moreover, the risk of disconnection of each wiring member can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330 are provided so as to be swingable with respect to the guide case portion C4310. As a result, for example, when the wiring bundle C4180 is connected to the substrate provided on the glass door 4 side and the glass door 4 is opened with respect to the base door C4000, disconnection due to the wiring bundle C4180 being pulled is prevented. etc. can be suppressed.

The board unit 9 provided on the base door C4000 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 348 to 350. FIG. The board unit 9 is arranged on the back (rear) side of the base door C4000. The board unit 9 is covered with a rear cover C4190. The board unit 9 mainly includes a main control board 91 , a sub control board 92 , a main board case 95 and a sub board case 98 .

The main control board 91 shown in FIG. 348 is a board on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) is mounted.

The sub-control board 92 is a board on which the sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6) is mounted.

A main board case 95 shown in FIG. 348 covers the main control board 91 . The main board case 95 has a first case 96 and a second case 97 .

The first case 96 accommodates the main control board 91 . The first case 96 is provided on the game board unit 10 side. The first case 96 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. The first case 96 is formed in a substantially box-like shape that opens rearward. The main control board 91 is provided on the rear surface of the first case 96 (inside the first case 96). The first case 96 has an engraving 96a.

The engraving 96a is an indication of characters or symbols provided on the first case 96. As shown in FIG. The marking 96a is provided on the left end of the first case 96 along the vertical direction. The characters and symbols displayed as the stamp 96a are not limited to those shown in the figure, and can be set as appropriate. The marking 96a is applied using, for example, a laser.

The second case 97 covers the main control board 91 accommodated in the first case 96 from behind. A second case 97 is fixed to the first case 96 . The second case 97 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back. The lateral dimension of the second case 97 is smaller than the lateral dimension of the first case 96 . The left end of the second case 97 is positioned to the right of the marking 96 a of the first case 96 . When the second case 97 fixed to the first case 96 is removed from the first case 96, the portion fixed to the first case 96 is damaged. Therefore, the second case 97 once removed cannot be attached to the first case 96 again. The second case 97 has an engraving 97a.

The engraving 97 a is the same characters or symbols as those of the first case 96 applied to the second case 97 . The marking 97a is provided on the left end of the second case 97 along the vertical direction. The marking 97a is provided so as to be positioned to the right of the marking 96a on the first case 96. As shown in FIG.

By providing the markings 97a and markings 97a as described above, it is possible to confirm that fraudulent acts such as cheating have been carried out. That is, if another person forcibly opens the second case 97 for the purpose of illegally replacing the main control board 91, the second case 97 is partially damaged as described above. It cannot be attached to the case 96 of 1. Therefore, if the fraudulent act is committed, it is conceivable to attach another case to the first case 96 instead of the damaged second case 97 after the main control board 91 is replaced. In such a case, since the stamp 97a and the stamp 97a do not match, it is known that a fraudulent act has been carried out.

The sub board case 98 shown in FIGS. 348 to 350 covers the sub control board 92 from behind. The sub-control board 92 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens forward. The sub-control board 92 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. The sub-board case 98 has a hole 98a.

The hole portion 98a penetrates the sub-board case 98 in the front-rear direction. The hole 98a allows the exhaust air from the fan provided on the sub-control board 92 to pass therethrough. The hole 98a is formed in an arc shape. A plurality of holes 98a are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction and arranged in a circular shape. A plurality of holes 98a are formed in the radial direction so as to be arranged in a plurality of concentric circles. The hole portion 98a is formed at a position overlapping with the second hole portion C4192 of the rear cover C4190 in rear view.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 350, the portion defining the hole 98a of the sub-board case 98 is inclined radially outward toward the rear. That is, the portion is formed in a louver shape. By doing so, the hole 98a is formed so that the inside of the sub-board case 98 can be seen from the rear side when viewed obliquely along the inclination, but the inside of the sub-board case 98 cannot be seen from the rear side. be. In this way, by making the inside of the sub-board case 98 invisible from the back side, it is possible to make it difficult to gossip.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above publication discloses a game machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotating motion.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a base member (lower base member C4100), a storage member (storage tank C4210) capable of storing game media, and a first connector connectable to the first connector C4161. It comprises a wiring member C4181, a second wiring member C4182 connectable to a second connector C4162, and a third wiring member C4183 connectable to a third connector C4171.

With such a configuration, each connector and each wiring member connectable to each connector can be used to suitably operate the game machine, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

Further, the base member (lower base member C4100) includes a first substrate C4160 and a second substrate C4170 different from the first substrate C4160,
The first board C4160 comprises the first connector C4161 and the second connector C4162,
The second substrate C4170 is characterized by having the third connector C4171.

With such a configuration, the gaming machine can be suitably operated using the first board C4160 including the first connector C4161 and the second connector C4162 and the second board C4170 including the third connector C4171. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the first wiring member C4181 and the third wiring member C4183 are wiring members having different lengths.

With such a configuration, the wiring members having different lengths can be used to operate the game machine appropriately, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

Also provided is a game medium passage (ball passage C4220) through which the game medium stored in the storage member (storage tank C4210) can pass,
The storage member (storage tank C4210) has an alignment portion C4212 capable of aligning the game media flowing down to the game media passage (ball passage C4220),
The alignment part C4212 includes a cover part C4212b capable of covering at least part of the storage member (storage tank C4210),
The cover portion C4212b includes a contact portion (contact surface C4212c) capable of contacting the game medium flowing down the alignment portion C4212,
The game media can be aligned at the alignment portion C4212 by contacting the game media with the contact portion (contact surface C4212c).

With such a configuration, by aligning the game media in the aligning section C4212, the game media stored in the storage member (storage tank C4210) can be suitably made to flow down to the game media passageway (ball passage C4220). .

Further, a predetermined member (binding member C4184) capable of binding each wiring member of the first wiring member C4181, the second wiring member C4182 and the third wiring member C4183 is provided,
The predetermined member (binding member C4184) can form a binding wiring member C4180 by binding the wiring members.

With such a configuration, each wiring member can be easily managed by binding each wiring member with a predetermined member (binding member C4184). Moreover, the risk of disconnection of each wiring member can be reduced.

Also, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 are provided so as to pass through a predetermined passing portion (rear wall portion C4112) of the base member (lower base member C4100).

With such a configuration, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 are preferably arranged so as to pass through the predetermined passage portion (rear wall portion C4112) of the base member (lower base member C4100). can be wired to

Further, the predetermined passing portion (rear wall portion C4112) has a locking portion C4112a capable of locking the wiring of at least one of the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182. is.

With such a configuration, the wiring of at least one of the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 is locked by the locking portion C4112a, so that each wiring member is connected to the passing portion (rear wall portion). C4112) can be suppressed.

Further, a guide portion C4320 capable of guiding the passing direction of each wiring member of the first wiring member C4181, the second wiring member C4182 and the third wiring member C4183 is provided,
The guide portion C4320 can guide each wiring member guided to the guide portion C4320 from the first passing direction (downward) to the second passing direction (forward).

With such a configuration, the guiding portion C4320 guides the wiring members guided from the first passing direction (downward) to the second passing direction (forward), thereby allowing the wiring members to move. Wiring can be performed appropriately. In addition, the wiring members can be collectively guided by the guide portion C4320. This facilitates the management and work of each wiring member, unlike the case where the passage direction of each wiring member is changed individually. Moreover, the risk of disconnection of each wiring member can be reduced.

Further, the guide portion C4320 includes a conversion portion (lower conversion portion C4323) capable of converting the passing direction of each wiring member,
The passage direction of each wiring member can be changed by a part of each wiring member abutting or coming close to the conversion portion (lower conversion portion C4323).

With such a configuration, each wiring member can be preferably wired by converting the passing direction of each wiring member by the conversion section (lower conversion section C4323).

In addition, a predetermined game medium passage (game ball passage C4230) through which the game medium can pass when a predetermined condition (for example, the condition that the upper tray 51 is full) is established,
The predetermined game medium passage (game ball passage C4230) is provided in the vicinity of the guide portion C4320,
The guide portion C4320 has a specific portion (third wall portion C4326 ).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the interference (abutment) between the predetermined game medium passage (game ball passage C4230) provided in the vicinity of the guide portion C4320 and each wiring member. As a result, the predetermined game medium passage (game ball passage C4230), which is a member through which game media can pass, can be arranged at a suitable position in the vicinity of the guide portion C4320.

Further, the base member (lower base member C4100) has a predetermined space (accommodation space C4150) formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front,
At least one of the guide portion C4320 and part of the predetermined game medium passage (game ball passage C4230) is arranged in the predetermined space (accommodation space C4150).

With such a configuration, the guiding portion C4320 and the predetermined game medium passage (game ball passage) are provided in the predetermined space of the base member (lower base member C4100) through which the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 pass. C4230), each member can be preferably arranged.

In addition, a plurality of the locking portions C4112a are provided in the predetermined passing portion (rear wall portion C4112).

With such a configuration, the first wiring member C4181 and the second wiring member C4182 can be more effectively locked by the plurality of locking portions C4112a.

Further, the conversion unit
a first conversion unit (upper conversion unit C4322) capable of converting the passing direction of each wiring member from the third passing direction (forward) to the first passing direction (downward);
a second conversion unit (lower conversion unit C4323) capable of converting the passing direction of each wiring member from the first passing direction (downward) to the second passing direction (forward);
is provided.

With such a configuration, the passing direction of each wiring member can be converted in two steps by the first conversion unit (upper conversion unit C4322) and the second conversion unit (lower conversion unit C4323). Each wiring member can be wired more suitably.

Note that the lower base member C4100 is one form of the base member.
Further, the rear wall portion C4112 is one form of the passing portion.
Also, the binding member C4184 is one form of a predetermined member.
Moreover, the accommodation space C4150 is one form of a predetermined space.
Moreover, the storage tank C4210 is one form of a storage member.
Also, the contact surface C4212c is one form of a contact portion.
Also, the ball passage C4220 is one form of a game medium passage.
Also, the game ball passage C4230 is one form of a predetermined game medium passage.
Also, the upper conversion unit C4322 is one form of a conversion unit and a first conversion unit.
Also, the lower conversion unit C4323 is one form of a conversion unit and a second conversion unit.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330 are provided swingably with respect to the guide case portion C4310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the guide portion C4320 and the cover portion C4330 may be provided so as not to swing with respect to the guide case portion C4310.

Further, in this embodiment, the binding wiring member C4180 for connecting the substrates (the first substrate C4160 and the second substrate C4170) provided on the lower base member C4100 of the base door C4000 and the substrate on the side of the glass door 4 is Although an example of guiding by the wiring guide member C4300 (the guide portion C4320) has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. The wiring guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320) can guide the binding wiring member C4180 that connects various substrates.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the wiring bundle C4180 is guided by the wiring guide member C4300 (the guide portion C4320) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, each wiring that is not bound by the binding member C4184 may be guided by the wiring guide member C4300 (guide portion C4320).

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the upper conversion portion C4322 and the lower conversion portion C4323 are provided as the conversion portions in the guide portion C4320 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, only the lower converter C4323 may be provided as the converter.

Further, the passing direction of the wiring member C4180 (each wiring member) shown in this embodiment is an example, and the passing direction of the wiring member C4180 (each wiring member) is limited to that shown in this embodiment. do not have.

Further, the shape of the guide portion C4320 shown in this embodiment is an example, and the shape of the guide portion C4320 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment.

Also, in the ninth pachinko game machine, the configuration of the upper unit C4400 is significantly different from the first to eighth pachinko game machines. The upper unit C4400 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 351 to 363. FIG.

The upper unit C4400 shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 constitutes the decoration of the gaming machine. The upper unit C4400 emits light when predetermined light emission control is executed, and can execute a predetermined light emission effect for the player. In addition, the upper unit C4400 can generate sound by executing predetermined sound-related control.

The upper unit C4400, as shown in FIG. 351, is provided above the glass door 4 forming the front part of the gaming machine. The upper unit C4400 is disposed so as to protrude forward (front side) of the glass door 4 (game machine). The upper unit C4400 includes a speaker section C4410, a top cover C4420, a side cover C4430, a lower cover C4440, an upper decorative section C4450, and a decorative unit C4500.

The speaker section C4410 shown in FIG. 352 is for generating sound when a predetermined sound-related control is performed. The speaker unit C4410 can perform, for example, voice notification, presentation, error notification, and the like. The speaker section C4410 is provided above the glass door 4 .

The top cover C4420 covers the rear part of the speaker part C4410 and the later-described decorative unit C4500 from above.

The side cover C4430 shown in FIGS. 351 to 354 covers from the sides the speaker section C4410 and the rear portion of the decoration unit C4500, which will be described later (see FIG. 354). Side covers C4430 are provided on both the left and right sides. The side cover C4430 emits light under predetermined light emission control, so that, for example, it is possible to make a notification or effect with light. The side cover C4430 has a light-emitting substrate having appropriate light-emitting means and a lens capable of transmitting light from the light-emitting means.

The lower cover C4440 shown in FIG. 353 covers the rear part of the speaker part C4410 and the later-described decoration unit C4500 from below. The lower cover C4440 is formed so as to incline upward toward the front. The lower cover C4440 has a warning display portion C4441.

The attention calling display section C4441 calls a predetermined attention to the player. The attention calling display portion C4441 is provided at a position visible to the player. Specifically, the warning display portion C4441 is provided at the lower end portion of the lower cover C4440 at the center portion in the left-right direction. The warning display portion C4441 has a predetermined warning display on the obliquely downward surface. As a warning display, for example, it is possible to adopt a warning such as "caution above the head" against the player hitting the head against the upper unit C4400 projecting to the front side. Note that the display for calling attention is not limited to the example described above, and various types of attention calling can be adopted.

The upper decoration part C4450 shown in FIGS. 351 and 352 constitutes the upper decoration of the upper unit C4400. The upper decorative portion C4450 is provided in front of the top cover C4420. The upper decorative portion C4450 emits light under predetermined light emission control, so that, for example, it is possible to make a notification or effect with light. The upper decorative portion C4450 has a light-emitting substrate (second substrate C4530 described later) having appropriate light-emitting means and a lens capable of transmitting light from the light-emitting means. The upper decorative portion C4450 includes a first character decorative portion C4451, a second character decorative portion C4452 and a central decorative portion C4453.

The first character decoration portion C4451 is decorated with a predetermined character. The first character decoration portion C4451 constitutes the left portion of the upper decoration portion C4450.

The second character decoration portion C4452 is decorated with a predetermined character different from the first character decoration portion C4451. The second character decoration part C4452 constitutes the right part of the upper decoration part C4450.

The central decorative portion C4453 is arranged between the first character decorative portion C4451 and the second character decorative portion C4452. The center decoration portion C4453 is decorated with information (for example, character information) associated with the decoration of the first character decoration portion C4451 and the decoration of the second character decoration portion C4452.

The decoration unit C4500 shown in FIGS. 351, 352, 356 and 357 is capable of executing a predetermined lighting effect for the player. The decoration unit C4500 can emit a decoration imitating a predetermined logo (hereinafter referred to as "logo decoration"). As the logo, it is possible to adopt a logo indicating a title or the like related to the production. The decoration unit C4500 emits light under predetermined light emission control, so that, for example, it is possible to make a notification or effect with light. The decoration unit C4500 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 351, the decoration unit C4500 is arranged in the center of the upper unit C4400 (below the upper decoration part C4450) in front view. The decoration unit C4500 is arranged in front of the speaker section C4410.

The decoration unit C4500 comprises a frame member C4510, a first substrate C4520, a second substrate C4530, a reflection part C4540, a lower lamp part C4550, a diffusion part C4560 and a decoration part C4570.

The frame member C4510 shown in FIGS. 355 and 357 to 360(a) constitutes the rear part of the decoration unit C4500. As shown in FIG. 358, the frame member C4510 is formed in a substantially box shape that opens forward. The frame member C4510 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. A first substrate C4520, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the frame member C4510 (see FIG. 359). The frame member C4510 includes an opening C4511, a wiring passage C4512, a recess C4514, and an upper surface C4515.

A connector C4523 of a first board C4520, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening C4511 shown in FIGS. 355 and 358 to 360(a). The opening C4511 is formed to penetrate the front surface of the frame member C4510 in the front-rear direction.

A plurality of (six in the figure) openings C4511 are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of connectors C4523 described later. The plurality of openings C4511 includes a first opening C4511a, a second opening C4511b, a third opening C4511c, a fourth opening C4511d, a fifth opening C4511e, and a sixth opening C4511f. included.

As shown in FIGS. 355 and 360(a), the first opening C4511a is provided in the upper right portion of the frame member C4510. The second opening C4511b is provided in the upper left part of the frame member C4510. The third opening C4511c is provided in the lower right portion of the frame member C4510. The fourth opening C4511d is provided in the lower portion of the frame member C4510 at substantially the center in the left-right direction. The fifth opening C4511e is provided in the lower left portion of the frame member C4510. The sixth opening C4511f is provided to the right of the fifth opening C4511e in the lower portion of the frame member C4510.

A wiring passage path C4512 shown in FIG. 355 is an area (path) through which a wiring member C4524 (to be described later) connected to a connector C4523 inserted through the opening C4511 passes. The wiring passage C4512 is provided on the rear surface of the frame member C4510. A plurality (five in the figure) of the wiring passing paths C4512 are provided at positions corresponding to the first opening C4511a to the fifth opening C4511e in the opening C4511. The wiring passage C4512 includes a first wiring passage C4512a, a second wiring passage C4512b, a third wiring passage C4512c, a fourth wiring passage C4512d, and a fifth wiring passage C4512e.

The first wire passing path C4512a is provided to the left of the first opening C4511a. The second wire passing path C4512b is provided to the right of the second opening C4511b. The third wiring passage C4512c is provided to the left of the third opening C4511c. The fourth wiring passage C4512d is provided to the left of the fourth opening C4511d. The fifth wire passing path C4512e is provided to the right of the fifth opening C4511e. The wire passing path C4512 has a locking portion C4513.

The locking portion C4513 shown in FIGS. 354, 355 and 359 locks the wiring member C4524. The locking portion C4513 is formed to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the frame member C4510. The locking portion C4513 is formed in a hook shape that opens in the left-right direction and upward. The locking portions C4513 are provided in the left-right direction intermediate portions of the first to fifth wire passage paths C4512a to C4512e. As shown in FIG. 355, the wiring member C4524 can be locked by hooking (sandwiching) the wiring member C4524 passing in the left-right direction on the locking portion C4513.

A recessed portion C4514 shown in FIG. 360(a) is a portion recessed rearward in the front surface of the frame member C4510. The tip (rear end) of a projecting portion C4541c of the reflecting portion C4540, which will be described later, is inserted into the recess C4514. A rear end portion of the recess C4514 is formed with a hole through which an appropriate screw used for fixing the frame member C4510 and the reflecting portion C4540 is inserted. A plurality of recesses C4514 (four in the figure) are formed at intervals in the left-right direction in the middle portion of the frame member C4510 in the vertical direction.

The upper surface portion C4515 shown in FIGS. 356 and 358 is a portion forming the upper surface of the frame member C4510. A second substrate C4530, which will be described later, is provided on the upper surface portion C4515. The upper surface portion C4515 includes a first claw portion C4515a and a second claw portion C4515b.

The first claw portion C4515a locks the front end portion of the second substrate C4530. The first claw portion C4515a is formed to protrude upward from the front end portion of the upper surface portion C4515. The first claw portion C4515a is formed in a shape recessed forward so as to be able to lock the front end portion of the second board C4530. A plurality of (four in the figure) first claw portions C4515a are formed in the horizontal direction.

The second claw portion C4515b locks the rear end portion of the second substrate C4530. The second claw portion C4515b is formed to protrude upward from the rear end portion of the upper surface portion C4515. The second claw portion C4515b is formed in a shape recessed rearward so as to be able to lock the rear end portion of the second substrate C4530. A plurality of (two in the figure) first claw portions C4515a are formed in the horizontal direction.

The first substrate C4520 shown in FIGS. 359 and 360(b) is a substrate used for light emission of the decoration unit C4500. Predetermined electronic components (for example, light emitting elements C4521, etc.) are mounted on the first substrate C4520. The first substrate C4520 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The first substrate C4520 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 359, the first substrate C4520 is attached to the frame member C4510 and the reflector C4540 so as to be sandwiched between the frame member C4510 and the reflector C4540 described later. The first substrate C4520 includes light emitting elements C4521, insertion holes C4522, connectors C4523 and wiring members C4524.

A light-emitting element C4521 shown in FIG. 360(b) emits light as a light source. The light emitting element C4521 is provided on the front surface of the first substrate C4520. A plurality of light emitting elements C4521 are provided at positions corresponding to the logo decoration of the decoration unit C4500. For example, an LED or the like can be used as the light emitting element C4521.

The insertion hole portion C4522 is a hole (hole) that penetrates the first substrate C4520 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction). A projecting portion C4541c of a reflecting portion C4540, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole portion C4522. A plurality (four in the figure) of the insertion holes C4522 are formed at intervals in the horizontal direction in the middle part of the first substrate C4520 in the vertical direction.

The connector C4523 shown in FIGS. 355 and 359 connects the first board C4520 and the wiring member C4524. The connector C4523 is provided on the rear surface of the first board C4520. A plurality of (six in the illustrated example) connectors C4523 are provided. As shown in FIG. 355, when the first board C4520 is attached to the frame member C4510, the connectors C4523 are inserted into the openings C4511. The plurality of connectors C4523 includes a first connector C4523a, a second connector C4523b, a third connector C4523c, a fourth connector C4523d, a fifth connector C4523e and a sixth connector C4523f.

The first connector C4523a is provided on the upper right portion of the first board C4520. The second connector C4523b is provided on the upper left part of the first board C4520. The third connector C4523c is provided on the lower right portion of the first board C4520. The fourth connector C4523d is provided in the lower part of the first substrate C4520 at the substantially central portion in the left-right direction. A fifth connector C4523e is provided at the lower left portion of the first board C4520. The sixth connector C4523f is provided to the right of the fifth connector C4523e on the bottom of the first board C4520.

The wiring member C4524 shown in FIG. 355 connects the first substrate C4520 (connector C4523) and other substrates. The wiring member C4524 is routed through the wiring passing path C4512 of the frame member C4510. A plurality of wiring members C4524 (six in the illustrated example) are provided. The plurality of wiring members C4524 includes a first wiring member C4524a, a second wiring member C4524b, a third wiring member C4524c, a fourth wiring member C4524d, a fifth wiring member C4524e, and a sixth wiring member C4524f. included.

One end of the first wiring member C4524a is connected to the first connector C4523a. The first wiring member C4524a passes through the first wiring passage C4512a in the horizontal direction. The first wiring member C4524a is locked by the locking portion C4513. The other end of the first wiring member C4524a is connected to the substrate of the upper decorative portion C4450.

The second wiring member C4524b has one end connected to the second connector C4523b. The second wiring member C4524b passes through the second wiring passage C4512b in the horizontal direction. The second wiring member C4524b is locked by the locking portion C4513. The other end of the second wiring member C4524b is connected to a second substrate C4530 (connector C4532) described later.

One end of the third wiring member C4524c is connected to the third connector C4523c. The third wiring member C4524c passes through the third wiring passage C4512c in the horizontal direction. The third wiring member C4524c is locked by the locking portion C4513. The other end of the third wiring member C4524c is connected to the substrate (not shown) of the right side cover C4430.

One end of the fourth wiring member C4524d is connected to the fourth connector C4523d. The fourth wiring member C4524d passes through the fourth wiring passage C4512d in the horizontal direction. The fourth wiring member C4524d is locked by the locking portion C4513. The other end of the fourth wiring member C4524d is connected to an appropriate relay board (not shown).

One end of the fifth wiring member C4524e is connected to the fifth connector C4523e. The fifth wiring member C4524e passes through the fifth wiring passage C4512e in the horizontal direction. The fifth wiring member C4524e is locked by the locking portion C4513. The other end of the fifth wiring member C4524e is connected to the substrate (not shown) of the left side cover C4430.

One end of the sixth wiring member C4524f is connected to the sixth connector C4523f. The other end of the sixth wiring member C4524f is connected to a substrate (not shown) of the lower lamp portion C4550, which will be described later.

A second substrate C4530 shown in FIG. 358 is a substrate used for light emission of the upper decorative portion C4450. Predetermined electronic components are mounted on the second board C4530. The second substrate C4530 is formed in a substantially plate-like shape with the plate surface directed generally in the vertical direction. The second substrate C4530 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction in plan view. The second substrate C4530 is attached to the upper surface portion C4515 by engaging the front end portion and the rear end portion with the first claw portion C4515a and the second claw portion C4515b. A second substrate C4530 comprises a light emitting element C4531 and a connector C4532.

The light emitting element C4531 emits light as a light source. The light emitting element C4531 is provided on the upper surface of the second substrate C4530. For example, an LED or the like can be used as the light emitting element C4531.

The connector C4532 connects the second board C4530 and the wiring member C4524 (second wiring member C4524b). The connector C4532 is provided on the bottom surface of the second board C4530. The connector C4532 is arranged so as to be positioned on the rear surface of the frame member C4510 with the second substrate C4530 attached to the upper surface portion C4515.

The reflecting portion C4540 shown in FIGS. 358, 359, 360(c), and 361 can reflect the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 of the first substrate C4520 toward the diffusion portion C4560 (to be described later) (forward). It is. The reflector C4540 is arranged in front of the first substrate C4520 and the frame member C4510. The reflecting portion C4540 includes a base portion C4541, a first lens holding portion C4542 and a second lens holding portion C4549.

The base portion C4541 constitutes the rear portion of the reflecting portion C4540. The base portion C4541 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base portion C4541 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 359, a first substrate C4520 and a frame member C4510 are attached to the rear surface of the base portion C4541. The base portion C4541 includes a first opening C4541a, a second opening C4541b and a protrusion C4541c.

The first opening C4541a shown in FIG. 360(c) is for irradiating the light from the light emitting element C4521 to the first lens holding portion C4542 described later. The first opening C4541a is formed to penetrate the base portion C4541 in the front-rear direction. The first opening C4541a is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of first openings C4541a are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of light emitting elements C4521 in a state where the first substrate C4520 is attached to the base portion C4541.

The second opening C4541b is for irradiating the light from the light emitting element C4521 to the second lens holding portion C4549 which will be described later. The second opening C4541b is formed to penetrate the base portion C4541 in the front-rear direction. The second opening C4541b is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction.

The protruding portion C4541c shown in FIG. 359 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the base portion C4541. The projecting portion C4541c is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. A screw hole used for fixing the frame member C4510 and the reflecting part C4540 is formed in the tip surface of the projecting part C4541c. A plurality of protrusions C4541c (four in the figure) are formed at intervals in the left-right direction at the middle portion of the base portion C4541 in the vertical direction.

The projecting portion C4541c is inserted into the insertion hole portion C4522 of the first substrate C4520. Thereby, the first substrate C4520 can be positioned with respect to the base portion C4541 (reflection portion C4540). Also, the rear end of the projection C4541c is inserted into the recess C4514 of the frame member C4510.

The first lens holding portion C4542 shown in FIGS. 360(c) and 361 holds a diffusion portion C4560 which will be described later. The first lens holding portion C4542 is formed to protrude forward from the front surface of the base portion C4541. The first lens holding portion C4542 is formed in a shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The front end portion (the edge of the opening) of the first lens holding portion C4542 is formed so that the diffusion portion C4560 can be fitted therein. The first lens holding portion C4542 has walls that partition a plurality of spaces (five spaces in the example shown) that are generally aligned in the left-right direction. The number and shape of the plurality of spaces are set so as to correspond to the logo decoration of the decoration unit C4500.

Each space of the first lens holding part C4542 is irradiated with the light of the light emitting element C4521 through the first opening C4541a. The first lens holding portion C4542 includes a first portion C4543, a second portion C4544, a third portion C4545, a fourth portion C4546, a fifth portion C4547 and an insertion hole C4548.

The first portion C4543 partitions the leftmost space among the plurality of spaces. The first portion C4543 holds a first diffusion portion C4561, which will be described later, at the front end portion. The front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the first portion C4543 is formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the first diffusion portion C4561 in front view.

The second portion C4544 partitions the space to the right of the first portion C4543. The second portion C4544 holds a second diffusion portion C4562, which will be described later, at its front end. The front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the second portion C4544 is formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the second diffusion portion C4562 in front view.

The third portion C4545 partitions the space to the right of the second portion C4544 (central space). The third portion C4545 holds a third diffusion portion C4563, which will be described later, at the front end. The front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the third portion C4545 is formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the third diffusion portion C4563 in front view.

The fourth portion C4546 partitions the space to the right of the third portion C4545. The fourth portion C4546 holds a fourth diffusion portion C4564, which will be described later, at its front end. The front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the fourth portion C4546 is formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the fourth diffusion portion C4564 in front view.

The fifth portion C4547 partitions the space to the right of the fourth portion C4546. The fifth portion C4547 holds a fifth diffusion portion C4565, which will be described later, at its front end. A front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the fifth portion C4547 is formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the fifth diffusion portion C4565 in front view.

An insertion hole C4548 shown in FIG. 361 is into which an insertion portion C4567 of a diffusion portion C4560 described later is inserted. The insertion hole portion C4548 is formed so as to vertically penetrate the upper portion of the front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the first lens holding portion C4542. The dimensions (longitudinal dimension and lateral dimension) of the insertion hole portion C4548 are formed in accordance with the dimensions of the insertion portion C4567.

In this embodiment, the insertion holes C4548 are provided in the first portion C4543, the second portion C4544, and the third portion C4545, respectively. Note that the location where the insertion hole portion C4548 is provided is not limited to the example described above. For example, the insertion holes C4548 may be formed in all of the first to fifth portions C4543 to C4547.

The second lens holding portion C4549 holds an upper decorative lens C4583 of a first decorative portion C4580, which will be described later. The second lens holding portion C4549 is provided on the upper right side of the first lens holding portion C4542 on the front surface of the base portion C4541. The second lens holding portion C4549 is formed in a shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The second lens holding portion C4549 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. A front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the second lens holding portion C4549 is formed so as to be capable of being fitted with an upper decorative lens C4583, which will be described later. The front end portion (edge portion of the opening) of the second lens holding portion C4549 is formed in a shape corresponding to the shape of the upper decorative lens C4583 in front view (see FIGS. 357 and 360(c)). The space in the second lens holding portion C4549 is irradiated with light from the light emitting element C4521 through the second opening C4541b.

The lower lamp portion C4550 shown in FIGS. 358 and 360(c) irradiates light to the lower decorative lens C4584 of the first decorative portion C4580, which will be described later. The lower lamp portion C4550 is provided below the reflecting portion C4540. The lower lamp portion C4550 comprises a light emitting substrate having suitable light emitting means. The lower lamp portion C4550 is formed so as to be able to irradiate light through a substantially diamond-shaped opening that opens forward. A plurality of (five in the figure) openings are formed in the horizontal direction.

The diffusion part C4560 shown in FIGS. 358, 360(d), and 361 can diffuse the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 toward the logo decoration lens part C4581 (first decoration part C4580) described later ( inner lens). The diffusion portion C4560 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction generally oriented in the front-rear direction. The diffusing portion C4560 is held by the front end portion of the first lens holding portion C4542 of the reflecting portion C4540. The diffusion portion C4560 is divided into a plurality of (five) members (regions) corresponding to the first portion C4543 to the fifth portion C4547 of the first lens holding portion C4542.

The diffusing portion C4560 is made of a translucent material. Almost the entire diffusing portion C4560 is processed to be able to diffuse the light from the light emitting element C4521 (to widen the irradiation range of light). The diffusion portion C4560 is formed in a shape corresponding to the logo decoration (logo decoration lens portion C4581) of the decoration unit C4500. Diffusion C4560 includes first diffusion C4561, second diffusion C4562, third diffusion C4563, fourth diffusion C4564, fifth diffusion C4565, diffusion opening C4566 and insert C4567. equip.

The first diffusion portion C4561 is a portion held at the front end portion of the first portion C4543 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The first diffusion part C4561 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the first portion C4543.

The second diffusion portion C4562 is a portion held at the front end portion of the second portion C4544 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The second diffusion portion C4562 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the second portion C4544.

The third diffusion portion C4563 is a portion held at the front end portion of the third portion C4545 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The third diffusion portion C4563 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the third portion C4545.

The fourth diffusion portion C4564 is a portion held at the front end portion of the fourth portion C4546 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The fourth diffusing portion C4564 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the fourth portion C4546.

The fifth diffusion portion C4565 is a portion held at the front end portion of the fifth portion C4547 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The fifth diffusing portion C4565 diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 into the space defined by the fifth portion C4547.

The diffusion opening C4566 penetrates the diffusion portion C4560 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction). The diffusion opening C4566 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. A rear end portion of a concave portion C4582a of a first decorative portion C4580, which will be described later, is inserted through the diffusion opening portion C4566. The diffusion part C4560 is not processed to diffuse the light from the light emitting element C4521 in the part where the diffusion opening C4566 is formed.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (six in the figure) diffusion openings C4566 are provided in the first diffusion portion C4561, the second diffusion portion C4562, the fourth diffusion portion C4564, and the fifth diffusion portion C4565. there is The diffusion openings C4566 are provided at different positions for each region.

More specifically, the first diffusing portion C4561 has a diffusing opening C4566 formed substantially in the center in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second diffusing portion C4562 has a diffusion opening C4566 formed at the upper end portion in the substantially central portion in the horizontal direction and the left end portion in the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. The fourth diffusion portion C4564 has diffusion openings C4566 formed at both left and right ends of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. The fifth diffusing portion C4565 has a diffusing opening C4566 formed in the lower part of the substantially central portion in the left-right direction. Note that the locations where the diffusion openings C4566 are provided are not limited to the examples described above. For example, the diffusion openings C4566 may be formed in all of the first diffusion portion C4561 to the fifth diffusion portion C4565.

The insertion portion C4567 is a portion that is inserted (engaged) into the insertion hole portion C4548 of the first lens holding portion C4542. The insertion portion C4567 protrudes upward at the upper end portion of the diffusion portion C4560. The insertion portion C4567 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. By inserting the insertion portion C4567 into the insertion hole portion C4548, the arrangement position of the diffusion portion C4560 can be positioned with respect to the first lens holding portion C4542.

In this embodiment, the insertion portion C4567 is provided in each of the first diffusion portion C4561, the second diffusion portion C4562, and the third diffusion portion C4563. Note that the location where the insertion portion C4567 is provided is not limited to the example described above. For example, the insertion portion C4567 may be provided in all of the first diffusion portion C4561 to the fifth diffusion portion C4565.

The decoration section C4570 shown in FIGS. 362 and 363 allows the player to visually recognize the logo decoration. The decorative portion C4570 is provided in front of the diffusion portion C4560. The decoration part C4570 covers the other members constituting the decoration unit C4500 from the front. The decorative portion C4570 is formed to transmit the light diffused by the diffusion portion C4560. The decorative portion C4570 includes a first decorative portion C4580, an upper decorative lens C4583, a lower decorative lens C4584 and a second decorative portion C4590.

The first decorative portion C4580 shown in FIGS. 362 and 363(a) is capable of transmitting light diffused by the diffusion portion C4560. The first decorative portion C4580 is made of a translucent material. The first decorative portion C4580 includes a logo decorative lens portion C4581 and a logo peripheral portion C4582.

The logo-decorated lens portion C4581 is a logo-decorated lens. The logo-decorated lens portion C4581 transmits the light diffused by the diffusion portion C4560. The logo decoration lens portion C4581 is formed so as to protrude forward from a logo peripheral portion C4582, which will be described later.

The logo peripheral portion C4582 is a peripheral portion of the logo decorative lens portion C4581. The logo peripheral portion C4582 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the thickness direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The logo peripheral portion C4582 is formed to extend vertically and horizontally from the rear end portion of the logo decorative lens portion C4581. The logo peripheral portion C4582 has a concave portion C4582a.

The concave portion C4582a shown in FIGS. 362 and 363(a) is a portion that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the logo peripheral portion C4582 and protrudes rearward on the rear surface. The concave portion C4582a is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of recesses C4582a (six in the illustrated example) are provided. A rear end portion of a projecting portion C4594 of a second decorative portion C4590, which will be described later, is inserted into the recessed portion C4582a. A rear end portion of the recess C4582a is formed with a hole through which an appropriate screw used for fixing the first decorative portion C4580 and the second decorative portion C4590 is inserted. Further, the rear end portion of the concave portion C4582a is inserted through the diffusion opening C4566 of the diffusion portion C4560.

The upper decorative lens C4583 is capable of transmitting light with which the second lens holding portion C4549 is irradiated. The upper decorative lens C4583 is held at the front end portion of the second lens holding portion C4549. The upper decorative lens C4583 is formed in a shape elongated in the left-right direction.

The lower decorative lens C4584 is capable of transmitting light emitted from the lower lamp portion C4550. A lower decorative lens C4584 is held at the front end of the lower lamp portion C4550. The lower decorative lens C4584 is formed in a shape in which a plurality (five in the figure) of substantially rhomboidal members are arranged in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

The second decorative portion C4590 shown in FIGS. 362 and 363(b) is a portion of the decorative unit C4500 that transmits light toward the player (logo decorative lens portion C4581, upper decorative lens C4583, and lower decorative lens C4584). ) and covers other members from the front.

The second decorative portion C4590 is arranged in front of the first decorative portion C4580. The second decorative portion C4590 is made of a non-translucent material. In this way, by making the second decorative portion C4590 non-translucent, the logo decorative lens portion C4581, the upper decorative lens C4583, and the lower decorative lens C4584 can emit light so as to make the shapes stand out. can. A second decorative portion C4590 is secured to the front end of the reflective portion C4540 using suitable screws (see FIG. 357). The second decoration C4590 comprises a logo opening C4591, an upper decoration opening C4592, a lower decoration opening C4593 and a protrusion C4594.

The logo opening C4591 is a portion that exposes the logo-decorated lens portion C4581. The logo opening C4591 opens the second decorative portion C4590 in the front-rear direction. The logo opening C4591 is formed in a shape corresponding to the logo decoration lens portion C4581 (logo decoration).

The upper decorative opening C4592 is a portion that exposes the upper decorative lens C4583. The upper decoration opening C4592 opens the second decoration C4590 in the front-rear direction. The upper decoration opening C4592 is provided above the logo opening C4591. The upper decorative opening C4592 is formed in a shape corresponding to the upper decorative lens C4583.

The lower decorative opening C4593 is a portion that exposes the lower decorative lens C4584. The lower decoration opening C4593 opens the second decoration C4590 in the front-rear direction. The lower decorative opening C4593 is provided below the logo opening C4591. The upper decorative opening C4592 is formed in a shape corresponding to the lower decorative lens C4584.

The protruding portion C4594 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the second decorative portion C4590. The projecting portion C4594 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. A plurality of protrusions C4594 (six in the illustrated example) are provided. A screw hole used for fixing to the first decorative portion C4580 is formed in the rear end surface of the projecting portion C4594. The rear end portion of the projecting portion C4594 is inserted into the recessed portion C4582a of the first decorative portion C4580 (the logo peripheral portion C4582). Thereby, the first decorative portion C4580 and the second decorative portion C4590 can be positioned.

In this way, each member is assembled by fixing the logo peripheral portion C4582 and the second decorative portion C4590 instead of the logo decorative lens portion C4581 that transmits light toward the player. Thus, it is possible to avoid impairing the decorativeness of the first decorative portion C4580 by providing the fixed portion. Accordingly, the first decorative portion C4580 and the second decorative portion C4590 can be fixed to each other without impairing the decorativeness.

A method of assembling the decorative unit C4500 as described above will be described below.

First, as shown in FIG. 359, the projecting portion C4541c of the reflecting portion C4540 is inserted into the insertion hole portion C4522 of the first substrate C4520. Thereby, the positioning of the arrangement position of the first substrate C4520 with respect to the reflecting portion C4540 can be performed.

Next, the rear end of the projecting portion C4541c of the reflecting portion C4540 is inserted into the recessed portion C4514 of the frame member C4510. In this state, the frame member C4510, the first substrate C4520, and the reflector C4540 can be fixed to each other by screwing using the hole provided in the recess C4514 and the screw hole of the projecting portion C4541c. Also, in this state, as shown in FIG. 355, the connector C4523 of the first board C4520 is exposed to the rear surface of the frame member C4510 through the opening C4511 of the frame member C4510. This enables wiring by the wiring member C4524 on the rear surface of the frame member C4510.

Next, as shown in FIG. 361, the diffusing portion C4560 is attached to the front end portion of the first lens holding portion C4542 of the reflecting portion C4540. At this time, the insertion portion C4567 of the diffusion portion C4560 (the first diffusion portion C4561, the second diffusion portion C4562, and the third diffusion portion C4563) is inserted into the first lens holding portion C4542 (the first portion C4543). , the second portion C4544 and the third portion C4545). Thereby, the arrangement position of the diffusing portion C4560 can be positioned with respect to the reflecting portion C4540 (first lens holding portion C4542). In this state, the diffusing portion C4560 and the reflecting portion C4540 can be fixed to each other by screwing using appropriate screws.

According to the present embodiment, positioning and fixing of the arrangement positions of the frame member C4510, the first substrate C4520, the reflecting section C4540, and the diffusing section C4560 can be performed in this manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 358, by locking the second substrate C4530 to the first claw portion C4515a and the second claw portion C4515b of the frame member C4510, the upper surface portion C4515 of the frame member C4510 is secured to the second substrate C4530. 2 board C4530 is attached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 357, the upper decorative lens C4583 is attached to the second lens holding portion C4549 of the reflecting portion C4540. Also, a lower decorative lens C4584 is attached to the lower lamp portion C4550.

Next, as shown in FIG. 362, the projecting portion C4594 of the second decorative portion C4590 is inserted into the concave portion C4582a of the first decorative portion C4580 (the logo peripheral portion C4582). Thereby, the first decorative portion C4580 and the second decorative portion C4590 can be positioned. In this state, the first decorative portion C4580 and the second decorative portion C4590 can be fixed to each other by screwing using the hole provided in the recess C4582a and the screw hole of the protrusion C4594.

Next, the rear end of the concave portion C4582a of the first decorative portion C4580 is inserted through the diffusion opening C4566 of the diffusion portion C4560. Thereby, the arrangement positions of the diffusing portion C4560 (reflecting portion C4540) and the first decoration portion C4580 (decorating portion C4570) can be positioned. In this state, the second decorative portion C4590 and the reflecting portion C4540 can be fixed to each other by screwing using appropriate screws (see FIG. 357).

In this manner, the decorative unit C4500 as described above can be assembled.

According to the decoration unit C4500 as described above, it is possible to execute a predetermined light emission effect for the player by causing the logo decoration lens portion C4581 to emit light. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the decorative unit C4500, the light irradiated into each space of the first lens holding portion C4542 of the reflecting portion C4540 is diffused by the diffusing portion C4560. This allows the logo-decorated lens portion C4581 to emit light evenly.

Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. and the fifth diffusion portion C4565) are provided at different positions. As a result, the diffusion opening C4566 can be provided at a position corresponding to the shape of the logo-decorated lens portion C4581.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above publication discloses a game machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance by performing a rotating motion.

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine comprising a decoration unit C4500 that can be visually recognized by a player and capable of executing a predetermined lighting effect for the player,
The decoration unit C4500 is
A light-emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) having a light-emitting element C4521 capable of emitting light;
a diffusion part C4560 capable of diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521;
a reflecting portion C4540 capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521;
A decorative portion C4570 that is visible to the player,
and a specific member (frame member C4510) provided on the rear side of the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. That is, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed for the player by causing the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520), the diffusing portion C4560, the reflecting portion C4540, the decorative portion C4570, and the specific member (frame member C4510) to emit light from the decorative portion C4570. By doing so, the interest in the game can be improved.

The decorative portion C4570 includes a decorative translucent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581) capable of transmitting the light diffused by the diffusion portion C4560.

With such a configuration, the light diffused by the diffusing portion C4560 is transmitted through the decorative light-transmitting portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581), thereby emitting light through the decorative light-transmitting portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581). By allowing the player to visually recognize the decorative portion C4570, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, the decorative unit C4500 includes the reflective portion C4540 in front of the light emitting element C4521, the diffusing portion C4560 in front of the reflective portion C4540, and the diffusion portion C4560 in front of the diffusing portion C4560. It has a decoration part C4570.

With such a configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting element C4521 is reflected by the reflecting portion C4540, the reflected light is diffused by the diffusing portion C4560, and the diffused light makes it easier for the decorative portion C4570 to emit light. can be done.

In addition, the reflective portion C4540 includes a diffusing portion positioning means (insertion hole portion C4548) for determining the arrangement position of the diffusing portion C4560 when the diffusing portion C4560 is attached to the reflecting portion C4540,
The diffusion portion positioning means (insertion hole C4548) is formed by engaging a predetermined portion (insertion portion C4567) of the diffusion portion C4560 with the diffusion portion positioning means (insertion hole C4548). It is possible to determine the arrangement position of the C4560.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve workability when attaching the diffusing portion C4560 to the reflecting portion C4540. A predetermined portion (insertion portion C4567) of the diffusion portion C4560 and diffusion portion positioning means (insertion hole portion C4548) can position the arrangement position of the diffusion portion C4560 with respect to the reflection portion C4540. This can improve workability when attaching the diffusing portion C4560 to the reflecting portion C4540.

In addition, one of the reflecting portion C4540 and the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) (reflecting portion C4540 in the present embodiment) has a predetermined protruding portion C4541c protruding toward the other side,
The other of the reflective portion C4540 and the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) (in this embodiment, the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520)) has a predetermined hole portion (insertion hole portion C4522) penetrating to one side. ),
When the predetermined projecting portion C4541c is inserted into the predetermined hole (insertion hole portion C4522), one of the reflecting portion C4540 and the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) (in this embodiment, It is possible to determine the arrangement position of the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve workability when attaching the light-emitting substrate (first substrate C4520). That is, since the positioning of the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) can be performed by the reflecting portion C4540, workability in attaching the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) can be further improved. can.

In addition, the decorative portion C4570 includes a first decorative portion C4580 and a second decorative portion C4590 different from the first decorative portion C4580,
The first decorative portion C4580 includes a decorative translucent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581) capable of transmitting light diffused by the diffusion portion C4560,
The second decorative portion C4590 does not include the decorative translucent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581).

With such a configuration, the decorative translucent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581) can be preferably attached. That is, for example, it is possible to form a portion fixed to another member in the second decorative portion C4590 that does not include the decorative transparent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581), and the decorative transparent portion (logo decorative lens portion C4581) can be formed. C4581) can be attached without impairing the decorativeness of the first decorative portion C4580 (logo decorative lens portion C4581).

In addition, the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) has a connector C4523 to which a wiring member C4524 can be connected,
The specific member (frame member C4510) has a specific opening C4511 at a position corresponding to the connector C4523.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably connect the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) and the wiring member C4524 using the connector C4523.

The diffusion portion C4560 includes first regions (first diffusion portion C4561, second diffusion portion C4562, third diffusion portion C4563, fourth diffusion portion C4564, fifth diffusion portion C4565), a second region different from the first region (first diffusion portion C4561, second diffusion portion C4562, third diffusion portion C4563, fourth diffusion portion C4564, fifth diffusion portion C4565); including at least
The first region and the second region are provided with diffusion openings C4566 that are not subjected to a predetermined processing,
The diffusion openings C4566 are provided at different positions in the first region and the second region.

With such a configuration, the diffusion part C4560 can be preferably attached. That is, for example, the diffusion opening C4566 can be used to position the diffusion portion C4560 with respect to the decoration portion C4570. Further, by providing the diffusing portion C4560 at different positions in the first region and the second region, for example, in the decorative portion C4570, a portion irradiated with the light diffused from the first region and a portion irradiated with the light diffused from the first region Even if the shape of the portion irradiated with the light diffused by the region 2 is different, the diffusion opening C4566 can be provided at a position corresponding to each portion of the decorative portion C4570.

In addition, the specific member (frame member C4510) has a surface (upper surface portion C4515) different from the surface on which the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) is attached. A substrate (second substrate C4530) is attached.

With such a configuration, the specific member (frame member C4510) can be used for attaching a substrate other than the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) of the decoration unit C4500.

Further, the predetermined wiring member C4524 is configured to be wired by passing through the predetermined wiring passage path C4512 in the specific member (frame member C4510),
The predetermined wiring passage C4512 includes a locking portion C4513 capable of locking the predetermined wiring member C4524.

With such a configuration, the wiring member C4524 can be preferably wired to the specific member (frame member C4510).

Further, the decoration unit C4500 is arranged so as to protrude from the front side of the game machine, and has an attention call display (attention call display portion C4441) at a position visible to the player to call a predetermined attention. is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to call attention to the player's head against the decoration unit C4500 projecting forward.

Note that the frame member C4510 is one form of a specific member.
Further, the first substrate C4520 is one form of a light-emitting substrate.
Also, the insertion hole C4548 is one form of diffusion portion positioning means.
Also, the insertion portion C4567 is one form of a predetermined portion.
Also, the insertion hole portion C4522 is one form of a hole portion.
In addition, the second substrate C4530 is a form of a substrate different from the light-emitting substrate.
Also, the attention-calling display portion C4441 is one form of the attention-calling display.
Also, the first diffusion portion C4561, the second diffusion portion C4562, the third diffusion portion C4563, the fourth diffusion portion C4564, and the fifth diffusion portion C4565 are forms of the first region and the second region. is.
Also, the logo decorative lens portion C4581 is one form of the decorative translucent portion.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the diffusion portion C4560 is composed of a first diffusion portion C4561, a second diffusion portion C4562, a third diffusion portion C4563, a fourth diffusion portion C4564, and a plurality of (5 ), and each member has a different region (a form of the first region and the second region), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in a modification schematically shown in FIG. 364, one side in the left-right direction of the diffusion portion C4560 formed as one member may be the first region C4560A, and the other side may be the second region C4560B. In the illustrated example, a first area C4560A is on the left side of the center line in the horizontal direction of the diffusion portion C4560, and a second area C4560B is on the right side thereof.

Also in the modified example, the diffusion openings C4566 are provided at different positions for each region. More specifically, in the first region C4560A, the diffusion opening C4566 is provided in the upper left part, and in the second region C4560B, the diffusion opening C4566 is provided in the lower right part.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reflector C4540 (first lens holding portion C4542) is provided with the diffusion portion positioning means (insertion hole portion C4548), and the diffusion portion C4560 is provided with a predetermined portion (insertion portion C4567). was shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the reflecting portion C4540 may be provided with an insertion portion as a diffusion portion positioning means, and the diffusion portion C4560 may be provided with an insertion hole portion as a predetermined portion.

Further, in this embodiment, an example in which the second substrate C4530 is a light-emitting substrate including the light-emitting element C4531 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As the second board C4530, various boards used in game machines can be employed. For example, the second board C4530 may be a relay board for wiring the second wiring member C4524b to the first board C4520. When the relay board is employed, the relay board can be arranged closer to the first board C4520, so that the wiring of the wiring members can be performed more favorably.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the specific member on which the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520) is provided is the frame member C4510 that constitutes the rear portion of the decoration unit C4500, but it is not limited to this aspect. . Various members on which a light emitting substrate can be provided can be employed as the specific member.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the projection C4541c is provided in the reflection part C4540 and the predetermined hole (insertion hole C4522) is provided in the first substrate C4520, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. . For example, a predetermined hole may be provided in the reflecting portion C4540, and a projecting portion may be provided in the light emitting substrate (first substrate C4520). In this way, the member (reflecting portion C4540) on the side having the protrusion does not determine the arrangement position of the member (first substrate C4520) having the hole, but the opposite relationship (i.e., the hole A configuration may be adopted in which the member on the side having the portion determines the arrangement position of the member on the side having the projecting portion. Further, the projecting portion and the hole portion may be configured to be included in each of the reflecting portion C4540 and the first substrate C4520.

Also, in the present embodiment, an example in which the decoration unit C4500 is provided in the upper part of the game machine (upper unit C4400) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. Various positions in the game machine can be adopted as the position where the decoration unit C4500 is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decoration unit C4500 is provided on the upper part of the glass door 4 (the upper unit C4400), but the present invention is not limited to this aspect. The decoration unit C4500 is a game machine such as a decoration provided on the frame of the glass door 4 of the game machine, a device (a production button device) that can be operated related to production, and an accessory (for example, a movable accessory) installed on the game board. It can be used as various decorations that make up the

[10. Tenth pachinko machine]
The tenth pachinko game machine of the present invention will be described below. The same or similar components as those related to the first to ninth pachinko game machines are denoted by the same names and the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The tenth pachinko machine differs greatly from the first to ninth pachinko machines in that it has a glass door C4 different from the glass door 4 shown in FIG. 2, for example. The configuration of the glass door C4 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 365 to 374. FIG. In addition, in the above drawings, illustration of members is appropriately omitted for convenience of explanation. For example, in FIG. 372, illustration of the base portion C4610 is omitted.

The glass door C4 has transparent protective glass (see FIG. 2) attached via a glass frame (not shown). The glass door C4 mainly includes a frame body C4600, an upper unit C4700, a substrate unit C4750, a lock member C4760 and a movement restricting member C4770.

A frame C4600 shown in FIGS. 365 to 367 supports the glass frame and an upper unit C4700 which will be described later. The frame C4600 includes a base portion C4610 and a unit portion C4620.

A base portion C4610 shown in FIGS. 366 and 367 is formed in a plate shape with an opening at the center. The base portion C4610 is provided with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The base portion C4610 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A base hole C4611 is formed in the base portion C4610.

The base hole C4611 shown in FIGS. 366, 370 and 371 is formed to penetrate the upper right portion of the base portion C4610 in the front-rear direction.

A unit portion C4620 shown in FIGS. 365, 366, 368, etc. is formed in a substantially U-shape (U-shape) in a front view with an open bottom. A member such as a speaker is mounted on the unit portion C4620. The unit portion C4620 is provided on the front side of the base portion C4610 and fixed to the base portion C4610.

An upper unit C4700, which will be described later, is attached to the upper part of the unit part C4620. The unit portion C4620 is formed with a concave portion C4621, a mounting hole C4622, a slide guide hole C4623, a wiring hole C4624, and a boss C4625 as a structure for mounting the upper unit C4700.

In addition, among the above structures, the concave portion C4621, the mounting hole C4622 and the slide guide hole C4623 are formed in the upper right portion and the upper left portion of the unit portion C4620, respectively. In the following description, first, attention will be paid to the concave portion C4621, the mounting hole C4622, and the slide guide hole C4623 formed in the upper right portion of the unit portion C4620.

A recessed portion C4621 shown in FIGS. 368 and 370 to 372 is a portion that accommodates a lock member C4760, which will be described later. The recessed portion C4621 is formed so that the rear surface of the unit portion C4620 is recessed forward. The concave portion C4621 is formed in a generally rectangular shape in a rear view with the longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction. Left and right side surfaces of the recessed portion C4621 are formed to have openings large enough to allow passage of locking members C4760, which will be described later.

The attachment hole C4622 shown in FIGS. 368, 372 and 373 is a hole through which (the attachment portion C4710 of) the upper unit C4700 described later is inserted. The mounting hole C4622 is formed so that the bottom surface of the recess C4621 penetrates in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole C4622 is formed in the right portion of the recess C4621. The right portion of the mounting hole C4622 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in rear view with the longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction, and the left portion is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in rear view with a smaller vertical width than the right portion (Fig. 373). reference).

A slide guide hole C4623 shown in FIGS. 368, 372, and 373 guides the sliding movement of a lock member C4760, which will be described later. The slide guide hole C4623 is formed so that the bottom surface of the recess C4621 penetrates in the front-rear direction. The slide guide hole C4623 is formed to extend leftward from the left end of the mounting hole C4622. The slide guide hole C4623 is formed to have a smaller vertical width than the mounting hole C4622.

A wiring hole C4624 shown in FIGS. 368 and 370 to 372 is a hole for passing a wiring (a harness C4752 to be described later) connected to an upper unit C4700 to be described later. The wiring hole C4624 is formed so as to pass through the unit portion C4620 in the front-rear direction. The wiring hole C4624 is formed above the recess C4621 (mounting hole C4622 and slide guide hole C4623).

The boss C4625 shown in FIGS. 368 and 372 is formed in a columnar shape protruding rearward from the unit portion C4620. The boss C4625 is formed between the recess C4621 and the wiring hole C4624 in the vertical direction. A female threaded hole is formed in the center of the boss C4625.

The concave portion C4621, the mounting hole C4622, the slide guide hole C4623, the wiring hole C4624, and the boss C4625 formed in this way are formed so as to fit inside the base hole C4611 of the base portion C4610 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 370). ).

Also, as described above, the recess C4621, the mounting hole C4622, and the slide guide hole C4623 are formed in the upper right and upper left portions of the unit portion C4620, respectively (see FIG. 368). The recessed portion C4621 (recessed portion C4621L), the mounting hole C4622 (mounting hole C4622L), and the slide guide hole C4623 (slide guide hole C4623L) formed in the upper left portion of the unit portion C4620 correspond to the recessed portion C4621 formed in the upper right portion of the unit portion C4620. , the mounting hole C4622 and the slide guide hole C4623 are formed in such a shape that they are rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in a rear view.

The upper unit C4700 shown in FIGS. 365 to 367, 369, etc. is for effecting. The upper unit C4700 is appropriately decorated. The upper unit C4700 is provided on the upper front surface of the frame C4600 (unit part C4620). A mounting portion C4710 is formed in the upper unit C4700.

The mounting portion C4710 shown in FIGS. 369 to 372 is for fixing the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600. The mounting portions C4710 are formed on the right and left portions of the upper unit C4700 (see FIG. 369). In the following description, first, attention will be paid to the attachment portion C4710 formed on the right portion of the upper unit C4700.

The mounting portion C4710 is formed to protrude rearward from the upper unit C4700. The attachment portion C4710 is formed with an insertion hole C4711 that penetrates the attachment portion C4710 in the left and right direction (see FIG. 372). The mounting portion C4710 is inserted from the front side into the mounting hole C4622 of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620).

On the other hand, the mounting portion C4710 (mounting portion C4710L) formed on the left side of the upper unit C4700 is formed in such a shape that the mounting portion C4710 formed on the right side of the upper unit C4700 is rotated 90 degrees in a rear view. (See Figure 369).

Further, the upper unit C4700 is provided with a substrate C4720 to which a connector C4720a is attached (see FIG. 369). The board C4720 is fixed to the rear surface of the upper unit C4700. The substrate C4720 is provided above the mounting portion C4710. The substrate C4720 is provided so that the connector C4720a is accommodated inside the wiring hole C4624 of the unit part C4620 in rear view (see FIGS. 370 and 371).

The substrate unit C4750 shown in FIGS. 366 and 367 is for operating predetermined equipment provided on the glass door C4. The board unit C4750 comprises a board C4751, a harness C4752 and a harness cover C4753.

A substrate C4751 shown in FIG. 367 is fixed to the lower portion of the base portion C4610. The board C4751 is provided with a connector C4751a.

A harness C4752 shown in FIGS. 370 and 371 is provided between the frame C4600 and the upper unit C4700. Specifically, one end of the harness C4752 is connected to the connector C4751a of the board C4751. The other end of the harness C4752 is connected to the connector C4720a of the board C4720 of the upper unit C4700 (see FIG. 375). 370, illustration of the other end of the harness C4752 (the portion connected to the connector C4720a) is omitted. Also, FIG. 371 shows a state in which the harness C4752 is not connected to the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720).

The harness C4752 extends rightward from the connector C4751a to the right portion of the base portion C4610 and is arranged to bend upward from there (not shown). The harness C4752 is arranged so as to pass through the right portion of the base portion C4610 and extend upward to the immediate right side of the lock member C4760 and the movement restricting member C4770. The harness C4752 extends from the immediate right side of the lock member C4760 and the movement restricting member C4770 to the substrate C4720 of the upper unit C4700 and is connected to the connector C4720a (see FIG. 375).

The harness cover C4753 shown in FIGS. 370 and 371 protects the harness C4752. The harness cover C4753 is formed in a substantially U-shape (U-shape) in a front view with an open front. The harness cover C4753 is fixed to the right portion of the base portion C4610 with its longitudinal direction directed vertically. The harness cover C4753 is provided so as to cover the middle portion (the portion extending in the vertical direction) of the harness C4752 from the left-right direction and from the rear. The harness cover C4753 is provided so that its upper end (exit of the harness C4752) is located on the right side of the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720).

Here, the upper unit C4700 is fixed (locked) to the frame C4600 by screws, lock members C4760, etc., with the mounting portion C4710 inserted into the mounting hole C4622 of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620). The lock member C4760 will be described in detail below.

The locking member C4760 shown in FIGS. 367 and 370 to 374 locks (fixes) the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600. The lock members C4760 are provided on the right and left sides of the frame C4600 (unit section C4620) (see FIG. 367). In the following description, first, attention will be paid to the locking member C4760 provided on the right portion of the frame C4600 (unit portion C4620).

The lock member C4760 includes a body portion C4761, an insertion portion C4762, an operation portion C4763, and a lock member front portion C4764.

A main body portion C4761 shown in FIGS. 370 to 374 is a portion constituting the main structural body of the lock member C4760. The body portion C4761 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view with the longitudinal direction oriented in the horizontal direction.

The insertion portion C4762 shown in FIGS. 370 to 372 and 374 is a portion inserted into the mounting portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700. The insertion portion C4762 is formed to extend rightward from the right end of the main body portion C4761.

The operating portion C4763 shown in FIGS. 372 and 374 is a portion that the operator grips when operating the locking member C4760. The operation portion C4763 is formed to extend rearward from the right end of the main body portion C4761.

The lock member front portion C4764 shown in FIGS. 373 and 374 is a portion that constitutes the front portion of the lock member C4760. The lock member front portion C4764 is formed to extend forward from the main body portion C4761. The front portion of the lock member front portion C4764 is formed to have a larger vertical width than the rear portion of the lock member front portion C4764.

The rear portion of the lock member front portion C4764 (the portion connected to the main body portion C4761) is inserted through the slide guide hole C4623. In addition, the front portion of the lock member front portion C4764 is formed to have a larger vertical width than the slide guide hole C4623. This prevents the lock member C4760 from falling out of the slide guide hole C4623.

The locking member C4760 configured in this manner is formed to be slidable left and right (linearly) along the extending direction of the slide guide hole C4623 inside the recessed portion C4621 of the unit portion C4620. A movement restricting member C4770 is attached to the lock member C4760.

In addition, as described above, the locking members C4760 are provided on the right and left sides of the frame C4600 (unit section C4620) (see FIG. 367). Lock member C4760 (lock member C4760L) provided on the left portion of frame C4600 is formed in the same shape as lock member C4760 provided on the right portion of frame C4600. The lock member C4760L is arranged in a state in which the lock member C4760 provided on the right side of the frame C4600 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees in a rear view. Thereby, the lock member C4760L is formed so as to be slidable up and down along the extending direction of the slide guide hole C4623L inside the recessed portion C4621L of the unit portion C4620 (see FIG. 368).

The movement restricting member C4770 shown in FIGS. 370 to 372 restricts the movement range of the lock member C4760. The movement restricting member C4770 is provided for the right locking member C4760. The movement restricting member C4770 includes a body portion C4771, a protection portion C4772 and a projection portion C4773.

The body portion C4771 is a portion that constitutes the main structural body of the movement restricting member C4770. The main body portion C4771 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. A long hole C4771a is formed in the body portion C4771.

The long hole C4771a is formed so as to pass through the main body portion C4771 in the front-rear direction. The long hole C4771a is formed with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The boss C4625 of the unit portion C4620 is inserted through the long hole C4771a (see FIG. 372). A screw C4774 is inserted through the long hole C4771a from the rear side. The screw C4774 is screwed into the female threaded hole of the boss C4625 while being spaced from the body portion C4771 in the front-rear direction.

Also, a warning sticker C4771b is attached to the main body C4771. The warning sticker C4771b includes a cautionary note, a mark, or the like that urges the user to unplug the harness C4752 from the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720) when removing the upper unit C4700. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the harness C4752 when removing the upper unit C4700.

The protection portion C4772 is a portion that covers the operation portion C4763 of the lock member C4760. The protective portion C4772 is formed to extend downward from the left-right middle portion of the main body portion C4771. The protection portion C4772 is formed with a recess with an open front surface, and the operation portion C4763 of the lock member C4760 is fitted into the recess. As a result, the movement restricting member C4770 is attached to the locking member C4760 and moves together with the locking member C4760. In addition, the protection portion C4772 can protect the operation portion C4763 by covering the operation portion C4763 of the lock member C4760.

The protrusion C4773 is formed to protrude upward from the right portion of the main body C4771. The projecting portion C4773 is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. When the movement restricting member C4770 is at the position shown in FIG. 370, the protrusion C4773 is located between the upper end of the harness cover C4753 (exit of the harness C4752) and the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720) in rear view. is formed as

By attaching the movement restricting member C4770 configured in this way to the lock member C4760, the slidable range (movable range) of the lock member C4760 is restricted. Specifically, the movement range of the locking member C4760 (and the movement restricting member C4770) is restricted by inserting the boss C4625 through the long hole C4771a.

As shown in FIG. 370, the lock member C4760 is at the rightmost position in the movable range (the boss C4625 is in contact with the left end of the long hole C4771a, or the protective portion C4772 covering the operation portion C4763 is 372), the insertion portion C4762 of the lock member C4760 is inserted into the mounting portion C4710 (the insertion hole C4711 shown in FIG. 372) of the upper unit C4700. As a result, the upper unit C4700 (mounting portion C4710) cannot be pulled forward from the mounting hole C4622 of the unit portion C4620. In this manner, the lock member C4760 fixes (locks) the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600.

On the other hand, FIG. 371 shows a state where the lock member C4760 is at the leftmost position within the movable range (the boss C4625 is in contact with the right end of the long hole C4771a). As described above, in FIG. 371, the harness C4752 is not connected to the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720). As shown in FIG. 371, the lock member C4760 slides leftward from the position shown in FIG. 370 to a position overlapping the connector C4720a in rear view (leftmost position in the movable range). be able to. At this time, the insertion portion C4762 of the lock member C4760 is positioned to the left of the mounting portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700. That is, the insertion portion C4762 is not inserted into the attachment portion C4710 (the insertion hole C4711 shown in FIG. 372). As a result, the upper unit C4700 (mounting portion C4710) can be removed forward from the mounting hole C4622 of the unit portion C4620. In this way, the lock member C4760 releases the fixation (lock) between the upper unit C4700 and the frame C4600. Therefore, the upper unit C4700 can be removed from the frame C4600.

In this way, the lock member C4760 has a position where the insertion portion C4762 of the lock member C4760 is inserted into the mounting portion C4710 (insertion hole C4711) of the upper unit C4700 (lock position, see FIG. 370), and a position where the insertion portion of the lock member C4760 C4762 can be slid between positions (unlocked positions, see FIG. 371) where C4762 is removed from mounting portion C4710 (insertion hole C4711) of upper unit C4700. Thereby, the locking member C4760 can switch between fixing and releasing the fixing of the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600.

If the upper unit C4700 is removed from the frame C4600 while the harness C4752 is connected to the upper unit C4700 (the connector C4720a of the substrate C4720), the harness C4752 may be pulled and broken. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the harness C4752 is connected to the upper unit C4700, the lock member C4760 cannot be moved from the lock position (see FIG. 370) to the unlocked position (see FIG. 371). I have to.

A method of restricting movement of the lock member C4760 to the unlocked position (see FIG. 371) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 375 and 376. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 375, when the lock member C4760 is in the lock position, the insertion portion C4762 of the lock member C4760 is inserted into the attachment portion C4710 of the upper unit C4700. Thereby, the upper unit C4700 is fixed to the frame C4600. That is, the upper unit C4700 cannot be removed from the frame C4600. At this time, as described above, the protrusion C4773 of the movement restricting member C4770 is positioned between the upper end of the harness cover C4753 (the outlet of the harness C4752) and the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720) in rear view. there is

On the other hand, in order to move the lock member C4760 to the unlocked position, it is necessary to move the protrusion C4773 to a position overlapping the connector C4720a in rear view (see FIG. 371). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 376, in order to remove the upper unit C4700 from the frame C4600, even if the lock member C4760 is slid leftward toward the unlocked position (see FIG. 371), the protrusion C4773 comes into contact with the harness C4752. Therefore, the lock member C4760 cannot be moved to the unlocked position (see FIG. 371).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper unit C4700 is not removed from the frame C4600 while the harness C4752 is connected to the connector C4720a of the upper unit C4700 (board C4720). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the harness C4752 from being pulled and broken.

On the other hand, when the harness C4752 is removed from the upper unit C4700 (the connector C4720a of the board C4720), even if the lock member C4760 is slid leftward toward the unlocked position (see FIG. 371), the protrusion of the movement restricting member C4770 The portion C4773 does not come into contact with the harness C4752. Therefore, it is possible to move the lock member C4760 to the unlocked position (see FIG. 371). Therefore, the upper unit C4700 can be removed from the frame C4600.

Further, the protrusion C4773 of the movement restricting member C4770 is formed so as to move between the portions where the harness C4752 is bent to form a substantially semicircular ring. Specifically, the protrusion C4773 is formed to move between the upper end of the harness cover C4753 (the outlet of the harness C4752) and the portion of the harness C4752 connected to the upper unit C4700. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a space for moving the protrusion C4773, and space can be saved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above publication discloses a gaming machine provided with a movable performance accessory that performs a predetermined movable performance. The movable performance accessory is fixed to the base member.

It is desired to further improve the functionality of such gaming machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the problems described above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A lock position (first position) for fixing the upper unit C4700 (structure) to the frame C4600 (fixed portion), and an unlock position (second position) for releasing the fixation of the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600. a locking member C4760 (first member) movably formed between the
a movement restricting member C4770 (second member) that makes it difficult for the lock member C4760 to move from the lock position to the unlock position;
is provided.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high functionality.
Specifically, the movement restricting member C4770 can easily switch between fixing and releasing the fixing of the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600 by the locking member C4760. It can be a gaming machine with excellent performance.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
formed to be slidable between the locked position and the unlocked position,
The movement restricting member C4770 is
Restricting the sliding of the lock member C4760 makes it difficult for the lock member C4760 to move from the lock position to the unlock position.

With such a configuration, the lock member C4760 and the movement restricting member C4770 can be configured simply.

Further, the movement restricting member C4770 is
making it difficult for the lock member C4760 to move from the lock position to the unlock position in a state where a harness C4752 (third member) different from the lock member C4760 and the movement restriction member C4770 is provided;
It is configured to allow the locking member C4760 to move from the locked position to the unlocked position by moving or removing the harness C4752.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the work of removing the upper unit C4700 from the frame C4600 in a state where the harness C4752 is provided. As a result, damage to the harness C4752 can be suppressed.

Further, the third member is
A harness C4752 (wiring) provided between the upper unit C4700 and the frame C4600.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the operation of removing the upper unit C4700 from the frame C4600 while the harness C4752 is connected. Thereby, disconnection of the harness C4752 can be suppressed.

Further, a connector C4751a (wiring connection portion) to which the harness C4752 from the upper unit C4700 is connected is provided,
Both the lock member C4760 and the connector C4751a are provided on the frame C4600.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily set the positional relationship between the lock member C4760 and the connector C4751a.

Further, the movement restricting member C4770 is
A projecting portion C4773 is provided to make it difficult for the lock member C4760 to move from the lock position to the unlock position by coming into contact with the harness C4752.

With such a configuration, the movement restricting member C4770 can have a simple configuration.

Further, the movement restricting member C4770 is
The protrusion C4773 is formed to move between a harness cover C4753 (wiring cover) that accommodates at least part of the harness C4752 and a portion of the harness C4752 that is connected to the upper unit C4700. It is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to save space.

Further, the movement restricting member C4770 is
It is formed so as to move integrally with the lock member C4760.

With such a configuration, there is no need to separately provide a mechanism for moving the movement restricting member C4770, and the configuration can be simplified.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
Equipped with an operation portion C4763 for moving the lock member C4760,
The movement restricting member C4770 is
It is provided so as to cover the operation portion C4763.

With such a configuration, the operation portion C4763 of the lock member C4760 can be protected by the movement restricting member C4770.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
Equipped with an operation portion C4763 for moving the lock member C4760,
The movement range of the lock member C4760 is regulated by the contact of the operation portion C4763 with the upper unit C4700.

With such a configuration, there is no need to separately provide a configuration for restricting the movement range of the lock member C4760, and the configuration can be simplified.

Further, the lock member C4760 is
It includes a plurality of lock members (left and right lock members C4760) whose moving directions are different from each other.

With such a configuration, the fixation of the upper unit C4700 to the frame C4600 can be strengthened.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the part to be fixed of the present invention is the frame C4600, and the structure of the present invention is the upper unit C4700, but the part to be fixed and the structure are limited to these. Instead, it can be any member.

Also, in this embodiment, the first member of the present invention is the locking member C4760, but the first member is not limited to this, and can be any member, such as a screw. There may be.

Also, in the present embodiment, the lock member C4760 is assumed to move linearly, but the direction of movement of the lock member C4760 is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a rotational movement.

Further, in the present embodiment, the (protrusion C4773 of) the movement restricting member C4770 contacts the harness C4752 to make it difficult for the lock member C4760 to move to the unlocked position. The configuration for making it difficult to move to the front is not limited to this, and can be any configuration. For example, the member with which the movement restricting member C4770 abuts is not limited to the harness C4752, and may be any member. Further, the movement restricting member C4770 can also be of any shape (member).

[11. Eleventh pachinko machine]
The eleventh pachinko game machine of the present invention will be described below. The same or similar components as those related to the first to tenth pachinko game machines are denoted by the same names or the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The eleventh pachinko machine differs greatly from the first to tenth pachinko machines in that static electricity is eliminated using the decorative member C4890 of the plate unit C4800. The plate unit C4800 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 377 to 389. FIG.

The plate unit C4800 is a unit formed by fixing an upper plate C4820, a lower plate C4830 and the like to each other. The dish unit C4800 is arranged below the glass door 4 shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 378, 379 and 381, the plate unit C4800 includes a base member C4810, an upper plate C4820, a lower plate C4830, a presentation button device C4840, an attachment member C4850, a line cover C4860, a first decorative portion C4870, a 2 Equipped with a decoration part C4880, a decoration member C4890 and a ground wire C4900.

The base member C4810 is a member to which the upper tray C4820, the lower tray C4830 and the like are fixed. The base member C4810 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape (see FIG. 381) with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction.

The upper tray C4820 and the lower tray C4830 are storage trays for storing game balls. The upper plate C4820 and the lower plate C4830 are fixed to the left front portion of the base member C4810. The upper tray C4820 stores, for example, lent game balls and game balls paid out as prize balls. Game balls stored in the upper tray C4820 are shot toward a game area (not shown) by operating the shooting device 6 . The lower tray C4830 is fixed to the base member C4810 and arranged below the upper tray C4820. Game balls stored in the upper tray C4820 (for example, game balls overflowing from the upper tray C4820) are paid out to the lower tray C4830.

The effect button device C4840 is capable of operation related to the effect performed in the game machine. The effect button device C4840 is connected to the sub-control circuit 300, for example, like the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment. The effect button device C4840 is used for operations such as generation of an appropriate effect performed in the game machine and switching of the effect that has already been executed. Also, the effect button device C4840 has a effect function that operates based on the result of the hit determination process or the like. The production button device C4840 is fixed to the base member C4810 and arranged on the right side of the upper plate C4820 and the lower plate C4830 (approximately in the center of the plate unit C4800 in the left-right direction). The effect button device C4840 may be configured in the same manner as the effect button 54 related to the first pachinko game machine, for example, but its configuration is not particularly limited. A production button device C4840 according to this embodiment includes a cover portion C4841, a button portion C4842, and the like.

The cover portion C4841 is a member that covers the periphery of the button portion C4842 from above. The cover portion C4841 is a member (decorative member) appropriately decorated with decorative portions C4841a provided on the left and right outer sides. The button portion C4842 is provided on the cover portion C4841 so as to be exposed to the outside, and is configured to be pressable by the player.

The attachment member C4850 shown in FIGS. 381 to 383 is a member to which a first decorative portion C4870 and the like, which will be described later, are attached. The mounting member C4850 is a member (decorative member) appropriately decorated with a first decorative portion C4870 or the like. The mounting member C4850 has a plate surface oriented substantially in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially arc shape in plan view. The mounting member C4850 is formed so as to extend from the left end to the right end of the plate unit C4800 in front view (see FIGS. 378 and 382). The mounting member C4850 is fixed to the base member C4810 and provided to cover the performance button device C4840 and the like from the front. The mounting member C4850 has a central mounting portion C4851 and a through hole C4852.

As shown in FIGS. 382 and 383, the central attachment portion C4851 is a portion to which the first decorative portion C4870 is attached. The center mounting portion C4851 is formed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the mounting member C4850. The central mounting portion C4851 is formed in a concave shape by recessing the front side surface of the mounting member C4850 rearward.

The through hole C4852 is a hole that penetrates the mounting member C4850 in the front-rear direction. A pair of right and left through holes C4852 are provided. The left and right through holes C4852 are formed so as to be substantially symmetrical to each other. The left and right through-holes C4852 are formed in the upper portion of the mounting member C4850 and the left and right outer sides of the center mounting portion C4851.

The line cover C4860 shown in FIGS. 380 to 382 is a member attached to the upper end of the mounting member C4850. Note that FIG. 380 is a cross-sectional view (cross-sectional view taken along the arrow C4801-C4801 shown in FIG. 378) of the plate unit C4800 cut in the middle of the left and right. A pair of left and right line covers C4860 are provided on the mounting member C4850. The left and right line covers C4860 are formed to extend substantially in the left-right direction along the mounting member C4850. The cross-sectional shape (cross-sectional shape in FIG. 380) of the left and right line covers C4860 is formed in a substantially V shape with the opening facing rearward (see FIG. 380). The left and right line covers C4860 are attached to the mounting member C4850 with fastening members such as screws, and are provided so as to extend from the left and right outer ends of the mounting member C4850 to the immediate side of the central mounting portion C4851. Also, the left and right line covers C4860 are provided so as to pass just above the through hole C4852 (see FIG. 382).

The first decorative portion C4870 shown in FIGS. 382 and 383 is a portion attached to the central mounting portion C4851 of the mounting member C4850 and decorated. The first decorative portion C4870 includes an electrical board C4871, a sheet metal C4872 and a lens member C4873.

As shown in FIGS. 383 and 384, the electrical board C4871 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view with its plate surface facing forward and backward and its longitudinal direction facing up and down. The electrical board C4871 is provided so as to face the front side surface of the central mounting portion C4851. Electronic components such as a plurality of LEDC4871a are provided on the front side surface of the electrical board C4871.

The sheet metal C4872 is a flat metal member. The sheet metal C4872 of this embodiment is a plate-like member made of a metal material that is relatively easily charged. The sheet metal C4872 is formed in a substantially rectangular annular shape when viewed from the front. The sheet metal C4872 is provided so as to surround the outer edge (periphery) of the electrical board C4871. The sheet metal C4872 is arranged with a slight gap (so as not to contact) with respect to the electrical board C4871. In addition, the sheet metal C4872 is provided so as to face the front side surface of the central mounting portion C4851 except for a part (connection portion C4872a described later). The sheet metal C4872 has a connecting portion C4872a.

The connecting portion C4872a is a portion connected to a decorative member C4890 described later. The connection portion C4872a is formed to protrude rightward from the upper right portion of the metal plate C4872. The right portion of the connecting portion C4872a is arranged on the rear side of the mounting member C4850 through a notch formed in the mounting member C4850 (see FIG. 382).

The lens member C4873 is a member that can transmit light. The lens member C4873 is composed of a light-transmitting material (lens) appropriately decorated. The lens member C4873 is formed in a substantially cup-like shape with the opening facing rearward. The lens member C4873 accommodates the electrical board C4871 and the sheet metal C4872 (see FIG. 383). The lens member C4873 is fixed to the central mounting portion C4851 of the mounting member C4850 by a fastening member. In addition, in FIG. 382, description of the lens member C4873 is omitted for convenience of explanation.

The first decorative portion C4870 configured as described above can irradiate the front of the electrical board C4871 with light by causing the LEDC4871a of the electrical board C4871 to emit light. The light is emitted to the outside of the first decorative portion C4870 through the lens member C4873. Thus, the first decorative portion C4870 can cause the lens member C4873 to emit light with the light.

As shown in FIG. 382, the second decorative portion C4880 is provided on the left and right outer sides of the first decorative portion C4870 and is a decorated portion. A pair of left and right second decorative portions C4880 are provided. The left and right second decorative portions C4880 are provided substantially bilaterally symmetrical to each other. Of the left and right second decorative portions C4880, the configuration of the right second decorative portion C4880 will be described below, and the description of the configuration of the left second decorative portion C4880 will be omitted.

The second decorative portion C4880 on the right side is provided above the line cover C4860 on the right side. The second decorative portion C4880 on the right side is formed so as to extend from the left and right outer ends of the mounting member C4850 to the immediate side of the central mounting portion C4851. As shown in FIGS. 382, 383, and 386, the second decorative portion C4880 includes a support member C4881, an electrical board C4882, an inner lens C4883, an outer lens C4884, and a speaker C4885.

The support member C4881 is a member that supports the electrical board C4882. The support member C4881 is formed in the shape of a thin case with an open top (a shape in which the outer edge extends slightly upward). The support member C4881 is formed to extend substantially along the left-right direction. The support member C4881 is provided so as to incline upward to the right (see FIG. 386).

The electrical board C4882 is formed so that its plate surface faces up and down and extends substantially along the left-right direction. The electrical board C4882 is mounted on the support member C4881. Electronic components such as a plurality of LEDCs 4882a are provided on the upper surface of the electrical board C4882.

The inner lens C4883 is a member capable of transmitting light. The inner lens C4883 is made of a light transmissive material (lens). The inner lens C4883 is formed in the shape of a thin case with an open bottom (a shape in which the outer edge extends slightly downward). The inner lens C4883 is arranged so as to face the support member C4881 with the electrical board C4882 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 380).

The outer lens C4884 shown in FIGS. 383, 386 and 387 is a member capable of transmitting light. Note that FIG. 387 is a diagram of the outer lens C4884 viewed from the arrow C4803 shown in FIG. The outer lens C4884 is composed of a light-transmitting material (lens) appropriately decorated. The outer lens C4884 of this embodiment is an insulating member made of a transparent resin material. The outer lens C4884 is formed to extend substantially along the horizontal direction. In addition, the outer lens C4884 is formed in a shape that is slightly larger than the support member C4881, the decorative electrical board C4882, and the inner lens C4883. As shown in FIG. 380, the cross-sectional shape of the outer lens C4884 (the cross-sectional shape in FIG. 380) is formed in a substantially inverted U shape. The outer lens C4884 accommodates the support member C4881, the electrical board C4882 and the inner lens C4883. Thus, the outer lens C4884 is formed so as to cover the support member C4881, the electrical board C4882 and the inner lens C4883 from above. The outer lens C4884 has a top C4884a, a recess C4884b, a front extension C4884c and a rear extension C4884d.

The top C4884a is the top of the outer lens C4884. The apex C4884a is formed to be spaced upward from the inner lens C4883.

The recess C4884b is a portion recessed downward. The concave portion C4884b is formed so as to be engageable with the effect button device C4840 (decorative portion C4841a of the cover portion C4841). The recess C4884b is formed in the rear portion of the top C4884a.

The front extending portion C4884c is a portion that extends substantially downward from the end of the top portion C4884a on the front side (the side closer to the player (front side)). The front extending portion C4884c is formed so as to incline forward and downward. The lower end of the front extending portion C4884c is located on the front side of the electrical board C4882 and at substantially the same height as the electrical board C4882. FIG. 380 shows a state in which the lower end surface of the front extending portion C4884c and the upper surface of the electrical board C4882 are positioned on substantially the same horizontal plane as an example of substantially the same height. In this way, the front extending portion C4884c is formed to extend from a position higher than the decorative electrical board C4882 to a position substantially at the same height as the decorative electrical board C4882. The height position substantially the same as that of the electrical board C4882 means that the lower end of the front extension C4884c and the electrical board C4882 overlap each other when viewed from the front.

The rear extending portion C4884d is a portion that extends downward from the end portion of the top portion C4884a on the rear side (the side farther from the player (back side)). The rear extending portion C4884d is formed to extend vertically downward from a recessed portion C4884b formed in the rear portion of the top portion C4884a. The rear extending portion C4884d is located behind the support member C4881, the electrical board C4882 and the inner lens C4883. In addition, the lower end of the rear extending portion C4884d is located at a position lower than the electrical board C4882. In this way, the rear extension C4884d is formed to extend from a position higher to a lower position than the electrical board C4882. In FIG. 380, as an example of a position lower than the electrical board C4882, the lower end of the rear extension part C4884d is positioned at substantially the same height as the lower end of the support member C4881 on which the electrical board C4882 is placed. It shows the position. In addition, the position of substantially the same height as the lower end of the support member C4881 means that the lower end of the rear extension part C4884d and the lower end of the support member C4881 overlap each other when viewed from the front. .

The speaker C4885 shown in FIG. 382 is provided on the left and right outer sides of the outer lens C4884.

In the second decoration part C4880 configured as described above, the support member C4881, the illumination board C4882, the inner lens C4883, the outer lens C4884, and the speaker C4885 are fixed to each other by fastening members. Also, the second decorative portion C4880 is fixed to the upper end portion of the mounting member C4850. The front extending portion C4884c of the second decorative portion C4880 is arranged above the line cover C4860 as shown in FIG. Also, the decorative portion C4841a of the effect button device C4840 is engaged with the concave portion C4884b. In this way, the outer lens C4884 is provided so as to extend between the effect button device C4840, the line cover C4860, the electrical decoration board C4882, and the like in a cross-sectional view. The second decorative portion C4880 can irradiate light substantially upward of the electrical board C4882 by causing the LEDC4882a of the electrical board C4882 to emit light. The light is emitted to the outside of the second decorative portion C4880 via the inner lens C4883 and the outer lens C4884. In this way, the second decorative portion C4880 can cause the outer lens C4884 to emit light with the light.

A decorative member C4890 shown in FIGS. 382 and 383 is a member to be decorated. A pair of left and right decorative members C4890 are provided. First, the configuration of the right decorative member C4890 will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 384 and 388, the right decorative member C4890 is formed into a thin plate. The decorative member C4890 is plated to enhance the decorative effect. Also, the decorative member C4890 is a member that is relatively easily electrified (as compared to a member that is not plated), and is an example of the specific decorative portion of the present application. Decorative member C4890 is formed to extend substantially in the left-right direction. The decorative member C4890 is formed in a tapered shape such that the height (vertical width) decreases toward the right side (left and right outer side) when viewed from the front (see FIG. 384). In addition, the lateral width of the decorative member C4890 is larger than the lateral width of the through hole C4852 (see FIG. 382) of the mounting member C4850. The decorative member C4890 includes an exposed portion C4891, a facing portion C4892, a first connection portion C4893 and a second connection portion C4894.

The exposed portion C4891 is a portion exposed forward from the mounting member C4850. The exposed portion C4891 is formed to protrude substantially forward. The exposed portion C4891 is formed so as to extend from the left end portion of the decorative member C4890 to the left and right middle portions. The exposed portion C4891 is formed in substantially the same shape as the through hole C4852 of the mounting member C4850 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 382).

The facing portion C4892 is a portion facing the mounting member C4850 and the line cover C4860. The facing portion C4892 is formed around the exposed portion C4891. The facing portion C4892 is formed to extend from the left end to the right end of the decorative member C4890.

The first connection portion C4893 is a portion connected to a ground wire C4900, which will be described later. The first connecting portion C4893 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a bottom that protrudes rearward from the decorative member C4890. The first connecting portion C4893 is formed on the left portion of the decorative member C4890.

The second connecting portion C4894 is a portion connected to the mounting member C4850 and the metal plate C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870. As shown in Figures 384, 385 and 388, the second connecting portion C4894 is formed in a concave shape in which the front surface of the decorative member C4890 is concaved backward. Note that FIG. 385 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow C4802-C4802 shown in FIG. 384(b). At the center of the second connecting portion C4894, a hole is formed that penetrates the decorative member C4890 in the front-rear direction. The second connection portion C4894 is formed in a generally annular shape when viewed from the front. The second connection portion C4894 is formed at the left end portion of the decoration member C4890 (substantially to the left of the first connection portion C4893).

As shown in FIGS. 382 and 383, the right decorative member C4890 configured as described above is fixed to the mounting member C4850 by fitting the exposed portion C4891 from the rear into the through hole C4852 of the mounting member C4850. The decorative member C4890 is fixed to the base member C4810 via the mounting member C4850, and is fixed (unitized) with the upper plate C4820, the lower plate C4830 (storage plate), the effect button device C4840, and the like (see FIG. 381). In addition, the exposed portion C4891 is arranged below the line cover C4860 when viewed from the front, and is provided so as to be visible to the player from the outside.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 380, the front and rear positions of the upper end portion of the facing portion C4892 are on the front side of the support member C4881 and the electrical board C4882. In addition, the front and rear positions of the upper end portion of the facing portion C4892 are rearward of the mounting member C4850, the line cover C4860, and the front extending portion C4884c (lower end portion). Thus, the upper end portion of the facing portion C4892 is arranged between the electrical board C4882 and the like and the front side extension portion C4884c and the like. The upper end portion of the facing portion C4892 is positioned at substantially the same height as the electrical board C4882. The lower end of the decorative member C4890 is located below the electrical board C4882, specifically, slightly lower than the lower end of the through hole C4852. In this way, the decorative member C4890 is formed so as to extend from a position substantially at the same height as the decorative electrical board C4882 to a position lower than the decorative electrical board C4882. In addition, the front and rear positions of the lower end portion of the decorative member C4890 are located rearward of the electrical board C4882. Thus, the decorative member C4890 is provided so as to cover the electrical board C4882 from below.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 384 and 385, the second connection portion C4894 is arranged so as to overlap the connection portion C4872a of the sheet metal C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870 in front view, and is attached together with the connection portion C4872a by the screw C4894a. It is fixed to member C4850. In this way, the metal plate C4872 and the right decorative member C4890 are connected (electrically) so that electricity can flow with each other.

The left decorative member C4890 shown in FIG. 382 is provided so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right decorative member C4890, except that it is not electrically connected to the metal plate C4872.

The ground wire C4900 shown in FIGS. 381 and 383 to 385 is for grounding the left and right decorative members C4890. A pair of left and right ground wires C4900 are provided. One end of the right ground wire C4900 (the ground wire C4900 shown in FIGS. 383 to 385) is connected to the first connection portion C4893 of the right decorative member C4890 via a terminal C4901 and a screw C4902. The ground wire C4900 on the right side extends substantially rightward from the terminal C4901 to the right side of the effect button device C4840 (see FIG. 381), and is provided so that the extending portion further extends rearward. Thus, the ground wire C4900 on the right side is provided so as to avoid the effect button device C4840 (see FIG. 381). The rear end (other end) of the ground wire C4900 is connected to a grounded predetermined member. Thus, the right ground wire C4900 grounds the right decorative member C4890. The right ground wire C4900 also grounds the metal plate C4872 through the right decorative member C4890. The left ground wire C4900 (ground wire C4900 shown in FIG. 381), like the right ground wire C4900, grounds the left decorative member C4890.

In the plate unit C4800 configured as described above, static electricity may be generated during games. For example, static electricity may be generated due to friction when the player presses the button portion C4842 of the effect button device C4840 or collision of game balls stored in the plate unit C4800. In addition, static electricity may be generated when the player touches a member (for example, line cover C4860, outer lens C4884, etc.) provided to be exposed to the outside from the plate unit C4800. The static electricity may move on the surface of the member where the static electricity is generated and flow to other members. The left and right decorative members C4890 thus prevent the static electricity flowing to other members from affecting the decorative electrical boards C4871 and C4882. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 389 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing how static electricity generated in the plate unit C4800 flows. The dashed arrow in FIG. 389 shows how the static electricity generated by the player touching the line cover C4860 on the right side flows toward the front side of the electrical decoration board C4882. The white arrows in FIG. 389 show how the static electricity generated by the effect button device C4840 (eg, the button portion C4842) flows toward the rear side of the electrical board C4882. The flow of static electricity will be described below.

First, the flow of static electricity toward the front side of the electrical board C4882 will be described. When static electricity is generated on the line cover C4860 or the like, the static electricity may flow backward and upward on the surface of the line cover C4860 as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. The static electricity flows rearward through the rear portion of the line cover C4860 and passes between the line cover C4860 and the front extension portion C4884c. The static electricity reaches the facing portion C4892 facing the line cover C4860, that is, the decorative member C4890. The static electricity thus reaching the decorative member C4890 flows into the ground wire C4900 (see FIG. 380) connected to the decorative member C4890.

Thus, the decoration member C4890 is provided with a member for grounding (earth member). Specifically, since the ground wire C4900 is connected to the decorative member C4890, static electricity generated around the decorative board C4882 such as the line cover C4860 can be eliminated. This prevents the static electricity from reaching the electrical board C4882, and prevents the electrical board C4882 from malfunctioning due to static electricity (for example, failure, malfunction, etc.). In this way, the decoration member C4890 can stably operate the gaming machine and enhance the functionality of the gaming machine. Also, the decorative member C4890, which can be visually recognized from the outside, also serves to eliminate static electricity, so that the number of parts can be reduced.

Next, the flow of static electricity toward the rear side of the electrical board C4882 will be described. The static electricity generated by the effect button device C4840 (the button portion C4842, etc.) flows forward and downward on the surface of the effect button device C4840, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. It may reach the outer lens C4884. The static electricity may flow on the surface of the recess C4884b and flow downward on the rear side surface of the rear extension C4884d.

The static electricity flows forward from the lower end of the rear side surface of the rear extension C4884d. The static electricity flows upward along the front side surface of the rear extension C4884d, passes between the support member C4881 and the rear extension C4884d, and reaches the electrical board C4882.

In this way, the second decorative portion C4880 of the eleventh pachinko game machine is such that static electricity does not reach the rear side of the electrical decoration board C4882 unless the static electricity flows around the rear side extension portion C4884d from below. It is configured. That is, in the outer lens C4884 having the rear extension C4884d, static electricity flows on the surface of the plate unit C4800 from the portion where static electricity is generated (for example, the button portion C4842, etc.) to the decorative substrate C4882 (LEDC4882a). The distance (creepage distance) can be increased. As a result, the voltage of the static electricity can be lowered, and it is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the electrical board C4882.

Further, for example, when the player touches the top C4884a or the like of the outer lens C4884 and static electricity is generated, the static electricity may flow forward through the top C4884a. The static electricity cannot reach the decorative electrical board C4882 unless it flows to the front side of the decorative electrical board C4882 along the outer edge of the front extending portion C4884c and then flows toward the rear side. In this way, the front extending portion C4884c can lengthen the creepage distance from the portion where static electricity is generated (for example, the top portion C4884a, etc.) until the static electricity reaches the front side of the electrical board C4882. Therefore, even if the decorative member C4890 cannot remove the static electricity, the voltage of the static electricity reaching the front side of the decorative board C4882 can be lowered to prevent the decorative board C4882 from malfunctioning.

Also, as described above, the sheet metal C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870 is electrically connected to the decorative member C4890 (see FIG. 384). As a result, static electricity reaching the metal sheet C4872 can be eliminated without connecting a separate ground wire to the metal sheet C4872. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and prevent defects in the electrical board C4871 caused by static electricity. In particular, since the sheet metal C4872 is formed so as to surround the electrical board C4871, it is possible to effectively prevent static electricity from reaching the outer edge of the electrical board C4871.

Further, as shown in FIG. 385, the second connecting portion C4894 and the screw C4894a for connecting the metal plate C4872 and the decorative member C4890 also serve to fix the mounting member C4850 and the decorative member C4890. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of parts.
The decoration member C4890 may be partially covered with plating, or may be partially made of a metal member.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines are publicly known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-59498).

The above publication discloses a game machine having an LED board arranged on the back side of a reflector (reflecting member).

It is desired to further improve the functionality of such gaming machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the problems described above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A specific decorative portion (button portion C4842, sheet metal C4872 and decorative member C4890 in this embodiment) provided on the decorative member (cover portion C4841 and mounting member C4850) and at least partially visible from the outside;
A substrate (decoration substrate C4882) arranged on the back side of the specific decoration portion (decoration member C4890) (back side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine);
and
At least a part of the specific decorative portion is composed of a chargeable member (a member that generates static electricity during a game or is charged with static electricity due to the flow of static electricity from another member),
The specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890) is provided with a grounding member (grounding wire C4900) for grounding.

With such a configuration, the static electricity is eliminated by the grounding member (grounding wire C4900) provided in the specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890), so that the board (decorative board C4882) is free from any defects (for example, failure, malfunction, etc.). can be prevented from occurring. This makes it possible to enhance the functionality of the gaming machine.

Further, between the specific decoration portion (button portion C4842) and the electronic component (LEDC4882a) provided on the substrate (electrical decoration substrate C4882), the electronic component ( An insulating member (outer lens C4884) is arranged to provide a creepage distance to the LED C4882a).

With such a configuration, the insulating member (outer lens C4884) lengthens the creepage distance and prevents the occurrence of defects in the board (decorative board C4882) caused by static electricity (for example, static electricity generated in a specific decorative portion). Therefore, the operation of the gaming machine can be stabilized.

Further, the insulating member (outer lens C4884) is formed so as to cover the substrate (decorative substrate C4882) from above.

With such a configuration, the creepage distance required for static electricity to reach the board (illumination board C4882) from above the insulating member (outer lens C4884) is increased (see the white arrow in FIG. 389). It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of defects in the board (decorative board C4882) caused by static electricity.

In addition, the insulating member (outer lens C4884) is formed on the rear side of the substrate (decorated substrate C4882) so as to extend from a position higher than the substrate (decorated substrate C4882) to a position lower than the substrate (decorated substrate C4882). It comprises an insulating portion (rear side extension portion C4884d).

With such a configuration, the creepage distance required for static electricity to reach the back side of the board (electrical board C4882) is lengthened (see the white arrow in FIG. 389), and the board (electrical It is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of defects in the decorative substrate C4882).

In addition, the insulating member (outer lens C4884) is installed from a position higher than the board (electrical board C4882) on the front side of the board (electrical board C4882) (the front side (front side) of the pachinko game machine). It has a front side insulating portion (front side extension portion C4884c) formed so as to extend up to substantially the same height position as the board (electrical board C4882).

With such a configuration, static electricity (for example, static electricity above the insulating member (outer lens C4884)) does not reach the front side of the substrate (illumination substrate C4882) due to the front insulation portion (front extension portion C4884c). By increasing the required creepage distance, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of defects in the board (decorative board C4882) caused by static electricity.

Further, the specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890) is arranged between the front side insulating portion (front side extension portion C4884c) and the substrate (electrical decoration substrate C4882).

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively prevent static electricity from reaching the front side of the board (decorated board C4882).

Further, the specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890) is formed so as to extend from a position substantially at the same height as the board (decorative board C4882) to a position lower than the board (decorative board C4882). is.

With such a configuration, the static electricity under the substrate (electrical board C4882) is eliminated by the specific decorative portion (decorative member C4890) provided with the grounding member (grounding wire C4900), and the static electricity is removed from the board (electrical board C4882). ) can be prevented from reaching the

In addition, the specific decorative portion electrically charges a plurality of charging members (members that generate static electricity during play or are charged with static electricity due to static electricity flowing from other members; in this embodiment, sheet metal C4872 and decorative member C4890). It is configured by connecting to

With such a configuration, static electricity of a plurality of charging members (metal sheet C4872 and decorative member C4890) can be eliminated by one grounding member (grounding wire C4900), and the number of parts can be reduced.

Also, at least one of the plurality of charging members (sheet metal C4872) is provided along at least a part of the peripheral edge of a board (decorative board C4871) different from the board (decorative board C4882). .

Such a configuration can prevent static electricity from reaching the periphery of the substrate (decorative substrate C4871).

Further, the specific decorative portion (metal sheet C4872 and decorative member C4890) is unitized with a storage plate (upper plate C4820 and lower plate C4830) for storing game balls.

With this configuration, the plate unit C4800, which is easily electrified, can be easily provided with the specific decorative portion (the metal sheet C4872 and the decorative member C4890).

Note that the cover portion C4841 and the mounting member C4850 are an embodiment of the decorative member.
Also, the button portion C4842, the metal plate C4872 and the decorative member C4890 are an embodiment of the specific decorative portion.
Also, the electrical board C4882 is an embodiment of the board.
Moreover, LEDC4882a is one form of embodiment of an electronic component.
Also, the outer lens C4884 is an embodiment of the insulating member.
Also, the rear side extension portion C4884d is an embodiment of the rear side insulating portion.
Further, the front side extension portion C4884c is an embodiment of the front side insulating portion.
Also, the metal plate C4872 and the decorative member C4890 are an embodiment of a plurality of electrically connected charging members.
Also, the upper tray C4820 and the lower tray C4830 are an embodiment of the storage tray.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, the outer lens C4884 of the second decorative portion C4880 has a substantially inverted U-shaped cross-sectional shape (see FIG. 389), but the cross-sectional shape of the outer lens C4884 is not particularly limited.

In addition, the lower end of the front extension C4884c of the outer lens C4884 was positioned at substantially the same height as the electrical board C4882 (see FIG. 389). The positional relationship is not particularly limited.

In addition, although the lower end of the rear extension C4884d of the outer lens C4884 was positioned lower than the illumination board C4882 (see FIG. 389), the height between the rear extension C4884d and the illumination board C4882 The positional relationship is not particularly limited.

Also, the metal sheet C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870 is formed so as to surround the electrical board C4871 (see FIG. 384), but the shape of the metal sheet C4872 is not particularly limited. The sheet metal C4872 may, for example, be formed in a substantially linear shape along at least a portion (for example, upper end, etc.) of the outer edge of the electrical board C4871.

In this embodiment, the right decorative member C4890 is connected to the metal plate C4872 of the first decorative portion C4870 (see FIG. 384), but the decorative member C4890 connected to the metal plate C4872 is not particularly limited. For example, the left decorative member C4890 may be connected to the metal plate C4872.

Also, the decorative member C4890 does not necessarily have to be connected to the metal plate C4872. For example, the sheet metal C4872 may be appropriately connected to a ground wire so that static electricity can be eliminated by the sheet metal C4872.

The decorative member C4890 is unitized with the upper plate C4820 and the lower plate C4830 (see FIG. 381), but the relationship between the decorative member C4890 and the upper plate C4820 is not particularly limited. It may be separate from C4820 or the like.

Also, the decorative member C4890 is arranged between the front extension C4884c and the electrical board C4882 (see FIG. 389), but the positional relationship between the front extension C4884c and the electrical board C4882 is particularly limited. not a thing

[12. 12th pachinko machine]
The twelfth pachinko game machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 390 to 410. FIG. The same or similar components as those related to the first to eleventh pachinko game machines are denoted by the same names and the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 390 is an example of an overall front view of a twelfth pachinko game machine. FIG. 391 is an example of a perspective view of the entire twelfth pachinko game machine as viewed obliquely from above on the right front side. As shown in FIGS. 390 and 391, the twelfth pachinko machine has, for example, the glass door 4 shown in FIG. 2 and a glass door D4 different from the glass door C4 shown in FIGS. , significantly different from the first to eleventh pachinko machines. The configuration of the glass door D4 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 392 to 410. FIG.

[Glass door]
FIG. 392 is an example of a front view showing part of the glass door D4. FIG. 393 is an example of an exploded perspective view of a portion of the glass door D4 as seen obliquely from the right front and upper side. The glass door D4 has transparent protective glass (for example, a front glass D4962 and a rear glass D4964 shown in FIG. 410 to be described later) attached via a glass unit D4950 (see FIG. 408 to be described later). The glass door D4 mainly includes a frame D4600, an upper unit D4700, a side lens unit D4800 arranged along the vertical direction on the right side in front view, a substrate unit D4900 (see FIG. 393 for all), lock members D4760 and D4760L ( (See FIG. 395). Note that in FIG. 392, illustration of the side lens unit D4800 is omitted for convenience of explanation. Further, an engagement hole D4650, which will be described later, is formed in the frame D4600.

(frame body)
The frame D4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 393, 394 and 395. FIG. FIG. 394 is an example of a front view of the frame D4600 (unit part D4620). 395 is an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in FIG. 394. FIG. Note that FIG. 394 shows not only the frame D4600 but also the plate unit D5 for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 393, the frame D4600 has a base portion D4610 and a unit portion D4620. The base portion D4610 supports, for example, a unit portion D4620, a substrate unit D4900, a glass unit D4950 (see FIG. 408 described later), and the like. Also, the base portion D4610 supports the upper unit D4700, the side lens unit D4800 and the like via the unit portion D4620.

The twelfth pachinko machine differs from the tenth pachinko machine, for example, in the configuration of the frame D4600 and the configuration of the side lens unit D4800.

The base portion D4610 is formed in a plate shape with an opening in the center. The base portion D4610 is provided with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The base portion D4610 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The unit part D4620 is formed in a substantially inverted U shape (U shape) in a front view with an open bottom. A member such as a speaker is mounted on the unit portion D4620. The unit portion D4620 is provided on the front side of the base portion D4610 and fixed to the base portion D4610. An upper unit D4700 is attached to the upper part of the unit part D4620.

As shown in FIG. 394, the unit portion D4620 is formed with an engagement hole D4650 that engages with an engagement portion D4822 (described later in FIG. 397) of the side lens unit D4800. A communicating hole corresponding to the engaging hole D4650 is also formed in the base portion D4610. In the following, the engagement hole D4650 formed in the unit portion D4620 and the hole formed in the base portion D4610 corresponding to the engagement hole D4650 are combined to form the engagement hole D4650 formed in the frame D4600. sometimes referred to as

As shown in FIG. 395, the unit portion D4620 includes concave portions D4621 and D4621L, mounting holes D4622 and D4621L, slide guide holes (no reference numerals), and wiring holes D4624 for mounting the upper unit D4700. , D4624L, bosses (no reference numerals), etc. are formed, and these configurations are the same as the recesses C4621, mounting holes C4622, slide guide holes C4623, wiring holes C4624, bosses C4625, etc. described in the tenth pachinko game machine. Since it has the same configuration as , the description is omitted.

Locking members D4760 and D4760L shown in FIG. 395 can mainly manually lock (fix) upper unit D4700 to frame D4600 without using tools. Lock members D4760 and D4760L are provided on the right and left portions of frame D4600 (unit D4620), respectively. The locking mechanism using the locking members D4760, D4760L, etc. is the same as the locking mechanism using the locking members C4760, C4760L, etc. described in the tenth pachinko game machine, so description thereof will be omitted.

(upper unit, side lens unit)
FIG. 396 is an example of a front view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800. FIG. 397 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 as viewed obliquely from above on the right rear side.

As shown in FIG. 397, a hook-shaped metal engaging portion D4822 is formed behind the side lens unit D4800. The side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600 by its own weight by hooking and engaging the engaging portion D4822 with the aforementioned engaging hole D4650 (see FIG. 394) formed in the frame D4600. The term "temporary attachment" as used herein means that the side lens unit D4800 is manually attached to the frame by lifting the side lens unit D4800 and removing the engaging portion D4822 from the engaging hole D4650 without using any special tools. Refers to attachment in a manner that allows it to be easily moved from the attachment position attached to the body D4600 to the removal position. It should be noted that the upper unit D4700 cannot be attached unless the engaging portion D4822 is firmly seated in the engaging hole D4650, for example, the engagement between the engaging portion D4822 and the engaging hole D4650 is incomplete. When the engaging portion D4822 is firmly seated in the engaging hole D4650, the upper unit D4700 can be attached.

Further, at the rear of the right portion of the upper unit D4700, there is an attachment portion D4710 formed with an insertion hole D4711 through which an insertion portion (not shown) of a lock member D4760 (see FIG. 408 described later) is inserted. Further, at the rear of the left part of the upper unit D4700, there is a mounting portion D4710L formed with an insertion hole D4711L through which an insertion portion (not shown) of a lock member D4760L (see FIG. 408 described later) is inserted. The mounting portion D4710L is obtained by rotating the mounting portion D4710 by 90 degrees.

396 and 397 both show the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 attached to each other. The procedure for attaching the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 to each other will be described later, but before attaching the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 to each other, the side lens unit D4800 is attached to the frame D4600.

FIG. 398 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 separated from each other, viewed obliquely downward from the right rear. FIG. 399 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800, which are separated from each other, viewed from the right rear obliquely above.

As shown in FIG. 398, an engaging portion D4720 is formed at the connecting portion of the upper unit D4700 with the side lens unit D4800. The engaging portion D4720 is a longitudinal member that is long in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 399, an engaging groove D4830 is formed in the connecting portion between the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700. The engaging groove D4830 restricts movement of the engaging portion D4720 in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction when the engaging portion D4720 is engaged.

Slide the upper unit D4700 from the front toward the rear with respect to the side lens unit D4800 while making the connecting portion of the upper unit D4700 with the side lens unit D4800 face the connecting portion of the side lens unit D4800 with the upper unit D4700. By doing so, the engaging portion D4720 can be engaged with the engaging groove D4830. When the engaging portion D4720 and the engaging groove D4830 are engaged, the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 are connected.

FIG. 400 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 as seen obliquely from the front and lower right side, (A) a diagram in which the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 are separated, and (B). FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the connection of the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800.

As shown in FIG. 400(A), on the front surface of the side lens unit D4800, a first role piece S1 is formed at the connecting portion with the upper unit D4700. In addition, on the front surface of the upper unit D4700, a second accessory piece S2 is formed at the connecting portion with the side lens unit D4800. Each of the first role piece S1 and the second role piece S2 is a part of a completed body S of one role object, and is incomplete in shape by itself. Then, when the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are connected, the first role piece S1 and the second role piece S2 are combined, and when both are arranged adjacent to each other, one role is completed. A body S is formed.

In the present embodiment, the complete body S formed when the first role piece S1 and the second role piece S2 are combined is an abstract one role object, but is not limited to this. A part of the body of the character is assumed to be the first role piece S1, the remaining part of the character is assumed to be the second role piece S2, and the first role piece S1 and the second role piece S2 are joined together, and the two are adjacent to each other. It may also be arranged such that the body of the character is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the complete role piece S is formed by combining two role piece pieces S1 and the second role piece piece S2. The number of component pieces is not limited to two, and may be, for example, three or more.

It should be noted that the complete body S when a plurality of character pieces are combined does not mean a complete body such as a character's body, for example, but an integral body such as a part of a character's body being completed, for example. It is sufficient if a coherent shape is formed. For example, a part of the character's face is set as the first role piece S1, the rest of the character's face is set as the second role piece S2, and the first role piece S1 and the second role piece S2 are combined. , the face, which is a part of the character's body, may be completed by arranging the two adjacent to each other.

[Side lens unit]
Next, a characteristic configuration of the side lens unit D4800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 401(A), 401(B) and 402. FIG. FIG. 401 is an example of a perspective view of the side lens unit D4800 viewed obliquely from the front left side, showing (A) a view in which the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 are accommodated, (B) the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870. It is the figure which pulled out a part of inner side decoration sheet D4870 upwards. FIG. 402 is an example of a perspective view of the BB line cross-section shown in FIG. 401, viewed obliquely from the upper front left side.

(lens)
As shown in FIG. 402, the side lens unit D4800 includes, for example, a colorless and transparent outer lens D4854 arranged on the outermost side (that is, on the side opposite to the player) and, for example, a colorless lens that is arranged on the innermost side (that is, on the player side). and a transparent inner lens D4874.

(decorative sheet)
As shown in FIG. 402, a space is formed inside the outer lens D4854 in which, for example, a colored transparent outer decorative sheet D4850 can be set. In this space, the outer decorative sheet D4850 is set parallel to the surface of the outer lens D4854. In addition, the outer decorative sheet D4850 has a protrusion D4850a (see FIGS. 401(A) and (B)), and by pulling the protrusion D4850a upward, the outer decorative sheet D4850 is set parallel to the surface of the outer lens D4854. It is possible to pull out the outer decorative sheet D4850. The protrusion D4850a is exposed unless the upper unit D4700 is attached to the side lens unit D4800. Therefore, the outside decorative sheet D4850 can be replaced with another decorative sheet by pulling the projection D4850a upward while the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600.

As shown in FIG. 402, a space is formed inside the inner lens D4874 in which a colored transparent inner decorative sheet D4870, for example, can be set. In this space, the inner decorative sheet D4870 is set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874. In addition, the inner decorative sheet D4870 has a protrusion D4870a (see FIGS. 401(A) and (B)), and by pulling the protrusion D4870a upward, the inner decorative sheet D4870 is set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874. It is possible to pull out the inner decorative sheet D4870. The protrusion D4870a is exposed unless the upper unit D4700 is attached to the side lens unit D4800. Therefore, the inner decorative sheet D4870 can be replaced with another decorative sheet by pulling the projection D4870a upward while the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600.

Note that the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 may be decorative sheets of different colors, or may be decorative sheets of the same color.

As shown in FIG. 401(A), an outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4852 and an inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4872 are formed in the connecting portion of the side lens unit D4800 with the upper unit D4700. By inserting the outer decorative sheet D4850 from the outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4852, the outer decorative sheet D4850 can be set parallel to the surface of the outer lens D4854. Also, by inserting the inner decorative sheet D4870 from the inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4872, the inner decorative sheet D4870 can be set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874.

In this manner, the outer lens D4854 and the inner lens D4874 are colorless and transparent, and the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 are colored and transparent. The color of the inner decorative sheet D4870 can be changed. In this embodiment, the external decorative sheet D4850 and/or the internal decorative sheet D4870 can be easily replaced with another decorative sheet to change the appearance simply by disconnecting the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800. This makes it possible to improve functionality.

(Light guide plate)
As shown in FIG. 402, on the inner side of the outer decorative sheet D4850, for example, the base end portion (frame body D4600) is attached so that the image can be visually recognized from the outside (that is, the side opposite to the player) by surface light emission An outer light guide plate D4856 is arranged so that light incident from the side end (side end) is reflected outward. The outer light guide plate D4856 is arranged such that the distance from the set outer decorative sheet D4850 is greatest at the base end and gradually decreases toward the tip end. However, this is not essential, and the outer light guide plate D4856 may be arranged so as to be parallel to the surface of the set outer decorative sheet D4850.

In addition, on the inner side of the inner decorative sheet D4870, for example, light incident from the end face on the base end side is reflected inward so that the image can be viewed from the inside (that is, the player side) by surface light emission. An inner light guide plate D4876 processed as shown in FIG. The inner light guide plate D4876 is arranged such that the distance from the set inner decorative sheet D4870 is greatest at the base end and gradually decreases toward the tip end. However, this is not essential, and the inner light guide plate D4876 may be arranged so as to be parallel to the surface of the set inner decorative sheet D4870.

Between the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876, for example, light incident from the end face on the base end side is directed outward and inward so that an image can be viewed from both the outer and inner sides by surface emission. A central light guide plate D4862 processed to be reflective is arranged. The center light guide plate D4862 has a larger distance from the base end to the tip end than either the outer light guide plate D4856 or the inner light guide plate D4876. The central light guide plate D4862 is parallel to the inner light guide plate D4876 and not parallel to the outer light guide plate D4856, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be parallel to the central light guide plate D4862 and the outer light guide plate D4856, but may not be parallel to the inner light guide plate D4876, or may be parallel to both the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876. .

In this way, from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 (that is, on the side opposite to the player), an image obtained by synthesizing the image appearing on the central light guide plate D4862 and the image appearing on the inner light guide plate D4876 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 (that is, the player's side), an image obtained by synthesizing the image appearing on the central light guide plate D4862 and the image appearing on the outer light guide plate D4856 can be visually recognized. By doing so, it is possible to make the image visible from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 and the image visible from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 different images, thereby enhancing functionality.

(LED substrate)
As shown in FIG. 402, an LED substrate D4880 is arranged at the proximal end of the side lens unit D4800. Three LED rows D4881, D4882, and D4883, in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged for each row, are arranged on the LED substrate D4880 in the vertical direction. The three LED rows D4881, D4882, D4883 correspond to the outer light guide plate D4856, the central light guide plate D4862, and the inner light guide plate D4876, respectively. That is, the LED substrate D4880 has three LED rows D4881, D4882, and D4883, which are arranged on the base end side end surface of the outer light guide plate D4856, the base end side end surface of the central light guide plate D4862, and the inner light guide plate. It is arranged so as to face the end face of D4876 on the proximal end side. Then, when light is incident from the end face on the base end side of each of the light guide plates D4856, D4862, and D4876, each of the light guide plates D4856, D4862, and D4876 emits surface light, and an image can be visually recognized.

All the LEDs arranged on the LED board D4880 may be controlled to emit light and/or be extinguished. And by turning off the lights, only one of the outer light guide plate D4856, the central light guide plate D4862, and the inner light guide plate D4876 may be surface-emitting. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to the above, by independently lighting and/or extinguishing only a part of the LEDs in the vertical direction, only a part of the surfaces of the light guide plates D4856, D4862, D4876 in the vertical direction may be surface-emitting. By doing so, images of various variations can be displayed in a visually recognizable manner, and functionality can be enhanced.

(front lens)
As shown in FIGS. 401(A), (B) and 402, a front lens D4860 capable of emitting light by light emitted from the tip of the central light guide plate D4862 is arranged at the tip of the side lens unit D4800. there is

As described above, in the present embodiment, the central light guide plate D4862 is processed so that the light incident from the end face on the base end side is reflected outward and inward. However, even if the processing is not performed or only a very small amount of processing is performed so that more of the light incident from the end surface on the proximal side of the central light guide plate D4862 reaches the front lens D4860, good. By doing so, it is possible to increase the amount of light at the front lens D4860. Even if the central light guide plate D4862 is not processed or is only slightly processed, the outer light guide plate D4856 is processed so that the image can be viewed from the outside by surface emission. When the inner light guide plate D4876 is provided so that the image can be viewed from the inside by surface light emission, the image that can be viewed from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 and the image that can be viewed from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 Different images can be used, and functionality can be enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the front lens D4860 can emit light by light emitted from the tip of the central light guide plate D4862, but is not limited to this. Emitted light may be used to emit light, or light emitted from the distal end portions of the outer light guide plate D4856, the central light guide plate D4862, and the inner light guide plate D4876 may be used to emit light.

(Modified example of side lens unit)
In the above description, the outer light guide plate D4856 is processed so that the light incident from the end face on the base end side is reflected outward, and the inner light guide plate D4876 has light from the end face on the base end side. The central light guide plate D4862 is processed so that the incident light is reflected inward. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the outer light guide plate D4856 is any one of the following (a) to (e) light guide plate, the central light guide plate D4862 is any one of the following (a) to (e) light guide plate, The inner light guide plate D4876 may be one of the following light guide plates (a) to (e). By doing so, the image visible from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 and the image visible from the inside can be different images, or the image visible from the outside and the image visible from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 can be the same image. Alternatively, it is possible to make an image visible from either the outside or the inside of the side lens unit D4800 but not visible from the other.
(a) A light guide plate processed to reflect outward the light incident from the end face on the base end side (b) Processed to reflect the light incident from the end face on the base end side toward the inside Light guide plate (C) A light guide plate processed to reflect light incident from the end face on the base end side to both the outside and the inside (the image visible from the outside and the image visible from the inside are the same processed to look like an image)
(d) A light guide plate that has been processed to reflect light incident from the end face on the base end side to both the outside and the inside (so that the image visible from the outside and the image visible from the inside are different images) processed into)
(e) A light guide plate that is not processed or only slightly processed so that most of the light incident from the end face on the base end side travels to the end face on the tip end side

In addition, the side lens unit D4800 is configured such that all or at least part of the outer light guide plate D4856, the inner light guide plate D4876, and the central light guide plate D4862 can be easily replaced with other light guide plates. is preferred. By doing so, if a plurality of variations of the outer light guide plate and a plurality of variations of the inner light guide plate are prepared in advance, the pachinko machine can be operated simply by replacing the outer light guide plate and/or the inner light guide plate. It is possible to change the appearance image and improve the functionality.

In the above description, the central light guide plate D4862 is arranged between the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876. A partition plate D4863 capable of blocking may be arranged. By doing so, light is blocked between the outer light guide plate D4856 and the inner light guide plate D4876, so that the outer decorative sheet D4850 cannot be visually recognized from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 (that is, the player side). It is difficult to see the inner decorative sheet D4870 from the outside of the side lens unit D4800 (that is, the side opposite to the player), or it becomes difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to change the visibility when viewed from the inside of the side lens unit D4800 and when viewed from the outside, so that independent images appear both inside and outside the side lens unit D4800. As a result, functionality can be improved.

[Upper unit]
Next, the characteristic configuration of the upper unit D4700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 403 to 406. FIG. FIG. 403 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 with the opening/closing door D4730 closed, viewed obliquely from the front left side and below. FIG. 404 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 with the opening/closing door D4730 half-opened, viewed obliquely from the front left and below, in which the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 are accommodated. is. FIG. 405 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 as seen obliquely from the left front and below, showing a part of the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 drawn downward. In FIG. 405, the opening/closing door D4730 is omitted for convenience. FIG. 406 is an example of a perspective view of the upper unit D4700 with the opening/closing door D4730 half-opened, viewed obliquely from the right-rear lower side, in which the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 are accommodated. is.

(upper lens)
The upper unit D4700 includes, for example, a colorless and transparent upper outer lens D4742 (see FIG. 406) arranged on the outermost side (that is, on the anti-player side), and a colorless and transparent upper part that is arranged on the innermost side (that is, on the player side). and an inner lens D4744 (see FIGS. 403-405).

(opening/closing door)
As shown in FIG. 403, an opening/closing door D4730 is provided at the connection between the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800. The opening/closing door D4730 is provided with the aforementioned engaging portion D4720 that engages with the engaging groove D4830 (see FIGS. 399 and 401(A)) of the side lens unit D4800.

At the proximal end of the opening/closing door D4730, a locked state in which the opening/closing door D4730 is locked against an opening/closing door base D4735 (see FIG. 404) to be described later so as not to open the opening/closing door D4730, and a locked state of the opening/closing door D4730 are released. An opening/closing operation portion D4722 is provided that can switch between the released state and the released state. For example, when the opening/closing operation part D4722 is turned clockwise, it is locked, and when it is turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked.

For example, when the opening/closing operation part D4722 is turned counterclockwise to the released state, the opening/closing operation part D47222 can be rotated about one end D4732 of the opening/closing door D4730, and the opening/closing door base D4735 (to be described later) can be rotated. 404), the opening/closing operation portion D4722 can be opened. Therefore, the opening/closing door D4730 can be opened from the opening/closing door base D4735 by a manual operation such as turning the opening/closing operation part D4722 without using any special tools, and the functionality can be enhanced.

(upper decorative sheet)
As shown in FIG. 404, when the opening/closing operation part D4722 is opened, the opening/closing door base D4735 is exposed. The opening/closing door base D4735 is fixedly attached to the upper unit D4700 by screws or the like.

An upper outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4752 (see FIGS. 404 and 406) and an upper inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4772 (see FIGS. 405 and 406) are formed in the opening/closing door base D4735. By inserting, for example, a colored transparent upper outer decorative sheet D4750 from the upper outer decorative sheet insertion groove D4752, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 can be set parallel to the surface of the upper outer lens D4742. Also, by inserting, for example, a colored transparent upper inner decorative sheet D4770 from the upper inner decorative sheet insertion groove D4772, the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 can be set parallel to the surface of the inner lens D4874. In this specification, "upper decorative sheet" is a general concept including both "upper outer decorative sheet D4750" and "upper inner decorative sheet D4770".

Also, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 may be decorative sheets of different colors, or may be decorative sheets of the same color. Also, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 may have different colors from the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870, or may have the same color.

As shown in FIG. 405, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 has a protrusion D4750a. By pulling the protrusion D4750a downward, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 is set parallel to the surface of the upper outer lens D4742. It is possible to pull out the D4750 downward. Similarly, the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 has a protrusion D4770a. By pulling the protrusion D4770a downward, the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 set parallel to the surface of the upper inner lens D4744 is lowered. It is possible to pull out to Projections D4750a and D4770a are exposed unless upper unit D4700 is attached to side lens unit D4800. Therefore, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and/or the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 can be replaced with other decorative sheets simply by pulling downward on the protrusion D4750a and/or the protrusion D4770a without using any special tools. It is possible to change the appearance and improve the functionality.

In this way, the upper outer lens D4742 and the upper inner lens D4744 are colorless and transparent, and the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 are colored and transparent, thereby improving the visibility of the upper outer lens D4742 and the upper inner lens D4744. , the color of the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770. In this embodiment, the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and/or the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 can be easily attached to other upper decorative sheets simply by opening the opening/closing door D4730 with respect to the opening/closing door base D4735 fixed to the upper unit D4700. It can be replaced and the functionality can be increased. Although FIG. 406 shows the opening/closing door D4730 half-opened, if the opening/closing door base D4735 (see FIG. 404) is opened at an angle of 90 degrees or more, replacement of the decorative sheet becomes easier.

Although not shown in FIGS. 404 to 406, a light guide plate and light emission are provided inside the upper outer decorative sheet D4750, for example, so that an image can be visually recognized from the outside (that is, the side opposite to the player) by surface emission. A source may be provided. Similarly, a light guide plate and a light source may be provided on the inner side of the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 so that an image can be visually recognized from the inside (that is, the player side) by, for example, surface light emission.

[frame body, glass unit]
Next, the characteristic configuration of the frame D4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 407 to 410. FIG. FIG. 407 is an example of a perspective view of the frame D4600 and the glass unit D4950 in a state where the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame D4600, viewed obliquely from above on the right rear. FIG. 408 is an example of a perspective view of the frame D4600 and the glass unit D4950 separated from each other, viewed from the right rear obliquely above. FIG. 409 is an example of a perspective view of the frame D4600 and the glass unit D4950 separated from each other, viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 410 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the glass unit D4950 viewed obliquely from the right rear and upper side.

As shown in FIG. 408, hooking portions D4612 are formed at two locations on the upper rear side of the frame D4600.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 408 and 409, two engagement holes D4952 are formed in the upper portion of the glass unit D4950. The two engagement holes D4952 respectively correspond to the two hooks D4612. By engaging each of the two engaging holes D4952 with the corresponding hooking portion D4612, the glass unit D4950 can be hooked and supported on the frame D4600. After the glass unit D4950 is supported on the frame D4600, the glass unit D4950 is fixed below the rear surface of the frame D4600 by means of fixing members D4762 and D4762L (see FIG. 407) that are simply slid to the left and right. In this way, the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame D4600 manually by sliding the fixing members D4762 and D4762L to the left and right (the "LOCK" direction shown in FIG. 408) without using tools. can be used to increase functionality.

As shown in FIG. 409, an opening D4614 is formed in the frame D4600 (more specifically, both the base portion D4610 and the unit portion D4620). A projecting portion D4953 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the glass unit D4950. Then, the projecting portion D4953 of the glass unit D4950 is inserted into the opening portion D4614 of the frame D4600, and the two hooking portions D4612 are engaged with the two engaging holes D4952, thereby Support the glass unit D4950.

The projecting portion D4953 formed on the front side of the glass unit D4950 is slanted so that the amount of projecting forward is the largest at the top, and the projecting amount toward the front decreases toward the bottom.

By the way, in FIG. 409, the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 (see FIG. 393 for both) are not attached to the frame D4600, but the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame D4600. After that, the glass unit D4950 is supported on the base part D4610.

As shown in FIG. 410, the glass unit D4950 includes a glass frame D4951 in which the overhang D4953 is formed, and a front glass D4962 and a rear glass D4964 supported by the glass frame D4951.

The glass frame D4951 has an opening D4954 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a flange D4955 is formed on the frontmost surface of the opening D4954 (that is, the frontmost surface of the projecting portion D4953). A rear glass insertion groove D4956 for holding a rear glass D4964 is formed in the lower portion of the rear surface side of the glass frame D4951.

The front glass D4962 is attached to the glass frame D4951 by bringing the front glass D4962 into contact with a flange D4955 formed on the periphery of the opening D4954 of the glass frame D4951 and fixing it with a fixed cover D4966. The fixed cover D4966 is fixed to the glass frame D4951 with screws or the like. In this way, the front glass D4962 is arranged to block the opening D4954 from the front side of the overhang D4953.

The lower part of the rear glass D4964 is inserted into the rear glass insertion groove D4956 formed in the lower part of the rear side of the glass frame D4951. fixed. In this way, the rear glass D4964 is arranged to close the opening D4954 on the rear surface of the glass frame D4951.

In the above-described embodiment, the front glass D4962, the projecting portion D4953, and the glass frame D4951 are formed of different members, but they may be integrally formed of, for example, light-transmitting synthetic resin.

[Procedure for installing the upper unit, side lens unit, and glass unit]
Next, a procedure for attaching the upper unit D4700, the side lens unit D4800 and the glass unit D4950 to the frame D4600 will be described.

First, the side lens unit D4800 (see FIG. 393) is temporarily attached to the frame D4600 (see FIG. 393). By simply engaging an engaging portion D4822 (see FIG. 397) formed at the rear of the side lens unit D4800 with an engaging hole D4650 (see FIG. 394) formed in the frame D4600, the side lens for the frame D4600 is engaged. Temporary attachment of the unit D4800 can be performed.

In the temporarily attached state in which the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600, the hook-shaped engaging portion D4822 is merely hooked in the engaging hole D4650, so manual work such as lifting the side lens unit D4800 is required. , the side lens unit D4800 can be easily removed from the frame D4600, and the functionality can be enhanced. In addition, in a temporarily attached state in which the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600, the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 (see FIGS. 399A and 399B) can be easily replaced with other decorative sheets. can be replaced with Furthermore, if the outer light guide plate D4856, the inner light guide plate D4876, and the central light guide plate D4862 are all or at least part of the light guide plate D4862 can be easily replaced with another light guide plate, these guide plates may be replaced. The light plate can also be easily replaced with another light guide plate in the temporarily attached state.

Next, in the temporarily attached state in which the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600, the upper unit D4700 is attached to the side lens unit D4800 by sliding it from the front to the rear, and then the lock member D4760 is attached. , D4760L (see FIG. 410), the upper unit D4700 can be manually fixed to the frame D4600 so that it cannot be easily removed. In this case, if the engaging portion D4720 and the engaging groove D4830 are not properly engaged, the locking mechanism using the locking members D4760 and D4760L (see FIG. 410) cannot be locked.

Then, when the upper unit D4700 is attached or fixed to the frame D4600, the side lens unit D4800 changes from the temporarily attached state to the permanently attached state to the frame D4600. In this attached state, the movement of the side lens unit D4800 with respect to the frame D4600 is restricted, and the side lens unit D4800 cannot be removed from the frame D4600 in a locked state. In addition, in the fully attached state described above, movement of the outer decorative sheet D4850 and the inner decorative sheet D4870 (see FIGS. 399(A) and (B)) with respect to the side lens unit D4800 is restricted, and they cannot be replaced with other decorative sheets. state. Furthermore, even if all or at least some of the outer light guide plate D4856, the inner light guide plate D4876, and the central light guide plate D4862 can be easily replaced with other light guide plates in the temporarily attached state, In this case, movement of these light guide plates with respect to the side lens unit D4800 is also restricted, and they cannot be replaced with other light guide plates.

In addition, in the temporarily attached state in which the side lens unit D4800 is temporarily attached to the frame D4600, the upper unit D4700 is not yet attached, so the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 (see FIG. 403) are attached. It can be easily replaced with other decorative sheets. However, in the fully attached state in which the upper unit D4700 is fixed to the frame D4600, the movement of the upper outer decorative sheet D4750 and the upper inner decorative sheet D4770 with respect to the upper unit D4700 is restricted and cannot be replaced with other decorative sheets. state.

Also, as described above, the glass unit D4950 is attached to the base portion D4610 after the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame D4600. In this case, as shown in FIG. 408, the lock members D4760 and D4760L for fixing the upper unit D4700 to the frame D4600 are covered with the glass unit D4950, and the lock members D4760 and D4760L cannot be operated. becomes.

By the way, after the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame D4600, and before the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame D4600, the upper unit D4700 is removed by operating the locking members D4760 and D4760L. It can be removed from the frame D4600. However, if the glass unit D4950 is attached to the frame D4600, the locking members D4760 and D4760L cannot be operated as described above. It becomes impossible to remove the upper unit D4700. In addition, since the lock members D4760 and D4760L are covered with the glass unit D4950, it is possible to prevent the upper unit D4700 from being unlocked by the lock members D4760 and D4760L due to unintended contact on the hall side, etc., which can be easily performed manually. While it is possible to assemble and disassemble each member, it is possible to enhance security.

Also, as described above with reference to FIG. 400, when the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are connected, the first role piece S1 formed on the front surface of the side lens unit D4800 and the front surface of the upper unit D4700 The formed second role object piece S2 is combined to form a complete body S of one role object. In this embodiment, movement of both the upper unit D4700 and the side lens unit D4800 relative to the frame D4600 can be restricted mainly manually without using tools. Therefore, there is no need to align the first accessory piece S1 and the second accessory piece S2, and only a simple assembly such as attaching the upper unit D4700 to the frame body D4600 and the side lens unit D4800 in the temporarily attached state. , it is possible to form a complete body S of one role. In addition, unless the upper unit D4700 is removed from the frame D4600 and the side lens unit D4800, the form of the completed body S of one role will not be lost.

As described above, in this embodiment, while the components can be easily replaced in the temporarily attached state, the locked state in which the components and the like are locked in the final attached state can be obtained by simple manual assembly. By covering the member that locks, etc., with another member, not only can the number of parts be reduced, but also functionality and security can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the side lens unit D4800 and the upper unit D4700 are attached to the frame D4600 as an example. It can be easily and freely moved manually, and by manually attaching the upper unit D4700 to the frame D4600 in the temporarily attached state, movement of the side lens unit D4800 with respect to the frame D4600 is restricted. explained that it can be done. However, this is only an example, and it is also possible to replace the frame body D4600, the side lens unit D4800 and/or the upper unit D4700 with other members. As an example of application to other members, for example, a movable accessory that operates according to the progress of a game such as the result of a lottery will be briefly described. The above movable accessory comprises at least a base member, and a first member and a second member that are detachable from the base member, and the first member is attached to the base member at a first position (e.g. ) to a second position (for example, a removal position) separated from the base member, and when the second member is mounted in a state in which the first member is mounted on the base member at the first position, the second By restricting the movement of the first member and locking the first member, the same effect as the present invention can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the decorative sheets D4850, D4870 and the light guide plates D4856, D4876, D4862 can be easily replaced in the temporarily attached state, and their movement is restricted in the permanently attached state. Instead of or in addition to the decorative sheets D4850, D4870 and the light guide plates D4856, D4876, D4862, other members can be easily replaced in the temporarily attached state, and the movement of the other members is restricted in the permanently attached state. You may do so.

[13. 13th pachinko machine]
The thirteenth pachinko game machine according to the present invention will be described below. The same or similar components as those related to the first to twelfth pachinko game machines are given the same names and the same reference numerals, and their explanations are omitted.

A thirteenth pachinko game machine replaces the above-described production accessory groups 58, 1058, 2058 (see FIGS. 4, 69, 87, etc.) with production accessory units 58E (see FIGS. 11, 12, etc., to be described later). ), and the configuration of this production accessory unit 58E is significantly different from the configuration of the production accessory groups 58, 1058, and 2058 described above. Other configurations are basically the same as those of the first to twelfth pachinko game machines, so description thereof will be omitted. Below, the production accessory unit 58E will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 432. FIG.

The performance accessory unit 58E is controlled by, for example, a sub-control circuit (not shown here, but a control circuit similar to the sub-control circuits 300, 1300, 2300, 4300 described above). At least one or more of the performance accessory units 58E or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory unit 58E are, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, during or during the variable display of the special symbols. It functions as a production accessory that can operate at the timing of stopping.

FIG. 411 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10E provided in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, showing the production accessary unit 58E at the standby position. The standby position corresponds to a position when a game is not being played, or when the performance by the performance accessory unit 58E is not being performed even if a game is being played.

FIG. 412 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10E provided in the thirteenth pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing when the production accessory unit 58E is in the production position. The performance position corresponds to, for example, the position when the player advances to the front of the display area of the display device 7E (see FIG. 411) under the control of the sub-control circuit based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. The display device 7E, like the display devices 7, 1007, 2007 and 4007 described above, has a display area for displaying various effect images relating to the game.

In addition, on the front side of the game board unit 10E, as in the first to twelfth pachinko game machines, there is a game area where the launched game ball can roll and flow, a guide rail, a center accessory, a first start port, Equipped with general winning gate, passage gate unit, special electric accessory unit, second start gate, normal electric accessory unit, LED unit, outlet, back unit, LED unit, etc. Description is omitted.

[11-1. Production role unit]
As can be seen by referring to FIGS. 411 and 412, the performance accessory unit 58E is located on the front side of the pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "front side" or "front side") depending on whether it is at the standby position or at the performance position. ”) is different. In addition, as described above, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction. Also, as described above, the back side of the pachinko machine is the rear direction, the left side when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front side is the left direction, and the right side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front side is the right direction. The upper side of the machine is the upward direction, and the lower side of the pachinko machine is the downward direction.

Next, the change in appearance when the effect accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position to the effect position will be described with reference to FIGS. 413 to 415. FIG.

Fig. 413 is an example of a perspective view of the performance accessory unit 58E seen from the right front and obliquely above, in which (A) the production accessory unit 58E is at the standby position, and (B) the production accessory unit 58E is at the production position. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a case in which FIG. 414 is an example of a front view showing the production accessory unit 58E, showing (A) the production accessory unit 58E at the standby position and (B) the production accessory unit 58E at the production position. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; FIG. 415 is an example of a right side view showing the production accessory unit 58E, and (A) when the production accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, (B) when the production accessory unit 58E is in the production position, It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 413 to 415, the production accessory unit 58E mainly includes a first production accessory 59E, a second production accessory 60E, and a accessory lifting unit 61E.

The first production accessory 59E is arranged on the front side of the second production accessory 60E, and is supported by the accessory lifting unit 61E via the second production accessory 60E.

The second production accessory 60E is arranged on the back side of the first production accessory 59E, and is supported by the accessory lifting unit 61E.

The accessory elevating unit 61E includes a support member 612E that supports at least the second presentation accessory 60E, and an elevation that can move at least the second presentation accessory 60E in the front side of the display area of the display device 7E in the vertical direction. It has a mechanism 614E and a motor (not shown) as a drive source.

In addition, since the first production accessory 59E is attached to the second production accessory 60E, it is supported by the support member 612E via the second production accessory 60E. When the accessory 60E operates in the vertical direction, the first production accessory 59E also operates in the vertical direction.

In addition, the accessory lifting unit 61E can move the first effect accessory 59E and the second effect accessory 60E in the vertical direction. Alternatively or additionally, the first effect accessory 59E and The second production accessory 60E may be operable in the left-right direction, diagonal direction, or the like.

The first production accessory 59E and the second production accessory 60E will be described below. In addition, since the mechanism for moving the first production accessory 59E and the second production accessory 60E up and down is a known structure, the description of the accessory lifting unit 61E is omitted.

[11-1-1. 1st Production Accessory]
First, the first production accessory 59E will be described. As shown in FIGS. 413 to 415, the first production accessory 59E mainly includes a first decorative portion 591E and a front lens portion 592E.

The first decorative portion 591E is a plate-like member having a decorative portion 5911E on which a logo, motif, or the like is drawn, for example, on its front surface. As shown in (A), the decoration portion 5911E on the front surface of the first decoration portion 591E can be visually recognized from the front side.

The front lens part 592E is a plate-shaped performance accessory capable of performing light emitting effects, and as shown in FIG. In addition, it is positioned on the back side of the first decorative portion 591E in a state of overlapping with the first decorative portion 591E in a substantially parallel manner. Thus, when the production accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, the front lens portion 592E cannot be visually recognized from the front side, or is difficult to be visually recognized. In addition, when the effect accessory unit 58E is at the standby position, the front lens part 592E does not perform light emission effect, but this is not essential, and it is possible to grasp that it is emitting light behind the first decoration part 591E. A lighting performance may be performed.

When the production accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position toward the production position, as shown in FIGS. By the first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E (see FIG. 416, etc., which will be described later), the lower end is turned about 90° toward the front side with the base end portion. That is, the first decorative portion 591E, which can be visually recognized from the front side at the standby position, tilts so that the decorative portion 5911E faces downward at the effect position. Further, the front lens portion 592E is rotated forward by approximately 90° with respect to the first decoration portion 591E by a rotation mechanism 5923E (see FIGS. 421 and 424 described later). That is, the front lens portion 592E, which was located on the back side of the first decorative portion 591E at the standby position and could not be visually recognized from the front side, is positioned at approximately 90° to the first decorative portion 591E (for example, in the horizontal direction) at the effect position. Stand at an angle. Furthermore, a predetermined space separated in the front-rear direction is created between the front lens portion 592E and the second production accessory 60E. The mechanism of this first production accessory operating mechanism 62E will be described with reference to FIGS. 416 to 420. FIG.

FIG. 416 is an example of a perspective view of the first production accessory 59E, the second production accessory 60E, and the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E, viewed from the right rear obliquely above. FIG. 417 is an example of a perspective view of the first production accessory 59E and the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E as seen from the right rear obliquely above. FIG. 418 is an example of a plan view of the first production accessory 59E, the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E, and the second production accessory 60E. FIG. 419 is an example of a plan view of the first production accessory 59E and the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E. FIG. 420 is an example of a right side view of the first performance accessory 59E, the second presentation accessory 60E, and the first presentation accessory operating mechanism 62E in the production position, viewed from the right. In addition, in FIG.416 and FIG.418, the 2nd production accessory 60E is illustrated so that the positional relationship with the 2nd production accessory 60E can be grasped. On the other hand, FIGS. 417 and 419 omit the illustration of the second production accessory 60E for the sake of convenience so as to facilitate understanding of the structure of the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E.

The first performance accessory operating mechanism 62E includes a rotating shaft 626E, a plate-like member 630E, a cam 632E, and a link member 634E.

The rotating shaft 626E is a shaft member whose longitudinal direction is the horizontal left-right direction at the lower rear side of the second production accessory 60E. This rotating shaft 626E is connected to the first decorative portion 591E via a cam 632E and a link member 634E. A rotating shaft side gear 628E is externally inserted on the left side of the rotating shaft 626E. The power of a motor (not shown) as a drive source is transmitted to the rotating shaft side gear 628E.

The plate-like member 630E is a longitudinal member, and the plate-like member accommodating portion 5912E formed on the back surface of the first decorative portion 591E is substantially flush with the back surface of the first decorative portion 591E. be accommodated as much as possible. The plate-like member 630E is arranged so that the vertical direction of the first decorative portion 591E (substantially vertical direction shown in FIG. 415(A), substantially front-to-rear direction shown in FIG. 415(B)) is the longitudinal direction. It is housed in the housing portion 5912E. The plate-like member 630E has a rack 6302E at one end in the longitudinal direction (one end in the longitudinal direction of the plate-like member 630E is hereinafter referred to as the “tip of the plate-like member 630E”). This rack 6302E is screwed with a gear 59231E formed in a rotating mechanism 5923E provided at the lower end of the front lens portion 592E (the lower end in the performance position shown in FIG. 415(B)).

As shown in FIG. 418, a guide hole 6306E is formed along the longitudinal direction in the plate member 630E. This guide hole 6306E is slidably tightened by a screw with washer 636E fixed to the back surface of the first decorative portion 591E, and the sliding range is restricted by this screw with washer 636E. That is, the plate-like member 630E can move between the front end side and the rear end side with the screw with washer 636E as a starting point.

Two guide holes 6306E are formed in the front-rear direction on each of the left and right sides of the plate member 630E. As a result, the plate member 630E slides smoothly with respect to the first decorative portion 591E.

As shown in FIG. 417, the cam 632E has one end connected to the rotating shaft 626E, and rotates coaxially with the rotating shaft 626E when the rotating shaft 626E rotates. A link member 634E is connected to the other end of the cam 632E.

The link member 634E has one end connected to the cam 632E and the other end connected to the first decorative portion 591E.

In this specification, the connecting portion between the cam 632E and the link member 634E is referred to as a first connecting portion 6342E, and the connecting portion between the link member 634E and the first decorative portion 591E is referred to as a second connecting portion 6344E.

The first decorative portion 591E is connected to the left and right rotating shafts 624E, and is rotatable about the rotating shafts 624E. When the first decorative portion 591E rotates about the rotation shaft 624E, the plate member 630E and the front lens portion 592E also rotate accordingly. That is, the rotating shaft 624E functions as a rotating shaft of the first production accessory 59E.

For example, a spring 638 as an elastic member is provided on each of the left and right rotating shafts 624E as shown in FIG. The spring 638 biases the rotating shaft 624E in the clockwise direction. The biasing force of the spring 638 can prevent the first production accessory 59E from tilting forward when the production accessory unit 58E is at the standby position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 416, 418 and 420, side guides 610E are provided on the left and right sides of the second production accessory 60E. This side guide 610E will be described later.

Next, the operation mode of the first production accessory 59E by the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. FIG. FIG. 421 is an example of a right side view showing the positional relationship between the plate member 630E and the front lens portion 592E at the standby position. FIG. 422 is an example of a right side view showing the positional relationship between the plate-like member 630E and the front lens portion 592E in the rendering position. 421 and 422, the illustration of the first decorative portion 591E is omitted for convenience of explanation. 421 and 422, the rotation shaft 624E is also not illustrated, but for convenience of explanation, the reference numeral of the rotation shaft 624E is attached to the position where the rotation shaft 624E originally exists.

As shown in FIGS. 421 and 422, the side guide 610E is formed with a plate member guide groove 611E whose longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. A rear end support portion 6304E is formed at the rear end portion in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 630E. The rear end support portion 6304E can move within the plate member guide groove 611E. For example, the rear end support portion 6304E protrudes from the plate-like member 630E so as to form a substantially L shape, and a roller, for example, is provided at the protruded portion. These rollers enable smooth movement within the plate member guide groove 611E. However, if the rear end support portion 6304E of the plate-like member 630E can move smoothly in the plate-like member guide groove 611E, the roller is not necessarily required.

The plate member guide groove 611E formed in the side guide 610E is formed in the front-rear direction, and the groove formed in the front-rear direction is formed obliquely upward as a whole from the front side toward the rear side. It is A groove is formed upward at the rearmost end. In other words, the road is formed so that it slopes gently upwards and rises sharply at the end. The plate-like member guiding groove 611E in which the rear end support portion 6304E can move is defined as a range in which the plate-like member 630E that can slide with respect to the first decorative portion 591E can move.

Hereinafter, in this specification, clockwise and counterclockwise directions refer to clockwise and counterclockwise directions in a right side view such as FIG. 420, unless otherwise specified.

(Operation mode of the first performance accessory E by the first performance accessory operating mechanism)
The operation mode of the first production accessory 59E when the production accessory unit 58E (see, for example, FIG. 413) moves from the standby position toward the production position by the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E is as follows.

In the effect position, for example, as shown in FIG. 415(A), the front lens portion 592E is located behind the first decorative portion 591E in a state of being overlapped substantially parallel to the first decorative portion 591E.

Returning to FIG. 421, when the rotating shaft 626E (for example, see FIG. 417) is rotated counterclockwise by driving a motor (not shown) in the effect position, the cam 632E rotates counterclockwise coaxially with the rotating shaft 626E. When the cam 632E rotates counterclockwise, the first connecting portion 6342E rotates counterclockwise around the rotating shaft 626E (see FIG. 417, for example). Then, the second connecting part 6344E starts to move forward, and the first production accessory 59E (the first decoration part 591E, the front lens part 592E) rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 624E. .

By the way, the rear end support portion 6304E of the plate-like member 630E is positioned at the end on the front side of the plate-like member guide groove 611E in the effect position. In addition, the position of the rear end support portion 6304E in the effect position is displaced from the rotating shaft 624E in the vertical direction (specifically, the lower side of the rotating shaft 624E). When the first decorative portion 591E rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 624E, the plate member 630E also rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 624E as the first decoration portion 591E rotates. to rotate. When the plate-like member 630E starts to rotate counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 624E, the rear end support portion 6304E of the plate-like member 630E is moved from the front end to the inside of the plate-like member guide groove 611E. Start moving towards the rear end.

The plate-like member 630E can rotate about the rotation shaft 624E together with the first decorative portion 591E while the rear end support portion 6304E can move freely. When the movement of the plate-like member 630E in the front-rear direction is restrained, it becomes difficult for the plate-like member 630E to rotate about the rotation shaft 624E together with the first decorative portion 591E. It slides and moves relative to the first decorative portion 591E toward the rear end side. While the plate member 630E does not slide with respect to the first decorative portion 591E (or if it does slide, it slides only slightly) and rotates together with the first decorative portion 591E, The front lens portion 592E remains substantially parallel to the plate member 630E. Then, when the plate-like member 630E moves toward the rear end side relative to the first decorative portion 591E, the gear 59231E screwed with the rack 6302E rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. Then, the front lens portion 592E stands up with respect to the plate-like member 630E, that is, the first decorative portion 591E.

In this way, when the first production accessory 59E moves from the standby position toward the production position, even if such movement is started, the front lens part 592E will remain for a while (just a moment in terms of time). is folded without standing up, it rotates counterclockwise together with the first decorative portion 591E, and the front lens portion 592E starts to stand up according to the distance between the rotating shaft 624E and the rear end support portion 6304E. can do. That is, it is possible to delay the start of rotation of the first production accessory 59E toward the front side and operate in the direction to raise the front lens portion 592E. Therefore, since the front lens part 592E is not operated until the space between the front lens part 592E and the second production accessory 60E in the front-back direction can be sufficiently secured, the front lens part 592E interferes with the second production accessory 60E. You can prevent it from happening.

The operation mode of the first production accessory 59E when the production accessory unit 58E (see, for example, FIG. 413) moves from the standby position toward the production position by the first production accessory operating mechanism 62E is the operation mode described above. The operation is reversed.

In this embodiment, when the first production accessory 59E moves from the standby position toward the production position, the plate-like member 630E is moved toward the rear end side with respect to the first decorative portion 591E. , the front lens portion 592E stands up at the production position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front lens portion 592E may stand up at the rendering position by moving the first decorative portion 591E toward the tip side with respect to the plate member 630E. Further, by moving the plate-like member 630E toward the rear end side with respect to the first decoration portion 591E and moving the first decoration portion 591E toward the front end side with respect to the plate-like member 630E, the rendering position , the front lens portion 592E may stand up.

By the way, when the production accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position toward the production position, the second production role that was not visible from the front side because it is located on the back side of the first decorative part 591E and the front lens part 592E at the standby position The front side of the object 60E is exposed. As a result, at the production position, as shown in FIGS. 413(B) and 414(B), the front surface of the second production accessory 60E (more specifically, the decoration of the second decorative member 605E shown in FIG. 429 described later) 6051E) can be visually recognized from the front side.

In this way, when the production accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, the decoration portion 5911E of the first decoration portion 591E can be visually recognized from the front side, and when the first production accessory 59E is in the production position, the front lens The portion 592E can be visually recognized from the front side. In addition, when the performance accessory unit 58E is in the standby position, the front lens portion 592E cannot be visually recognized from the front side or is difficult to be visually recognized. Also, when the first production accessory 59E is in the production position, the decoration portion 5911E of the first decoration portion 591E cannot be visually recognized from the front side or is difficult to be visually recognized.

Details of the front lens portion 592E will now be described. FIG. 423 is an example of a perspective view of the front lens portion 592E as seen obliquely from above on the right front side.

As shown in FIG. 423, a first lens 5925E is provided on the front side of the front lens portion 592E. The first lens 5925E is configured so that the front side emits light by a front side first LED 5927E and a front side second LED 5928E (see FIG. 424 which will be described later).

A second lens 5921E is provided on the rear side of the front lens portion 592E. Although details will be described later, the second lens 5921E has the same direction as the first front LED 5927E and the second front LED 5928E (both of which will be described later in FIG. 424). The direction is changed toward the front side, and functions as an edge light-emitting effect that emits light from an end surface 59216E on the front side of the erected portion 59212E (that is, the outer peripheral portion of the front lens portion 592E), which will be described later. In this way, by emitting edge light at the outer peripheral portion of the front lens portion 592E, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that emphasizes the outline of the front lens portion 592E that emits surface light, even though the space in which the LED can be arranged is limited. , it is possible to increase interest. In particular, when the front lens portion 592E has, for example, the shape of a specific character, the outline of the specific character can be emphasized.

FIG. 424 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the front lens portion 592E viewed obliquely from the right front and above.

As shown in FIG. 424, the front lens portion 592E mainly includes a first lens 5925E, a second lens 5921E, an LED substrate 5922E, a lens holder 5924E, a third lens 5926E, and a rotating mechanism 5923E. Prepare.

The first lens 5925E, the second lens 5921E, the LED substrate 5922E, the lens retainer 5924E, and the third lens 5926E (more specifically, the flat plate portion 59211E of the third lens 5926E) are arranged substantially parallel to each other.

The rotation mechanism 5923E has a gear 59231E formed on its outer periphery, and when the first performance accessory 59E is tilted, it is provided at the tip of, for example, a plate-like member (not shown) fixedly connected to the second presentation accessory 60E. The front lens part 592E can be rotated according to the tilting movement of the first production accessory 59E. As a result, as described above, when the performance accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position toward the performance position, the front lens portion 592E can be erected toward the front side with respect to the first decorative portion 591E. .

The first lens 5925E is a plate-shaped member that is arranged on the frontmost side of the members that constitute the front lens portion 592E and that can transmit light. The second lens 5921E is a plate-like member arranged on the rearmost side of the members constituting the front lens portion 592E and capable of transmitting light. An LED substrate 5922E is arranged between the first lens 5925E and the second lens 5921E. Between the first lens 5925E and the LED substrate 5922E, the third lens 5926E and the lens retainer 5924E are arranged such that the plate-like third lens 5926E capable of transmitting light is on the front side.

The second lens 5921E mainly has a flat plate portion 59211E capable of transmitting light and a standing portion 59212E capable of transmitting light. The flat plate portion 59211E and the standing portion 59212E are connected so that the radially outer end portion of the flat plate portion 59211E and the end portion (rear side end portion) of the standing portion 59212E are substantially perpendicular to each other. That is, the second lens 5921E is a bowl-shaped member. A plurality of holes 59214E are formed in the flat plate portion 59211E, which will be described later. The erected portion 59212E is erected forward along the periphery of the flat plate portion 59211E at an angle of approximately 90° with respect to the flat plate portion 59211E. In the present embodiment, the flat plate portion 59211E and the erected portion 59212E are configured by one member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flat plate portion 59211E and the erected portion 59212E configured by separate members are integrated. can be anything.

The first lens 5925E is configured such that the LED substrate 5922E, the third lens 5926E, and the lens retainer 5924E are accommodated in the second lens 5921E (that is, arranged radially inward of the standing portion 59212E). It is fitted into the second lens 5921E together with a part of 5923E, and attached to the second lens 5921E with a screw 594 (for example, see FIG. 427 described later) or the like. At this time, the standing portion 59212E of the second lens 5921E covers the LED substrate 5922E, the third lens 5926E, the lens holder 5924E, and the first lens 5925E from the outer periphery. That is, the upright portion 59212E covers the thickness of the front lens portion 592E, and extends forward from the flat plate portion 59211E so that the front end surface 59216E is substantially flush with the front surface of the first lens 5925E. deferred.

A linear cut portion 59215E extending in the front-rear direction is formed along the inner surface of the standing portion 59212E along the circumferential direction. By doing so, light can be collected on the cut portion 59215E. In addition, the LED board 5922E, the third lens 5926E, and the lens holder 5924E accommodated inside the standing portion 59212E (that is, the concave portion of the second lens 5921E) are removed from the outside (more specifically, the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 59212E). It can also be made difficult to see.

The LED board 5922E has a large number of front side first LEDs 5927E and a large number of front side second LEDs 5928E arranged on the front side surface. However, in FIG. 424, for the sake of convenience, only some front side first LEDs 5927E and some front side second LEDs 5928E are labeled. The first LED 5927E on the front side and the second LED 5928E on the front side are point-emitting LEDs capable of emitting light forward. In addition, for example, the front-side first LED 5927E is a full-color LED, and the front-side second LED 5928E is a white LED.

The first lens 5925E has a first light emitting portion 59251E and a second light emitting portion 59252E. The first light emitting part 59251E is an area where the light emitting effect by the front first LED 5927E can be visually recognized, and is composed of members and colors corresponding to the light emitting effect in full color (for example, transparent or white light transmissive member). . The second light emitting portion 59252E is an area where the light emitting effect by the front side second LED 5928E can be visually recognized, and is composed of members and colors corresponding to the light emitting effect in white (for example, colored light transmissive members). The third lens 5926E is arranged on the back side of the first light emitting section 59251E, and is composed of members, colors, etc. corresponding to the full-color light emitting effect.

FIG. 425 is an example of a partially exploded perspective view of the front lens portion 592E with the LED board 5922E attached to the second lens 5921E, viewed obliquely from above on the right front side.

As shown in FIG. 425, the LED board 5922E is housed in the second lens 5921E so as to abut on the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E (see FIG. 424, see FIG. 426(B) described later). . The LED substrate 5922E housed in the second lens 5921E is held down by the lens holder 5924E.

The lens retainer 5924E is a frame-shaped member arranged between the LED board 5922E and the third lens 5926E. The lens retainer 5924E separates a region for light emission by the first LED 5927E on the front side (that is, the first light emitting portion 59251E) and a region for light emission by the second LED 5928E on the front side (that is, the second light emitting portion 59252E). The lens retainer 5924E also functions as a base for attaching the third lens 5926E.

In addition, the lens retainer 5924E has a thickness that allows a predetermined space to be provided between the front first LED 5927E and the front second LED 5928E (that is, the front surface of the LED board 5922E) and the third lens 5926E. . In this way, by providing a predetermined space between the front first LED 5927E and the front second LED 5928E and the third lens 5926E, the light emitted forward from the front first LED 5927E and the front second LED 5928E is emitted from the front lens portion. It is possible to emit surface light on the front side of 592E (more specifically, on the front side of the first lens 5925E).

FIG. 426 is a diagram showing an example of the front lens portion 592E with the LED board 5922E attached to the second lens 5921E, (A) a front view, (B) a cross-sectional view along the AA line shown in the front view, is. FIG. 427 is an example of a perspective view of the front lens portion 592E with the LED board 5922E attached to the second lens 5921E, viewed obliquely from the upper left rear side. FIG. 428 is an example rear view of the front lens portion 592E with the LED board 5922E attached to the second lens 5921E.

As shown in FIGS. 426 to 428, a plurality of (for example, six in FIGS. 426 to 428) back side LEDs 5929E (see FIG. 426 described later) are arranged on the back side surface of the LED board 5922E. The back side LED 5929E is, for example, a thin-walled full-color LED that emits light toward one side and has directivity.

In addition, as described above, a plurality of holes 59214E are formed in the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E. A rear side LED 5929E arranged on the rear side of the LED substrate 5922E is arranged in the hole 59214E. The back side LED 5929E emits light in the direction toward the upright portion 59212E of the end face forming the hole 59214E. Light emitted from the back side LED 5929E toward the end face forming the hole 59214E travels sideways, that is, toward the upright portion 59212E. Further, as shown in FIG. 426(B), the thickness of the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E is such that the light emitted from the rear LED 5929E travels inside the flat plate portion 59211E without leaking to the outside. The thickness is such that the LED 5929E does not protrude to the rear side. In addition, by arranging the back side LED 5929E in the hole 59214E formed in the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E, the thickness of the back side LED 5929E can be absorbed by the thickness of the flat plate portion 59211E, which corresponds to the thickness of the back side LED 5929E. It is possible to make the second lens 5921E compact because there is no need to provide an extra thickness for the thickness.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 426(B), an inclined portion 59213E is formed at the corner of the second lens 5921E (more specifically, the portion where the flat plate portion 59211E and the standing portion 59212E are connected). . Specifically, the inclined portion 59213E is inclined so that the diameter increases from the outer peripheral edge portion 59211aE on the back side of the flat plate portion 59211E toward the outer peripheral edge portion 59212aE of the standing portion 59212E. In this embodiment, the inclined portion 59213E is inclined at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the flat plate portion 59211E. As shown in FIG. 427, the inclined portion 59213E is cut substantially linearly in the direction of inclination over the entire circumference of the outer peripheral portion of the standing portion 59212E, so that the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E can be easily collected. there is The above-mentioned "cut substantially straight in the inclined direction" is because a small step is formed in the middle from the outer peripheral edge portion 59211aE to the outer peripheral edge portion 59212aE. In addition, the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E tends to gather on this step. In addition, it is not essential that the inclination angle of the inclined portion 59213E is approximately 45 degrees with respect to the flat plate portion 59211E. good.

In this way, by providing the inclined portion 59213E cut linearly in the inclined direction at the corner of the second lens 5921E, the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E (that is, the inside of the flat plate portion 59211E is (Light traveling toward the outside in the radial direction) can be reflected by the inclined portion 6921E to change the traveling direction. The light traveling inside the flat plate portion 59211E toward the erected portion 59212E tends to gather at the inclined portion 59213E, although some of the light escapes from the inclined portion 6921E. The light collected on the inclined portion 59213E travels in a direction different from that of the light emitted from the rear LED 5929E, and travels forward inside the erected portion 59212E (see the enlarged view of FIG. 426(B). ), the front end face 59216E of the front lens portion 592E emits edge light.

That is, the light emitted from the back side LEDs 5929E arranged on the back side of the LED substrate 5922E gathers at the inclined portion 59213E, and then travels forward, causing the front side of the front lens portion 592E to emit edge light. can. In addition, the light emitted from the front first LED 5927E and the front second LED 5928E arranged on the front surface of the LED substrate 5922E can cause the front side of the front lens portion 592E to emit surface light. Therefore, both the light emitted from the front side first LED 5927E and the front side second LED 5928E arranged on the front side of the LED board 5922E and the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E arranged on the back side of the LED board 5922E, the front lens It is possible to cause the front side of the portion 592E to emit light.

In developing a game machine, it is necessary to arrange the LEDs 5927E, 59278E, and 59279E in a limited space. Since the same side (for example, the front side) can be illuminated even if the light is not the same, it is possible to effectively use a narrow area and perform a light emission effect with a large amount of light. In particular, since the front end surface 59216E extends forward from the flat plate portion 59211E so as to be substantially flush with the front surface of the first lens 5925E, the light emitted from the rear LED 5929E, which will be described later, is directed to the first lens. Since it is possible to lead to the front part of the lens 5925E, interest can be enhanced.

In addition, by arranging the LEDs on different surfaces such as the front side and the back side of the LED board 5922E, the same side (for example, the front side) can emit light regardless of the light emitted from any LED. , The thickness of the front lens part 592E can be suppressed while performing various light emission effects such as surface light emission of the front surface of the front lens part 592E (more specifically, the front surface of the first lens 5925E) and edge light emission of the front lens part 592E. It becomes possible. Thus, by suppressing the thickness of the front lens portion 592E, the configuration described above, that is, the first effect accessory 59E is placed in front of the second effect accessory 60E, and the first decorative portion 591E is placed at the standby position. and the front lens portion 592E are overlapped substantially in parallel (see FIG. 415(A)). A predetermined space is formed between the production accessory 60E and the front lens part 592E can be made to protrude forward.

In this embodiment, the standing portion 59212E of the first lens 5925E is formed. It may extend rearward up to the rear end and form a shape similar to the inclined portion 59213E at the rear end portion.

Also, the standing portion may be formed by the first lens 5925E and the second lens 5921E. For example, the rear end surface of the first standing portion extending rearward from the first lens 5925E and the rear end portion extending forward from the second lens 5921E and having the same shape as the inclined portion 59213E are formed. The front end surface of the second upright portion thus formed may be brought into contact with the first upright portion and the second upright portion to cover the thickness of the front lens portion 592E.

By the way, the back side LED 5929E emits light from the outer peripheral edge of the front lens portion 592E as described above. As shown in FIGS. 427 and 428, it is arranged at a position along the flat plate portion 59211E at a predetermined distance from the standing portion 59212E, that is, at a position radially inward of the standing portion 59212E at a predetermined distance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 428, the irradiation range of the light emitted from each rear LED 5929E will be described. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 428, the plurality of back side LEDs 5929E are referred to as back side LEDs 5929aE to 5929fE.

The irradiation range of the light emitted from the back LED 5929aE to the back LED 5929fE is as follows. That is, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929aE is within the range of A to C (clockwise on the paper surface). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929bE is within the range from 2 to 5 (clockwise on the paper surface). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929cE is within the range from B to HO (clockwise on the paper surface). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929dE is within the range of chill (clockwise on the paper surface). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929eE is within the range of tri to tri (clockwise on the paper surface). The irradiation range of the light emitted from the back side LED 5929fE is within the range of "no" to "wo" (clockwise on the paper surface). In this way, in the range from a to he (clockwise in the paper surface) and from t to wo (clockwise in the paper surface) of the upright portion 59212E, the light emitted from the back side LED 5929E travels forward inside the upright portion 59212E. When viewed from the front side, the front end surface 59216E of the standing portion 59212E (that is, the outer peripheral portion of the front lens portion 592E) emits light.

It should be noted that the ranges from He to To and Wo to E of the erected portion 59212E (both clockwise in the plane of the drawing) are not the illumination range of the rear LED 5929E. Although the details will be described later, the range from hem to t of the standing portion 59212E is the range where the decorative region 6051E of the second decorative member 605E, which will be described later, is positioned on the rear side (see FIG. 414(B)). In addition, the range of W to A is the range located on the back side of the first light emitting portion 59251E of the first lens 5925E (see FIGS. 414(B) and 424).

In addition, as described above, the back side LED 5929E emits light toward the upright portion 59212E from a radially inner position a predetermined distance away from the upright portion 59212E, thereby arranging the back side LED 5929E at a position close to the upright portion 59212E. It is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back side LED 5929E as compared with the case of doing so. As a result, without increasing the number of back side LEDs 5929E uselessly, it is possible to efficiently perform light emission effect in a wider range by a smaller number of back side LEDs 5929E.

In other words, considering from the viewpoint of edge light emission from the outer peripheral portion of the front lens portion 592E, it is usually considered to arrange an LED capable of point light emission or surface light emission on the back surface of the standing portion 59212E. . However, when the LEDs are arranged in such a manner, the thickness in the front-rear direction becomes large. Therefore, in order to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction, the rear LEDs 5929E are LEDs that can emit light from the side. However, if the back side LED 5929E is arranged away from the erected portion 59212E, the amount of light is attenuated. By cutting the part, it is easy to collect light.

427 and 428, a connector (that is, a connector that supplies power to the front first LED 5927E, the second front LED 5928E, and the back LED 5929E) 5930E connected to the LED board 5922E, and A cover 5931E arranged on the rear side of the connector 5930E is arranged on the rear side of the LED board 5922E. A hole 59215E for arranging the connector 5930E is formed in the flat plate portion 59211E of the second lens 5921E. Since the connector 5930E is arranged in the hole 59215E in this way, the thickness of the connector 5930E can be absorbed by the thickness of the flat plate portion 59211E. , the second lens 5921E can be made compact.

In this embodiment, the connector 5930E is arranged on the back side of the LED board 5922E, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the connector 5930E may be arranged on the front side of the LED board 5922E. In this case, by disposing the connector 5930E in the space between the third lens 5926E and the LED board 5922E provided for surface-emitting the front side of the first lens 5925E, the empty space can be effectively utilized. In this way, even when the space between the LED board 5922E and the third lens 5926E is effectively used, and the connector 5930E is arranged on the front side of the LED board 5922E, an extra thickness corresponding to the thickness of the connector 5930E is provided. This eliminates the need to provide the second lens 5921E in a compact manner.

[11-1-2. Second production accessory]
Next, the second production accessory 60E will be described. FIG. 429 is an example of a perspective view of the second production accessory 60E and the accessory elevating unit 61E viewed from the right front obliquely above, and is an exploded perspective view of the second production accessory 60E.

As shown in FIG. 429, the second production accessory 60E mainly includes a body portion 601E and a rear lens portion 602E.

The main body portion 601E is a substantially circular member in front view, in which the members (for example, the LED substrate 603E and the rear lens 604E) constituting the rear lens portion 602E are arranged on the front side.

The rear lens portion 602E mainly includes an LED board 603E, a rear lens 604E arranged in front of the LED board 603E, and a second decorative member 605E arranged in front of the rear lens 604E.

The LED board 603E is a substantially disk-shaped member, and a large number of LEDs 606E, 607E, and 608E are arranged on the front surface thereof. These LEDs 606E, 607E, 608E will be described later. The rear lens 604E is a substantially disk-shaped member made of a light-transmissive member, and is cut linearly in the radial direction along the entire circumference of the outer peripheral portion 6045E. The second decorative member 605E has, for example, a decorative region 6051E in which a motif or the like is drawn, a logo region 6052E in which characters or the like (for example, a logo) is drawn, and an outer peripheral portion 6053 capable of emitting light on the front surface, It is composed of a member that can transmit light.

Here, the configuration of the LED substrate 603E (more specifically, the arrangement of the LEDs 606E and 607E) and the rear lens 604E will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 430-432. FIG. 430 is an example of a perspective view of the rear lens 604E with the LED substrate 603E superimposed on the rear side, viewed from the front and slightly right. FIG. 431 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 430. FIG. FIG. 432 is an example of a back view of posterior lens 604E. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 432 also shows the LED 606 (the LED board 603E is not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 430 and 431, the rear lens 604E has a recess 6041E that is recessed rearward at a substantially central portion on the front side. The shape of this concave portion 6041E corresponds to, for example, the shape of the decorative region 6051E (see FIG. 429) of the second decorative member 605E. A hole 6042E is further formed in this recess 6041E.

The holes 6042E are formed at a plurality of positions along the periphery of the recess 6041E and at radially inner positions of the recess 6041E. An LED 606E arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 603E is arranged in the hole 6042E. The LED 606E is, for example, a thin-walled, side-emission full-color LED that emits light toward one side. The LEDs 606E arranged in the holes 6042E formed at a plurality of positions along the periphery of the recess 6041E emit light laterally, more specifically, in a radially inward direction of the end faces forming the holes 6042E. . The LED 606E arranged in the hole 6042E formed radially inward of the recess 6041E emits light laterally, more specifically, in a radially outward direction of the end surface forming the hole 6042E. In this way, the LED 606E emits light toward the end surface forming the hole 6042E, so that the light can be collected on the outer peripheral portion of the recess 6041E. Also, as shown in FIG. 431, the thickness of the recess 6041E of the rear lens 604E is such that the light emitted from the LED 606E travels inside the recess 6041E without leaking out, so that the LED 606E does not protrude to the front side. is considered to be the thickness of Furthermore, by arranging the LED 606E in the hole 6042E formed in the rear lens 604E, the thickness of the LED 606E can be absorbed by the thickness of the rear lens 604E (more specifically, the recess 6041E). It is possible to make the rear lens 604E more compact without providing an extra thickness.

The thickness of the hole 6042 (that is, the thickness of the recess 6041E of the rear lens 604E) is such that the LED 606E does not protrude from the hole 6042 so that the light emitted from the LED 606E travels inside the recess 6041E without leaking to the outside. It is said to be thick. Further, by arranging the LED 606 in the hole 6042E formed in the concave portion 6041E of the rear lens 604E, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

A plurality of depressions 6043E are formed below the depressions 6041E on the front side of the rear lens 604E. In addition, a plurality of recesses 6044E are formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral portion on the front side of the rear lens 604E.

As shown in FIG. 431, the LED 607E arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 603E is arranged facing the rear surface of the rear lens 604E on the rear side of the position where the recess 6043E is formed. Also, on the rear side of the position where the recess 6044E is formed, the LED 608E (see FIG. 429) arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 603E is arranged facing the rear surface of the rear lens 604E. These LEDs 607E and 608E emit light forward.

The rear lens 604E has a logo corresponding area 6046E corresponding to the logo decoration portion 6052E of the second decoration portion 605E. The LED 607E is a point light emitting LED arranged corresponding to the logo corresponding area 6046E, and can cause the logo decoration portion 6052E to emit surface light. A gap 6047E is formed between the logo corresponding area 6046E and another area (eg, recessed portion 6041E) of the rear lens 604E. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 607E from penetrating into other light-emitting regions other than the logo-corresponding region 6045, so that the logo decoration portion 6052E can efficiently emit surface light.

Also, the LED 608E is a point light emitting LED arranged along the outer peripheral portion 6045E of the rear lens 604E, and is an LED that causes the outer peripheral portion 6053E of the second decorative portion 605E to emit edge light. As described above, the rear lens 604E is cut linearly in the radial direction along the entire circumference of the outer peripheral portion 6045E. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 608E can be collected on the outer peripheral portion 6045E of the rear lens 604E, and the outer peripheral portion 6053E of the second decorative portion 605E can efficiently emit edge light.

Also, as shown in FIG. 432, the back side of the rear lens 604E is cut to correspond to each LED 606E so that the light emitted from each LED 606E, 607E, 608E spreads radially. In this way, the front surface of the second decorative member 605E emits surface light by the light emitted from the LED 606E. However, as described above, since the LED 606E is a directional side emitting LED, the way in which the light spreads due to the lens cut is different from that of the point emitting LEDs 607E and 608E.

In addition, as described above, the range from 1 to 4 (see FIG. 428) of the standing portion 59212E is located at the front side position corresponding to the decorative region 6051E of the second decorative member 605E. This area is not the area illuminated by the rear LED 5929E. Therefore, the surface-emitting second decorative portion 605E can be made conspicuous and the player can pay attention to it, which can enhance interest. In particular, the performance accessory unit 58E operates from the standby position toward the performance position when a predetermined condition such as a variable display of a special pattern with a high expectation of deriving a big hit pattern is established. It is possible to further enhance interest.

Furthermore, when the production accessory unit 58E advances from the standby position to the production position, the first production accessory 59E (more specifically, the first decorative part 591E) tilts forward and is visually recognized from the front side at the standby position. The front lens portion 592E that could not stand up. At this time, between the front lens portion 592E and the second production accessory 60E, a predetermined space separated in the front-rear direction is formed (see FIG. 415(B)). In this way, the depth direction can be used to give the player the impact that the first production accessory 59E protrudes toward the player. In addition, although both the first production accessory 59E and the second production accessory 60E emit light toward the front, they overlap in front view (as described above, the range from 1 to 2 in the standing portion 59212E (Fig. 428 )), the second production accessory 60E is made to emit light, and the first production accessory 59E is made not to emit light. Therefore, the visibility of the second production accessory 60E that emits light on the far side of the first production accessory 59E can be emphasized, and the first production accessory 59E and the second production accessory 60E are simply arranged in front and behind. It is possible to produce a visual effect that cannot be produced by just playing, and it is possible to enhance interest.

As described above, since the recess 6041E is formed in the rear lens 604E, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the LED 608 from traveling radially inward from the recess 6041E. Therefore, interference between the light emitted from the LED 608 and the light emitted from the LED 606 can be suppressed, and the light emitted from the LED 606 and the light emitted from the LED 606 can be efficiently used for light emission effects. can be used.

In addition, as described above, the light emitted from the LED 607E can be collected on the outer peripheral portion of the recess 6041E, but if the brightness of the LED 607E is changed, the second It is also possible to perform a light emitting effect as if the motif or the like drawn in the decorative area 6051 of the decorative member 605E were shaking, thereby enhancing interest.

[14. Extension example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first to thirteenth pachinko game machines described above will be described. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first to thirteenth pachinko game machines, the following description will refer to a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine and the sixth pachinko game machine). Codes are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[14-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, the fourth pachinko game machine, and the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a big win, the kind of the big win. Determines whether or not to set the probability variable flag to ON according to, and determines the probability variable number of times when the probability variable flag is set to ON, but is not limited to this, for example, the following aspects may be .

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. It should be noted that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning hole is opened for a short time and then long open, the opening mode of the big winning hole is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is in the open state, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening to the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the special prize opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special prize opening is started (these two times are short ), the specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening passes through the specific area, it can be either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two modes. It is possible to use only one mode, or three or more modes.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The special symbol selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. , 'z2' is selected with a selectivity of 50%. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command is, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. , 'z5' is selected with a selectivity of 35%. It should be noted that FIG. 105 is only a diagram showing an example of expansion of the variable probability control, so the judgment value data does not include "time saving hit judgment value data", but the judgment value data "time saving hit judgment value data" may be included.

FIG. 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the selected symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C). In addition, as described above, the judgment value data shown in FIG. 105 does not include "time saving hit judgment value data", so the type of "time saving hit" is not shown in FIG. If the "time saving hit determination value data" is included, it may be determined to be one of a plurality of types of time saving hits.

According to the above FIGS. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and the selection rate of 10%. It is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A at the rate, and is determined to be 10R probability variable jackpot A at 50% selection rate. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to have different probabilities of being set on.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is a big winning (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball wins the big winning hole, Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult for even one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a 1-type/2-type mixed machine such as the third pachinko game machine or the sixth pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is opened twice during a short opening of the special winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special winning opening is started. Although it is in the open state for a short period of time (in both cases), if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times. There may be.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of large winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the variable probability control is executed alternately until the limiter number of times is reached, the so-called limiter machine is repeatedly executed, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state and , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-type two-type mixed machine such as the third pachinko game machine or the sixth pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called fall type game machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the fall lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[14-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the 1st pachinko game machine to the 13th pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", C time saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is finished. However, the lottery for the "time saving hit" is not limited to being performed in the special symbol hit determination process.

For example, among the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, a specific random number different from the random number for judging the special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the special symbol, the special symbol A random number value, etc.) may be used to perform time-saving winning/losing determination processing for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control, separately from the special symbol winning determination processing. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss, when performing the time-saving win-loss determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol When it is a random value, it can be determined to "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed.

Also, when performing the time saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol win/loss determination process, the time saving win/loss determination process may be executed prior to the special symbol win determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process during the variable display of the special symbols that derives the stop display mode indicating the big hit when the final display is performed is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the win determination process of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a big hit, the sub CPU instructs, for example, right-handed hitting as a game ball shooting method that is regarded as a normal game mode in the big win game state. is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU will perform the time saving control. As a method of shooting a game ball which is regarded as a regular game mode, a performance image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right is displayed on the display device. However, if the result of the time saving hit-or-fall determination process is "hit time saving", the effect image showing the shooting method of the game ball, which is the normal game mode when the time saving control is executed, is always displayed on the display device. Alternatively, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction hit" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), etc., it is not displayed. You may do so. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, if the time-saving win-loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU is in a situation where it becomes a "time-saving hit" ), whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display an effect image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the time-saving number of times, the time-saving hit probability, and the time-saving judgment Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving hit-and-fall determination process are, for example, the random numbers for special design hit determination, the random numbers for special design determination, the random numbers for normal hit determination, the random numbers for normal design determination, the random numbers for special design fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random number value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the hit determination process of the special symbol, and when the game ball enters the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the hit determination process of the normal symbol. At the time of passing, it may be any timing such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving hit-and-fall determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific prize winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time saving judgment processing using the extracted random number for time saving judgment processing, the extracted random number for time saving judgment judgment is a specific random number for time saving judgment judgment (for example, specific time saving judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving judgment process using the random number for judging the special symbol, the time saving when it is the specific loss judgment value data, the specific small hit judgment value data or/and the specific big hit judgment value data It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving winning/losing determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when it is a specific losing symbol, a particular small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Also, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it may be determined that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination process using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing the time-saving winning/losing determination process using the normal winning determination random number value and the normal symbol determining random number value. Furthermore, the condition for determining that the time saving hit is determined in the time saving hit/loss determination process is not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine and the sixth pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit", the special symbol hit determination process (for example, see S2023 in FIG. 95) If the result is a winning prize and the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens passes through the V winning opening 2155, time is reduced according to the type of winning prize. It is preferable to determine the execution presence or absence of control and the number of times of time saving. Then, the jackpot game control process is executed without detecting the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 even though the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the hit of the accessory release and the V attacker 2152 is opened. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time saving control and the number of time saving times based on the "time saving win" if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is the opening hit, and the game that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opened. When the ball does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random number for time-saving win-lose determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU is the starting information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state that can execute time-saving win-lose determination processing)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, to execute the time saving win-lose determination process in any game state, to execute the time saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, the conditions for executing the time saving win-lose determination process are determined in advance, and this definition It may be so that the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the conditions are satisfied.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above. It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable to determine the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit" according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, if the random number value for time saving hit/loss determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to be "100", and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of times of time saving to be "50".

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may newly set the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' instead of the remaining number of times of saving time (that is, reset the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction win" to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit ”, the main CPU replaces the number of times of time saving determined based on the “time saving hit” with the remaining number of times of time saving and newly sets the number of time saving times determined based on the “time saving hit” to the number of time saving remaining. Among the processing to be added to the number of times, any one may be determined in advance, and the number of times of working hours may be set in a mode that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that performs time saving control with different functions when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on, time saving win-lose determination processing If the result is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are time saving control of the same function and time saving of different functions You may make it change the process which sets the number of times of time saving with the case of control. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving win/loss determination process is the hit determination process of the special symbol in the same frame. , even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" ("time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on based on the above) and the time saving flag is set on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time-saving hit-loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit-determining process, based on the result of the time-saving hit-loss determination process, the time-saving control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed). may In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process and the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process, and it is possible to enhance the interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine and the sixth pachinko game machine, when the big hit game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit (a big hit in which the time saving control is executed) , Based on the end of this jackpot game control, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the jackpot. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, the result of the time-saving hit-loss determination process is "time-saving hit", and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. Nevertheless, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the closing of the open/close winning opening 2151, based on the "time reduction winning". It is good to start time saving control.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol "or"When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc.

In addition, in the game state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the time saving control continues even after the small hitting game control process ends. executed.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine and the sixth pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the stop design mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special design is the hit of the opening of the accessory is derived. Although the V-attacker 2152 is operated to open the opening/closing winning opening 2151, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CPU 2201 opens and closes the opening/closing winning opening. Even after 2151 is closed, the time saving control is continuously executed.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
In the game state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, time-saving game state, etc.) in which time-saving control is executed, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, and when the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination processing is "time-saving hit", the main CPU , You may rewrite the number of times of working hours, and do not rewrite the number of times of working hours (that is, to execute the time saving control until the number of times of working time saving control is digested).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of executing the hit determination process of the special design, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving hit determination process, or at various timings. can be set. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed, or the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when it is done, or when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed and the second time saving win/loss determination process The time saving hit probability may be the same or almost the same probability as in the case where is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine or the sixth pachinko game machine, when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbol is the winning of the opening of the accessory and the big winning game control processing is not executed based on the opening of the opening of the accessory. , the main CPU 2201 calculates the interval time after the end of the action for the opening hit when the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit", and the above when the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving loss" may be longer than the interval time of , or may be the same or substantially the same time.

[14-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first to thirteenth pachinko gaming machines described in this specification play games using game media, and based on the results of the games, benefits (for example, prize balls, prize data, etc.) It can be applied to all game machines in the given form. In other words, a game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the results of the game. Alternatively, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, it may be a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit, which manages the game medium, that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to a game medium handling device and a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media for the game medium lending operation (that is, when the player performs the game medium insertion operation). or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media has been won (that winning combination is established) (Acquisition action), or an action of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. Moreover, it is not limited to ejecting the recording medium, and cash or cash equivalents may be ejected, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game parlor can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. not only can be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the waiting state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, game machines that shoot game balls from above the game area do not have the concept of foul balls, but if game balls are shot from below as in conventional gaming machines, foul balls are generated. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls. It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed type game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. The liquid crystal display device is positioned above the gaming machine and receives requests for conversion of game values managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. Note that in the second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. Also, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpot symbols. Take action to prevent it from happening.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a big win symbol, the general game state is shifted to the big win game state as described above. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game is executed. Based on the transition from the state to the small winning game state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state ( Based on the end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game state is shifted to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are being performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU is under variable display. As for the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[14-4. State display of being in the time-saving gaming state]
When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state, a time saving state display section indicating the time saving game state may be provided. It is preferable that the time saving state display section is provided in the LED display group including the special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, when providing a time saving state display unit indicating that it is in a time saving game state, an A time saving state display unit indicating that it is in an A time saving game state, a B time saving state display unit indicating that it is in a B time saving game state, A C time-saving state display unit that indicates that the game is in the C time-saving gaming state may be provided. In this case, the main CPU controls the A time-saving state display unit so that a specific mode that allows the appearance of the A time-saving gaming state to be displayed in the A time-saving gaming state is displayed, and if the B time-saving gaming state is , Control the B time saving state display unit to display a specific mode that allows you to visually recognize that you are in the B time saving gaming state, and if it is in the C time saving gaming state, specify that you can visually recognize that you are in the C time saving gaming state. It is preferable to control the C time saving state display unit so that the mode is displayed. Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may display all of the time-saving state display portions that are being repeatedly executed.

Also, even if the A time saving state display part, the B time saving state display part and the C time saving state display part are not provided, for example, for the time saving game state with the same time saving performance, a common time saving state display part may be used. For example, if the time-saving performance in the B time-saving gaming state and the time-saving performance in the C time-saving gaming state are the same, and these time-saving performances differ from the time-saving performances in the A time-saving gaming state, A represents that it is in the A time-saving gaming state. A time saving state display unit and a BC common time saving state display unit representing the B time saving game state or C time saving game state may be provided and controlled by the main CPU.

In addition, the sub-CPU displays, for example, in a display area such as a liquid crystal display device that it is in a time-saving game state, and if it is in a time-saving game state, the type of time-saving game state, and/or the number of times of time-saving (including the number of times of time-saving remaining) is displayed. You may make it

[14-5. Outer end signal for time saving gaming state]
When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state, or C time saving game state, the main CPU sends a time saving signal representing the time saving game state from the external terminal plate 4184 to the outside (for example, island computer and hall computer 4186), but in this case, you may send a time-saving signal that does not distinguish the type of time-saving gaming state, or a signal indicating which time-saving gaming state is being controlled, that is, the time-saving gaming state The types may be distinguished and transmitted. When transmitting a time-saving signal by distinguishing between the types of time-saving gaming states, the main CPU, for example, transmits an A time-saving signal when it is in an A time-saving gaming state, and a B time-saving signal when it is in a B time-saving gaming state. and transmit a C time saving signal when it is in the C time saving game state. In addition, when a plurality of time-saving game states are being executed in an overlapping manner, the main CPU may transmit a plurality of time-saving signals being executed.

Moreover, you may make it transmit a common time-saving signal about the time-saving game state with same time-saving performance. For example, if the time saving performance in the B time saving game state and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state are the same, and these time saving performances are different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the main CPU is in the A time saving game state. In this case, the A time saving signal is transmitted, and in the case of the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, the BC common time saving signal is transmitted.

[14-6. Interval in the case of "time saving hit"]
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU determines that the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss for the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbols in the game. It may be longer than the above interval time in the case. In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko game machine and the sixth pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU stops the variable display of the special symbol in the game. , the interval time may be longer than the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit for the opening of the role and the big hit game control process is not executed based on this hit for the opening of the role, or may be the same or substantially It may be the same time.

[15. Note]
[15-1. Appendix 1]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which is controlled to a special game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is established, symbols are variably displayed, and when a special result is derived.

In this type of game machine, in addition to the special game state controlled when a special result is derived, variable display is performed a specified number of times in a high probability time reduction state even if no special result is derived. A gaming machine is disclosed which is adapted to shift to a high-probability non-time reduction state (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174800).

The game machine described in JP-A-2016-174800 has a new game property such as shifting from a high-probability time-shortening state to a high-probability non-time-shortening state to make the game state more advantageous than the normal game state. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for gaming machines with even newer game features.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a gaming machine with new game features.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93)) for performing a special symbol lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
game state control means capable of controlling the game state (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
with
The game state control means is
a normal game state during which the variable display of the special symbols can be performed;
A special game state (for example, a jackpot game state), which is a period during which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and is more advantageous than the normal game state;
It is a period in which the variable display of the special symbols can be performed, and it is possible to control to any of a plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, a short game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state,
The special symbol control means is
A special stop mode (for example, a jackpot display mode) indicating that the special game state is entered;
A loss stop mode (for example, a display mode of loss) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss;
It is possible to derive any of a plurality of stop modes including a specific stop mode (for example, a display mode for reducing working hours) indicating transition to the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the period in which the variable display of special symbols can be performed, as a game state advantageous to the player, the specific game state is provided separately from the special game state, and the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to provide unprecedented new game characteristics, such as shifting to a specific game state when the game is played.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the special game state, and after the special game state ends, to shift to the specific game state,
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state without shifting to the special game state.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific stop mode is derived, the transition to the specific game state occurs without transitioning to the special game state. It is possible to provide playability.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The game state control means is
When the loss stop mode is derived, the game state continuation control means (for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the special symbol A main CPU 201 that sets or resets neither the variable probability flag nor the time saving flag in the game end processing;
Even when the losing stop mode is derived, if a special condition is established (for example, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value), the game state is not continued by the game state continuation control means. , Specific game state transition control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing B time saving control mode determination processing) capable of transitioning to the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to shift to a specific game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied even when a losing stop mode is derived, providing a new game feature that has never existed before. becomes possible. Even when the losing stop mode is derived, the case where the predetermined condition is met corresponds to, for example, when a specific special game state among a plurality of types of special game states ends.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific stop mode includes:
a first specific stop mode (for example, mode of the selected symbol command "z0");
A second specific stop mode different from the first specific stop mode (for example, the mode of the selected symbol command "z1") is included at least,
The game state control means is
When the first specific stop mode is derived and when the second specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state with a different degree of advantage (for example, the number of times of time reduction). do.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, it is possible to widen the range of game characteristics by providing variations, and to provide interesting game characteristics while suppressing gambling characteristics.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (eg, passage gate 126) provided in the game area, and normal symbol lottery means (eg, normal symbol variable display start processing (S293 ), the main CPU 201)
Normal symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs normal symbol variable display end processing (S294)) that performs variable display of normal symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived; ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, special symbol lottery facilitation means (for example, normal The main CPU 201) that performs the electric accessory opening process (S296);
Normal symbol probability control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs time saving setting processing (S238)) capable of changing the normal symbol probability from which the normal symbol hit is derived;
further comprising
The normal symbol probability control means,
When the specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) is shifted to by the specific stop mode being derived, the normal symbol probability is not changed (for example, the normal symbol hit determination table is referred to Main CPU 201 for performing symbol hit determination processing),
When the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) is shifted to after the end of the special game state by deriving the special stop mode, the normal symbol probability can be changed (for example, the normal symbol Main CPU 201 that performs hit determination processing for normal symbols with reference to a hit determination table
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, the transition to the specific game state (for example, the A short-time game state) is made even after the special game state ends, and the transition to the specific game state is made by deriving the specific stop mode. If the normal symbol probability is not changed, the normal symbol probability is changed when shifting to the specific game state after the end of the special game state. In this way, by providing a plurality of specific game states with different transition motives and making it possible to change the normal symbol probability according to the transition motives, the range of game characteristics can be widened and interesting game characteristics are provided. becomes possible.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to a high probability game state in which the special stop mode is more likely to be derived than in the normal game state and the specific game state,
The special symbol control means is
In the normal game state and the specific game state (for example, when S221 is YES determination), at least the special stop mode and the specific stop mode can be derived,
It is characterized in that at least the special stop mode can be derived in the high certainty gaming state (for example, when S221 is NO determination).

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode can be derived in the normal game state and the specific game state in which the interest of the player tends to decline. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game state.

In addition, in the high certainty gaming state, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a result corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, a time saving hit), a mode in which the specific stop mode is derived but not shifted to the specific game state, and a special symbol A mode in which the specific stop mode is not derived even if the result of the lottery corresponds to the specific stop mode, and a mode in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the result corresponding to the specific stop mode is not included in the result of the special symbol lottery in the first place. and may be either.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and the predetermined conditions include a first condition and a second condition,
The special symbol lottery means is
First special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processes of S81 and S82) that performs the first special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the first condition;
A second special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S78 and S79) that performs a second special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the second condition,
The special symbol control means is
When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol is variably displayed,
A derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may differ between when the first special symbol is variably displayed and when the second special symbol is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the derivation ratio of the specific stop mode may differ between when the first special symbol is variably displayed and when the second special symbol is variably displayed. It is possible to widen the range and provide interesting game characteristics.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The game state control means is
When the game state under control is the normal game state, when the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the specific game state in a mode corresponding to the specific stop mode (for example, the process of S244 can be executed). while
When the game state under control is the specific game state, even if the specific stop mode is derived, instead of controlling to the specific game state in a mode corresponding to the specific stop mode, the specific game under control The mode according to the state can be continued (for example, the process of S243 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the specific stop mode is derived while being controlled to the specific game state, the mode corresponding to the specific game state being controlled continues. In other words, even if the specific stop mode is derived in the specific game state, it does not become invalid, and the player can be given the same effect as when the specific game state under control is extended, which is interesting. can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Random number acquisition means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing the processing of S392 or S399) that acquires a plurality of types of random numbers (for example, special symbol hit determination random numbers and special symbol symbol random numbers) when the predetermined condition is established,
The special symbol lottery means is
Using a specific random number (for example, a random number for judging a special symbol) among the plurality of types of random numbers, the stop mode derived by the special symbol control means is the special stop mode, the losing stop mode, and the specific stop. It is possible to determine which of a plurality of stop modes including modes,
Using a predetermined random number (e.g., symbol random number) different from the specific random number (e.g., special symbol hit determination random number) among the plurality of types of random numbers, the type of the special stop mode or the type of the specific stop mode is selected. It is characterized by being determinable.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, a specific random number (for example, a random number for determining a special symbol) is used to determine the derived stop mode, that is, the lottery result, and a predetermined random number different from the specific random number (for example, Symbol random number) can be used to determine the type of special stop mode or the type of specific stop mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security compared to the case of determining not only the derived stop mode but also the special stop mode and the type of the specific stop mode using only the specific random number.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
When the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) is entered by deriving the special stop mode, the specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) is entered by deriving the specific stop mode It is characterized by being able to perform control so that the expected value of the period controlled to the specific game state becomes smaller than in the case of transition.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the specific game state by deriving the specific stop mode (for example, C time-saving gaming state) compared to the case of transition to the specific game state by deriving the special stop mode A superiority can be given when shifting to a state (for example, A time-saving game state). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest without increasing the gambling nature in the normal game state or the specific game state.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
When the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) is entered by deriving the special stop mode, the specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) is entered by deriving the specific stop mode It is characterized in that it is possible to perform control so that the expected value of the period controlled to the specific game state is increased compared to the case of shifting.

According to the gaming machine (11) above, the specific game state by deriving the specific stop mode compared to the case of shifting to the specific game state (for example, the A short-time gaming state) due to the derivation of the special stop mode A superiority can be given when shifting to a state (for example, C time saving game state). In such a case, it is possible to enhance the playability in the normal game state and the specific game state, which tend to be less interesting, and to increase the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[15-2. Appendix 2]
The gaming machine of appendix 2 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
When the game ball fired toward the game area passes through the special symbol start area (for example, the start port switches 121, 141A, 141B), a random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number related to the special symbol (for example, processing of S392 or S399 a main CPU 201) that performs
Special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start process (S93) capable of performing a special symbol lottery including a special result and a specific result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means) main CPU 201) to perform
Symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When the variable display of the special symbols is performed and the special stop mode indicating the special result (for example, the display mode of the big win) is derived, a special game state (eg, the big win game state) in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. ) controllable special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145),
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
with
The game state control means is
Normal game state,
A specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and controllable to any of a plurality of game states,
When the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the selection symbol command "0" to "2" big hit in FIG. 112), the result of the special symbol lottery is the special It is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous than the result (for example, the big hit of the selected symbol command "4" in FIG. 112).

According to the gaming machine (1) above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result, it is more advantageous for controlling the specific game state than when the result of the special symbol lottery is the special result. It is possible to make the game state more interesting, and to provide new playability that has never existed before.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
When the specific stop mode (for example, display mode for time saving) is derived by the symbol control means and controlled to the specific game state (for example, C time saving game state), the end condition of the specific game state is the above It is characterized in that it can be determined based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, when the specific stop mode is derived and controlled to the specific game state, the condition for ending the specific game state is determined based on the value of the acquired random number, so the specific game The end timing of the state may differ each time. By doing so, it is possible to provide a wide range of game characteristics, and to provide interesting game characteristics.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A special display effect (e.g., big win system reach) indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, and a specific display effect (e.g., time saving hit) indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived system reach), and suggestive effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing any one of a plurality of display effects.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, not only the special display effect indicating that the special stop mode may be derived, but also the specific display effect indicating that the specific stop mode may be derived. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to provide unprecedented new gameplay.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6) with different probabilities of deriving the special stop mode can be set, and the probability corresponding to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the special symbol lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived at
The special symbol lottery means is
When the special symbol lottery is set to one setting value (for example, setting 1) among the plurality of setting values and when it is set to another setting value (for example, setting 6), The derivation probabilities of the special stop mode are different, while the derivation probabilities of the specific stop mode are the same.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, by making the derivation probability of the specific stop mode the same while varying the derivation probability of the special stop mode according to the set value, when the set value is low Even so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Although the derivation probability of the specific stop mode is the same when one of the plurality of set values is set and when the other set value is set, the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to change the end condition of the specific game state that is controlled when it is set (for example, 50 times of time saving in case of setting 1, 100 times of time saving in case of setting 6)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, by making the probability of shifting to the specific game state the same when one set value is set and when another set value is set, interest is enhanced. It is possible to make it more interesting by making the end condition different while suppressing the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The special symbol lottery means is
It is possible to perform the special symbol lottery with either a low probability with a relatively low probability of deriving the special stop mode or a high probability with a relatively high probability of deriving the special stop mode. and
The probability that the special stop mode is derived when the special symbol lottery is performed with the low probability (for example, 1/201 shown in FIG. 110) and when the special symbol lottery is performed with the high probability With a probability (e.g., 1/6 shown in FIG. 110) that is relatively higher than any of the probabilities (e.g., 1/200 shown in FIG. 110) that the special stop mode is derived to, the specific stop It is characterized in that it is possible to perform the special symbol lottery so that the mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, since the specific stop mode is derived with a higher probability than when the derivation probability of the special stop mode is low and when it is high, unprecedented new games are possible. It is possible to provide sexuality and suppress the decline in interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number obtaining means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the process of S399) for acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
First special symbol lottery means (for example, first special symbol variable display start Main CPU 201) that performs processing (S93);
Second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, second special symbol variable display start process (S93) and a main CPU 201) that performs
The pattern control means is
First symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs first special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls to derive the result of the first special symbol lottery When,
Second symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs second special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls to derive the result of the second special symbol lottery and
When the result of the second special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the selected symbol command "z7" or "z8" jackpot), the result of the first special symbol lottery is the special result (for example, the selected symbol command 'z3' or 'z4' jackpot) and the result of the first special symbol lottery is the specific result (for example, the selected symbol command 'z0' to 'z2' time-saving hit). It is characterized by being configured to be

According to the gaming machine (7) above, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a special result, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a special result, and when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a specific result Since it is more advantageous than any other case, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in the game in which the second special symbol lottery is performed.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The random number obtaining means is
A first random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the processing of S392) for acquiring a random number related to the first special symbol;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that performs the processing of S399) for acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol,
The special symbol lottery means is
First special symbol lottery means (for example, first special symbol variable display start Main CPU 2201 for performing processing (S2013);
Second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery including at least the special result in the lottery result using the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, second special symbol variable display start process (S2013) and a main CPU 2201) that performs
The pattern control means is
First symbol control means (for example, main CPU 2201 that performs first special symbol variable display end processing (S2014)) that performs variable display of the first special symbol and controls to derive the result of the first special symbol lottery When,
Second symbol control means (for example, main CPU 2201 that performs second special symbol variable display end processing (S2014)) that performs variable display of the second special symbol and controls to derive the result of the second special symbol lottery and
The results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery further include a special result (for example, a winning prize),
The game machine is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the special stop mode (for example, the display mode for opening the accessory) indicating the special result is derived, a predetermined area (for example , V winning device 2150), entry control means (for example, main CPU 2201) for controlling entry of game balls to be possible or easy;
A special area (for example, V winning opening 2155) through which a game ball that has entered the predetermined area can pass;
further comprising
The special game state control means is
When the game ball passes through the special area, it can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state via the second route) in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed,
The first special symbol lottery means is
The probability that the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived (for example, 0), and the probability that the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special stop mode is derived ( For example, it is possible to perform the first special symbol lottery so as to differ from 1/1.17).

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the specific result, the new game feature is controlled to the specific game state, and when the special stop mode is derived, the game machine moves to the predetermined area. It can be applied to a so-called 1-kind 2-kind mixing machine that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball, and shifts to a special game state when the game ball that has entered the predetermined area enters the special area. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide unprecedented new game characteristics even for a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
In the specific game state,
A first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state are included,
The end conditions for each of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state include:
The first end condition for ending the specific game state when the sum of the variable display count of the first special symbol and the variable display count of the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number (for example, time saving in FIG. 91 end condition L), and a second end condition (for example, time-saving end condition M in FIG. 91) to end the specific game state when the number of variable display times of the second special symbol reaches a second predetermined number , A third termination condition (for example, a time-saving termination condition N in FIG. 91) that terminates the specific gaming state when the number of times the special stop mode is derived reaches a third predetermined number,
At least one of the first end condition, the second end condition and the third end condition is the end condition of the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state It is characterized by being different in at least one of the specific game states.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, it is possible to provide a wide variety of game characteristics by providing variations to the conditions for ending the specific game state, thereby enhancing interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific gaming state is
Including at least two specific game states of the first specific game state, the second specific game state, and the third specific game state,
Said 1st specific game state, said 2nd specific game state, and said end condition of each of said 3rd specific game state includes variable display times of said special symbols (for example, time saving times),
The game state control means is
In any one of the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state (e.g., C time saving game state) in another specific game state (e.g., B time saving game state) is met,
The number of variable display times of the special symbol that can be performed until the end condition for the one specific game state is satisfied, and the above that can be performed until the end condition for the other specific game state is satisfied Until the variable display of the special symbols is performed over the greater number of variable display times of the special symbols, control is possible in the same manner as the one specific game state regardless of the degree of advantage (for example, in S243 processing can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, while ensuring that the end condition of the specific game state is not disadvantageous to the player, it is performed in the same manner as one specific game state, It becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
The normal gaming state (for example, low probability low base state),
Although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is higher than the normal game state, the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is the same high probability non-specific game state (for example, high probability low base state) as the normal game state,
Although the probability that the special stop mode is derived is the same as the normal game state, a low probability specific game state (for example, a low probability high base state) in which the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal game state ,
Both the probability of deriving the special stop mode and the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery are controllable to either a high certainty specific game state (for example, a high certainty high base state) higher than the normal game state. and
The game machine is
A display effect control means capable of controlling the normal game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state to perform a display effect in a manner that is difficult to grasp from the appearance is provided.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the high-probability non-specific game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state are displayed in a manner that is difficult to grasp from the appearance, so that the game is interesting. It is possible to make the user have it, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The game machine is
A first mode (e.g., left-handed hitting) in which a game ball is shot toward a first area (e.g., left side area 106) of the game area;
A second mode (e.g., right-handed hitting) in which a game ball is shot toward a second area (e.g., right side area 107) of the game area;
The game can be played in any one of a plurality of modes including
While the game is performed in the first mode in the normal game state, the low probability specific game state, and the high probability specific game state,
In the high-probability non-specified game state, the game is configured to be played in the second mode.

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, the game is performed in the first mode in the normal game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state, while the second mode is performed in the high-probability non-specific game state. Since the game is played in , it is possible for the player to understand that the high-probability non-specific game state is a special game state different from other game states.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (11) or (12) above,
further comprising payout means (e.g., payout/emission control circuit 400) for paying out prize balls or prize data based on the fact that game balls shot toward the game area pass through a predetermined winning area;
In the normal game state, the low-probability specific game state, and the high-probability specific game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1,
In the high-probability non-specified game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, it is possible to increase interest by making the high-probability non-specific game state an advantageous game state compared to other game states.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (13) above,
The game state control means is
When the special stop mode (eg, the selected symbol command "z3" jackpot) is derived in the normal game state (eg, low-probability low base state), after the special game state is completed, the high-probability specific game state It is possible to shift to the high probability non-specific game state without shifting to.

According to the gaming machine of (14) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the high-probability non-specific game state, so that the decline in interest in the normal game state is suppressed. becomes possible.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[15-3. Appendix 3]
The game machine of appendix 3 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (for example, main control circuit 200) that controls the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, sub-control circuit 300) that performs control related to production,
with
The main control means is
starting information acquisition means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S392 or S399) for acquiring starting information (for example, various random numbers) when a predetermined condition is established;
When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, a lottery including at least a special result (for example, a big hit), a specific result (for example, a short time hit), and a loss is performed using the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)),
When the fluctuation start condition is established, a symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined display area, and a symbol control means (for example, a special symbol variable display end process (S94) that controls so that the result of the lottery is derived is executed. CPU 201);
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol game end setting processing (S282), etc.);
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a prefetch determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
Information transmission means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S322) for transmitting information related to the progress of the game to the effect control means;
has
The game state control means is
When a special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) indicating the special result is derived, a special game state (for example, a big win game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed;
When a specific stop mode indicating the specific result (for example, a display mode for reducing working hours) is derived, a game state in which the variable display of the symbols is performed, and a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (for example, C time-saving game state) and can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states, including
The production control means is
receiving the information transmitted from the information transmitting means, and being able to control such that an effect based on the information is displayed in a predetermined effect display area,
When information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is received, the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 301) that controls such that the effect (for example, the variable effect corresponding to the change) is performed along with the variable display of the symbol. )When,
a preceding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) for controlling to perform a preceding effect (for example, a prefetching effect) prior to the variable display of the symbols when information indicating the result of the preceding determination by the preceding determining means is received; , characterized by having

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the specific stop mode indicating the specific result is derived, the game machine controlled to the specific game state performs the production and the preceding production, which is an unprecedented new game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of flexibility.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding production control means is
A first preceding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a first preceding effect that can suggest that the specific stop mode may be derived (for example, a display of a time-saving hit system foreseeing effect form) )When,
A second preceding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) for controlling to perform a second preceding effect (for example, a display of a big win-based prefetch effect form) capable of suggesting that the special stop mode may be derived. When,
A third preceding effect that can suggest that one of the special stop mode and the specific stop mode may be derived (for example, display of a common prefetch effect form) is performed. and effect control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to derive not only an effect (second preceding effect) in which a special stop mode may be derived, but also a specific stop mode as the preceding effect. Since the suggestible first preceding performance is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new game characteristics. Moreover, when the third preceding effect is performed, there is a possibility that both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode will be derived, so it is possible to increase interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The third preceding effect control means is
The third preceding effect (e.g., a display mode for a big win) or the specific stop mode (e.g., a display mode for a time-saving hit) is derived in a manner that makes it difficult to distinguish from the appearance. It is characterized by being controllable so that the display of the common system look-ahead effect form) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the third preceding effect is performed in such a manner that it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance whether the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived. It is possible to increase interest by doing

(4) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The third preceding effect control means is
a first aspect (e.g., a blue square); and
A second mode (e.g., a yellow pentagon) that is a mode that can be changed from the first mode and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the first mode (for example, a yellow pentagon);
A third mode (for example, a rainbow triangle), which is a mode that can be changed from the first mode or the second mode, and has a higher expected value for the result of the lottery than the second mode (for example, a rainbow triangle);
It is controllable so that the third preceding effect is performed in one or more aspects out of a plurality of aspects including
The first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which it is difficult to distinguish by appearance whether the expected value for the result of the lottery is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The third mode is characterized in that the expected value for the special result can be easily distinguished from the appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the third preceding effect is performed, in the first mode and the second mode, which of the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result is higher can be visually determined. Although it is difficult to distinguish, it becomes easier to distinguish that the expected value for the special result is high when changing to the third mode. Therefore, when the third preceding effect is performed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
The first preceding effect control means,
A fourth mode (for example, a dedicated common system look-ahead effect mode);
A fifth aspect (for example, a white circle), which is an aspect that can be changed from the fourth aspect and has a higher expected value for the specified result than the fourth aspect,
It is controllable so that the first preceding effect is performed in one or more aspects out of a plurality of aspects including
The fourth aspect is an aspect in which it is difficult to distinguish by appearance whether it is the expected value for the special result or the expected value for the specific result,
The fifth aspect is characterized in that the expected value for the specified result is easily distinguishable by appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, in the fourth mode, it is difficult to distinguish by appearance which of the expected value for the special result and the expected value for the specific result is higher, but in the fifth mode, the expected value for the specific result is Higher values are easier to distinguish. Therefore, in the first preceding performance, by performing a performance with a high expected value for the specific result while excluding the expected value for the special result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without unnecessarily increasing gambling.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above,
The ratio of the first preceding performance performed by the first preceding performance control means and the ratio of the second preceding performance performed by the second preceding performance control means are configured to be different.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, by making the ratio of the first preceding performance and the ratio of the second preceding performance different, it is possible to give a sharp effect to the performance, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. becomes.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above,
The symbol control means is
It is possible to derive the specific stop mode in the normal game state and the specific game state,
The first preceding effect control means,
It is characterized in that control is possible so that the first preceding effect is performed in the normal game state, while control is possible so that the first preceding effect is not performed in the specific game state.

According to the game machine of (7) above, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest in the normal game state. That is, the player is more interested in the case where the specific result is derived in the normal game state than in the case where the specific result is derived in the specific game state. Therefore, the first preceding performance can be effectively performed by enabling the first preceding performance to be performed in the normal game state and preventing the first preceding performance from being performed in the specific game state.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
The first production control means (for example, sub CPU 301);
A second effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second relevant effect (for example, a big hit system ready-to-win) that suggests that the specific stop mode may be derived;
A third effect control means (for example, and a sub CPU 301).

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (7) above,
The production control means is
The first production control means (for example, sub CPU 301);
A second effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls to perform a second relevant effect (for example, a big hit system ready-to-win) that suggests that the specific stop mode may be derived;
A third effect control means (for example, and a sub CPU 301).

According to the gaming machines (8) and (9) above, as the effect. Since not only the effect (the second effect) from which the special stop mode may be derived, but also the first relevant effect that can suggest that the specific stop mode may be derived, It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new game features that have never been seen before. Moreover, when the third effect is performed, there is a possibility that both the special stop mode and the specific stop mode will be derived, so it is possible to increase interest.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
The second production control means,
When the second preceding effect (for example, the display of the prefetch effect form of the big win system) or the third preceding effect (for example, the display of the prefetch effect form of the common system) is performed, the second relevant effect (for example, the ready-to-win system of the big win system) is performed. is controllable so that
It is characterized in that control is possible so that the second pertinent performance (for example, big win system ready-to-win) is not performed when the first preceding performance (for example, time-saving winning type look-ahead performance mode display) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the second relevant effect is performed when the second preceding effect or the third preceding effect is performed, but is not performed when the first preceding effect is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of the preceding performance, it is possible to perform a performance that enhances interest by performing the preceding performance with a high expected value for the special result while eliminating the expectation value for the specific result in vain.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (9) or (10) above,
The first production control means is
When the first preceding effect (for example, display of time-saving hit system look-ahead effect form) or the third preceding effect (for example, display of common system look-ahead effect form) is performed, the first relevant effect (for example, time-saving hit system reach) is controllable,
It is characterized in that it is possible to perform control so that the first pertinent performance (for example, time-saving win system ready-to-win) is not performed when the second preceding performance (for example, the display of the big hit type look-ahead performance form) is performed.
According to the gaming machine (11) above, the first relevant effect is performed when the first preceding effect or the third preceding effect is performed, but is not performed when the second preceding effect is performed. . Therefore, at the stage of the preceding performance, by performing a preceding performance with a high expected value for the specific result while eliminating the needless giving of the expected value for the special result, the decline in interest is suppressed without increasing the gambling effect. becomes possible.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above,
The third production control means is
The first preceding effect (for example, display of time-saving prefetch effect form), the second preceding effect (for example, display of big win system prefetch effect form), and the third preceding effect (for example, display of common prefetch effect form) It is characterized in that control is possible so that the third relevant effect (for example, common reach) is performed even when either of the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine (12) above, since it is difficult to grasp whether the expected value for the special result or the specific result is high in the third relevant effect, the player's interest is attracted for a relatively long time. It becomes possible to attach.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above,
The production control means is
In the variable display of the specific pattern (for example, target variation) when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific pattern,
When the third relevant production (for example, common reach C) is started, after the third relevant production is performed, the first relevant production (for example, time-saving hit system reach C) or the second relevant production ( For example, while it is possible to shift to jackpot system reach C),
When the third relevant production (for example, common reach C) is not started, any of the first relevant production (for example, time-saving hit system reach C) and the second relevant production (for example, big hit system reach C) It is characterized in that it is configured not to migrate also.

According to the gaming machine (13) above, when the preceding effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific symbol, the third effect is started in the variable display of the specific symbol in which the preceding effect is performed. If you do, you can increase your interest. On the other hand, unless the third effect is started, neither the first effect nor the second effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[15-4. Appendix 4]
The gaming machine of appendix 4 has the following features.
(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
holding means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S395 or S402) capable of acquiring starting information when a predetermined condition is satisfied and holding the acquired starting information (for example, various random numbers) up to a predetermined number;
When the variable start condition is satisfied, a lottery including a special result (for example, a big win), a specific result (for example, a short-time win) and a loss is carried out using the start information held by the holding means. Lottery means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display start processing (S93));
When the fluctuation start condition is established, the symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, special symbol display units 163 and 164), and symbol control means (for example, special The main CPU 201) that performs a pattern variable display end process (S94);
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and the special stop mode (for example, the display mode of the big win) indicating the special result is derived, the special game state (eg, the big win game state) in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed. a special game state control means capable of shifting to
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and the specific stop mode (for example, the display mode for the reduction in working hours) indicating the specified result is derived, the game state in which the variable display of the symbols is performed is more than the normal game state. Specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) capable of shifting to an advantageous specific game state;
an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 301) that controls such that the effect is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbols in a predetermined effect area (for example, the display area 7a of the display device 7);
Prior to the lottery by the lottery means, a preceding determination means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a prefetch determination process (S396)) capable of determining the result of the lottery in advance;
Preceding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301);
with
The preceding production control means is
The preceding effect can be performed when there is a possibility that the special stop mode or the specific stop mode is derived.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the specific stop mode indicating the specific result is derived, the game machine controlled to the specific game state performs the production and the preceding production, which is an unprecedented new game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a high degree of flexibility.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The preceding production control means is
If the starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stop mode (for example, display mode for time saving) can be derived, the specific stop mode (for example, display for time saving) aspect) may be derived, while it is possible to control so that a specific preceding effect (for example, display of a time-saving hit-based pre-reading effect form) is performed,
Even if the specific starting information is included in the starting information held by the holding means, the special stop mode (for example, the big win display mode) is included, it is possible to perform control so that the preceding effect (for example, look-ahead effect) for the specific start information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived is withheld, if the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is previously withheld, The preceding production for the specific start information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest by performing an effective preceding performance while eliminating the preceding performance that may be unnecessary as much as possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The preceding production control means is
When the starting information held by the holding means includes special starting information from which the special stop mode can be derived, there is a possibility that the special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) can be derived. In addition to being controllable to perform a special preceding effect (for example, a display of a big hit type prefetch effect form) suggesting that
Even if the special starting information is not included in the starting information held by the holding means, it is possible to perform control so that the special preceding effect is performed,
When the special preceding effect is performed although the starting information held by the holding means does not include the special starting information, the starting information held by the holding means includes the specific stop mode. Even if specific starting information that can be derived is included, it is possible to perform control so that the preceding effect for the specific starting information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the special preceding effect is performed even though the special starting information is not reserved, even if the specific starting information is reserved, the preceding effect for the specific starting information is performed. is not performed, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. That is, if the special preceding effect is performed even though the special start information is not reserved, the player may be disappointed when the special stop mode is not derived. In such a case, even if the specific start information is withheld, by not performing the preceding effect for the specific start information, the specific stop mode is derived after the player is disappointed once. It is possible to increase interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The preceding production control means is
During the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, even if the start information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start It is characterized by being controllable so that the preceding presentation of information is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, even if the specific start information is suspended, the preceding effect for the specific start information is not performed during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived. Therefore, it is possible to minimize unnecessary preceding performance. That is, during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, the player's interest is attracted to the performance during the variable display, so even if the preceding performance for the specific start information is performed, it may become a useless performance. Therefore, during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, the preceding effect for the specific start information is not performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
In the specific game state,
A first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) capable of executing the first specific control (for example, time saving control with time saving performance in A time saving game state);
A second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) capable of executing a second specific control (for example, time saving control with time saving performance in C time saving game state) different from the first specific control is included. cage,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state),
When the specific stop mode is derived, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state),
When the special stop mode is derived, the starting information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the special game state ends, the When the transition to the first specific game state, even if the specific stop mode is derived by the establishment of the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information, the first without executing the second specific control It is characterized by being able to execute specific control.

In the gaming machine of (5) above, even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, if the transition is made to the first specific game state after the end of the special game state, the specific start information is performed and the specific stop mode is derived, the first specific control is executed without executing the second specific control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage that the player obtains from being spoiled due to the derivation of the special stop mode.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, after the end of the special game state, it is possible to shift to the specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state),
The preceding production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, the starting information held by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, and after the special game state ends, the specific start information is included. It is characterized in that it is controllable so that, when it is controlled to a game state, the preceding effect for the specific starting information is not performed.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, even if the specific start information is withheld when the special stop mode is derived, when the specific start information is controlled to the specific game state after the special game state ends, the specific start information It is designed so that the preceding performance is not performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the necessary preceding performance.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the starting information withheld by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the special game state ends, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to shift to the specific game state based on the specific starting information.

According to the game machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, the special game state is not shifted to the specific game state based on the specific start information after the end of the special game state. Therefore, for example, when the special game state is controlled based on the derivation of the special stop mode, it is possible to shift to the specific game state based on this.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The preceding production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived, even if the starting information withheld by the holding means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the special game state ends, the It is characterized in that it is possible to control so as not to carry out the preceding performance for the specific start information.

According to the gaming machine of (8) above, when the special stop mode is derived, even if the specific start information is withheld, it is possible to prevent unnecessary preceding effects from being performed after the special game state ends. can be suppressed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the starting information held by the holding means when the special stop mode is derived includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, after the special game state ends, When the expected value from which the special stop mode is derived is controlled to be in an advantageous gaming state (for example, a high-probability gaming state), the specific stop mode is derived due to the establishment of the variable start condition for the specific start information. It is characterized by being controllable so as not to shift to the specific game state even if it is played.

According to the gaming machine (9) above, after the special game state is over, the advantageous game state (for example, the high probability game state) with a high expected value for deriving the special stop mode is given priority over the specific game state. Since it is controlled, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Further comprising a counting means (for example, a ceiling counter) for counting the number of times the pattern is displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the number of variable display times of the symbols counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (eg, ceiling value), the specific game state (eg, C time saving game state) can be shifted to,
The preceding production control means is
Even if the starting information held by the holding means includes the specific starting information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, before the variable starting condition for the specific starting information is satisfied, the It is characterized in that, when the number of times of variable display of the symbols counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, it is possible to perform control so as not to perform the preceding effect for the specific starting information.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, even if the specific start information is withheld, the number of variable display times of symbols counted by the counting means before the fluctuation start condition for the specific start information is established. reaches a specified number of times, the specific game state is entered before the specific display mode is derived. In such a case, even if the preceding effect for the specific start information is performed, the preceding effect may become an unnecessary preceding effect. Therefore, by not performing such an unnecessary preliminary performance, the decrease in interest is suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit),
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and a special stop mode (for example, a display mode of a small win) indicating the special result is derived, a special game capable of shifting to a special game state in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed. further comprising state control means;
The preceding production control means is
The starting information held by the holding means includes specific starting information from which the specific stopping mode can be derived and special starting information from which the special stopping mode can be derived, and the specific starting information regarding the specific starting information Even if the fluctuation start condition for the special start information from which the special stop mode can be derived is satisfied before the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, control is performed so that the preceding performance for the specific start information is performed. It is characterized by being possible.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, the specific start information and the special start information are reserved, and the change start condition for the special start information is established prior to the change start condition for the specific start information. However, it is possible to perform a preceding effect for the specific start information. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The result of the lottery further includes a special result (for example, a small hit),
When the variable display of the symbols is performed and the special stop mode indicating the special result is derived, a special game state in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed (for example, a small win game state) can be transitioned to. Further comprising control means (eg, main CPU 201),
The preceding production control means is
During the variable display of the pattern from which the special stop mode is derived, if the start information retained by the retaining means includes specific start information from which the specific stop mode can be derived, the specific start information It is characterized in that it is controllable so that a preceding performance of is performed.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the specific start information is suspended during the variable display of the symbols from which the special stop mode is derived, a preceding effect is performed for the specific start information. . This makes it possible to increase interest.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[15-5. Appendix 5]
The gaming machine of appendix 5 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A main CPU 201 that performs special symbol lottery means (for example, special symbol variable display start processing (S93) for performing a special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through a special starting area (for example, starting port switches 121, 141A, 141B). )When,
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big win game state) in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145);
A game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and a specific game controllable to a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) more advantageous than a normal game state until the number of times of the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. State control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs time saving management processing);
A normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 for performing a normal symbol variable display start process (S293)) for performing a normal symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the normal starting area (for example, the passage gate switch 127);
Normal symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs normal symbol variable display end processing (S294)) that performs variable display of normal symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived; ,
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, the normal electric accessory opening) that facilitates the passage of the game ball to the special start area Main CPU 201) that performs processing (S296);
with
The specific gaming state is
At least one of the probability that the normal per symbol stop mode is derived, the degree of ease of passage of the game ball to the special start area, and the time during which the normal symbol is variablely displayed is the normal A game state in which specific control different from the game state is executed,
A first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) that can be controlled until the first end condition is satisfied, with the transition condition that the special stop mode is derived and the special game state is terminated;
A second specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) that can be controlled until a second end condition is satisfied, with a transition condition that a specific stop mode (e.g., display mode for time saving) is derived by the symbol control means )When,
At least two specific games out of a third specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) that can be controlled until the third end condition is satisfied, with the transition condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. It is characterized by including a state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first specific game state, the second specific game state whose transition condition is that the specific stop mode is derived, and the variable display of the special symbols are performed a specified number of times. Since at least two specific game states are prepared out of the third specific game state as a transition condition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new playability.

In the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state, the specific control mode may be the same, or the specific control mode may be different. Also, among the first specific game state, the second specific game state and the third specific game state, the specific control aspect in the two specific game states is the same, and the specific control aspect in the remaining one specific game state is It may differ from the mode of specific control in the above two specific game states.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) and the third specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) are
It is characterized in that the derivation probability of the normal per symbol stop mode is the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second specific game state and the third specific game state, the derivation probability of the stop mode per normal symbol is the same or substantially the same. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the second specific gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and the third specific gaming state (for example, B time-saving gaming state), a plurality of different degrees of ease of passage of game balls to the special start region, respectively Ease-of-passing patterns (for example, open pattern of normal electric accessories) are prepared,
The second specific game state and the third specific game state are
In at least a part of the plurality of passability patterns, the passability of the game ball to the special starting area is the same or substantially the same. .

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the second specific game state and the third specific game state allow the game ball to pass through the special start area in at least a part of the plurality of passability patterns. are configured to have the same or substantially the same degree of easiness. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the second specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) and the third specific game state (e.g., B time-saving game state), a plurality of time patterns at which the variable display of the normal symbols is performed are different. is prepared and
The second specific game state and the third specific game state are
In at least a part of the time patterns among the plurality of time patterns, the time during which the normal symbols are variably displayed is the same or substantially the same.

In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second specific game state and the third specific game state have the same or approximately the same or approximately the same time for variable display of normal symbols in at least a part of the time patterns among the plurality of time patterns. configured to be the same. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the specific stop mode (for example, display mode for time saving per) is derived in the first specific game state, the first specific control corresponding to the first specific game state (for example, time saving performance in A time saving game state ) can be maintained.

In the gaming machine of (5) above, even if the specific stop mode is derived in the first specific game state, it does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state, and corresponds to the first specific game state. It enables the first specific control to be maintained.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode (eg, display mode per time saving) is derived at a specific timing (eg, time saving final variation) in the first specific gaming state (eg, A time saving gaming state), after the specific timing (For example, the change next to the time-saving final change) can be changed from the first specific control to the second specific control.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific game state, the first specific control can be changed to the second specific control after the specific timing. be.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saving final variation) in the first specific gaming state, after the specific timing (for example, the next variation of time saving final variation), the first specific The first specific control corresponding to the game state (for example, time saving performance in A time saving game state) and the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state (for example, time saving performance in C time saving game state) are both performed It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to

In the gaming machine of (7) above, when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the first specific game state, neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed after the specific timing. It is controllable. Being able to control so that neither the first specific control nor the second specific control is performed corresponds to, for example, control that ends the first specific control and does not start the second specific control.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The specific game state control means is
Even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific game state, without changing to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state (for example, time saving performance in C time saving game state), the third It is characterized by being able to maintain the third specific control corresponding to the specific game state (for example, time saving performance in B time saving game state).

In the gaming machine of (8) above, even if the specific stop mode is derived in the third specific game state, it does not change to the second specific control corresponding to the second specific game state, and corresponds to the third specific game state. It enables the third specific control to be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing (for example, time saving final variation) in the third specific gaming state (for example, B time saving gaming state), after the specific timing (for example, time saving final variation next variation), the third specific control (for example, time-saving performance in B time-saving game state) to the second specific control (for example, time-saving performance in C time-saving game state) characterized in that it can be changed.

In the gaming machine of (9) above, when the specific stop mode is derived at a specific timing in the third specific game state, the third specific control can be changed to the second specific control after the specific timing. be.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The second specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) and the third specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) may differ in the aspect of the specific control.

In the gaming machine (10) above, the second specific game state and the third specific game state have different specific control modes. As a result, the variety of games is increased, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the first specific game state (eg, A reduced gaming state) and the transition condition to the second specific game state (eg, C reduced gaming state) are established, or the first specific game state When the transition condition to the second specific game state is established in
The number of variable display times of the special symbol executable until the first end condition is satisfied and the number of variable display times of the special symbol executable until the second end condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. The specific game state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when the first specific game state and the second specific game state overlap, the number of variable display times of special symbols that can be executed until the first end condition is satisfied and the second end condition are set. It is possible to control to the specific game state until the special symbols are variably displayed over the larger number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the game is established.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction game state) and the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction game state) are satisfied, or the third specific game state When the transition condition to the second specific game state is established in
The number of times of variable display of the special symbols executable until the second end condition is satisfied and the number of times of variable display of the special symbols executable until the third end condition is satisfied, whichever is greater. The specific game state can be controlled until the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of time.

In the gaming machine of (12) above, when the second specific game state and the third specific game state overlap, the number of variable display times of special symbols that can be executed until the second end condition is satisfied and the third end condition are set. It is possible to control to the specific game state until the special symbols are variably displayed over the larger number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the game is established.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (11), and (12) above,
A counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbol,
The counting means
Of the at least two specific game states, when the transition condition to another specific game state is established in any one specific game state, or the transition condition to the one specific game state and the other specific game state If the conditions for transitioning to
The number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the one specific game state is satisfied, and the number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific game state is satisfied, It is characterized in that both can be counted.

The game machine of (13) above, when the transition condition to another specific game state is established in any one specific game state, or when the transition condition to one specific game state and the transition to another specific game state When the conditions are established, the number of times of display of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of one specific game state is established, and the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the other specific game state is established. It is possible to count both the number of times of display and .

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
When the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, as the end condition of the corresponding specific game state, end condition setting means capable of setting the number of times of variable display of the special symbol (for example, the processing of S235, S237, S238 is performed Main CPU 201) is provided,
The end condition setting means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction game state) is established, and when the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction game state) is established, It is characterized in that it is possible to set different times as the number of variable display times of special symbols (for example, the number of time reduction times).

In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied and when the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied, different times are set as the number of variable display times of special symbols. It is configurable.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (14) above,
In the first specific game state,
The derivation probability of the normal per symbol stop mode is higher than any of the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

In the gaming machine of (15) above, in the first specific game state, the derivation probability of the normal per-symbol stop mode is higher than in either the second specific game state or the third specific game state. Thereby, the first specific game state can be positioned as a specific game state more advantageous than the second specific game state and the third specific game state.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, a counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) and the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) are satisfied, the third specific game state It is characterized by being controllable to

The gaming machine of (16) above is capable of being controlled to the third specific game state when the conditions for transition to the second specific game state and the conditions for transition to the third specific game state are established.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, a counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, the transition to the second specific game state is possible even if the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied.

In the gaming machine of (17) above, when the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, even if the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied, the transition to the second specific game state is possible. It is.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, a counting means (for example, a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
In the variable display of the special symbol where the transition condition to the third specific game state is established (for example, the variable display of the special symbol of the ceiling number), the transition condition to the second specific game state is not established ( For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), it is possible to shift to the third specific game state without confirming that the transition condition to the second specific game state is not satisfied. do.

In the gaming machine of (18) above, when the transition condition to the second specific game state is not satisfied in the variable display of the special symbols in which the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied, the second specific game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the third specific game state without confirming that the transition condition of (1) is not satisfied.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), and (15) above,
When the variable display of the special symbol is started or stopped, a counting means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a time saving counter update process) capable of counting the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed,
The specific game state control means is
In the variable display of the special symbol where the transition condition to the third specific game state is established (for example, the variable display of the special symbol of the ceiling number), the transition condition to the second specific game state is not established ( For example, when the specific stop mode is not derived), after confirming that the transition condition to the second specific game state is not satisfied, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state. do.

In the gaming machine of (19) above, in the variable display of special symbols in which the transition condition to the third specific game state is established, if the transition condition to the second specific game state is not satisfied, the second specific game state After confirming that the transition condition is not satisfied, the transition to the third specific game state is made possible.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12), (14), (15), and (16) above,
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction) or the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction) is established, the transition to establish the transition flag to the specific game state A flag establishing means is provided,
The specific game state control means is
When the transition flag is established, it is possible to transition to the specific game state.

The gaming machine of (20) above shifts to the second specific game state when the transition condition for the second specific game state is satisfied, and shifts to the third specific game state when the transition condition for the third specific game state is satisfied. It is designed to be transferred.

(21) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means is
When the transition condition to the second specific game state (for example, C time reduction) is established, the second transition flag is established, and when the transition condition to the third specific game state (for example, B time reduction) is established It establishes the third flag,
The specific game state control means is
When the second transition flag is established, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state, and when the third transition flag is established, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

The gaming machine of (21) establishes the second transition flag when the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, and sets the third transition flag when the transition condition to the third specific game state is satisfied. It is made to be established, that is, to establish a separate flag.

(22) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbols when the variable display of the special symbols is started;
The specific game state control means is
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established (for example, when S203 in FIG. 38 is YES determination), the third specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) can be shifted to characterized by being

The gaming machine of (22) above gives priority to the transition to the third specific game state when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established.

(23) In the gaming machine of (21) above,
counting means capable of counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed when the variable display of the special symbols is started;
The specific game state control means is
When both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state (for example, C time saving game state).

The gaming machine of (23) above gives priority to the transition to the second specific game state when both the second transition flag and the third transition flag are established.

(24) In the gaming machine of (20) above,
The transition flag establishing means is
Said second specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) when the transition condition is established, said third specific game state (e.g., B time-saving game state) is used when the transition condition is established It is characterized by establishing a common transition flag (for example, a time saving transition flag).

The gaming machine of (24) above establishes a common transition flag used in common when the conditions for transition to the second specific game state and the conditions for transition to the third specific game state are established. be.

(25) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbols when the variable display of the special symbols is started;
The specific game state control means is
When the common transition flag is established, if the transition condition to the third specific game state is established, even if the transition condition to the second specific game state is established, the third specific game state It is characterized by being able to shift to

In the gaming machine of (25) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the third specific game state are established, the transition to the third specific game state is performed rather than the transition to the second specific game state. It is designed to give priority to the migration of

(26) In the gaming machine of (24) above,
counting means capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbols when the variable display of the special symbols is started;
The specific game state control means is
When the common transition flag is established, if the transition condition to the second specific game state is established, even if the transition condition to the third specific game state is established, the second specific game state It is characterized by being able to shift to

In the gaming machine of (26) above, when the common transition flag is established, if the conditions for transition to the second specific game state are established, the transition to the second specific game state is performed rather than the transition to the third specific game state. It is designed to give priority to the migration of

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[15-6. Appendix 6]
The gaming machine of appendix 6 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols in a predetermined display area and controls so that the result of the lottery is derived;
When the special stop mode is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled to a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed;
counting means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs ceiling counter update processing) capable of counting the number of variable display times of the special symbols when the special game state is not in effect;
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
A main control means (for example, a main control circuit 200) having
The game state control means is
As a game state in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed,
Normal game state,
A plurality of games including a specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) that is controllable as a transition condition that the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times and is more advantageous than the normal game state. It is characterized by being controllable to one of the states.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is not in the special game state, the number of variable display times of the special symbols is counted, and the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times as the transition condition. Controllable to the specific game state. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented new game features such as playing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means,
A game state in which the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is counted by the counting means (for example, a game state in which the probability variation flag is off), and a game state in which the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is not counted by the counting means (for example, probability variation A game state in which the flag is on) and are included.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the game state counted by the counting means and the game state not counted are included. As a result, the width of the game is widened, and it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the plurality of game states controlled by the game state control means,
As the game state in which the number of variable display times of the special symbols is counted by the counting means, the probability that the normal game state, the specific game state (for example, the B time-saving game state), and the special stop mode are derived is the An advantageous gaming state higher than the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state (for example, a high certainty gaming state) is included,
The game state control means is
When the advantageous game state is not controlled, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times, the specific game state can be controlled,
When controlled to the advantageous game state, it is possible not to control to the specific game state even if the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times.

In the gaming machine of (3) above, the counting means counts any of the normal game state, the specific game state, and the advantageous game state. However, if it is not controlled to an advantageous game state, it can be controlled to a specific game state when the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number of times, but if it is controlled to an advantageous game state, the number of variable display times of special symbols is the specified number of times. It is possible not to control to a specific game state even if it reaches.

The above-mentioned "when the game is not controlled to the advantageous game state" corresponds to, for example, the case where the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number without being controlled to the advantageous game state even once. In addition, the above-mentioned "when it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state" is, for example, when it is a specification to perform a ST machine or a variable falling lottery, when it is controlled to a normal gaming state after the advantageous gaming state is finished. Equivalent to.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
a storage means (for example, main RAM 203) capable of storing information including the number of times information counted by the counting means as information relating to the progress of the game;
information erasing operation means (for example, backup clear switch 176) used for the operation of erasing information stored in the storage means;
The number of times counted by the counting means stored in the storage means separately from when the special game state is controlled or when the special game state ends and when the information erasing operation means is operated. Count initialization operation means capable of initializing information (for example, a setting key 174 as a switch separate from the backup clear switch 176, a dedicated switch, etc.);
characterized by comprising

In the gaming machine of (4) above, the number of times information counted by the counting means is initialized separately when the special game state is controlled or when the special game state ends, and when the information erasing operation means is operated. It is provided with counting initialization operation means that can be initialized.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the count initialization operating means (for example, the setting key 1174 for changing settings) is operated, information erasing means (for example, the main unit for performing the processing of S361) capable of erasing the information stored in the storage means It is characterized by having a CPU 201).

In the game machine of (5) above, the information stored in the storage means can be erased when the count initialization operation means is operated.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, a display mode of a small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed (for example, , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled to a small winning game state);
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area;
with
The production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies the transition condition to the specific game state, rather than the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived, the specific game state is entered. It is characterized in that it is possible to perform control so that the transition performance suggesting that the transition condition of 1 is satisfied is given priority.

In the gaming machine of (6) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol that satisfies the transition condition to the specific game state, rather than the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived, Control is performed so that a transition performance suggesting that a condition for transition to a specific game state has been established is preferentially performed.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, a display mode of a small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed (for example, , a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled to a small winning game state);
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) that controls so that the effect is performed in a predetermined effect area;
with
The production control means is
When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbol where the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, the special It is characterized by being controllable so that a special effect suggesting that the stop mode will be derived is preferentially performed.

In the gaming machine of (7) above, when the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbols for which the condition for transition to the specific game state is satisfied, the transition effect suggesting that the condition for transition to the specific game state is satisfied. The control is performed so that the special effect suggesting that the special stop mode is derived is preferentially performed.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The counting means can count the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed when the variable display of the special symbols is started,
The special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol,
The lottery means
A first special symbol lottery means for performing a first special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the first special starting area (for example, the first starting port switch 121);
A second special symbol lottery means for performing a second special symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting port switches 141A and 141B);
has
The special symbol control means is
Main CPU 201 that performs variable display of the first special symbol and performs control so that the result of the first special symbol lottery is derived (for example, the first special symbol variable display end process (S94) )When,
Second special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs second special symbol variable display end processing (S94) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and controlling so that the result of the second special symbol lottery is derived. )When,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of times the first special symbol changes per unit time, and the unit time One of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per per is configured to be larger than the other expected value,
The game state control means is
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling price), when the variable display of the special symbol when reaching the specified number of times is started, it is possible to shift to the specific game state. characterized by being

The gaming machine of (8) above is capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol per unit time, In a gaming machine configured such that one of the expected values of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol per unit time is greater than the other expected value, the counted number reaches a prescribed number. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols is started when reaching the specified number of times, it is possible to shift to the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the delay in the transition timing to the specific game state.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a special stop mode (for example, a display mode of a small hit) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed (for example, , Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145) that can be controlled in the small hit game state),
The game state control means is
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times (for example, the ceiling value), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol when the specified number of times is reached until the result of the lottery is derived While it is possible to shift to the specific game state during
Even if the number of times counted by the counting means reaches the specified number of times, if the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbols when the specified number of times is reached, after the special game state ends It is characterized by being able to shift to the specific game state.

In the gaming machine of (9) above, when the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times, it is possible to shift to the specific game state before the result of the lottery is derived, while the counted number of times reaches the specified number of times. When the special stop mode is derived in the variable display of the special symbols at the time, it is possible to shift to the specific game state after the special game state is finished.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The game state control means is
As a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed, the probability of deriving the special stop mode when the special symbols are variably displayed is an advantageous game that is higher than the normal game state and the specific game state. While being controllable to a state (for example, a high certainty gaming state),
The game machine is
A fall lottery means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of performing a fall lottery for determining whether or not to end the advantageous game state in the advantageous game state is provided,
The counting means
When the advantageous game state ends as a result of the fall lottery being performed without counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed in the advantageous game state, it is possible to start counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed. characterized by

The gaming machine of (10) above does not count the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed in the advantageous game state, and starts counting the number of times the special symbols are variably displayed when the advantageous game state ends as a result of the falling lottery. It is possible.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6) with different probabilities of deriving the special stop mode can be set, and the probability corresponding to the set setting value. A gaming machine in which the lottery is performed so that the special stop mode is derived in
The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability by a specified value within a predetermined range (for example, within the range of 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the probability,
The specified value is different according to the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which one of the plurality of set values is set. do.

In the gaming machine of (11) above, one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of deriving the special stop mode can be set, and the special stop mode is derived with a probability corresponding to the set set value. It is a game machine in which a lottery is performed. The specified number of times is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode will be derived by a specified value within a predetermined range of the denominator of the probability that the special stop mode will be derived. The specified value differs depending on the set value so that the specified number of times is the same or substantially the same regardless of which set value is set among the plurality of set values. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the setting values that have been set based on the specified number of times, which is the transition condition to the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[15-7. Appendix 7]
The game machine of appendix 7 has the following features.
(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a special symbol variable display start process (S93)) capable of performing a special symbol lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Special symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201 that performs special symbol variable display end processing (S94)) that performs variable display of special symbols and controls so that the result of the special symbol lottery is derived;
When a special stop mode (for example, a big win display mode) is derived by the special symbol control means, a special game state control that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big win game state) in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the processing of S145);
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing) capable of controlling a game state in which the special symbols are variably displayed;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301 that performs effect mode determination processing (S504)) capable of controlling display effects in a predetermined display effect area;
with
The game state control means is
Normal game state,
A plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state and whose transition condition is that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. can be controlled by either of
The production control means is
In the variable display (for example, final ceiling change) before the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times, the game progress effect (for example, shutter closing effect, right-handed navigation effect, night mode display effect) related to the progress of the game is performed. It is characterized by being controllable to start.

The gaming machine described in (1) above provides a new and unprecedented game feature such as performing a game progress effect related to the progress of the game in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times. It is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with

It should be noted that ``in the variable display before the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times, the game progress effect relating to the progress of the game is started'' means that the variable display before the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times. Not only the game progress effect is performed in , but also the game progress effect is performed after that (for example, the variable display of the special symbol of the specified number of times).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special symbols include one special symbol (eg, first special symbol) and another special symbol (eg, second special symbol),
The special symbol lottery means is
One special symbol lottery means for performing a special symbol lottery for the one special symbol (for example, the main CPU 201 for performing a hit determination process (S104) for the first special symbol) and a special symbol lottery for the other special symbol and another special symbol lottery means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs the second special symbol hit determination process (S104)),
The special symbol control means is
One special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the first special symbol) that performs variable display of the one special symbol and controls so that the result of the one special symbol lottery is derived; ,
Other special symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs special symbol management processing for the second special symbol) that performs variable display of the other special symbol and controls to derive the result of the other special symbol lottery. ,
and, even if one of the one special symbol and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the other can be variably displayed,
The game machine is
When another condition different from the predetermined condition is met, a normal symbol lottery means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a normal symbol variable display start process (S293)) for performing a normal symbol lottery;
Normal symbol control means (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs normal symbol variable display end processing (S294)) that performs variable display of normal symbols and controls to derive the result of the normal symbol lottery;
When the normal symbol hit stop mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived by the normal symbol control means, the special symbol lottery facilitating means (for example, the normal electric role) that makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the other special symbol lottery Main CPU 201) that performs object release processing (S296);
further comprising
The production control means is
It is possible to perform a first display effect accompanying variable display of the one special symbol or a second display effect accompanying variable display of the other special symbol,
Prior to the transition to the specific game state, the first display effect is given priority over the second display effect,
After the transition to the specific game state, it is possible to perform the first display effect so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific game state.

The gaming machine of (2) above is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying one special symbol and another special symbol in parallel, and before shifting to the specific game state, i.e., variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times. Until then, the first display effect is displayed with the variable display of one special symbol, and after the transition to the specific game state, the display frequency of the first display effect is reduced.

After the transition to the specific game state, it is preferable that the second display effect (for example, night mode display effect) associated with the variable display of other special symbols is preferentially displayed over the first display effect.

Further, "to perform the first display effect so that the execution frequency is lower than before the transition to the specific game state" means that the execution frequency of the first display effect is higher than before the transition to the specific game state. This is intended to include not only the case of lowering, but also a mode in which the first display effect is not displayed at all after the transition to the specific game state.

In addition, the special symbol lottery facilitating means makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of other special symbol lotteries, but by providing a plurality of other special symbol lottery execution opportunities (for example, the second start port A plurality of them may be provided), and only one of them may increase the execution frequency of other special symbol lotteries by the special symbol lottery facilitation means.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the one special symbol, the first display effect can be performed until the second display effect is started. (For example, second normal pattern)
It is characterized by

The gaming machine of (3) above performs the first display effect until the second display effect is started when the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of one special symbol. It made it possible.

A mode in which the first display effect is displayed until the second display effect is started corresponds to, for example, a mode in which the first display effect is displayed in a loop.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to the specific game state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The production control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect of displaying the number of times of the time saving game state B). and
When the variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after shifting to the specific game state are displayed. When the variable display is finished or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, the third display effect can be performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

(5) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to the specific game state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The production control means is
When the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, a count-up effect of displaying the number of times of the time saving game state B). and
When the variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent special symbols after shifting to the specific game state are displayed. When the variable display is finished or when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, the third display effect can be performed (for example, the second normal pattern).
It is characterized by

The above (4) and (5) gaming machines are capable of performing a third display effect related to the end condition of the specific game state when the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is completed. It is the one that was made. In such a gaming machine, when the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the specific game state ends before the third display effect is performed, the second and subsequent times after shifting to the specific game state. When the variable display of the special symbols is completed or when the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, the third display performance is performed.

Note that (4) above can also be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (1) above. Similarly, (5) above can be rephrased as follows in the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above.
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to the specific game state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The production control means is
When the first variable display of the other special symbols after transitioning to the specific game state is completed, a third display effect related to the predetermined end condition (for example, count up to display the number of time reductions in the B time reduction game state) directing),
The variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the one special symbol, and at the end of the variable display of the one special symbol, the other special symbol is being variably displayed. If there is, or if the variable display of the other special symbols is not performed, when the variable display of the other special symbols after the variable display of the other special symbols is completed, or the variable display of the other special symbols is performed It may be characterized in that it is possible to perform the third display effect when it is not displayed.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (2), (3) or (5) above,
The production control means is
The variable display of the first special symbol after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbol, and the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol. When the variable display of the one special symbol ends during, it is possible to perform the first display effect when the variable display of the one special symbol ends (for example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (6) above, the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbols, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols. When the variable display of one special pattern ends during the variable display of the special pattern, the first display performance can be performed when the variable display of one special pattern ends.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The production control means is
The game progress effect can be displayed at the start of the variable display of the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols which is the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state. (for example, the first irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (7) above, at the start of the variable display of the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols, which is the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state, the game It is possible to display the progress effect.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7) above,
The production control means is
The variable display of the one special symbol is performed during the variable display of the other special symbol executed before the variable display of the other special symbol, which is the first variable display of the special symbol after shifting to the specific game state. Even when the ready-to-win effect is performed as the first display effect accompanying the variable display of the one special symbol, the game progress effect (for example, right-handed small navigation effect) can be displayed (for example, , 1st irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (8) above, one special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols, which is the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state. When variable display of patterns is performed and ready-to-win performance is performed as a first display performance accompanying variable display of one special pattern, game progress performance (for example, right-handed small navigation performance) can be displayed.

It should be noted that the "game progress effect can be displayed" is not limited to displaying all of the game progress effect described in (1) above, but only a part of the game progress effect described in (1) above. Including those that are displayed.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (2) or 3 above,
The production control means is
The first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbols, and the variable display of the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols. If the variable display of the one special symbol is not performed during the game, it is configured so that part of the game progress effect is not performed (for example, the third irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (9) above, the first variable display of the special symbols after shifting to the specific game state is the variable display of the other special symbols, and the other special symbols executed before the variable display of the other special symbols. When one special symbol is not variably displayed during the variable display of the special symbols, the second display effect is performed without performing the first display effect.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (9) above,
The normal symbol control means is
The variable display of the normal symbol is a short normal symbol variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the normal symbol performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, the normal symbol variation pattern "02H" in FIG. 231). , The expected value of the variable display frequency of the normal symbol performed per unit time is relatively small long general figure variable display mode (for example, normal symbol variation pattern "05H" in FIG. 231) It can be done in any of the figure variable display modes,
Before the transition to the specific game state (for example, time saving flag = 0 shown in FIG. 231), the variable display of the normal design in the long general figure variable display mode, after the transition to the specific game state (for example , the time saving flag=1) shown in FIG. 231 can be performed at a different frequency.

In the gaming machine of (10) above, before transitioning to the specific game state, the variable display of normal symbols in the long-term variable display mode can be performed at a frequency different from that after transition to the specific game state. It is.

"Different frequency after transition to specific game state" may be performed with a higher frequency than after transition to a specific game state, or a lower frequency (probability 0).

It should be noted that "Before the transition to the specific game state, the variable display of normal symbols in the long-universal figure variable display mode is performed at a different frequency than after the transition to the specific game state" means before the transition to the specific game state. Also includes a mode that does not perform variable display of normal symbols at all in the long and wide figure variable display mode. Here, "not performed at all" may be either the case where the probability of performing a lottery is 0 or the case of discarding the lottery result of a lottery.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2), (3), and (5) to (10) above,
The other special symbol control means is
The variable display of the other special symbols is a short special symbol variable display mode in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the other special symbols performed per unit time is relatively large (for example, the fluctuation of the special symbols for high start pattern), and a long special figure variable display mode (for example, a special symbol variation pattern for low start) with a relatively small expected value of the number of variable display times of the other special symbols performed per unit time. It is possible to do it in any of the multiple special figure variable display modes including,
Although the probability that the special stop mode (for example, the jackpot display mode) is derived is the same before and after the transition to the specific game state, before the transition to the specific game state, to the specific game state At a higher frequency than after the transition, it is possible to perform the variable display of the other special design in the long special design variable display mode (for example, the second irregular pattern)
It is characterized by

In the gaming machine of (11) above, although the probability of deriving the special stop mode is the same before and after the transition to the specific game state, before the transition to the specific game state, the transition to the specific game state It is possible to perform variable display of other special symbols in a long special symbol variable display mode at a higher frequency than later.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The production control means is
It is possible to perform a normal effect that can be displayed in the normal game state and a specific effect that can be displayed in the specific game state,
A count effect control means capable of performing a count effect capable of grasping the number of variable display times of the special symbol performed before switching from the normal effect to the specific effect,
The count effect control means is
When shifting from the normal game state to the specific game state, it is possible to reset and display the number of variable display times of the special symbols performed until the normal performance is switched to the specific performance.

In the gaming machine (12) above, when the normal game state is shifted to the specific game state, it is possible to reset and display the number of variable display times of the special symbols performed until the normal effect is switched to the specific effect.

According to the game machine of Supplementary Note 7, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability.

[15-8. Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, an image is displayed. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode ), the game is shifted to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, JP-A-2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention came to the idea that, in the process of earnestly examining various effects performed in a game machine, it would be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko game machine has the following features.

(A-1) production executing means capable of executing production;
icon display means capable of displaying icons (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, etc.) in the effect executed by the effect execution means;
The icon display means has the same system when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed by the effect execution means and when the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed. It is possible to display an icon (a "bell" icon),
The effect executing means is configured to provide different effects after the icon is displayed when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform a rendition,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed and when the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed, icons of the same system ("Bell" icon) can be displayed. Then, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), and when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) ) is displayed and after the icon (“bell” icon) is displayed, different effects can be executed. As a result, by giving variation to the effects performed before and after the icons are displayed, and by making the icons displayed between the effects the same system, the development of the effects can be easily understood from the player's point of view. can do. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

As explained in the fifth pachinko game machine, as icons in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately employ icons composed of characters, graphics, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof. “Icons of the same family” means that one icon and another icon have at least part of the same characters, figures, symbols, and colors. For example, when the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 (see FIG. 162(b)) is adopted as an icon, the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed and the second effect (second notice effect ) is being executed, the completely same “X” icon confirmation image 9051 may be displayed, and when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed, “X” is displayed in the first color (for example, blue), and when the second effect (second notice effect) is being executed, the character "X" is displayed. An “X” icon confirmation image 9051 of a second color (eg, red) may be displayed. Further, when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed, an "X" icon confirmation image 9051 in which the character "X" is a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is displayed. (second notice effect) is being executed, the character "Y" is the same color as the character "X" (for example, yellow) 9052 (see FIG. 162 ( c) see) may be displayed.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko machine, various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, second specific icon, and third specific icon) In the big hit notice effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect), they are displayed as “mutually similar icons”. For example, various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) are Various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) and "same system" be.

(A-2) The gaming machine of (A-1),
The effect execution means provides a common effect (see FIG. 144 After executing the notice after stopping the icon corresponding to the shown effect number "91" or "92", it is possible to execute the different effects from each other,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the same icon is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after icon stop corresponding to effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) in the case where the system icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. is configured to This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the common production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, data for the first effect (first advance notice effect) and second effect (second notice effect) are used as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, it is possible to simplify the performance control.

(A-3) The gaming machine of (A-1) or (A-2),
The effect executing means displays a first icon (“bell” icon) as the icon of the same system, and a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon. It is possible to execute a common effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) in both cases.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system, and when the second icon (“bell” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed "Watermelon" icon) is displayed, and a common effect (announcement after icon stop corresponding to effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) can be executed. there is This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the common production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). It can be made easier to understand. In addition, as data for effecting when the icons are displayed, both data for the first icon (“bell” icon) and data for the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are stored. Since there is no need to set the display, the effect control can be simplified.

It should be noted that "common" is a concept that can be rephrased as "same type" as in the above-described "same system", and one performance and another performance may not be exactly the same. If one performance and another performance include at least a part of the same element, these performances can be said to be a common performance. For example, in the background image displayed in one effect and the background image displayed in another effect, if the basic scenery is the same, even if a part of the scenery is subtly different, these background images may be considered "common".

(A-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-3) above,
a movable member;
Advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The effect executing means (the sub-control circuit 300 that performs the effect shown in FIG. 160) determines the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed throughout the operating time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, it suggests the player's expectation of advantageous control over the operating time of the movable member. is configured in such a way that As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon), and the display of the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) changes the movement of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance.

(A-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-4),
a movable member;
Advantageous control means capable of performing control advantageous to the player,
The production executing means is
A first specific effect performed when the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) ), a third icon (“cherry” icon) different from the first icon can indicate the degree of expectation for the advantageous control to be performed through the operation time of the movable member. In the second specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number “93” shown in FIG. 144) that is performed when is displayed, the movable member is not controlled to operate.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first specific effect (effect number "91" or "92", it is possible to suggest the player's expectation of advantageous control over the operating time of the movable member. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display of the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon), and the display of the icon of the same type (the "bell" icon) changes the movement of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the performance. On the other hand, a second specific effect (corresponding to effect number “93” shown in FIG. 144) performed when a third icon (“cherry” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. In (announcement after the stop of the icon), the control for operating the movable member is not performed. In this way, by making the operation of the movable member different according to the type of the icon to be displayed, it is possible to associate the type of the icon to be displayed with the mode of presentation after the icon is displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the development of the production after the icon is displayed.

It should be noted that the movement of the movable member may be started after the display of the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is finished, or the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) may be started while the movement of the movable member is being performed. "Bell" icon) may continue to be displayed.

(A-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-5) above,
The production executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect,
In the second effect, before the icon of the same system is displayed, a preliminary effect suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed ( Display of icon suggestive items) can be executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon of the same system (“Bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 144 or While it is possible to execute the notice after stopping the icon corresponding to "92", it is also possible to specify when the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) It is configured to be able to execute an effect (announcement after the stop of the icon corresponding to the effect number “91” or “92” shown in FIG. 144). This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the specific production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). can be made easier to understand. In addition, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is suggested that the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed before the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed. 135 (display of an icon-suggestion type item in the effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 135) can be executed. As a result, when it is suggested that the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) will be displayed, the player can predict the development of the effect one step ahead.

(A-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-6) above,
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The production executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect,
In the second effect, a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (roulette effect) is provided,
The predetermined effect execution means is
a first suggesting means (a sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "16" shown in FIG. 135) capable of suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed;
A second suggesting means (sub-control circuit 300 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number "15" shown in FIG. 135) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the advantageous control being performed;
The production executing means is
When the first suggesting means suggests that the icon of the same system should be displayed in the second effect, the specific effect can be executed after the icon of the same system is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation level is suggested by the second suggesting means in the second effect, the specific effect is not executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon of the same system (“Bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the specific effect (effect number “91” shown in FIG. 144 or While it is possible to execute the notice after stopping the icon corresponding to "92", it is also possible to specify when the icon of the same type ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect) It is configured to be able to execute an effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the production through the specific production (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the production number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144). can be made easier to understand. Also, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (roulette effect), and in the predetermined effect (roulette effect), the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. There are cases where it is suggested that it will be displayed, and there are cases where it is suggested that the degree of expectation for control that is advantageous to the player is performed. Then, when it is suggested that the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect), the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) is displayed. After that, while it is possible to execute a specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144), the expectation level is suggested, the specific effect (announcement after stopping the icon corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 144) is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that the icon of the same type (“bell” icon) will be displayed, the player can predict the development of the effect one step ahead. On the other hand, when the degree of expectation is suggested, it is possible to create a player's sense of expectation even without the development of the performance, so it is possible to improve the attractiveness of the second performance (second advance notice performance). can be done.

(A-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-7) above,
The production executing means is
A common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) in the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect ), it is possible to execute the different effects from each other,
When the icon of the same system is displayed in a third effect (third notice effect) different from the first effect and the second effect, a specific effect (third 1 connecting effect (dedicated)) can be executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), the same icon is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). It is configured such that it is possible to execute a common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) when the system icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the performance through the common specific performance (the first connecting performance (common)), so that the development of the performance can be more easily understood. In addition, data for the first effect (first advance notice effect) and second effect (second notice effect) are used as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, it is possible to simplify the performance control. Furthermore, when the same icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), a specific effect different from the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) It is configured to be able to execute an effect (first connecting effect (dedicated)). Thus, an appropriate specific performance corresponding to the content of the third performance (third notice performance) different from the first performance (first notice performance) and the second performance (second notice performance) is realized. can be done.

In the present invention, the specific effect different from the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) is displayed with a similar icon (“bell” icon) in the third effect (third advance notice effect). It may appear only when the third effect (third notice effect) is displayed, and it may also appear when the icon of the same type ("Bell" icon) is displayed in the effect other than the third effect (third notice effect). may be In addition, in the present invention, even when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common) ) may be performed.

(A-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-8),
Equipped with an operation means (production button 54) capable of accepting an operation by a player,
The icon display means is
First icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated (when the effect button 54 is operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 138) When,
A second icon capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is not operated (when the effect button 54 is not operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" shown in FIG. 138) a display means;
The effect executing means executes a specific effect (connecting effect) in both cases when the icon is displayed by the first icon display means and when the icon is displayed by the second icon display means. is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the icon is displayed when the operation means (effect button 54) is operated, and when the icon is displayed even if the operation means (effect button 54) is not operated. There is. And it is configured such that the specific effect (connection effect) can be executed in any situation in which the icon is displayed. Thereby, the specific effect (connection effect) is executed when the operation means (effect button 54) is operated, and the specific effect (connection effect) is executed even if the operation means (effect button 54) is not operated. It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to play, and through such a situation, it is possible to provide variations in the development of the production.

In addition, a specific effect (connection effect) that is executed when the operation means (production button 54) is operated, and a specific effect (connection effect) that is executed when the operation means (production button 54) is not operated may be a common presentation (partially different presentation), or may be completely the same presentation.

(A-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-9) above,
The production executing means is
a pattern effect executing means capable of executing a pattern effect in which a pattern is displayed;
When a specific pattern display (image display related to 4-pattern tenpai swaying) is performed in the pattern production performed in the first production state (the state in which the normal background is displayed), the first production state is changed to the first display. a production state switching means capable of switching to a production state of 2 (a state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4-symbol tenpai),
The icon display means is
When the specific symbol display is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, it is possible to display a first icon (a "bell" icon) as the icon of the same system,
After switching to the second effect state by the effect state switching means, when the specific symbol display is performed in the symbol effect, a second icon ("watermelon") different from the first icon is displayed. icon),
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific symbol display (image display related to 4-symbol Tenpai swaying) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (state in which the normal background is displayed) , it is possible to switch from the first presentation state (the state in which the normal background is displayed) to the second presentation state (the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4-symbol tenpai). 1 icon (the "bell" icon) can be displayed. Then, after switching to the second production state (the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4-pattern tenpai), when a specific pattern display (image display related to the 4-pattern tenpai fanning) is performed in the pattern production, It is configured to be able to display a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon). In this way, the first icon (“bell” icon) and the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are displayed step by step, and the specific pattern display (image display related to the 4-pattern tenpai swaying) and effect state are displayed. By associating the switching of , it is possible to create an attractive production development.

Note that the first effect state and the second effect state may be states in which different backgrounds are displayed, or the appearance frequency of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed) is They may be in different states. For example, the probability that the first effect is performed is higher than the second effect in the first effect state, while the probability that the second effect is performed is higher than the first effect in the second effect state. It may be configured to be In addition, while the probability that the first character appears is higher than the second character in the first production state, the probability that the second character appears is higher than the first character in the second production state. It may be configured to be

(A-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-10),
Equipped with a pattern display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of patterns,
The pattern display means can temporarily stop and display the pattern before the pattern is finally stopped and displayed,
The effect executing means, when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") from when the variable display of the symbol is started until the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol It is possible to execute the different effects from each other in the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of is resumed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") until the pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the variable display of the pattern, the icon of the same system ("Bell" icon ) is displayed, the different effects can be executed in the second pseudo-game (“pseudo-2”) after the variable display of symbols is resumed. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first pseudo-game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo-game (“pseudo 2”) with the display of the same system icon (“bell” icon) as a mark. , and the development of the production can be made even easier to understand.

In the present invention, one unit game (special symbol variation game) is formed from the start of symbol variation display until the symbol is finally stopped and displayed. One unit game (special symbol variation game) corresponds to one special symbol start winning (one reserved ball), and even if the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the number of reserved balls does not decrease. It is possible to configure

[15-9. Appendix 9]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, an image is displayed. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode ), the game is shifted to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, JP-A-2017-221523).

The inventor of the present invention came to the idea that, in the process of earnestly examining various effects performed in a game machine, it would be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko game machine has the following features.

(B-1) Equipped with production mode control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage),
In the plurality of production modes, the occurrence ratio of each production is different from each other,
The production mode control means, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, one production mode It is possible to transition from to another production mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, in a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the occurrence ratio of each production is different from each other, and a specific condition ( When the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is established, one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage). As a result, as the game progresses, through the gradual transition between production modes (production stages) with different production tendencies, which production mode (production stage) is currently being stayed and which production mode (production stage) is next. It can interest the player as to whether to transition to. As a result, it is possible to create an interesting performance development, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), a lottery based on random numbers is performed, respectively, based on the production lottery table. , the content of the effect that occurs is determined. Different production lottery tables are used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage). In the production lottery table used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), at least one of the lottery values (random value range) specified for each production Some are different. As a result, when a predetermined effect that can occur in any of the effect modes (the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage) is provided, the effect mode (the first effect stage, the third effect stage, the The occurrence probability (frequency) of the production is different for each production stage (second production stage, and the third production stage), or the production that can occur in one production mode (for example, the first production stage) is different from another production mode (for example, the first production stage). , second production stage and third production stage). That is, in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the tendencies (systems) of production are different from each other. For example, in the first production stage, pseudo-continuous production is more likely to occur than in the second production stage and the third production stage. Also, the time stock notice can occur only in the second production stage. Also, the meter UP notice can occur only in the third production stage.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery. explained as being to be done. In the present invention, the method of determining the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is not particularly limited. For example, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the production mode (first production stage , second production stage, or third production stage) may be sequentially shifted. In addition, a mode (random mode) in which the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery, and a production mode (first production A stage, a second production stage, or a third production stage) is configured so that the player can select one of the modes (order mode) by operating a button or the like. You may Furthermore, the player can select by operating a button or the like to play the game in any one production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage). can be configured to For example, a random mode, an order mode, a first production stage fixed mode (a mode in which the game is played only on the first production stage), a second production stage fixed mode (a mode in which the game is played only on the second production stage), and a third production stage It may be configured such that the player can select one of the fixed mode (the mode in which the game is played only in the third effect stage) by operating a button or the like. At this time, even when the first production stage fixed mode, the second production stage fixed mode, or the third production stage fixed mode is selected, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, A stage change announcement performance may be generated.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition), the condition that the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times). Also, an example employing the condition that the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169 is selected has been described. A specific condition (stage change generation condition) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and any condition can be appropriately adopted. For example, the predetermined number of times may be a numerical value selected by lottery from a plurality of numerical values (eg, 0 to 99) instead of a predetermined numerical value. For example, at the start of one special symbol variation (for example, after executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 178), one numerical value is selected by lottery, and the special symbol variation for the number of times corresponding to the numerical value is performed. However, when (a specific condition corresponding to the lottery result is established), the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed. At this time, when 0 is selected by lottery, after the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is once changed in one special design variation, the special design In the change, the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed again. Alternatively, when a specific condition is established according to a predetermined winning (for example, winning of a game ball to the first start port 120), the production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) may be changed.

It should be noted that when the RAM clear is executed, it may be made to stay in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). At this time, the post-transition fluctuation number counter (see step S9261 in FIG. 180) may be set to "0". RAM clear is a process of clearing the backup area in the main RAM 203, as described in the first pachinko game machine, and is stored in the work area of the main RAM. This is the process of clearing the existing information. When the RAM clear (backup clear processing) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear processing) has been executed is sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 as a command. By receiving this command, the sub-control circuit 300 can recognize that RAM clear (backup clear processing) has been executed. As explained in the first pachinko game machine, in the RAM clear (backup clear processing), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but in principle the information stored in the specific work area Not cleared.

Further, when the power is turned on, the production stage managed by the sub-control circuit 300 may be made to stay in a predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage). As a result, regardless of the game state managed by the main control circuit 200, the display device 7 displays an image corresponding to the effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). At this time, the post-transition fluctuation counter may be set to "0".

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as game states managed by the main control circuit 200, a normal game state and a probability variable game state (high probability game state) are provided, and in the probability variable game state, special symbol fluctuations occur a predetermined number of times ( 50 times), it has been explained that the variable probability game state shifts to the normal game state. Here, when shifting from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, another gaming state (intervening gaming state) may be passed through. For example, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probability variation gaming state, the transition from the probability variation gaming state to the intervening gaming state occurs, and the special symbol variation occurs the specified number of times (eg, two times) in the intervening gaming state. When done, it can be configured to transition from the intervening gaming state to the normal gaming state. In the intervening game state, the lottery may be performed using a table different from the various tables used in the normal game state and the variable probability game state (for example, a variation pattern table of special symbols).

As the performance mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300, a performance mode (intermediate mode) corresponding to the intervening game state may be provided. For example, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times) in the probability variation mode, the transition from the probability variation mode to the intervening mode occurs, and the special symbol variation is performed a specified number of times (eg, twice) in the intervening mode, It can be configured to transition from intervention mode to normal mode. For example, when the probability variable mode ends, a result screen corresponding to the result during the bonus (for example, an image showing the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode) can be displayed. Conceivably, the result screen may continue to be displayed even in the intervening mode.

When such an intervening mode shifts to the normal mode, a stage change may always occur (transition to a production stage determined by lottery). In addition, when an irregularity (power failure, etc.) occurs or when the RAM is cleared, the game state managed by the main control circuit 200 is an intervening game state, while the production mode managed by the sub-control circuit 300 is a predetermined effect mode (for example, an image corresponding to the first effect stage is displayed). In this case, until the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times), the predetermined production mode (for example, the first production stage) may be made to stay.

(B-2)
The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
game control means capable of controlling the execution of a game based on one set value among a plurality of set values;
setting value suggesting means capable of suggesting the setting value;
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
The production mode control means is capable of transitioning from the first production mode to the second production mode when the specific condition is satisfied,
The setting value suggesting means can suggest the setting value by displaying the specific condition (displaying a counter image when a stage change occurs).
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a specific condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, the second It is possible to transition from one production mode (first production stage) to a second production mode (second production stage), and a display showing the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) It is configured so that it is possible to suggest a set value by In this way, since the display indicating the specific condition (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs) is performed, the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage) The player can be interested in the conditions for transitioning to. At the same time, through the display (the display of the counter image when a stage change occurs), it is possible for the player to predict the set value, so that the player's interest in the condition can be heightened.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the image indicating the name of the production mode (production stage) after transition is being displayed, the content of the display showing the specific condition (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs) is displayed. It was explained as being reset (recovered). Thus, in the present invention, when a specific condition (stage change generation condition) is satisfied, the production mode of the transition destination (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) corresponds to It is possible to change the display indicating a specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs) while an image (background, name, etc.) is displayed.

In the present invention, display of a counter image when a stage change occurs can be used as the display indicating the specific condition. The counter image may be a counter image displayed in the stage change game (special symbol variation in which the stage is changed), or a game before the stage change game (for example, one of the special symbol variations in which the stage is changed). It may be a counter image displayed in the previous special symbol variation). For example, in the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, an effect such as changing the color of the counter image to the color corresponding to the set value may be performed.

(B-3)
The gaming machine of (B-1) or (B-2),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
First production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and second production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166) It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth advance notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including
It is possible to display patterns in mutually different patterns when the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode and when the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode. be,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second effect mode (the effect number "104" shown in FIG. 166 ” and “106”). notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166), and a specific effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the second effect. It is configured so that the patterns can be displayed in different patterns depending on the mode (the mode of performance corresponding to the mode numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166). As a result, it is possible to display the symbols in a pattern corresponding to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the symbol display are appropriately linked.

(B-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-3),
Identification information display means (display device 7) capable of performing variable display and static display of identification information;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (first production stage) and a second production mode (second production stage),
A first effect (a first notice effect, a second notice effect, a third notice effect, and a fourth notice effect) is provided as a effect that can be executed only in the first effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. and
A second effect (eighth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the second effect mode among the plurality of effect modes,
A third effect (sixth advance notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode,
The production executing means is
First production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and second production mode (production mode corresponding to production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 166) It is possible to execute the third effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including
Identification after starting variable display of identification information in the case where the third effect is executed in the first effect mode and the case where the third effect is executed in the second effect mode It is possible to display the identification information with different variation patterns as the variation pattern of the identification information until the information is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166) and the second effect mode (the effect number "104" shown in FIG. 166 ” and “106”), it is possible to execute the third effect (sixth notice effect), The sixth notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 166), and the third effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode. 2 presentation mode (the presentation mode corresponding to the presentation numbers ``104'' and ``106'' shown in FIG. 166). It is configured such that identification information can be displayed in different variation patterns as information variation patterns. As a result, it is possible to display the identification information in a variation pattern according to the effect mode, and to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the display of the identification information are appropriately linked. In addition, the first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) and second effect (eighth notice effect) are respectively in the first effect mode (first production stage) and the second production mode (second production stage), whereas the third production (sixth advance notice production) is the first production mode (first production stage) and the second production mode (second production stage). Therefore, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is established, for example, when the transition is made from the first production mode (first production stage) to the second production mode (second production stage) , While the first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) is not performed, the second effect (eighth notice effect) is performed. , Further, it is possible to create a situation in which the third effect (sixth advance notice effect) is continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in each production mode (production stage) and specific conditions (stage change occurrence conditions).

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" to "106" are performed, the decorative symbols are changed in a dedicated change pattern as shown in FIGS. 168(a) to (c). It was explained as letting On the other hand, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" are performed, for example, the default variation patterns shown in FIG. It is possible to fluctuate the decorative design with a fluctuation pattern in which the timing at which the decorative design is stopped is earlier than the fluctuation pattern shown.

(B-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-4) above,
The specific condition can be established according to the first symbol fluctuation display (first special symbol fluctuation), but cannot be established according to the second symbol fluctuation display (second special symbol fluctuation). ,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, while a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) can be established according to the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation), the second symbol variation It is configured so that it cannot be established according to the display (second special symbol variation). As a result, in the situation where the second symbol variation display (second special symbol variation) is performed, the transition of the production mode (production stage) does not occur, but the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed, a transition of the production mode (production stage) occurs. As a result, the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed with respect to the situation in which the second symbol variation display (second special symbol variation) is performed ) can be characterized as a situation in which the transition occurs, and the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed can be made interesting.

(B-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-5),
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 163) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information;
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first start port 120) is established;
display control means capable of causing the identification information display means to variably display the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, and then stop displaying the identification information;
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery,
The suggesting means is
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the variable display of the identification information based on the satisfaction of one of the predetermined conditions (retained ball in the stage change section) among the plurality of times the predetermined condition is satisfied is the display control. When the transition of the production mode by the production mode control means is performed in response to being performed by the means, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With regard to the predetermined lottery conducted in response to the above, while the result of the lottery can be suggested, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery conducted in response to the selection, no suggestion can be made regarding the outcome of the lottery.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the predetermined condition (the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120) is established over a plurality of times, the predetermined condition (the first starting port 120 When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of one of the predetermined conditions (stage change section relevant reserved ball) , after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition (retained ball in the stage change section) is started, according to the establishment of the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 120) With regard to the predetermined lottery (jackpot judgment) performed by the Regarding a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) performed in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first start port 120) before the display is started, a suggestion regarding the result of the lottery ( It is configured so that the look-ahead effect) cannot be performed. As a result, depending on the timing of establishment of each predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 120) and the timing of the variable display at which the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed, The number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which a suggestion (forecast effect) regarding the result can be performed is changed. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion about the result (prefetching effect) cannot be performed is predetermined, the number of predetermined lotteries in which the suggestion (prefetching effect) can be performed There is a possibility that (big hit determination) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to make a suggestion (forecast effect) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-6) above,
Lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
Suggestion means capable of making a suggestion (prefetch effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery;
A transition destination production mode determination means (sub CPU 301 that executes the processing of step S9203 in FIG. 178) capable of determining the production mode of the transition destination,
The production mode control means, when the specific condition is satisfied, from one production mode, it is possible to transition to the transition destination production mode determined by the transition destination production mode determination means,
The suggesting means is
When the predetermined lottery is performed multiple times, the predetermined lottery performed after the transition destination production mode is determined by the transition destination production mode determination means among the predetermined lotteries of the plurality of times , while the result of the lottery can be suggested, the result of the lottery can be suggested for the predetermined lottery performed before the transition destination production mode is determined by the transition destination production mode determination means. do not have,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed a plurality of times, the transition destination production mode (production stage) among the predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) is Regarding the predetermined lottery (jackpot judgment) performed after the determination, the result of the lottery can be suggested (forecasting effect), while the destination effect mode (effect stage) is determined. For a predetermined lottery (big hit determination), it is configured so as not to be able to suggest the result of the lottery (read-ahead effect). As a result, depending on the timing of each predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) and the timing of determining the production mode (production stage) of the transition destination, a suggestion regarding the result (forecast production) can be performed The number of lotteries (jackpot determination) will change. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of predetermined lotteries (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion (prefetching effect) cannot be performed is predetermined, the predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) in which the suggestion (prefetching effect) can be performed It is possible to increase the number of judgments), and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to make suggestions (read-ahead effects) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-7),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production mode control means, when the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established as the specific condition In addition, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
The production executing means is
When the transition of the production mode by the production mode control means is performed in response to the establishment of the first condition, the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is executed. a first effect executing means capable of
A second effect executing means capable of executing a fifth effect different from the fourth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169),
The effect mode control means (the sub CPU 301 that executes the process of step S9281 in FIG. 181) sets the second condition related to the fifth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 169) even if the first condition is not satisfied. If the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected) is established, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to the achievement of the predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 170) ) can be executed. Also, even if the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is not satisfied, the fourth production (Fig. 170) different from the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169) (the effect shown in FIG. 169). If the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected) is established, it is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage). configured as possible. As a result, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) and the second condition (production number shown in FIG. 169 " 121” or “122” corresponding to the main variation pattern is selected), and the fourth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 170) and the fifth effect (shown in FIG. 169 Regarding the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"), it is possible to make the player interested in which condition is established and which effect is generated. As a result, it is possible to make the development of the production related to the transition of the production mode (the production stage) more interesting.

(B-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-8),
production execution means capable of executing production;
and a production selection means capable of selecting the production executed by the production execution means,
The effect mode control means, when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169(a)) is selected by the effect selection means, changes from one effect mode to another It is possible to transition to the production mode of
The effect executing means, at any one of a plurality of timings including a first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)) and a second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)) , it is possible to execute the predetermined production,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169(a)) is selected, one effect mode (effect stage) It is possible to transition from to another production mode (production stage), the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169 (b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)) At any timing of a plurality of timings including ing. As a result, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. Since it occurs at the timing 1) shown in (b) or at the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169 (b)), it is rich in variations in relation to the transition of the production mode (production stage) It is possible to create the development of the production.

169(b)) and the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)). 2 (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)), one or a plurality of timings may be provided. For example, while the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)) is set later than the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 169(b)) by a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds), At a third timing that is later than the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 169(b)) by a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds), a predetermined production (production number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169(a) ”) may be configured to be able to execute.

(B-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-9),
Lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination);
production execution means capable of executing production;
production pattern selection means capable of selecting a production pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the production executed by the production execution means;
Effect pattern replacement means (sub CPU 301 for executing the process of step S9210 in FIG. 178) capable of replacing the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means with another effect pattern,
The effect executing means includes a suggestive effect executing means capable of performing a suggestive effect (prefetch effect) that can suggest the result of the predetermined lottery,
When the suggestive effect is performed by the suggestive effect executing means, the effect pattern replacement means selects the first effect pattern (sub-fluctuation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 182) by the effect pattern selecting means. is selected, the production pattern is replaced, while the second production pattern (sub-fluctuation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 182) is selected by the production pattern selection means. does not replace the production pattern,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a suggestive effect (read-ahead effect) that can be suggested regarding the result of a predetermined lottery (jackpot determination) is performed, the first effect pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern "1 ”~“20”) is selected, while the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is replaced, the second effect pattern (sub-variation pattern “21”~“30” shown in FIG. 182) is selected. If it is, it is configured not to replace the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern). Thus, as the first stage for determining the production pattern (sub-variation pattern), one production pattern (sub-variation pattern) is selected without considering whether or not the suggestive production (prefetch production) is performed. , On top of that, as a second step, when a suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is performed, an appropriate effect pattern according to the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is provided by replacing the effect pattern (sub-fluctuation pattern) as necessary. In determining (sub-fluctuation pattern), the efficiency of processing can be improved.

(B-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-10),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The production mode control means is
When the first condition as the specific condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is established, from one production mode A first production mode control means capable of transitioning to another production mode;
When the second condition (that the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is satisfied as the specific condition, from one production mode to another production mode A second production mode control means that can be transitioned to,
The production executing means is
When the transition of the production mode by the first production mode control means is performed in response to the establishment of the first condition, the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 170) a first effect execution means that can be executed;
When the transition of the production mode by the second production mode control means is performed in response to the establishment of the second condition, the fifth production (corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 and a second effect execution means capable of executing the effect to
When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the fourth effect is not executed by the first effect executing means, and the second effect executing means executes the fourth effect. It is possible to perform the production of 5,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is established, It is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed in response to the achievement of the predetermined number of times (20 times), the fourth production (the production corresponding to the production number "131" shown in FIG. 170) ) can be executed. Also, when the second condition (selection of the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) is satisfied, one production mode (production stage) to another production It is possible to transition to the mode (production stage), and the second condition (that the main variation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169 is selected) is established. When the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed accordingly, it is possible to execute the fifth production (the production corresponding to the production number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169). Then, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) and the second condition (production number "121 or that the main variation pattern corresponding to "122" is selected), the execution of the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 170) is executed. It is configured so that the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) can be executed. In this way, the first condition (the number of special symbol variations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) and the second condition (production number shown in FIG. 169 When both conditions are satisfied, than the fourth effect (effect corresponding to effect number “131” shown in FIG. 170) By preferentially executing the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 170 ) does not occur, and the player's interest in the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 169) can be heightened.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the fifth effect (corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 169) rather than the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 170) production) can be preferentially executed. On the other hand, in a situation where the predetermined effect and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “131” shown in FIG. 170) can be performed, the fourth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 170) is preferred over the predetermined effect. The effect corresponding to the number "131") may be preferentially executed. As the predetermined production, there is an production performed when the special symbol variation starts (for example, a design action announcement production). The symbol action notice effect is a effect of generating a predetermined effect on the decorative symbol at the start of the special symbol variation. Even when it is decided to generate a symbol action notice performance at the start of one special symbol variation, when a stage change is performed in the special symbol variation, the symbol action notice performance is not performed. It is possible to

(B-12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-11),
a symbol display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect in one of a plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to effect numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 186);
production pattern selection means capable of selecting one production pattern from the plurality of production patterns as a production pattern executed by the production execution means;
The pattern display means can temporarily stop and display the pattern before the pattern is finally stopped and displayed,
The effect execution means selects one effect pattern among the plurality of effect patterns in a first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") from when the variable display of the symbols is started until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. After executing the production in , in the second pseudo-game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of the pattern is resumed, it is possible to execute the production with one production pattern among the plurality of production patterns. can be,
The production pattern selection means (the sub CPU 301 that executes the processing of step S9363 in FIG. 190 and the processing of step S9473 in FIG. 194) selects the pattern of the production performed in the second pseudo game, and then based on the pattern , It is possible to select the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo game,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") from when the variable display of the symbols is started until the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a plurality of production patterns (see FIG. 186 After executing the production with one of the production patterns corresponding to the production numbers "161" to "163" shown), the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the fluctuation display of the pattern is resumed. , it is possible to execute an effect with one of a plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to effect numbers “161” to “163” shown in FIG. 186). And, after selecting the pattern of the effect performed in the second pseudo-game ("pseudo 2"), based on the pattern, it is possible to select the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo-game ("pseudo 1"). configured as possible. As a result, it is possible to easily design the development of the effect performed from the first pseudo game ("pseudo 1") to the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2").

[15-10. Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, an image is displayed. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode ), the game is shifted to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-110576).

The inventor of the present invention, in the process of earnestly examining the above-described gaming machine, came to the idea that it would be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the change time of the identification information. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In this regard, the fifth pachinko game machine has the following features.

(C-1) first lottery means capable of conducting a first lottery (ordinary lottery);
A second lottery means capable of performing a second lottery (second special lottery);
Based on the result of the first lottery performed by the first lottery means, a first display means (normal symbol display unit 161) capable of displaying the identification information variably and then stopped,
a second display means (second special symbol display section 164) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopped based on the result of the second lottery performed by the second lottery means; prepared,
The first display means can variably display the identification information over a first period of time (500 ms) when the result of the first lottery is the first result (per normal symbol). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result (normal loss), the identification information is variably displayed over a second time (600000 ms) longer than the first time. is possible and
The second display means variably displays the identification information over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time when the result of the second lottery is a specific result (small win). It is possible to let
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (per normal symbol), the identification information is changed over the first time (500 ms). While it is possible to display, if the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), the second time (600000 ms) longer than the first time (500 ms) ), it is possible to variably display the identification information. Further, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the identification information is displayed for a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time (600000 ms). It is configured so that it can be variably displayed. As a result, while the variable display (first variable display) of the identification information is performed when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the second lottery is performed. It is possible to complete the variable display (second variable display) of the identification information when the result of the (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit). Therefore, by using the time from the end of the second variable display to the end of the first variable display, it is possible to create novel game characteristics and improve the amusement of the game.

(C-2) The gaming machine of (C-1) above,
A first prize winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) in which game balls can enter,
A second winning means (large winning opening 151 for small winning) into which a game ball can enter;
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, it is possible to control the first winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the first winning means 1 control means;
When the result of the second lottery is the specific result when at least the first display means variably displays the identification information over the second period of time, the second prize winning means a second control means capable of controlling the second prize winning means so that game balls are easier to enter;
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (ordinary symbol hit), the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) is used to play the game. It is possible to control the first winning means (normal electric accessory unit 145) so that the ball can easily enter, and at least the first display means (normal symbol display section 161) can display the second If the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small win) while the identification information is being variably displayed over time (600000 ms), the second winning means (small It is configured to be able to control the second winning means (big winning hole 151 for small winning) so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole 151 for winning. As a result, the second result (normal If a loss) occurs, while the identification information is being changed (first change display) based on the second result (normal loss), the second winning means (small winning big winning opening 151), it is possible to perform control to make it easier for the game ball to enter, and using the time until the first variable display ends, the second winning means (small winning big winning opening 151) It is possible to create a situation in which a game ball can easily enter.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, while the identification information is being changed (normal symbol losing length variation) based on the second result (normal losing), the second winning means (large winning opening for small winning) 151) explained that a situation is created in which game balls are likely to enter. The second result in the present invention is not limited to loss (normal loss), but may be hit (normal symbol win). It should be noted that the second time can be about 10 to 100,000 times (or 100 to 10,000 times, 500 to 5,000 times, 1,000 to 2,000 times, etc.) the first time. , and it is possible to set the time to about 5 to 10,000 times (or 100 to 5,000 times, 500 to 1,000 times, etc.) the third time. In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 145) is 0.5 to 50 times (or 1 to 1) the first time. 10 times, 2 times to 5 times, etc.). In addition, the time during which control is performed to make it easier for game balls to enter the second winning means (big winning hole for small win 151) is 0.5 to 100 times (or 1 time) the third time. up to 50 times, 2 times to 10 times, etc.).

(C-3) The gaming machine of (C-1) or (C-2),
A pattern display means (display device 7) capable of displaying patterns;
a pattern effect execution means capable of executing a pattern effect (drum variation effect) in which a plurality of patterns are displayed on the pattern display means;
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, the symbol effect executing means is arranged so that one symbol among the plurality of symbols is different from at least one symbol among the remaining symbols. On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, the pattern effect is executed so that the plurality of patterns are all the same pattern. it is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (ordinary design), one of the plurality of designs is the remaining design. While it is possible to execute a pattern performance (drum variation performance) so as to be different from at least one of the symbols, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss) is configured to be able to execute a pattern effect (drum variation effect) so that all of the plurality of patterns are the same pattern. Thus, by displaying all the same patterns as a plurality of patterns, the player can understand that the identification information is variably displayed over a relatively long time (second time (600000 ms)). can be done.

(C-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-3) above,
an image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
an image display control means capable of controlling image display on the image display means;
A state control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variable mode),
When the image display control means is controlled to the second state, predetermined images corresponding to the display mode of the identification information on the first display means (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and , right drum pattern 9202R) can be displayed on the image display means, while the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display means when being controlled to the first state,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when it is controlled to the second state (variable probability mode), a predetermined image corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161) (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) can be displayed, while the predetermined image ( The left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R) are not displayed. As a result, the second state (variable probability mode) is compared with the first state (normal mode), and the production (predetermined image The player can be made aware of the state in which (the effect using the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R) is performed.

(C-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-4) above,
production execution means capable of executing production;
A state control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variable mode),
The state control means is capable of terminating the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
The effect executing means, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, provides a predetermined effect (drum based on a winning pattern) according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state. There are cases where the variable production) is executed and cases where the predetermined production is not executed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are performed in the second state (variable probability mode), it is possible to end the second state (variable probability mode). be. In addition, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal loss), a predetermined effect is given according to the remaining number of executable unit games in the second state (probability variable mode). (drum fluctuation effect by winning pattern) is executed and the predetermined effect (drum fluctuation effect by winning pattern) is not executed. In this regard, if the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is small (for example, the time required to execute the remaining unit games in the second state (variable probability mode) is the first In a situation where the change display time of identification information when the result of the lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss) is relatively short compared to the second time (600000 ms)) , there is a possibility that the significance of the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becoming the second result (ordinary loser) may be diminished. According to the invention of (5), since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined effect (drum variation effect based on the hit pattern) in such a case, it is possible to appropriately realize an effect corresponding to the game situation. can be done.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the remaining number of executable unit games in the second state (variable probability mode) is a specific number of times (10 times) or more, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the It has been explained that a predetermined production (drum fluctuation production by a hit pattern) is performed based on the result of 2 (variation of normal symbol losing length). Here, as the second result (normal pattern loss length fluctuation), a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds, etc.), the specific number of times may be varied according to the determined variable time. For example, in the variable probability gaming state, the identification information variation display time is 5 seconds when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a loss, and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is Assume that the total time of the variable display time of the identification information in the case of a small win and the opening time of the second prize winning means (big prize winning port 151 for small win) is 5 seconds. In such a form, when 60 seconds is determined as the variation time corresponding to the second result (normal symbol loss length variation), the remaining number of executable unit games in the second state (probability variation mode) is 12. If it is more than once, the variable display can be almost completed during the second state (probability variable mode). In this case, it is possible to set the specific number of times to 12 times. In this way, the value obtained by dividing the normal design fluctuation time determined by the expected value of the special design fluctuation time (for the small hit, the total time of the special design fluctuation time and the opening time of the small winning prize opening) may be determined as the specific number of times.

Further, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the determination of whether or not the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (variable probability mode) is a specific number of times (10 times) or more is It has been explained that the lottery 1 (ordinary lottery) is performed when passage through the gate that triggered the lottery (ordinary lottery) occurs. In the present invention, the determination may be made when the normal symbol variation corresponding to the gate passage starts. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when gate passage occurs is a specific number (10 times) or more, the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the normal symbol variation starts is specified If it is less than the number of times (10 times), the predetermined effect (drum variation effect by winning pattern) may not be performed.

As described in the fifth pachinko game machine, the predetermined images (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) based on the winning patterns are identified by the second result (normal losing). It is possible to configure so as to be stopped and displayed before the fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) is started. After the predetermined images (the left drum pattern 9202L, the middle drum pattern 9202C, and the right drum pattern 9202R) are stopped and displayed, a win notification effect (see FIG. 199(k)) is performed. It is preferable that the hit notification effect ends at the same time as the normal symbol loss length variation starts. Thus, it is possible to classify the performance modes such that the variable probability mode is used while the winning notification performance is performed, and the first bonus mode is used after the winning notification performance is performed. In the variable probability mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 216 and 217 are performed, and in the first bonus mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 210 to 213 are performed. It should be noted that when the hit notification effect is being performed, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (for example, 10R big hit) in the second display means (second special symbol display unit 164) (jackpot game When the start condition of the state is satisfied), a predetermined big hit effect is performed. As a result, the game is shifted to the first bonus mode. The predetermined jackpot effect can be the same effect as the effect performed when the condition for starting the jackpot game state is established at another timing during the variable probability mode (when the win notification effect is not performed). be. On the other hand, when the condition for starting the big win game state is established in the first bonus mode, an effect different from the predetermined big win effect may be performed.

(C-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-5) above,
an image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
and image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means performs display on the image display means in accordance with the change time of the identification information on the first display means, and changes the display mode over time so that the display gradually becomes lighter. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the display is performed according to the change time of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161), and the display mode is changed over time so that the display gradually becomes lighter. It is configured so that it can be changed to As a result, the change time of the identification information on the first display means (ordinary symbol display section 161) is imprinted in the player's mind, and the player can be strongly aware of the time.

(C-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-6) above,
an image display means (display device 7) capable of displaying an image;
and image display control means capable of controlling image display in the image display means,
The image display control means is
A first image capable of causing the image display means to display a predetermined image (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information on the first display means. display control means;
a second image display control means capable of performing time display (display of normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image) in the image display means according to the change time of the identification information in the first display means,
The first image display control means does not cause the image display means to display the predetermined image when the time display is being performed.
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, predetermined images (left drum pattern 9202L, middle drum pattern 9202C, and right drum pattern 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (normal pattern display section 161) ) can be displayed, and time display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image display) according to the variation time of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 161) can be performed. It is possible. Then, when the time display (normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image display) is performed, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. is configured as As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the time display (display of the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image), and to make the player strongly aware of the time.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, when the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the second result (normal symbol losing length variation), time display (normal symbol losing length variation remaining time image display) It has been described as being done (see Figure 202). The time may be the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation at the time when one normal symbol losing length variation starts (that is, the variation time itself of the normal symbol variation related to the normal symbol losing length variation). , It may be the remaining time of the normal symbol losing length variation at the time when one normal symbol losing length variation is being performed.

In the present invention, the situation in which the time display (normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image display) is performed is not particularly limited, and the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (per normal symbol). In some cases, or when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a predetermined result (losing or big hit), etc., time display (display of normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed. good. For example, in a situation where the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the fluctuation pattern of all the normal symbol fluctuations that are being held corresponds to the first result (per normal symbol). When it is a variation pattern, or when the result of the jackpot determination related to all reserved special symbol variations is a loss, time display (normal symbol loss length variation remaining time image display) is performed. can be adopted. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the normal symbol losing length fluctuation remaining time has decreased.

(C-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-7) above,
production execution means capable of executing production;
a state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a specific state (second bonus mode);
When the specific state ends, the effect execution means, when part or all of the second time has passed, the remaining time of the second time (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) It is possible to execute a production according to the remaining time),
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a part or all of the second time (600000 ms) has passed when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the second time (600000 ms) It is configured such that it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the remaining time of the time (the remaining time of normal symbol loss length fluctuation). As a result, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variable display (first variable display) of the identification information and the specific state (second bonus mode) are changed. In a situation that occurs in a superimposed manner, the performance content is varied according to how much time (second time) remains for the variable display at the time when a specific state (second bonus mode) ends. be able to. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the remaining time of the second time (the remaining time of normal symbol losing length variation), and to make the player strongly aware of the remaining time.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, when the first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) continues at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the remaining time of the second time ( It was explained that the production is performed according to the normal pattern loss length fluctuation remaining time). In the present invention, the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) may end at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends. That is, when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, when the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) ends (when the remaining time of the second time is 0) and When the first variable display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues (when the remaining time of the second time is not 0), different effects may be performed.

When the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues at the time the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first lottery (normal The result of the lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) occurs, and the first variation display ( While the normal symbol losing length variation) is being performed, the first variation display (normal If the pattern losing length fluctuation) continues, and in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal losing), and the first lottery A first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) corresponding to (normal lottery) occurs, and the first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) occurs at the time when a specific state (second bonus mode) ends. can be assumed to continue. Here, in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss), and the first variation corresponding to the first lottery (normal lottery) When the display (normal symbol loss length variation) occurs, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) in the second state (variable probability mode) becomes the second result (normal loss), and the first lottery An effect (special effect) different from the effect performed when the first variation display (normal symbol losing length variation) corresponding to (ordinary lottery) occurs may be performed.

(C-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-8) above,
production execution means capable of executing production;
a state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode);
The state control means is capable of terminating the second state when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are played in the second state,
The effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner over the second time period. it is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, when a predetermined number of unit games (50 times) are performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is performed. can be terminated. In addition, when the identification information is variably displayed over the second time (600000 ms), in the second state (remaining ST count subtraction mode), according to the remaining count (remaining ST count) of the executable unit game It is configured so that it is possible to execute the production. As a result, when the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) is large in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) will continue for the time being ), or when the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is small (the end of the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is approaching situation), it is possible to appropriately realize an effect according to the game situation.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) is a predetermined number of times (5 times) or more, and a predetermined number of times (5 times ), the contents of the presentation may differ depending on the case. In the present invention, it is possible to divide the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) into a plurality of periods, and to vary the content of the effect performed in each period. As the plurality of periods, for example, a period in which the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is a first predetermined number (for example, 30 times) or more ( first period), the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is a second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) or more first predetermined number (for example, 30 times), the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the third predetermined number (for example, 5 times). A period (third period) that is less than the second predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of executable unit games (remaining ST number) in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the fourth The remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) during the period (fourth period) in which the predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) or more is less than the third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) It is possible to set a period (fifth period) in which (remaining number of STs) is the fifth predetermined number of times (for example, once).

(C-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-9),
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect execution means provides a suggestive effect that can suggest that the result of the first lottery has become the second result while the identification information is being variably displayed on the second display means. directing) can be performed,
It is characterized by

According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result while the identification information is being variably displayed on the second display means (second special symbol display portion 164). It is configured so as to be able to execute a suggestive effect (general map prefetch effect) that can suggest that it has become (usually lost). As a result, the first display means (ordinary symbol display section 161) through the suggestive effect (general pattern look-ahead effect) performed while the identification information is being variably displayed in the second display means (second special symbol display section 164) , the player can expect that the identification information will be variably displayed for a relatively long time (second time (600000 ms)).

[15-11. Appendix 11]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are variably displayed when a predetermined condition is established, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As a game machine of this kind, in the jackpot game state, the small win game state, and the time saving state, the right-handed instruction is notified, and in the normal game state, the left-handed instruction is notified. In particular, see paragraph 0338).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-104167, the interest is enhanced in the right-handed game state such as the jackpot game, the small-hit game state, and the time-saving state, while the interest is reduced in the left-handed normal game state. There is a risk.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 11 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A game medium fired in a normal mode (e.g., left-handed shot) toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the first special symbol lottery. The first special symbol start area (for example, the first start port 5120) that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game from which the
A game medium fired in a specific mode (e.g., right-hand shot) toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, a second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the second special symbol lottery. A second special symbol start area (for example, a second start port 2140) that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game from which the
When the game medium fired toward the game area passes, the normal symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived. , 5125A, 5125B) and
A first variable winning device (which can be opened when a result advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a role release hit) is derived in the special symbol game as the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game ( For example, a large winning opening 2131, a V winning opening 2155),
To facilitate passage of game media to the second special symbol starting area (for example, second starting port 2140) when a predetermined result (for example, normal electric long opening hit) is derived in the normal symbol game. A second variable winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 2146) capable of
A plurality of game modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining pending mode) A gaming machine capable of executing a game in either mode,
When the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed, the expected value for deriving an advantageous result for the player is higher (for example, the first special symbol game When the second special symbol game is executed than when is executed, the expected value of winning per opening of the role is higher
The plurality of game modes are
The normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false) in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the normal mode) )When,
Including an advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the specific mode,
The normal game mode is
First normal game mode (for example, normal mode),
It is characterized by including a second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) that is more advantageous for the player than the first normal game mode.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, the normal game mode in which the game is played in a normal mode (eg, left-handed) is not only the first normal game mode (eg, normal mode), but also the first normal game mode. Also includes a second normal game mode (eg, high probability mode A) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even when the game is played in the normal game mode in which the game is played in the normal mode, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in the "first variable winning device that can be opened when a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game as the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game", "advantageous to the player results" and "expectation value for deriving a favorable result for the player is higher when the second special symbol game is performed than when the first special symbol game is performed" The "results advantageous to the player" in (1) may be the same result (for example, both the former and the latter are big hits, the former and the latter are both hits, or the results are different). good too. When the results are different, for example, the former is a big hit and the latter is a prize-opening hit, the former is a big hit and the latter is a variable hit, and the former is a prize-opening hit and the latter is a time saving hit.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived in at least one of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game performed during the first normal game mode, the second It is characterized in that it is configured to shift to a normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if it is in the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode), when the specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived, it shifts to the second normal game mode . Therefore, even if it is the first normal game mode, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the first special symbol game is performed in the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode), the probability that the specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived is a result advantageous to the player (for example, It is preferable that the probability of deriving a big hit or a prize released is higher than the probability. By doing so, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest in the first normal game mode.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Said 1st normal game mode (for example, normal mode) and said 2nd normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A) are the probability that a result advantageous to the player is derived in said 1st special symbol game and said It is characterized in that all the probabilities of deriving an advantageous result for the player in the second special symbol game are the same.

According to the gaming machine (3) above, the probability that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first special symbol game and the probability that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the second special symbol game are the first It is the same in the normal game mode (eg, normal mode) and the second normal game mode (eg, high accuracy mode A). In this way, although the probability that a result advantageous to the player is derived is the same in the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode, the second normal game mode is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game mode. It becomes possible to realize 2 normal game modes, and it becomes possible to provide an unprecedented new gaming machine.

Note that the "probability that a result advantageous to the player is derived" includes the probability of 0. In addition, the probability of 0 corresponds not only to the case where the lottery is performed with the derivation probability of the result advantageous to the player being 0, but also to the case where the lottery related to the derivation of the result advantageous to the player is not conducted. For example, even if a lottery is conducted in which the lottery result A is regarded as an advantageous result for the player and only the lottery result B and the lottery result C are included in the lottery result (that is, the lottery result A is not included in the lottery result), The probability that result A is derived is zero.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the second normal game mode (e.g., high probability mode A), the predetermined result (e.g., normal electric long open per) is expected to be derived as compared with the first normal game mode (e.g., normal mode) Characterized by high value.

According to the gaming machine (4) above, in the second normal game mode (for example, high-precision mode A), compared with the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode), a predetermined result (for example, general electric long The second special symbol game is likely to be executed because the expected value for deriving the opening hit is high. Also, when the second special symbol game is executed, the expected value of the result that is advantageous to the player is higher than when the first special symbol game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the second normal game mode.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When a predetermined end condition is established in the second normal game mode (eg, high probability mode A), it is possible to shift to the first normal game mode (eg, normal mode),
The predetermined termination condition is
A first condition related to the operation of the second variable winning device (for example, the normal electric accessory 2146) (for example, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is operated 12 times);
A second condition related to the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and/or the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, 20 times of variable display of the first special symbol and 1 time of variable display of the second special symbol) and at least including
When the first condition or the second condition is established in the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A), the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A) to the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode).

According to the gaming machine (5) above, when the first condition or the second condition is established in the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A), the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A) From to the first normal game mode. Here, the first condition is a condition related to the operation of the second variable winning device (for example, the normal electric accessory 2146). It corresponds to reaching a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times that the general electric short circuit is opened 12 times (that is, the number of winning times per general electric short circuit) or the like). In addition, the second condition is a condition related to the variable display count of the first special symbol and/or the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, the variable display count of the first special symbol and/or the variable of the second special symbol. It corresponds that the number of times of display has become a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol is 20 times, the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 time, etc.). In this way, in the second normal game mode, before shifting to the first normal game mode, in the normal symbol game predetermined results (for example, normal electric long open per) is derived whether or not It is possible to make it interesting, and to enhance interest.

In addition, in the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A), it is preferable that the first condition is more likely to be established than the second condition. Compared to the case where the second condition is more likely to be established than the first condition, it is possible to enhance the interest by increasing the possibility of deriving a predetermined result (for example, normal electric long open hit) in the normal symbol game. This is because A mode in which the first condition is more likely to be established than the second condition is, for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the normal symbol game per unit time is made larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the special symbol game per unit time. Or, make it easier for the game medium to pass through the normal symbol start area (eg, pass gates 2126, 5125A, 5125B) than the special symbol start area (eg, first start port 5120, second start port 2140), It can be realized by making the number of times the second variable winning device is activated as the first condition larger than the number of times the special symbol is variablely displayed as the second condition, or by combining them.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When a result advantageous to the player is derived, it is possible to shift to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the special game state includes a plurality of special game states (for example, 3R Jackpot, 10R jackpot) are included,
When a result advantageous to the player in the special symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (e.g., high probability mode A) (e.g., jackpot, accessory release hit) is derived, the first normal A transition to a special game state (for example, 10R jackpot) that is advantageous to the player is made compared with the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the special symbol game performed during the game mode (for example, normal mode). It is characterized by a high expected value.

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, the second normal game mode (e.g., high probability mode A) than the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived in the first normal game mode (e.g., normal mode) In the case where a result advantageous to the player is derived, the expected value of transition to a special game state (for example, 10R jackpot) advantageous to the player is high. In this way, although the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode are both performed in the normal mode, it is possible to give a sharpness to the game between the first normal game mode and the second normal game mode. It is possible to increase interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
When the predetermined result (for example, normal electric long open per) is derived in the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A), the second normal game mode ( For example, it is configured to shift to a specific mode (e.g., second challenge mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the high accuracy mode A) and different from the advantageous game mode (e.g., special mode). do.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, in the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A), a specific mode that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) (for example, It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not to shift to the second challenge mode high probability mode A). In particular, if the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode) is included, the game characteristics of shifting between a plurality of modes with different degrees of advantage for the player, such as the first normal game mode, the second normal game mode, and the specific mode. It can be realized, and it becomes possible to enhance interest.

In addition, in the specific mode (for example, the second challenge mode), for example, by increasing the frequency of execution of the second special symbol game compared to the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A), it is advantageous to the player. It becomes possible to

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Said second normal game mode (e.g., high probability mode A) when the predetermined result (e.g., normal electric long open per) is derived in the normal symbol game performed,
A chance to show that there is a high expectation that a special effect (e.g., right-handed instruction effect, zone effect) will be performed in connection with the transition to a specific mode (e.g., second challenge mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game mode. While the production) is being performed,
When the game medium does not pass through the second special symbol start area even though the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol start area is facilitated, the second special symbol game is performed in the specific mode. It is characterized in that it is configured to end the specific mode without being executed.

According to the gaming machine (8) above, a predetermined result (for example, normal electric long open per) was derived in the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) Although the passage of the game medium to the second special symbol start area is facilitated by the second special symbol game when the player is unable to pass the game medium to the second special symbol start area The specific mode ends without being executed. Therefore, in the second normal game mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and increase interest.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The normal game mode is
In addition to the first normal game mode (e.g., normal mode) and the second normal game mode (e.g., high accuracy mode A), the first normal game mode (e.g., normal mode) is more advantageous for the player Further includes a third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)),
When the condition for shifting to the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A) is satisfied (for example, when elected per C short time in normal mode), the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A ) and
Conditions different from the transition conditions to the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A), the third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false) ) is satisfied (for example, when the C time short hit is won in the remaining reservation mode, or when all the results of the special symbol game in the remaining reservation mode are lost and a predetermined effect condition is established) , the third normal game mode (for example, high-precision mode B (true), high-precision mode B (false)),
The third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)),
The expected value for deriving the predetermined result (for example, normal electric long open hit) is the same as the expected value for deriving the predetermined result in the second normal game mode (for example, high accuracy mode A). It is characterized by being configured so that there is a case.

According to the game machine of (9) above, the transition condition to the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A) and the third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (False)), but the expected value for deriving a predetermined result in the second normal game mode and the expected value for deriving a predetermined result in the third normal game mode are the same. Sometimes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the second normal game mode and the third normal game mode.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
After the end of the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode), it is possible to shift to a special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed in a game mode different from the advantageous game mode with
When the game medium passes through the second special symbol starting area, the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number, and the second special symbol game is executed using the second special symbol that has been reserved. is configured to
The third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)) is a mode that can be shifted when a specific transition condition is satisfied when the special mode ends and
Said specific transition conditions are:
A first transition condition that can be transitioned when the start information of the second special symbol that is withheld includes start information for deriving a specific result (for example, a C time reduction hit);
Although the starting information of the second special symbol that has been withheld does not include the starting information that leads to the specific result (for example, C per hour), if a specific condition is satisfied (for example, in the remaining reservation mode a second transition condition that can transition to (when all the results of the special symbol game are lost and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied),
The third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true)) that is shifted when the first transition condition is satisfied is the third normal game that is transitioned when the second transition condition is satisfied It is characterized by being more advantageous to the player than the mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (false)).

According to the gaming machine (10) above, both when the first transition condition is satisfied and when the second transition condition is satisfied, the third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)), but the third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (true)) that is shifted when the first transition condition is satisfied, transitions when the second transition condition is satisfied It is a mode more advantageous to the player than the third normal game mode (for example, high probability mode B (false)). In this way, even if any of the first transition condition and the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition destination is the same third normal game mode, but the third normal game mode shifted due to the establishment of the first transition condition By differentiating the degree of advantage for the player between the game mode and the third normal game mode that is shifted due to the establishment of the second transition condition, it is possible to enhance interest.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The predetermined termination condition is
Further includes a third condition related to the result of the normal symbol game performed during the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A),
In the second normal game mode (for example, high probability mode A), not only when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, but also when the third condition is satisfied, the second normal game mode (For example, high probability mode A) to the first normal game mode (for example, normal mode) is configured to be characterized.

According to the gaming machine (11) above, even when the third condition is satisfied during the second normal game mode (eg, high probability mode A), from the second normal game mode (eg, high probability mode A) Shift to the first normal game mode. Here, the third condition is a condition relating to the result of the normal symbol game, and for example, it corresponds to that a predetermined result (for example, normal electric long open hit) is derived a predetermined number of times (for example, once). In this way, when any one of a plurality of conditions such as the first condition, the second condition and the third condition is satisfied, the second normal game mode is shifted to the first normal game mode, whereby the first normal game is performed. It is possible to add more interest to the game property such as deriving a predetermined result (for example, normal electric long open hit) in the normal symbol game before shifting to the mode, and to enhance the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

[15-12. Appendix 12]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are variably displayed when a predetermined condition is established, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As a game machine of this kind, in the jackpot game state, the small win game state, and the time saving state, the right-handed instruction is notified, and in the normal game state, the left-handed instruction is notified. In particular, see paragraph 0338).

The gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-104167 increases interest in right-handed game states such as a big win game, a small win game state, and a time-saving state, but when the right-handed game ends, There is a possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

In this regard, the game machine of Supplementary Note 12 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A game medium fired in a normal mode (e.g., left-handed shot) toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the first special symbol lottery. The first special symbol start area (for example, the first start port 5120) that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game from which the
A game medium fired in a specific mode (e.g., right-hand shot) toward the game area can pass through, and when the game medium passes through, a variable display of a second special symbol is performed, resulting in a second special symbol lottery. A second special symbol start area (for example, a second start port 2140) that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game from which the
When the game medium fired toward the game area passes, the normal symbol is variablely displayed and the result of the normal symbol lottery is derived. , 5125A, 5125B) and
A first variable winning device (for example, , big prize mouth 2131, V prize mouth 2155) and
To facilitate the passage of game media to the second special symbol starting area (for example, a second starting port 2140) when a predetermined result (for example, a normal long open hit) is derived in the normal symbol game. A second variable winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 2146) capable of
A plurality of game modes with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false), special mode, challenge mode, remaining pending mode) A gaming machine capable of executing a game in either mode,
When the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed, the expected value that results in an advantageous result for the player is higher (for example, when the first special symbol game is executed When the second special symbol game is executed than when the second special symbol game is executed, the expected value of winning per opening of the role is higher),
The plurality of game modes are
The normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false) in which the first special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the normal mode) )When,
An advantageous game mode (for example, a special mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing the game in the specific mode,
The second special symbol game is mainly performed, and includes a special mode (for example, a remaining hold mode) different from the advantageous game mode,
When a predetermined condition is established in the advantageous game mode, the advantageous game mode can be shifted to the special mode (for example, the remaining reservation mode).

According to the gaming machine (1) above, the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is a mode in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed by playing a game in a specific mode. When a predetermined condition is established in such an advantageous game mode, although the advantageous game mode is terminated, the second special symbol is mainly performed, and the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode) different from the advantageous game mode is entered. Therefore, even if the advantageous game mode in which the game is played in a specific mode (for example, right-handed) is completed, the interest is reduced by shifting to the special mode instead of immediately shifting to the normal game mode (for example, normal mode). can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) is characterized in that the game is played over a longer period than the special mode (for example, remaining hold mode).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to give superiority to the advantageous game mode (eg, special mode) over the special mode (eg, remaining hold mode), and even if the advantageous game mode ends The special mode can have a function to prevent the immediate transition to the normal game mode (for example, the normal mode), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the second special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) in the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode), the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high probability mode B (true)) It is characterized by being configured to be portable.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the second special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 4 times) in the special mode (eg, remaining reservation mode). Does not shift to the normal game mode (eg, normal mode). . Also, when the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) ends, it shifts to the special mode, and when the special mode ends, it shifts to the normal game mode (for example, normal mode) By shifting the game mode step by step , it is possible to make the game interesting.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the game medium passes through the second special symbol starting area (for example, the second starting port 2140), the second special symbol starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces), and the reserved said It is possible to execute the second special symbol game using the starting information of the second special symbol,
When a specific condition is established in the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) (for example, when the last second special symbol game in the advantageous game mode is completed, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved or , when the prize is not won even though the prize is won by opening the accessory, etc.), it is configured to be able to shift to the normal game mode (for example, normal mode) without shifting to the special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode). It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, after the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) ends, it does not necessarily shift to the special mode (for example, remaining hold mode), but the last second in the advantageous game mode Only when the starting information of the second special symbol is suspended when the special symbol game is finished, the special mode (for example, the remaining suspended mode) is entered. Therefore, the player is required to pass the game medium through the second special symbol start area (for example, the second start port 2140) just before the end of the advantageous game mode, giving tension to the advantageous game mode. It is possible to increase interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The plurality of game modes are
In the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)) predetermined transition conditions (for example, first special symbol game or second special symbol game result is a specific result (e.g., C time saving hit)) is established, and a specific mode (e.g., challenge mode) in which the second special symbol game can be mainly performed,
The special mode is
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is a specific result (for example, C time short hit), it does not shift, and if it is a special result (for example, 3R big hit), it is possible to shift. while
The specific mode is
The result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is not only the special result (for example, 3R big hit), but also the specific result (for example, C short time hit). It is characterized by being composed of

According to the gaming machine (5) above, in the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false)), the first special symbol game or the second Regardless of whether the result of the 2 special symbol game is a special result (eg, 3R jackpot) or a specific result (eg, C short time win), it can shift to a specific mode (eg, challenge mode). Therefore, in the normal game mode, even if the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is not a special result, if it is a specific result, it can be shifted to a specific mode, and the interest in the normal game mode can be changed. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The special result includes a first special result (for example, a big win) and an opening time of the first variable winning device (for example, a big winning opening, a V winning device) rather than the first special result (for example, a big win). A relatively short second special result (for example, per character opening) is included,
The expected value (eg, jackpot probability) from which the first special result (eg, jackpot) is derived is the normal game mode (eg, normal mode, high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)) and the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) are the same,
The expected value from which the second special result (for example, opening the role) is derived is the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high accuracy mode A, high accuracy mode B (true), high accuracy mode B (false )) is larger than the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode).

According to the gaming machine (6) above, the expected value (eg, jackpot probability) from which the first special result (eg, jackpot) is derived is normal game mode (eg, normal mode, high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)) and the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) are the same, but the expected value for deriving the second special result (for example, opening the role) is usually Since the advantageous game mode is higher than the game mode, it is possible to give the advantageous game mode an advantage over the normal game mode without arousing the gambling spirit. It should be noted that ``the expected value for deriving the second special result (for example, the release of the accessory) is higher in the advantageous game mode than in the normal game mode'' means, for example, that the probability of deriving the second special result is Although it is the same in the normal game mode and the advantageous game mode, the probability that the second special result is derived is higher when the second special symbol game is executed than when the first special symbol game is executed. In addition, the advantageous game mode includes a mode in which the second special symbol game is more likely to be executed than the normal game mode. However, it is not limited to this, and the probability that the second special result is derived may be higher in the advantageous game mode than in the normal game mode.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
In the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, there is a specific result (for example, C short hit) that is more advantageous to the player than losing but more disadvantageous than the special result (for example, big hit). is included and
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the advantageous game mode (eg, special mode) is the specified result (eg, C time saving hit), other from the advantageous game mode mode (e.g., high probability mode B (true)), while
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, remaining hold mode) is the specific result (for example, C time saving per), other from the special mode It is characterized by being configured to be able to shift to at least one of the modes (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)).

According to the gaming machine (7) above, the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the advantageous game mode (e.g., special mode) was a specific result (e.g., C short hit) Even so, since the advantageous game mode in which the second special symbol game is mainly performed continues without shifting to another mode, interest can be maintained. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, the remaining reservation mode) is a specific result, by shifting from the special mode to another mode, the special mode It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest that may occur due to the end of the.

It should be noted that "when the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode is the specified result, it is possible to shift from the special mode to another mode" means the first special If the result of the symbol game or the second special symbol game is a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit), immediately even if the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode) is in the middle (that is, the start of the second special symbol Even if there is a remaining reservation of information, it may be shifted to another mode (for example, high probability mode B (true)) without executing the second special symbol game, or a special mode (for example, remaining reservation mode ) is executed to the end (that is, if there is a remaining reservation of the start information of the second special symbol, after all the second special symbol games for this remaining reservation are completed), it may be shifted to another mode.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), (6), and (7) above,
The plurality of game modes are
In the normal game mode (for example, normal mode, high probability mode A, high probability mode B (true), high probability mode B (false)) predetermined transition conditions (for example, first special symbol game or second special symbol game The result is a specific result (for example, C time saving per)) is established (for example, C time saving per winning) can be shifted, and the second special symbol game can be mainly performed in a specific mode ( For example, challenge mode), and
The specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is
A first specific mode (for example, a first challenge mode) that can be shifted to when a first condition is satisfied;
A second specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) that can be shifted when the second condition is satisfied,
The second specific mode is
It is characterized in that there is a case where the second special symbol game is terminated without being performed even though the second condition has been established and the game has shifted.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is
A first specific mode (for example, a first challenge mode) that can be shifted to when a first condition is satisfied;
A second specific mode (for example, a second challenge mode) that can be shifted when the second condition is satisfied,
The second specific mode is
It is characterized in that there is a case where the second special symbol game is terminated without being performed even though the second condition has been established and the game has shifted.

According to the gaming machine (8) and (9) above, when the first condition is established, the mode is shifted to the first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode), and when the second condition is established, the second specific mode is entered. mode (eg, second challenge mode). Although the second special symbol game is always performed when shifting to the first specific mode, the second special symbol game may end without performing the second special symbol game when shifting to the second specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games and enhance the interest.

It should be noted that the first condition, for example, corresponds to the end of the special game state (for example, 3R jackpot game state). Further, the second condition corresponds to, for example, that a predetermined result (for example, normal electric long open hit) is derived in the normal symbol game.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (8) or (9) above,
While the first specific mode (for example, the first challenge mode) can be continued until the second special symbol game is executed at least once,
Said 2nd specific mode (for example, 2nd challenge mode) is comprised so that said 2nd special design game may be complete|finished, without being performed. It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

According to the gaming machine of (10) above, the second special symbol game is always executed once in the first specific mode, whereas the second specific mode ends without the second special symbol game being executed. By setting the superiority or inferiority between the first specific mode and the second specific mode in this way, it is possible to increase interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the specific mode (for example, challenge mode) is a specific result (for example, C short time hit), from the specific mode to the first mode (for example , while being able to shift to the high-accuracy mode A),
If the result of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game performed in the special mode (for example, the remaining hold mode) is the specific result (for example, C per hour), from the special mode, the game Although the degree of advantage for players is common to the first mode (for example, the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the role item, and the probability of winning the long-running electric power are all common to the high-accuracy mode A), but it is different from the first mode. It is characterized by being able to shift to a second mode (eg, high accuracy mode B (true)) in which control (eg, performance control) is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the first mode (for example, high accuracy mode A) and the second mode (for example, high accuracy mode B (true)) control the advantageous degree of the advantageous person in common By differentiating (for example, performance control), it is possible to increase variations of the game without increasing the control load, and to increase interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
In the specific mode (for example, challenge mode),
A specific effect (for example, zone effect) related to the second special symbol game can be executed until the second special symbol game is performed for a predetermined specified number of times (for example, 5 times),
The specific production is
While it can be executed until the second special symbol game is performed the specified number of times (for example, 5 times),
When the start information of the second special symbol is suspended even though the second special symbol game has been performed the specified number of times (for example, 5 times), the specific effect is not executed. characterized by

According to the gaming machine (12) above, in a specific mode (eg, challenge mode), a common specific effect is executed until the second special symbol game is performed a specified number of times (eg, 5 times). When the 2 special symbol game is performed more than a specified number of times (for example, 5 times), the specific effect is not executed. In this case, it is preferable to separately perform a single performance lottery and execute a performance based on the result of this single performance lottery.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above,
When the number of executions of the first special symbol game or/and the number of executions of the second special symbol game reaches a specific number of times (for example, 1000 times) without shifting to the special game state (for example, reaches the ceiling counter case), it is characterized by being able to shift to a super advantageous game mode (for example, bliss mode) that can be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode).

According to the gaming machine (13) above, even if it does not shift to the special game state for a long period of time, the number of executions of the first special symbol game and/or the number of executions of the second special symbol game is a specific number. When it reaches (for example, 1000 times), it can shift to a super-advantageous game mode (for example, bliss mode).

It should be noted that "the number of executions of the first special symbol game and / and the number of executions of the second special symbol game becomes a specific number of times" means that the number of times of execution of the first special symbol becomes a specific number of times (for example, 1000 times), Either the number of executions of the second special symbol becomes a specific number of times, or the sum of the number of executions of the first special symbol and the number of executions of the second special symbol becomes a specific number of times.

In addition, the "super advantageous game mode that can be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game mode" means that the super advantageous game mode (e.g., bliss mode) is more advantageous than the advantageous game mode (e.g., special mode) in all aspects. It is not limited to being advantageous to the player, but from one aspect, the advantageous game mode is more advantageous to the player than the super advantageous game mode (for example, it does not blow in the advantageous game mode, but the super advantageous game mode may cause a puncture, etc.).

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
The advantageous game mode (for example, special mode)
When any one of a plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the advantageous game mode can be shifted to another mode (for example, remaining hold mode),
The plurality of termination conditions are
A first end condition (for example, 12 times of variable display times of the second special symbol) under the condition that the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is executed a first predetermined number of times,
A second termination condition (for example, 10000 times of operation of the normal electric accessory 2146) is included as a condition that the second variable winning device has operated a second predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine (14) above, the first end condition (for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol is 12 times) and the second end condition (for example, the number of times the normal electric accessory 2146 is operated is 10000 times). When one of these is established, the advantageous game mode (for example, special mode) ends. By providing a plurality of termination conditions for the advantageous game mode in this way, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

According to the game machine of Supplementary Note 12, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

[15-13. Appendix 13]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are variably displayed when a predetermined condition is established, and a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a special result is derived.

As a game machine of this type, for example, JP-A-2016-67682 discloses a game machine in which, after a special game is executed, an effect is performed in one of a plurality of effect modes on a liquid crystal display.

However, there is room for further improvement in order to suppress the decline in game interest in a gaming machine in which an effect is performed in one of a plurality of effect modes after a special game is executed.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

In this regard, the game machine of Supplementary Note 13 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
variable display execution means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that executes the process of S2013) that can variably display identification information in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that executes processing related to the A1 time saving flag and B time saving flag) that can be controlled in one of a plurality of game states;
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is a special result (for example, a prize-opening hit, a big win), a special game state that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a prize-opening game state, a jackpot game state). Control means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that executes the processes of S2017 and S2019);
Production mode control means (for example, sub CPU 2301) that can be controlled in one of a plurality of production modes,
with
The identification information includes first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) different from the first identification information,
The game state control means is
A first game state (for example, normal game state) in which the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is mainly variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is mainly variably displayed. A second game state (for example, A1 time reduction game state, A2 time reduction game state and A3 time reduction game state A time reduction game state including A3 time reduction game state).
The special results include a first special result (for example, winning a prize) and a second special result (for example, a jackpot) in which the expected value of the game medium to be awarded is relatively higher than that of the first special result. includes
The special game state control means is
When the first special result is derived, it is controlled to the first special game state (for example, the role product open per game state), and when the second special result is derived, the second special game state (for example, big hit game state) can be controlled,
The production mode control means is
A first effect mode (for example, normal mode), a second effect mode (for example, special mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first effect mode, and any of the first effect mode and the second effect mode It is characterized in that it can be controlled to one of a plurality of performance modes including a third performance mode (for example, a super special mode) that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, not only the first production mode (for example, normal mode) and the second production mode (for example, special mode) more advantageous to the player than the first production mode, but also the first production Since it is possible to control the third performance mode (for example, a super special mode) that is more advantageous to the player than either the mode or the second performance mode, the variation of the performance mode increases, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. Become.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production mode control means (for example, sub CPU2301),
When it is controlled to the first game state (eg, normal game state) by the game state control means, while it is possible to control to the first effect mode (eg, normal mode),
When the game state control means is controlled to the second game state (for example, A short game state), the second production mode (for example, special mode) and the third production mode (for example, super special mode) It is characterized by being controllable to one of a plurality of production modes including

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state), the second effect mode (for example, special mode) and the third effect mode (for example, , super special mode), it is possible to increase interest in the second game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The expected value (e.g., probability of winning a role) for deriving the first special result (e.g., winning a role) is higher than when the first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) is variably displayed. is higher when the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the case where the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed rather than the case where the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed , the expected value (for example, probability of winning a prize) for deriving the first special result (for example, winning a prize) is higher. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance interest in the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state) in which the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is mainly variably displayed.

It should be noted that "the expected value (for example, probability of winning a role item) for deriving the first special result (for example, winning a role item) is obtained by variably displaying the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). "It is higher when the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed than when the first identification information is variably displayed." When the first identification information is variably displayed, the first special result is derived. including the case where the probability of "The probability of deriving the first special result is 0" means that the lottery for deriving the first special result is performed but the probability is 0, and the lottery itself for deriving the first special result is not performed. Including both cases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The production mode control means is
When the variable display of the identification information is performed a first specified number of times (eg, 26 times) in the second rendering mode (eg, special mode), the second rendering mode is changed to the first rendering mode (eg, normal mode). is controllable to
When the variable display of the identification information is performed a second prescribed number of times (for example, 296 times), which is larger than the first prescribed number of times in the third production mode (for example, super special mode), the third production mode is changed to the third production mode. It is characterized by being controllable in one production mode.

According to the gaming machine (4) above, the third effect mode (e.g., super special mode) is controlled to the first effect mode (e.g., normal mode) rather than the second effect mode (e.g., special mode) Since it is possible to variably display the identification information more frequently until the identification information is displayed, it is possible to widen the range of game characteristics and increase interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
A game medium shot toward the game area is acceptable, and at least one of the first special result (eg, winning a prize) or the second special result (eg, a big win) is derived. Based on this, a displacement member (for example, V attacker 2152, special electric shutter 2134) that can be displaced from a state in which it is impossible or difficult to accept the game medium to a state in which it is possible or easy to accept the game medium is provided. further prepared,
The special game state control means is
When the first special result (e.g., winning prize for opening the accessory) is derived and the game medium passes through the specific area (e.g., V winning port 2155) of the displacement member, the first special game state (e.g., , Accessory release winning game state) can be controlled to the second special game state (for example, jackpot game state).

According to the gaming machine of (5) above, when the first special result (for example, winning a prize) is derived and the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, the V winning port 2155) of the displacement member, the first After the end of the special game state (for example, accessory open per game state), it can be controlled to the second special game state (for example, jackpot game state). That is, not only when the second special result (for example, big win) is derived, but also when the first special result is derived, the second special game state can be controlled, so it is possible to enhance the interest. Become.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (5) above,
The first special result (for example, winning prize) includes a predetermined first special result (for example, winning prize for 3R) and a specific first special result different from the predetermined first special result. Results (for example, per 10R corresponding role release) and
The special game state control means is
When the predetermined first special result (e.g., 3R-compatible accessory release win) is derived, control is performed to a predetermined first special game state (e.g., 3R-compatible accessory release win game state), and the specified When the first special result (e.g., 10R-compatible accessory release hit) is derived, it is possible to control to a specific first special game state (e.g., 10R-compatible accessory open win game state). and

According to the gaming machine (6) above, a predetermined first special game state (for example, a 3R-compatible accessory-open winning game state) or a specific first special game state (for example, a 10R-compatible accessory-open winning game state), it is possible to expand the range of game characteristics and increase interest.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
When the game state control means is controlled to the second game state (for example, A short game state), and is controlled to the third production mode (for example, super special mode) by the production mode control means When the predetermined first special result (for example, 3R-compatible accessory release win) is derived, the predetermined first special game state (for example, 3R-compatible accessory release win game state) is controlled. The second game state (for example, the A time-saving game state) is terminated along with the second game state.

According to the gaming machine of (7) above, the third effect mode (e.g., super special mode), when it is controlled to a predetermined first special game state (for example, 3R-compatible accessory release per game state), the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state) ends. , it is possible to make the player feel tense in the third performance mode, and to enhance the interest.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
When the game state control means is controlled to the second game state (for example, A short game state), and is controlled to the third production mode (for example, super special mode) by the production mode control means When the specific first special result (eg, 10R-compatible accessory-open winning) is derived, when the specific first special game state (eg, 10R-compatible accessory-open-per-game state) is controlled. Even if the second game state (for example, A time-saving game state) is configured to be able to continue,
After the game medium has passed through at least the specific area (eg, V winning opening) in the specific first special game state (eg, 10R-compatible accessory open per game state), the second game state (eg, A time-saving game state) is configured to end.

The gaming machine of (8) above is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, A short gaming state), and when controlled to the third production mode (for example, super special mode), a specific first special Even if it is controlled to a game state (for example, a game state for opening an accessory corresponding to 10R), the second game state (for example, A short game state) can be continued, and at least a specific area (for example, V winning opening) The second game state (for example, A time-saving game state) continues until the game medium passes. Therefore, for example, the game state after the end of the specific first special game state is determined based on the game state when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, the V winning hole). It is possible to make the determination of the game state after the end of the specific first special game state advantageous to the player, and to increase the interest.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above,
It is controlled by the game state control means to the second game state (for example, A short game state), and when it is controlled to the second production mode (for example, special mode) by the production mode control means When a predetermined first special result (for example, a winning prize for 3Rs) or a specific first special result (for example, a winning prize for 10Rs) is derived, the predetermined first special game state. (For example, the second game state (for example, a game state corresponding to 3R) or the specific first special game state (for example, a game state for 10R). A time-saving game state) is configured to end.

According to the gaming machine of (9) above, when it is controlled to the second game state (for example, the A time-saving game state) and is controlled to the second effect mode (for example, the special mode), a predetermined first A second game state (for example, a second game state (for example, , A time-saving game state) is ended.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (9) above,
When the first special result (for example, per item release) is derived while being controlled to the second production mode (for example, special mode) by the production mode control means, the first special game state ( For example, after the end of the game state per game release), while configured to be controlled to the second effect mode (for example, special mode),
When the second special result (for example, big hit) is derived while being controlled to the second production mode (for example, special mode) by the production mode control means, the second special game state (for example, big hit) After the end of the game state), it is configured to be controllable to the third effect mode (for example, super special mode).

In the gaming machine of (10) above, when the first special result (for example, winning a role) is derived in the second effect mode (for example, a special mode), the first special game state (for example, winning a role) After the end of the game state), while being controlled again to the second production mode (for example, special mode), when the second special result (for example, big hit) is derived in the second production mode (for example, special mode), After the end of the second special game state (for example, jackpot game state), the game can be controlled to the third performance mode (for example, super special mode). Therefore, in the second effect mode, the game state after the end of the first special game state or the second special game state can change depending on whether the first special result is derived or the second special result is derived. . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the second production mode.

It should be noted that "after the first special game state (for example, the game state per release of the accessory) is controlled to the second effect mode (for example, the special mode)" means that after the first special game state , is not limited to being immediately controlled to the second presentation mode. For example, when a game medium passes through a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) in the first special game state, it is controlled to the second effect mode after the second special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) ends. include. In addition, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the first special game state, the second effect mode may be controlled after the first special game state is finished.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above,
The second special result (for example, jackpot) includes a predetermined second special result (for example, 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5")) and a specific second special result different from the predetermined second special result. Results (for example, 10R jackpot (selected symbol command "z4")) and
When the second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) is variably displayed and the second special result (e.g., jackpot) is derived, the specific second special result (e.g., 10R jackpot (selection The predetermined second special result (for example, 3R jackpot (selected symbol command "z5")) has a higher expected value than symbol command "z4")).

In the gaming machine of (11) above, when the second identification information (for example, second special symbol) is variably displayed and the second special result (for example, big hit) is derived, a specific second special result ( For example, the expected value derived from a predetermined second special result (for example, a 3R jackpot (selected pattern command "z5")) is higher than that of a 10R jackpot (selected pattern command "z4")). is.

(12) The game machine according to the present invention is
Variable display capable of variably displaying first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) or second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) different from the first identification information according to establishment of a predetermined starting condition Execution means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that executes the processing of S2013);
A normal game state (e.g., variation pattern selection state 1) in which the first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) is mainly variably displayed and a specific game state (e.g., variation) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Game state control means (for example, main CPU 2201) that can be controlled to any of a plurality of game states (for example, variation pattern selection state 1, variation pattern selection state 2, variation pattern selection state 3) including pattern selection state 2) When,
If the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a special result (for example, a winning prize, a jackpot), a special game state (for example, a winning prize game state, a jackpot game state) ) controllable special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 2201 that executes the processing of S2017 and S2019),
Production mode control means (for example, sub CPU 2301) capable of controlling one of a plurality of production modes (for example, state 1 production mode, state 2 production mode, state 3 production mode, jackpot production mode),
If the game medium fired toward the game area can be accepted, and the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a special result (for example, a prize release hit, a big hit), a displacement member (for example, V attacker 2152, special electric shutter 2134) that can be displaced from a state in which the game medium cannot be received or is difficult to receive to a state in which the game medium can be received or easily received;
with
The special results include a first special result (for example, winning a prize) and a second special result (for example, a jackpot) in which the expected value of the game medium to be awarded is relatively higher than the first special result. includes
The special game state control means is
When the first special result is derived, it is controlled to the first special game state (for example, the role product open per game state), and when the second special result is derived, the second special game state (for example, big hit game state) is controllable,
Even when the first special result (for example, the winning prize for opening the accessory) is derived and the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening 2155) of the displacement member, the first special game state (for example, , Accessory release per game state), the second special game state (for example, jackpot game state) can be controlled,
The variable display execution means is
A first table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern table referred to in variation pattern selection state 1) and a second table that is more advantageous to the player than the first table (eg, a special symbol referred to in variation pattern selection state 2) The first identification information or the second identification information can be variably displayed with a variable display pattern determined by referring to one of a plurality of tables including a symbol variation pattern table),
In the normal game state (for example, variation pattern selection state 1), it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information with reference to the first table, and the specific game state (for example, variation pattern selection state 2) can execute variable display of the second identification information by referring to the second table,
The game state control means is
The second identification information is variably displayed in the specific game state (for example, the variation pattern selection state 2), and the first special result (for example, the prize is released) or the second special result (for example, the big hit) is derived. When it is done, it is more advantageous to the player than either of the normal game state and the specific game state, and a predetermined specific game state (for example, the second special symbol) is mainly variably displayed. For example, it is characterized by being controllable to the variation pattern selection state 3).

According to the gaming machine of (12) above, in the normal game state (eg, variation pattern selection state 1), the first identification information is variably displayed with reference to the first table, and in the specific game state (eg, variation pattern In the selection state 2), the second identification information is variably displayed with reference to the second table, which is more advantageous to the player. Then, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific game state (for example, the variation pattern selection state 2), and the first special result (for example, the prize release) or the second special result (for example, the jackpot) is derived. In that case, it can be controlled to a predetermined specific game state (for example, variation pattern selection state 3) that is more advantageous to the player than either the normal game state or the specific game state. In this way, it is possible to control not only the normal game state and the specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, but also the predetermined specific game state more advantageous to the player than either the normal game state or the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games and suppress the decline in interest.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 13, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

[15-14. Appendix 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are variably displayed when a predetermined condition is established, and when the result of the variable display is "big win", the game machine is controlled to a big win game state.

As this type of game machine, the variable display result is "big hit", the jackpot type is "suddenly certain", based on the jackpot type, the probability variable state (high probability low base state) is controlled, and the jackpot type is "suddenly short time" jackpot type A game machine that is in a normal state (low probability low base state) based on is disclosed in JP 2013-094511 A (see paragraph [0284] in particular).

According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation by providing new game features. It is desired to provide a game machine capable of

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of increasing interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 14 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164) for performing variable display of symbols,
Symbol control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of performing a symbol game in which a predetermined lottery result is derived by performing variable display of symbols on the display means;
game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of controlling the game state;
Effect display means (for example, display device 7) for performing a predetermined display effect;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing a display effect showing the predetermined lottery result on the effect display means;
with
The symbol control means provides a predetermined result (for example, losing), a specific result that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined result (for example, C win), and a special result that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined result (for example, , jackpot) can be derived from any of the lottery results,
The game state control means is
When the specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived to the display means, a specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that can be controlled to a specific game state (for example, C time saving game state);
Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of controlling a special game state (for example, big win game state) when the special result is derived on the display means;
has
In the specific game state (for example, C short game state), there are a plurality of types of specific game states (for example, C1 short game state, C2 short game state, C3 short game state, C4 short game state, C5 short game state). is included and
The specific game state control means is
It is characterized by being controllable to any specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game states.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, when a specific result (for example, C time saving hit) is derived, it is possible to control to a specific game state (for example, C time saving game state), and to the specific game state contains a plurality of types of specific game states, and can be controlled to any one of the plurality of types of specific game states. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games, to provide unprecedented new game properties, and to increase interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
Even if the specific result (for example, C time saving per) is derived to the display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164) by the control of the symbol control unit, the predetermined It is characterized in that it is possible to display a display effect that makes it difficult or impossible to grasp that the lottery result is the specific result.

In the gaming machine described in (2) above, even if a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived to the display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164), a lottery It is made difficult to grasp that the result is the specific result from the display effect. By doing so, when the specific result (for example, C time saving per) is derived, or not controlled to the specific game state (for example, C time saving game state), when it is not controlled to the specific game state immediately Even so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The specific result includes a first specific result (for example, C1 time saving per) and a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, C2 time saving per),
The plurality of types of specific game state includes a first specific game state (for example, C1 time saving game state) and a second specific game state different from the first specific game state (for example, C2 time saving game state). and
The specific game state control means is
When the first specific result (for example, C1 time saving per) is derived, the first specific game state (for example, C1 time saving game state) can be controlled,
When the second specific result (for example, C2 reduced working hours per hit) is derived, it is characterized in that it can be controlled to the second specific game state (for example, C2 reduced working hours gaming state).

The gaming machine described in (3) above is controllable to the first specific game state (for example, the C1 time saving game state) when the first specific result (for example, the C1 time saving game) is derived, and the second specific When the result (for example, C2 time reduction hit) is derived, it is possible to control to the second specific game state (for example, C2 time reduction game state). By doing so, it becomes possible to widen the range of game characteristics, and it becomes possible to enhance interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance control means derives the specified result (for example, C time short hit) to the display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164) under the control of the symbol control unit. It is possible to perform a specific result suggestive effect (for example, C time saving transition suggestive effect) that suggests that there is a possibility,
The specific result suggesting effect includes a first specific result suggesting effect (for example, a first C time reduction suggesting effect) that can be performed in the normal game state, and a second specific effect that can be performed in the specific game state. A result suggestive effect (for example, a second C time reduction suggestive effect) is included.

The gaming machine described in (4) above provides a first specific result suggesting effect (e.g., first C A second specific result suggestive effect (for example, the second It clarifies that it is possible to perform the C time-saving transition suggestion production). By performing such a specific result suggesting effect, it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, even if the specific result (for example, the C time saving hit) is derived, if it is difficult to grasp that the predetermined lottery result is the specific result or the display effect is difficult to grasp, the specific result (for example , C per hour) may be derived.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
The recording performance control means is
When the specified result (for example, C win) is derived to the display means in the normal game state, and when the specified result is derived to the display means in the specified game state It is possible to perform the first specific result suggesting effect (for example, the first C time shortening transition effect) at a higher rate than the second specific result suggesting effect (for example, the second C time shortening transition suggesting effect). It is characterized by

In the gaming machine described in (5) above, when a specific result (for example, C time reduction hit) is derived in the normal game state, the first specific result suggestion production (for example, the first C time reduction transition suggestion production) can be performed, and when a specific result is derived in a specific game state (for example, C time saving game state), a second specific result suggestion effect (for example, second C time saving transition suggestion effect) is performed However, it clarifies that the first specific result suggesting effect is performed at a higher rate than the second specific result suggesting effect. That is, in the normal game state, the specific result suggesting effect is performed at a higher rate than in the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (4) or (5) above,
The production control means is
Controlled to any one specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game state, and when the specific result (for example, C5 short time hit) is derived in a manner that does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the specific result is In the symbol game to be derived, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the specified result will be derived.

The gaming machine described in (6) above is a predetermined condition in any one specific game state (for example, C1 time reduction game state, C2 time reduction game state, C3 time reduction game state, C4 time reduction game state, C5 time reduction game state) When a specific result (for example, C5 time reduction hit) is derived in a manner that does not satisfy, the second specific result suggestion production (for example, the second C time reduction transition suggestion production) is not performed. .

It should be noted that the ``effect that makes it difficult or impossible to grasp that the first specific result may be derived'' is, for example, the same or substantially the same effect as the effect in which a predetermined result (for example, a failure) is derived. etc. are equivalent.

In addition, "a mode that does not satisfy a predetermined condition" is, for example, a specific result (for example, C5 short time per) is derived, but it is not controlled to a specific game state based on this specific result (for example , The case where the number of overlapping time reductions based on the C5 time reduction hit is less than the remaining time reduction number of times in one time reduction game state) corresponds. Specifically, control based on a specific result (for example, C5 time saving per) than the remaining period controlled to one specific game state (for example, one time saving game state remaining time saving number of times) (for example, C5 time saving) When the control period (for example, the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving) is shorter, etc. correspond. If the control period based on the specific result is shorter than the remaining period of control to one specific game state, it is not controlled to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of one specific game state. , in such a case, the second specific result suggesting effect is not performed or the ratio of performing it is relatively low.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (6) above,
The production control means is
When the specified result (for example, the C5 short time hit) is derived in a mode that satisfies a predetermined condition and is controlled to any one specified game state among the plurality of types of specified game states, the specified result is derived. In the symbol game to be played, the second specific result suggestive effect (for example, the second C time reduction shift suggestive effect) can be performed.

The gaming machine described in (7) above is a predetermined condition in any one specific game state (for example, C1 time reduction game state, C2 time reduction game state, C3 time reduction game state, C4 time reduction game state, C5 time reduction game state) When a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived in a manner satisfying, a second specific result suggesting effect (for example, a second C time saving transition suggesting effect) is performed.

It should be noted that "a mode that satisfies a predetermined condition" means, for example, when a specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived, a case where it can be controlled to a specific game state based on this specific result (for example, one time saving). If the number of overlapped time saving times based on the C5 time saving hit is larger than the remaining time saving times in the game state) corresponds. Specifically, control based on a specific result (for example, C5 time saving per) than the remaining period controlled to one specific game state (for example, one time saving game state remaining time saving number of times) (for example, C5 time saving) When the control period (for example, the number of times of overlapping time saving of C5 time saving) is longer, etc. correspond. If the control period based on the specific result is shorter than the remaining period of control to the one specific game state, the new specific game state is not controlled based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of the one specific game state. Therefore, after the end of one specific game state, when it is controlled to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result, the second specific result suggestion effect (for example, the second C time saving transition suggestion effect (C5 It is what made it possible to perform time saving transition suggestion production)).

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (7) above,
The production control means is
When the specific game state is controlled to any one specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game states, and the specific result (for example, C5 short time hit) is derived in a manner that satisfies a predetermined condition, the one specific game state is derived. When the state is controlled to a new specific game state (for example, C5 time-saving game state) based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of the state, in the symbol game from which the specific result is derived, the second specific result suggestive effect (For example, the second C time-saving transition suggestive effect) is not performed, and the second specific result suggestive effect can be performed before being controlled to the new specific game state.

In the gaming machine described in (8) above, even if a specific result (for example, a C5 short time hit) is derived in one specific game state, a new specific game state (for example, C5 time-saving game state), instead of controlling to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of one specific game state, a specific result (for example, C5 time-saving hit ) is derived, the second specific result suggestive effect (for example, the second C time-shortening transition suggestive effect (C5 time-shortening shift suggestive effect)) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the specific result is derived, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest that may be caused by not being immediately controlled to the specific game state. Then, after the specific result (for example, C5 time saving hit) is derived, by performing the second specific result suggesting effect before being controlled to a new specific game state (for example, C5 time saving game state), interest can be increased.

It should be noted that the ``spectrum that satisfies a predetermined condition'' is similar to the description in (7) above, for example, when a specific result (for example, a C5 short working hour win) is derived, control is performed to a specific game state based on this specific result. If it can be (for example, if the number of overlapping time reductions based on C5 time reduction per than the remaining time reduction number of times of one time reduction gaming state is larger) corresponds.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (8) above,
The production control means is
When the specific game state is controlled to any one specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game states, and the specific result (for example, C5 short time hit) is derived in a manner that satisfies a predetermined condition, the one specific game state is derived. When the state is controlled to a new specific game state (for example, C5 time-saving game state) based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of the state, in the symbol game from which the specific result is derived, the second specific result suggestive effect without performing the lottery result, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the lottery result is the predetermined result (for example, losing) or that there is a possibility that it is the predetermined result.

In the gaming machine described in (9) above, even if a specific result (for example, C5 short time hit) is derived in one specific game state, a new specific game state (for example, C5 time-saving game state), instead of controlling to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of one specific game state, a specific result (for example, C5 time-saving hit ) is derived, the second specific result suggesting effect (for example, the second C time-saving transition suggesting effect (C5 time-shortening transition suggesting effect)) is not performed, and the lottery result is a predetermined result (for example, losing). It is intended to perform an effect indicating that there is a possibility that it is a certain result or a predetermined result. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the specific result (for example, the C5 time saving win) is derived, and the specific game state (for example, the C5 time saving game state) is not controlled immediately. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest that may occur due to. Moreover, after the end of one specific game state, it is controlled to a new specific game state (for example, C5 time-saving game state) based on the derivation of the specific result, so that when it is controlled to this new specific game state, interest is enhanced. becomes possible.

It should be noted that the "mode that satisfies a predetermined condition" is similar to the description in (8) above, for example, when a specific result (for example, a C5 short working hour win) is derived, control is performed to a specific game state based on this specific result. If it can be (for example, if the number of overlapping time reductions based on C5 time reduction per than the remaining time reduction number of times of one time reduction gaming state is larger) corresponds.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (9) above,
The production control means is
It is controlled to one specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game states, and when the specific result (for example, C5 short time hit) is derived in the one specific game state, after the end of the one specific game state When it is controlled to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result, the symbol game before the symbol game controlled to the new specific game state In the previous symbol game), it is possible to perform an effect indicating that it is controlled to the specific game state or that there is a possibility of being controlled to the specific game state.

In the gaming machine described in (10) above, even if a specific result (for example, a C5 time saving hit) is derived in one specific game state, a new specific game state (for example, C5 time-saving game state), instead of controlling to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of one specific game state, control to this new specific game state In the symbol game until the game is played, an effect indicating that the game is controlled to the specific game state or that there is a possibility of being controlled to the specific game state is performed. By doing so, it is possible not only to suppress the decrease in interest that may occur when one specific game state ends, but also to increase interest by indicating that there is a possibility of being controlled to a new specific game state. becomes possible.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
Reserving means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of storing starting information related to special symbols;
Prefetching effect control means (for example, sub CPU 301) capable of performing a prefetching effect on the start information stored by the holding means;
with
The look-ahead effect control means is
If the specific start information from which the specific result (for example, C1 short time hit, C2 short time hit, C3 time short hit, C4 time short hit, C5 short time hit) may be derived is stored by the holding means, A specific look-ahead that suggests that the specific starting information is stored or may be stored by the holding means before the symbol game from which the specific result is derived is played. It is characterized by being able to perform production.

In the gaming machine described in (11) above, specific start information from which a specific result (for example, a C1 short win, a C2 short win, a C3 short win, a C4 short win, and a C5 short win) may be derived is reserved. It is possible to perform a specific look-ahead performance suggesting that specific starting information may be reserved when it is stored or reserved by means. By doing so, it is possible to give a feeling of anticipation for the derivation of the specified result before the symbol game from which the specified result is derived is performed, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The specific game state control means is
When the specific result (for example, C5 short time hit) is derived in one specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game states, a new result based on the derivation of the specific result after the end of the one specific game state A specific game state (for example, C5 time-saving game state) can be controlled,
The look-ahead effect control means is
When the specific starting information is stored by the holding means and a specific condition is satisfied, the specific look-ahead effect can be performed.

In the gaming machine described in (12) above, when a specific result (for example, a C5 short-time win) is derived in one specific game state, a new If it is possible to control to a specific game state (for example, C5 time reduction game state), specific results (for example, C5 time reduction hit) are not only withheld specific start information that may be derived, but also specific When the conditions are satisfied, a specific look-ahead effect is performed. By doing so, even though a specific look-ahead effect has been performed, after the end of one specific game state, it is possible to reduce the interest that may occur when not controlled to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result. can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the "specific conditions", for example, than the remaining period of time to be controlled to one specific game state (for example, the number of remaining time reduction of the time reduction game state during execution) than the specific result (for example, C5 time reduction hit) It corresponds to that the period (for example, the number of times of the C5 time saving game state) controlled to the specific game state (for example, the C5 time saving game state) that operates based on is longer. That is, if the period controlled to the specific game state that operates based on the specific result is shorter than the remaining period controlled to the specific game state, the specific result is derived after the end of the specific game state. Based on this, it is not controlled to a new specific game state. Therefore, after the end of one specific game state, when it is controlled to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result, it is possible to perform a specific prefetch effect, and a new specific game state can be performed based on the derivation of the specific result. When the game state is not controlled, the specific look-ahead effect is not performed or the rate of performing it is relatively low.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (11) or (12) above,
The look-ahead effect control means is
Even if the specific starting information is stored by the holding means, the specific look-ahead effect is not performed, and it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific starting information is stored by the holding means. It is characterized by being able to perform

In the gaming machine described in (13) above, when a specific result (for example, a C5 short-time win) is derived in one specific game state, a new specific game based on the derivation of the specific result is generated after the end of the one specific game state. If the state (for example, C5 time reduction game state) can be controlled, specific results (for example, C5 time reduction hit) may be derived even if specific start information is withheld, specific conditions are satisfied If not, the specific look-ahead effect is not performed, and the effect is performed in which it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific start information is withheld. By doing so, even though a specific look-ahead effect has been performed, after the end of one specific game state, it is possible to reduce the interest that may occur when not controlled to a new specific game state based on the derivation of the specific result. can be suppressed.

In addition, when the gaming machine described in (13) above is subordinated to (12) above,
The look-ahead effect control means is
Even if the specific starting information is stored by the holding means, if the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, the number of times of saving time in a new specific game state is less than the remaining number of times of saving time in one specific game state case), it is preferable that it is possible to perform an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific start information is stored by the holding means without performing the specific look-ahead effect.

In addition, the above-mentioned "effect that it is difficult or impossible to grasp that the specific start information is on hold" is, for example, a case where only the hold that results in a loss in the lottery result is held, such as a specific start This corresponds to an effect that is performed when information is not reserved and a look-ahead effect is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 14, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing interest.

[15-15. Appendix 15]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are variably displayed when a predetermined condition is established, and when the result of the variable display is "big win", the game machine is controlled to a big win game state.

As this type of game machine, the variable display result is "big hit", the jackpot type is "suddenly certain", based on the jackpot type, the probability variable state (high probability low base state) is controlled, and the jackpot type is "suddenly short time" jackpot type A game machine that is in a normal state (low probability low base state) based on is disclosed in JP 2013-094511 A (see paragraph [0284] in particular).

For example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-094511, new game features related to time saving have been disclosed in recent years. A game machine having such a new game feature related to time saving can increase interest, but in some cases, it may result in disadvantages for the player, and may rather reduce the interest. .

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and an object of the present invention is to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In this respect, the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 15 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A normal game state, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, a short-time game state), and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and can give a predetermined game value a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of controlling any game state including a game state (for example, a jackpot game state);
In the specific game state, a controllable first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) based on the establishment of the first condition (for example, the end of the jackpot game state) and the second condition are established. (For example, reached the ceiling) based on the controllable second specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state) and the third condition is satisfied (for example, time-saving hit is derived) based on At least two or more specific game states are included in the third specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) that can be controlled by the control.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, it is possible to control to the specific game state regardless of which condition is established, and the specific game state controlled according to the established condition is different. Therefore, it is possible to provide unprecedented new game properties, and to increase interest.

It should be noted that "two or more specific game states" refers to a game machine that has a first specific game state and a second specific game state without a third specific game state, and a game machine that does not have a second specific game state. A gaming machine equipped with a first specified game state and a third specified game state, a gaming machine equipped with a second specified game state and a third specified game state without installing the first specified game state, and a first It may be any of the gaming machines equipped with a specific game state, a second specific game state and a third specific game state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
further comprising symbol control means (e.g., main CPU) capable of performing a symbol game in which symbols are displayed variably when a predetermined condition is established, and a predetermined lottery result is derived;
The game state control means can be controlled to the special game state (for example, a big win game state) when a special result (for example, a big win) is derived as the predetermined lottery result,
The first condition is a condition that is established when the special game state ends,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times at least in the normal game state,
The third condition is a condition that is satisfied when a specific result (for example, a C time reduction win) is derived as the predetermined lottery result.

The gaming machine described in (2) above defines the first condition, the second condition and the third condition. It becomes clear that an unprecedented new game property can be provided, and it becomes possible to enhance interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The third condition includes a predetermined third condition (for example, that the C4 time reduction hit is derived) and a specific third condition different from the predetermined third condition (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time reduction hit is derived) and
The game state control means is
When the predetermined third condition is established, it can be controlled to a predetermined third specific game state (for example, C4 time-saving game state),
When the specific third condition is satisfied, it is characterized in that it can be controlled to a specific third specific game state (for example, one of the C1 to C3 time-saving game states).

The gaming machine described in (3) above clarifies that the game machine is controlled to a different specific game state depending on whether the predetermined third condition is satisfied or the specific third condition is satisfied. In this way, by providing a plurality of conditions for the third condition and making it possible to change the specific game state to be controlled according to the established third condition, it is possible to provide unprecedented new game characteristics. becomes possible, and it becomes possible to enhance interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above,
The predetermined third specific game state (for example, C4 time reduction game state) and the specific third specific game state (for example, one of C1 to C3 time reduction game state) have different degrees of advantage for the player ( For example, the number of times of time saving is different).

The gaming machine described in (4) above is a predetermined third specific game state (for example, C4 short gaming state) that can be controlled when a predetermined third condition (for example, C4 short working hour winning is derived) is established. ) And a specific third condition is established (for example, one of the C1 ~ C3 time reduction per is derived) controllable specific third specific game state (eg, any of the C1 ~ C3 time reduction gaming state ), the degree of advantage for the player is different, so it is possible to increase interest.

It should be noted that "difference in the degree of advantage for the player", for example, the period controlled to a predetermined third specific game state (for example, the number of time reduction of C4 time reduction game state) and the specific third specific game state If the period (for example, the number of time-saving games in any one of the time-saving game states C1 to C3) is different, or if the specific game state is a time-saving game state, a predetermined third specific game state ( For example, the time-saving performance in C4 time-saving gaming state) and the time-saving performance in a specific third specific gaming state (for example, any of C1 to C3 time-saving gaming state) correspond to different cases.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (3) or (4) above,
The predetermined third specific gaming state (eg, C4 time-shortened gaming state) and the specific third specific gaming state (eg, any of C1 to C3 time-shortened gaming state) are at least part of the respective end conditions are different.

The gaming machine described in (5) above includes at least a part of the end condition of a predetermined third specific game state (eg, C4 short-time gaming state), and a specific third specific game state (eg, C1 to C3 Since at least a part of the termination conditions for the time-saving game state) is different, it is possible to enhance interest.

It should be noted that "at least part of the end conditions of the predetermined third specific game state and at least part of the end conditions of the specific third specific game state are different" means, for example, the predetermined third Specific game state (for example, C4 time-saving game state) is one of the end conditions that the symbol game is performed 50 times, and a specific third specific game state (for example, C1 time-saving game state) is that the symbol game is This corresponds to the case where one of the termination conditions is to perform 100 times.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (5) above,
The game state control means, when the third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C time saving hit is derived) while being controlled to the first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state), the first It is characterized in that it is possible to perform processing (for example, processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the A time saving game state).

In the gaming machine described in (6) above, when the third condition is established in the first specific game state (for example, A reduced working hours gaming state), the first process (for example, A reduced working hours gaming state C winning was derived It clarifies that it is possible to perform the processing of the case).

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The game state control means, in performing the first process (for example, processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the A time saving game state), from the first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) to the It is characterized by being configured to be switchable to a third specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine described in (7) above, when the third condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state (eg, A reduced working hours gaming state) (eg, when C winning is derived), the first process ( For example, as the process when the C time saving hit is derived in the A time saving game state), it is possible to switch from the first specific game state to the third specific game state, that is, to end the first specific game state and the third specific game It is possible to control the state.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
The gaming state control means, in performing the first process (for example, processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the A time saving game state), when the predetermined third condition is established (for example, C4 time saving hit is derived), the first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state) may not be switched to the third specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state), while the specific third If the condition is established (for example, if one of the C1 ~ C3 time reduction per is derived) from the first specific game state (eg, A time reduction game state) to the third specific game state (eg, C1 ~ C3 time-saving game state) can be switched to.

In the gaming machine described in (8) above, when the third condition is satisfied while being controlled to the first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) (for example, C time saving winning is derived), 1st processing (for example, the processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the A time saving game state) is done. In this first process, when a predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C4 time saving hit is derived), the first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) to the third specific game state (for example , C time-saving gaming state) may not be switched, but when a specific third condition is established (for example, when one of the C1-C3 time-saving hits is derived), the first specific game state (for example , A time-saving game state) to the third specific game state (for example, C1 time-saving game state). In this way, even if the third condition is established in the first specific game state, there is a case where it is not possible to switch to the third specific game state. If one of the hits is derived), it is possible to switch, so it is possible to increase interest.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (8) above,
The game state control means, when the third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C time saving hit is derived) while being controlled to the second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state), the second It is characterized in that it is possible to perform processing (for example, processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the B time saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine described in (9) above, when the third condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state (eg, B time-saving gaming state) (eg, when C time-saving winning is derived), the second process ( For example, it is clarified that it is possible to perform the processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the B time saving gaming state.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (9) above,
The game state control means, in performing the second process (for example, processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the B time saving game state), from the second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) to the It is characterized by being configured to be switchable to a third specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine described in (10) above, when the third condition is established in the second specific gaming state (eg, B time-saving gaming state) (eg, when C time-saving winning is derived), the second process ( For example, as a process when the C time saving hit is derived in the B time saving game state), it is possible to switch from the second specific game state to the third specific game state, that is, to end the second specific game state and the third specific game It is possible to control the state.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (9) or (10) above,
The gaming state control means, in performing the second process (for example, processing when the C time saving hit is derived in the B time saving game state), when the predetermined third condition is established (for example, C4 time saving hit is derived), the second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) may not be switched to the third specific game state (for example, C time saving game state), while the specific third If the condition is established (for example, if one of the C1 ~ C3 time reduction per is derived) from the second specific game state (eg, B time reduction game state) to the third specific game state (eg, C1 ~ It is characterized in that it can be switched to any one of the C3 time-saving game states).

When the gaming machine described in (11) above is controlled to the second specific gaming state (eg, B time-saving gaming state), when the third condition is established (eg, C time-saving winning is derived), A second process (for example, a process when the C time saving hit is derived in the B time saving game state) is performed. In this second process, when a predetermined third condition is satisfied (for example, when the C4 time saving hit is derived), the second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) to the third specific game state (for example , C time-saving game state) may not be switched, but if a specific third condition is satisfied (for example, if one of the C1-C3 time-saving hits is derived), the second specific game state (for example , B time-saving game state) to the third specific game state (for example, any time-saving game state of C1 to C3 time-saving game state). In this way, even if the third condition is established in the second specific game state, it may not be switched to the third specific game state. If one of the hits is derived), it is possible to switch, so it is possible to increase interest.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (11) above,
The game state control means, when it is controlled to the predetermined third specific game state (for example, C4 time saving game state), when the specific third condition is satisfied (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time saving is derived), the third process (for example, the process when one of the C1 to C3 time savings per is derived in the C time saving game state) is characterized by being able to perform.

In the gaming machine described in (12) above, a specific third condition is established in a predetermined third specific game state (for example, C4 time reduction game state) (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time reduction winning is derived ) In the case, the third process (for example, the process when any one of the C1 ~ C3 time saving per is derived in the C time saving game state) is clarified that it is possible to do.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (12) above,
The game state control means, in performing the third process, from the predetermined third specific game state (for example, C4 time saving game state) to the specific third specific game state (for example, C1 to C3 time saving game state Either) is configured to be switchable.

In the gaming machine described in (13) above, a specific third condition is established in a predetermined third specific game state (for example, C4 time reduction game state) (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time reduction winning is derived ) case, as the third process (for example, the process when any of the C1 ~ C3 time saving hit in the C time saving game state is derived), switch from a predetermined third specific game state to a specific third specific game state Possible, that is, it is possible to end the predetermined third specific game state and control to a specific third specific game state.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (13) above,
Said game state control means, when it is controlled to said specific third specific game state (for example, any one of C1 to C3 time reduction game state), when said predetermined third condition is established (for example, C4 time reduction hit is derived), it is possible to perform the fourth process (for example, the process when the C4 time reduction hit is derived in any of the C1 to C3 time reduction gaming states).

In the gaming machine described in (14) above, a predetermined third condition is established in a specific third specific game state (for example, one of the C1 to C3 time reduction game states) (for example, C4 time reduction winning is derived ) case, it is possible to perform the fourth process (for example, the process when any of the C4 time saving per is derived in any of the C1 to C3 time saving game state).

(15) In the gaming machine described in (14) above,
The game state control means, in performing the fourth process (for example, the process when any of the C4 time saving hit is derived in any of the C1 to C3 time saving game state), the predetermined third condition is established (For example, C4 reduced working hours winning is derived) Even if it is possible to continue the specific third specific game state (for example, any one of C1 to C3 reduced working hours gaming state) Characterized by

In the gaming machine described in (15) above, a predetermined third condition is met (for example, C4 It is clarified that it is possible to continue a specific third specific game state (for example, one of the C1 to C3 time saving game states) even if the time saving hit is derived).

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 15, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[15-16. Appendix 16]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are variably displayed when a predetermined condition is established, and when the result of the variable display is "big win", the game machine is controlled to a big win game state.

As a game machine of this kind, the variable display result is "big hit", the jackpot type is "suddenly certain", based on the jackpot type, the probability variable state (high probability low base state) is controlled, and the jackpot type is "suddenly short time" jackpot type A game machine that is in a normal state (low probability low base state) based on is disclosed in JP 2013-094511 A (see paragraph [0284] in particular).

For example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-094511, new game features related to time saving have been disclosed in recent years. In such a gaming machine having new game features related to time saving, for example, by improving the variation pattern, the range of game features can be further widened, and there is a possibility that the interest can be enhanced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of increasing interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 16 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 163, the second special symbol display unit 164, the display device 7) for performing the variable display of the symbol,
A lottery result including a specific result (e.g., a short time C win) and a special result (e.g., a big win) having a higher game value given to a player than the specific result by performing a variable display of symbols on the display means. Symbol control means (for example, main CPU, sub CPU) capable of performing a symbol game capable of deriving one of
game state control means (for example, main CPU) capable of controlling the game state;
with
The game state control means includes a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) as a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a special game that can be controlled when the special result is derived in the symbol game. It is controllable to one of a plurality of game states including a state (for example, a jackpot game state),
In the specific game state, the first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state), the second specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state), and the third specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state) includes at least two or more game states,
The pattern control means is
When the specific game state includes the first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state), in the first specific game state, the first variation pattern (for example, from the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern table A selected variation pattern) can be selected,
When the second specific game state (eg, B time-saving game state) is included in the specific game state, the second variation pattern (eg, variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 or these A variation pattern selected from one of the variation pattern tables of the variation pattern table) can be selected,
When the specific game state includes the third specific game state (for example, C time-saving game state), in the third specific game state, the third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or these A variation pattern selected from any one of the variation pattern tables) can be selected.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state), a second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state), and a second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state). At least 2 or more game states are included among the 3 specific game states (for example, C time-saving game state). Then, when the specific game state includes the first specific game state (for example, A time-saving game state), the first variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A) can be selected. Also, if the second specific game state (eg, B time-saving gaming state) is included in the specific game state, the second variation pattern (eg, variation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 or out of these variation pattern tables A variation pattern selected from any variation pattern table) can be selected. Also, when the third specific game state (eg, C time-saving gaming state) is included in the fixed gaming state, the third variation pattern (eg, variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or out of these variation pattern tables A variation pattern selected from any variation pattern table) can be selected. By doing so, it is possible to perform the variation display of the symbols in different variation patterns according to the type of the specific game state, so that it is possible to provide unprecedented new game characteristics and enjoyment. can be increased.

It should be noted that "two or more specific game states" refers to a game machine that has a first specific game state and a second specific game state without a third specific game state, and a game machine that does not have a second specific game state. A gaming machine equipped with a first specified game state and a third specified game state, a gaming machine equipped with a second specified game state and a third specified game state without installing the first specified game state, and a first It may be any of the gaming machines equipped with a specific game state, a second specific game state and a third specific game state.

Also, the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern may be the same variation pattern, or may be different variation patterns. Similarly, the first variation pattern and the third variation pattern may be the same variation pattern or different variation patterns. Also, the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern may be the same variation pattern, or may be different variation patterns.

The "first variation pattern" described in (1) above corresponds to the "variation pattern table A" described in the specification, or a "variation pattern" selected from, for example, the variation pattern table A. . Similarly, the "second variation pattern" described in (1) above is any variation pattern table of "variation pattern table B-1" to "variation pattern table B-3" described in the specification, or , for example, corresponds to a "fluctuation pattern" selected from one of the fluctuation pattern tables B-1 to B-3. In addition, the "third variation pattern" described in (1) above is any variation pattern table of "variation pattern table C-1" to "variation pattern table C-4" described in the specification, or For example, it corresponds to a "fluctuation pattern" selected from one of the fluctuation pattern tables C-1 to C-4.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means is controllable to the first specific game state (e.g., A time-saving game state) after the end of the special game state (e.g., jackpot game state),
The first variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table A or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table A) is a variation pattern that can be selected in the first specific game state after the special game state is completed. characterized by being

In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the first variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table A or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table A) ends the special game state (eg, jackpot game state) It clarifies that it is a selectable variation pattern in the first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) after doing.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table B-2 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-2) is a predetermined game state (eg, probability variation flag off game state) of the symbol game When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, when reaching the ceiling), it is a variation pattern that can be selected in the subsequent game state (for example, B time saving game state).

In the gaming machine described in (3) above, when the number of symbol games in a predetermined game state (e.g., game state with variable probability flag off) reaches a predetermined number of times, in the subsequent game state (e.g., B time-saving game state) It clarifies that the selectable variation pattern is the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B-2 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table B-2).

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or a variation pattern selected from any of these variation pattern tables) is specified by the symbol control means When the result (for example, time saving hit) is derived, it is a variation pattern that can be selected in the subsequent game state (for example, C time saving game state).

The gaming machine described in (3) above is a variation pattern selected from a third variation pattern (eg, variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or any variation pattern table of these variation pattern tables ) is a variation pattern that can be selected in the subsequent game state (for example, C time saving game state) when a specific result (for example, time saving hit) is derived.

In addition, as described above, the third variation pattern (eg, variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4 or variation pattern selected from any of these variation pattern tables) is selected from the second It may be the same as the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern tables B-1 to B-3 or the fluctuation pattern selected from any of these fluctuation pattern tables), or may be different. good.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The specified result (for example, time saving hit) includes a first specified result (for example, C2 time saving hit) and a second specific result (for example, C1 time saving hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific result, contains at least
The pattern control means is
After the first identification result (for example, per C2 time saving) is derived, a predetermined third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern tables C-1, C-2, or any of these variation pattern tables It is possible to perform a variable display of the pattern with a variable pattern selected from a variable pattern table),
After the second specific result (for example, per C1 time saving) is derived, a specific third variation pattern table (for example, variation pattern tables C-3, C-4, or any of these variation pattern tables It is possible to perform the variable display of the pattern with a variable pattern selected from the variable pattern table.

The gaming machine described in (5) above displays the variable display of the symbols after the first specific result (for example, C2 time saving hit) is derived (for example, C2 time saving game state) and the second specific result (for example, It is clarified that after the C1 time saving hit) is derived (for example, C1 time saving game state), the variation display of the symbol can be performed with a different variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to vary the progress speed of the game according to the type of the specific game state.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The symbol control means, in the third specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state), after the symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 150 times), the third variation pattern (e.g., variation pattern table C-3) It is characterized in that it is possible to perform the variable display of the pattern with a variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern table C-4 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-4) different from C-3). and

In the gaming machine described in (6) above, the variation pattern is changed after the symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 150 times) in the third specific gaming state (eg, C time-saving gaming state). is. In this way, by changing the variation pattern in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to change the progress of the game and suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, the above-mentioned "after the symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times)" corresponds to, for example, the third specific game state. However, it is not limited to this, meaning "after the symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 150 times)", the game state after the third specific game state is completed (eg, normal game state) may be included.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The symbol control means, in the second specific game state (for example, B time-saving game state), after the symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times), the second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table B-1 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-1) with a variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-2 or the variation pattern table B-2) It is characterized in that it is possible to perform a variable display of the pattern.

In the gaming machine described in (7) above, the variation pattern is changed after the symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 150 times) in the second specific gaming state (eg, B time-saving gaming state). is. In this way, by changing the variation pattern in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to change the progress of the game and suppress the decrease in interest. It should be noted that "after the symbol game has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times)" corresponds to, for example, the second specific game state. However, it is not limited to this, and the meaning of "after the specified number of times (eg, 150 times) of the specified symbol game" is the game state after the second specific game state is completed (eg, normal game state). may be included.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The pattern control means is
After the specific result (e.g., C2 short-time hit, C3 short-time hit) is derived in the normal game state (e.g., C2 short-time game state, C3 short-time game state), the third variation pattern (e.g., variation pattern table C -1 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-1).
After the specific result (e.g., C2 time reduction hit, C3 time reduction hit) is derived in the first specific game state (e.g., A time reduction game state) or the second specific game state (e.g., B time reduction game state) ( For example, C2 time-saving gaming state, C3 time-saving gaming state), the third variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table C-2 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table C-2). It is characterized by being able to

The gaming machine described in (8) above is, after the specific result (for example, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving hit) is derived in the normal game state, the first specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) or the first It is clarified that the variation pattern can be different after the specific result (for example, C2 time saving hit, C3 time saving hit) is derived in 2 specific game state (for example, B time saving game state). By doing so, it is possible to vary the progress speed of the game according to the type of the specific game state.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The pattern control means is
After the condition to be controlled to the second specific game state (eg, B time-saving gaming state) is established in the normal game state (eg, reaches the ceiling), the second variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table B- 1 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-1),
Said 1st specific game state (for example, A time saving game state) or said 3rd specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) said second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) is controlled to After establishment (for example, reaching the ceiling), the pattern is a variation pattern different from the second variation pattern (eg, a variation pattern table B-3 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-3). It is characterized in that it is possible to perform a variable display of

The gaming machine described in (9) above is the second specific gaming state (eg, B time-saving gaming state) after the condition to be controlled is established (eg, reaching the ceiling), and after the first specific gaming state (eg, A time-saving gaming state) or a third specific gaming state (e.g., C time-saving gaming state) in the second specific gaming state (e.g., B time-saving gaming state) conditions are established (e.g., reached the ceiling) and after This clarifies that the fluctuation patterns can be different. By doing so, it is possible to vary the progress speed of the game according to the game state when the condition for controlling to the second specific game state is established.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The symbol control means is
In the normal game state, the condition controlled to the second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) and the condition to be controlled to the third specific game state (for example, C time saving game state) are the same symbols After being established in the game, it is possible to perform the variable display of the symbols in the second variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table B-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-1). It is characterized by

The gaming machine described in (10) above is a condition that is controlled to a second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) and a third specific game state (for example, C time saving game) in the same symbol game in the normal game state state), after the condition to be controlled by the second variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table B-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-1), the variation display of the symbol It clarifies that it is possible to do so. It should be noted that "after the condition to be controlled to the second specific game state in the normal game state and the condition to be controlled to the third specific game state are established in the same symbol game" is the second variation pattern ( For example, since it is a game state in which the variation display of the pattern is performed in the variation pattern table B-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B-1, if interpreted normally, the second specific game state (eg , B time-saving game state), but is not limited to this.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
The pattern control means is
Conditions controlled to the second specific game state (e.g., B time-saving game state) in the normal game state (e.g., reaching the ceiling) and the third specific game state (e.g., C time-saving game state) conditions to be controlled (For example, C3 short time hit) is established in the same symbol game, the third variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table C-1 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table C-1) It is possible to variably display the pattern with.

The gaming machine described in (11) above is a condition (for example, reaching the ceiling) and a third specific game state to be controlled to the second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) in the same symbol game in the normal game state (For example, C time-saving gaming state) After the condition (for example, C3 time-saving hit) is established, the third variation pattern (for example, from the variation pattern table C-1 or the variation pattern table C-1 This clarifies that it is possible to perform variable display of symbols in the selected variable pattern). It should be noted that "after the condition to be controlled to the second specific game state in the normal game state and the condition to be controlled to the third specific game state are established in the same symbol game" is the third variation pattern ( For example, since it is a game state in which the variation display of the symbol is performed in the variation pattern table C-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-1, if interpreted normally, the third specific game state (eg , C3 time-saving gaming state), but is not limited to this.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
The special results include a first special result (for example, the selected symbol command "z4" jackpot) and a second special result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special result (for example, the selected symbol command "z5" jackpot) and
The pattern control means is
When the special game state (for example, jackpot game state) is controlled based on the derivation of the first special result (for example, the selected symbol command "z4" jackpot), the special game state is terminated. In the later game state (for example, the A time-saving game state), the first variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A) can be used to perform the variation display of the symbol. While it is possible
When the special game state (for example, jackpot game state) is controlled based on the derivation of the second special result (for example, the selected symbol command "z5" jackpot), the special game state is terminated. In the later game state (for example, high-probability time-saving game state), the symbol is a special variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern table D or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D) different from the first variation pattern. It is possible to perform a variable display of
The special variation pattern includes a first special variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D-1 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table D-1) and a second special variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D-2 or a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2) is included at least.

In the gaming machine described in (12) above, the first special result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z4") is derived, and the second special result (for example, the selected symbol command "z5") It is clarified that the variation pattern in the game state (for example, the high-probability short-time game state) after the special game state is completed can be different from the case where the jackpot) is derived. Furthermore, when the second special result (for example, the jackpot of the selected symbol command "z5") is derived, when it is controlled to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state), after this special game state ends In the variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table D), the first special variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D-1 or variation pattern table D-1) A variation pattern selected from) and a second special variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2 or the variation pattern table D-2) are included at least. It is.

(13) In the gaming machine described in (12) above,
The design includes a first design (e.g., first special design) and a second design (e.g., second special design) different from the first design,
The pattern control means is
first symbol control means (for example, a main CPU) capable of performing a first symbol game in which the variable display of the first symbol is performed and a lottery result for the first symbol is derived;
second symbol control means (for example, main CPU) capable of performing a second symbol game in which the second symbol is variably displayed and a lottery result for the second symbol is derived;
The first special variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table D-1 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table D-1) has an expected value of the number of variation display times of the first symbol per unit time, A variation pattern higher than the expected value of the number of times of variation display of the second symbol per unit time (for example, a variation pattern in which the average of the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the average of the variation time of the second special symbol) can be,
The second special variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern table D-2 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2) has an expected value of the number of times the variation display of the first symbol per unit time is A variation pattern lower than the expected value of the number of times of variation display of the second symbol per unit time (for example, a variation pattern in which the average of the variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the average of the variation time of the second special symbol) characterized by being

In the gaming machine described in (13) above, the first variation pattern (eg, the variation pattern D-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-1) is, for example, the variation time of the first special symbol The average of is a variation pattern shorter than the average of the variation time of the second special symbol, and the second special variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D-2 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table D-2) clarifies, for example, that the average of the variation time of the first special symbol is a variation pattern longer than the average of the variation time of the second special symbol.

(14) In the gaming machine described in (13) or (12) above,
The first special variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D-1 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table D-1) is the special result when the first variation pattern is selected (eg , jackpot) is derived (that is, when the jackpot is derived as a result of the first special symbol in the normal game state, it is selectable after the jackpot game state ends).
The second special variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-2 or the variation pattern table D-2) is the special result when the first special variation pattern is selected ( For example, a variation pattern that can be selected when a jackpot is derived (that is, when a jackpot is derived as a result of the second special symbol in a time-saving gaming state, it can be selected after the jackpot gaming state ends). and

According to the gaming machine described in (14) above, the first special variation pattern (eg, the variation pattern table D-1 or the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table D-1) is the first variation pattern. It is a variation pattern that can be selected in a game state after a special result (for example, big win) is derived when being selected and the special game state (for example, big win game state) based on this special result is completed. That is, a special result (for example, big win) is derived in the normal game state, and it is a variation pattern that can be selected in the game state after the special game state (for example, big win game state) based on this special result. In addition, the second special variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D-2 or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table D-2) is the first special variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table D-1 or variation A special result (for example, a big win) is derived when a variation pattern selected from the pattern table D-1) is selected, and a special game state (for example, a big win game state) based on this special result is completed. It is a variation pattern that can be selected in the later game state. That is, a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived in a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state), and a variation that can be selected in the game state after the special game state (for example, a big hit game state) based on this special result It's a pattern.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (14) above,
The pattern control means is
In the symbol game when satisfying the transition condition (for example, reaching the ceiling) to the second specific game state (for example, B time saving game state) in the third specific game state (for example, C time saving game state), the predetermined predetermined game state Third variation pattern (eg, variation pattern table C-1, C-2, or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table C-1 or C-2) and the specific third variation pattern (eg, Variation pattern table C-3, C-4, or variation pattern selected from variation pattern table C-3 or C-4) including a plurality of the third variation patterns (for example, variation pattern table C-1 ~ C-4, or a variation pattern selected from any of the variation pattern tables C-1 to C-4), a specific third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C-4 or A variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C-4) can be selected.

The gaming machine described in (15) above satisfies the conditions for transition to the second specific gaming state (eg, B reduced gaming state) in the third specified gaming state (eg, C reduced gaming state) (eg, reaching the ceiling). case), the symbol game (for example, the last symbol game before reaching the ceiling) when shifting to the second specific game state is set to a specific third variation pattern (for example, variation pattern table C-4 or variation pattern It clarifies that the variation pattern selected from Table C-4) can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 16, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing interest.

[15-17. Appendix 17]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines have been known (for example, see JP-A-2017-164365).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2017-164365 discloses a gaming machine in which a door frame top unit is attached to the front upper portion of a door frame base unit above the door frame left side unit and the door frame right side unit.

It is desired to further improve the functionality of such gaming machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the problems described above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

In this regard, the game machine of Supplementary Note 17 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
a base member (for example, frame D4600);
a first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) and a second member (e.g., upper unit D4700) detachable from the base member;
with
The first member is movable from a first position (e.g., mounting position) attached to the base member to a second position (e.g., removal position) separated from the base member,
When the second member is attached while the first member is attached to the base member at the first position, movement of the first member can be restricted.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the first member (for example, the side lens unit D4800) is positioned at the first position (for example, the mounting position) to a second position (for example, removal position) is not restricted, and movement from the first position to the second position can be restricted by attaching the second member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and provide a highly functional gaming machine. Furthermore, it is more preferable to lock the first member after the movement of the first member is restricted.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a first decorative portion (e.g., first role piece S1), and the second member (e.g., upper unit D4700) has a second decorative portion (e.g., second accessory piece S2), and when the first member and the second member are arranged adjacent to each other, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion form one decorative portion (for example, It is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to form a complete body S) of the accessory.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the first decorative portion (for example, the first role piece S1) and the second decorative portion (for example, the second role piece S1), which do not form one decorative portion by themselves, The pieces S2) can be easily assembled to form one accessory. In particular, only by mounting the second member (eg, upper unit D4700) while the first member (eg, side lens unit D4800) is installed at the first position (eg, mounting position), the first decoration can be obtained. It is possible to form one role object without aligning the part (for example, the first role object piece S1) and the second decoration part (for example, the second role object piece S2). It becomes possible to provide a high-quality gaming machine.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a third decorative portion (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) that can be accommodated inside the first member,
Even if the first member is attached to the base member (for example, the frame D4600), the third decorative portion is configured to be movable.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, even if the first member (eg, the side lens unit D4800) is attached to the base member (eg, the frame body D4600), the second member (eg, the upper unit D4700) ) is attached to the first member or the base member, the third decorative portion can be moved in the first position (for example, the mounting position). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily replace the third decorative portion, and it is possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above,
When the second member (eg, upper unit D4700) is attached to the base member (eg, frame body D4600), movement of the third decorative portion (eg, outer decorative sheet D4850) can be restricted. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, it is possible to regulate the movement of the third decorative portion (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850) with a simple configuration by reducing the number of parts, and the functionality is high. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (3) or (4) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a first light transmitting portion (e.g., outer light guide plate D4856), through which the third decorative portion (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) is configured to be visible from the outside.

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, the third decorative portion (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850) is visible from the outside through the first light transmitting portion (for example, the outer light guide plate D4856). It is possible to change the appearance only by replacing the third decorative portion, and it is possible to provide a game machine with high functionality.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (5) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a fourth decorative portion (e.g., inner decorative sheet D4870) that can be accommodated inside the first member,
Even if the first member is attached to the base member (for example, the frame D4600), the fourth decorative portion is configured to be movable.

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, in addition to the third decorative portion (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850), the fourth decorative portion (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) also includes the second member (for example, As long as the upper unit D4700) is not attached to the first member or the base member, the third decorative portion can be moved in the first position (for example, the mounting position). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily replace the fourth decorative portion in addition to the third decorative portion, and it is possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
When the second member (eg, upper unit D4700) is attached to the base member (eg, frame body D4600), movement of the fourth decorative portion (eg, outer decorative sheet D4850) can be restricted. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine described in (7) above, the number of parts is reduced and the configuration is simple, and not only the third decorative portion (for example, the outer decorative sheet D4850) but also the fourth decorative portion (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) ) can also be restricted from moving, making it possible to provide a gaming machine with high functionality.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has a second light transmitting portion (e.g., inner light guide plate D4876), through which the fourth decorative portion (e.g., inner decorative sheet D4870) is configured to be visible from the outside.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, the fourth decorative portion (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) is visible from the outside through the second light transmitting portion (for example, the inner light guide plate D4876). It is possible to change the appearance simply by replacing the fourth decorative portion. Furthermore, a third decorative portion (for example, an outer decorative sheet D4850) visible from the outside through a first light-transmitting portion (for example, an outer light guide plate D4856) and a second light-transmitting portion (for example, an inner light guide plate D4876) are provided. Since both the fourth decorative portion (for example, the inner decorative sheet D4870) that can be visually recognized from the outside through the

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above,
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) is provided between the third decorative portion (e.g., outer decorative sheet D4850) and the fourth decorative portion (e.g., inner decorative sheet D4870). For example, it has a partition plate D4863), and the fourth decorative portion (e.g., the outer decorative sheet) is invisible or difficult to see from the first side (e.g., inner side), and the second side (e.g., outer side ), the third decorative portion (for example, the inner decorative sheet) cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized.

According to the gaming machine described in (9) above, the visibility is made different when viewed from the first side and when viewed from the second side. Since an independent image can be made to appear in each image, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high functionality.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above,
The first light-transmitting part and the second light-transmitting part are respectively a first light guide plate (e.g., outer light guide plate D4856) and a second light guide plate (e.g., inner light guide plate D4876),
The first member (e.g., side lens unit D4800) has light emitting units (e.g., LED rows D4881, D4883) capable of emitting light at the ends of the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate,
A first image appearing on the first light guide plate and a second image appearing on the second light guide plate can be visually recognized.

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, it is possible to visually recognize a composite image in which the first image and the second image are combined, and it is possible to provide a highly functional gaming machine.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
Lock means (for example, lock member D4760) operable between a locked state in which the second member (for example, upper unit D4700) is attached to the base member and an unlocked state in which the second member can be separated from the base member. , D4760L) and
a third member (for example, a glass unit) covering the locking means;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine described in (11) above, since the locking means (for example, the locking members D4760 and D4760L) are covered with the third member (for example, the glass unit), the locking means can be easily touched from the outside to the operating portion. I can't. Therefore, it is possible to easily attach and detach the second member (for example, the upper unit D4700), and at the same time, it is possible to enhance security.

According to the game machine of Supplementary Note 17, it is possible to further improve the functionality.

[15-18. Appendix 18]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines are well known.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-107322 discloses that the lens member is positioned outside at least one end of the substrate from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate, and on the back side of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate. , is formed of a reflecting member capable of reflecting light, is outside at least one end of the substrate, and extends beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate. , a game machine in which a base member is provided at a position capable of reflecting light emitted from an end of a lens member.

According to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-107322, it is possible to suppress unevenness in illumination through the lens member and enhance interest.

However, the game machine has a limited space for arranging light emitting means and the like. Even under such circumstances, it is desired to provide a game machine capable of performing a light emitting effect for further increasing interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of increasing interest.

In this regard, the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 18 has the following features.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine equipped with a predetermined decoration device (for example, a first performance accessory 59E) capable of executing an effect that can be visually recognized by the player,
The predetermined decoration device is
A substrate (e.g., LED substrate 5922E) on which light emitting means (e.g., front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E, back side LED 5929E) is arranged;
The light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, the front side first LED 5927E, the front side second LED 5928E, the back side LED 5929E) can be entered, and the entered light is advanced in a predetermined direction (for example, forward), so that the player can see it. A lens part (for example, the first lens 5925E, the second lens a flat plate portion 59211E of 5921E, a standing portion 59212E of the second lens 5921E, and a third lens 5926E);
characterized by comprising

According to the game machine described in (1) above, the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, the front side first LED 5927E, the front side second LED 5928E, the rear side LED 5929E) is converted into the lens section (for example, the first lens 5925E, the second lens 5921E). The flat plate portion 59211E, the standing portion 59212E of the second lens 5921E, and the third lens 5926E) can be visually recognized by the player (for example, the first light emitting portion 59251E, the second light emitting portion 59252E, the front of the standing portion 59212E Since the side end surface 59216E) can be made to emit light, it is possible to enhance interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The light emitting means has a first light emitting means (e.g., front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E) and a second light emitting means (e.g., back side LED 5929E) different from the first light emitting means,
The substrate (e.g., LED substrate 5922E) has a first light emitting means (e.g., front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E) arranged on a first surface (e.g., front side surface), and a second surface (e.g., The second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) is arranged on the back side surface),
The lens part is
The light emitted from the first light emitting means (for example, the first LED 5927E on the front side, the second LED 5928E on the front side) is caused to advance in the predetermined direction (for example, forward), and the first effect section (for example, the first a first lens unit (for example, a first lens 5925E and a third lens 5926E) capable of causing the light emitting unit 59251E and the second light emitting unit 59252E) to emit light;
Said second light emitting means (for example, back side LED 5929E) arranged on the second surface (for example, back side surface) which is a different surface from the first light emitting means (for example, front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E) The light emitted from advances in a direction (e.g., forward) that is substantially the same as the predetermined direction (e.g., forward), and is visible to the player (e.g., the front side of the standing portion 59212E) It is preferable to have a second lens portion (for example, a standing portion 59212E) capable of causing the end face 59216E of the lens to emit light.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means (for example, , back side LED 5929E) are arranged, the light emitted from the second light emitting means (for example, back side LED 5929E) is emitted in the same direction as the first light emitting means (for example, front side first LED 5927E, front side second LED 5928E) Since it is possible to make the second effect part (for example, the end surface 59216E on the front side of the standing part 59212E) emit light by moving it in a predetermined direction (for example, forward), even if the space in which the light emitting means can be arranged is limited. It is possible to perform a performance that enhances interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The lens part is
A third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E) that causes the light emitted from the second light emitting means (e.g., back side LED 5929E) to travel in a specific direction (e.g., sideways) different from the predetermined direction (e.g., forward) ), and
The second lens portion (for example, standing portion 59212E)
It is preferable that the third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E) allows the light traveling in the specific direction (e.g., sideways) to travel in the predetermined direction (e.g., forward). .

According to the game machine described in (3) above, the traveling direction of light traveling in a specific direction (eg, sideways) is changed to a predetermined direction (eg, forward) by the third lens portion (eg, flat plate portion 59211E). It is possible to change and proceed, and it is possible to perform a production that enhances interest even though the space in which the light emitting means can be arranged is limited.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The second lens portion (e.g., standing portion 59212E) and the third lens portion (e.g., flat portion 59211E) are connected so as to be substantially perpendicular to each other, and the second lens portion (e.g., standing portion 59212E) and the third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E) are connected to each other (e.g., the corner portion of the second lens 5921E), the light traveling in the specific direction (e.g., sideways) is directed to the It is preferable to have an inclined portion (eg, inclined portion 59213E) that can be advanced in a predetermined direction (eg, forward).

According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, light traveling in a specific direction (eg, sideways) is reflected by the inclined portion (eg, inclined portion 59213E) and directed in a predetermined direction (eg, forward). Therefore, the second light emitting means (for example, the rear LED 5929E) is mounted on the second surface (for example, the surface on the back side) different from the predetermined direction (for example, the front) of the substrate (for example, the LED substrate 5922E). can be arranged, and it is possible to perform an effect that enhances interest even though the space in which the light emitting means can be arranged is limited.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
At least the substrate (eg, LED substrate 5922E) is arranged between the first lens portion (eg, first lens 5925E) and the third lens portion (eg, flat plate portion 59211E),
The second lens portion (for example, standing portion 59212E)
The lens is cut along the circumferential direction, and the substrate (eg, LED substrate 5922E) is provided between the first lens portion (eg, first lens 5925E) and the third lens portion (eg, flat plate portion 59211E). is preferably arranged radially outward of the

According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, since the second lens portion (for example, the standing portion 59212E) is cut along the circumferential direction, light can be focused on the portion cut by the lens. can. In addition, due to the lens cut, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the radial inner side of the second lens portion (for example, the standing portion 59212E) from the outside (for example, the player), and the second lens portion (for example, the standing portion 59212E) becomes difficult to see. ) that is arranged radially inside (for example, the LED substrate 5922E), etc., can be prevented from unnecessarily reducing interest.

(6) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first rendering section (eg, first light emitting section 59251E, second light emitting section 59252E) emitted by the first lens section (eg, first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) can emit surface light. can be,
The second effect portion (for example, the end surface of the front side of the standing portion 59212E) emitted by the second lens portion (for example, the standing portion 59212E) is the first effect portion (for example, the first light emitting portion 59251E). , second light-emitting portion 59252E).

According to the gaming machine described in (6) above, the second effect portion (for example, the end face on the front side of the standing portion 59212E) is the first effect portion (for example, the first light emitting portion 59251E and the second light emitting portion 59252E). Since the edge light is emitted at the outer peripheral portion, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that emphasizes the outline of the first effect part (for example, the first light emission part 59251E and the second light emission part 59252E), and it is possible to enhance the interest. .

(7) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A predetermined hole (for example, hole 59215E) is formed in the third lens portion (for example, flat plate portion 59211E), and a connector (for example, connector 5930E) connected to the substrate (for example, LED substrate 5922E) is connected to the predetermined hole. It is preferably located in a hole (eg hole 59215E).

According to the gaming machine described in (7) above, since the thickness of the connector (eg, connector 5930E) can be absorbed by the thickness of the third lens portion (eg, flat plate portion 59211E), the connector (eg, connector 5930E) ), it is possible to make it more compact.

(8) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The first lens portion (eg, first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) and the substrate (eg, LED substrate 5922E) are arranged between the first lens portion (eg, first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) and the It is arranged with a predetermined space (for example, a predetermined space) between it and the substrate (for example, the LED substrate 5922E),
A connector (for example, connector 5930E) connected to the substrate (for example, LED substrate 5922E) is preferably arranged in the predetermined space.

According to the gaming machine described in (8) above, a predetermined space (for example, a predetermined space), the front surface side of the first lens unit (eg, the first lens 5925E and the third lens 5926E) can emit surface light. Furthermore, the connector (eg, connector 5930E) connected to the substrate (eg, LED substrate 5922E) is connected to the first lens portion (eg, first lens 5925E, third lens 5926E) and the substrate (eg, LED substrate 5922E). By arranging it in a predetermined space (for example, a predetermined space) between can be made compact.

(9) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
It is preferable that the second lens portion (eg, standing portion 59212E) is configured to cover the radially outer end portion of the first lens portion (eg, first lens 5925E).

According to the game machine described in (9) above, the second lens portion (for example, the standing portion 59212E) is configured to cover the radial outer end portion of the first lens portion (for example, the first lens 5925E). Therefore, the light emitted from the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) arranged on the second surface (for example, the surface on the back surface side) of the substrate (for example, the LED substrate 5922E) is received by the first lens. It can be guided to the front surface of the part (for example, the first lens 5925E), and it is possible to perform an effect that enhances interest even if the space in which the light emitting means can be arranged is limited.

(10) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A specific hole (e.g., hole 59214E) is formed in a predetermined portion radially inside the third lens portion (e.g., flat plate portion 59211E), and the second light emitting means (e.g., back side LED 5929E) (eg, hole 59214E).

According to the gaming machine described in (10) above, the second light emitting means (for example, the back side Since the LED 5929E) is arranged, it is possible to emit light over a wide range from the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) toward the outer peripheral portion of the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E). For example, when the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) is arranged along the outer peripheral portion of the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E), the second
The number of light emitting means (for example, back side LED 5929E) is relatively large. In this regard, since the second light emitting means is arranged radially inward of the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E), the second light emission is performed along the outer peripheral portion of the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E). It is possible to reduce the number of the second light emitting means (eg, back side LEDs 5929E) compared to the case where the means (eg, back side LEDs 5929E) are arranged.

(11) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E) is configured such that when the second light emitting means (for example, the rear LED 5929E) is placed in the specific hole (for example, the hole 59214E), the second light emitting means (for example, It is preferable that the back side LED 5929E) has a thickness that does not protrude.

According to the gaming machine described in (11) above, the thickness of the second light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E) can be absorbed by the thickness of the third lens portion (for example, the flat plate portion 59211E). It is not necessary to provide an extra thickness corresponding to the thickness of the light emitting means (for example, the back side LED 5929E), and it is possible to make the device compact.

(12) In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
Behind the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E), a specific decoration device different from the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) capable of executing an effect that can be visually recognized by the player A decoration device (for example, a second production accessory 60E) is further provided,
When a predetermined condition is established, the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) move from the first position (for example, the standby position). configured to operate in a second position (e.g., a presentation position);
At the second position (for example, production position),
The predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the second production accessory 60E) are arranged with a predetermined space,
Both the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the second production accessory 60E) are capable of performing light emitting effects,
For part or all of the portion where the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the second production accessory 60E) overlap in a front view, the predetermined decoration device It is preferable that the specific decoration device (for example, the second production accessory 60E) can be caused to emit light without causing the (for example, the first production accessory 59E) to emit light.

According to the gaming machine described in (12) above, at the second position (for example, the production position), a predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) and a specific decoration device (for example, the second production Since the accessory 60E) is arranged with a predetermined space, it is possible to give an impact to the player. In addition, although both the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) and the specific decoration device (for example, the second production accessory 60E) can perform the light emission effect, they overlap when viewed from the front. In some or all of the parts, a specific decoration device (eg, second production accessory 60E) is made to emit light without emitting light from a predetermined decoration device (eg, first production accessory 59E). Therefore, the visibility of the specific decorative device (for example, the second production accessory 60E) that emits light on the far side of the predetermined decoration device (for example, the first production accessory 59E) can be highlighted, and the interest can be enhanced. becomes possible.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 18, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing interest.

201, 1201, 2201 Main CPU
301, 1301, 2301 Sub CPU
120, 120A, 120B, 1120, 2120, 5120 First starting port 140A, 140B, 1140, 2140 Second starting port 2126, 5125A, 5125B Passage gate D4600 Frame body D4800 Side lens unit D4700 Upper unit 59E First production accessory 60E Second production accessory 592E Front lens part 5927E Front side LED
5928E back side LED
5922E LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a predetermined decoration device capable of executing an effect visible to a player,
The predetermined decoration device is
a substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged;
a lens unit capable of receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means and allowing the received light to travel in a predetermined direction to cause the effect portion visible to the player to emit light;
with
The light emitting means has a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means,
The substrate has a first light emitting means arranged on a first surface and a second light emitting means arranged on a second surface,
The lens part is
a first lens section capable of causing the light emitted from the first light emitting means to travel in the predetermined direction to cause a first effect section visible to the player to emit light;
The light emitted from the second light emitting means arranged on the second surface different from the first light emitting means is caused to travel in substantially the same direction as the predetermined direction so that the player can visually recognize the light. a second lens unit capable of causing the second effect unit to emit light;
a third lens unit that causes the light emitted from the second light emitting unit to travel in a specific direction different from the predetermined direction;
The second lens portion is
It is possible to cause the light that has traveled in the specific direction by the third lens unit to travel in the predetermined direction,
The second lens portion and the third lens portion are connected so as to be substantially perpendicular to each other, and a connecting portion where the second lens portion and the third lens portion are connected advances in the specific direction. having an inclined portion capable of propagating light in the predetermined direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images